JP7421776B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (also commonly referred to as a "pachinko machine").

A game machine such as a pachinko machine is equipped with a game board on which a game is played by inserting game media into the machine by a player's operation. The game board is attached via a main body frame to an outer frame that is attached to island equipment for installing game machines in a game hall. It is known that the main body frame is provided with a discharge passage for receiving game media discharged from the game board and discharging them to the island equipment outside the game machine (for example, Patent Document 1). In the discharge passage of the main body frame, the received game media is meandered to attenuate the distribution speed and discharged.

However, conventional gaming machines have insufficient countermeasures against fraud.

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2011-212121

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve anti-fraud measures compared to conventional machines .

The present invention
In a game machine equipped with a game board having a downstream area formed on the front surface through which game balls can flow down,
a front arrangement body provided on the front side of the game board;
a seal body that can be attached to the front arrangement body ,
The front arrangement body is
a flat plate portion to which the seal body is attached to the surface side;
a through hole formed to penetrate from the front side to the back side of the flat plate part;
a standing wall portion protruding to the rear of the flat plate portion;
When the front arrangement body is provided on the game board, the opening portion of the through hole on the surface side of the flat plate portion is closed by the sealing body adhered to the flat plate portion, and the opening portion of the through hole is closed. A predetermined space is formed by the standing wall on the back side of the flat plate part , and even if a foreign object is inserted into the predetermined space from the through hole, the standing wall forming the predetermined space prevents the foreign object from entering the through hole. It is difficult for the inserted foreign object to enter the downstream area ,
Furthermore, the gaming machine has a specific member that is separate from the front-disposed body,
The specific member is located at the rear of the flat plate portion so as to overlap with the opening portion of the through hole on the back side of the flat plate portion,
Furthermore, the predetermined space formed in the front arrangement body is provided outside the downstream area of the game board,
Furthermore, a step portion larger than the thickness of the seal body is formed on the outside of the flat plate portion to which the seal body is attached.
It is characterized by
Note that the following invention is disclosed as a reference as another invention different from the present invention.
Means 1: In a gaming machine,
"A game board on which games are played using game media,
A passage member provided below the game board and forming a discharge passage through which game media discharged from the game board is guided and discharged;
a tool insertion port provided in the passage member for inserting a tool for eliminating clogging of game media in the discharge passage;
a lid member that opens and closes the tool insertion opening;
The passage member is provided with a plurality of crime prevention ribs extending downward from the ceiling portion of the discharge passage and preventing the tip of an unauthorized tool from moving along the ceiling. shall be.

Here, "games" using game media are defined as "by receiving game media into an acceptance slot (for example, general winning slot, starting slot, big winning slot, accessory winning slot, V winning slot, etc.)" ``Games that give benefits'', ``Lottery by accepting game media into a specific receiving port (for example, normal prize opening, starting opening (first starting opening), variable starting opening (second starting opening), etc.) ``A game in which an advantageous gaming state occurs in which the player is advantageous due to the lottery result (e.g., normal lottery result, special lottery result)'', ``a game that is accepted into a specific acceptance opening (for example, a prize-winning opening, etc.) A game in which an advantageous gaming state in which the player gains an advantage occurs when the gaming medium is accepted into the V-winning slot.

Moreover, the "passage member" may be constructed by combining a plurality of members, or may be constructed from a single member. Further, the "exhaust passage" may be composed of a single discharge route, or may be composed of a plurality of independent discharge routes. Furthermore, the "discharge path" may be one that guides and discharges only the game media released from the game board, or it may be one that guides and discharges only the game media released from the game board, or it may be one that guides and discharges only the game media released from the game board, or it may be one that guides and discharges game media that is used for playing games in addition to the game media that is released from the game board. The game medium may be guided and discharged in order to remove the game medium from a storage portion (for example, a ball tank in the main body frame) in which the game medium is stored.

Furthermore, the "passage member" may be provided on the main body frame to which the game board is attached, or may be provided on the outer frame for attaching the main body frame to which the game board is attached to the island equipment of the game hall. good.

In addition, "tool insertion slots" are "those provided on the shelf (floor) where game media rolls in the discharge passage," "those provided on the ceiling of the discharge passage," and "those provided on the ceiling of the discharge passage." "Those installed on the side walls of passages." Further, examples of the "tool insertion opening" include "hole-shaped", "slit-shaped", "notch-shaped", and the like. Further, the "tool insertion port" may have only the function of inserting a tool, or may have the function of discharging dust in the discharge passage in addition to the function of inserting a tool.

Furthermore, examples of the "lid member" include "one that is fitted into the tool insertion opening to open and close it", and "one that is attached to the vicinity of the tool insertion opening of the passage member to open and close it".

By the way, when a tool insertion port is provided in the passage member that forms the discharge passage, the tool can be inserted into the discharge passage through the tool insertion opening. There is a risk that a fraudulent act may be committed against the game board by allowing the player to enter the discharge passage through the insertion port and then extending the tip from the entrance side of the discharge passage to the game board.

According to the configuration of means 1, the game machine is provided with a game board on which games are played using game media, and a discharge passage through which the game media discharged from the game board is guided and discharged, and is provided below the game board. a passage member provided in the passage member; a tool insertion opening provided in the passage member for inserting a tool for eliminating clogging of game media in the discharge passage; and a lid member for opening and closing the tool insertion opening. and a plurality of crime prevention ribs extending downward from the ceiling portion of the discharge passage in the passage member and preventing the tip of the unauthorized tool from moving along the ceiling ([Invention 119 to 128, etc.).

As a result, if game media becomes clogged in the discharge path of the passage member, open the lid member that closes the tool insertion slot, insert a rod-shaped tool such as a flathead screwdriver from the tool insertion slot, and remove the jammed game media. By poking the medium, the game medium can be broken and the jam can be easily cleared. Thereafter, by closing the tool insertion opening with the lid member, the lid member can prevent an unauthorized linear tool such as a piano wire from being inserted into the discharge passage from the tool insertion opening. If an unauthorized tool is inserted into the discharge passage from the tool insertion opening or the exit of the discharge passage, the tip of the unauthorized tool must come into contact with the inner surface of the discharge passage in order to extend the tip from the entrance of the discharge passage to the game board. Even if you try to move the unauthorized tool while moving it, if it comes into contact with any of the security ribs extending downward from the ceiling of the discharge passage, the unauthorized tool can be prevented from moving. In this way, the cover member and the plurality of security ribs can prevent unauthorized acts on the game board via the discharge passage, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine that has a high deterrent effect against fraudulent acts.

Note that it is desirable that the passage member be transparent. As a result, when a game media blockage occurs in the discharge passage, it is possible to easily recognize the location where the blockage (bulb blockage) is occurring by simply looking at the passage member from the outside, making it easier to clear the blockage. As a result, the maintenance burden on the game hall side can be reduced.

Further, the discharge path may be configured to include a plurality of discharge paths that are divided in the front-rear direction and each of which independently guides and discharges the game media. As a result, since the discharge passage is configured with multiple independent discharge paths, when a large amount of game media is discharged from the game board in a short period of time, those game media are distributed to each discharge route and discharged. As a result, it is possible to reduce the concentration of many game media in one discharge route, and it is possible to avoid clogging (ball clogging) that is likely to occur due to concentration of game media. At the same time, many game media discharged from the game board can be quickly discharged to the island equipment side of the game hall (out receiving section, bucket, etc.).

In addition, as described above, after configuring the discharge passage with a plurality of independent discharge routes, on the game board, the game medium (safe ball) accepted into the winning slot where a benefit is given, and the winning When discharging the gaming media that was not accepted into the winning opening (out balls) to different positions in the front and back directions, the gaming media that was accepted into the winning opening and the gaming medium that was not accepted into the winning opening are It is possible to circulate and discharge through different discharge routes. Then, if a detection sensor is provided that can detect each gaming medium flowing through each discharge route one by one, the number of gaming media accepted into the prize opening and the number of gaming media accepted into the winning opening can be determined outside the game board. It is possible to count the number of gaming media that were not counted, so by comparing the number of gaming media that were counted on the gaming board, it is possible to determine whether there is any fraudulent activity with respect to the winning slot on the gaming board. It is possible to provide a game machine that can reduce the burden on the game hall side and has a high deterrent effect against fraudulent acts.

Furthermore, the apparatus may further include a detection sensor attached to the passage member and capable of detecting the game media guided in the discharge passage one by one. As a result, the detection sensor can detect the game media flowing through the discharge passage, and the number of game media discharged from the discharge passage can be counted. By comparing the number of game media counted on the game board, it is possible to determine whether there is any fraudulent activity on the game board or the discharge passage, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine that has a high deterrent effect against fraudulent activity.

Furthermore, when a detection sensor is provided in the passage member as described above, the detection sensor can count the number of game media ejected from the game board. ) There is no need to provide a sensor, an electronic circuit, etc. for counting the number of game media played, and the cost of the game board can be reduced.

It is also desirable that the lid member be hingedly rotatably attached to the passage member. As a result, the lid member that opens and closes the tool insertion slot is attached to the passage member in a hinge-rotatable manner, so even when the tool insertion slot is opened by the lid member, the lid member is attached to the passage member due to the hinge shaft of the hinge rotation. It will be installed. Therefore, in order to eliminate clogging of game media in the discharge passage, the lid member remains attached to the passage member even when the lid member is opened, making it difficult to lose the lid member. Can be done.

Further, the passage member is provided on the main body frame to which the game board is attached, and the lid member is provided on the lower surface of the passage member, and the lid member is attached to the passage member so as to be rotatable with a hinge. At the same time, it is desirable that the hinge shaft of the lid member be provided so as to extend left and right (horizontally) on the front end side of the lid member. As a result, when clearing the clogging of game media in the discharge passage, first open the main body frame forward with respect to the outer frame attached to the island equipment of the game hall, then open the lid member and insert it into the tool insertion slot. Insert the specified tool to clear the blockage. After that, after closing the lid member, the main body frame will be closed against the outer frame, but at this time, if the lid member is open, the tip of the lid member will come into contact with the outer frame and close the main body frame. This makes it possible to make the user aware of the fact that the user has forgotten to close the lid member, and the tool insertion port can be reliably closed by closing the lid member. In addition, even if the lid member becomes open for some reason when the main body frame is closed against the outer frame, the lid member will come into contact with the outer frame when opening the main body frame. Since the main body frame is rotated in the closing direction, the main body frame does not become unopenable, and the main body frame can be opened satisfactorily, and the lid member etc. can be prevented from being damaged.

Furthermore, the shelf portion on which the game media rolls in the discharge passage of the passage member is vertically penetrated to a size that the game media cannot pass through, and a plurality of garbage drop ports are provided for dropping the garbage in the discharge passage. , may be further provided. As a result, since a plurality of garbage drop ports are provided in the discharge passage, it is possible to discharge the garbage that has entered the discharge passage and the garbage attached to the game media to the lower part of the discharge passage through the garbage drop openings. By reducing the amount of garbage in the discharge passage, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of clogging of game media (ball clogging) caused by garbage, and reduce the maintenance burden on the game hall side where this game machine is installed. be able to.

In addition, when a passage member is provided with a garbage drop port and a detection sensor is provided to detect game media flowing through the discharge passage, it is necessary to prevent the garbage that has fallen through the garbage drop port from hitting the detection sensor. desirable. Thereby, it is possible to avoid malfunction of the detection sensor due to adhesion of dust, and it is possible to reliably detect the game media flowing through the discharge passage.

Further, as described above, when providing a plurality of dirt drop ports in the passage member, it is desirable that a part of the plurality of dirt drop ports also serve as a tool insertion port. As a result, there is no need to separately provide a tool insertion hole, and the configuration of the gaming machine can be simplified, and an increase in cost can be suppressed, and the same effects as described above can be achieved. can.

Means 2: In the configuration of means 1,
"The discharge passage is
It is characterized by being configured with a plurality of ejection paths that are divided in the front and rear directions and each independently guides and ejects game media.

Here, the plurality of "discharge routes" that make up the discharge passage are "gaming media accepted into the winning opening on the game board (safe balls), and gaming media that was not received into the winning opening (out balls)". ), and ``a game medium that is accepted into the winning slot on the game board (safe ball) and a gaming medium that is not accepted into the winning slot (out ball), respectively. Examples include "one that guides players through different ejection routes depending on the winning openings accepted on the game board."

According to the configuration of means 2, the discharge path is constituted by a plurality of discharge paths that are divided in the front and back direction and each independently guides and discharges the game media ([For carrying out the invention] [Form], see the description regarding the first sphere path 701 and the second sphere path 702, the description in paragraph [1015], etc.).

As a result, since the discharge passage is configured with multiple independent discharge paths, when a large amount of game media is discharged from the game board in a short period of time, those game media are distributed to each discharge route and discharged. As a result, it is possible to reduce the concentration of many game media in one discharge route, and it is possible to avoid clogging (ball clogging) that is likely to occur due to concentration of game media. At the same time, many game media discharged from the game board can be quickly discharged to the island equipment side of the game hall (out receiving section, bucket, etc.).

In addition, since the discharge path is composed of multiple independent discharge routes, on the game board, there are game media (safe balls) that are accepted into the winning slot where benefits are given, and games that are not accepted into the winning slot. When discharging gaming media (out balls) to different positions in the front and rear directions, the gaming media accepted into the winning opening and the gaming media not accepted into the winning opening are distributed through different discharge routes. can be discharged. Then, if a detection sensor is provided that can detect each gaming medium flowing through each discharge route one by one, the number of gaming media accepted into the prize opening and the number of gaming media accepted into the winning opening can be determined outside the game board. It is possible to count the number of gaming media that were not counted, so by comparing the number of gaming media that were counted on the gaming board, it is possible to determine whether there is any fraudulent activity with respect to the winning slot on the gaming board. It is possible to provide a game machine that can reduce the burden on the game hall side and has a high deterrent effect against fraudulent acts.

Means 3: In the configuration of means 1 or 2,
It is characterized by "further comprising a detection sensor attached to the passage member and capable of detecting game media guided in the discharge passage one by one."

Here, examples of the "detection sensor" include "inductive sensor", "magnetic sensor", "photoelectric sensor (photosensor)", "capacitance sensor", "contact sensor", etc.

According to the configuration of means 3, the game machine is further provided with a detection sensor that is attached to the passage member and can detect the game media guided in the discharge passage one by one ([Invention (For details regarding the first sphere sensor 703 and the second sphere sensor 704).

As a result, the detection sensor can detect the game media flowing through the discharge passage, and the number of game media discharged from the discharge passage can be counted. By comparing the number of game media counted on the game board, it is possible to determine whether there is any fraudulent activity on the game board or the discharge passage, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine that has a high deterrent effect against fraudulent activity.

In addition, since the detection sensor installed in the passage member can count the number of game media released from the game board, the sensor and electronic circuit for counting the number of game media discharged to the outside of the game board There is no need to provide such equipment, and the cost of the game board can be reduced.

In addition, when the discharge passage is constituted by a plurality of independent discharge routes, it is desirable to provide a detection sensor in each discharge route. As a result, even if a large amount of game media is discharged from the game board in a short period of time, the game media can be dispersed through multiple discharge routes to prevent clogging (ball clogging) from occurring, and the discharge routes can be distributed. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that can reliably detect (count) the gaming media that are playing, and that can more easily achieve the above-mentioned effects.

Means 4: In any one of the structures from means 1 to means 3,
“The lid member is
The device is characterized in that it is hinge-rotatably attached to the passage member.

According to the configuration of means 4, the lid member is attached to the passage member so as to be hingedly rotatable (see the description regarding the security cover 714 in [Detailed Description of the Invention]).

As a result, the lid member that opens and closes the tool insertion slot is attached to the passage member in a hinge-rotatable manner, so even when the tool insertion slot is opened by the lid member, the lid member is attached to the passage member due to the hinge shaft of the hinge rotation. It is now installed. Therefore, in order to eliminate clogging of game media in the discharge passage, the lid member remains attached to the passage member even when the lid member is opened, making it difficult to lose the lid member. Can be done.

In addition, if the passage member is provided on the main body frame to which the game board is attached, and the lid member is provided on the lower surface of the passage member, the hinge shaft of the lid member is aligned horizontally on the front end side of the lid member. direction). As a result, when clearing the clogging of game media in the discharge passage, first open the main body frame forward with respect to the outer frame attached to the island equipment of the game hall, then open the lid member and insert it into the tool insertion slot. Insert the specified tool to clear the blockage. After that, after closing the lid member, the main body frame will be closed against the outer frame, but at this time, if the lid member is open, the tip of the lid member will come into contact with the outer frame and close the main body frame. This makes it possible to make the user aware of the fact that the user has forgotten to close the lid member, and the tool insertion port can be reliably closed by closing the lid member. In addition, even if the lid member becomes open for some reason when the main body frame is closed against the outer frame, the lid member will come into contact with the outer frame when opening the main body frame. Since the main body frame is rotated in the closing direction, the main body frame does not become unopenable, and the main body frame can be opened satisfactorily, and the lid member etc. can be prevented from being damaged.

Means 5: In any one configuration from means 1 to means 4,
"A shelf section on which game media rolls in the discharge passage of the passage member is vertically penetrated to a size that makes it impossible for game media to pass through, and a plurality of garbage droplets are provided to cause the garbage in the discharge passage to fall." mouth,
It is characterized by the fact that it further comprises the following:

According to the configuration of the means 5, the shelf part of the passage member on which the game medium rolls in the discharge passage is vertically penetrated through the game machine with a size that the game medium cannot pass through, and the garbage in the discharge passage is dropped. It is further provided with a plurality of dust dropping ports to allow the dust to fall (see the description regarding the notch 713q in [Detailed Description of the Invention]).

As a result, since a plurality of garbage drop ports are provided in the discharge passage, it is possible to discharge the garbage that has entered the discharge passage and the garbage attached to the game media to the lower part of the discharge passage through the garbage drop openings. By reducing the amount of garbage in the discharge passage, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of clogging of game media (ball clogging) caused by garbage, and reduce the maintenance burden on the game hall side where this game machine is installed. be able to.

In addition, when providing a detection sensor for detecting game media flowing through the discharge passage, it is desirable to prevent garbage falling through the garbage drop port from touching the detection sensor. Thereby, it is possible to avoid malfunction of the detection sensor due to adhesion of dust, and it is possible to reliably detect the game media flowing through the discharge passage.

Means 6: In the configuration of means 5,
``The garbage falling port is
A portion thereof also serves as the tool insertion opening (see the description regarding the elimination opening 711b and the notch 713q in [Detailed Description of the Invention]).

According to the structure of the means 6, a part of the dust drop port also serves as a tool insertion port.

As a result, some of the multiple dust drop holes are also used as tool insertion holes, so there is no need to provide a separate tool insertion hole, which simplifies the configuration of the gaming machine and reduces costs. In addition to being able to suppress an increase in , it is possible to achieve the same effects as described above.

Means 7: In a gaming machine,
"A game board on which games are played using game media,
A discharge path is formed by a plurality of discharge paths which are divided in the front and back direction and are independent from each other, and which guide and discharge the game media discharged from the game board, and a discharge path is formed below the game board. A passage member provided,
a plurality of detection sensors attached to the passage member and capable of detecting each game medium guided in the discharge path of each of the discharge passages;
A plurality of garbage drop ports vertically penetrating a shelf portion on which game media roll in the discharge passage of the passage member with a size that does not allow game media to pass through, and for causing garbage in the discharge passage to fall. and,
a tool insertion port that also serves as a part of the plurality of dirt drop ports and for inserting a tool for removing clogging of game media in the discharge passage;
a lid member that opens and closes the tool insertion opening and is hingedly attached to the passage member;
The passage member is provided with a plurality of crime prevention ribs extending downward from the ceiling portion of the discharge passage and preventing the tip of an unauthorized tool from moving along the ceiling. shall be.

According to the configuration of means 7, the game machine includes a game board on which games are played using game media, and a plurality of game boards that are divided in the front and back direction and are independent from each other, and that guide and eject the game media released from the game board. A discharge passage is formed by a passage member provided below the game board, and a game medium attached to the passage member and guided in each discharge route of the discharge passage. A plurality of detection sensors that can detect garbage one by one, and a shelf section on which game media rolls in the discharge passage of the passage member are penetrated vertically with a size that makes it impossible for game media to pass through. It also serves as a part of the multiple garbage drop ports, and a tool insertion port for inserting a tool to clear the clogging of game media in the discharge passage. The insertion port is closed so that it can be opened and closed, and the lid member is rotatably attached to the passage member and extends downward from the ceiling of the discharge passage in the passage member, so that the tip of the unauthorized tool can be prevented from traveling along the ceiling. and a plurality of security ribs to prevent the vehicle from moving.

As a result, if the discharge passage of the passage member provided below the game board becomes clogged with game media discharged from the game board, the lid member that closes the tool insertion slot can be opened, and multiple dirt drop ports can be opened. By inserting a rod-shaped tool such as a flathead screwdriver through the tool insertion slot that also serves as a part of the tool slot, and hitting the jammed game media, the game media can be broken and the jam can be easily cleared. Thereafter, by closing the tool insertion opening with the lid member, the lid member can prevent an unauthorized linear tool such as a piano wire from being inserted into the discharge passage from the tool insertion opening. If an unauthorized tool is inserted into the discharge passage from the tool insertion opening or the exit of the discharge passage, the tip of the unauthorized tool must come into contact with the inner surface of the discharge passage in order to extend the tip from the entrance of the discharge passage to the game board. Even if the unauthorized tool is moved while being moved, if it comes into contact with any one of the plurality of security ribs extending downward from the ceiling of the discharge passage, the movement of the unauthorized tool can be inhibited by the security ribs. In this way, the cover member and the plurality of security ribs can prevent unauthorized acts on the game board via the discharge passage, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine that has a high deterrent effect against fraudulent acts.

Furthermore, since the discharge passage is constituted by a plurality of independent discharge routes, when a large amount of game media is discharged from the game board in a short period of time, the game media can be distributed to each discharge route and discharged. This makes it possible to reduce the concentration of a large number of game media in one discharge path, and it is possible to avoid clogging (ball clogging) that is likely to occur due to concentration of game media. At the same time, many game media released from the game board can be quickly discharged to the island equipment side of the game hall (out receiving section, bucket, etc.).

In addition, since the detection sensor can detect the game media flowing through the discharge passage, it is possible to count the number of game media discharged from the discharge passage. By comparing the number of game media counted on the game board, it is possible to determine whether there is any fraudulent activity on the game board or the discharge passage, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine that has a high deterrent effect against fraudulent activity.

In addition, since the discharge path is composed of multiple independent discharge paths in the front and rear directions, on the game board, the game media (safe balls) accepted into the prize opening where benefits are given, and the By discharging the game media that was not received (out ball) to different positions in the front and rear directions, the game media that was accepted into the winning slot and the game media that was not accepted into the winning slot are made to be different from each other. It can be discharged by circulating the discharge route. Since it is equipped with a detection sensor that can detect each gaming medium flowing through each discharge route, the number of gaming media accepted into the winning slot and the number of gaming media accepted into the winning slot can be detected outside the gaming board. Since it is possible to count the number of gaming media that were not accepted, by comparing the number of gaming media counted on the gaming board, it is possible to determine whether there is any fraudulent activity with respect to the winning slot on the gaming board. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the burden on the gaming hall side and has a high deterrent effect against fraudulent activities.

Furthermore, since the detection sensor provided on the passage member can count the number of game media discharged from the game board, it is possible to count the number of game media discharged to the outside of the game board. There is no need to provide sensors, electronic circuits, etc., and the cost of the game board can be reduced.

In addition, the lid member that opens and closes the tool insertion slot is attached to the passage member so that it can rotate with a hinge, so even when the tool insertion slot is opened by the lid member, the lid member is attached to the passage member by the hinge axis of the hinge rotation. It will be in a state where it is Therefore, in order to eliminate clogging of game media in the discharge passage, the lid member remains attached to the passage member even when the lid member is opened, making it difficult to lose the lid member. Can be done.

Further, the lid member is provided on the lower surface of the passage member, and the lid member is attached to the passage member so as to be hinge-rotatable. If the system is installed so that it extends horizontally (horizontally), in order to clear the clogging of game media in the discharge passage, open the main body frame forward with respect to the outer frame attached to the island equipment of the game hall. Then, open the lid member and insert the specified tool into the tool insertion slot to clear the blockage. After that, after closing the lid member, the main body frame will be closed against the outer frame, but at this time, if the lid member is open, the tip of the lid member will come into contact with the outer frame and close the main body frame. This makes it possible to make the user aware of the fact that the user has forgotten to close the lid member, and the tool insertion port can be reliably closed by closing the lid member. In addition, even if the lid member becomes open for some reason when the main body frame is closed against the outer frame, the lid member will come into contact with the outer frame when opening the main body frame. Since the main body frame is rotated in the closing direction, the main body frame does not become unopenable, and the main body frame can be opened satisfactorily, and the lid member etc. can be prevented from being damaged.

Furthermore, since the discharge passage is provided with multiple garbage drop ports, the garbage that has entered the discharge passage and the garbage attached to the game media can be discharged through the garbage drop ports and down the discharge passage. By reducing the amount of trash in the aisles, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of clogging of game media (ball clogging) caused by trash, and to reduce the maintenance burden on the game hall side where this game machine is installed. Can be done.

In addition, since some of the multiple garbage drop holes are also used as tool insertion holes, there is no need to provide a separate tool insertion hole, which simplifies the configuration of the gaming machine and reduces costs. The increase can be suppressed, and the same effects as above can be achieved.

Further, in the passage member, it is desirable to prevent the dust that has fallen through the dust drop opening from coming into contact with the detection sensor, thereby making it possible to avoid malfunctions of the detection sensor due to the adhesion of dust. To reliably detect game media flowing through a discharge passage.

Means 8: In any one of the structures from means 1 to means 7,
The gaming machine is
a plurality of receiving ports that are arranged within the gaming area where the gaming media are distributed and can receive the gaming media;
The pachinko machine is characterized in that it is equipped with a payout device that pays out a predetermined number of game media in accordance with the reception of the game media into the receiving port.

Here, the "acceptance opening" includes "a general winning opening that is always open in the gaming area" and "an advantageous gaming state that is always open in the gaming area and gives the player an advantage by accepting gaming media." ``Starting prize opening (starting opening) where a special lottery is held to determine whether or not to generate ``Variable prize openings that can be accepted (variable starting openings, accessory prize openings, etc.)'', ``Normal lottery drawn when gaming media passes through a specific area (gate, through chucker, etc.) within the gaming area. Depending on the result, the game media can be placed in a specific area (e.g. gate, chucker, etc.) within the game area. Depending on the normal lottery result that is drawn by passing the variable start, game media can be accepted, and a special lottery is held to determine whether accepting the game media will generate an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Winning slot (variable starting slot)", "V winning slot that generates an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous when the game media received in the accessory winning slot is sorted and accepted by the sorting means", " Examples of advantageous gaming states that give the player an advantage include a grand prize opening or a prize winning opening that opens and closes in a predetermined pattern to accept game media.

In addition, a "pachinko machine" includes "a lottery means for conducting a special lottery to generate an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous by accepting gaming media into the starting slot, and a special lottery result drawn by the lottery means. a special lottery result display means for variably displaying the special symbols according to the change and then displaying the special symbols, and displaying a special lottery result drawn according to the combination of the stopped and displayed special symbols; and an advantageous gaming state in the special lottery result display means. an advantageous gaming state generating means that opens and closes the big winning opening in a predetermined pattern to generate an advantageous gaming state when the special lottery result to be generated is displayed (so-called DigiPachi machine), A distributing means for distributing game media accepted into the slot, and when the game media distributed by the distributing means is received in the V prize opening, the accessory prize opening is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern to give the player an advantage. An advantageous gaming state generating means that generates an advantageous gaming state (so-called Hanemono machine)", "Has a grand prize opening and a prize winning opening, and is drawn by drawing by accepting gaming media into the starting opening. The grand prize opening or the prize winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern according to the special lottery results, and when the game media accepted in the prize winning opening is distributed to the V winning opening, the prize winning opening or the prize winning opening is set in a predetermined manner. A device equipped with an advantageous gaming state generating means that opens and closes in a pattern to generate an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player (a so-called multifunction machine).

According to the configuration of the means 8, the gaming machine has a plurality of receiving ports which are arranged in the gaming area where the gaming media are distributed and can receive the gaming media, and a predetermined number of gaming machines according to the receiving of the gaming media into the receiving port. This pachinko machine is equipped with a dispensing device for dispensing a medium. Thereby, in the pachinko machine, any of the effects of the above-mentioned means can be achieved.

As described above, according to the present invention, countermeasures against fraud can be improved compared to the conventional methods.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine that is an embodiment of the present invention. It is a right view of the pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front left. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from behind. It is a front view of the pachinko machine when the press operation part of the performance operation unit is in the raised position. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right when the pressing operation part of the performance operation unit is in the raised position. It is a perspective view of the Pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front with the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from behind, with the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame. It is a front view of the outer frame of a pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the outer frame. FIG. 3 is a right side view of the outer frame. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the outer frame seen from the front. It is a perspective view of the outer frame seen from behind. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame disassembled into its main members and viewed from the front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of a left outer frame assembly and a right outer frame assembly of the outer frame, respectively, as seen from the front; FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower outer frame assembly of the outer frame. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame as seen from the front and above, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) as seen from the front and below. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a right view of a door frame. It is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the front right. It is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the front left. It is a perspective view of the door frame seen from behind. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into each main member and seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into each main member and seen from behind. (a) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into each main member and seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into each main member and seen from behind. (a) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of the door frame seen from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of (a) seen from the back and front, and (c) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock in a conventional pachinko machine. It is a perspective view of the lock seen from the front, and (d) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of (a) seen from the back. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock in FIG. 34(a) when disassembled and seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock in FIG. 34(a) when disassembled and seen from the back. be. (a) is an explanatory view showing the movable mechanism of the cylinder lock of Fig. 34 (a) from the front, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the cylinder lock rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise from the state of (a). (c) is an explanatory diagram of the cylinder lock shown in a state rotated 90 degrees clockwise from the state of (a). (a) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit seen from the back. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit seen from the front with the ball feeding unit disassembled, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit seen from the rear with the rear case and tamper prevention member removed. (a) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit seen from the back. FIG. 3 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed. (a) is an enlarged front view showing the parts of the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the door frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the parts of the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the door frame. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit as seen from the front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit as seen from behind. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from behind. FIG. 41(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line E--I in FIG. 41(a). FIG. 2 is a sectional view taken along line A--A in FIG. 1. FIG. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the dish unit of the door frame. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the dish unit seen from behind. (a) is a cross-sectional view showing the main parts of a door frame cut horizontally at the lower plate ball supply port, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of a conventional door frame cut at the same part as (a) and showing the main parts. FIG. It is a top view which expands and shows the part of the ball lending operation unit in the dish unit of a door frame. (a) is a perspective view of the performance operation unit seen from the front with the performance operation button facing upward, and (b) is a perspective view of the performance operation unit of (a) seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation unit disassembled into each main member and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation unit disassembled into each main member and viewed from the front and lower. (a) is a sectional view of the production operation unit in a state where the production operation unit is in the lowered position and the elevating unsprung holding member is at the upward moving end position, and (b) is a sectional view of the production operation unit from the state of (a). It is a sectional view of the performance operation unit in a state where it has moved to the raised position. It is a sectional view of the performance operation unit in a state where the performance operation unit is in the lowered position and the elevating and lowering unsprung holding member is at the downward moving end position. It is an explanatory view showing the positional relationship of the production operation part outer periphery decorative board, the button outside decoration board, and the button inside decoration board in a plan view of the performance operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the press operation part. (a) is a front view of the pan unit shown in a normal state, and (b) is a front view of the pan unit when the production operation unit is in the raised position. It is a top view of a performance operation unit showing an example in which a plurality of contact sensing bodies are provided in the performance operation unit of the performance operation unit. (a) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an example in which a plurality of contact detection bodies are connected to one contact detection sensor body, and (b) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an example in which a contact detection sensor body and a plurality of contact detection bodies are connected in (a). It is an explanatory view schematically showing an example in which a switching part is provided between them, and (c) is an illustration in which the plate left decoration unit, the plate right decoration unit, the production operation unit, etc. of the plate unit can be moved back and forth in the front and back direction, and the production operation unit FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which contact sensing bodies are provided on the front and rear sides of the device. (a) is an explanatory view showing an example of a decorative contact sensing body, and (b) is an explanatory view schematically showing another embodiment of the production operation unit. (a) is a front view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit seen from the front, and (c) is a front view of the door frame left side unit seen from the back. FIG. It is an exploded perspective view of the left side unit of the door frame as seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the left side unit of the door frame as seen from behind. 62(a) is a sectional view taken along the line U--U in FIG. 62(a). (a) is a front view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame, (b) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit seen from the front. (d) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit seen from behind. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from behind. FIG. 66(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line A--H in FIG. 66(a). 66A is a cross-sectional view taken along the O--O line in FIG. 66(a). (a) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit showing the outer layer of the two-color molding in the door frame in an opaque state, and (b) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit showing the outer layer of the door frame as it is and the outer layer is transparent. FIG. 3 is a right side view of the door frame right side unit shown in the closed state. It is a front view showing each decorative board of a door frame. It is a top view which shows the decoration board of the part of a production operation unit of a door frame. FIG. 3 is a rear view showing each decorative board provided around the door window of the door frame. It is a front view of the main body frame of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the main body frame in a pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the front right. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the front left. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the main body frame seen from behind. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into its main members and viewed from the front. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into its main members and viewed from behind. (a) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the main body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the main body frame when the door frame is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame. (a) is a perspective view of the ball launcher seen from the front in the main body frame, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball launcher seen from the back. (a) is a perspective view of the dispensing base unit of the main body frame viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the dispensing base unit viewed from the back. (a) is a perspective view of the dispensing unit in the main body frame seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the dispensing unit seen from the back. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled into its main components and seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled into its main components and seen from the back. FIG. 3 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit taken at the center of the dispensing blade in the front-rear direction. (a) is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the dispensing blade when the movable ball extraction piece is in the open state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in (a). . It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the foul cover unit of the door frame and the lower full ball path unit. It is an explanatory view showing the flow of game balls in the main body frame. (a) is a perspective view of the board unit of the main body frame seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit seen from the back. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the board unit viewed from below. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from behind. It is an enlarged side cross-sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. (a) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit seen from the back. (a) is a plan view of the main body frame, and (b) is a sectional view taken along the line BB in (a). It is an enlarged view showing an enlarged upper part of a perspective view of the main body frame seen from the back. (a) is a perspective view of the spherical tank with tank rails and the like assembled as seen from the front top, and (b) is a perspective view of (a) seen from the front bottom. FIG. 100(a) is an exploded front perspective view of FIG. 100(a); It is an explanatory view showing an area where game balls overflowing from a ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame circulate. It is an explanatory view showing the flow of game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame. It is an explanatory view showing the flow of game balls to the detour path in the upper part of the main body frame. It is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of the tank rail in a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from behind on the hinge side. FIG. 7 is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine including a tank rail and the like according to another embodiment when viewed from the back and showing an enlarged portion of the tank rail. (a) is a plan view showing the tank rail etc. of FIG. 106 assembled with a ball tank, (b) is a perspective view of the tank rail etc. of (a) seen from the front, and (c) is a ( It is a perspective view of tank rail etc. of a) seen from behind. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail etc. of FIG. 107 as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail etc. of FIG. 107 as seen from the rear. FIG. 107(a) is a cross-sectional view of the tank rail, etc. taken along the carcar line in FIG. 107(a). FIG. 108 is an explanatory diagram showing, in cross section, the flow of game balls within the tank rail of FIG. 107. (a) is a front view of the board unit of another embodiment, (b) is a perspective view of the board unit of (a) seen from the front right, and (c) is a perspective view of the board unit of (a) seen from the front left. FIG. (a) is a perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 111(a) seen from the upper right back, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 111(a) seen from the lower right back. FIG. 111(a) is an exploded front perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 111(a); FIG. 111(a) is an exploded perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 111(a) as seen from behind. (a) is a sectional view taken along the Keeke line in FIG. FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view taken along the K-ke line. 111(a) is a bottom view showing a portion on the rear side of the door frame in the pachinko machine equipped with the board unit of FIG. 111(a). FIG. It is an explanatory view showing an example in which a guide piece is provided at the out ball discharge port of the out ball passage. (a) is an explanatory view showing an example in which the out sensor is detachable, and (b) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the out sensor is removed in (a). (a) is a perspective view of the board unit of the third embodiment, with the power supply unit, payout control unit, and interface unit omitted, as seen from the front right, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit of (a) as seen from the front left. FIG. (a) is a perspective view of the board unit in FIG. 119 seen from the upper right back, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit in (a) seen from the lower right back. (a) is a plan view of the board unit in FIG. 119, (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the Koko line in (a), and (c) is a cross-sectional view taken along the sasa line in (a). FIG. FIG. 121(a) is a sectional view taken along the line C--C in FIG. 121(a). FIG. 120 is an exploded front perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 119; FIG. 120 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 119 when viewed from behind; (a) is a perspective view of the ball path member of the board unit in FIG. 119 seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball path member of the board unit of FIG. 119 seen from the back. FIG. 120 is an explanatory diagram showing how ball clogging is resolved in the board unit of FIG. 119; FIG. 120 is an explanatory diagram showing prevention of intrusion of a linear unauthorized tool into the board unit of FIG. 119; 120 is an explanatory diagram showing dust removal in the board unit of FIG. 119. FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board in which a center accessory and the like are made opaque in a pachinko machine. FIG. 130 is a perspective view of the game board in FIG. 129 viewed from the front right. FIG. 130 is a perspective view of the game board in FIG. 129 viewed from the front left. It is a perspective view of the game board seen from behind. FIG. 3 is a schematic explanatory diagram of wiring from a function display unit on the main control board. It is a front view of the game board in a state where the center accessory etc. are made transparent. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components and viewed from behind. It is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the front unit is cut parallel to the surface of the game panel to reveal the inside of the game area where game balls circulate and the obstacle nails. (a) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel of the game board seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel seen from the back. (a) is a front view showing an enlarged view of the front component and the upper right corner of the game panel, (b) is a sectional view taken along the sous line in (a), and (c) is a front view showing the front component and the upper right corner of the game panel. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the main components as seen from the front. (a) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board seen from the back. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the lower right guide passage in the center accessory as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the separation hole in the front member on the front side of the lower right guide passage in the center accessory. FIG. (a) is a perspective view of the gate member seen from the front, (b) is an exploded perspective view of the gate member disassembled and seen from the front, and (c) is an exploded perspective view of the gate member seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view. (a) is a front view of the gate member, and (b) is a sectional view taken along the line in (a). It is an explanatory diagram showing a flow path of the game ball on the right side in the front unit. FIG. 145 is an explanatory diagram showing enlarged portions of the first attacker unit and the second attacker unit in FIG. 144; It is a front view of the game board showing the arrangement of magnetic sensors. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the orientation of a magnetic sensor that can detect lines of magnetic force from a magnet, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the orientation of a magnetic sensor that cannot detect lines of magnetic force from a magnet, and (c) is an explanatory diagram showing the orientation of a magnetic sensor that cannot detect lines of magnetic force from a magnet. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing a detection range by a magnetic sensor in a perspective view, (d) is an explanatory diagram showing a positional relationship between the magnetic sensor and a magnetic body in which lines of magnetic force from the magnet cannot be detected, and (e) FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship between a magnetic sensor and a magnetic body that can detect lines of magnetic force from a magnet. (a) is a perspective view showing a state in which a magnetic sensor is held by a holding member, (b) is an exploded perspective view showing a state in which the holding member and the magnetic sensor are separated, and (c) is a perspective view showing a state in which the holding member and the magnetic sensor are separated. It is an exploded view showing a member in cross section. (a) is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board seen from the back. It is a front view of the back front production unit in the back unit. (a) is a perspective view of the back-front production unit in the back unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back-front production unit in the back unit seen from the back. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the back-front production unit cut near the center in the vertical direction and viewed from above, (b) is an enlarged cross-sectional view of the left part in (a), and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the left side of (a). ) is an enlarged cross-sectional view of the right part in FIG. It is an exploded perspective view of the back-front left decoration unit of the back-front presentation unit, viewed from the front together with the light guide plate. This is an exploded perspective view of the back front left decorative unit disassembled to show only the back front left first decorative body, the back front left second decorative body, the back front left third decorative body, and the back front left decorative body base. be. (a) is a front view of the first decorative body on the front left side of the back side shown in a transparent state, (b) is a front view of the second decorative body on the left front side of the back side shown in a transparent state, and (c) is a front view of the second decorative body on the left side of the back front side shown in a transparent state. It is a front view of the back front left third decorative body shown in a state, and (c) is a front view of the back front left decorative body base shown in a transparent state. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing from the front the relationship between the light guide plate in the back front presentation unit and a decorative board for decorating the light guide plate and the back front left decoration unit with light emission; FIG. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing from the front the relationship between the light plate and the decorative board for illuminating the decorative body of the back front and lower presentation unit. It is a front view showing a state in which the back front left decoration unit is decorated with light. (a) is an explanatory view showing a state where the first pattern of the light guide plate is emitted, and (b) is an explanatory view showing a state where the second pattern of the light guide plate is emitted. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a light emitting configuration of a second pattern on the light guide plate. It is a front view of the back-front presentation unit shown in a state where the second pattern of the light guide plate is emitted. It is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back upper first decorative part of the back upper movable decorative body in the back rear upper production unit of the back unit is moved to a lowered position with the rear upper first decorative part facing forward. It is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the rear upper movable decorative body in the rear upper performance unit of the rear unit is moved to the lowered position and the rear upper second decorative part is directed forward. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the back left movable decorative body and the back rear right movable decorative body in the back rear lower performance unit of the back unit are moved to appearance positions. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the back front lower middle decoration body of the back front lower presentation unit of the back front presentation unit of the back unit is raised. A state in which the back front left logo decoration part, the back front left upper logo decoration part, the back front left sub decoration part, and the back front left band decoration part of the back front left decoration unit 3120 in the back front production unit of the back unit are decorated with light. It is a front view of the game board shown. It is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the first picture of the light guide plate in the back front presentation unit of the back unit is decorated with light emission. A game in which the first picture of the light guide plate in the back-front production unit of the back unit is decorated with light emission, and the back-rear left movable decoration body and the back-rear right movable decoration body in the back-rear lower production unit are moved to appearance positions. FIG. 3 is a front view of the board. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the second picture of the light guide plate in the back-front production unit of the back unit is decorated with light emission. 1 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of a pachinko machine. FIG. (a) is an enlarged front view of a part of the game board of the first embodiment, and (b) is an enlarged front view of a part of the game board of the second embodiment at the same site as in (a). It is a front view. (a) is an enlarged front view of a part of the game board of the second embodiment, and (b) is a front view showing the back front left decoration unit of the back front presentation unit in (a) in a state where it is decorated with light. It is an explanatory diagram. FIG. 171(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the panel board of the game panel in a state where it is decorated with light emission. It is an exploded perspective view of a panel board and a cell in a game board of a third embodiment, and seen from the front. (a) is a front view of the function display unit of the second embodiment, (b) is a sectional view taken along the Soso line in (a), and (c) is a front view of the function display unit of (a). (d) is a perspective view of the function display unit of (a) seen from behind. 175 is an exploded front perspective view of the function display unit of FIG. 174; FIG. 175 is an exploded perspective view of the function display unit of FIG. 174 as seen from behind; FIG. 175 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the relationship between the function display unit and the player in FIG. 174. FIG. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the relationship between the function display unit and the player according to the third embodiment. It is a sectional view of a function display unit of a fourth embodiment. (a) is a sectional view showing a second embodiment of mounting the magnetic sensor, (b) is an explanatory view showing the mounting of the magnetic sensor in (a) in a perspective view, and (c) is an explanatory view showing the mounting of the magnetic sensor in (b). It is an exploded perspective view showing attachment of a magnetic sensor, and (d) is an exploded perspective view showing attachment of a magnetic sensor with a holding member different from (c). (a) is an explanatory view showing in cross section an example in which the separation hole of the first member for removing the decoration is also used as a positioning hole for the second member, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the separation hole of the first member for removing the decoration. It is an explanatory view showing in cross section an example in which a closed space is formed by a second member behind the separation hole of one member, and (c) is a cross section showing a state in which decoration bodies with different thicknesses are attached in (b). (d) is an explanatory diagram showing, in cross section, an example in which the separation hole of the first member for removing the decoration is also used as the attachment hole of the decoration. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which a decorative body is attached to the first member from the front, (b) is a sectional view of (a), and (c) is an explanatory diagram showing a decorative body attached to the first member. It is an explanatory view showing the first member from the front. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a horizontally long rectangular decorative body and the first member, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the circular decorative body and the first member, and (c) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the circular decorative body and the first member. It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the decorative body and the first member that are provided symmetrically, and (d) is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the decorative body and the first member that are provided symmetrically and have a different shape from (c). be. (a) is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the decorative body and the movable first member from the front, (b) is a sectional view taken along the tartar line in (a), and (c) is a ) and (c) are explanatory diagrams showing the positional relationship between the decorative body and the first member, and (d) is a front view showing the relationship between the decorative body in a different form from that in (a) and the movable first member. It is an explanatory view, and (e) is a sectional view taken along the Chi-Chi line in (d).

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 that is an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 12. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine that is an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the Pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the Pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the Pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the Pachinko machine seen from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the Pachinko machine seen from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the Pachinko machine seen from the back. Figure 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation part of the production operation unit is in the raised position, and Figure 9 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right when the pressing operation part of the production operation unit is in the raised position. be. Moreover, FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the Pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. Figure 11 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame, game board, body frame, and outer frame disassembled, and Figure 12 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine with the door frame, game board, body frame, and outer frame. FIG.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 that can be opened and closed from the front of the outer frame 2, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 that supports the main body frame 4 in an openable and closable manner and is attached to the outer frame 2 in an openable and closable manner, and a main body frame 4 that is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3. The game board 5 has a game area 5a into which a game ball B (see FIG. 89) is driven.

The outer frame 2 has a rectangular frame extending vertically when viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 connects the upper ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20, which are separated from each other in the left and right and extend vertically, and the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20. the outer frame upper member 30, the outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, and the outer frame upper member 30 attached to the upper left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 includes an outer frame upper hinge assembly 50, and an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40.

The outer frame 2 is attached to the island equipment of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and is connected to the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The lower frame hinge assembly 520 is rotatably supported on the same axis, and the main body frame 4 is attached so as to be openable and closable forward centering on the left side as viewed from the front.

Further, when the door frame 3 closes the main body frame 4, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4, and a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is closed. The sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 is phase-inverted and radiated forward, allowing the player to hear deeper bass sound.

The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game balls B are driven so as to be visible from the front side, stores the game balls B to be driven into the game area 5a, and stores the stored game balls. It is equipped with a handle 195 that is operated by the player to drive the ball B into the gaming area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, the door frame 3 is equipped with a performance operation section 301 that can be operated by the player separately from the handle 195, and when a player participation type performance is executed, the player can operate the performance operation section 301. The player can now participate in the performance, and in addition to the game with the game ball B, the player can also be entertained by operating the performance operation section 301.

The main body frame 4 includes a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear part can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and which can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and a main body frame base unit 500 that is capable of supporting the outer periphery of the game board 5. a main body frame upper hinge member 510 and a main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 for attaching the door frame 3 so that it can be opened and closed; a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 that reinforces the main body frame base unit 500; A ball launcher 540 for driving the game ball B into the game area 5a of the board 5, a payout base unit 550 for receiving the game ball B supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a game ball received by the payout base unit 550. A board unit 620 that includes a payout control board 633 in addition to a power board 630 that includes a payout unit 560 for paying out balls B to the player and a power switch 630a that can power on the pachinko machine 1. , a back cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501, and a locking unit 650 that locks between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, and between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4. We are prepared.

The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a where a game is played by hitting a game ball B, and also pays out the game ball B to the player side and stores the game ball B used in the game. This is for discharging or discharging to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (toward the island equipment side of the game hall). The main body frame 4 is formed into a box shape with an open front, and a game board 5 is removably housed inside from the front. Further, the main body frame 4 is attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall in an openable and closable manner at the top and bottom of the front end on the left side of the front side, and a door frame 3 is attached so that the open front side can be closed. is installed so that it can be opened and closed.

The game board 5 includes a game area 5a in which a game ball B is played by a player's operation, a front component 1000 that partitions the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and the front component 1000. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 that is attached to the rear side and defines the rear end of the game area 5a, a board holder 1200 that is attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and a board holder 1200 that is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. A main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 and a setting change board 1311, a function display unit 1400 that displays the game status based on control signals from the main control board 1310, and a function display unit 1400 on the rear side of the game panel 1100. A peripheral control unit 1500 (see FIG. 12) is provided, an effect display device 1600 which is placed in the center of the gaming area 5a when viewed from the front and is capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and an effect display device 1600 attached to the front of the gaming panel 1100. A front unit 2000 is provided, and a back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100. The back unit 3000 is equipped with various performance units that can perform movable performances and light-emitting performances depending on the game state.

In the game area 5a of the game board 5, there are a plurality of obstacle nails N that come into contact with the game balls B and are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a predetermined benefit for the player by accepting or passing the game balls B. (For example, payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) includes a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a gate 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a big winning opening 2005. The obstacle nail N is planted on the front side of the game panel 1100. A general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a gate 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a big winning opening 2005 are provided in the table unit 2000.

The player can drive a game ball B into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by operating the handle 195 of the handle unit 180. As a result, the game ball B is accepted into or passes through the general prize opening 2001, first starting opening 2002, gate 2003, second starting opening 2004, big winning opening 2005, etc. in the gaming area 5a. , the player can enjoy the driving operation of the handle 195.

In addition, the game board 5 displays a predetermined performance image on the performance display device 1600, or displays a predetermined performance image on the performance display device 1600, The upper performance unit 3200, the rear and lower performance units 3300, etc. perform light emission effects and movable effects to entertain the players.

[2. Overall configuration of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 13 to 18. FIG. 13 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, FIG. 14 is a rear view of the outer frame, and FIG. 15 is a right side view of the outer frame. Moreover, FIG. 16 is a perspective view of the outer frame seen from the front, and FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the outer frame seen from the back. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame disassembled into its main members and viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, such as a game hall. The outer frame 2 has a rectangular frame extending vertically when viewed from the front.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 includes a left outer frame assembly 10 and a right outer frame assembly 20 that are spaced apart from each other left and right and extend vertically, and a left outer frame assembly 10 and a right outer frame assembly 20. The upper outer frame member 30 whose upper ends are connected to each other, the lower outer frame assembly 40 which connects the lower ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20, and the upper surface of the upper outer frame member 30. It includes an outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end, and an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40. ing.

In the outer frame 2, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 to form a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. At the same time, the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 can be phase-inverted and radiated to the front.

In the outer frame 2, the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 can detachably support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4. The outer frame 2 rotatably supports the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 on the same axis. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable forward centering on the left side as viewed from the front.

[2-1. Outer frame left assembly and outer frame right assembly]
The left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 19. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the left outer frame assembly and the right outer frame assembly of the outer frame, respectively, when viewed from the front. The left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically, and are spaced apart from each other in the left and right directions. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 rotatably support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 on the same axis, and are attached to the outer frame 2. This is for attaching the main body frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed.

First, the left outer frame assembly 10 includes a left outer frame member 11 that extends vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper left connecting member 12 that is attached to the upper end of the right side of the left outer frame member 11. and a lower left connecting member 13 attached to the lower end of the right side of the outer frame left member 11.

The left outer frame member 11 has a constant cross-sectional shape and extends vertically, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy material. The outer frame left member 11 has a recess 11a that is flat and recessed to the right in the rear part of the left side surface divided into three parts in the front-rear direction, and a recess part 11a that is recessed flat to the right on the right side surface from the part opposite to the recess part 11a. It includes a bulged portion 11b that bulges out in the direction, and a hollow portion 11c that vertically penetrates the bulged portion 11b. The outer frame left member 11 has increased strength and rigidity due to the recessed portion 11a and the bulged portion 11b, and is reduced in weight due to the hollow portion 11c.

Further, the outer frame left member 11 has a plurality of vertically extending grooves formed on both left and right sides. The plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a V-shape, and the plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The left outer frame member 11 is formed in a shape that is bilaterally symmetrical to a right outer frame member 21 of a right outer frame assembly 20, which will be described later.

The upper left connecting member 12 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper left connecting member 12 includes a flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing part 12a extending horizontally, a flat plate-shaped upper horizontal fixing part 12b extending upward from the middle in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal fixing part 12a, and a horizontal fixing part A pair of flat-shaped lower lateral fixing parts 12c extend downward from both front and rear sides of the upper lateral fixing part 12b on the left side of the upper lateral fixing part 12a. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The upper left connecting member 12 has the lower horizontal fixing part 12c on the rear side inserted into the hollow part 11c of the left outer frame member 11, and the horizontal fixing part 12a abutting the upper end of the left outer frame member 11. By screwing a screw from the outside of the left side of the outer frame left member 11 into the lower side fixing portion 12c with the rear lower side fixing portion 12c in contact with the right side of the outer frame left member 11. , is attached to the outer frame left member 11. In addition, the upper left connecting member 12 has the horizontal fixing part 12a abut against the lower surface of the left end side of the upper outer frame member 30, and inserts the upper horizontal fixing part 12b into the notch 30a on the left side of the upper outer frame member 30. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame upper member 30 by screwing screws into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing part 12a and the upper horizontal fixing part 12b.

The lower left connecting member 13 is for connecting the lower end of the left outer frame member 11 and the left end of the lower outer frame assembly 40 (lower outer frame member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 includes a flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing part 13a that extends horizontally, and a flat plate-shaped upper horizontal part that extends upward from the left side of the horizontal fixing part 13a and extends backward from the horizontal fixing part 13a. The fixing part 13b, the flat plate-like lower lateral fixing part 13c extending downward from the lower side of the upper lateral fixing part 13b on the rear side of the horizontal fixing part 13a, and The contact portion 13d is a flat plate-shaped contact portion 13d that extends in a short direction. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The lower left connecting member 13 brings the rear surface of the contact portion 13d into contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 11b of the left outer frame member 11, and also brings the left side surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b into contact with the right side surface of the left outer frame member 11. With the lower surface of the horizontal fixing part 13a aligned with the lower end of the left outer frame member 11, screws are screwed into the upper horizontal fixing part 13b from the outside of the left side of the left outer frame member 11. It is attached to the left frame member 11. In addition, the lower left connecting member 13 allows the horizontal fixing part 13a to come into contact with the upper surface of the left end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and inserts the lower horizontal fixing part 13c into the notch part 41a on the left side of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing screws into the outer frame lower member 41 through the horizontal fixing part 13a and the lower horizontal fixing part 13c.

Next, the outer frame right assembly 20 includes an outer frame right member 21 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper right connecting member attached to the upper end of the left side of the outer frame right member 21. 22, the lower right connecting member 23 attached to the lower end of the left side of the outer frame right member 21, the upper hooking member 24 attached to the upper left side of the outer frame right member 21, and the outer frame right member 21. A lower hook member 25 is attached to the lower left side surface.

The outer frame right member 21 has a constant cross-sectional shape and extends vertically, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy material. The outer frame right member 21 has a recess 21a that is flat and recessed to the left in the rear part of the right side which is divided into three parts in the front-rear direction, and a recess 21a that is recessed flatly to the left on the left side from a part opposite to the recess 21a. It includes a bulged portion 21b that bulges out in the direction, and a hollow portion 21c that vertically penetrates the bulged portion 21b. The outer frame right member 21 has increased strength and rigidity due to the recessed portion 21a and the bulged portion 21b, and its weight is reduced due to the hollow portion 21c.

Further, the outer frame right member 21 has a plurality of grooves extending vertically formed on both left and right sides. The plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a V-shape, and the plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The right outer frame member 21 is formed to have a left-right symmetrical shape with the left outer frame member 11 of the left outer frame assembly 10.

The upper right connecting member 22 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper right connecting member 22 includes a flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing part 22a extending horizontally, a flat plate-shaped upper-lateral fixing part 22b extending upward from the middle in the front-rear direction on the right side of the horizontal fixing part 22a, and a horizontal fixing part A pair of flat-shaped lower lateral fixing parts 22c extend downward from both front and rear sides of the upper lateral fixing part 22b on the right side of the upper lateral fixing part 22a. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The upper right connecting member 22 has a lower horizontal fixing part 22c on the rear side inserted into the hollow part 21c of the outer frame right member 21, a horizontal fixing part 22a in contact with the upper end of the outer frame right member 21, and a front side and by screwing a screw from the outside of the right side of the outer frame right member 21 into the lower side fixing portion 22c with the rear lower side fixing portion 22c in contact with the left side of the outer frame right member 21. , is attached to the outer frame right member 21. In addition, the upper right connecting member 22 has the horizontal fixing part 22a abut against the lower surface of the right end side of the outer frame upper member 30, and the upper horizontal fixing part 22b is inserted into the notch 30a on the right side of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame upper member 30 by screwing screws into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing part 22a and the upper horizontal fixing part 22b.

The lower right connecting member 23 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 includes a flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing part 23a that extends horizontally, and a flat plate-shaped upper part that extends upward from the right side of the horizontal fixing part 23a and extends backward from the horizontal fixing part 23a. The horizontal fixing part 23b, the flat lower horizontal fixing part 23c extending downward from the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing part 23b on the rear side of the horizontal fixing part 23a, and the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing part 23b. The contact portion 23d has a flat plate shape and extends briefly to the left. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The lower right connecting member 23 brings the rear surface of the contact portion 23d into contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 21b of the outer frame right member 21, and also brings the right side surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b into the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. By screwing the screw into the upper horizontal fixing part 23b from the outside of the right side of the outer frame right member 21, with the lower surface of the horizontal fixing part 23a aligned with the lower end of the outer frame right member 21, It is attached to the outer frame right member 21. In addition, the lower right connecting member 23 has the horizontal fixing portion 23a abut against the upper surface of the right end side of the lower outer frame member 41, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c is inserted into the notch 41a on the right side of the lower outer frame member 41. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing screws into the outer frame lower member 41 through the horizontal fixing part 23a and the lower horizontal fixing part 23c.

The upper hooking member 24 and the lower hooking member 25 are hooked to an outer frame hook 653 of a locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4, which will be described later. The upper hooking member 24 includes a flat mounting portion 24a that extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction and is attached to the left side of the outer frame right member 21, and a flat mounting portion 24a that extends leftward from the front side of the mounting portion 24a. It includes a flat plate-shaped hook portion 24b on which the outer frame hook 653 on the upper side of the cage is hooked.

The lower hooking member 25 includes a flat mounting portion 25a that extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction and is attached to the left side of the outer frame right member 21, and extends leftward from the front side of the mounting portion 25a. There is a flat plate-shaped hooking piece 25b on which the lower outer frame hook 653 is hooked, and an insertion hole that passes through the hooking piece 25b back and forth and allows the lower outer frame hook 653 to be inserted therethrough. The opening 25c is provided.

[2-2. Upper outer frame member]
The outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 18. The outer frame upper member 30 is for connecting the upper ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20, which are separated from each other in the left and right directions. The outer frame upper member 30 has approximately the same width in the front-rear direction as the left outer frame member 11 and the right outer frame member 21, has a constant thickness in the vertical direction, extends in the left-right direction, and is made of wood. is formed by. The upper outer frame member 30 is formed to have the same length in the left-right direction as the length in the left-right direction of a lower outer frame member 41 of a lower outer frame assembly 40, which will be described later.

The outer frame upper member 30 is provided with notches 30a that penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The upper lateral fixing portion 12b of the upper left connecting member 12 and the upper lateral fixing portion 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are inserted and attached to the notches 30a at both left and right ends, respectively.

Further, the outer frame upper member 30 includes a mounting step portion 30b at the left end portion, the upper surface and the front surface of which are recessed relative to the general surface. An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50, which will be described later, is attached to this mounting step portion 30b.

[2-3. Outer frame lower assembly]
The lower outer frame assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 20. FIG. 20 is an exploded front perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame. The lower outer frame assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20, which are spaced apart laterally, and closes the lower side of the pachinko machine 1 than the door frame 3. It is for decoration.

The lower outer frame assembly 40 includes a lower outer frame member 41 that connects the lower ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20 that are spaced apart from each other in the left and right directions, and extends left and right. A box-shaped curtain front member 42 is disposed in front of the member 41 and extends left and right along the outer frame lower member 41 and is open at the rear, and is attached to the rear side of the curtain front member 42. There is also a box-shaped curtain plate rear member 43 that extends left and right and is attached to the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 and is open at the front. A mechanism 44 is provided.

The outer frame lower member 41 has approximately the same width in the front-rear direction as the left outer frame member 11 and the right outer frame member 21, has a constant thickness in the vertical direction, extends in the left-right direction, and is made of wood. is formed by. The outer frame lower member 41 is formed to have the same length in the left-right direction as the outer frame upper member 30 in the left-right direction.

The outer frame lower member 41 is provided with notches 41a that penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right sides. The lower lateral fixing portion 13c of the lower left connecting member 13 and the lower lateral fixing portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 are inserted and attached to the notches 41a at both left and right ends, respectively. Thereby, the lower ends of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 can be connected to each other.

Further, the outer frame lower member 41 is recessed from the upper surface, and includes a recess 41b into which the lower part of the curtain plate rear member 43 is inserted. The recess 41b extends left and right, and extends from a position near the rear of the center in the front-rear direction toward the front end. This recess 41b makes the volume of the curtain interior space 40a formed by the curtain front member 42 and the curtain rear member 43 as large as possible.

The curtain plate front member 42 extends in the left-right direction to the same length as the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in the shape of a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped box with a short depth in the front-rear direction relative to its height. The entire rear side is open. By closing the open rear side of the curtain plate front member 42 with the curtain plate rear member 43, the curtain plate front member 42 cooperates with the curtain plate rear member 43 to form a part of the curtain plate interior that becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. A space 40a is formed. The curtain front member 42 is provided with an elongated opening 42a on the front surface near the right end, penetrating back and forth and extending left and right.

The curtain plate rear member 43 has a length in the left-right direction that is slightly shorter than the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a box shape with an open front. By attaching the front curtain member 42 to its front surface, the rear curtain member 43 cooperates with the front curtain member 42 to form a curtain inner space 40a that becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622. The curtain plate rear member 43 has a cylindrical connecting cylinder portion 43a that extends left and right, projects upward, and communicates with the curtain plate internal space 40a, in the left-right center portion of the upper surface. The connecting tube portion 43a is inclined so that the upper end thereof is positioned upwardly toward the rear from the front end side that coincides with the general upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. In this embodiment, the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees.

The length of the connecting tube portion 43a in the left-right direction is approximately 1/3 of the length of the entire rear curtain plate member 43, and the depth in the front-rear direction is greater than the depth of the entire rear curtain plate member 43. It is also formed slightly shorter. A plurality of ribs 43b connecting the front end side and the rear end side are provided in the connecting cylinder portion 43a. When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 of the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 is connected to the upper end of this connecting cylinder portion 43a, and the speaker unit It is in communication with the internal space of 620a to form an enclosure 624.

The ball bite prevention mechanism 44 is configured such that the game ball B stays at the outer frame lower hinge member 60 at the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, so that the game ball B stays between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. This is to prevent them from being pinched.

The ball bite prevention mechanism 44 is formed at the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, and includes a mounting portion 44a formed flat so that an outer frame lower hinge member 60, which will be described later, is exposed, and a mounting portion. A first discharge port 44b that opens upward at the left end of the mounting section 44a, a second discharge port 44c that opens upward at the right side of the first discharge port 44b in the mounting section 44a, and A standing wall portion 44d extends upward from the rear side and right side of the placing portion 44a, and an upper end protrusion projects forward from the upper end of the standing wall portion 44d and slopes so that its upper surface is positioned upward as it goes rearward. A portion 44e is provided.

The first discharge port 44b is formed at a position that coincides with a discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60, which will be described later. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c are formed in a size that allows the game ball B to pass through. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c do not communicate with the curtain plate internal space 40a, and are open to the rear surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. Therefore, the game balls B that have entered the first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43.

This ball-biting prevention mechanism 44 is designed to prevent an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire from being inserted through the gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, which will be described later. The vertical wall portion 44d rising from the rear end of the mounting portion 44a can prevent unauthorized tools from entering. Even if the tip of an unauthorized tool were to come into contact with the standing wall portion 44d and bend upward, it would come into contact with the forwardly protruding upper end protrusion 44e provided at the upper end of the standing wall portion 44d, preventing further intrusion. can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from occurring through the portion of the lower outer frame hinge member 60.

By the way, when the rear end of the placing part 44a is provided with the standing wall part 44d, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the game balls B that have fallen onto the placing part 44a for some reason may be removed from the standing wall part. 44d prevents the outer frame 2 from moving backward, making it easier for the game balls B to stay on the placing portion 44a. If the game balls B remain on the mounting portion 44a, the game balls B may be caught between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. This causes a problem that the body frame 4 cannot be closed.

On the other hand, in the ball bite prevention mechanism 44 of the present embodiment, the game ball B that has fallen onto the outer frame lower hinge member 60 or the mounting portion 44a is removed between the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the first Through the discharge port 44b or through the second discharge port 44c, the game ball B can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43 (to the rear of the outer frame 2), and between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being pinched.

The lower outer frame assembly 40 includes a pair of guide members 45 that are spaced apart from each other in the left and right directions on the upper surfaces of the front curtain member 42 and the rear curtain member 43, and closes the opening 42a of the front curtain member 42 from the rear side. A port member 47 having two cylinders extending back and forth is attached to the inside of the curtain front member 42 so as to sandwich the grill member 46 and close the opening 42a. , and a frame-shaped sealing member 48 disposed at the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43.

The pair of guide members 45 come into contact with the lower ends of the door frame 3 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. The guide member 45 is made of a low-friction material with low frictional resistance, and makes the lower end of the main body frame 4 slippery to facilitate opening and closing.

The grill member 46 has a strip-like shape extending in the left-right direction, and has a plurality of blade portions 46b provided at intervals in the vertical direction. The blade portion 46b is provided in an inclined state so that the front end side is higher than the rear end side (see FIG. 47). This grill member 46 allows ventilation between the inside of the curtain front member 42 (curtain interior space 40a) and the outside through the gaps between the blade portions 46b.

The port member 47 is formed of two cylinders and communicates the curtain plate internal space 40a (enclosure 624) with the front of the outer frame 2 through the gap between the blade portions 46b of the grill member 46. The port member 47 is formed of two cylinders having a predetermined inner diameter and a predetermined length, and resonates and amplifies the bass emitted from the main body frame speaker 622 to the rear (inside the enclosure 624) based on the principle of Helmholtz resonance. As a result, rich bass can be radiated to the front of the outer frame 2 (towards the player). That is, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, so that the player can hear deep bass sounds.

The sealing member 48 is compressed by being sandwiched between the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a and the lower end of the connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 in the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. This prevents the sound inside the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 from leaking between the connecting tube portion 43a and the connecting portion 621c.

According to the grill member 46 of this embodiment, the plurality of inclined blades 46b transmit the air vibrations emitted from the curtain plate inner space 40a to the outside by the main body frame speaker 622 to the handle cover unit 290 located diagonally above and in front. The handle unit 180 can be directed into the front cylinder part 291a of the handle cover base 291 in which the handle unit 180 is accommodated through the cutout opening 295b on the lower side of the handle cover 295. As a result, when the player inserts his/her finger inside the handle cover 295 (front cylinder part 291a of the handle cover base 291) and rotates the handle 195 (game ball B driving device), the main body frame By vibrating the speaker 622 and sending air into the front cylinder part 291a, the player can be surprised and an unprecedented performance can be performed.

Furthermore, since the port member 47 is opened toward the front, a portion of the sound pressure emitted from the port member 47 through the plurality of blades 46b of the grill member 46 is emitted forward. Therefore, it is not released from the port member 47 to the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 or to other players who are roaming around the gaming hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Since the performance sound can be heard, the interest of the players can be attracted by the performance sound, and a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to the players can be provided.

Furthermore, since the port member 47 is provided in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 with respect to the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 provided in the main body frame 4, the volume of the enclosure 624 can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to output sound with deeper bass, thereby entertaining the players and preventing them from losing interest.

[2-4. Outer frame upper hinge assembly]
The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 21. FIG. 21(a) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame as seen from the front top, and FIG. 21(b) is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 21(a) seen from the front bottom. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and is used to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 in a hinge-rotatable manner. It is. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 includes an outer frame upper hinge member 51 that is attached to the upper end of the recess 11a of the outer frame left member 11 and the mounting step 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and an outer frame upper hinge member 51 that is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51. The lock member 52 is provided with a lock member 52 and a mounting screw 53 that attaches the lock member 52 to the outer frame upper hinge member 51.

The outer frame upper hinge member 51 has an upper fixing part 51a that is horizontally extended, is attached to the upper surface of the mounting step 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and extends forward from the front side of the upper fixing part 51a. A flat plate-shaped front extension part 51b, a bearing groove 51c that extends from the middle of the right side of the front extension part 51b toward the left and right center of the front extension part 51b toward the front and passes through it vertically, and an upper fixing part. A flat horizontal fixing part 51d extends downward from the left side of the front extension part 51a, and a flat horizontal fixing part 51d extends downward from the left edge of the front extension part 51b to the area where the bearing groove 51c opens around the front side. It includes a flat plate-shaped end wall portion 51e that is continuous with the cage horizontal fixing portion 51d. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 can rotatably support a body frame upper hinge pin 512, which will be described later, of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 within the bearing groove 51c.

The lock member 52 includes a band-shaped lock body 52a extending back and forth, an operation piece 52b protruding rightward from the rear end of the lock body 52a, and a rear end extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 52a. The lock body 52a includes a rod-shaped elastic portion 52c that is elastically deformable and extends obliquely to the left front, and an attachment hole 52d that penetrates vertically near the rear end of the lock body 52a. The lock member 52 is made of synthetic resin. The locking member 52 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the front extending portion 51b of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 at a portion on the rear side of the bearing groove 51c using an attachment screw 53.

When the lock member 52 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51, the lock main body 52a can block the bearing groove 51c in plan view, and the right side near the front end is at the end of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. It extends forward so as to be able to come into contact with a portion of the edge wall 51e that extends to the opening of the bearing groove 51c. Further, the tip of the elastic portion 52c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 52a is in contact with the inner circumferential surface of the edge wall portion 51e of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. The front end of the locking member 52 is biased by the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c in a direction to rotate leftward about the attachment hole 52d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock member 52 near the front end of the lock body 52a is in contact with the edge wall portion 51e. In this state, a space capable of accommodating the main body frame hinge pin 512 of the main body frame hinge member 510 is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 51c on the front side of the lock body 52a.

The lock member 52 can rotate the lock body 52a against the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c by operating the operating piece 52b. Then, by operating the operating piece 52b, the lock body 52a is rotated in a direction in which its front end moves to the left, so that the lock body 52a can be retreated from the bearing groove 51c in a plan view. can be in a state where it is completely passed through. Thereby, the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 can be inserted into the bearing groove 51c, and the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 can be removed from the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Outer frame lower hinge member]
The lower outer frame hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 18. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 includes a flat plate-shaped horizontal part 60a that extends horizontally, and a flat plate-shaped raised part 60b that rises upward from a part on the left side of the horizontal part 60a on the rear side of the center in the front-rear direction. , an outer frame lower hinge pin 60c protruding upward from near the front end of the horizontal part 60a, and a discharge hole 60d penetrating the horizontal part 60a vertically and having a size that allows only one game ball B to pass through. ing. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 60a of the lower outer frame hinge member 60 is formed into a trapezoid with the left side as the base in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c has a cylindrical shape, and is formed into a truncated cone shape with a narrowed upper end above the center in the vertical direction. This outer frame lower hinge pin 60c is attached to a left-side position near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. The discharge hole 60d is formed in the horizontal portion 60a so as to be in contact with the central portion of the upright portion 60b in the front-rear direction, and to extend from the left side of the horizontal portion 60a to the right in an inverted U-shape. This discharge hole 60d is formed to have substantially the same size as the first discharge port 44b of the ball-biting prevention mechanism 44 in the lower outer frame assembly 40.

When the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is assembled to the outer frame 2, the rear part of the horizontal part 60a is placed on the mounting part 44a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40, and screws (not shown) are installed. It is fixed to the curtain plate rear member 43 by. Further, the upright portion 60b is attached to a portion of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 on the front side of the bulging portion 11b with screws (not shown). This outer frame lower hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c into the outer frame lower hinge hole 521a in the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable.

Further, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 60d is aligned with the first discharge port 44b of the ball-biting prevention mechanism 44 in the lower outer frame assembly 40. Thereby, the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a can be dropped (discharged) to the rear of the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge port 44b. To be more specific, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B that fell between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 is moved between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame as the main body frame 4 is closed. 4 gradually becomes narrower, it rolls toward the rear where the gap is wider, and it can be discharged from the discharge hole 60d. At this time, the discharge hole 60d is formed at a position that is approximately the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the assembled state of the pachinko machine 1. By discharging the game ball B that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the discharge hole 60d, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball B from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4, and the outer frame The game ball B can be made difficult to stay at the lower hinge member 60.

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 to 30. FIG. 22 is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine, FIG. 23 is a rear view of the door frame, FIG. 24 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 25 is a right side view of the door frame. FIG. 26 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into its main members and seen from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into its main members and seen from the back.

The door frame 3 is approximately the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2 and is formed into a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and is attached so that the inside of the outer frame 2 can be opened and closed from the front via the main body frame 4. It is being The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game balls B are driven so as to be visible from the front side, stores the game balls B to be driven into the game area 5a, and stores the stored game balls. It is equipped with a handle 195 that is operated by the player to drive the ball B into the gaming area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

The door frame 3 includes a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 with a rectangular outer shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a game board 5 that is removably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and attached to the main body frame 4. A glass unit 160 that visually closes the gaming area 5a from the front, a security cover 170 that is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear side, and the door frame base unit 100 , a handle cover unit 290 that covers the outer periphery of the handle unit 180 , a pan unit 200 attached to the lower front of the door frame base unit 100 , and the upper side of the pan unit 200 . a door frame left side unit 420 attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100, and a door frame right side unit 430 attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 above the dish unit; The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 420 and the door frame right side unit 430.

The door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame base 101 having a square (rectangular) shape extending vertically when viewed from the front and having a door window 101a penetrating back and forth, and a rear side of the door frame base 101. The speaker duct 103 attached to the lower right corner in rear view, the door frame main relay board 104 installed near the right end in rear view at the lower rear side of door frame base 101, and the back side of door frame main relay board 104. The door frame sub-relay board 105 attached to the left side in view, the handle rear relay board 106 attached to the left side of the door frame sub-relay board 105 in rear view, the door frame main relay board 104, and the door frame sub-relay board 105. A door frame relay board cover 107 that covers a part of the board 105 from the rear side, a handle rear relay board cover 108 that covers the handle rear relay board 106 from the rear side, and a cable cover 109 that covers the wiring cable. We are prepared.

The door frame base unit 100 also includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcement unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and a door frame-shaped door frame reinforcement unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101. A lower frame hinge member 125, a cylinder lock 130 for opening and closing attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached above the rear handle relay board 106 on the rear side of the door frame base 101. and a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side in rear view at the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the door frame base 101 and provide rigidity. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 are for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. The cylinder lock 130 cooperates with the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 and is used to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is for feeding the game balls B in the upper tray 201 one by one to the ball firing device 540 of the main body frame 4. The foul cover unit 150 guides game balls B (foul balls) that have been fired by the ball firing device 540 but have not reached the gaming area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower tray 202, and also guides the game balls B (foul balls) that have been fired by the ball firing device 540 but have not reached the gaming area 5a of the game board 5, and also guides the game balls B (foul balls) that have been fired by the ball firing device 540 and not reached the gaming area 5a of the game board 5. This is for guiding the game balls B to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202.

The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. The security cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear. The handle unit 180 includes a handle 195 that can be rotated by the player, and by operating a handle cover unit 290 that covers the outer periphery, the handle unit 180 moves the game ball B in the upper tray 201 to the ball launcher. 540 to play a game by hitting into the game area 5a of the game board 5.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. 31(a) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame seen from the front, and FIG. 31(b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit seen from the back. Fig. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into its main parts and viewed from the front, and Fig. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into its main parts and seen from the back. be.

The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the main body frame 4 on the left side in a front view so that the hinge can rotate, and the front side of the main body frame 4 is closed so as to be openable and closable, and the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 The gaming area 5a is visible from the front. The door frame base unit 100 includes a flat door frame base 101 with a rectangular shape extending vertically, and a speaker duct 103 attached to the lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101 in a rear view. .

The door frame base unit 100 also includes a door frame main relay board 104 attached near the right end in rear view of the rear lower part of the door frame base 101, and a door frame main relay board 104 installed at the rear lower part of the door frame base 101. A door frame sub-relay board 105 attached to the left side of the board 104 when viewed from the rear, and a handle rear relay board attached to the left side of the door frame sub-relay board 105 at the rear lower part of the door frame base 101. 106, a door frame relay board cover 107 that is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the door frame base 101. A handle rear relay board cover 108 is attached to the rear side and covers the handle rear relay board 106 from the rear side, and a cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers the wiring cable. We are prepared.

Furthermore, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a door. A lower frame hinge member 125, a cylinder lock 130 for opening and closing attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached above the rear handle relay board 106 on the rear side of the door frame base 101. and a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side in rear view at the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

This door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 180 and a handle cover unit 290 at the lower front corner, a plate unit 200 at the lower front of the door window 101a, and a door frame left side unit 420 at the left outer front of the door window 101a. A door frame right side unit 430 is attached to the right outer front surface of the door window 101a, and a door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the door window 101a.

Furthermore, a glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from the rear, and a transparent security cover 170 is attached to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear. .

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame base 101 has a square (rectangular) shape that extends vertically when viewed from the front. The door frame base 101 is provided with a door window 101a that penetrates the door frame base 101 in the front and back, and has a substantially rectangular inner peripheral shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. In the door window 101a, the upper side forming the inner periphery and both left and right sides are close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 101, respectively, and the lower side forming the inner periphery is located above and below the lower end of the door frame base 101. It is located at about 1/3 of the height in the direction. In this way, the door frame base 101 is entirely formed into a frame shape with the door window 101a penetrating back and forth. This door frame base 101 is integrally molded from synthetic resin.

The door frame base 101 has a handle mounting seat surface 101b (see FIG. 42, etc.) formed at the lower right corner of the front surface in front view and inclined so that the left end side protrudes slightly forward than the right end side, and a handle mounting seat surface 101b (see FIG. 42, etc.). A cylinder insertion hole 101d that penetrates back and forth between the seat surface 101b and the door window 101a and into which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is inserted, and the left side of the cylinder insertion hole 101d and the handle mounting seat surface 101b when viewed from the front. It is provided with a ball feeding opening 101e that penetrates in the front and back and allows the entrance 141a and the ball exit 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 to face forward.

Further, the door frame base 101 is located to the left of the center in the lateral direction and penetrates in the front and back at approximately the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b, so that the ball for the lower tray faces forward. A passage opening 101f, an upper plate ball passage opening 101g that penetrates back and forth so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the door window 101a near the left end in a front view and allow the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 to face forward, and the door. The window 101a includes a glass unit mounting portion 101h that is recessed from the rear surface toward the front along the inner periphery of the window 101a, and into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted.

Further, the door frame base 101 includes a plurality of vertically elongated slits 101i that are formed in the lower left corner (below the upper plate ball passage hole 101g) when viewed from the front and that penetrate through the door frame base 101 in the front and back. A speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the plurality of slits 101i. Furthermore, when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the plurality of slits 101i are arranged so that the speaker port 211b of the dish unit base 211 of the dish unit 200 is located in the front, and the main body frame of the speaker unit 620a of the main body frame 4 is located in the rear. A speaker 622 is located, and the sound from the main body frame speaker 622 can be radiated forward.

Furthermore, the door frame base 101 is provided with a through hole 101j that penetrates from the front to the rear below the door window 101a and above the handle attachment seat surface 101b. A wiring cable (not shown) connecting the door frame base unit 100 side and the pan unit 200 side is inserted through the through hole 101j, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, which will be described later, is inserted through the through hole 101j. It is formed to match the portion 114b.

[3-1b. Speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. This speaker duct 103 is formed in a cylindrical shape and is attached to a portion on the rear side of the door frame base 101 where a plurality of slits 101i are formed. The rear end of the cylindrical portion of the speaker duct 103 is located in front of the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. Thereby, the sound radiated (output) from the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused, and the sound emitted from the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused. Through the speaker port 211b of the tray unit base 211, it is possible to guide the player to the front of the pachinko machine 1 (towards the player).

Further, the speaker duct 103 includes a cable holder 103a that holds the connection cable 503 on the lower rear surface of the cylindrical portion. The cable holder 103a is disposed to the left of the door frame relay board cover 107 in front view, and connects the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 to the door frame 3. It is held so that it extends to the left end.

[3-1c. Door frame main relay board, door frame sub relay board, handle rear relay board]
The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub relay board 105, and the handle rear relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be explained with reference mainly to FIGS. 32, 33, and the like. The door frame main relay board 104 has a rectangular shape extending vertically, and is attached to the lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101 in a rear view. The door frame main relay board 104 is for relaying the connection between the handle rear relay board 106 and the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and connects the connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 (Fig. and FIG. 83) are connected.

The door frame sub-relay board 105 has an inverted L-shape in which a rectangle extending left and right is combined on the right side in front view of the upper part of a rectangle extending vertically. It is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to be adjacent to the left side of the door frame main relay board 104 in rear view. The door frame sub relay board 105 includes the handle decoration board 184 of the handle unit 180, the dish unit relay board 214 of the dish unit 200, the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 of the door frame left side unit 420, and the door frame left side lower decorative board. 423, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 of the door frame right side unit 430, the door frame top relay board etc. of the door frame top unit 450, and the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4. It is for relaying the connection, and the rest of the connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 is connected.

The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 so that the connection terminals protrude rearward. When the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are assembled, the vertically extending parts of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105. The rear side is covered by the frame relay board cover 107, and the rear side of the remaining portion of the door frame sub relay board 105 is covered by the foul cover unit 150.

The handle rear relay board 106 has a rectangular outer shape extending left and right, and is attached to the rear side of the handle attachment seat surface 101b below the ball feeding opening 101e on the rear side of the door frame base 101. The handle rear relay board 106 connects the door frame main relay board 104 with the handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192, the single button operation sensor 194, and the ball feed solenoid 145 of the ball feed unit 140. It is for relaying. The rear side of the handle rear relay board 106 is covered with the handle rear relay board cover 108 when the door frame base unit 100 is assembled.

[3-1d. Door frame relay board cover/handle rear relay board cover/cable cover]
The door frame relay board cover 107, the rear handle relay board cover 108, and the cable cover 109 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. By attaching the door frame relay board cover 107 to the rear side of the door frame base 101, the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub-relay board 105 (the part extending vertically in an inverted L shape) are covered. It covers the rear side. The door frame relay board cover 107 is formed into a box shape with an open front and left side in front view. When assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 that cover the rear side are exposed inside the door frame relay board cover 107, and cannot be opened. The connection cable 503 can be inserted into the interior from the left side where it is located, and connected to these terminals.

The handle rear relay board cover 108 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the rear side of the handle rear relay board 106. The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and carries a wiring cable (not shown) that connects the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball lending operation unit 220 of the pan unit 200. It is for covering. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box shape extending left and right, and has an opening for passing a wiring cable through near the left end of the front surface and in the center of the bottom surface in the left and right direction.

[3-1e. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcing unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat door frame base 101 and provide rigidity to the door frame base unit 100. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 includes a left reinforcing frame 111 and a right reinforcing frame 112 that extend vertically and are spaced apart from each other, and a left and right reinforcing frame 111 and a right reinforcing frame 112 that connect the upper ends of the left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 to each other. An extended upper reinforcing frame 113, an intermediate reinforcing frame 114 whose left end side is attached to a position above the lower end of the left reinforcing frame 111 and extending rightward to near the right reinforcing frame 112, and a right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114. A cylinder mounting frame 115 that connects the right reinforcing frame 112 and a plurality of cylinder mounting frames 115 are attached to the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 at vertically spaced intervals, and the door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 are engaged. The hook member 116 is provided with a hook member 116.

The left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction and extend vertically with substantially the same length as the vertical height of the door frame base 101. A plurality of insertion holes are formed in the right reinforcing frame 112, which are spaced apart in the vertical direction and penetrate in the front-back direction. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the tip of the door frame hook 652 of the locking unit 650 is inserted through these insertion holes. The upper reinforcing frame 113 has a constant width in the vertical direction and extends left and right with substantially the same length as the left and right width of the door frame base 101.

The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extends left and right with a vertical width that is wider than the vertical width of the upper reinforcing frame 113. The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 has a notch 114a that is cut out in a square shape downward from the upper end near the left end, and a penetration part 114b that penetrates back and forth near the right end. The cutout portion 114a is formed at a position that corresponds to the upper plate ball passage opening 101g of the door frame base 101, and the penetration portion 114b is formed at a position that corresponds to the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101, respectively.

The cylinder mounting frame 115 includes a pair of rear pieces that are spaced apart from each other laterally and are formed in the shape of a rectangular flat plate that extends vertically when viewed from the front, and each of the pair of rear pieces facing each other. It includes a pair of side pieces extending forward from the sides in a flat plate shape, and a flat front piece connecting the front end sides of the pair of front extension parts. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is formed into a convex shape that protrudes forward in a plan view. In the cylinder mounting frame 115, the left rear piece is attached to the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, and the right rear piece is attached to the right reinforcing frame 112. A cylinder lock 130 is attached to the front piece of this cylinder attachment frame 115.

The hooking member 116 is attached to the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 at a portion of an insertion hole penetrating back and forth. A door frame hook 652 of a locking unit 650 is hooked to these hook members 116 .

The left reinforcing frame 111, right reinforcing frame 112, upper reinforcing frame 113, intermediate reinforcing frame 114, cylinder mounting frame 115, and hooking member 116, which constitute the door frame reinforcing unit 110, are made by punching metal plates by press molding. It is formed by bending. These are assembled with rivets.

In the door frame reinforcing unit 110, a left reinforcing frame 111, a right reinforcing frame 112, and an upper reinforcing frame 113 are assembled along the left, right, and upper sides of the door frame base 101, and an intermediate reinforcing frame 114 is assembled. , is assembled so as to be located below the door window 101a of the door frame base 101.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 using a plurality of screws (not shown). When this door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the door frame base 101, the notch part 114a and the penetrating part 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 are aligned with the upper plate ball passage opening 101g and the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101. At the same time, the cylinder mounting frame 115 is inserted into the cylinder insertion hole 101d of the door frame base 101.

[3-1f. Door frame upper hinge assembly]
The door frame hinge assembly 120 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is attached to the upper left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be hinge-rotatable in cooperation with the door frame lower hinge member 125. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 includes a hinge bracket 121 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, a door frame upper hinge pin 122 attached to the hinge bracket 121 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and a collar attached to the door frame upper hinge pin 122. A member 123, and a lock spring 124 that biases the door frame upper hinge pin 122 to move upward.

The hinge bracket 121 includes a flat mounting piece 121a that is rectangular in front view, and flat protruding pieces 121b extending forward from the upper and lower sides of the mounting piece 121a. A mounting piece 121a of the hinge bracket 121 is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

The door frame upper hinge pin 122 is a cylindrical metal rod bent into an L-shape. When the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is assembled to the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the vertically extending portion penetrates from below near the front ends of the pair of protruding pieces 121b of the hinge bracket 121, and the upper end extends from the upper side. A horizontally extending portion that extends upward from the protruding piece 121b is in contact with the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge body 511 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4.

The collar member 123 is an E-ring, and is attached to a portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 between the pair of protruding pieces 121b. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape, and is placed around the vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 between the collar member 123 and the lower protruding piece 121b of the hinge bracket 121. The lock spring 124 urges the door frame upper hinge pin 122 upward via the collar member 123.

In the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is urged upward by the lock spring 124, and the horizontally extending lower end portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is a lower protruding piece. By contacting the lower surface of 121b, further upward movement is restricted. In this state, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 protrudes above the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b by a predetermined amount.

In the door frame hinge assembly 120, when the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is moved downward against the biasing force of the lock spring 124, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is moved as a whole. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 can be retracted below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b. Therefore, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 cannot be inserted into or pulled out from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510. can. As a result, by inserting the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 into the upper door frame hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510, the upper left end of the door frame 3 when viewed from the front can be hingedly rotated with respect to the main body frame 4. It can be supported as much as possible.

Further, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, a vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is located coaxially with a door frame lower hinge pin 126 of a door frame lower hinge member 125, which will be described later. Thereby, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 allow the door frame 3 to be hinge-rotated relative to the main body frame 4 in a good condition.

[3-1g. Door frame lower hinge member]
The door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the lower left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in a hinge-rotatable manner in cooperation with the door frame upper hinge assembly 120.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 includes a flat mounting piece 125a that is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and is square in front view, a flat plate-like protruding piece 125b extending forward from the lower side of the mounting piece 125a, and a protruding piece. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 (see FIG. 22, etc.) protrudes downward from the lower surface near the front end of the door frame 125b.

The mounting piece 125a and the protruding piece 125b of the door frame lower hinge member 125 are formed by bending a metal plate. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 is a cylindrical metal rod, and has a tapered chamfer on the outer periphery of the lower end. When the door frame lower hinge pin 126 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the door frame lower hinge pin 126 is located at a portion of the protruding piece 125b that is coaxial with the vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120. installed.

This door frame lower hinge member 125 allows the door frame 3 to hinge relative to the main body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame lower hinge hole 522a of the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520. can be supported.

[3-1h. Cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 to 36. Figure 34 (a) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of the door frame seen from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of (a) seen from the back and front, and (c) is a perspective view of a conventional pachinko machine. FIG. 3(d) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock in FIG. 1 as seen from the front, and FIG. FIG. 35(a) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34(a) taken apart and seen from the front, and FIG. 35(b) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34(a) taken apart and seen from the back. It is a diagram. FIG. 36(a) is an explanatory view showing the movable mechanism of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34(a) from the front, and FIG. 36(b) shows the state rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 34(a). It is an explanatory view of a cylinder lock, and (c) is an explanatory view of the cylinder lock shown in a state rotated 90 degrees clockwise from the state of (a).

The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and cooperates with the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4. It is used for opening/closing and locking the frame 4. The cylinder lock 130 includes a cylindrical cylinder body 131 extending back and forth, a keyhole 132 formed in the front end surface of the cylinder body 131, and a regular key hole 132 provided at the rear of the cylinder body 131 and inserted into the keyhole 132. It includes a rotation transmission member 133 that rotates when the key is rotated.

The cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 passes through the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115 from the rear, and its rear end is attached to the front piece. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed into a cylindrical shape (more specifically, a conical tube shape whose diameter increases toward the rear) with an open rear end, and is formed from the rear end toward the front at opposing positions across the central axis. It has a pair of notches. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed so that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from the rear, and when the pair of protrusions of the transmission cylinder 654 are inserted into the pair of notches, the rotation is transmitted. The rotation of the transmission member 133 (the key inserted into the keyhole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 and rotated.

More specifically, the cylinder lock 130 includes a first cam member 134 that is provided on the rear end side of the cylinder body 131 and rotates when a regular key inserted into the keyhole 132 is rotated, and a cylinder mounting frame 115. A second cam member 135 is attached rotatably around an axis in the front-rear direction at a lower part than the cylinder body 131, and the upper end side rotates at a part to the right of the rotation center of the first cam member 134. A first arm 136 in the form of a band plate, whose lower end side is rotatably attached at a portion to the right of the rotation center of the second cam member 135, and whose upper end side is rotatably attached to the right side of the rotation center of the second cam member 135; A second arm 137 in the form of a band plate is rotatably attached at a position below the center and whose lower end side is rotatably attached at a position below the center of rotation of the second cam member 135. ing.

Further, the cylinder lock 130 is mounted on a cylinder mounting frame so as to cover the cylinder body 131, the first cam member 134, the first arm 136, and the second arm 137 from the rear except for the second cam member 135 (rotation transmission member 133). Rivets rotatably attach the rear cover 138 attached to the rear cover 115 and both upper and lower ends of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 to the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, respectively. 139.

In the first cam member 134, the upper end side of the first arm 136 is attached to the rear side, and the upper end side of the second arm 137 is attached to the front side. The second cam member 135 is rotatably attached to the cylinder attachment frame 115 from the rear side, and the rotation transmission member 133 is attached to the rear side of the cylinder attachment frame 115 so as to be rotatable therewith. The second cam member 135 has the lower end side of the first arm 136 attached to the front side, and the lower end side of the second arm 137 is attached to the front side ahead of the first arm 136.

In each of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, a portion to which the first arm 136 is attached and a portion to which the second arm 137 is attached are separated by an angle of 90 degrees around the respective rotation axis. are doing. Further, in each of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, a portion to which the first arm 136 is attached is provided at a position farther from the center of rotation than a portion to which the second arm 137 is attached. .

The rear cover 138 has a shaft portion 138a protruding outward from the lower ends of the left and right sides in a cylindrical shape and is locked in the L-shaped locking slit 115b of the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the upper end side is fitted with a screw (not shown). It is removably attached to the cylinder attachment frame 115.

In this cylinder lock 130, a cylinder mounting frame 115, a cylinder body 131, a rotation transmission member 133, a first cam member 134, a second cam member 135, a first arm 136, and a second arm 137 are formed of metal. .

When the cylinder lock 130 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the cylinder body 131 is approximately aligned with the front end of the cylinder insertion opening 440b of the door frame right side unit 430.

Here, the conventional cylinder lock 130A will be explained. In the conventional cylinder lock 130A, as shown in FIGS. 34(c) and 34(d), the cylinder body 131 passes through the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115A from the rear and the rear end is attached to the front piece. There is. In this cylinder lock 130A, a rotation transmission member 133 is provided on the axis of a cylinder body 131.

Next, the operation of the cylinder lock 130 of this embodiment will be explained. As shown in FIGS. 34(c) and 34(d), the conventional cylinder lock 130 has a rotation transmitting member 133 on the axis of the cylinder body 131, whereas the cylinder lock 130 of this embodiment As shown in FIGS. 34(a) and 34(b), a rotation transmitting member 133 is provided at a position spaced downward from the axis of the cylinder body 131.

In the normal state of this cylinder lock 130, as shown in FIG. At the same time, both upper and lower ends of the second arm 137 are attached to positions below the respective rotation centers of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135. The cylinder body 131 can be rotated clockwise and counterclockwise at an angle of 90 degrees from a normal state using a regular key.

In this state, when the first cam member 134 is rotated counterclockwise via the cylinder of the cylinder body 131 with the key inserted into the keyhole 132, the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 move upward. It happens. At this time, since the upper end side of the first arm 136 is attached to the right of the rotation center of the first cam member 134, the second cam member 135 should be rotated counterclockwise by the first arm 136. On the other hand, since the upper end of the second arm 137 is attached below the center of rotation of the first cam member 134, the second cam member 135 is There is almost no force trying to rotate it clockwise.

In this way, when the first cam member 134 rotates counterclockwise from the normal state, force is transmitted mainly through the first arm 136, and the second cam member 135 rotates counterclockwise. direction, and the rotation transmission member 133 rotates together with the second cam member 135. The force acting upward due to the counterclockwise rotation of the first cam member 134 is applied to the portion where the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are attached to the first cam member 134, and the portion where the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are attached to the first cam member It is proportional to the distance in the left-right direction from the center of rotation of 134. Therefore, as the first cam member 134 rotates counterclockwise from the normal state, the force acting upward on the first arm 136 becomes smaller, whereas the force acting upward on the second arm 137 decreases. The power to do so increases.

Therefore, if the rotation angle of the first cam member 134 in the counterclockwise direction from the normal state exceeds 45 degrees, the force acting upward on the second arm 137 will be larger than that on the first arm 136. , the second cam member 135 is rotated counterclockwise mainly via the second arm 137. Then, the key inserted into the keyhole 132 can be rotated counterclockwise up to an angle of 90 degrees from the normal state (see FIG. 36(b)).

In addition, when the key is used to return to the normal state by rotating the key 90 degrees counterclockwise from the normal state to the normal state by rotating the key 90 degrees clockwise, an action opposite to that described above is used. It will work.

On the other hand, when the first cam member 134 is rotated in the clockwise direction via the cylinder of the cylinder body 131 with the key inserted into the keyhole 132 from the normal state, the upper end side is to the right of the rotation center of the first cam member 134. The first arm 136 attached to the first cam member 134 moves downward, and the second arm 137 whose upper end is attached below the center of rotation of the first cam member 134 moves upward. At this time, since the upper end side of the first arm 136 is attached to the right of the rotation center of the first cam member 134, the first arm 136 attempts to rotate the second cam member 135 in the clockwise direction. On the other hand, since the upper end side of the second arm 137 is attached below the center of rotation of the first cam member 134, the second cam member 135 can be rotated clockwise from the second arm 137. There is hardly any force trying to rotate it in the direction of.

In this way, when the first cam member 134 rotates in the clockwise direction from the normal state, force is transmitted mainly through the first arm 136, and the second cam member 135 rotates in the clockwise direction. The second cam member 135 rotates, and the rotation transmission member 133 rotates together with the second cam member 135. The force that transmits the rotation of the first cam member 134 by the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 to the second cam member 135 is transmitted to the portion where the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are attached to the first cam member 134. and the rotation center of the first cam member 134 in the left-right direction. Therefore, as the first cam member 134 rotates clockwise from the normal state, the force that attempts to rotate the second cam member 135 becomes smaller in the first arm 136, whereas In the arm 137, the force that attempts to rotate the second cam member 135 increases.

Therefore, if the rotation angle of the first cam member 134 in the clockwise direction from the normal state exceeds 45 degrees, the second arm 137 will rotate the second cam member 135 more than the first arm 136. The force increases, and the second cam member 135 rotates in the clockwise direction mainly via the second arm 137. Then, the key inserted into the keyhole 132 can be rotated clockwise up to an angle of 90 degrees from the normal state (see FIG. 36(c)).

In addition, when the key is rotated 90 degrees clockwise from the normal state and then rotated 90 degrees clockwise to return to the normal state, the key operates in the opposite manner to the above. I will do it.

As described above, according to the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment, the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are attached with the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 in phase with each other at an angle of 90 degrees. Since the first cam member 134 (the key inserted into the keyhole 132) is connected at any rotational position, at least one of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 is connected to transmit the rotation. By transmitting the rotation, the second cam member 135 (rotation transmitting member 133) can be rotated, and the door frame 3 and main body frame 4 can be locked and unlocked effectively.

Moreover, according to the cylinder lock 130 of this embodiment, by transmitting rotation by the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 as a rotation transmission mechanism, the rotation transmission member 133 ( Since the axis of the transmission cylinder 654) of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 can be provided at different positions, the position of the cylinder main body 131 in the door frame 3 can be set to any desired position without changing the locking unit 650. The cylinder body 131 (keyhole 132) can be provided in a part that does not interfere with the decoration of the door frame 3, and the pachinko machine 1 with a highly decorative door frame 3 can be provided.

Further, as described above, even if the position of the cylinder body 131 in the door frame 3 is changed, there is no need to change the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4, so the locking unit 650 can be reused, and the pachinko machine 1 The increase in costs can be suppressed.

By the way, in the conventional cylinder lock 130A, since the rotation transmission member 133 is provided at the rear of the cylinder body 131, a fraudster who is aware of the configuration may insert a tool into the rear of the cylinder body 131 from the front. By illegally rotating the rotation transmission member 133 using the tool, there is a possibility that the door frame 3 may be opened and a fraudulent act may be carried out. On the other hand, the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment has the rotation transmitting member 133 located at a position away from the axis (backward) of the cylinder body 131, so that a tool cannot be inserted into the rear of the cylinder body 131. Even if an attempt is made to rotate the rotation transmission member 133, the rotation transmission member 133 cannot be rotated because the rotation transmission member 133 is not present in the relevant part, and the fraudulent act of opening the door frame 3, main body frame 4, etc. can be prevented from occurring.

Furthermore, in the cylinder lock 130, the second arm 137 connects the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 with respect to the first arm 136, which are separated by a rotation angle of 90 degrees. The portion of one arm 136 or the second arm 137 that is attached to the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 is a straight line connecting the center of the first cam member 134 and the center of the second cam member 135. Even if it is located above, the other of the first arm 136 or the second arm 137 connects the parts furthest from the straight line connecting the center of the first cam member 134 and the center of the second cam member 135. It becomes a state of being. Therefore, by having one of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 located at the dead center of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, rotation from the first cam member 134 is transferred to the second cam member 135. Even if the rotation cannot be transmitted, the other of the first arm 136 or the second arm 137 can transmit the rotation from the first cam member 134 to the second cam member 135. The key inserted into the keyhole 132 can be rotated smoothly without much resistance being applied to the rotation, making it easy to unlock and lock the lock, and without forcing the key inserted into the keyhole to be rotated. This can prevent the key from being damaged, and can prevent the key from being damaged.

In addition, since the two arms, the first arm 136 and the second arm 137, transmit the rotation of the key inserted into the keyhole 132 to the rotation transmission member 133 provided at an eccentric position, for some reason Therefore, even if one arm is damaged, rotation can be transmitted by the remaining arm, and a pachinko machine 1 having a highly reliable cylinder lock 130 can be provided.

Moreover, the rotation of the key inserted into the keyhole 132 is transmitted to the rotation transmission member 133 provided at an eccentric position by the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 having a smooth rod shape (band plate shape). Therefore, if the rotation is transmitted by a gear, there is a risk that the gear will rotate and the rotation transmission member 133 will be rotated by hooking the tip of the tool on the teeth of the gear. By making the arm 136 and the second arm 137 rod-shaped with smooth surfaces, the tip of the tool can be made difficult to get caught on the first arm 136 and the second arm 137, and the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 can be moved. By doing so, it is possible to avoid the rotation transmission member 133 from being rotated, and it is possible to reliably prevent the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 from being unlocked due to unauthorized operation of the locking unit 650. be able to.

Note that in the cylinder lock 130 of this embodiment, the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are used as the rotation transmission mechanism for transmitting the rotation of the first cam member 134 to the second cam member 135. , but is not limited to this, for example, a rotation transmission mechanism using multiple gears, a rotation transmission mechanism using gears and rack gears, a rotation transmission mechanism using sprockets and chains, a rotation transmission mechanism using pulleys and belts. , etc.

[3-1i. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38. FIG. 37(a) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit seen from the front, and FIG. 37(b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit seen from the back. FIG. 38(a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit seen from the front with the ball feeding unit disassembled, and FIG. 38(b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit seen from the rear with the rear case and tamper prevention member removed. be. The ball feeding unit 140 can feed the game balls B supplied from the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 one by one to the ball firing device 540 of the main body frame 4, and can also feed the game balls B supplied from the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 to the ball firing device 540 of the main body frame 4. The ball B can be pulled out to the lower tray 202 by operating the upper tray ball extraction button 222.

The ball feeding unit 140 has an inlet 141a through which the game balls B are fed from the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a ball outlet 141b that opens on the lower side of the inlet 141a. A game ball enters through the entry opening 141a of the box-shaped front cover 141 with an open front cover 141 and the box-shaped front cover 141 with the rear end of the front cover 141 closed and the front open, penetrating in the front-rear direction. A rear cover 142 having a batted ball supply port 142a for supplying B to the ball launcher 540, and a front cover rotatably supported between the rear cover 142 and the front cover 141 around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. A ball extracting member 143 having a partition part 143a that partitions between an entry port 141a and a ball extracting port 141b on the rear side of the ball extracting member 141, and a rear cover 142 for each game ball B on the partition part 143a of the ball extracting member 143. A ball feeding member 144 rotatably supported around an axis extending in the vertical direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 and the ball feeding member 144 are rotated. A ball feed solenoid 145 is provided.

As shown in the figure, in this ball feeding unit 140, when viewed from the front, a ball feeding member 144 is arranged on the right side of the entrance port 141a, and a ball extracting member 143 is arranged on the left side of the ball feeding member 144. Ball feeding solenoids 145 are arranged on the right side of the feeding member 144, respectively.

The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 is provided with an arc-shaped slit 141c formed concentrically with respect to the rotation center of the ball extraction member 143 on the left side of the ball extraction port 141b when viewed from the front. An operating rod 143c of a ball extracting member 143, which will be described later, extends forward from 141c. Further, the front cover 141 has an upper side extending upward from the upper edge of the entrance 141a, and when the door frame 3 is assembled, the ball feeding guide path 241b of the rear base 241 in the upper plate ball removal unit 240 The ball removal guiding path 241c is formed so as to close a portion opened to the rear on the upstream end side from the rear side.

The ball extraction member 143 has a partition portion 143a which partitions between the entrance port 141a and the ball extraction port 141b below the entrance port 141a and whose upper surface becomes lower toward the ball feeding member 144; Around a shaft that extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 144, bends in a dogleg shape from near the middle in the vertical direction toward the center of the lower side of the ball extraction port 141b, and has a lower end extending in the front-rear direction. A rotating rod portion 143b that is rotatably supported by the rotating rod portion 143b, a rod-shaped operating rod 143c protruding forward from the upper end of the rotating rod portion 143b, and a rotating rod portion 143b located below the operating rod portion 143c. A weight portion 143d protrudes from the side surface to the side opposite to the partition portion 143a. The operating rod 143c of the ball extraction member 143 is formed to protrude forward through an arcuate slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see FIG. 37(a)). The actuating rod 143c is located at the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper plate ball extracting slider 242 that moves downward through the ball feeding opening 101e of the door frame base 101 when the upper plate ball extracting button 222 of the plate unit 200 is pressed. (upper surface).

The ball feeding member 144 includes a blocking part 144a which is fan-shaped in plan view and is centered on a rotation axis extending in the vertical direction, facing toward the entry port 141a and the partition part 143a of the ball extracting member 143, and a blocking part 144a that is fan-shaped in plan view. It includes a ball holding part 144b recessed in an arc shape from the end toward the rotation axis, and a rod-shaped rod part 144c extending downward from the rear end of the ball holding part 144b. The blocking portion 144a and the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 are formed adjacent to each other within an angular range of about 180° around the rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 is sized to be able to hold one game ball B. The ball feeding member 144 rotates around the rotational axis by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145 to move the rod portion 144c, which is located eccentrically from the rotational axis, in the left-right direction.

This ball feeding member 144 has a supply position where the blocking part 144a faces the partition part 143a and at the same time the ball holding part 144b faces the direction in which it communicates with the batted ball supply port 142a, and the ball holding part 144b faces the partition part 143a. It is adapted to rotate between a holding position facing the direction. When the ball feeding member 144 is in the supply position, the game ball B held in the ball holding part 144b is supplied to the ball launching device 540 from the batted ball supply port 142a and enters onto the partition part 143a from the entrance port 141a. The game ball B is stopped from moving toward the ball holding part 144b (hitting ball supply port 142a) by the blocking part 144a, and remains on the partition part 143a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding part 144b faces the partition part 143a, and the end of the ball holding part 144b on the rod part 144c side closes the batted ball supply port 142a. Therefore, only one game ball B on the partition part 143a is held in the ball holding part 144b.

The ball feeding unit 140 also includes a ball feeding actuating rod 146 whose tip swings in the vertical direction when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (energized), and a tip of the ball feeding actuating rod 146 that swings in the vertical direction. The ball feeding crank 147 rotates around an axis extending in the front-back direction by the movement of the ball feeding member 144, and rotates the ball feeding member 144 around an axis extending in the vertical direction.

The ball feeding operating rod 146 includes an iron plate 146a below the ball feeding solenoid 145. The ball feed operating rod 146 extends left and right, and the end (right end) opposite to the ball feed crank 147 is attached to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending back and forth. It is being In the ball feeding operation rod 146, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the iron plate 146a is drawn toward (upward) the ball feeding solenoid 145 by the generated magnetic force, and the ball feeding operation rod 146 starts feeding the ball around the right end. The left end near the crank 147 rotates to move upward. After that, when the drive of the ball feed solenoid 145 is released, the magnetic force disappears and the weight of the iron plate 146a acts, causing the left end near the ball feed crank 147 to move downward, centering on the right end. It rotates and returns to its initial state. As a result, the left end (tip) of the ball feeding actuating rod 146, which is close to the ball feeding crank 147, swings in the vertical direction by the ball feeding solenoid 145.

The ball feeding crank 147 engages with an engaging portion 147a extending in the left-right direction and capable of engaging with the vertically moving tip of the ball feeding actuating rod 146, and the ball feeding actuating rod 146 of the engaging portion 147a. A shaft portion 147b that is disposed on the opposite side and is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and a shaft portion 147b that extends upward from the shaft portion 147b. , a transmission portion 147c that engages with a rod-shaped rod portion 144c (see FIG. 38(b)) that protrudes downward from a position eccentric to the center of rotation of the ball feeding member 144.

This ball feeding unit 140 operates a ball feeding crank 147 via the ball feeding actuating rod 146 by moving the tip (left end) of the ball feeding actuating rod 146 upward by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145. It can be rotated around an axis extending back and forth.

In the ball feeding unit 140, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is not driven (normally), the ball feeding operating rod 146 is separated from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip thereof is positioned downward. Now, the ball feeding member 144 is in the feeding position. Furthermore, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding actuating rod 146 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and its tip (left end) is positioned upward, and the ball feeding member 144 is in the holding position. Rotate to. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 144 receives one game ball B, and when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is deactivated (OFF state), The game ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be sent (supplied) to the ball firing device 540 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 in the ball feeding unit 140 is controlled in synchronization with the driving control of the shooting solenoid 542 by the firing control section 633b (see FIG. 169) of the dispensing control board 633.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is subjected to a moment such that it rotates in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, either by the ball extracting member 143 which is rotatably supported by a shaft, or by the weight portion 143d. However, the operating rod 143c protruding forward of the ball extracting member 143 comes into contact with the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper plate ball extracting slider 242, which is operated by the pressing operation of the upper plate ball extracting button 222 of the plate unit 200. Since its rotation is restricted, in a normal state, the partition part 143a of the ball extraction member 143 is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball extraction opening 141b, and the ball extraction opening 141b side is separated from the entrance 141a. The game ball B will not enter the ball.

When the player presses the upper plate ball removal button 222 of the plate unit 200 downward, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 slides downward together with the operation transmission section 242b, causing the operation transmission section 242b to move downward. Accordingly, the operating rod 143c also moves relatively downward. When the actuation rod 143c moves downward together with the actuation transmitting part 242b, the ball extraction member 143 rotates counterclockwise in front view, and the partition part 143a moves from between the entrance port 141a and the ball extraction port 141b. The partition is removed. As a result, the game ball B that entered from the entrance 141a falls to the ball extraction port 141b side, and is discharged from the ball extraction port 141b to the ball extraction guide path 241c of the upper plate ball extraction unit 240 in the tray unit 200, It can be discharged (supplied) to the lower tray 202 via the lower tray ball supply port 211c.

Note that the upper plate ball extracting slider 242, in which the operation transmitting portion 242b that the operating rod 143c of the ball extracting member 143 comes into contact with, is biased upward by a spring, so that the game ball B is not placed on the partition portion 143a. Even if the game ball B is supplied vigorously, the impact can be absorbed by the spring through the operating rod 143c, preventing damage to the ball extracting member 143, etc. It can prevent it from bouncing back.

In addition, the ball feeding unit 140 has a rectangular mounting recess 142b (see FIG. 38(b) etc.) formed in the upper right corner of the ball supply port 142a of the rear cover 142 when viewed from the rear. A tamper-proofing member 148 is mounted within the mounting recess 142b. The tamper-proofing member 148 of the ball feeding unit 140 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the attachment recess 142b of the rear cover 142 from the rear side.

The anti-tampering member 148 has a rectangular outer shape extending left and right when viewed from the front, and has an upper piece part 148a and an upper piece part 148a that are vertically separated approximately at the center in the vertical direction within a predetermined distance from the right side to the left. It includes a lower piece part 148b and an inclined part 148c formed in a C-chamfer shape at the tip sides (right end side in front view) of the opposing sides of the upper piece part 148a and the lower piece part 148b. . The upper piece 148a of the fraud prevention member 148 is bent with respect to the general surface of the fraud prevention member 148 so that its right end in front view protrudes rearward. The lower piece portion 148b extends on the same plane as the general surface of the tamper-evident member 148. Thereby, in plan view, the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b form a V-shaped groove that widens toward the right.

The tamper prevention member 148 is attached to the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142, so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b communicates with the inside of the batted ball supply port 142a. Become.

According to this fraud prevention member 148, an illegal game ball B with a string attached is driven into the game area 5a by the ball firing device 540 from the upper tray via the ball feeding unit 140, and attached to the illegal game ball B. When a fraudulent act such as manipulating the attached string to cause an unauthorized game ball B to enter or exit the first starting port 2002 or the like is performed, the unauthorized game ball B fired (hitted) by the ball launching device 540 is The force causes the string attached to the illegal game ball B to be inserted between the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b, and then the V-shape formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b is inserted. The ball can be cut at the narrowed part of the shape, and it is possible to prevent illegal acts using an illegal game ball B to which a string is attached.

[3-1j. Foal cover unit]
The foul cover unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40. FIG. 39(a) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 39(b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the back. Further, FIG. 40 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed. The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101 on the right side in rear view. The foul cover unit 150 guides game balls B (foul balls) that have been fired by the ball firing device 540 and have not reached the gaming area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower tray 202, and also guides the game balls B (foul balls) that have been fired by the ball firing device 540 but have not reached the gaming area 5a of the game board 5, and also guides the game balls B (foul balls) that are fired by the ball firing device 540 and do not reach the gaming area 5a of the game board 5. This is for guiding the game balls B to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202. As shown in the figure, the foul cover unit 150 includes a shallow box-shaped unit body 151 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and opened on the front side, and a flat plate-shaped lid member attached to the front side of the unit body 151. 152.

The foul cover unit 150 penetrates back and forth in the upper left corner when viewed from the front, and communicates the lower normal delivery passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610 of the main body frame 4 with the upper ball supply port 211a of the tray unit 200. Ball passage 150a, and a full ball receiver that opens rearward at the lower right side of the through ball passage 150a when viewed from the front and can communicate with the lower full ball dispensing passage 610b of the lower full ball path unit 610 of the main body frame 4. A port 150b is provided.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 opens upward on the right side of the full ball socket 150b when viewed from the front, and although it is fired by the ball firing device 540 of the main body frame 4, it does not reach the inside of the game area 5a. A foul ball socket 150c that receives the filled game ball B (foul ball), and a game ball B that is open toward the front near the lower right corner when viewed from the front and is received in the full ball socket 150b and the foul ball socket 150c. A ball discharge port 150d that discharges the ball forward and communicates with the lower ball supply port 211c of the dish unit 200 is provided.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is formed by the unit body 151 and the lid member 152 between the full ball socket 150b, the foul ball socket 150c, and the ball discharge port 150d, and stores a predetermined amount of game balls B. A storage passage 150e having a possible width is provided.

The penetrating ball passage 150a is formed across both the unit body 151 and the lid member 152. A full ball socket 150b and a foul ball socket 150c are formed in the unit main body 151. The ball discharge port 150d is formed in the lid member 152. The storage passage 150e is formed by a unit body 151 and a lid member 152.

The foul cover unit 150 also includes a flat movable piece 153 that forms part of the inner wall of the storage passage 150e and whose lower end is rotatably attached to the unit body 151 and the lid member 152; A full-fill detection sensor 154 that detects rotation in a direction away from the storage passage 150e, and a spring 155 that biases the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e.

When the inside of the lower tray 202 of the tray unit 200 is full of game balls B and the game balls B are no longer ejected from the ball discharge port 150d to the lower tray 202 side, this foul cover unit 150 remains in the storage passage 150e to some extent. The number of game balls B can be stored. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the upper end of the movable piece 153 moves in a direction away from the storage passage 150e against the urging force of the spring 155 due to the weight of the game balls B. The movable piece 153 rotates in this manner, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154. As a result, it can be determined that the lower tray 202 is full of game balls B, so when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects that the tank is full, the further payout of game balls B is stopped. At the same time, it is possible to inform the players, game hall attendants, etc. of this fact and urge them to relieve the lower tray 202 from being full.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is attached to the lower side of the through ball passage 150a on the rear side of the unit main body 151, and the payout passage opening/closing door of the lower full ball path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 (described later) of the main body frame 4. The door opening/closing contact portion 150f is provided with which the operating protrusion 613a of 613 can contact (see FIG. 90). The door opening/closing contact portion 150f is inclined so that the rear surface thereof moves forward as it goes downward. By abutting the operating protrusion 613a of the dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 with this door opening/closing contact part 150f, the dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 is rotated, and the downstream ends of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full tank dispensing passage 610b ( The front opening) can be opened.

[3-2. Glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29, 30, and the like. The glass unit 160 is inserted into the glass unit attachment part 101h from the rear and is detachably attached so as to close the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100. This glass unit 160 allows the playing area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 to be visible from the player side (front) when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, and also allows the player to view the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4. This closes the front of the area 5a.

The glass unit 160 includes a frame-shaped glass frame 161 that is larger than the inner circumferential shape of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and can be attached to the glass unit attachment part 101h, and a glass frame 161 whose outer periphery is a glass frame that closes the inside of the frame of the glass frame 161. 161 and a pair of glass units rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100 for attaching the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101. A mounting member 163 is provided.

The glass frame 161 includes a pair of mounting pieces 161a that extend outward in a flat plate form from positions below the upper left and right corners when viewed from the front, and a band that protrudes downward from the lower end and extends along the lower side. It has a plate-shaped locking piece 161b. The mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161 can come into contact with the protrusion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163. The locking piece 161b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 (see FIG. 96). The two glass plates 162 are attached to the front end and the rear end of the glass frame 161, respectively, and are separated from each other in the front and back so that a space is formed between them (see FIG. 96).

The glass unit mounting member 163 includes a disk-shaped base 163a that is rotatably mounted around an axis extending back and forth on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a rod-shaped base 163a that protrudes from the base 163a in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. It has a protrusion 163b. The glass unit attachment members 163 are rotatably attached to the outer sides of the upper two corners of the four corners of the door window 101a on the rear surface of the door frame base 101, respectively.

To attach the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101, first, rotate the glass unit attachment member 163 attached to the door frame base 101 so that the protrusion 163b is located above the base 163a. do. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, the locking piece 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 was inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. At the top, the front end of the glass frame 161 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 101h of the door frame base 101. Thereafter, the glass unit attachment member 163 is rotated so that the protrusion 163b is located below the base 163a, and the protrusion 163b is brought into contact with the rear surface of the attachment piece 161a of the glass frame 161. Thereby, the glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base 101.

When removing the glass unit 160 from the door frame base 101, the glass unit 160 can be removed by reversing the procedure described above. Thereby, the glass unit 160 can be attached to and detached from the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

In addition, in the glass unit 160, when the protruding part 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163 is in the rotational position located below the base 163a, the protruding part 163b restricts the rearward movement of the glass frame 161. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit mounting member 163, the protrusion 163b will not rotate to a position higher than the base 163a. Therefore, the restriction on rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is not naturally released, and the glass unit 160 does not naturally come off from the door frame base 101.

[3-3. Security cover]
The security cover 170 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29, 30, and the like. The security cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower rear surface of the glass unit 160, and is made of transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 170 includes a flat main body part 171 whose outer periphery is formed in a predetermined shape, and a flat rear protruding piece 172 that protrudes short rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body part 171, which are spaced apart from each other in the left and right directions. A pair of locking pieces 173 that protrude forward from the main body portion 171 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 101 are provided.

The main body portion 171 of the security cover 170 is formed such that its lower end protrudes below the lower end of the glass unit 160 when it is attached to the door frame base unit 100. Further, the main body portion 171 has an upper end formed in a shape along the lower end of the gaming area 5a on the gaming board 5 when assembled to the pachinko machine 1. Specifically, the upper end of the main body part 171 is formed in a shape along a part of the inner rail 1002, an out guide part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000, which will be described later. It is formed so that it does not protrude into the gaming area 5a when assembled into the pachinko machine 1.

The rear projecting piece 172 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171 . Therefore, the security cover 170 is formed into a shallow box shape opened to the rear by the main body portion 171 and the rear projection piece 172, and has high strength and rigidity. Further, the rear projecting piece 172 also projects rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 that is different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. A rear protruding piece 172 that protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body part 171 is formed so as to align with a part of the outer rail 1001 of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 when assembled to the pachinko machine 1. ing.

Note that the rear projecting piece 172 is not formed in a portion of the game board 5 located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 when assembled to the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the game ball B (game ball B fired by the ball firing device 540) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 does not come into contact with the rear projection piece 172 of the security cover 170, and the game ball B passes between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002. This does not impede the driving of the game ball B into 5a.

The pair of locking pieces 173 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (speaker duct 103 and cable cover 109). Thereby, the security cover 170 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base unit 100.

When the security cover 170 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 171 is in contact with the rear surface of the glass unit 160 (the rear end of the glass frame 161), and the portion that protrudes rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 is The removed rear projecting piece 172 is now inserted into the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Further, the security cover 170 is in a state in which the rear protrusion 172 that protrudes rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 protrudes rearward from the front surface of the front component 1000 so as to contact the lower surface of the front component 1000. . As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is in a complicatedly bent state due to the rear protrusion 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to enter the gaming area 5a from the lower front side of the board 5 through between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 172 and the security recess 1009. , it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the gaming area 5a.

[3-4. Handle unit and handle cover unit]
The handle unit 180 and the handle cover unit 290 in the door frame 3 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 47 and the like. FIG. 41(a) is an enlarged front view showing the parts of the handle unit and handle cover unit in the door frame, and FIG. 41(b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the parts of the handle unit and handle cover unit in the door frame. FIG. 42 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the back. FIG. 46 is a sectional view taken along line E--I in FIG. 41(a). FIG. 47 is a sectional view taken along line A--A in FIG. Note that FIG. 46 is a cross-sectional view of only the door frame 3 with the outer frame 2 and main body frame 4 omitted.

The handle unit 180 of this embodiment is attached to the door frame base unit 100 and the tray unit 200 together with the handle cover unit 290 that covers the outer periphery, and is operated by the player to control the game ball B in the upper tray 201. It can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5.

First, the handle unit 180 will be explained. The handle unit 180 is rotatably attached to a handle base 181 whose rear end is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via a handle cover base 291 of a handle cover unit 290, which will be described later. a plurality of handle guides 196 that are attached to the rear side of the handle 195 and guided by a handle cover base 291 that will be described later; and a disc-shaped handle guide 196 that is attached to the handle base 181 so as to cover the center of the front end side of the handle 195. A cover pedestal 183, a handle decoration board 184 attached to the front side of the cover pedestal 183 and having a plurality of LEDs 184a mounted on the front surface, and a handle attached to the cover pedestal 183 so as to cover the front side of the handle decoration board 184. A front lens 185 is provided.

Further, the handle unit 180 has an inner base 186 attached to the front side of the handle base 181 on the rear side of the handle 195, a handle 195 attached to the front end, and rotatably attached by the inner base 186 and the handle base 181, and attached to the outer periphery. A shaft member 187 having a drive gear portion 187a, a transmission gear 188 that meshes with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, and a detection shaft 189a that rotates integrally with the transmission gear 188. A handle rotation detection sensor 189 is sandwiched between the base 186 and the handle rotation detection sensor 189.

Further, the handle unit 180 has one end attached to the handle base 181 and the other end attached to the handle 195 so as to return the handle 195 to the initial rotation position (the rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). The steering wheel return spring 190 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front, and the sensing shaft 189a of the steering wheel rotation detection sensor 189 is connected to the inner base 186 at one end and the transmission gear 188 through the transmission gear 188. An auxiliary spring 191 biasing in the direction is provided.

The handle unit 180 also includes a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186, and a handle touch sensor 192 whose distal end protrudes outward from the left side of the front end outer peripheral surface of the handle base 181 when viewed from the front. A single-shot button 193 whose end side is attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186 to be rotatable around an axis extending back and forth, and a single-shot button attached to the handle base 181 that detects the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193. An operation sensor 194 is provided.

The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 includes a cylindrical base 181a extending back and forth, a disc-shaped front end 181b protruding in the radial direction from the front end of the base 181a, and a recessed part from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base 181a. There are three grooves 181c extending in the axial direction and formed at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction. The base portion 181a of the handle base 181 has an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the rear cylinder portion 291c of the handle cover base 291 in the handle cover unit 290. Furthermore, the three grooves 181c are formed at positions corresponding to three protrusions 291d of the handle cover base 291, which will be described later. Therefore, the base 181a can be inserted into the rear cylinder part 291c of the handle cover base 291 with the three grooves 181c aligned with the three protrusions 291d, and the protrusions 291d are inserted into the three grooves 181c, respectively. When the handle base 181 is inserted, the handle base 181 becomes unable to rotate relative to the handle cover base 291.

The handle 195 includes a disk-shaped central hub portion 195a, a plurality of (three in this case) spoke portions 195b extending radially outward from the central hub portion 195a at intervals in the circumferential direction, and a plurality of spokes. An annular outer ring part 195c connecting the tips of the parts 195b, and two rings extending in an arc shape around the rotating shaft (shaft member 187) and penetrating the central hub part 195a in the front-rear direction. It includes a slit 195d and a locking projection 195e that projects rearward from a position inside the rotation center of the slit 195d and locks the other end of the handle return spring 190. The outer diameter of the central hub portion 195a is approximately the same as the outer diameter of the general outer peripheral surface of the handle of a conventional pachinko machine.

The three spoke portions 195b of the handle 195 rotate clockwise and around one spoke portion 195b extending horizontally to the left from the central hub portion 195a when the handle 195 is free (not rotated). Two spoke portions 195b extend counterclockwise from positions at angles of 120 degrees. The three spoke portions 195b extend to a length such that a gap into which a player's finger can be inserted is formed between the central hub portion 195a and the outer ring portion 195c.

The outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195 is provided coaxially with the center of the central hub portion 195a. The outer ring portion 195c is formed in an annular shape with a constant cross-sectional shape with the rounded side of the U-shape facing forward.

This handle 195 is formed to have translucency as a whole, and is partially plated to be electrically continuous from the central hub portion 195a to the outer ring portion 195c. This allows the handle touch sensor 192 to detect a touch on the handle 195 even when only the outer ring portion 195c is touched. Therefore, even if the outer ring portion 195c is rotated, the game ball B can be hit.

The handle guide 196 includes a U-shaped guide portion 196a that is open toward the center of the handle 195, and a flat mounting stay 196b that extends toward the center from the front end of the guide portion 196a. There is. In the three handle guides 196, the attachment stays 196b are attached to the rear side of the spoke portions 195b of the handle 195 such that the guide portions 196a are located behind the outer ring portions 195c of the handle 195. The movement of the handle guide 196 in the front-rear direction is restricted by inserting a guide piece 291g of a handle cover base 291, which will be described later, into the guide portion 196a.

The cover pedestal 183 is formed into a disk shape with a smaller diameter than the outer diameter of the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195, and includes three attachment bosses 183a projecting rearward from the rear surface. The three attachment bosses 183a pass through the slits 195d of the handle 195 from the front and are attached to the front surface of the handle base 181. Since the mounting boss 183a of the cover pedestal 183 passes through the slit 195d of the handle 195, the mounting boss 183a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 195d, thereby regulating the rotation angle of the handle 195. In this example, handle 195 can be rotated within a rotation angle of about 120 degrees.

There are 10 handle decoration boards 184 in total: one at the center, three at regular intervals circumferentially on the middle circumference, and six at regular intervals circumferentially along the outer circumference. LEDs 184a (full color LEDs) are mounted in a triple concentric circle. These LEDs 184a are divided into five groups: one in the center, three in the middle, two on the upper left of the outer circumference, two on the upper right of the outer circumference, and two on the lower side of the outer circumference. (See Figure 72). A 24-bit LED driver 184b having a unique address for causing each LED 184a to emit light is mounted on the handle decoration board 184. This LED driver 184b can control up to 24 systems, and controls each group with 3 systems, for a total of 15 systems, so that each of the 10 LEDs 184a divided into 5 groups can emit light in full color. That's what I do.

Although not shown, this handle decoration board 184 includes two power lines (one is a ground line) that supplies power for driving the LED 184a and the LED driver 184b, and commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510. A wiring cable consisting of four electric wires is connected: one control signal line for receiving signals such as, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 184b with the peripheral control board 1510. . When the LED driver 184b of this handle decoration board 184 receives a command addressed to the address from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board) via the control signal line, the LED driver 184b is divided into five groups according to the command. Each group of the 10 LEDs 184a can emit light in an appropriate color and intensity.

In this way, since this handle decoration board 184 has the LED driver 184b, the light emission of the LEDs 184a, which number is greater than the number of electric wires making up the wiring cable to be connected, is controlled individually (in this case, as a group). Since the number of electric wires can be reduced and the configuration related to electric wiring can be simplified.

The front handle lens 185 has a front surface that bulges out roundly forward, and has translucency. The front handle lens 185 is provided with a three-dimensional lens member made of a transparent member. The front handle lens 185 is decorated with light by appropriately lighting the LEDs on the front surface of the handle decoration board 184.

The handle rotation detection sensor 189 is a variable resistor, and when the handle 195 is rotated, the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 rotates via the shaft member 187 and the transmission gear 188. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 changes depending on the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a. Therefore, when the handle 195 is rotated to change the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189, the driving force of the firing solenoid 542 in the ball firing device 540, which will be described later, changes in accordance with the internal resistance, and the rotation of the handle 195 changes. The game ball B can be hit into the game area 5a with a force depending on the angle.

The handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the handle unit 180. When a player touches the handle 195, the handle touch sensor 192 detects the static electricity acting on the player and prevents the player from touching the handle 195. To detect. When the handle 195 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 192 is detecting the player's contact, the detection by the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is accepted, and the solenoid fires with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 195. The drive of 542 is controlled, and the game ball B can be hit.

Therefore, even if the player tries to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 195 in some way without touching the handle 195, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the player's contact. Therefore, the firing solenoid 542 is not driven and the game ball B cannot be hit. As a result, it is possible to prevent a player from playing a game by rotating the handle 195 in a way different from the original method, and it is possible to reduce the load on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. .

The single button operation sensor 194 detects a pressing operation of the single button 193 by the player. When the single button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the single button 193, the firing control section 633b of the dispensing control board 633 stops driving the firing solenoid 542. Therefore, when the player presses the single-shot button 193 while rotating the handle 195, the firing of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotation operation of the handle 195, and the single-shot button By releasing the pressing operation of 193, it is possible to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a again with the driving strength before operating the single button 193.

Next, the handle cover unit 290 will be explained. The handle cover unit 290 covers the outer periphery of the handle unit 180 on the rear side than the handle 195, and includes a handle cover base 291 whose rear end is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101, and the outer periphery of the handle cover base 291. an inner 292 whose rear end is attached to the dish unit main body 252 of the dish unit 200; an annular handle cover decorative board 293 provided on the front side of the inner 292 and on which a plurality of LEDs 293a are mounted; It includes an annular board cover 294 that covers the handle cover decorative board 293 from the front, and a handle cover 295 that covers the outer periphery of the inner 292 and whose rear end is attached to the dish unit main body 252 of the dish unit 200.

The handle cover base 291 includes a cylindrical front cylinder part 291a that extends back and forth with an inner diameter that is approximately the same as the inner diameter of the outer circumferential ring part 195c of the handle 195, and a front cylinder part 291a that has an inner diameter that becomes smaller toward the front from the rear end of the front cylinder part 291a. a cylindrical rear cylinder part 291c that penetrates the middle wall part 291b and extends back and forth with an inner diameter that allows insertion of the base 181a of the handle base 181; and an inner periphery of the rear cylinder part 291c. The handle base 181 is provided with a plurality of (three in this case) protrusions 291d that protrude inwardly from the handle base 181 and extend back and forth, and are provided at positions corresponding to the grooves 181c of the handle base 181 in the circumferential direction.

Further, the handle cover base 291 has a flange portion 291e extending outward from a portion on the rear side of the front end of the outer periphery of the front cylinder portion 291a, and a flange portion 291e extending outward from a portion in the middle of the flange portion 291e to the same position as the front end of the front cylinder portion 291a. A cylindrical outer tube portion 291f that protrudes forward to 291f, a guide piece 291g that protrudes outward from the front tube portion 291a, and a guide piece 291g that protrudes outward from the front tube portion 291a in a region between the front end of the front tube portion 291a and the flange portion 291e. An opening 291h penetrating the lower portion of the portion 291a is provided.

The inner wall portion 291b of the handle cover base 291 extends in an arcuate shape with an outwardly bulging cross section from the rear end of the front cylinder portion 291a to near the center in the front-rear direction. The rear end of the rear cylinder portion 291c is attached to the handle attachment surface 101b of the door frame base 101. This rear cylinder portion 291c is formed to have the same length as the base portion 181a of the handle base 181, and the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 is inserted into the rear cylinder portion 291c. The three protrusions 291d correspond to the three grooves 181c of the handle base 181, and by being inserted into the grooves 181c, the handle base 181 can be made relatively unrotatable. The outer cylinder portion 291f extends forward from a position outside the radial center of the flange portion 291e. In this handle cover base 291, a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction so as to connect the front surface of the flange portion 291e and the outer peripheral surface of the outer cylinder portion 291f.

The guide piece 291g protrudes from the outer periphery of the front cylindrical portion 291a from the center between the outer periphery of the front cylindrical portion 291a and the inner periphery of the outer cylindrical portion 291f to a position closer to the front cylindrical portion 291a. The guide pieces 291g extend in the circumferential direction with a length in a range of about 110 degrees, and are provided in three circumferential directions at angular intervals of 10 degrees. By inserting the rear end side of the guide portion 196a of the handle guide 196 in the handle unit 180 rearwardly than the guide piece 291g through between the guide pieces 291g and rotating the handle 195, the U-shaped guide portion By positioning the guide piece 291g within the guide portion 196a, it is possible to restrict movement of the guide portion 196a (handle 195) in the front-rear direction.

The opening 291h has a length in the front-rear direction from the rear end of the front cylinder part 291a to the vicinity of the flange part 291e, and has a size within an angle range of about 90 degrees in the circumferential direction, and passes through the front cylinder part 291a. .

The inner 292 includes an annular base 292a having an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front cylinder part 291a of the handle cover base 291 and a larger outer diameter than the flange part 291e, and extends rearward from the outer peripheral edge of the base 292a. It has a leg portion 292b and a plurality of (four in this case) notches 292c which are cut out from the rear end of the leg portion 292b to near the base portion 292a and are spaced apart in the circumferential direction. The front cylinder part 291a of the handle cover base 291 is inserted into the base part 292a from the front, and the base part 292a is located behind the flange part 291e. The leg portion 292b extends in a curved shape that swells outward, and its rear end is attached to the dish unit main body 252 of the dish unit 200. The cutout portions 292c are provided at the upper and lower portions and the left and right portions of the leg portion 292b, respectively.

The handle cover decorative board 293 is formed in an annular shape with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front cylinder part 291a of the handle cover base 291 and the same outer diameter as the flange part 291e. The handle cover decorative board 293 is mounted with 12 LEDs 293a and an LED driver 293b having a unique address for causing each LED 293a to emit light. The 12 LEDs 293a (full color LEDs) are arranged in a row at intervals in the circumferential direction. These 12 LEDs 293a are divided into 6 groups: 2 on the lower left from the center, 2 on the left, 2 on the upper left, 2 on the upper right, 2 on the right, and 2 on the lower right. (See Figure 72). The LED driver 293b can control up to 24 systems, and is designed to control a total of 18 systems, 3 systems for each group, so that each of the 10 LEDs 293a divided into 6 groups can emit light in full color. I have to.

Although not shown, the handle cover decorative board 293 includes two power lines (one is a ground line) that supplies power to drive the LED 293a and the LED driver 293b, and commands and signals from the peripheral control board 1510. A wiring cable consisting of four electric wires is connected: one control signal line for receiving signals such as address, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 293b with the peripheral control board 1510. There is. When the LED driver 293b of the steering wheel cover decorative board 293 receives a command addressed to the address from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board) via the control signal line, the LED driver 293b divides the LED driver into six groups according to the command. Each set of the 12 LEDs 293a can emit light in an appropriate color and intensity.

The board cover 294 includes an annular front plate part 294a having an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front cylinder part 291a of the handle cover base 291 and approximately the same outer diameter as the outer diameter of the base part 292a of the inner 292, and a front plate part 294a. It has a cylindrical side plate part 294b whose outer peripheral edge extends rearward for a short distance. In this board cover 294, a front plate part 294a is located between the flange part 291e of the handle cover base 291 and the handle cover decorative board 293, and a side plate part 294b extends to the base part 292a of the inner 292.

The handle cover 295 has a front hole 295a at the front end that has the same inner diameter as the outer diameter of the outer cylindrical part 291f of the handle cover base 291, and has a spindle (kamakura-shaped or bowl-shaped) shape that expands toward the rear. , etc.), and is provided with a plurality of cutout openings 295b (four in this case) in the circumferential direction, which are cut out from the rear end toward the front. The handle cover 295 is formed to cover the outer periphery of the inner 292, and a plurality of cutout openings 295b are formed to match the cutouts 292c. The rear end of the handle cover 295 is attached to the dish unit main body 252 of the dish unit 200 via the inner 292.

The handle cover 295 is molded in two colors from synthetic resins with different colors and translucency (light transmittance). Specifically, the handle cover 295 is molded in two colors using two types of resin, an inner layer 3a and an outer layer 3b, and a part of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b and appears on the outer surface. , circular or radial patterns are formed. That is, the circular and radial patterns appearing on the surface of the handle cover 295 are the inner layer 3a, and the circular and radial patterns are connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (see FIG. 71(a)). Note that when molding the handle cover 295, the inner layer 3a may be injection molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection molded first.

As shown in FIG. 46 etc., the handle unit 180 and handle cover unit 290 of this embodiment are assembled into the pachinko machine 1, and the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 is placed inside the front cylinder part 291a of the handle cover base 291. The handle 195, the front handle lens 185, and the like are positioned in front of the handle cover unit 290. The rear end of the handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 is connected to the handle mounting seat surface of the door frame base 101 while sandwiching the part that closes the rear end of the rear cylinder part 291c of the handle cover base 291 in the handle cover unit 290. 101b.

The handle 195 of the handle unit 180 has a central hub portion 195a rotatably supported by the handle base 181. Further, in the handle 195, an outer peripheral ring portion 195c on the outside of the central hub portion 195a is rotatably supported by the handle cover unit 290 by a handle guide 196 attached to the rear side. This handle guide 196 has a rear end side of the guide part 196a inserted (locked) between the front cylinder part 291a and the outer cylinder part 291f of the handle cover base 291, and between the flange part 291e and the guide piece 291g. ), and is rotatably supported with movement in the front-rear direction (axial direction) restricted.

The handle 195 and the handle cover base 291, inner 292, board cover 294, and handle cover 295 in the handle cover unit 290 are formed to have translucency, so that the LED 293a of the handle cover decorative board 293 can emit light. In addition to being able to decorate the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195 with light emitting light, the inside of the handle cover base 291 (front cylinder portion 291a), the handle cover 295, etc. can also be decorated with light emitting light.

Since the handle cover unit 290 has a notch opening 295b and a notch 292c that match each other in the handle cover 295 and the inner 292, when viewed from the outside, the handle cover base 291 has a cutout opening 295b and a notch 292c that match each other. It can be made to appear as if there is a hole communicating with the inside of the front cylinder portion 291a. This alleviates the mental anxiety of the player who inserts his/her hand (fingers) into the front cylinder part 291a of the handle cover base 291 through the space between the central hub part 195a and the outer peripheral ring part 195c of the handle 195. Can be done.

Note that the upper notch opening 295b of the handle cover 295 (the upper notch 292c of the inner 292) is closed by the dish right decorative unit 275 and the door frame right side unit 430.

In the handle cover unit 290 of this embodiment, the inside of the front cylinder part 291a of the handle cover base 291 into which the rear side of the handle unit 180 is inserted passes through the opening 291h, and the lower side of each of the inner 292 and the handle cover 295 is inserted. It communicates with the notch 292c and the notch opening 295b (see FIG. 47). As a result, even if a liquid such as a drink or a game ball B enters into the front cylinder part 291a of the handle cover base 291 through the gap between the central hub part 195a and the outer ring part 195c of the handle 195, the bottom It can be discharged below the handle cover unit 290 through the opening 291h, the notch 292c, and the notch opening 295b.

In addition, if liquid or game balls B enter the notch openings 295b on both the left and right sides of the handle cover 295, they will pass through the gap between the front cylinder part 291a and the leg part 292b of the inner 292, and It can be discharged downward from the notch opening 295b.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 47, the opening 291h of the handle cover base 291, the cutout 292c on the lower side of the inner 292, and the cutout opening 295b on the lower side of the handle cover 295 are formed in the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame 2. It is provided on the extension line of the blade part 46b of the grill member 46 in the solid body 40 in the inclination direction. As a result, the wind (wind pressure) released obliquely upward and forward from the grill member 46 via the blade portion 46b due to the vibration of the main body frame speaker 622 is passed through the opening 291h, the notch 292c, and the notch opening 295b to the front cylinder. It is possible to enter the portion 291a. Therefore, when the player inserts his or her finger inside the handle cover 295 (front cylinder part 291a of the handle cover base 291) and rotates the handle 195 (playing device for driving game ball B), the main body frame speaker By vibrating 622 and sending air into the front cylinder part 291a, the player can be surprised and an unprecedented performance can be performed.

Furthermore, since the handle cover 295 has a notch opening 295b, when opening the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4, you can hook your finger on the right side notch opening 295b and pull it. It can be used as a handle when opening.

In addition, since the handle 195 is plated up to the outer ring part 195c, the handle touch sensor 192 can detect the touch of the handle 195, and even if only the outer ring part 195c is touched, the game ball B can be typed.

In addition, since the handle cover 295 has a notch opening 295b, the rotational position of the handle 195 can be easily adjusted by gripping the outer ring part 195c of the handle 195 and the notch opening 295b by hooking your fingers on the handle cover 295. It can be fixed, and the game ball B can be continuously driven into the game area 5a with a constant force even if the user does not keep twisting his hand. In this way, since the game ball B can be driven in by rotating the handle 195 in various ways, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 in which the player can select a driving operation suitable for the player.

This handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via a handle cover unit 290 (handle cover base 291). The handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is inclined so that the right end side is located rearward than the left end side in plan view, and faces outward (opening side). The handle unit 180 attached through the handle unit 180 is also inclined outward in plan view (in other words, the tip thereof is inclined toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line perpendicular to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). is attached and fixed to the door frame 3. Thereby, the player can easily grip the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 and can perform rotational operations without feeling uncomfortable.

As described above, the handle unit 180 and the handle cover unit 290 of the present embodiment are provided so as to be openable and closable with the left side as the axis, and the game area 5a of the game board 5 is closed so as to be visible from the front. At the lower right corner of the door frame 3, there is a disk-shaped central hub portion 195a, a plurality of spoke portions 195b projecting radially from the central hub portion 195a, and an annular outer periphery connecting the tips of the plurality of spoke portions 195b. A handle 195 having a ring portion 195c is provided, and a cylindrical handle cover unit 290 extending rearward from the outer ring portion 195c is provided, so that the handle in a conventional pachinko machine is not provided. The handle 195 and the handle cover unit 290, which have a shape that has never been seen before, can be seen in the area where the player is playing, giving a strong impact to the player and strongly attracting the player's interest. At the same time, it is possible to increase the player's desire to play at the pachinko machine 1, and to encourage the players who are roaming around the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed to play the game. It is possible to make it easier for players to select the present pachinko machine 1 as a pachinko machine to play.

Furthermore, since the player's finger can be inserted into the handle cover unit 290 (front cylinder part 291a of the handle cover base 291) by passing between the central hub part 195a and the outer ring part 195c of the handle 195, the player can When the player grasps the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195 when operating the handle 195 to hit the game ball B into the game area 5a, the player's finger is inserted into the handle cover unit 290. Therefore, when operating the handle 195, it is possible to give the player a feeling different from that of the handle of a conventional pachinko machine, and the player can be entertained and amused by the new sensation of operating the game ball B. It is possible to suppress the decrease in .

Then, when the player operates the handle 195 and outputs a performance sound from the main body frame speaker 622 provided in the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620A of the main body frame 4, the vibration of the main body frame speaker 622 causes the speaker to The air inside the enclosure 624 is vibrated by the box 623, and the vibration of the air inside the enclosure 624 is caused by sound pressure through the curtain plate internal space 40a of the outer frame lower assembly 40 in the outer frame 2 communicating with the enclosure 624 and the port member 47. It is emitted forward as (sound wind). At this time, the plurality of blades 46b of the grill member 46 provided at the front end of the port member 47 transfer the sound pressure (sound wind) from the main body frame speaker 622 to the notch opening 295b of the handle cover 295 and the handle cover. It can be guided into the handle cover unit 290 (inside the front cylinder part 291a of the handle cover base 291) through the opening 291h of the base 291, and into the handle cover unit 290 by passing between the central hub part 195a and the outer ring part 195c. Stimulation by sound pressure can be applied to the finger of the player who is operating the handle 195 with the finger inserted. Therefore, depending on the gaming state in the gaming area 5a, the sound pressure from the port member 47 can be supplied to the player's fingers inserted into the handle cover unit 290 through the notch opening 295b and the opening 291h. , it is possible to surprise the player, foreshadow the arrival of an opportunity, and change the amount of operation of the handle, thereby entertaining the player and making it difficult for the player to get bored. , it is possible to suppress a decline in interest in games.

In addition, since the sound pressure (sound wind) from the main body frame speaker 622 can be supplied into the handle cover unit 290 (front cylinder part 291a of the handle cover base 291) through the notch opening 295b and the opening 291h, the handle cover By making the inside of the unit 290 cool and making the environment around the hands and fingers of the player operating the handle 195 comfortable, the stress on the player can be alleviated and a decline in interest in the game can be suppressed. can.

Furthermore, as described above, the handle 195 and The sound pressure (sound wind) emitted forward from the port member 47 provided in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2, which is different from the door frame 3 in which the handle cover unit 290 is provided, is absorbed by the grill member 46. Since the stimulation is guided by the plurality of blades 46b, various sensors provided on the handle 195 (handle rotation detection sensor 189, handle touch sensor 192, single button operation sensor 194, etc.), the bearing mechanism, etc., it is possible to make the handle unit 180 difficult to damage, and the damage to the handle unit 180 can cause injury to the player. It is possible to avoid giving a pleasant feeling, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in playing the game.

Furthermore, since the handle 195 has a central hub portion 195a, spoke portions 195b, and an outer circumferential ring portion 195c, the handle 195 has an appearance similar to a steering wheel of a car, so it is similar to the handle of a conventional pachinko machine. Even if the appearance is significantly different from that of the conventional pachinko machine, it is possible for the player to intuitively recognize that the operation of the handle 195 is the same as that of a conventional pachinko machine. Therefore, even a player who has seen this pachinko machine 1 for the first time can operate the handle 195 of this pachinko machine 1 without being confused, and this pachinko machine can be used as a pachinko machine that allows players to play without hesitation. Machine 1 can be easily selected.

Furthermore, a cutout opening 295b and an opening 291h are provided at a downwardly facing portion of the outer peripheral surface of the handle cover unit 290 into which a player's finger can be inserted between the central hub portion 195a and the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195. Because of the provision of the This makes it possible to give a feeling of openness to the cylindrical handle cover unit 290, which reduces the player's anxiety about inserting his or her fingers into the handle cover unit 290. The handle 195 can be operated without hesitation.

In addition, a penetrating notch opening 295b and an opening 291h are provided in a portion facing downward on the outer peripheral surface of the handle cover unit 290, and a port of the outer frame 2 (outer frame lower assembly 40) is provided. Since the member 47 is opened toward the front, even if liquid such as a drink or the game ball B gets into the handle cover unit 290, it can be discharged downward from the lower notch opening 295b and the opening 291h. In addition, it is possible to make it difficult for liquid etc. discharged downward from the notch opening 295b and the opening 291h to enter the port member 47.

Further, the handle 195 has a central hub portion 195a, spoke portions 195b, and an outer ring portion 195c, and the handle cover 295 of the handle cover unit 290 has a plurality of handle cover 295 having the same diameter at the front end as the outer ring portion 195c. Since the notch opening 295b is provided, the central hub part 195a allows the handle to be grasped and operated with the hand, similar to the handle of a conventional pachinko machine, and the spoke part 195b allows the operation to be performed using only the fingers. The handle cover unit can be operated by using the portion 195c like a steering wheel of a car, by gripping the outer ring portion 195c and the cutout opening 295b by putting your fingers on the outer ring portion 195c, or by straddling the outer ring portion 195c. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 in which operations such as pinching the inside and outside of the ball 290 with fingers can be performed, and various driving operations (handle operations) for driving game balls B can be performed. Therefore, the game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a in a manner that is easy for the player to operate depending on the game state, the player's state, etc., and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and to It is possible to enjoy the driving operation of the game ball B, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Alternatively, the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195 and the notch opening 295b may be gripped with fingers, or the inner and outer sides of the handle cover unit 290 may be gripped by straddling the outer ring portion 195c. By doing so, the operating position of the handle 195 can be fixed. Therefore, in addition to the handle operations similar to those of conventional pachinko machines, it is also possible to perform handle operations that cannot be performed with conventional pachinko machines, making it possible to provide players with a wide variety of handle operations. , it is possible to make steering wheel operations more enjoyable and prevent players from getting bored.

Furthermore, since the diameter of the front end of the handle cover unit 290 is the same as the diameter of the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195, the handle cover unit 290 extends rearward from the outer ring portion 195c. The pachinko machine 1 can have an appearance in which the handle 290 is integrated with the handle 195, and the pachinko machine 1 can have a good appearance and attract the attention of players.

Furthermore, since the diameter of the front end of the handle cover unit 290 is the same as the diameter of the outer ring portion 195c, it is possible to suppress the vertical dimension of the handle cover unit 290 from becoming larger than necessary. By suppressing the upward pressure on the gaming area 5a (door window 101a), it is possible to avoid narrowing the gaming area 5a, and it is possible to make the gaming area 5a relatively large. The large gaming area 5a allows the pachinko machine 1 to stand out, making it possible to create a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that strongly attracts the attention of players.

Furthermore, by appropriately lighting the LED 293a of the handle cover decorative board 293, the handle cover unit 290 (inside the front cylinder part 291a of the handle cover base 291 and the handle cover 295) and the outer ring part 195c of the handle 195 can be decorated with light. Therefore, even when the player operates the handle 195, the light-emitting decoration of the handle cover 295 and the outer ring part 195c is not obstructed by the player's hands, making the handle cover 295 and the outer ring part 195c more noticeable. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 with high appeal that can strongly attract the interest of players.

Further, a handle 195 is provided at the lower right corner of the door frame 3 on the side opposite to the hinge side, and a cutout opening 295b is provided at a portion of the outer peripheral surface of the handle cover 295 of the handle cover unit 290 facing the right side. Therefore, the cutout opening 295b can be used as a handle when opening and closing the door frame 3. Therefore, there is no need to provide the door frame 3 with a handle that would make it look bad, and the door frame 3 can have a good look.

Further, the handle cover unit 290 (handle cover base 291) supports the outer circumferential ring part 195c (handle guide 196) of the handle 195 so as to be rotatable in the circumferential direction, and also includes a flange part 291e and a flange part 291e that restricts movement in the front-rear direction. Even if the outer ring part 195c of the handle 195 is pulled forward, the guide piece 291g etc. can restrict the forward movement of the outer ring part 195c. 195c and the spoke portions 195b connecting the outer ring portion 195c and the central hub portion 195a are not deformed, and the handle 195 can be prevented from being damaged.

In addition, since the handle touch sensor 192 detects that the player is touching the handle 195 and then accepts the operation of the handle 195 to drive the game ball B, only the spoke parts 195b and the outer ring part 195c Even if the handle 195 is touched, the game ball B can be driven in, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made capable of a variety of driving operations (handle operations) as described above. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being hit in a state where the handle 195 is not touched, and it is possible to prevent the handle from being operated using a tool, thereby reducing the burden on the game hall side.

[3-5. Overall configuration of the plate unit]
The dish unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. FIG. 48 is a perspective view of the dish unit of the door frame, and FIG. 49 is a perspective view of the dish unit seen from behind. The pan unit 200 is attached to a portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the front side of the door frame base 101 below the door window 101a. The tray unit 200 includes an upper tray 201 that stores game balls B to be hit into the game area 5a, and a tray unit 200 that is arranged below the upper tray 201 and stores game balls B to be hit into the game area 5a. A lower tray 202 capable of storing B.

The plate unit 200 has an upper plate 201 and a plate base unit 210 attached to the front of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and a lower plate 202 attached to the front of the plate base unit 210. and a performance operation unit 300 that is attached to the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250 and the dish base unit 210 and can be operated by a player.

The plate base unit 210 includes a plate-shaped plate unit base 211 extending left and right, an upper plate body 212 that is attached to the upper front surface of the plate unit base 211 and has an upper plate 201, and a plate unit base 212 on the right side of the upper plate body 212. A mounting base (not shown) that is attached to and protrudes forward, a tray unit relay board (not shown) that is attached to the right side of the mounting base, and a ball that is attached to the top of the mounting base. A rental operation unit 220, an upper plate ball pre-extraction unit (not shown) attached below the mounting base, and an upper plate ball post-extraction unit 240 attached to the rear of the upper plate ball extraction pre-unit, It is equipped with

The plate decoration unit 250 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 so as to cover the lower plate main body 251 which is attached to the lower front of the plate unit base 211 and has the lower plate 202, and the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251. a plate unit main body 252, a lower plate ball removal unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251, a plate left decoration unit 270 and A plate right decoration unit 275 is provided.

The performance operation unit 300 includes a performance operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player, a contact operation unit 302 that can be touched and operated by the player, and a press operation unit 303 that can be operated by pressing the player. The presentation operation unit 300 includes a presentation operation section cover unit 310 having a spherical outer surface, an operation section base 315 housed inside the presentation operation section cover unit 310 and attached to the front surface of the plate decoration unit 250, and an operation section base 315. An annular production operation part outer peripheral decorative board 320 attached to the top surface, an outer peripheral board cover 325 covering the upper part of the production operation part outer peripheral decoration board 320, and an operation part attached to the rear side of the operation part base 315. A relay board unit 330 is provided.

Furthermore, the production operation unit 300 includes a production operation unit 350 that can protrude upward from the production operation cover unit 310 and is provided with the production operation unit 301, and a production operation unit 350 that is attached to the operation base 315 to operate the production operation. A production operation part lifting mechanism 360 that supports the production operation part unit 350 so as to be able to rise and fall, and a protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 that adjusts the upward protrusion force of the production operation part unit 350 by the production operation part lifting mechanism 360. There is.

The entire plate unit 200 bulges forward, and the production operation unit 300 is arranged in the center in the left-right direction so that the top surface of the production operation unit 301 faces diagonally upward and forward. An upper plate 201 is arranged on the right side of the production operation unit 300, and a ball lending operation unit 220 is arranged, and a lower plate 202 is arranged on the left side of the production operation unit 300 below the upper plate 201.

[3-5a. Upper plate]
The upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48, 49, and the like. The upper plate 201 is formed by a plate unit base 211 and an upper plate main body 212, and is formed into a container shape that bulges forward to a greater extent on the left side than the left and right center when viewed from the front, and is open upward. The upper plate 201 (upper plate main body 212) has a portion that bulges out most forwardly from the left end to the right at about 1/3 of the width of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction. The upper plate 201 has a front end that recedes rearward as it goes from the most swollen part to the right side in front view, and has a guiding passage section 201a (FIG. 73) whose depth in the front and back direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ). The entire bottom surface of the upper plate 201, including the guide passage section 201a, is inclined such that the right end side is lower, and the right end side of the guide passage section 201a when viewed from the front sinks below the ball lending operation unit 220.

When the upper tray 201 is assembled into the tray unit 200, its bottom surface extends from a position below the upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit base 211 to the upper end of the upper tray ball supply port (not shown). On the other hand, it is inclined so as to become lower toward a position slightly below the outer diameter of the game ball B. As a result, the game balls B discharged forward from the upper tray ball supply port 211a can be received and stored in the upper tray 201, and the received game balls B can be transferred from the right end side of the guide passage section 201a. The ball can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 140 side through the upper plate ball feeding port.

In addition, the guide passage section 201a is equipped with a metal grounding fitting that is electrically grounded (earthed) in the pachinko machine 1, and when the game ball B comes into contact with it (rolls on it), the game ball B can remove static electricity.

[3-5b. Lower plate]
The lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 48, 50, and the like. FIG. 50(a) is a cross-sectional view showing the main parts of a door frame cut horizontally at the lower plate ball supply port, and FIG. FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view showing main parts. The lower tray 202 is disposed below the upper tray 201 and to the left of the center of the tray unit 200 (door frame 3) in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The lower plate 202 is formed by a lower plate main body 251 and a plate unit base 211. The lower tray 202 is formed in the shape of a container capable of storing game balls B, and is provided with a lower tray ball extraction hole 202a that vertically penetrates through the bottom wall and allows the game balls B to be discharged. The lower plate ball removal hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is closed so as to be openable and closable by a lower plate ball removal cover 265 of the lower plate ball removal unit 260.

The lower plate 202 has a substantially rectangular shape extending laterally in plan view, and the front end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction protrudes more forward than the right side. The lower plate 202 has a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a that passes through the lower plate 202 vertically and is arranged near the front end near the right end. This lower plate 202 is inclined so that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is located below the performance operation unit 300 on the left side with respect to the front of the lower plate ball supply port 211c when assembled to the plate unit 200.

The lower tray 202 can store the game balls B discharged forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c with the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a closed, and can open the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a. The game balls B stored in the tray unit 200 can be discharged below the tray unit 200 (for example, to a dollar box). In addition, when the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is open, since the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is arranged in front of the lower plate ball supply port 211c, it is possible to move forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c. The released game ball B can be quickly discharged downward from the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a by moving the shortest distance.

Here, in the conventional pachinko machine, as shown in FIG. On the other hand, a lower plate ball extraction hole 202b of the lower plate 202 is provided at the front of the center axis. The lower plate ball supply port 211j is formed into a cylindrical shape extending straight forward so that the game ball B released forward from the ball discharge port 150d goes straight to the lower plate ball extraction hole 202b. Thereby, the game ball B discharged forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211j can be quickly discharged downward from the lower tray ball extraction hole 202b by moving the shortest distance.

By the way, when the lower plate ball supply port 211j is configured to guide the game ball B straight toward the lower plate ball removal hole 202b, if the lower plate ball removal hole 202b is closed by the lower plate ball removal cover 265, the lower plate ball removal hole 202b is closed. Since the ball extraction hole 202b and the ball supply port 211j are provided near the right end of the lower tray 202, there is a risk that the game balls B will be concentrated in the area to the right of the center of the lower tray 202. There is. Then, when the game balls B concentrated in the right area in the lower tray 202 block the front of the lower tray ball supply port 211j, the game balls B from inside the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 are transferred to the lower tray 202 side. As a result, the full tank detection sensor 154 may be activated and the lower tray 202 may be determined to be full even though there is still room on the left side of the lower tray 202. There is.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50(a), the left side wall of the lower plate ball supply port 211c is inclined so as to extend obliquely to the left front. To be more specific, the distance between the left side wall of the lower tray ball supply port 211c and the front surface of the tray unit base 211 at the portion directly behind the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a is such that at least one game ball B can flow therethrough. It is tilted diagonally forward to the left so that the distance is the same.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50, the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is located to the left of the central axis line (the line shown by the dashed line) of the rear end of the lower plate ball supply port 211c (the ball discharge port 150d). I am moving it to.

As a result, by moving the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a to the left, the lowest part of the lower plate 202 (the part of the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a) moves to the left, and the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a moves to the left. With 202a closed, the game balls B can be prevented from being concentrated and stored on the right side of the lower tray 202. In the lower tray 202, even if a plurality of game balls B are stored from the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a and reach the rear end of the lower tray 202 (the front surface of the tray unit base 211), the lower tray ball supply is stopped. Since the left side wall of the opening 211c extends diagonally and forms a gap between it and the rear end of the lower tray 202 through which the game balls B can flow, the foul cover unit 150 (ball discharge port 150d) and the upper tray ball The game ball B released from the post-ejection unit 240 (ball ejection guiding path 241c) to the lower tray ball supply port 211c is guided to the left side in the lower tray 202 along the diagonally extending left side wall and released. This allows the game balls B to be properly stored throughout the lower tray 202.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the full tank detection sensor 154 from operating and notifying that the tank is full even though there is a sufficient area remaining in the lower tray 202 to store the game balls B.

[3-5c. Plate base unit]
The dish base unit 210 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. The pan base unit 210 includes a flat plate unit base 211 that is attached to the lower front of the door frame base unit 100 and extends from side to side, and an upper plate that is attached to the upper front of the tray unit base 211 and has an upper plate 201. It includes a main body 212 and a pan unit relay board 214 attached to the rear surface of the pan unit base 211 near the lower right corner.

The pan base unit 210 also includes a ball lending operation unit 220 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the dish unit base 211, and an upper plate ball operating unit 220 attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 below the ball lending operation unit 220. It includes a pre-pulling unit (not shown) and a post-ball removal unit 240 attached to the rear side of the plate unit base 211 behind the pre-bulb removal unit.

[3-5c-1. Dish unit base]
The dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. The plate unit base 211 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and extends from side to side over the entire width of the door frame base 101. It is shaped like a box.

The plate unit base 211 has an upper plate ball supply port 211a penetrating back and forth near the upper left corner in front view and extending rearward in a cylindrical shape, and a top plate ball supply port 211a penetrating back and forth below the upper plate ball supply port 211a. A speaker port 211b to which a punching metal is attached to the front side, a lower plate ball supply port 211c penetrating back and forth at the lower part on the left side with respect to the left and right center in front view and extending cylindrically rearward, and a lower plate. A notch 211d, which is cut out to a size that allows the game ball B to pass through, on the right side wall of the portion that extends cylindrically to the rear of the ball supply port 211c, and a cutout 211d that is cut out in a size that allows the game ball B to pass through, and a cutout 211d that is cut out in the upper right side of the lower ball supply port 211c when viewed from the front. An upper plate ball feeding port (not shown) is provided, which extends vertically through the upper plate main body 212 and whose upper portion is located at the right end of the upper plate main body 212.

When the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end opens to the rear wall of the upper plate 201, and the cylindrical rear end opens to the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the door frame base 101. The opening 101g is penetrated from the front side and connected to the front end of the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150. As a result, the game balls B put out from the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 are supplied (payed out) into the upper tray 201 through the upper tray ball supply port 211a.

When the lower plate ball supply port 211c is assembled to the door frame 3, its front end opens to the rear wall of the lower plate 202, and its cylindrical rear end opens the lower plate ball passage port 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front side. It penetrates and connects to the front end of the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150. As a result, the game balls B flowing through the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 are supplied into the lower tray 202 through the lower tray ball supply port 211c. Further, the downstream end of the ball extraction guide path 241c in the rear base 241 of the upper plate ball post-extraction unit 240 is connected to the notch 211d formed in the cylindrically extending portion of the lower plate ball supply port 211c. ing. As a result, the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 are transferred to the upper tray ball feeding port, the entrance port 141a of the ball feeding unit 140, the ball extraction port 141b, and the upper tray by operating the upper tray ball removal button 222. After the ball is removed, the ball is discharged into the lower tray 202 from the lower tray ball supply port 211c via the ball feeding guide path 241b and the ball removing guide path 241c of the unit 240, and the notch 211d.

The upper plate ball feeding port is located in front of the ball socket (not shown) of the rear base 241 in the upper plate ball removal unit 240 when assembled to the plate base unit 210, and The game balls B are supplied from the ball socket of the unit 240 to the ball feeding guide path 241b after the upper plate ball is removed.

[3-5c-2. Upper plate body]
The upper plate main body 212 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. The upper plate main body 212 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and forms the upper plate 201 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211. The upper plate main body 212 is formed into a container shape (dish shape) with an open upper and rear side. The upper plate main body 212 extends left and right, and the left side bulges forward more than the center of the left and right sides when viewed from the front. The upper plate main body 212 has a front end that recedes rearward as it goes from the most forwardly bulging part to the right side in front view, and the depth in the front and back direction is formed to have a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ing. The bottom surface of the upper plate main body 212 is inclined so that the right end is the lowest. The upper plate main body 212 is closed above near the right end.

When the upper tray body 212 is assembled to the tray unit 200, the upper tray main body 212 is attached so that the upper closed portion near the right end is inserted under the ball lending operation unit 220. Further, the upper plate main body 212 has a production operation unit attachment part 212a formed in the middle part in the left-right direction at the upper part, and a part of production operation unit 300 is attached to this production operation unit attachment part 212a.

[3-5c-3. Dish unit relay board]
The plate unit relay board 214 of the plate base unit 210 relays connections between the door frame sub relay board 105 in the door frame base unit 100, the plate left decorative board 273, the plate right decorative board 278, and the operation unit relay board 332. It is for. The pan unit relay board 214 is attached near the lower right corner on the rear surface of the pan unit base 211. When the plate unit relay board 214 is attached to the plate unit base 211, the rear surface faces the rear side of the plate unit base 211.

[3-5c-4. Ball rental operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 220 of the plate base unit 210 will be explained mainly with reference to FIG. 51. FIG. 51 is an enlarged plan view showing the portion of the ball lending operation unit in the dish unit of the door frame. This ball lending operation unit 220 discharges the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray 202, and pays cash to a ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. After inserting a prepaid card or a prepaid card, a predetermined number of game balls B can be lent out into the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200, and the remaining amount of cash and prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine can be displayed. This function is used to return the cash or prepaid card inserted into the machine after deducting the amount for the loaned game balls B, to adjust the volume, and to adjust the amount of light.

The ball rental operation unit 220 includes a base part 221 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the dish unit base 211, an upper dish ball extraction button 222 arranged near the left end of the top surface of the base part 221, and a button on the top surface of the base part 221. A disc-shaped ball lending operation base 223 with translucent properties is placed on the right side of the upper plate ball extraction button 222, and a ball lending button 224 is placed on the front left side of the ball lending operation base 223, The return button 225 located on the front right side of the ball lending operation base 223, the ball lending display section 226 located at the lower rear of the ball lending operation base 223, and the ball lending button 224 on the outside of the base section 221. It includes a volume adjustment button 227 placed in front and a light amount adjustment button 228 placed on the left side of the volume adjustment button 227.

The upper ball release button 222 protrudes upward in a cylindrical shape from the upper surface of the base portion 221, and can be moved downward when pressed by the player. The ball rental button 224 is formed in a circular shape, and has the word "ball" written on its top surface. The return button 225 is formed in a triangular shape. The ball rental display section 226 is composed of three 7-segment LEDs and one bullet-shaped LED, and can be clearly seen from the player side through the transparent ball rental operation base 223 in a light-emitting state.

The ball lending operation unit 220 can discharge the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray by pressing the upper tray ball removal button 222. Further, when the player presses the ball lending button 224 after inserting cash or a prepaid card with a balance into the ball lending machine, a predetermined number of game balls B are supplied to the upper tray 201. When the return button 225 is pressed, the lent game ball B is deducted from the cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine and returned. The ball lending display section 226 displays the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine. Furthermore, an error code is displayed on the ball rental display section 226 when the ball rental machine is out of order.

The volume adjustment button 227 is used to adjust the volume of sounds for production such as music, voices, sound effects, etc. output from the top center speaker and top side speaker of the door frame 3 and the bass body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4. It is for adjustment. This volume control button 227 is formed in the shape of a bicircular gourd, which looks like a combination of two circles. The volume control button 227 has a "+" character at the center of one (upper) circle, a "-" character at the center of the other (lower) circle, and a space between the two circles. The area has a pattern that looks like sound is coming from a speaker. The volume control button 227 is formed so that the diameter of the circle on the "+" side is larger than the diameter of the circle on the "-" side. When the volume adjustment button 227 is pressed on the "+" side, the volume increases, and when the "-" side is pressed, the volume decreases.

The light intensity adjustment button 228 is for adjusting the light intensity of the LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, and the brightness of the display screen of the performance display device 1600. This light amount adjustment button 228 is formed in the shape of a bicircular gourd, which looks like a combination of two circles. The light amount adjustment button 228 has a "+" character at the center of one (upper) circle, a "-" character at the center of the other (lower) circle, and a space between the two circles. The part has a light bulb pattern on it. The light amount adjustment button 228 is formed so that the diameter of the circle on the "+" side is larger than the diameter of the circle on the "-" side. This light amount adjustment button 228 becomes brighter when the "+" side is pressed, and becomes darker when the "-" side is pressed.

The volume adjustment button 227 and the light amount adjustment button 228 are of different colors (for example, the volume adjustment button 227 is white and the light amount adjustment button 228 is black), so that it is difficult for the player to confuse them.

By the way, when the volume and light intensity are adjusted using the contact operation section 302 or the press operation section 303 of the production operation section 301, the player participation type production that requires the operation of the production operation section 301 is not executed. At times, by operating the effect operation section 301 as appropriate, a setting menu for adjusting the volume, light intensity, etc. is displayed on the effect display device 1600, an item to be adjusted is selected, and then the contact operation section 302 is operated. This requires changing the volume of the volume, the brightness of the light amount, etc., and it takes time and effort to adjust the volume and light amount. In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the volume and light intensity can be directly adjusted by operating the volume adjustment button 227 and the light intensity adjustment button 228, and the effort required to adjust the volume and light intensity is It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can be simplified and adjusted in a short time.

[3-5c-5. Unit after removing the upper plate ball]
The unit before upper plate ball removal and the unit 240 after upper plate ball removal in the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 49. The upper tray ball removal unit 240 cooperates with the ball feeding unit 140 to remove the game balls stored in the upper tray 201 when the upper tray ball extraction button 222 of the ball lending operation unit 220 is pressed. This is for discharging B to the lower tray 202.

The upper plate ball post-extraction unit 240 includes a rear base 241 attached to the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 so as to close the upper plate ball feeding port from the rear, and a rear base 241 attached to the front surface of the rear base 241 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction. A spring (not shown) that urges the upper plate ball extracting slider 242 upward, and a rear cover 244 attached to the rear side of the rear base 241 are provided. ing.

The rear base 241 protrudes upward from a portion where the upper plate ball extraction slider 242 is slidably attached, and is open toward the front, and has a ball socket (not shown) through which the game ball B can pass, and a ball socket (not shown) through which the game ball B can pass. A ball feeding guide path 241b that guides the game ball B received in the socket downward and then backward on the rear surface of the rear base 241; It is provided with a ball extraction guide path 241c that guides the game ball B downward from the position and then guides it to the right in rear view.

The ball socket opens forward through the upper plate ball feeding port of the plate unit base 211 at the downstream end (right end in front view) of the guide passage section 201a of the upper plate 201 when assembled to the plate base unit 210. formed in position. The ball feeding guide path 241b is formed so that the entry port 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 is located at the rear of the lower part of the ball feeding guide path 241b when assembled to the door frame 3. Thereby, the game ball B supplied to the upper tray 201 enters the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 through the ball socket and the ball feeding guide path 241b.

The portion of the ball extraction guideway 241c extending left and right protrudes to the right in rear view than the portion to which the upper plate ball extraction slider 242 is slidably attached, and is inclined so that the right end side in rear view is lower. It has an opening on the right side when viewed from the rear. The rear side of the portion extending left and right of the ball extraction guide path 241c is closed by the rear cover 244. When the ball extraction guideway 241c is assembled to the door frame 3, the upper part of the portion that extends vertically below the ball feed guideway 241b is located in front of the ball extraction port 141b of the ball feed unit 140. At the same time, the right end in rear view of the portion extending left and right is connected to the notch 211d of the lower plate ball supply port 211c in the plate unit base 211. As a result, the game balls B discharged from the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 are discharged into the lower tray 202 from the lower tray ball supply port 211c via the ball extraction guide path 241c and the notch 211d.

The upper plate ball extraction slider 242 has a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and includes an actuation receiver (not shown) that protrudes forward from the upper left corner, and a rear surface that is the rear side of the actuation receiver. A protruding operation transmission portion 242b is provided. The operation receiver has a flat upper surface. Further, the operation transmitting portion 242b has an upper surface inclined so as to be positioned downward toward the rear, and a lower surface extending horizontally so as to be connected to the rear end of the upper surface.

When the upper plate ball extractor slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operating receiving part penetrates the plate unit base 211 from the rear side and protrudes forward, and the upper plate ball extracting slider 242 has an upper plate ball extracting member on the upper surface of the operating receiving part. The lower end of the button 222 is in contact with it. Further, when the upper plate ball extracting slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation transmitting portion 242b protrudes to the rear of the rear base 241, and the upper plate ball extracting slider 242 has an operation transmitting portion 242b protruding to the rear of the rear base 241, and the upper plate ball extracting slider 242 has an operation transmitting portion 242b projecting to the rear of the rear base 241. The rod 143c is in contact with it.

The upper end of the spring is attached to the rear base 241, and the lower end is attached to the upper plate ball extracting slider 242, and urges the upper plate ball extracting slider 242 upward. Therefore, the upper plate ball extraction slider 242 is located at the end of upward movement due to the biasing force of the spring, and can be moved downward by resisting the biasing force of the spring.

The upper plate ball removal unit 240 positions the upper plate ball removal slider 242 at the upward movement end due to the biasing force of the spring, and removes the upper plate ball via the operation receiving part of the upper plate ball removal slider 242. The eject button 222 is located at the end of the upward movement. Furthermore, since the upper plate ball extractor slider 242 is positioned at the end of its upward movement due to the biasing force of the spring, the downward movement of the operating rod 143c that is in contact with the upper surface of the operation transmitting portion 242b is prevented. A partition portion 143a of the ball extraction member 143 is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball extraction opening 141b to partition the two.

Therefore, when the upper plate ball extraction button 222 is not pressed, the ball feeding unit 140 has a partition between the entrance port 141a and the ball extraction port 141b, and the ball is sent from the upper plate 201 to the ball receiving port. The game ball B can be sent to the ball launching device 540 side from the batted ball supply port 142a via the entrance port 141a and the ball feeding member 144.

On the other hand, when the upper plate ball extracting button 222 is pressed downward against the biasing force of the spring, the upper plate ball extracting slider 242 moves downward and comes into contact with the upper surface of the operation transmitting part 242b of the upper plate ball extracting slider 242. The operating rod 143c of the ball extracting member 143 that is in contact with the ball extractor 143 can now move downward, and the ball extractor 143 rotates due to the load of the weight portion 143d of the ball extractor 143, and the partition portion 143a is connected to the entrance port 141a. It retreats from between the mouth 141b. As a result, the game balls B that have entered the entry port 141a from the upper tray 201 through the ball socket and the ball feeding guide path 241b are ejected forward from the ball extraction port 141b that is open below the entry port 141a. The Rukoto. The game ball B discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b passes through the ball outlet guiding path 241c and is guided from the notch 211d into the lower tray ball supply port 211c, and then is lowered from the lower tray ball supply port 211c. The game balls B in the upper tray 201 are discharged into the lower tray 202.

When the downward pressure on the upper plate ball removal button 222 is released, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 moves upward due to the biasing force of the spring, and the upper plate ball removal button 222 rises and comes into contact with the operation transmission part 242b. The ball extraction member 143 is rotated by the operating rod 143c, and the partition portion 143a is positioned between the entrance port 141a and the ball extraction port 141b, and the ball extraction member 143 returns to its original state.

In this way, the upper tray ball removal unit 240 feeds the game balls B in the upper tray 201 to the ball firing device 540 side via the ball feeding unit 140, or discharges them to the lower tray 202 side. can do.

[3-5d. Dish decoration unit]
The plate decoration unit 250 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 to 48 and the like. The plate decoration unit 250 has a lower plate 202 and is attached to the front surface of the plate base unit 210, and a production operation unit 300 is attached from the front in the center in the left and right direction. The plate decoration unit 250 decorates almost the entire plate unit 200.

The plate decoration unit 250 includes a lower plate body 251 that is attached to the lower front surface of the plate unit base 211 and cooperates with the plate unit base 211 to form the lower plate 202, and a plate unit base that covers the outer periphery of the lower plate body 251. A tray unit body 252 attached to the front surface of the tray unit body 211, a lower tray ball extraction unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower tray body 251, and a tray attached to the upper front surface of the tray unit body 252 spaced apart from each other to the left and right. A left decoration unit 270 and a right plate decoration unit 275 are provided.

[3-5d-1. Lower plate body]
The lower plate main body 251 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48, 50, and the like. The lower plate main body 251 forms the lower plate 202 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210. The lower plate main body 251 extends from side to side and is formed into a container shape (dish shape) with the upper and rear sides open. The lower plate main body 251 is attached to a portion to the left of the center in the left-right direction at the lower front surface of the plate unit base 211 so that the open rear portion is closed.

The lower plate main body 251 has a substantially rectangular shape extending left and right in plan view, and the front end on the left side of the center in the left and right direction protrudes more forward than the right side. In the lower plate main body 251, a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a that penetrates vertically is formed near the right front end when viewed from above. The lower plate main body 251 is inclined such that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The lower plate ball removal hole 202a is closed by a lower plate ball removal cover 265 of the lower plate ball removal unit 260 so as to be openable and closable.

When the lower plate main body 251 is assembled into the plate decoration unit 250, the outer periphery and a part of the lower surface are covered with the plate unit main body 252. Further, when the lower plate body is assembled to the plate unit 200, the bottom surface is located below the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211, and the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is located at the lower plate ball supply port. It is located in front of 211c. Thereby, the game balls B discharged forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c can be stored.

[3-5d-2. Dish unit body]
The plate unit main body 252 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48, 49, and the like. The dish unit main body 252 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 in the dish base unit 210 and decorates the front surface of the dish unit 200. The dish unit main body 252 has a bulge such that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the upper side, and a left side in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the lower side. Moreover, the top surface of the dish unit main body 252 is curved so that the center in the left-right direction is the lowest. The dish unit main body 252 is formed into a box shape that is open to the rear.

The dish unit main body 252 has an upper side bulge portion 252a that bulges forward from both left and right ends toward the center in the left-right direction at the top and extends downward and is spaced apart from the left and right, and an upper side bulge portion 252a that extends to the left from the center in the left-right direction at the bottom. is provided with a lower front decoration part 252b that bulges forward so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251.

A plate left decoration unit 270 and a plate right decoration unit 275 are attached to the front surfaces of the left and right upper side bulges 252a, respectively.

The dish unit main body 252 has a lower dish opening 252d that penetrates back and forth between the left upper side bulge 252a and the lower front decoration part 252b. The lower tray opening 252d has a size that allows the player's fingers to be inserted therein, and is formed so that it becomes wider at the top and bottom as it goes to the left. The lower plate opening 252d is formed into a cylindrical shape extending back and forth by the lower plate main body 251 and the lower surface of the left upper side bulging portion 252a.

Furthermore, although not shown in the drawings, the dish unit main body 252 is formed between a pair of upper side bulges 252a at the center in the left-right direction, and includes a production operation unit attachment part to which the production operation unit 300 is attached. . The performance operation unit mounting portion is formed to have a width that is approximately ⅓ of the width of the dish unit main body 252 in the left and right direction.

The pan unit main body 252 is formed to completely cover the front surface of the pan base unit 210 when assembled to the pan unit 200, and the speaker port 211b faces forward through the lower pan opening 252d. .

[3-5d-3. Lower plate ball removal unit]
The lower plate ball removal unit 260 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 27, 50, and the like. The lower plate ball extraction unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251, and stores game balls B in the lower plate 202 or discharges game balls B from the lower plate 202 by opening and closing the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. It is intended for the purpose of

The lower plate ball removal unit 260 includes a lower plate ball removal button 263 and a lower plate ball removal cover 265 that opens and closes the through hole by operating the lower plate ball removal button 263.

When the lower plate ball removal unit 260 is assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, the lower plate ball removal button 263 is aligned with the front surface of the lower front decoration part 252b of the plate unit main body 252, and the lower plate ball removal cover is aligned with the lower plate ball removal button 263. 265 closes the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. In this normal state, the lower tray ball removal hole 202a is closed by the lower tray ball removal cover 265, and the game balls B can be stored in the lower tray 202.

In a normal state, when the lower plate ball removal button 263 is pressed backward, the lower plate ball removal cover 265 moves and the lower plate ball removal hole 202a is opened, and the ball in the lower plate 202 is inserted through the lower plate ball removal hole 202a. The game ball B can be discharged below the tray unit 200.

Note that when the lower plate ball removal cover 265 is moved by pressing the lower plate ball removal button 263, the lower plate ball removal cover 265 remains in the moved state, and the lower plate ball removal hole 202a remains open. Thus, the game balls B in the lower tray 202 can be continuously discharged downward.

To close the lower plate ball removal hole 202a from this state, press the lower plate ball removal button 263, which is set back from the front surface of the lower front decoration part 252b, backward and then release the pressure. returns to its normal position, and the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is closed. Thereby, the game balls B can be stored in the lower tray 202.

[3-5d-4. Plate left decoration unit and plate right decoration unit]
The plate left decoration unit 270 and the plate right decoration unit 275 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 48 and the like. The plate left decoration unit 270 and the plate right decoration unit 275 are attached to the upper part of the front surface of the upper side bulge 252a of the plate unit main body 252. The plate left decoration unit 270 and the plate right decoration unit 275 decorate both left and right sides of the production operation unit 300 at the upper part of the plate unit 200.

The plate left decoration unit 270 includes a plate left decoration body 271 that is semi-cylindrical and extends left and right and has translucency, and a plate left decoration body that penetrates the plate left decoration body 271 and has translucency. It includes a lens 272 and a plate left decorative board 273 that is provided on the rear side of the plate left decorative lens 272 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The plate left decoration body 271 extends in a curved manner so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the upper part of the left upper side bulge 252a. The plate left decoration body 271 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward, and the center axis extends obliquely upward and to the left at the left end, and the center axis extends left and right at the right end, so that it has a twisted semicylindrical shape. It is formed. This plate left decoration body 271 is formed in a milky white color.

The plate left decorative lens 272 extends in the longitudinal direction of the plate left decorative body 271 while being aligned with the front surface thereof. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate left decorative board 273 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the plate left decorative body 271 can be decorated with light.

When the plate left decoration unit 270 is assembled to the door frame 3, its left end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame left side unit 420. Since the plate left decoration unit 270 does not have a rib in the middle of the plate left decoration body 271 in the longitudinal direction, when the plurality of LEDs on the plate left decoration board 273 are made to emit light, the entire front surface of the plate left decoration body 271 is illuminated. It can be decorated with light emitting light almost uniformly, and it can be made to look like a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The plate right decoration unit 275 includes a plate right decoration body 276 that has a semi-cylindrical shape, extends left and right, and has translucency, and a plate right decoration body 276 that has translucency and passes through the plate right decoration body 276. It includes a lens 277 and a dish right decorative board 278 which is provided on the rear side of the dish right decorative lens 277 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The plate right decorative body 276 extends in a curved manner so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the upper part of the right upper side bulge 252a. The plate right decorative body 276 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward, and has a central axis extending diagonally upward to the right at the right end, and a central axis extending left and right at the left end, so that it has a twisted semicylindrical shape. It is formed. This plate right decorative body 276 is formed in a milky white color.

The right plate decorative lens 277 extends in the longitudinal direction of the right plate decorative body 276 while being aligned with the front surface thereof. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate right decorative board 278 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the plate right decorative body 276 can be decorated with light.

When the plate right decorative unit 275 is assembled to the door frame 3, its right end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame right side unit 430. Since the plate right decorative unit 275 does not have a rib in the middle of the plate right decorative body 276 in the longitudinal direction, when the plurality of LEDs on the plate right decorative board 278 emit light, the entire front surface of the plate right decorative body 276 is illuminated. It can be decorated with light emitting light almost uniformly, and it can be made to look like a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

When the plate left decoration unit 270 and the plate right decoration unit 275 are assembled to the door frame 3, a portion thereof protrudes upward from the front end of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250. A step can be formed between the plate left decoration unit 270 and the plate right decoration unit 275 side with the upper side bulging portion 252a. As a result, the player can hook his/her finger using the level difference between the plate left decorative unit 270, the plate right decorative unit 275, and the upper side bulging portion 252a, and the game balls B in the upper plate 201 can be evened out. It can be used as a finger rest when operating the performance operation section 301, which will be described later. Furthermore, the difference in level between the plate left decorative unit 270 and the plate right decorative unit 275 and the upper side bulging portion 252a can prevent the game ball B on the upper side bulging portion 252a from flowing forward.

[3-5e. Overall configuration of production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the performance operation unit 300 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 52 to 56 and the like. 52(a) is a perspective view of the performance operation unit seen from the front with the performance operation button facing upward, and FIG. 52(b) is a perspective view of the performance operation unit of FIG. 52(a) viewed from the back. FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front top, and FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front bottom. be. FIG. 55(a) is a cross-sectional view of the performance operation unit in a state where the performance operation unit is in the lowered position and the elevating unsprung holding member is at the upwardly moving end position, and FIG. 55(b) is a sectional view of the performance operation unit from the state of (a). It is a sectional view of the performance operation unit in a state where the unit has moved to the raised position. FIG. 56 is a sectional view of the performance operation unit in a state where the performance operation unit is in the lowered position and the elevating and lowering unsprung holding member is at the downwardly moving end position.

The production operation unit 300 is provided at the center of the plate unit 200 in the horizontal direction, and decorates the plate unit 200, and is operated by a player to participate in the production when a player participation type production is executed. It is something that can be done. The production operation unit 300 is attached to the plate base unit 210 and the plate decoration unit 250.

The performance operation unit 300 includes a performance operation section 301 that can be operated by a player. The performance operation unit 301 is composed of a contact operation unit 302 that can be operated by touching the player, and a press operation unit 303 that can be operated by pressing the player. (vibration), and allows the player to participate not only in the driving operation of the game ball B but also in the performance during the game. In the production operation section 301, a contact operation section 302 is provided above a pressing operation section 303. In the production operation section 301, a contact operation section 302 and a press operation section 303 are formed in a circular shape with a diameter that is approximately 5/8 of the outer diameter of the production operation unit 300.

The presentation operation unit 300 includes a presentation operation section cover unit 310 which is provided on the front surface of the center in the left and right direction of the dish unit 200 and has a spherical outer shape, and a presentation operation section cover unit 310 which is attached to the outside and is provided on the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250. An operation unit base 315 to be attached, and a performance operation unit mounted with a plurality of LEDs 320a provided on the upper surface of the operation unit base 315 and used to decorate the upper part of the performance operation unit cover unit 310 (upper unit cover 312) with light. An outer peripheral decorative board 320, an outer peripheral board cover 325 attached to the operating unit base 315 so as to cover the production operating unit outer peripheral decorative board 320 from above, and an operating unit relay board unit attached to the rear surface of the operating unit base 315. It is equipped with 330.

In addition, the production operation unit 300 adjusts the protrusion force of the production operation unit 350 having the production operation unit 301, the production operation unit elevating mechanism 360 that raises and lowers the production operation unit 350, and the production operation unit 350. The ejection force adjustment mechanism 380 is provided. The production operation section unit 350 is provided so as to be movable upwardly and backwardly from the top surface of the production operation section cover unit 310 by a production operation section elevating mechanism 360.

[3-5e-1. Production operation section cover unit]
The performance operation section cover unit 310 of the performance operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The performance operation section cover unit 310 is attached to the performance operation unit mounting section of the plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250 via the operation section base 315. The production operation section cover unit 310 decorates the outer periphery of the production operation unit 300 (around the production operation section unit 350) at the center of the dish unit 200 in the left-right direction.

The production operation section cover unit 310 has a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 that is open upwardly and backwardly, and an annular structure having an insertion hole 312a provided above the unit lower cover 311 and into which the production operation section 301 is inserted. A unit upper cover 312 is provided. The unit lower cover 311 is formed into a hemispherical shape so as to cover the front and lower portions of the operation unit base 315. The unit upper cover 312 is formed to be continuous with the outer surface of the unit lower cover 311. In other words, the production operation section cover unit 310 has a substantially spherical outer surface. Incidentally, the performance operation section cover unit 310 of this embodiment has a spherical shape with a diameter of 216 mm.

The production operation section cover unit 310 is attached in an inclined state so that the axis of the annular unit upper cover 312 is positioned forward as it goes upward. In this embodiment, it is inclined at an angle of about 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line.

When the production operation section cover unit 310 is assembled to the door frame 3, its front end is the front end of the door frame 3, and the distance from the front of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit lower cover 311 is the same as that of the door frame. The distance is approximately 1/2 of the total width of the base 101 in the left and right direction.

The performance operation section cover unit 310 has at least a unit upper cover 312 having translucency, and can be decorated with light by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs of a performance operation section outer peripheral decoration board 320, which will be described later.

When the production operation section cover unit 310 is assembled to the tray unit 200, its front end protrudes more forward than the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202. Further, the performance operation section cover unit 310 is connected such that a plate left decoration body 271 and a plate right decoration body 276 extend outward from the left and right sides of the unit lower cover 311. This makes the performance operation unit 300 stand out, and the integrated decoration improves the appearance.

[3-5e-2. Operation unit base]
The operation unit base 315 of the performance operation unit 300 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The rear side of the operation unit base 315 is attached to the performance operation unit attachment part 212a of the upper plate main body 212 in the plate base unit 210. The operation unit base 315 is covered with a unit lower cover 311 on the front and lower side, and is covered with a unit upper cover 312 and the performance operation unit 301 on the upper side. The operation unit base 315 is formed in the shape of a container with an open top.

The operating unit base 315 includes a substantially cubic box-shaped main body 315a that is open at the top, and a flange 315b that extends outward from the upper end of the main body and has a circular outer periphery. ing. The main body portion 315a accommodates a performance operation unit 350 therein. In addition, the lower ends of a pair of guide shafts 362 and a central shaft 366 of a production operation section elevating mechanism 360 in a production operation section unit 350, which will be described later, are attached to the bottom wall of the main body section 315a. Further, the main body portion 315a rotatably supports the lower end side of the adjustment screw 384 of the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 on the upper surface of the bottom wall. Furthermore, a board base 331 of the operation section relay board unit 330 is attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the main body section 315a.

On the upper surface of the flange portion 315b, the performance operation section outer periphery decorative board 320 is placed. Further, an annular outer peripheral board cover 325 is attached to the flange part 315b so as to sandwich the production operation part outer peripheral decorative board 320 therebetween. A unit upper cover 312 is attached to the outer peripheral board cover 325.

When the operation unit base 315 is assembled to the performance operation unit 300, the upper surface of the flange portion 315b is located substantially on the same plane as the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311.

[3-5e-3. Operation unit relay board unit]
The operation section relay board unit 330 of the performance operation unit 300 will be explained in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The operation section relay board unit 330 is attached to the rear surface of the operation section base 315. The operation section relay board unit 330 covers a board base 331 attached to the rear surface of the main body 315a of the operation section base 315, an operation section relay board 332 attached to the rear surface of the board base 331, and the operation section relay board 332 from the rear. A board cover 333 is attached to the board base 331 as shown in FIG.

The operation unit relay board 332 includes a production operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320 (front decorative board 321 and rear decorative board 322), a button outer decorative board 355, a vibration motor 356, a contact detection sensor main body 358, a button inner decorative board 364, and an operation button. It relays connections between the lifting drive motor 367, the pressure detection sensor 373, the lifting detection sensor 374, the ejection force detection sensor 375, and the ejection force adjustment drive motor 381 and the plate unit relay board 214 of the plate base unit 210.

[3-5e-4. Production operation unit]
The performance operation section unit 350 in the performance operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The production operation section unit 350 is provided so as to face outward from the insertion opening 312a of the unit upper cover 312 in the production operation section cover unit 310, and can function as the contact operation section 302 or the press operation section 303. It is.

The production operation unit 350 includes a bottomed cylindrical button body 351 whose upper end is closed, a disc-shaped contact detection body 352 attached to the upper part of the button body 351, and a button body 352 that is inserted into the button body 351 from below. The inserted cylindrical button sleeve 353, the disc-shaped button base 354 that is attached to the lower end of the button sleeve 353 and supported so as to be able to be raised and lowered by the production operation unit elevating mechanism 360, and the button base 354 arranged above the button base 354. It is provided with an annular outer button decoration board 355 on which a plurality of LEDs 355a are mounted.

The production operation unit 350 also includes a vibration motor 356 disposed between the button body 351 and the button sleeve 353, a motor cover 357 that attaches the vibration motor 356 to the button sleeve 353, and a contact detection body 352. A contact detection sensor main body 358 is connected to the button sleeve 353 and attached to the outer periphery of the button sleeve 353.

The button body 351 is entirely transparent. The button body 351 includes a disk-shaped upper surface part 351a that is curved to bulge upward, a cylindrical cylindrical part 351b extending downward from the outer periphery of the upper surface part 351a, and a cylindrical part 351b. It has a locking part 351c projecting downward from the lower end. The upper surface portion 351a is formed in a shape constituting a part of a spherical surface having the same diameter as the spherical surface of the performance operation section cover unit 310. This upper surface portion 351a is decorated with a circular decoration having a diameter approximately 1/2 of the outer diameter. The outer diameter (diameter) of the upper surface portion 351a (cylindrical portion 351b) is approximately 5/8 of the diameter of the performance operation section cover unit 310. The length (height) of the cylindrical portion 351b is approximately 5/8 of the diameter of the upper surface portion 351a. Four locking portions 351c are provided at equal intervals in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 351b. The locking portion 351c is locked to the button base 354. Incidentally, the button body 351 of this embodiment has a diameter of about 127 mm.

The contact detection body 352 has a circular outer periphery, and is formed into a dish shape with an inner side bulging upward by a certain width from the outer periphery. The contact detection body 352 is a portion below the circular decoration on the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351, and is bulged obliquely upward and has a flat inner side. This makes the contact sensing body 352 look like a part of the decoration of the button body 351. The contact detection body 352 has a flat plate-like downwardly extending piece 352a extending downwardly from both left and right ends of the outer periphery and the rear end. The contact detection body 352 is attached to the lower surface of the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351. The contact detection body 352 is made of punched metal. The contact detection body 352 has a plurality of holes in the punched metal, so that the capacitance relative to the entire area is suppressed, thereby preventing false detection. In addition, since the contact detection body 352 is made of punched metal, the light from the LED 364a of the button inner decorative board 364 provided below can be transmitted upward, and the center portion of the upper surface 351a of the button body 351 can be easily detected. It can be decorated with light emitting light.

The contact detection body 352 is connected to an external electrode terminal of a connector in the contact detection sensor main body 358. As a result, the contact detection body 352 can function as a sensor electrode for detecting capacitance, and can detect contact or approach of the object to be detected (player's hand) to the top or side surface of the button body 351. Can be done. That is, the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358 can cause the button main body 351 to function as the contact operation section 302.

The button sleeve 353 has a cylindrical sleeve body 353a extending vertically, and an annular flange portion 353b extending outward from the lower end of the sleeve body 353a. The button sleeve 353 is entirely transparent. The sleeve body 353a has an outer diameter that is approximately 4/7 of the inner diameter of the button body 351, and a length that is approximately the same as the length of the cylindrical portion 351b of the button body 351. The button sleeve 353 can transmit the light from the plurality of LEDs 355a of the outer button decorative board 355 upward through the flange portion 353b.

The button base 354 is in the shape of a disc having approximately the same diameter as the outer diameter of the button body 351, and is attached to the lower end of the button body 351 so as to close the open lower end side of the button body 351. The button base 354 has a pair of guide holes 354a that are symmetrical with respect to the center and that extend vertically through the center, a center hole 354b that extends vertically through the center, and a center hole 354b that projects from the inner surface of the center hole toward the center. A pair of guide pins 354c are provided. The guide shafts 362 of the production operation unit elevating mechanism 360 are slidably inserted into the pair of guide holes 354a, respectively. The center hole 354b is formed to have an inner diameter large enough to allow the elevating cam member 371 to pass through. The pair of guide pins 354c are opposed to each other on the same axis and are rotatably attached around the axis.

The button base 354 further includes a flat detection piece 354d that extends downward and is detected by a press detection sensor 373 of the production operation unit elevating mechanism 360. In the button base 354, the locking portion 351c of the button body 351 is locked to the outer peripheral surface. The button base 354 is guided so as to be vertically movable by inserting a pair of guide shafts 362 into a pair of guide holes 354a. Further, the button base 354 is moved in the vertical direction by the pair of guide pins 354c being guided by the cam portion 371a of the elevating cam member 371. The button base 354 has a lower surface in contact with the upper ends of a pair of lifting springs 365 of a production operation unit lifting mechanism 360, and is urged upward by the pair of lifting springs 365.

The outer button decorative board 355 has a plurality of LEDs 355a mounted on its upper surface. The plurality of LEDs 355a are arranged on double concentric circumferences. Specifically, the plurality of LEDs 355a are provided at a portion of the button sleeve 353 slightly outside the sleeve body 353a and at a portion near the center of the width of the flange portion 353b. By appropriately emitting light from the LED 355a of the button outside decoration board 355, the area on the upper surface of the button body 351 outside the contact sensing body 352 and the side surface (peripheral surface) of the button body 351 can be decorated with light.

The vibration motor 356 has an eccentric weight attached to a rotating shaft, and can generate vibration by rotating the weight. The vibration motor 356 is arranged so that its rotation axis extends in the left-right direction. In other words, the vibration motor 356 is arranged so that its rotation axis extends in a direction perpendicular to the direction in which the production operation section 301 moves forward and backward. Further, the vibration motor 356 is provided on a straight line passing through a pair of guide shafts 362 that guide the performance operation section 301 (performance operation section unit 350) in the vertical direction. Thereby, vibrations from the vibration motor 356 can be transmitted to the performance operation section 301 in a good manner. Furthermore, the influence of the vibrations caused by the vibration motor 356 on the pair of guide holes 354a (the pair of guide shafts 362) can be reduced.

The contact detection sensor main body 358 is a capacitance sensor. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the contact detection sensor main body 358 supplies power to a sensor IC having a surge protection circuit, a transmission circuit, a detection smoothing circuit, a comparison circuit, etc., an output circuit, and the sensor IC and output circuit. It has a constant voltage circuit, a sensor electrode, and a connection connector. The contact detection sensor main body 358 can detect the capacitance of the sensor electrode contained therein. Further, the connector of the contact detection sensor main body 358 has an external electrode terminal connected to the sensor electrode, and the external electrode terminal is connected to the contact detection body 352. In other words, the contact detection sensor body 358 allows the contact detection body 352 to function as an external sensor electrode. The contact detection sensor main body 358 detects capacitance with a sensor electrode, and outputs an ON signal when a predetermined capacitance set by an external resistor is exceeded. Note that in this embodiment, an ON signal is output when a predetermined capacitance is exceeded, but a plurality of levels of signals may be output depending on the magnitude of the capacitance.

The production operation unit 350 of this embodiment includes a contact detection body 352 that is provided on the lower surface of the upper surface part 351a of the button body 351 and is made to function as a sensor electrode for detecting capacitance by a contact detection sensor body 358. Therefore, contact or approach of the object to be detected (player's hand) to the upper surface of the button body 351 can be detected via the contact detection body 352. In addition, since the contact detection body 352 of the production operation unit 350 has a plurality of downwardly extending pieces 352a extending downward, the button body It is possible to detect contact or approach of the detected object (player's hand) to the side of 351. For this reason, the effect operation section unit 350 can cause the button body 351 to function as the touch operation section 302 using the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358.

This production operation section unit 350 is supported by a production operation section elevating mechanism 360 so as to be able to rise and fall in the vertical direction. When the production operation section unit 350 is in the most downwardly moved state (normal state), the top surface part 351a of the button body 351 is aligned with the top surface of the unit upper cover 312 of the production operation section cover unit 310, and the production operation section unit 350 is not operated. The unit 300 appears to be one sphere. Then, when the production operation unit 350 is moved upward from the normal state by the production operation unit lifting mechanism 360, the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351 is in a state in which it protrudes higher than the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312. By pressing downward against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, it can function as the pressing operation section 303.

To be more specific, when the production operation unit 350 is in its lowest position (normal state), it will not move further downwards even if it is pressed, and is in a state where it cannot be pressed. . In this normal state, the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 is detected by the press detection sensor 373 of the production operation section elevating mechanism 360. Then, when the performance operation unit 350 is moved upward from the normal state by the performance operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 separates from the press detection sensor 373, and becomes a non-detection state. . Then, when the top surface of the production operation unit 350 is pressed downward and the production operation unit 350 is lowered to the lower end of movement against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 detects the press. Detected by sensor 373. As a result, a pressing operation of the production operation section unit 350 (pressing operation section 303) is detected.

In addition, since the production operation unit 350 covers the upper part of the contact detection body 352 made of punched metal with the button body 351, when operating the contact operation unit 302, the top surface of the smooth spherical button body 351 is touched. Therefore, the player does not directly touch the surface of the punching metal which has irregularities due to a plurality of holes, and the player can smoothly operate the contact operation section 302. In addition, since the contact sensing body 352 is covered by the button body 351, by forming minute irregularities, multiple lines, etc. on the surface (upper surface) of the button body 351, an arbitrary tactile sensation can be provided to the touch operation part 302. This makes it possible to increase the degree of freedom in designing the contact operation section 302, and to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can further entertain players.

In addition, although the button body 351 is transparent in the above, it is not limited to this, and may be opaque or semi-transparent so that the lower side is difficult to see through the button body 351. This makes it difficult to see the contact detection body 352 made of punched metal through the button body 351, so that the appearance of the production operation unit 350 can be improved. Furthermore, when the button body 351 is made opaque, it is desirable to have translucency. As a result, the button body 351 can be decorated with light emitting light using the light from the LED 355a of the outer button decorative board 355 provided below, the LED 364a of the button inner decorative board 364, etc. can be entertained.

[3-5e-5. Production operation unit lifting mechanism]
The performance operation part elevating mechanism 360 in the performance operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The performance operation unit elevating mechanism 360 is attached to the operation base 315, and is capable of raising and lowering the performance operation unit 350. The production operation unit elevating mechanism 360 is attached to the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315 below the production operation unit 350, and has a substantially circular outer circumference. A pair of cylindrical columns are arranged symmetrically and have lower ends attached to the bottom wall of the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315 and upper ends extending upward through the operation unit base 315 and the button base 354. A guide shaft 362, a disc-shaped upper base 363 that connects the upper ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 and whose outer circumference is smaller than the inner diameter of the button sleeve 353, and a disc-shaped upper base 363 that is attached to the upper surface of the upper base 363 and emits light upward. It is provided with a button decoration board 364 on which a plurality of LEDs 364a capable of irradiation are mounted.

In addition, the production operation unit elevating mechanism 360 includes a pair of elevating springs 365 through which a pair of guide shafts 362 are inserted and which urges the button base 354 upward, and a center of the elevating mechanism base 361 and the button base 354. It includes a central shaft 366 that penetrates vertically and has a lower end attached to the bottom wall of the main body portion 315a and an upper end attached to the upper base 363.

Furthermore, the performance operation unit elevating mechanism 360 includes an operation button elevating drive motor 367 that is attached to the lower surface of the elevating mechanism base 361 so that the rotating shaft protrudes upward, and an operating button elevating drive motor 367 that is attached to the rotating shaft of the operating button elevating and lowering drive motor 367. A driving gear 368 in the form of a spur gear, a driven gear 369 in the form of a spur gear that meshes with the driving gear 368 and is rotatably attached to the upper side of the lifting mechanism base 361, and a driven gear 369 that is rotated by the driven gear 369. and a lifting cam drive gear member 370 through which the central shaft 366 is inserted and rotatably mounted.

In addition, the production operation unit elevating mechanism 360 has a lower end connected to an elevating cam drive gear member 370, and a central shaft 366 is inserted therethrough and is rotatably attached to the elevating cam that raises and lowers the button base 354 by rotating. member 371, and a disc-shaped gear cover 372 attached to the upper side of the elevating mechanism base 361 so as to cover the elevating drive gear 368, the driven gear 369, and the elevating cam drive gear member 370 from above.

In addition, the production operation unit elevating mechanism 360 includes a press detection sensor 373 that is attached to the elevating mechanism base 361 and detects a pressing operation of the press operation unit 303, and an elevating cam drive gear member 370 that is attached to the elevating mechanism base 361. An elevation detection sensor 374 that detects the elevation of the production operation unit 350 by detecting the rotational position of the (elevation cam member 371), and an elevation detection sensor 374 that is attached to the elevation mechanism base 361 and a holding member under the elevation spring of the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380. A protrusion force detection sensor 375 that detects the protrusion force of the production operation unit 350 by detecting the elevation of the stage 385 is provided.

The lifting mechanism base 361 includes a base main body 361a formed in a disc shape, a plurality of legs 361b projecting downward from the base main body 361a, and a lifting spring that passes through the base main body 361a together with a pair of guide shafts 362. 365 through a pair of through holes 361c. The base main body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361 is formed to have an outer diameter slightly smaller than an inner peripheral diameter of the main body portion 315a of the operation unit base 315. A driven gear 369, a lifting cam drive gear member 370, a gear cover 372, a pressure detection sensor 373, and a protrusion force detection sensor 375 are attached to the top surface of the base body 361a. Furthermore, an operation button elevation drive motor 367, an elevation detection sensor 374, and an ejection force adjustment drive motor 381 are attached to the bottom surface of the base body 361a. In the elevating mechanism base 361, the lower end of the leg portion 361b is attached to the bottom wall of the main body portion 315a of the operation portion base 315. As a result, a space is formed between the bottom wall of the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315 and the base main body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361, in which the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 is arranged. The pair of through holes 361c are provided in the base body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361 at positions that are half the diameter of the base body 361a from the center forward and rearward, respectively.

The pair of guide shafts 362 pass through a pair of through holes 361c provided in the base body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361 at a distance of half the diameter of the base body 361a from the center forward and backward. . The central shaft 366 passes through the center of the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361. The pair of guide shafts 362 and central shaft 366 have their lower ends attached to the bottom wall of the main body 315a of the operating unit base 315, and their upper ends attached to the upper base 363. The pair of guide shafts 362 and the central shaft 366 are formed of metal rods.

The upper base 363 has an outer diameter that is approximately half the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361. The upper base 363 has a lower projection projecting downward. By bringing the lower protrusion of the upper base 363 into contact with the upper protrusion of the gear cover 372, a space capable of accommodating the elevating cam member 371 can be formed between the upper base 363 and the elevating mechanism base 361. can.

A plurality of LEDs 364a mounted on the upper surface of the button interior decorative board 364 are full-color LEDs. The button interior decoration board 364 can decorate the central portion of the upper surface of the button body 351 by causing the plurality of LEDs 364a to emit light as appropriate.

The pair of lifting springs 365 are coil springs, and a guide shaft 362 is inserted through each of them. The pair of lifting springs 365 have their lower ends in contact with the lifting spring holding member 385 of the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380, and their upper ends in contact with the button base 354.

The elevating cam drive gear member 370 includes a spur gear-shaped gear portion 370a that meshes with the driven gear 369, a connecting portion 370b that protrudes upward from the gear portion 370a and to which the lower end of the elevating cam member 371 is connected, and a gear portion 370a. It is provided with a lift detection piece 370c which protrudes downward in a cylindrical shape and is cut out at two opposing places and is detected by a lift detection sensor 374. The elevating cam drive gear member 370 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 into the center of the gear portion 370a.

The elevating cam member 371 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and is rotatably attached by having the central shaft 366 inserted through the center thereof. The elevating cam member 371 passes through the gear cover 372 and is provided between the upper base 363 and the elevating mechanism base 361. The elevating cam member 371 includes a pair of cam portions 371a that are spaced apart from each other by 180 degrees in the circumferential direction on the cylindrical outer circumferential surface and protrude outward. The pair of cam portions 371a guide the guide pin 354c of the button base 354.

The cam portion 371a includes a first cam 371b extending in a direction perpendicular to the axis near the lower end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, and one of the first cams 371b. a second cam 371d extending upward from an end parallel to the axis; a third cam 371e extending spirally upward from an end opposite to the second cam 371d of the first cam 371b; (See Figure 55, etc.). The second cam 371d and the third cam 371e extend upward to the same height, and the adjacent cam portions 371a are separated by a distance smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 354c of the button base 354.

Further, the elevating cam member 371 includes a connected portion 371f connected to the connecting portion 370b of the elevating cam drive gear member 370 at the lower end.

The elevating cam member 371 extends upward from the rear end side of the first cam 371b when the second cam 371d of the cam portion 371a rotates counterclockwise in a plan view of the elevating cam member 371. is formed. By rotating the elevating cam member 371, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 can be guided by the cam portion 371a, and the button base 354 (presentation operation unit 350) is biased upward by the elevating spring 365. can be raised and lowered.

The gear cover 372 has a through hole through which the lifting spring 365 and the lifting cam member 371 can pass. Furthermore, the gear cover 372 has an upper protrusion that protrudes upward at a portion that faces the lower protrusion of the upper base 363. The gear cover 372 forms a space between the upper base 363 and the elevating mechanism base 361 in which the elevating cam member 371 can be accommodated by bringing the upper protrusion into contact with the lower end of the lower protruding portion of the upper base 363. be able to.

The press detection sensor 373 detects a pressing operation of the production operation section unit 350 (press operation section 303) by detecting the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 in the production operation section unit 350. The press detection sensor 373 constantly detects the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 when the production operation unit 350 is in the lowest position (normal state). When the performance operation unit 350 is moved upward from the normal state by the performance operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the pressure detection sensor 373 becomes in a non-detection state because the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 separates. When the top surface of the production operation unit 350 is pressed downward and the production operation unit 350 is lowered to the lower end of movement against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, the press detection sensor 373 detects the button base 350. The detection piece 354d can be detected to detect the pressing operation of the production operation section unit 350 (pressing operation section 303).

The elevation detection sensor 374 detects the elevation detection piece 370c of the elevation cam drive gear member 370, thereby detecting the elevation cam member 371 via the connected portion 371f connected to the coupling portion 370b of the elevation cam drive gear member 370. The rotational position of is detected.

The ejection force detection sensor 375 detects the detection piece 385d of the elevating unsprung holding member 385 in the ejection force adjustment mechanism 380.

The performance operation unit elevating mechanism 360 can support the performance operation unit 350 in a vertically movable manner via the button base 354 by a pair of guide shafts 362 arranged in front and rear, and also supports the button base 354 by a pair of elevating springs 365. The performance operation section unit 350 can be urged upward through the above. In addition, the production operation unit elevating mechanism 360 raises and lowers the production operation unit 350 (production operation unit 301) relative to the production operation unit cover unit 310 by rotating the elevation cam member 371 by the operation button elevation drive motor 367. can be done. Furthermore, the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 can decorate the center portion of the upper surface of the button body 351 by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs 364a mounted on the button interior decoration board 364 as appropriate.

In the normal state of the performance operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is latched to a locking portion 371c provided on the lower end side of the elevating cam member 371 (FIG. 55(a) ). In this normal state, the production operation unit 350 is located at the end of downward movement via the button base 354, and even if the production operation unit 350 (press operation unit 303) is pressed downward, the production operation cannot be performed. The lower unit 350 does not move downward. Therefore, in a normal state, the pressing operation of the pressing operation section 303 is not detected. In addition, in a normal state, the surface (top surface) of the unit top cover 312 of the production operation section cover unit 310 and the top surface of the button body 351 of the production operation section unit 350 match, and the production operation section cover unit 310 and the button body 351 form one sphere.

When the elevation drive gear 368 is rotated counterclockwise in plan view by the operation button elevation drive motor 367 in the normal state (the production operation unit 350 is in the lowered position), it engages with the elevation drive gear 368. The elevating cam drive gear member 370 rotates counterclockwise in plan view via the driven gear 369, and the elevating cam member 371 connected to the elevating cam drive gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When the elevating cam member 371 rotates counterclockwise, the cam portion 371a that is visible from the front in FIG. 55(a) moves to the right, and the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 371c to the left side of the locking portion 371c in the first cam 371b, and the button base 354 moves slightly downward via the guide pin 354c against the urging force of the lifting spring 365.

Then, as the elevating cam member 371 rotates, the guide pin 354c, which rolls relatively leftward along the first cam 371b, is positioned from the left end of the first cam 371b to the second cam 371d side. Since the second cam 371d extends upward perpendicularly to the first cam 371b, the guide pin 354c moves upward along the second cam 371d due to the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, and the guide pin 354c and At the same time, the button base 354 rises, and the performance operation unit 350 is placed in the raised position. In this state, since the detection piece 354d is separated from the pressure detection sensor 373, the pressure detection sensor 373 is in a non-detecting state.

Note that the elevating spring lower holding member 385 of the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380, which the lower end of the elevating spring 365 is in contact with, can be moved to various positions in the vertical direction by the ejecting force adjustment drive motor 381, although details will be described later. can. Since the amount of compression of the lifting spring 365 can be changed depending on the vertical position of the holding member 385 under the lifting spring, the production operation unit 350 is raised with a protruding force corresponding to the amount of compression of the lifting spring 365. It can be projected into position.

When the production operation unit 350 is in the raised position, as shown in FIG. It is in contact with the cam 371e. In this state, the drive of the operation button elevation drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

When the production operation unit 350 is in the raised position, the upper surface of the button base 354 is in contact with the lower surface of the upper base 363, and further upward movement of the button base 354 is restricted. In addition, when the production operation unit 350 is in the raised position, the entire production operation unit 350 (production operation unit 301) is moved upward, and the top surface portion 351a of the button body 351 is lowered from the top surface of the unit upper cover 312. It also protrudes upward.

When the button body 351 (pressing operation section 303) of the production operation unit 350 is pressed downward with a force stronger than the biasing force of the lift spring 365 in this raised position, the production operation unit 350 presses the lift spring 365. The button base 354 moves downward against the urging force of , and the button base 354 comes into contact with the gear cover 372 . When the button base 354 comes into contact with the gear cover 372, the button base 354 is in the lowered position, and together with the button base 354, the production operation section unit 350 (press operation section 303) is also in the lowered position.

In this way, when the button base 354 comes into contact with the gear cover 372, the detection piece 354d protruding downward from the button base 354 is detected by the press detection sensor 373, and the button body 351 ( A press on the press operation section 303) is detected.

In order to return the production operation section unit 350 (press operation section 303) from the raised position to the lowered position, the operation button raising/lowering drive motor 367 rotates the raising/lowering cam member 371 in the counterclockwise direction in plan view. In (b), the third cam 371e that is in contact with the upper left of the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 moves to the right (in the direction of the guide pin 354c), so the third cam 371e moves the guide pin 354c is pressed downward, and the button base 354 moves downward through the guide pin 354c against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365.

In addition, when returning the production operation unit 350 to the lowered position, the elevating spring lower holding member 385 is moved downward by the ejecting force adjustment drive motor 381 of the ejecting force adjusting mechanism 380 to reduce the amount of compression of the elevating spring 365. state (see FIG. 56). As a result, the biasing force of the lift spring 365 that urges the production operation unit 350 upward becomes weaker, so that the force acting on the third cam 371e of the lift cam member 371 via the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 also decreases. This makes it possible to reduce the load on the operation button lift drive motor 367 that rotates the lift cam member 371, and to reduce damage (failure) to the operation button lift drive motor 367. Further, as the operation button lifting/lowering drive motor 367, an inexpensive motor with low torque can be used.

Then, when the guide pin 354c moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e toward the first cam 371b as the elevating cam member 371 rotates, the button base 354 stops moving downward, and the guide pin 354c moves toward the first cam 371b. 371b. After that, when the guide pin 354c reaches the position of the locking part 371c in the middle of the first cam 371b, the guide pin 354c is inserted into the locking part 371c recessed upward by the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, and the operation By stopping the rotation of the elevation cam member 371 by the button elevation drive motor 367, the production operation unit 350 returns to its original lowered position.

In addition, in the above, in the production operation part elevating mechanism 360, by rotating the elevating cam member 371 in the counterclockwise direction by the operation button elevating drive motor 367, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is moved to the first cam 371b ( Although an example has been described in which the button base 354 (button main body 351) is moved from the locking portion 371c) to the second cam 371d to project from the lowered position to the raised position at once, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is moved from the lifting cam member. In a normal state in which the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350) is locked by the locking portion 371c of 371 and moved to the lowered position, the operation button lifting drive motor 367 moves the lifting cam member 371 in a clockwise direction when viewed from above. It may also be rotated in the circumferential direction. Incidentally, the lifting distance of the button body 351 (the performance operation unit 350) by the performance operation unit elevating mechanism 360 in this embodiment is about 40 mm.

When the elevating cam member 371 is rotated clockwise in a normal state, the guide pin 354c moves from the first cam 371b to the third cam 371e, and the urging force of the elevating spring 365 moves the guide pin 354c to the third cam 371e. It will move upward along. When the rotation of the elevating cam member 371 is stopped when the guide pin 354c is in the middle position of the third cam 371e, the button body 351 can be moved upwardly at any position between the lowered position and the raised position. It can be stopped. By protruding the button body 351 to a position above the lowered position, it becomes possible to press the button body 351 downward against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, and the button body 351 is pushed to the pressing operation section 303. It can function as

Note that when the button body 351 is projected upward by the third cam 371e, the holding member 385 under the lifting spring of the projection force adjustment mechanism 380 is moved downward to weaken the biasing force of the lifting spring 365. is desirable. Thereby, the load applied to the rotation of the lifting cam member 371 (operation button lifting drive motor 367) can be reduced, and the feeling of pressing the button body 351 can be made lighter.

In this way, the amount of protrusion of the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350) can be changed depending on the rotational position of the elevating cam member 371, so that the amount of protrusion of the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350) can be changed depending on the gaming state (for example, the first starting port 2002 or By varying the amount of protrusion of the button body 351 (according to the special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B into the second starting port 2004), it is possible to suggest to the player the degree of expectation for the game.

In addition, at least one shallow recessed portion capable of locking the guide pin 354c may be provided in the middle of the third cam 371e of the elevating cam member 371. Thereby, the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350) can be stably projected to a position with the same amount of projection, and variations in the amount of projection can be prevented. Furthermore, if a recess is provided at least in one location in the middle of the third cam 371e, the guide pin 354c is locked in the recess, and the operation button elevating drive motor 367 stops the elevating cam member 371 from rotating. There is no need to continue, and the load on the operation button lifting/lowering drive motor 367 can be reduced.

[3-5e-6. Ejection force adjustment mechanism]
The protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 in the performance operation unit 300 will be explained mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 changes the force (of force) for the production operation unit 350 (press operation unit 303) to protrude upward by changing the amount of compression of the lifting spring 365 that urges the production operation unit 350 upward. It is possible to change the ejection force (ejection force). The protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 is provided between the bottom wall of the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315 and the base main body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361.

The ejection force adjustment mechanism 380 includes an ejection force adjustment drive motor 381 attached to the lower surface of the base body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361, and a pinion gear in the form of a spur gear attached to the rotating shaft of the ejection force adjustment drive motor 381. 382, a transmission gear 383 that meshes with the pinion gear 382 and is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the base body 361a, a spur gear-shaped gear portion 384a that meshes with the transmission gear 383, and a gear portion 384a. The adjusting screw 384 has a screw portion 384b extending downward in a cylindrical shape and having a spiral groove formed on the outer periphery, and through which the central shaft 366 is inserted and rotatably supported; 384, a pair of guide shafts 362 pass therethrough, and lower ends of a pair of lift springs 365 are in contact with a holding member 385 under the lift spring.

The protrusion force adjustment drive motor 381 is attached to the lower surface of the base body 361a such that a gap is formed between the elevating mechanism base 361 and the lower surface of the base body 361a. The protrusion force adjustment drive motor 381 has a rotating shaft protruding into the gap between the protrusion force adjustment drive motor 381 and the base body 361a.

The adjustment screw 384 has a length extending from the bottom wall of the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315 to the base main body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361 in the vertical direction. The screw portion 384b of the adjustment screw 384 is formed in a cylindrical shape with a larger diameter than the gear portion 384a.

The elevating unsprung holding member 385 includes a main body 385a that extends back and forth, a threaded hole 385b that vertically passes through the center of the main body 385a and is threadedly engaged with a screw part 384b, and a threaded hole 385b that extends from the front and back of the main body 385a. It has a downwardly recessed spring holding recess 385c provided at both ends and capable of accommodating the lower end of the lifting spring 365, and a flat detection piece 385d extending upward from the front end of the main body 385a. . In the lifting/lowering unsprung holding member 385, the guide shaft 362 passes through the center of the pair of spring holding recesses 385c. The detection piece 385d is detected by the protrusion force detection sensor 375 of the production operation section elevating mechanism 360.

The ejection force adjustment mechanism 380 can rotate the adjustment screw 384 around the central shaft 366 via the transmission gear 383 and the gear portion 384a when the ejection force adjustment drive motor 381 rotates the pinion gear 382. The ejection force adjustment mechanism 380 causes the ejection force adjustment drive motor 381 to rotate the adjustment screw 384, thereby moving the elevating unsprung holding member 385 in the vertical direction through the threaded hole 385b that engages with the screw portion 384b. be able to.

In the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380, when the lower elevating spring holding member 385 is moved upward, the lower end of the elevating spring 365 held in the spring holding recess 385c moves upward, and the amount of compression of the elevating spring 365 is increased. Become. On the other hand, when the lower lifting spring holding member 385 is moved downward, the lower end of the lifting spring 365 held in the spring holding recess 385c moves downward, and the amount of compression of the lifting spring 365 becomes smaller (see FIG. 56). reference). In other words, by moving the lifting unsprung holding member 385 upward, the urging force exerted by the lifting spring 365 to urge the production operation unit 350 upward can be increased, and the lifting unsprung holding member 385 is moved downward. Accordingly, the urging force exerted by the lifting spring 365 that urges the performance operation section unit 350 upward can be reduced. Thereby, the upward protrusion force of the production operation section unit 350 can be adjusted by the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380.

The detection piece 385d of the elevating and lowering unsprung holding member 385 is detected by the protruding force detection sensor 375 when the elevating and lowering unsprung holding member 385 is raised to the maximum. In other words, the detection piece 385d is detected by the protrusion force detection sensor 375 when the amount of compression of the lifting spring 365 is the largest. As a result, when the ejection force detection sensor 375 detects the detection piece 385d while the elevating and lowering unsprung holding member 385 is being moved upward by the ejection force adjustment drive motor 381, the elevating and lowering unsprung holding member is moved by the ejection force adjustment drive motor 381. By stopping the upward movement of the lifting spring 385, further compression of the lifting spring 365 can be prevented, and damage to the ejection force adjustment mechanism 380 can be prevented.

Further, as described above, the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 can adjust the protrusion force of the production operation unit 350 as appropriate, so when the production operation unit 350 is in the lowered position, the contact detection body 352 detects the button body. 351 is detected, and the performance operation unit 350 is projected by the performance operation unit elevating mechanism 360 and brought into contact with the detected target. At times, the protruding force of the button body 351 may be varied by appropriately selecting the vertical position of the lifting unsprung holding member 385. As a result, when the button body 351 protrudes upward, it is possible to vary the strength applied to the player's fingers, etc., so that when the button body 351 makes strong contact, something good may happen to the player. It is possible to make the player think that this is the case, and it is possible to increase the player's expectations for the game. Therefore, according to the projecting force adjustment mechanism 380, depending on the gaming state (for example, depending on the special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004), the button By increasing or decreasing the protruding force of the main body 351, it is possible to make the player's expectations for the game suggest to him/her.

By the way, as a method of changing the biasing force of the spring, it is possible to change the biasing force by adding twist to the spring. However, in order to protrude the production operation unit 350, it is necessary to use a compressed spring (compression coil spring), and if the compression coil spring is twisted to change the biasing force, it will be difficult to use it differently from the original use. This causes stress to act on the compression coil spring, leading to early deterioration of the internal structure and risk of damage. On the other hand, in the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 of the present embodiment, the protrusion force of the production operation unit 350 ( Since the biasing force) is adjusted, unreasonable stress is not applied to the lift spring 365, and early deterioration of the lift spring 365 can be reduced. It is possible to stably protrude over a long period of time.

[3-5e-7. Action of production operation unit]
Next, the operation of the effect operation unit 300 will be explained in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 57 and 58. FIG. 57 is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship of the production operation section outer peripheral decorative board, the outer button decoration board, and the button inner decoration board in a plan view of the production operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the press operation section. FIG. 58(a) is a front view of the pan unit shown in a normal state, and FIG. 58(b) is a front view of the pan unit when the production operation unit is in the raised position. The performance operation unit 300 is formed into a spherical shape as a whole, and includes a performance operation section 301 on the top surface that can be operated by the player. The production operation section 301 is composed of a contact operation section 302 that can be operated by contact or approach with the player's hand, and a press operation section 303 that can be operated by pressing. The contact operation section 302 is provided above the press operation section 303 (button body 351).

The performance operation unit 300 is assembled to the tray unit 200 in such a state that the projection direction of the press operation section 303 (the performance operation section unit 350) which can protrude upward is inclined such that the upper side is positioned forward with respect to the vertical direction. ing. In other words, the center of the production operation section 301 is located forward of the apex of the spherical production operation unit 300. Thereby, the production operation section 301 is easily visible to a player seated in the front of the pachinko machine 1.

In the normal state of the presentation operation unit 300, the press operation section 303 (the presentation operation section unit 350) is in the lowered position, and the curved upper surface of the button body 351 of the presentation operation section unit 350 is This corresponds to the spherical surface of the operation section cover unit 310. Further, in a normal state, even if the press operation section 303 is pressed downward, the press operation section 303 (performance operation section unit 350) does not move downward. Therefore, in a normal state, the effect operation unit 300 appears to the player as a mere spherical decoration, making it difficult for the player to recognize that it is operable.

As shown in FIG. 57, the production operation unit 300 includes a production operation section outer periphery decorative board 320 disposed below a unit upper cover 312 that surrounds the outer periphery of the press operation section 303 (presentation operation section unit 350). An annular outer-button decorative board 355 is arranged inside near the outer edge of the pressing operation part 303, and an inner-button decorative board 364 is arranged further inside thereof. The production operation unit 300 is arranged outward in the order of the button inner decoration board 364, the button outer decoration board 355, and the production operation section outer periphery decoration board 320. Note that the LEDs 355a inside the inner button decorative board 364 and the outer button decorative board 355 are arranged below the contact detection body 352, but since the contact detection body 352 is formed of punched metal, the light transmittance is improved. Therefore, the light from them can be transmitted upward (towards the player) in a good manner.

The performance operation unit 300 can decorate the annular unit top cover 312 with light emission using the LED 320a of the performance operation section outer peripheral decoration board 320. Furthermore, the vicinity of the periphery of the upper surface of the button main body 351 and the outer circumferential surface can be decorated with light by the LED 355a of the outer button decorative board 355. Furthermore, the center portion of the upper surface of the button body 351 can be decorated with light by the LED 364a of the button interior decoration board 364.

The plurality of LEDs 320a of the production operation section outer peripheral decorative board 320, the plurality of LEDs 355a of the outer button decorative board 355, and the plurality of LEDs 364a of the inner button decorative board 364 are arranged in rows on the circumference, so that By sequentially emitting light, a light emitting effect in which the light rotates around the center of the press operation section 303 can be shown to the player. In addition, since the plurality of LEDs 320a, LEDs 355a, and LEDs 363a are arranged concentrically, a light emitting effect in which the light spreads from the center of the press operation part 303 to the outside, and a light emission effect in which the light spreads from the outside to the center of the press operation part 303 can be produced. It is possible to show the player a light emission effect that appears to converge.

In the normal state of the production operation unit 300, as shown in FIG. It is in a state. In this state, the pressing operation of the pressing operation section 303 is disabled. On the other hand, the touch operation unit 302 can enable touch operations depending on the player participation type performance to be executed.

As a performance in a normal state (player participation type performance) in which the press operation unit 303 (performance operation unit 350) is not protruded, for example, a performance image that prompts the player to touch the top surface of the performance operation unit 300 is displayed. It displays on the device 1600 and outputs audio, sound effects, etc. When the contact detection body 352 detects contact (or approach) to the button body 351, the process moves to the next production stage. Note that when a contact is detected, the button body 351 is decorated with light by emitting light from the LED 355a of the outer button decorative board 355 and the LED 364a of the inner button decorative board 364, thereby recognizing that the player has accepted the contact operation. It is also possible to provide a feeling of operation to the contact operation section 302. At this time, the player's expectations for the game (for example, the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state in which the player has an advantage, such as a "jackpot" game) are determined by the light emitting color, light emitting brightness, light emitting pattern, etc. of the button body 351. It may be suggested.

Alternatively, when the contact detection body 352 detects contact (or approach) to the button body 351, the vibration motor 356 may be driven to vibrate the button body 351. Thereby, it is possible to give a feeling of operation to the touch operation section 302, and it is possible to make the player strongly aware that the touch operation has been accepted. Note that at this time, the vibration motor 356 may be used to give strong vibrations, weak vibrations, or vibrations with a predetermined rhythm to give the player an indication of their expectations for the game. good.

In addition, as a performance in a normal state (player participation type performance), a performance image that prompts the user to touch the top surface of the performance operation unit 300 may be displayed on the performance display device 1600, or audio, sound effects, etc. may be output. After that, when the contact detection body 352 detects the contact of the player (his/her hand or finger) to the top surface of the button body 351, the production operation section elevating mechanism 360 raises and lowers the button body 351 (production operation section unit 350). It is caused to protrude upward (pop up) by the biasing force of the spring 365. To be more specific, in a normal state, when the lifting cam member 371 is rotated counterclockwise in plan view by the operating button lifting drive motor 367, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 moves toward the cam portion 371a (first cam). 371b), and due to the biasing force of the pair of lift springs 365, the production operation unit 350 (button body 351, press operation unit 303) together with the button base 354 forcefully protrudes upward to reach the raised position (Fig. 55(b)). In this raised position, the top surface of the button body 351 is located higher than the top surface of the unit upper cover 312, and the button body 351 protrudes upward. As the button body 351 protrudes upward as described above, the finger touching the button body 351 is pushed upward together with the button body 351, which can greatly surprise the player. It can strongly attract interest.

Thereafter, the game moves to an effect in which the button body 351 (press operation section 303) is pressed, and the player is entertained by pressing the button body 351 (press operation section 303). To be more specific, when the button body 351 (pressing operation unit 303) is in the raised position and pressing the button body 351 downward against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, the button body 351 (the production operation unit 350) is moved. As the button body 351 moves downward, the top surface of the button body 351 becomes flush with the top surface of the unit upper cover 312, and the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 is detected by the press detection sensor 373. As a result, the pressing operation of the button body 351 (pressing operation section 303) is detected, and the performance can be changed using the pressing operation as an opportunity to entertain the player with a player participation type performance.

In addition, during the above performance, the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 increases or decreases the protrusion force (force) that causes the button body 351 to protrude, thereby adjusting the player's expectations for the game depending on the strength of the protrusion force. It is also possible to make it suggest. Further, when the button body 351 pops up or is pressed, the vibration motor 356 may vibrate the button body 351.

In a performance that causes the performance operation unit 350 to protrude, when the contact detection body 352 detects that the player's finger or the like approaches within the movement range (within the protrusion range) of the button body 351 that projects upward, the button is activated. The main body 351 (performance operation unit 350) may be made to protrude upward. As a result, the button body 351 comes into contact with the player's fingers and the like, giving a shock, which can surprise the player and strongly attract the player's interest. Even in this case, the protrusion force adjusting mechanism 380 may be used to increase or decrease the protrusion force with which the button body 351 protrudes, so that the player can be informed of his/her expectations for the game based on the strength of the protrusion force.

In addition, in a performance in which the performance operation unit 350 is projected, the contact detection body 352 detects whether the player's finger or the like is outside the protruding range of the upwardly protruding button body 351 and within a predetermined distance from the protruding button body 351. The button body 351 (performance operation unit 350) may be made to protrude upward when it is detected that the user approaches the user. As a result, the wind pressure generated by the protrusion of the button body 351 can be applied to the player's fingers and the like, which can surprise the player and strongly attract the player's interest. Even in this case, the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 increases or decreases the protrusion force with which the button body 351 protrudes, thereby indicating to the player his/her expectations for the game based on the strength of the wind pressure hitting the player's fingers, etc. You can do it like this.

Furthermore, as an effect of protruding the effect operation section unit 350, the button body 351 (the effect operation section unit 350) may be made to protrude upward regardless of the detection of the player's finger or the like by the contact detection body 352. At this time, if the button body 351 is made to protrude with a strong protrusion force by the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380, the button body 351 will protrude forcefully and generate a sound (protrusion sound), so the protrusion sound may surprise the player. Can be done. Furthermore, when the button body 351 is made to protrude with a weak protrusion force using the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380, the button body 351 protrudes quietly, making it difficult for the player to notice that the button body 351 protrudes. , the player can be surprised by the fact that the button body 351 suddenly protrudes.

For the performance after the performance operation unit 350 (button body 351) is projected, the urging force of the lifting spring 365 is weakened by the projection force adjustment mechanism 380, and the button body 351 (press operation unit 303) is It may also be possible to perform an effect that causes the user to perform a pressing operation similar to that of a pressing button. Alternatively, the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 may be strengthened by the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 to perform an effect that causes the player to press the button body 351 with a strong force.

Further, as a performance after the performance operation unit 350 (button body 351) is projected, a performance such as a touch operation on the protruding button body 351 may be performed. At this time, since the contact detection body 352 has a downwardly extending piece 352a extending downward, the side surface of the button body 351 may be operated by contact. In addition, at this time, it is desirable to increase the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 by the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380, thereby making it difficult for the protruding button body 351 to move. 302) can be easily touched.

In addition, as for the effect of protruding the effect operation part unit 350, in the effect operation part elevating mechanism 360, the button base 354 is rotated counterclockwise by the operation button elevating drive motor 367. Although an example has been shown in which the button base 354 (button body 351) is projected from the lowered position to the raised position at once by moving the guide pin 354c from the first cam 371b (locking part 371c) to the second cam 371d. It is not limited to this.

For example, in a normal state in which the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is locked with the locking part 371c of the lifting cam member 371 and the button body 351 (production operation unit 350) is moved to the lowered position, the operation button lifts and lowers. By rotating the elevating cam member 371 clockwise in plan view by the drive motor 367, the guide pin 354c is moved from the first cam 371b to the third cam 371e, and the elevating cam member 371 is moved in the middle of the third cam 371e. The button body 351 may be stopped from protruding upward at a position between the lowered position and the raised position by stopping the rotation of the button body 351. At this time, the holding member 385 under the lifting spring of the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 is moved downward to weaken the biasing force of the lifting spring 365.

In this way, even when the button body 351 is made to protrude partway through the third cam 371e of the elevating cam member 371, the button body 351 can be pressed, and the button body 351 can function as the press operation section 303. Thus, the player can enjoy the player participation type performance. In this case, since the amount of upward protrusion of the button body 351 can be varied depending on the rotational position of the elevating cam member 371, expectations for the game can be suggested according to the amount of protrusion of the button body 351. , can entertain players.

Furthermore, as a performance in which the projected performance operation unit 350 (button body 351) is pressed, after the performance operation unit 350 is projected, the holding member 385 under the lifting spring is moved downward to compress the lifting spring 365. to its minimum state. As a result, the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 is at its weakest, so the production operation unit 350 can be pressed with a light (weak) force, improving the operability of the pressing operation. Can be entertained. In addition, as a performance that presses the performance operation unit 350 (button body 351), the holding member 385 under the vertical movement spring is moved to an appropriate position in the vertical direction according to the special lottery result, and the biasing force of the vertical movement spring 365 is applied. may be made to have any strength from the strongest to the weakest. This allows the player to press the performance operation unit 350 strongly or weakly, so that the player can be entertained by the difference in the operating force of the performance operation unit 350, and it is possible to enjoy a more diverse range of functions. It is possible to present effects and make it difficult for players to get bored.

In addition, as a performance using the performance operation unit 300, a contact detection body is installed so that the contact of a player's finger or the like to the contact operation unit 302 (button body 351) can be detected at multiple contact stages (approach stage). A plurality of levels of threshold values may be provided according to the capacitance of 352, and the effect may be changed according to each level. In other words, by focusing on the fact that the capacitance of the contact sensing body 352 increases as the player's finger approaches the button body 351 (contact sensing body 352), a plurality of threshold values are set for the magnitude of the capacitance. By providing a multi-stage detection, it may be used for production. Specifically, for example, the player's fingers or the like are separated from the button body 351 by a predetermined distance or more, the player's fingers or the like are not in contact with the button body 351 within a predetermined distance from the button body 351, or the game By dividing the presentation into stages such as when the player's hand or finger is in contact with the button body 351, etc., and changing the presentation according to each stage, even one contact detection sensor body 358 can present a variety of presentations to the player. This makes it possible to make it difficult for players to get bored of the game, thereby suppressing a decline in interest.

In addition, in the above embodiment, as a normal state of the production operation unit 300, as shown in FIG. 56 (a), as shown in FIG. It may also be in a state where it is moved downward. Thereby, since the lift spring 365 is not strongly compressed in a normal state, it is possible to suppress early deterioration (fatigue) of the lift spring 365. Moreover, the urging force of the strongly compressed lifting spring 365 can suppress early deterioration (fatigue) of the button base 354 and the holding member 385 under the lifting spring.

In this way, the performance operation unit 300 of the present embodiment can be used for various patterns of player participation type performances, so it is possible to entertain the players with a variety of performances, and to keep the players from getting bored. By making it difficult, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

By the way, in the production operation unit 300, an annular (combined two circular arcs) production operation part outer periphery decoration board 320 is provided on the top of a spherical production operation part cover unit 310, and a production operation part outer periphery decoration board 320 is provided. A contact detection sensor main body 358 is provided in the performance operation unit 350 that moves up and down inside the decorative board 320. Further, inside the button sleeve 353 of the production operation section unit 350, a button decoration board 364 whose position is fixed is provided. This contact detection sensor body 358 is provided with a sensor electrode for detecting capacitance, so when the production operation unit 350 is moved from the lowered position to the raised position, the contact detection sensor body 358 (sensor electrode ) comes close to the production operation part outer peripheral decorative board 320 and button inner decoration board 364, and as the production operation part outer peripheral decoration board 320 and button inner decoration board 364 approach, the capacitance of the sensor electrode changes and the contact detection sensor There is a possibility that the main body 358 may make a false detection.

Therefore, a conductive shield is connected to the ground (GND) between the production operation section outer peripheral decorative board 320 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, and between the button inner decorative board 364 and the contact detection sensor main body 358. (For example, punched metal, metal plate, expanded metal, wire mesh, metal wire, metal foil, etc.) may be provided. As a result, even if the distance between the contact detection sensor body 358 and the production operation section outer periphery decorative board 320 or button inner decoration board 364 changes by moving the production operation section unit 350 up and down, the contact detection sensor main body 358 A shield connected to the ground (GND) whose distance from the contact detection sensor main body 358 does not change between the production operation part outer circumference decorative board 320 and the button inner decoration board 364 allows the production operation part outer circumference decoration board 320 and the button inner decoration board 364 to It is possible to reduce the influence of changes in capacitance due to the proximity of the decorative substrate 364 in the button, and it is possible to prevent false detection in the contact detection sensor body 358.

[3-5f. Another embodiment of the dish unit]
Next, a dish unit 200 of an embodiment different from the above will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. 59 to 61 and the like. FIG. 59 is a plan view of a production operation unit showing an example in which a plurality of contact sensing bodies are provided in the production operation unit of the production operation unit. FIG. 60(a) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an example in which a plurality of contact detection bodies are connected to one contact detection sensor body, and FIG. 60(b) is an explanatory diagram showing a contact detection sensor body and a plurality of contact detection bodies in It is an explanatory view schematically showing an example in which a switching section is provided between the plate unit and the plate unit, and (c) is an explanatory diagram that allows the plate left decoration unit, plate right decoration unit, production operation unit, etc. of the plate unit to be moved back and forth in the front and rear directions, and the production is performed. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which contact detection bodies are provided on the front side and the rear side of the operation unit and the like. FIG. 61(a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a decorative contact sensing body, and FIG. 61(b) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing another embodiment of the production operation unit. In addition, in FIGS. 59 to 61, the same reference numerals are given to the same components as above.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 59, on the lower side of the button body 351 of the production operation unit 350, the contact detection body 352 is divided into left and right parts, a left contact detection body 390L and a right contact detection body 390R. A left contact detection sensor body 391L and a right contact detection sensor body 391R are connected to the left contact detection body 390L and the right contact detection body 390R, respectively. According to this embodiment, when the player moves his or her fingers from the left side to the right side on the top surface of the button body 351, first, when the player's fingers or the like are located on the left side of the button body 351, The capacitance of the left contact detection body 390L changes and the left contact detection sensor body 391L becomes sensing, while the capacitance of the right contact detection body 390R does not change and the right contact detection sensor body 391R remains non-sensing. becomes. When the player's finger or the like moves to the center of the button body 351, the capacitance of both the left contact detection body 390L and the right contact detection body 390R changes, causing the left contact detection sensor body 391L and the contact detection sensor body Both right 391R are detected. Furthermore, when the player's finger or the like moves to the right side of the button body 351, the capacitance of the left contact detection body 390L returns to the original state, and the left contact detection sensor body 391L becomes non-sensing, and the electrostatic capacity of the right contact detection body 390R returns to its original value. The capacitance has changed and the contact detection sensor main body right 391R continues to detect.

In this way, the movement of the player's fingers, etc. is determined by the combination of detection and non-detection of the left contact detection sensor body 391L and the right contact detection sensor body 391R by the left contact detection body 390L and the right contact detection body 390R, and the patterns of their changes. can be detected. As a result, it is possible to detect contact operations with a wider variety of movements, and to present to the player a player participation type performance that allows the contact operation section 302 to perform a variety of contact operations. , the player can enjoy the participatory performance by operating the contact operation section 302. Note that by adding more contact detectors, more complex motions can be detected.

The embodiment shown in FIG. 60(a) is an example in which a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 are connected to one contact detection sensor main body 392. According to this embodiment, with a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 provided at a plurality of different locations, one contact detection sensor main body 392 detects contact by a human body or the like on any one of the contact detection bodies 393. can do.

For example, by distributing a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 inside (lower side) of the button body 351, even if the player's fingers or the like touch any part of the surface of the button body 351, any one of them will be detected. Contact can be detected by the contact detection body 393, and detection accuracy for contact with the contact operation section 302 can be improved.

In addition, the plurality of contact detection bodies 393 are connected to parts of the pachinko machine 1 that the player does not want to touch (for example, parts where the player may get injured, parts that may cause trouble to other players). It may be provided in a certain part, a part where there is a risk of fraudulent activity, etc.), and when any contact detection body 393 detects a human body, etc., a caution or a warning may be issued.

Further, the embodiment shown in FIG. 60(b) is a switch between one contact detection sensor main body 392 and a plurality of contact detection bodies 393, in which only one of the contact detection bodies 393 is connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392. This is an example in which a portion 394 is provided. According to this embodiment, by switching the connection to one of the plurality of contact detection bodies 352 using the switching unit 394, it is possible to detect contact of a human body or the like only at a desired part (contact detection body 352). . Note that the switching unit 394 may be ``a device that is switched by a switching circuit such as a relay or a transistor,'' ``a device that is switched by another electronic circuit,'' or ``a movable member (for example, a movable plate left decoration as shown in FIG. 60(c). unit 270, plate right decoration unit 275, and effect operation unit 300) that are switched as the unit 270 moves, etc.

For example, in the performance operation unit 301 (touch operation unit 302), a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 are arranged in a distributed manner, and a player participation type performance is executed in which the parts detected by each contact detection body 393 are touched in order. Sometimes, the switching unit 394 switches the contact detection bodies 393 connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392 in the order in which they are touched, and the contact detection bodies 393 detect whether or not the player's finger or the like has touched the contact detection bodies 393. good. Thereby, it is possible to present to the player a highly game-like, player-participatory performance using the plurality of contact sensing bodies 393, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a drop in interest.

Further, as shown in FIG. 60(c), when the plate left decoration unit 270, the plate right decoration unit 275, and the production operation unit 300 are made to be able to move forward and backward, the first plate is placed on the front side of the production operation unit 300. In addition to providing the contact detection body 393a, a second contact detection body 393b is provided on the rear side of the plate left decoration unit 270, the plate right decoration unit 275, and the production operation unit 300, and when the production operation unit 300 etc. are projected forward, The first contact detection body 393a and the contact detection sensor main body 392 are connected by the switching part 394, and when the production operation unit 300 etc. are to be retracted, the second contact detection body 393b and the contact detection sensor main body 392 are connected by the switching part 394. It may also be possible to switch it so that it does.

As a result, when the production operation unit 300 etc. is projected (moved) forward, the contact or approach of the player is detected by the first contact detection body 393a, and the forward movement of the production operation unit 300 etc. is stopped. Make it. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the performance operation unit 300 and the like from unnecessarily pressuring the player seated in the front of the pachinko machine 1, and to avoid causing discomfort to the player. be able to.

On the other hand, when the production operation unit 300 etc. is made to protrude forward, a gap may be formed at the rear side of the production operation unit 300 etc., and when the player's finger or the like is inserted into the gap, the production operation unit 300 etc. If the operation unit 300 and the like are retreated to the initial position, there is a risk that the player's fingers or the like may be caught and injured. Therefore, in this embodiment, when moving the production operation unit 300 etc. that have been moved forward to the rear, the switching unit 394 switches so that the second contact detection body 393b is connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392. When the second contact detection body 393b detects the player's hand, etc., the movement of the production operation unit 300, etc. to the rear is stopped, and the hand, etc. is removed from the rear side of the production operation unit 300, etc. The player is notified of the guidance, and only when the second contact detection body 393b is not detected, the performance operation unit 300 and the like are moved backward to return to the initial state. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from being injured due to the gap behind the performance operation unit 300, etc., and the safety of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

Further, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 61(a), the outer shape of the contact detection body 395 that detects the contact of a player's finger or the like is star-shaped, so that it has decorativeness (design). Note that the shape of the decorative contact detection body 395 is not limited to a star shape, but may include a circular shape, a polygonal shape, a geometric pattern shape, a shape imitating a predetermined character, and a shape imitating a predetermined item. It may be a shape, a shape imitating a predetermined logo, a frame-like shape, etc. As a result, the contact detection body 395 that can be seen through the transparent button body 351 has a decorative property (design property), so that the appearance of the button body 351 and the pachinko machine 1 can be improved by the contact detection body 395 itself. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players.

Further, in the above embodiment, the contact detection body 352 is formed of punched metal, but the contact detection body is not limited to this, and the contact detection body can be formed of a metal plate, expanded metal, wire mesh, metal wire, plating, It may be formed by metal vapor deposition, foil stamping, etc., and the same effects as described above can be achieved. Note that it is desirable to provide the contact sensing element on the back side of the transparent surface member so that the player's fingers and the like do not touch it directly.This can avoid wear of the contact sensing element and also improve the tactile sensation with the surface member. It can be made smooth.

Further, in the above embodiment, the button decoration board 364 (LED 364a) is provided below the contact sensing body 352, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 61(b), A contact detection body 397 may be provided below the transparent surface member 396, and a decoration body 398 may be provided below it. As a result, the decorative body 398 can be seen through the surface member 396 and the contact detection body 397, so that the decorativeness of the production operation unit provided with the surface member 396 can be enhanced, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. can.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 61(b), the contact sensing body 397 is formed by metal vapor deposition, and under normal conditions, the decorative body 398 provided below is not visible due to the metallic luster of the contact sensing body 397. , the decoration 398 may be made visible through the surface member 396 and the contact detection body 397 by illuminating the decoration 398 with an LED provided below the contact detection body 397 upon detection of contact with the surface member 396, etc. good.

Further, the contact sensing body 352 may be formed so as to be unrecognizable to the player. Here, examples of the unrecognizable contact sensing body include "one formed of a transparent member" and "one formed so as to be visible integrally with the decoration of a surface member such as a button body". As a result, the performance operation unit 301 provided with the contact sensing body 352 cannot detect the contact sensing body 352, and therefore does not detect the contact of a finger or the like with respect to the player or perform a contact operation. For example, when a predetermined player-participation performance is executed and a player's finger or the like touches or approaches the button body 351, the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 moves the button body 351 upward. By protruding to the side, the player becomes aware of the existence of the contact detection body 352 (touch operation unit 302) for the first time, which can greatly surprise the player, entertain the player, and suppress a decline in interest. Can be done.

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 420 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 62 to 65 and the like. 62(a) is a front view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the front, and (c) is a rear view of the door frame left side unit. FIG. FIG. 63 is an exploded perspective view of the left side unit of the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the left side unit of the door frame as seen from the back. FIG. 65 is a sectional view taken along the line U-U in FIG. 62(a). The door frame left side unit 420 is attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100 above the dish unit 200, and decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a when viewed from the front.

The door frame left side unit 420 is attached to a door frame left side base 421 attached to the left outer side of the door window 101a on the front side of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and to the upper part of the front side of the door frame left side base 421. The decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame has a plurality of first LEDs 422a installed vertically at regular intervals on the front surface, and the lower part of the front side of the left side base 421 of the door frame. The lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame and the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame are covered with a plurality of first LEDs 423a installed vertically at regular intervals on the front side. a left side upper reflector 424 attached to the door frame left side base 421; a left side lower reflector 425 attached to the door frame left side base 421 so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side lower decorative board 423; A door frame left side decoration body 426 is attached to the door frame left side base 421 so as to cover the front side of the left side upper reflector 424 and the left side lower reflector 425.

Further, the door frame left side unit 420 includes a left side upper light guide member 427 that guides the light from the first LED 422a of the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 forward, and an upper and lower left side lower decorative board 423 of the door frame left side lower decorative board 423. A left side middle light guide member 428 that guides the light forward from the first LED 423a above the center in the direction, and a first LED 423a below the center in the vertical direction in the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame. and a lower left side light guide member 429 that guides the light forward.

The door frame left side base 421 is formed into a box shape that extends vertically and is open to the front. The door frame left side base 421 is molded in two colors from synthetic resins with different colors and translucency (light transmittance). To be more specific, the door frame left side base 421 is molded in two colors using two types of resin, an inner layer 3a and an outer layer 3b, similar to the above-mentioned handle cover 295, and a part of the inner layer 3a is formed on the outer side. A circular or radial pattern is formed by penetrating the layer 3b and appearing on the outer surface. In other words, the circular and radial patterns appearing on the surface of the left side base 421 of the door frame are the inner layer 3a, and the circular and radial patterns are connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (see FIG. 71(a)). ). In addition, when molding the door frame left side base 421, the inner layer 3a may be injection molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection molded first.

The upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically. On the front surface of the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame, a plurality of first LEDs 422a are mounted at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two second LEDs are arranged vertically between the first LEDs 422a. An LED 422b is mounted. Furthermore, a 24-bit LED driver 422c having a unique address for causing the first LED 422a and the second LED 422b to emit light is mounted on the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame.

A total of 12 full-color LEDs, including 4 first LEDs 422a and 8 second LEDs 422b, are mounted on the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame. Further, the first LED 422a, which has second LEDs 422b provided on both upper and lower sides, is provided at the center (center between) of the second LEDs 422b. Furthermore, at least the second LED 422b is a wide-angle, top-view type LED that can emit light within an angle range of 130 degrees centered on the optical axis perpendicular to the front surface.

On the left side upper decorative board 422 of the door frame, as shown in FIG. 72, the four first LEDs 422a are divided into two groups, the upper two and the remaining two. In addition, the eight second LEDs 422b are divided into three sets: two from above, three from the third to fifth from the top, and three from the sixth to eighth from the top. It is divided. The LED driver 422c can control up to 24 systems, and can emit light in full color from four first LEDs 422a divided into two groups and eight second LEDs 422b divided into three groups. Thus, a total of 15 systems, 3 systems per set, are used for control.

Although not shown, on the left side upper decorative board 422 of the door frame, there are two power lines (one is a ground line) that supply power to drive the first LED 422a, second LED 422b, and LED driver 422c. , one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 422c with the peripheral control board 1510. A wiring cable consisting of electric wires is connected. Then, when the LED driver 422c of the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame receives a command addressed to the address from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board) via the control signal line, two sets of The four first LEDs 422a divided into three groups and the eight second LEDs 422b divided into three groups can be caused to emit light in an appropriate color and intensity for each group.

The lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame is formed in the shape of a vertically extending strip, and the right side is formed to be uneven. On the front surface of the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, a plurality of first LEDs 423a are mounted at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two second LEDs are arranged vertically between the first LEDs 423a. An LED 423b is mounted. Further, a 24-bit LED driver 423c having a unique address for causing the first LED 423a and the second LED 423b to emit light is mounted on the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame.

A total of 18 full-color LEDs, including 6 first LEDs 423a and 12 second LEDs 423b, are mounted on the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame. Further, the first LED 423a, which has second LEDs 423b provided on both upper and lower sides, is provided at the center (center between) of the second LEDs 423b. Furthermore, at least the second LED 423b is a wide-angle, top-view type LED that can emit light within an angle range of 130 degrees centered on the optical axis perpendicular to the front surface.

In the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, as shown in FIG. 72, the six first LEDs 423a are divided into three sets, two each from the top. In addition, the 12 second LEDs 423b are 3 from the 1st to 3rd from the top, 3 from the 4th to 6th from the top, and 7th to 9th from the top. It is divided into four groups: 3 pieces, 10th to 12th pieces from the top, and 3 pieces from the top. The LED driver 423c can control up to 24 systems, and can emit light in full color from the 6 first LEDs 423a divided into 3 groups and the 12 second LEDs 423b divided into 4 groups. Thus, a total of 21 systems, 3 systems per set, are used for control.

Although not shown, the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame has two power lines (one is a ground line) that supply power to drive the first LED 423a, second LED 423b, and LED driver 423c. , one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 423c with the peripheral control board 1510. A wiring cable consisting of electric wires is connected. Then, when the LED driver 423c of the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame receives a command addressed to the address from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board) via the control signal line, three sets of The six first LEDs 423a divided into four groups and the twelve second LEDs 423b divided into four groups can be caused to emit light in an appropriate color and intensity for each group.

The left side upper reflector 424 has a through hole 424a penetrating back and forth at a position corresponding to the second LED 422b mounted on the left side upper decorative board 422 of the door frame, and also corresponds to the first LED 422a. A cylindrical holding cylinder 424b extending back and forth is formed at the position. The upper left side reflector 424 is formed such that the rear end around the through hole 424a comes into contact with the front surface of the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame, and the area around the front side of the through hole 424a extends toward the front. It is shaped like a dish that spreads out. Thereby, the light from the second LED 422b can be widely diffused forward.

The holding cylinder 424b of the left side upper reflector 424 holds the light guide shaft portion 427a straight in the front-rear direction by inserting the cylindrical light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427, which will be described later. It is. This holding tube 424b is provided at the center between the through holes 424a. As a result, at the light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427 that protrudes forward through the holding tube 424b, the second part of the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 facing from the through hole 424a on both the upper and lower sides thereof. The light from the LED 422b is irradiated onto the light guide shaft 427a from both the upper and lower sides with an equal amount of light, thereby preventing the shadow of the light guide shaft 427a from appearing on the back side of the door frame left side decoration body 426. be able to.

Further, in the left side upper reflector 424, an attachment hole for attachment to the door frame left side base 421 is provided at the center (on the center line) between the through holes 424a. This prevents the shadow of the head of the screw inserted into the mounting hole from appearing on the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426.

The lower left side reflector 425 has a through hole 425a that penetrates back and forth at a position corresponding to the second LED 423b mounted on the lower left side decorative board 423 of the door frame, and also corresponds to the first LED 423a. A cylindrical holding cylinder 425b extending back and forth is formed at the position. The lower left side reflector 425 is formed such that the rear end around the through hole 425a comes into contact with the front surface of the lower left side decorative board 423 of the door frame, and the area around the front side of the through hole 425a extends toward the front. It is shaped like a dish that spreads out. Thereby, the light from the second LED 423b can be widely diffused forward.

A cylindrical light guiding shaft portion 428a of a left side middle light guiding member 428 and a cylindrical light guiding shaft portion 429a of a left side lower light guiding member 429, which will be described later, are inserted into the holding tube 425b of the left side lower reflector 425. This holds the light guiding shaft portion 428a and the light guiding shaft portion 429a straight in the front-rear direction. This holding cylinder 425b is provided at the center between the through holes 425a. As a result, in the light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428 and the light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429 that penetrate the holding cylinder 425b and protrude forward, the through holes 425a on both upper and lower sides thereof are formed. The light from the second LED 423b of the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, which is facing closer, is irradiated with an equal amount of light to the light guide shaft portion 428a and the light guide shaft portion 429a from both the upper and lower sides, and the left side of the door frame is illuminated with equal light intensity. It is possible to prevent the shadows of the light guide shaft portions 428a and 429a from appearing on the back side of the side decoration body 426.

Further, in the left side lower reflector 425, an attachment hole for attachment to the door frame left side base 421 is provided at the center (on the center line) between the through holes 425a. This prevents the shadow of the head of the screw inserted into the mounting hole from appearing on the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426.

The door frame left side decoration body 426 is formed in a translucent milky white color. The door frame left side decoration body 426 is formed in the form of a semicircular arc that bulges forward and extends vertically. As a result, the door frame left side decorative body 426 is formed into a half-tube shape that is open to the rear. This door frame left side decoration body 426 has a plurality of openings 426a that penetrate vertically at regular intervals back and forth along the center of the width in the left-right direction. The plurality of openings 426a are provided at positions corresponding to the holding cylinder 424b of the left side upper reflector 424 and the holding cylinder 425b of the left side lower reflector 425. These openings 426a include a light guiding shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guiding member 427, a light guiding shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guiding member 428, a light guiding shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guiding member 429, The tips of each are inserted from the rear. The door frame left side decorative body 426 is made of synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the door frame left side base 421. Further, the door frame left side decoration body 426 further includes a decoration part 426b that has a certain arcuate shape and extends along the center of the width in the left and right direction so as to avoid the plurality of openings 426a. are doing.

The left side upper light guide member 427 has four light guide shaft parts 427a that extend back and forth in a cylindrical shape, and a runner part 427b that connects the lower ends of the four light guide shaft parts 427a. , made of transparent material. The four light guide shaft portions 427a are provided vertically at regular intervals so as to correspond to the four holding tubes 424b of the left side upper reflector 424. Further, the light guide shaft portion 427a extends back and forth with approximately the same diameter as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 424b. Each light guide shaft portion 427a passes through the holding cylinder 424b of the left side upper reflector 424 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426, so that the tip end surface is on the left side of the door frame. It will be in a state where it coincides with the surface of the side decoration body 426. This left side upper light guide member 427 can guide the light from the first LED 422a of the left side upper decorative board 422 of the door frame forward by the light guide shaft part 427a, and can irradiate the light outward from the tip. The opening 426a of the left side decorative body 426 of the door frame can be illuminated brightly.

The left side middle light guide member 428 has three light guide shaft parts 428a that extend back and forth in a cylindrical shape, and a runner part 428b that connects the lower ends of the three light guide shaft parts 428a. , made of transparent material. The three light guide shaft portions 428a are provided vertically at regular intervals so as to correspond to the three upper holding tubes 425b of the lower left side reflector 425. Further, the light guide shaft portion 428a extends back and forth with a diameter that is approximately the same as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 425b. Each light guide shaft portion 428a passes through the holding tube 425b of the lower left side reflector 425 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426, so that the tip end surface is on the left side of the door frame. It will be in a state where it matches the surface of the side decoration body 426. This left side middle light guide member 428 can guide the light from the first LED 423a of the lower left side decorative board 423 of the door frame forward by the light guide shaft part 428a, and can irradiate the light outward from the tip. The opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426 can be made to emit bright light.

The left side lower light guide member 429 has three light guide shaft parts 429a that extend back and forth in a cylindrical shape, and a runner part 429b that connects the lower ends of the three light guide shaft parts 429a. , made of transparent material. The three light guide shaft portions 429a are provided vertically at regular intervals so as to correspond to the three holding cylinders 425b on the lower side of the lower left side reflector 425. Further, the light guide shaft portion 429a extends back and forth with a diameter that is approximately the same as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 425b. Each light guide shaft portion 429a passes through the holding cylinder 425b of the lower left side reflector 425 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426, so that the tip end surface is on the left side of the door frame. It will be in a state where it matches the surface of the side decoration body 426. This lower left side light guide member 429 can guide the light from the first LED 423a of the lower left side decorative board 423 of the door frame forward by the light guide shaft part 429a, and can irradiate the light outward from the tip. The opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426 can be made to emit bright light.

In the door frame left side unit 420 of this embodiment, the color of the circular or radial pattern portion on the door frame left side base 421 is the same color as the color of the circular or radial pattern portion of the handle cover 295. In addition, the color of the outer part of the circular or radial pattern on the left side base 421 of the door frame is formed in the same color as the color of the outer part of the circular or radial pattern on the handle cover 295.

In the door frame left side unit 420 of this embodiment, a portion above the center in the vertical direction protrudes slightly forward than a lower portion, and the vicinity of the lower end is gently curved to the right. This door frame left side unit 420 has an upper end located above the door window 101a and below the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, and a lower end below the door window 101a and the pan unit base 210 of the pan base unit 210. The speaker port 211b is located above the speaker port 211b. Moreover, the upper part of the door frame left side unit 420 is located on the left outer side of the door frame top unit 450. The door frame left side unit 420 decorates the left outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 when assembled to the door frame 3, making it appear as if a cylindrical fluorescent lamp is embedded therein.

According to the door frame left side unit 420 of this embodiment, the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 are placed at a position a certain distance backward from the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426. , the light from the second LED 422b and the second LED 423b mounted thereon is sufficiently spread and illuminated on the back side of the door frame left side decoration body 426. The left side decorative body 426 can be uniformly decorated with light.

In addition, light from the first LED 422a of the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame and the first LED 423a of the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, which are provided at a position spaced backward from the front surface of the left side decorative body 426 of the door frame. is guided (guided) forward by the light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427, the light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428, and the light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429. (light), the opening 426a of the left side decorative body 426 of the door frame can be made to emit light in a point-like manner brighter than other parts.

In addition, the first LED 422a of the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame, the first LED 423a on the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, the light guiding shaft part 427a of the upper left side light guiding member 427, and the middle left side light guiding member 428 The light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side lower light guide member 429 and the light guide shaft portion 429a of the lower left side light guide member 429 are provided in the center between the two adjacent second LEDs 422b and second LEDs 423b. As a result, the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a are irradiated with an equal amount of light from the second LED 422b and the second LED 423b on both sides. Even if the shadows of the light guide shafts 427a, 428a, and 429a are projected onto the left side decorative body 426 from behind, the shadows will be difficult to see, and the left side decorative body 426 of the door frame will not be evenly spaced. It can be decorated with light emitting light on a surface.

Furthermore, the door frame left side decoration body 426 has a decoration part 426b extending along the center of the width in the left-right direction so as to connect the plurality of openings 426a. As a result, even if the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 427a, light guide shaft portion 428a, and light guide shaft portion 429a are projected onto the door frame left side decoration body 426 due to the light from the second LED 422b and the second LED 423b, Since the decorative part 426b is provided in the area where the shadow is projected, the shadows of the light guide shaft part 427a, the light guide shaft part 428a, and the light guide shaft part 429a can be made difficult to see. The appearance of the light emitting decoration of the side decoration body 426 can be improved.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
Next, the door frame right side unit 430 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 to 70 and the like. Figure 66 (a) is a front view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame, (b) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit, and (c) is a front view of the door frame right side unit. It is a perspective view, and (d) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit seen from behind. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit exploded and viewed from the rear. FIG. 69 is a sectional view taken along line A--H in FIG. 66(a). FIG. 70 is a sectional view taken along the O--O line in FIG. 66(a). The door frame right side unit 430 is attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 above the dish unit 200, and decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a when viewed from the front.

The door frame right side unit 430 is attached to a door frame right side base 431 attached to the right outer side of the door window 101a on the front side of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and to the upper part of the front side of the door frame right side base 431. It is attached to the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame on which a plurality of first LEDs 432a installed vertically at regular intervals on the front are mounted, and the lower part of the front of the right side base 431 of the door frame. A lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame, on which a plurality of first LEDs 433a installed vertically at regular intervals on the front surface, an upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame, and a lower decorative board 432 on the lower right side of the door frame. A right side reflector 434 is attached to the right side base 431 of the door frame so as to cover the front side of the decorative board 433, and a right side reflector 434 of the door frame is attached to the right side base 431 of the door frame so as to cover the front side of the right side reflector 434. A side decoration body 435.

In addition, the door frame right side unit 430 includes a right side upper light guide member 436 that guides the light from the first LED 423a of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 forward, and a right side upper light guide member 436 that guides the light from the first LED 423a of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432. The lower right side light guide member 437 guides the light from one LED 433a forward.

Furthermore, the door frame right side unit 430 is attached to cover the left side of the door frame right side base 431, and has a plurality of decorative holes 438a having a predetermined shape and penetrating left and right. It is provided between the left side decorative body 438, the door frame right side left side decorative body 438, and the door frame right side base 431, and is configured to close the decorative hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438. A right-side left lens 439 having translucent properties and a decorative portion 439a to be fitted therein, and a plurality of right-side left lenses 439 having a translucent property and having a decorative portion 439a fitted thereto, and a plurality of lenses that are attached to cover the right side of the door frame right side base 431 and penetrating left and right in a predetermined shape. A door frame right side right side decoration body 440 having a decorative hole 440a is provided between the door frame right side right side decoration body 440 and the door frame right side base 431. A right-side right lens 441 having a light-transmitting property and having a decorative portion 441a fitted to close a decorative hole 440a of the decorative body 440 is provided.

The door frame right side base 431 extends vertically with a substantially constant width from side to side. Further, the rear end side of the door frame right side base 431 extends vertically over the entire height, and the front end side extends downward from the upper end almost straight to the vicinity of the center in the vertical direction, and then curves toward the rear side. After extending diagonally backward, it curves vertically near the bottom and extends vertically to the bottom end.

The door frame right side base 431 has a decorative hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438, a decorative hole 440a of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 (a decorative portion 439a of the right side left lens 439, and a right side right lens). A plurality of reflector parts 431a are provided at the height where the decorative parts 441a) are provided, and are recessed from the left and right side surfaces and extend forward to the front end. These reflector parts 431a have a rear end side that is inside the decorative part 439a and the decorative part 441a that is inclined toward the side surface side, and a bottom surface that is curved.

In addition, the door frame right side base 431 has a decorative hole 438a and a decorative hole 440a provided on the rear side of the center in the front-rear direction in the door frame right side left side decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration body 440. The reflector part 431a corresponding to (the decorative part 439a of the right side left lens 439 and the decorative part 441a of the right side right lens 441) is , penetrates in the left and right direction (concave from the left and right sides and connected to each other).

These reflector portions 431a of the door frame right side base 431 reflect light emitted rearward from a third LED 432c of a door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and a third LED 433c of a door frame right side lower decorative board 433, which will be described later. The light is reflected in the direction and emits light to decorate the decorative portion 439a of the right-side left lens 439 and the decorative portion 441a of the right-side right lens 441 (see FIG. 70, etc.).

The upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically. On the front surface of the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame, a plurality of first LEDs 432a are mounted at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two second LEDs are arranged vertically between the first LEDs 432a. An LED 432b is mounted. Further, on the rear surface of the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame, a plurality of third LEDs 432c are mounted at intervals in the vertical direction. Furthermore, a 24-bit LED driver 432d having a unique address for causing a first LED 432a, a second LED 432b, and a third LED 432c to emit light is mounted on the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame.

A total of 16 full-color LEDs, including 4 first LEDs 432a, 8 second LEDs 432b, and 4 third LEDs 432c, are mounted on the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame. Further, the first LED 432a, which has second LEDs 432b provided on both upper and lower sides, is provided at the center (center between) of the second LEDs 432b. Furthermore, at least the second LED 432b and the third LED 432c are wide-angle top-view type LEDs that can emit light within an angle range of 130 degrees centered on the optical axis perpendicular to the front surface.

In the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame, as shown in FIG. 72, the four first LEDs 432a are divided into two groups, the upper two and the remaining two. In addition, the eight second LEDs 432b are divided into three sets: two from above, three from the third to fifth from the top, and three from the sixth to eighth from the top. It is divided. Further, the four third LEDs 432c are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two.

This door frame right side upper decorative board 432 is divided into two sets of first LEDs 432a, three sets of second LEDs 432b, and two sets of third LEDs 432c, so each first LED 432a, second LED 432b, In order to cause each of the third LED 432c to emit light in full color, there are three systems for one set, for a total of 21 systems. On the other hand, since the LED driver 432d on the upper right side decorative board 432 of the door frame can control up to 24 systems, in addition to the 21 systems described above, the LED driver 432d on the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame, which will be described later, The third LED 433c is divided into two groups, and a total of 24 systems, including three systems for one group on the upper side, are controlled.

Although not shown, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 includes a first LED 432a, a second LED 432b, a third LED 432c, two third LEDs 433c on the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, and an LED. Two power lines (one is a ground line) for supplying power to drive the driver 432d, one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and an LED. A wiring cable consisting of four electric wires and one clock line for synchronizing the driver 432d with the peripheral control board 1510 is connected. When the LED driver 432d of the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame receives a command addressed to the address from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board) via the control signal line, two sets of 4 first LEDs 432a divided into 3 groups, 8 second LEDs 432b divided into 2 groups, 4 third LEDs 432c divided into 2 groups, and 2 LEDs on the lower right side decorative board 433 of the door frame. The upper two third LEDs 433c of the divided groups can be caused to emit light in an appropriate color and intensity for each group.

The lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically. On the front surface of the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame, a plurality of first LEDs 433a are mounted at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two second LEDs are arranged vertically between the first LEDs 433a. An LED 433b is mounted. Further, on the rear surface of the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame, a plurality of third LEDs 433c are mounted at intervals in the vertical direction. Furthermore, a 24-bit LED driver 433d having a unique address for causing a first LED 433a, a second LED 433b, and a third LED 433c to emit light is mounted on the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame.

A total of 22 full-color LEDs, including 6 first LEDs 433a, 12 second LEDs 433b, and 4 third LEDs 433c, are mounted on the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame. Further, the first LED 433a, which is provided with second LEDs 433b on both upper and lower sides, is provided at the center (center between them) of the second LEDs 433b. Furthermore, at least the second LED 433b and the third LED 433c are wide-angle, top-view type LEDs that can emit light within an angle range of 130 degrees centered on the optical axis perpendicular to the front surface.

In the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame, as shown in FIG. 72, six first LEDs 433a are divided into three sets, with two LEDs arranged from the top. In addition, the 12 second LEDs 433b are three from the first to third from the top, three from the fourth to the sixth from the top, and three from the 7th to the 9th from the top. It is divided into four groups: 3 pieces, 10th to 12th pieces from the top, and 3 pieces from the top. Further, the four third LEDs 433c are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two.

This door frame right side lower decorative board 433 is divided into three sets of first LEDs 433a, four sets of second LEDs 433b, and two sets of third LEDs 433c, so each first LED 433a, second LED 433b, In order to cause each of the third LED 433c to emit light in full color, there are three systems for one set, for a total of 27 systems. On the other hand, since the LED driver 433d of the lower right side decorative board 433 of the door frame can only control up to 24 systems at maximum, the lower decorative board 433 of the right side of the door frame has the third LED 433c divided into two groups. Of these, three systems for one set on the upper side are controlled by the LED driver 432d on the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame, and the remaining 24 systems (all of the first LED 433a and second LED 433b on the front side, and the third LED 433c on the rear side) 2) are controlled by the LED driver 433d of the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame. Thereby, it is possible to suppress an increase in the number of LED drivers.

Although not shown, the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame has two wires that supply power for driving the first LED 433a, the second LED 433b, the two lower third LEDs 433c, and the LED driver 433d. power line (one is a ground line), one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and one control signal line for synchronizing the LED driver 433d with the peripheral control board 1510. A wiring cable consisting of four electric wires is connected to the main clock wire. When the LED driver 433d of the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame receives a command addressed to the address from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board) via the control signal line, three sets of Each group includes six first LEDs 433a divided into four groups, twelve second LEDs 433b divided into four groups, and two third LEDs 433c in the lower group of the two groups. Each can be made to emit light in an appropriate color and intensity.

The right side reflector 434 has a through hole 434a that penetrates back and forth at a position corresponding to the second LED 432b of the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame and the second LED 433b of the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame. At the same time, a cylindrical holding cylinder 434b extending back and forth is formed at a position corresponding to the first LED 432a and the first LED 433a. The right side reflector 434 is formed so that the rear end around the through hole 434a comes into contact with the front surfaces of the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame and the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame, and the rear end around the through hole 434a contacts the front surface of the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame and the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame. The sides are shaped like a saucer that widens toward the front. Thereby, the light from the second LED 432b and the second LED 433b can be widely diffused forward.

A cylindrical light guide shaft portion 436a of a right side upper light guide member 436 and a cylindrical light guide shaft portion 437a of a right side lower light guide member 437, which will be described later, are inserted into the holding cylinder 434b of the right side reflector 434. This is to hold the light guiding shaft portion 436a and the light guiding shaft portion 437a straight in the front-rear direction. This holding tube 434b is provided at the center between the through holes 434a. As a result, the second LED 432b of the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame facing from the through hole 434a on both upper and lower sides of the light guiding shaft 436a and the light guiding shaft 437a that penetrate the holding cylinder 434b and protrude forward. The light from the second LED 433b of the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame is irradiated with an equal amount of light to the light guiding shaft portion 436a and the light guiding shaft portion 437a from both the upper and lower sides, so that the right side decorative body of the door frame It is possible to prevent the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a from appearing on the back side of the light guide shaft 435.

Further, in the right side reflector 434, an attachment hole for attachment to the door frame right side base 431 is provided at the center (on the center line) between the through holes 434a. This prevents the shadow of the head of the screw inserted into the mounting hole from appearing on the back side of the door frame right side decorative body 435.

The door frame right side decoration body 435 is formed in a translucent milky white color. The door frame right side decoration body 435 is formed in the form of a semicircular arc that bulges forward and extends vertically. As a result, the door frame right side decoration body 435 is formed into a half-tube shape that is open to the rear. This door frame right side decoration body 435 has a plurality of openings 435a passing through in the vertical direction at regular intervals back and forth along the center of the width in the left and right direction. The plurality of openings 435a are provided at positions corresponding to the holding cylinder 434b of the right side reflector 434. The respective tips of the light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436 and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437 are inserted into these openings 435a from the rear. The door frame right side decoration body 435 is made of a synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the door frame right side left side decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration body 440. The door frame right side decoration 435 has the same light transmittance as the door frame left side decoration 426. Further, the door frame right side decoration body 435 further includes a decoration part 435b that has a certain arcuate shape and extends along the center of the width in the left and right direction so as to avoid the plurality of openings 435a. are doing.

The right side upper light guide member 436 has four light guide shaft parts 436a extending back and forth in a cylindrical shape, and a runner part 436b connecting the lower ends of the four light guide shaft parts 436a. , made of transparent material. The four light guide shaft portions 436a are provided vertically at regular intervals so as to correspond to the four holding tubes 434b from the top of the right side reflector 434. Further, the light guide shaft portion 436a extends back and forth with approximately the same diameter as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 434b. Each light guide shaft portion 436a passes through the holding cylinder 434b of the right side reflector 434 from the rear side, is inserted into the corresponding opening 435a of the door frame right side decoration body 435, and the tip end surface is on the right side of the door frame. It will be in a state where it matches the surface of the decorative body 435. This upper right side light guide member 436 can guide the light from the first LED 432a of the upper right side decorative board 432 of the door frame forward by the light guide shaft part 436a, and can irradiate the light outward from the tip. The opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435 can be made to emit bright light.

The lower right-side light guide member 437 has six light guide shaft parts 437a that extend back and forth in a cylindrical shape, and a runner part 437b that connects the lower ends of the six light guide shaft parts 437a. , made of transparent material. The six light guide shaft parts 437a are provided vertically at regular intervals so as to correspond to the six holding cylinders 434b from the bottom of the right side reflector 434. Further, the light guide shaft portion 437a extends back and forth with approximately the same diameter as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 434b. Each light guide shaft portion 437a passes through the holding cylinder 434b of the right side reflector 434 from the rear side, is inserted into the corresponding opening 435a of the door frame right side decoration body 435, and the tip surface is on the right side of the door frame. It will be in a state where it coincides with the surface of the decorative body 435. This lower right side light guide member 437 can guide the light from the first LED 433a of the lower right side decorative board 433 of the door frame forward by the light guide shaft part 437a, and can irradiate the light outward from the tip. The opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435 can be made to emit bright light.

The door frame right side left side decorative body 438 is formed in a plate shape extending vertically, and has a plurality of decorative holes 438a in a predetermined shape (radial pattern shape) passing through in the left-right direction. The door frame right side left side decorative body 438 has a front end formed in a shape along the rear end of the door frame right side decorative body 435. The door frame right side left side decorative body 438 is molded in two colors from synthetic resins with different colors and translucency (light transmittance). To be more specific, the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 is molded in two colors from two types of resin, the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b, similarly to the above-mentioned handle cover 295 and the door frame left side base 421. A part of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b and appears on the outer surface, thereby forming a circular or radial pattern. In other words, part of the circular and radial patterns appearing on the surface of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 is the inner layer 3a, and the circular and radial patterns are connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (Fig. 71(a)). In addition, when molding the door frame right side left side decorative body 438, the inner layer 3a may be injection molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection molded first.

The right side left lens 439 is formed in a flat plate shape along the inside (right side) surface of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438, and protrudes to the left to decorate the door frame right side left side decorative body 438. It has a decorative portion 439a that fits into the hole 438a from the inside (right side). When the decorative portion 439a is fitted into the decorative hole 438a, its surface coincides with the outer (left) surface of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 (see FIG. 70). The right side left lens 439 is made of synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the door frame right side left side decorative body 438. The decorative portion 439a of the right side left lens 439 is located to the left of the reflector portion 431a on the right side base 431 of the door frame, and the third LED 432c of the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame and the lower decoration on the right side of the door frame. The light emitted from the third LED 433c of the board 433 can be used for light-emitting decoration.

Further, the right side left lens 439 is formed in the same color as the inner layer 3a of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438. As a result, in the assembled state, the decorative portion 439a facing from the decorative hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 has a radial pattern molded in two colors on the door frame right side left side decorative body 438. It looks the same as the part, and it is difficult to distinguish it from the part of the decorative part 439a decorated with light emission by the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c.

The door frame right side right side decoration body 440 is formed in a plate shape extending vertically, and has a plurality of decorative holes 440a in a predetermined shape (radial pattern shape) passing through in the left-right direction. Further, the door frame right side right side decoration body 440 has a cylinder insertion opening 440b into which a cylindrical portion having a keyhole 132 is inserted at the front end of the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130. This door frame right side right side decoration body 440 is formed to have approximately the same height in the vertical direction as the total height of the door frame 3. Moreover, the front end side of the door frame right side right side decoration body 440 from the upper end to the cylinder insertion port 440b is formed in a shape along the rear end of the door frame right side decoration body 435.

The right side decoration body 440 on the right side of the door frame is molded in two colors from synthetic resins with different colors and translucency (light transmittance). To be more specific, the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, like the above-mentioned handle cover 295, door frame left side base 421, and door frame right side left side decorative body 438, has an inner layer 3a and an outer layer 3b. It is molded in two colors using two types of resin, and a circular or radial pattern is formed by a part of the inner layer 3a penetrating the outer layer 3b and appearing on the outer surface. In other words, part of the circular and radial patterns appearing on the surface of the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame is the inner layer 3a, and the circular and radial patterns are connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (Fig. 71(a)). In addition, when molding the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, the inner layer 3a may be injection molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection molded first.

The right side right lens 441 is formed in a flat plate shape along the inner (right side) surface above the cylinder insertion opening 440b of the right side decoration body 440 of the right side of the door frame, and protrudes to the right to attach to the right side of the door frame. It has a decorative portion 441a that fits into the decorative hole 440a of the side right side decorative body 440 from the inside (left side). When the decorative portion 441a is fitted into the decorative hole 440a, its surface coincides with the outer (right side) surface of the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame (see FIG. 70). The right lens 441 on the right side is made of synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame. The decorative part 441a of the right lens 441 is located to the right of the reflector part 431a on the right side base 431 of the door frame, and is connected to the third LED 432c of the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame and the lower decoration of the right side of the door frame. The light emitted from the third LED 433c of the board 433 can be used for decoration.

Further, the right side right lens 441 is formed in the same color as the inner layer 3a of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440. As a result, in the assembled state, the decorative portion 441a facing from the decorative hole 440a of the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame has a radial pattern molded in two colors on the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame. It looks the same as the part, and is difficult to distinguish from the part of the decorative part 441a decorated with light emission by the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c.

In the door frame right side unit 430 of this embodiment, the colors of the circular and radial pattern parts on the door frame right side left side decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration body 440 are different from those on the handle cover 295 and the door frame left side decoration body 438. It is formed in the same color as the circular or radial pattern part on the side base 421, and the outside of the circular or radial pattern on the door frame right side left side decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration body 440. The color of the portion is the same as the color of the portion outside the circular or radial pattern on the handle cover 295 and the left side base 421 of the door frame.

In the door frame right side unit 430 of this embodiment, a portion above the center in the vertical direction protrudes more forward than a portion of the door frame left side unit 420 on the opposite side at the same height. This door frame right side unit 430 is formed at approximately the same height as the door frame 3 from the upper end to the lower end. The upper part of the door frame right side unit 430 is located on the right outer side of the door frame top unit 450.

The door frame right side unit 430, when assembled to the door frame 3, decorates the right outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, and the door frame right side decoration body 435 has a cylindrical fluorescent light. Looks like it's embedded.

The door frame right side unit 430 largely protrudes forward from the top to approximately half the height, forming a screen. This makes it difficult for players seated in front of the pachinko machine installed adjacent to the right side to see the inside of the door window 101a (gaming area 5a) in the island equipment of the gaming hall. Therefore, since the door frame right side unit 430 is formed into a screen shape, it can block the line of sight of players located nearby, making it difficult for other players to see the entire gaming area 5a. By making it difficult for other players to feel like they are being watched, it is possible to let other players play games without worrying about it.

According to the door frame right side unit 430 of the present embodiment, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 are located at a certain distance backward from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative body 435. , the light from the second LED 432b and the second LED 433b mounted thereon is sufficiently spread and illuminated on the back side of the door frame right side decoration body 435. The right side decoration body 435 can be uniformly decorated with light.

In addition, the door frame right side unit 430 includes a first LED 432a of a door frame right side upper decorative board 432 provided at a position away from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative body 435 and a door frame right side lower decorative board. The light from the first LED 433a of 433 is guided (light guided) forward by the light guide shaft part 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436 and the light guide shaft part 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437. The part of the opening 435a of the right side decorative body 435 can be made to emit light in a dotted manner brighter than other parts.

Furthermore, the door frame right side unit 430 lights up the third LED 432c of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the third LED 433c of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, thereby changing the reflector part of the door frame right side base 431. 431a, the decorative portion 439a of the right side left lens 439 is fitted into the decorative hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438, and the decorative portion 439a of the right side right side right side decorative body 440 of the door frame is fitted into the decorative hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438. The decorative portion 441a of the right lens 441 on the right side can be decorated with light emission. Furthermore, since parts of the left and right sides of the screen-shaped door frame right side unit 430 (the parts of the decorative part 439a and the decorative part 441a) can be decorated with light, this pachinko machine 1 can be displayed to other players. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can stand out and has high appeal to players.

Further, according to the door frame right side unit 430 of the present embodiment, the first LED 432a and the second LED 432b on the front side of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, and the second LED 432b on the front side of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433. The first LED 433a and the second LED 433b decorate the door frame right side decorative body 435 on the front end side with light emission, and the third LED 432c on the rear side of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 With the third LED 433c on the rear side of the lower decorative board 433, the door frame right side left side decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration body 440 on the rear side of the door frame right side decoration body 435 are illuminated and decorated. Because of the presence of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, the light from the first LED 432a, second LED 432b, first LED 433a, and second LED 433b is transmitted to the rear door. The frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 are illuminated to decorate with light, and the light from the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c illuminates the door frame right side decorative body 435 on the front side. It can be used to decorate or prevent luminescence. As a result, the door frame right side decoration body 435, the rear door frame right side left side decoration body 438, and the door frame right side right side decoration body 440 can be completely independently illuminated and decorated, so It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of presenting a player with a light-emitting performance with a higher performance effect.

Further, the door frame right side unit 430 includes a first LED 432a on the upper right side decorative board 432 of the door frame, a first LED 433a on the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame, and a light guiding shaft portion 436a of the upper right side light guiding member 436. and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the lower right side light guide member 437 are provided at the center between the two adjacent second LEDs 432b and second LEDs 433b. As a result, the light guiding shaft portion 436a and the light guiding shaft portion 437a are irradiated with an equal amount of light from the second LED 432b and the second LED 433b on both sides, so that the right side decoration body 435 of the door frame is illuminated with light. Even if the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a are projected from the rear, the shadows are difficult to see, and the door frame right side decoration body 435 can be evenly illuminated in a planar manner.

Further, the door frame right side unit 430 includes a door frame right side decorative body 435 with a decorative portion 435b extending along the center of the width in the left and right direction so as to connect the plurality of openings 435a. . As a result, even if the shadows of the light guide shaft portions 436a and 437a are projected onto the door frame right side decoration body 435 due to the light from the second LED 432b and the second LED 433b, the shadows will not be projected. Since the decorative portion 435b is provided in the area where the light guide shaft 435b is located, it is possible to make the shadows of the light guiding shaft portion 436a and the light guiding shaft portion 437a difficult to see, thereby improving the appearance of the light emitting decoration of the door frame right side decorative body 435. be able to.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 29, 30, and the like. The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper front surface of the door frame base unit 100 so as to be sandwiched between the upper portions of the door frame left side unit 420 and the door frame right side unit 430, respectively.

The door frame top unit 450 covers the door frame top base 451 attached above the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the left and right sides and the upper front of the door frame top base 451. The top upper cover 452 attached to the door frame top base 451, the door frame top decoration body 453 attached to the front end of the top upper cover 452, and the lower end of the door frame top decoration body 453 and the door frame top base 451. The door frame top and bottom plate (not shown) are connected to the bottom end of the door frame.

The door frame top unit 450 also includes a door frame top center decorative board 455 that is attached to the front center of the top upper cover 452 behind the door frame top decoration body 453 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. A door frame top left decorative board 456 is attached to the left side of the door frame top center decorative board 455 on the front side of the top upper cover 452 behind the frame top decoration body 453 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface; A door frame top right decorative board 457 is attached to the right side of the door frame top central decorative board 455 at the front of the top upper cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. (See Figure 72).

The door frame top unit 450 also includes a pair of top center speakers (not shown) provided on the front surface of the door frame top base 451, and a pair of top speakers provided on both left and right outer sides of the pair of top center speakers. A top lower cover 465 attached to the lower side of the door frame top decoration body 453 so as to cover the front of the side speakers (not shown), the top center speaker and the top side speakers, and the front side of the door frame top base 451. It includes a door frame top relay board (not shown) attached near the right end, and a door frame top plate 468 attached to the top cover 452 so as to cover the upper part of the door frame top base 451. There is.

The door frame top base 451 extends left and right with substantially the same length as the distance between the door frame left side unit 420 and the door frame right side unit 430. The top cover 452 protrudes forward in a semicircular arc shape when viewed from above, and has an opening 452a that is largely cut out from the rear end toward the front. This opening 452a is closed by a door frame top plate 468.

The door frame top decoration body 453 is formed in a translucent milky white color. The door frame top decoration 453 extends left and right in a semicircular arc shape along the front end of the top cover 452 when viewed from above. Further, the door frame top decoration body 453 has a front surface formed in a semicircular arc shape so that the center in the vertical direction protrudes forward. Thereby, the door frame top decoration body 453 is formed into a half-tube shape that is open to the rear.

The door frame top central decorative board 455 is formed in the shape of a strip extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs 455a mounted on the front surface of the door frame top central decorative board 455 are full-color LEDs. This door frame top center decorative board 455 can decorate the center portion of the door frame top decoration body 453 by emitting light by appropriately causing the plurality of LEDs 455a to emit light.

The door frame top left decorative board 456 is formed into a strip shape extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs 456a mounted on the front surface of the door frame top left decorative board 456 are full-color LEDs. This door frame top left decorative board 456 can decorate the left portion of the door frame top decoration body 453 by emitting light by appropriately causing the plurality of LEDs 456a to emit light.

The door frame top right decorative board 457 is formed in the shape of a strip extending from side to side. A plurality of LEDs 457a mounted on the front surface of the door frame top right decorative board 457 are full-color LEDs. This door frame top right decorative board 457 can decorate the right portion of the door frame top decoration body 453 by emitting light by appropriately causing the plurality of LEDs 457a to emit light.

A pair of top center speakers are provided spaced apart from each other on the left and right sides. The pair of top center speakers are full-range speakers that output sounds such as voice and music over a wide frequency band. The pair of top side speakers are tweeters and output high-frequency sounds such as voices and music.

The top lower cover 465 is made of punched metal, which is a metal plate having numerous through holes. Sound output from the top center speaker and top side speakers is radiated forward and downward through the top lower cover 465.

The door frame top relay board includes a door frame top center decorative board 455, a door frame top left decorative board 456, a door frame top right decorative board 457, a top center speaker, a top side speaker, and a door frame sub-board of the door frame base unit 100. This is for relaying the connection with the relay board 105.

The door frame top plate 468 closes the opening 452a of the top cover 452, and has a front end locked to the top cover 452 and a rear end attached to the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame top unit 450 decorates the upper and outer sides of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 when assembled to the door frame 3. The door frame top unit 450 is connected such that both left and right ends of the door frame top decoration body 453 are sunk from the front to a portion behind the inside of the upper parts of the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435. has been done. Furthermore, the door frame top unit 450 can output sounds such as voice and music to the player side through a pair of top center speakers and a pair of top side speakers.

[3-9. Door frame decoration]
Next, the decoration (exterior) of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 22 to 28, FIG. 71, and the like. FIG. 71(a) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit showing the outer layer of the two-color molding in the door frame in an opaque state, and FIG. FIG. 3 is a right side view of the door frame right side unit shown in a transparent state. As shown in the figure, the door frame 3 has a substantially rectangular door window 101a that extends vertically and is closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of a glass unit 160 at the center when viewed from the front. The door frame 3 includes the plate left decoration body 271 of the plate unit 200, the plate right decoration body 276, the unit top cover 312 and button body 351 of the production operation unit 300, the door frame left side decoration body 426 of the door frame left side unit 420, The outer periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by the door frame right side decoration body 435 of the door frame right side unit 430 and the door frame top decoration body 453 of the door frame top unit 450.

The plate left decoration body 271, the plate right decoration body 276, the door frame left side decoration body 426, the door frame right side decoration body 435, and the door frame top decoration body 453 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a are formed into a semi-tubular shape. As a result, the entire circumference of the door window 101a can be seen as if it were surrounded by fluorescent lights to the player.

In the door frame 3, a plate left decoration body 271, a plate right decoration body 276, a unit top cover 312, a door frame left side decoration body 426, a door frame right side decoration body 435, and a door frame surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Behind or below the top decoration body 453, a plate left decorative board 273, a plate right decorative board 278, a production operation section outer peripheral decorative board 320, a left side upper decorative board 422 of the door frame, a lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, and a door frame. Since the right side upper decorative board 432, the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457 are arranged, these decorative boards By making the LEDs emit light as appropriate, the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a can be decorated with light emission, and a light emitting effect can be shown to the player so that the light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a.

In the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3, a spherical performance operation unit 300 having a diameter larger than the distance of the upper tray 201 in the front-rear direction is attached to the center in the left-right direction. As a result, since the large spherical production operation unit 300 is located in the center of the dish unit 200, the visual impact can be increased. This allows the operation section 303) to stand out.

In addition, in a normal state, the top surface of the button body 351 as the production operation section 301 is continuously aligned with the top surface of the unit top cover 312, forming one sphere, so that the player It is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the performance operation unit 301 (button body 351) is operable, and the performance operation unit 300 consisting of a huge sphere makes it difficult for the player to recognize that the performance operation unit 301 (button body 351) is operable. It is possible to make the player recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is different from a pachinko machine, and it is possible to strongly attract the interest of the players, and it is possible to increase the appeal to the players. Machine 1 can be easily selected.

In addition, in the dish unit 200, since the center (center) of the production operation section 301 of the production operation unit 300 is located forward of the apex of the spherical production operation unit 300, the production operation section 301 (contact operation section 302 The upper surface of the pressing operation section 303) faces the head (face) of the player seated in the front of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, for the player who recognizes that the huge sphere provided in the center of the dish unit 200 is the performance operation section 301, the entire performance operation section 301 can be easily seen, and the performance operation section 301 can be easily seen. You can make it look bigger. In addition, it is possible to make the player strongly want to operate the giant spherical performance operation section 301, and it is possible to increase expectations for the execution of a player participation type performance in which the player operates the performance operation section 301. In addition, when a player participation type performance is executed, the player can be made to actively operate the performance operation unit 301, and the player can enjoy the player participation type performance by operating the performance operation unit 301, thereby making it more interesting. The decrease can be suppressed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 2 to 5, the exterior of the door frame 3 of this embodiment has a plurality of circular and radial patterns on its outer surface. In FIG. 71, a door frame right side unit 430 is shown as a part of the exterior of the door frame 3 as an example.

To be more specific, the multiple circular and radial patterns on the outer surface of the door frame 3 are made of two different colors and two types of synthetic resins with different translucency (light transmittance). It is formed by molding. The patterned exterior portion of the door frame 3 is molded in two colors using two types of resin, an inner layer 3a and an outer layer 3b, with a part of the inner layer 3a penetrating the outer layer 3b. By appearing on the outer surface, circular or radial patterns are formed.

For example, taking the door frame right side unit 430 as an example, if a honeycomb pattern is applied to the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b is made opaque, as shown in FIG. The honeycomb pattern of the layer 3a is visible, and the opaque outer layer 3b is visible in areas other than the pattern, resulting in an exterior with an emphasized circular or radial pattern.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 71(b), when the outer layer 3b is made transparent, the honeycomb-like pattern on the inner layer 3a becomes visible through the outer layer 3b, making it relatively circular and Radial patterns become difficult to see. In other words, the exterior appearance emphasizes the honeycomb pattern applied to the inner layer 3a.

In addition, in FIG. 71, in the door frame right side right side decoration body 440 which is molded in two colors as a part of the exterior, the decoration part 441a fitted into the decoration hole 440a is part of the right side right lens 441. Since it is a separate member different from the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, the pattern of the decorative hole 440a (decorative part 441a) does not change even if the outer layer 3b is made transparent.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the main members constituting the exterior of the door frame 3 are formed by two-color molding, so the material used for the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b (synthetic By appropriately selecting and combining the color, light transmittance, etc. of the resin (resin), it is possible to make the appearance significantly different even if the shape remains the same.

Therefore, for example, when making a minor change, the exterior of the pachinko machine 1 can be changed without incurring any cost by making the outer layer 3b transparent so that the pattern of the inner layer 3a can be seen.

Alternatively, by changing the colors of the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b for each production lot, and shipping pachinko machines 1 from different lots to the same game hall and installing them in the island equipment, it is possible to create a colorful look for players. It is possible to increase the appeal of

In the above embodiment, two-color molding is shown, but the invention is not limited to this, and multi-color molding such as three-color molding or four-color molding may be used. Specifically, in the above embodiment, the exterior is constructed by combining the right side right lens 441 with the right side decoration body 440 on the right side of the door frame molded in two colors. The frame right side right side decorative body 440 and the right side right lens 441 may be integrally formed.

Further, in the above embodiments, circular or radial patterns are formed, but the invention is not limited to this, and patterns of various shapes may be formed.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the handle cover 295 provided on the outside of the door window 101a where the game area 5a of the door frame 3 faces forward, the left side base 421 of the door frame, and the left side of the right side of the door frame Decorative bodies such as the surface decorative body 438 and the right side decorative body 440 of the right side of the door frame are molded in two colors (multicolor molding) using two synthetic resins with different light transmittances, and the polka dot pattern decoration is created by the two-color molding. Since the decorative body is formed into a desired shape, the desired decoration is also applied to the decorative body at the same time. There is no need to apply desired decorations by painting or the like after the formation, and the effort required for decorations can be omitted and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

Further, since the decoration of the decorative body is formed by two-color molding, the appearance (outside appearance) of the decorative body can be easily changed by changing the color of the synthetic resin used. Specifically, when forming a polka dot decoration by two-color molding, light is transmitted through the inner layer 3a forming the inside of the circle of the polka dot pattern and the outer layer 3b forming the outside of the circle. If they are formed using the same color with different ratios, the polka dot circles will be difficult to see because the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b are of the same color, giving the appearance that the polka dot decoration is not applied. On the other hand, if the inner layer 3a forming the inside of the polka dot circle is white and the outer layer 3b forming the outside of the circle is pink, the difference in color between the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b will cause The polka dot circles become clearly visible, giving the appearance of a pink background decorated with white polka dots. In this way, when forming a decorative body, by appropriately selecting the light transmittance (including color) of the synthetic resin used, the appearance of the decorative body can be easily changed. Costs can be reduced.

In addition, as mentioned above, when forming a decorative body, by appropriately selecting the light transmittance (including color) of the synthetic resin used, the appearance of the decorative body can be easily changed. When the combination of synthetic resins used for each lot is changed and pachinko machines 1 from different lots are shipped to the same game hall and installed in a row on the island equipment, the island equipment becomes colorful. Therefore, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 with high appeal that can give a strong impact to players who are roaming around the game hall and can attract players.

Furthermore, on the outside of the door window 101a where the game area 5a faces forward in the door frame 3, there is a handle cover 295 having decorations molded in two colors from a plurality of synthetic resins with different light transmittances, and a door frame left side base. 421, the door frame right side left side decorative body 438, the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, etc. are provided, so the outside of the door window 101a is decorated with the decorative bodies to improve the appearance. Can be done.

Furthermore, since the outer layer 3b of the two-color decorative body is made of a synthetic resin with lower light transmittance than the remaining inner layer 3a, it is difficult to see the inner layer 3a through the outer layer 3b. As a result, the boundaries of the decoration (polka dot pattern) formed by the inner layer 3a can be seen clearly, and the decoration can be clearly seen.

In addition, since the light transmittance of the outer layer 3b is lower than that of the remaining inner layer 3a, it is possible to make the inner layer 3a difficult to see through the outer layer 3b. The inner layer 3a is made transparent so that it cannot be seen from the outside, and when the model is changed, a synthetic resin with high light transmittance is used for the outer layer 3b so that the inner layer 3a can be seen through. This allows the appearance of the decoration of the decorative body to be greatly changed, and the appearance (decoration) can be easily changed without changing the shape of the decorative body.

In addition, as mentioned above, since the outer layer 3b with low light transmittance can make the inner layer 3a difficult to see, the surface of the inner layer 3a can be patterned (patterned by shape, painted, printed, pasted with a sticker, etc.). In the initial model, the opaque outer layer 3b with low light transmittance prevents the pattern of the inner layer 3a from being seen through the outer layer 3b, and when the model is changed, a transparent outer layer 3b is applied. By using a synthetic resin, the pattern of the inner layer 3a can be seen through, so the appearance (decoration) of the decorative body can be significantly changed without changing the shape of the decorative body. , it is possible to suppress the increase in costs associated with model changes.

Furthermore, the third LED 432c of the upper right side decorative board 432 of the door frame and the lower decorative board on the right side of the door frame are capable of irradiating light inside the right side left side decorative body 438 of the door frame and the right side decorative body 440 of the right side of the door frame. 433 third LEDs 433c, and the inner layer 3a is made of synthetic resin with higher light transmittance than the others, so that the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side right side decorative body When the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c provided on the inside of the door frame 440 are made to emit light, the inside of the decorations formed on the surfaces of the door frame right side left side decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration body 440 is illuminated. The part of the layer 3a (the polka dot part) can be decorated with bright light, and the outside of the door window 101a facing the game area 5a can be decorated with light to improve the appearance. The light-emitting decorations of the side left side decorative body 438 and the right side right side decorative body 440 of the door frame can be enjoyed, and a decrease in player's interest can be suppressed.

Also, depending on the light transmittance of the outer layer 3b, the outer layer 3b can also be decorated with light by the light from the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c that are irradiated to the outer layer 3b through the inner layer 3a. The entire side left side decorative body 438 and the right side right side decorative body 440 of the door frame can be decorated with light emitting light, and the right side left side decorative body 438 of the door frame and the right side decorative body 440 of the right side of the door frame can be made to look beautiful for games. The pachinko machine 1 can be made highly appealing and can strongly attract the attention of players.

Further, as described above, the decorations of the decorations such as the door frame right side left side decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration body 440 are two-color molded (multicolor molding) of a plurality of synthetic resins with different light transmittances. (molding), the LEDs (light emitting means) such as the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c may emit light depending on the number of layers up to the surface or the light transmittance of the synthetic resin used. The decoration that is visible when the player is not in use can be made different from the decoration that is visible when the LED is emitting light, and by changing the decoration, it is possible to strongly attract the attention of the player. To explain in detail, for example, taking two-color molding as an example of multi-color molding, if a hole of a predetermined shape is formed in the inner layer 3a at a portion covered by the outer layer 3b, the LED will not emit light. In this state, only the surface-exposed portion of the inner layer 3a is visible. On the other hand, when the LED is made to emit light, the light from the LED is directly irradiated to the outer layer 3b without passing through the inner layer 3a at the part of the inner layer 3a where the hole is formed, so that the inner layer is exposed to the surface of the outer layer 3b. The shape of the hole in the layer 3a becomes visible, and the surface-exposed portion of the inner layer 3a and the hole portion become visible, and a different decoration is visible than when the LED is not emitting light. Alternatively, for example, when the inner layer 3a is yellow and the outer layer 3b is blue, when the LED emits yellow light, only the portion of the inner layer 3a in the surface decoration is decorated with light. On the other hand, when the LED emits green (or white) light, both the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b on the surface are decorated with light, so depending on the color of the light emitted by the LED, the decoration is decorated with light. It is possible to change the parts that are decorated with light, and the decoration that is decorated with luminescence can be changed. In this way, the decoration of the decoration body can be made different by emitting light from the LED, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted and the player can be entertained. In addition, by making the LED light up according to the game status, changes in the decoration of the decorations can alert the player to the arrival of a chance or a change in the hitting operation (for example, hitting right). It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can be made to suggest and can perform a variety of performances.

In addition, since the amount of protrusion in the front and back direction of the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 provided on both left and right outer sides of the door window 101a (gaming area 5a) is made different, Since the impression (view) of this pachinko machine 1 can be made different when viewed from the front left and from the front right, the pachinko machine 1 can be played around the game hall where it is installed. Even if a player passes in front of the pachinko machine 1, when approaching the pachinko machine 1 from the opposite side, the player's attention to the pachinko machine 1 will be drawn because the player's appearance will be different from the previous time. This makes it possible to create a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can attract players who are roaming around the game hall to select a pachinko machine 1 to play to the pachinko machine 1. .

[3-10. LED arrangement and system in door frame]
Next, the arrangement and control system of each LED provided in the door frame 3 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73. FIG. 72 is a front view showing each decorative board of the door frame, and FIG. 73 is a plan view showing the decorative board of the effect operation unit of the door frame. As shown in FIG. 72, the door frame 3 is provided with a handle 195 at the lower right corner when viewed from the front, for driving the game ball B into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by rotating the handle 195 by the player. The handle 195 includes a central hub portion 195a, three spoke portions 195b from which the central hub portion 195a extends outward, and an annular outer ring portion 195c connecting the tips of the spoke portions 195b. It has an appearance similar to an automobile steering wheel.

In the handle 195, the front side of a central hub portion 195a is covered by a front handle lens 185, and a handle decoration board 184 having a plurality of LEDs 184a mounted on the front surface is provided between the front handle lens 185 and the central hub portion 195a. It is provided. Further, a handle cover decorative board 293 having a plurality of LEDs 293a mounted on the front surface is provided behind the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195.

There are 10 handle decoration boards 184 in total: one at the center, three at regular intervals circumferentially on the middle circumference, and six at regular intervals circumferentially along the outer circumference. LEDs 184a (full color LEDs) are mounted in a triple concentric circle. These LEDs 184a are one in the center, three in the middle connected by broken lines in FIG. It is divided into 5 groups: 1, 2 on the lower side of the outer periphery, and 2 on the lower side of the outer periphery. These five groups of LEDs 184a are controlled by 15 systems by an LED driver 184b, and each group of LEDs 184a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

On the other hand, twelve LEDs 293a are provided in a row on the handle cover decorative board 293 at intervals in the circumferential direction. These 12 LEDs 293a are connected by broken lines in FIG. 72: two on the lower left from the center, two on the left, two on the upper left, two on the upper right, and two on the right. It is divided into six groups: the two on the bottom right and the two on the bottom right. These six groups of LEDs 293a are controlled by 18 systems by an LED driver 293b, and each group of LEDs 293a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

In this way, since the handle 195 is provided with the handle decoration board 184 and the handle cover decoration board 293, it is possible to produce a light emitting effect in which the light rotates around the handle 195, or to direct the light toward the center of the handle 195. A light-emitting effect in which light is concentrated or a light-emitting effect in which light spreads toward the outside of the handle 195 can be shown to the player. Further, the outside and inside of the handle cover 295 can be decorated with light by the LED 293a of the handle cover decoration board 293.

Further, as shown in the figure, the door frame 3 has a substantially rectangular door window 101a that extends vertically and is closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of a glass unit 160 at the center when viewed from the front. The door frame 3 includes the plate left decoration body 271 of the plate unit 200, the plate right decoration body 276, the production operation unit 300, the door frame left side decoration body 426 of the door frame left side unit 420, and the door frame of the door frame right side unit 430. The right side decoration 435 and the door frame top decoration 453 of the door frame top unit 450 surround the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a.

The plate left decoration body 271, the plate right decoration body 276, the door frame left side decoration body 426, the door frame right side decoration body 435, and the door frame top decoration body 453, which surround the outer periphery of the door window 101a, are semi-tubular. Because of this, the player can see the decoration as if the door window 101a is surrounded almost entirely by fluorescent lights.

In this door frame 3, as shown in FIG. 72, a plate left decorative board 273 behind the plate left decorative body 271 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a, a plate right decorative board 278 behind the plate right decorative body 276, Door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and door frame left side lower decorative board 423 behind door frame left side decorative body 426, door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and door frame right behind door frame right side decorative body 435 A lower side decorative board 433, a door frame top central decorative board 455 behind the door frame top decorative body 453, a door frame top left decorative board 456, and a door frame top right decorative board 457 are provided facing forward.

To be more specific, the plate left decorative board 273 includes four LEDs 273a mounted on the front side in a row in the left-right direction, and an LED driver for causing the LEDs 273a and the LED 273a of the plate right decorative board 278, which will be described later, to emit light. (not shown). These four LEDs 273a are divided into two sets, two on the left and two on the right, as connected by broken lines in FIG. These two groups of LEDs 273a are controlled by six systems of LED drivers, and each group of LEDs 273a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

The plate right decorative board 278 includes four LEDs 278a mounted on the front side in a line in the left-right direction. These four LEDs 278a are divided into two sets, two on the left and two on the right, as connected by broken lines in FIG. These two groups of LEDs 278a are controlled in six systems by the LED drivers on the plate left decorative board 273, and each group of LEDs 278a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

On the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame, four first LEDs 422a are mounted at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two each are mounted vertically between the first LEDs 422a. It includes eight second LEDs 422b and an LED driver 422c for causing a total of twelve first LEDs 422a and second LEDs 422b to emit light. The first LED 422a and the second LED 422b are mounted on the front surface. The four first LEDs 422a on the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two, as connected by two-dot chain lines in FIG. In addition, the eight second LEDs 422b are connected by dashed lines in FIG. 72, the top two, the third to fifth from the top, and the sixth to It is divided into three groups: the first three pieces, and the first three pieces. The four first LEDs 422a divided into two groups and the eight second LEDs 422b divided into three groups are controlled by an LED driver 422c in 15 systems. The LED 422b can emit light in full color as appropriate.

On the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, six first LEDs 423a are mounted at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two each are mounted vertically between the first LEDs 423a. It includes 12 second LEDs 423b and an LED driver 423c for causing a total of 18 first LEDs 423a and second LEDs 423b to emit light. The first LED 423a and the second LED 423b are mounted on the front surface. The six first LEDs 423a are divided into three sets, each consisting of two LEDs from the top, as connected by two-dot chain lines in FIG. In addition, the 12 second LEDs 423b are three from the first to third from the top and three from the fourth to the sixth from the top, as connected by a dashed line in FIG. It is divided into four groups: 3 pieces from the 7th to 9th pieces from the top, and 3 pieces from the 10th to 12th pieces from the top. Six first LEDs 423a divided into three groups and twelve second LEDs 423b divided into four groups are controlled by an LED driver 423c in 21 systems. The LED 423b can emit light in full color as appropriate.

On the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame, there are four first LEDs 432a mounted on the front at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two on the front arranged vertically between the first LEDs 432a. Eight second LEDs 432b are mounted, and four third LEDs 432c are mounted on the rear surface at intervals in the vertical direction. Further, the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame causes a total of 16 first LEDs 432a, second LED 432b, third LED 432c, and two third LEDs 433c on the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame to emit light. The LED driver 432d is provided. The four first LEDs 432a are divided into two groups, the upper two and the remaining two, as connected by two-dot chain lines in FIG. In addition, the eight second LEDs 432b are connected by dashed lines in FIG. 72, the top two, the third to fifth from the top, and the sixth to It is divided into three groups: the first three pieces, and the first three pieces. Furthermore, the four third LEDs 432c are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two, as connected by dashed lines in FIG. A first LED 432a divided into two sets, a second LED 432b divided into three sets, a third LED 432c divided into two sets, and a third LED divided into two sets on the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame. The upper set of third LEDs 433c among the LEDs 433c is controlled by an LED driver 432d in 24 systems, and the first LED 432a, second LED 432b, third LED 432c, and third LED 433c of each set are controlled by an appropriate color. It can emit light in full color.

On the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame, there are six first LEDs 433a mounted on the front at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two on the front side arranged vertically between the first LEDs 433a. Twelve second LEDs 433b are mounted, four third LEDs 433c are mounted on the rear surface at intervals in the vertical direction, a first LED 433a, a second LED 433b, and two third LEDs 433c on the lower side. and an LED driver 433d for causing the light to emit light. The six first LEDs 433a are divided into three sets, each consisting of two LEDs from the top, as connected by two-dot chain lines in FIG. In addition, the 12 second LEDs 433b are three from the first to third from the top and three from the fourth to the sixth from the top, as connected by the dashed line in FIG. It is divided into four groups: 3 pieces from the 7th to 9th pieces from the top, and 3 pieces from the 10th to 12th pieces from the top. Furthermore, the four third LEDs 433c on the rear side are divided into two groups, the upper two and the remaining two, as connected by broken lines in FIG. What are the 6 first LEDs 433a divided into 3 groups, the 12 second LEDs 433b divided into 4 groups, and the 2 third LEDs 433c in the lower 1 group divided into 2 groups? , 24 systems are controlled by LED drivers 433d, and each set of first LED 433a, second LED 433b, and third LED 433c can emit light in full color as appropriate.

In this embodiment, the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 provided on the left side of the door window 101a, and the door frame right side upper decoration provided on the right side of the door window 101a. The substrate 432 and the lower decorative substrate 433 on the right side of the door frame are formed in a left-right asymmetrical shape with the center of the door window 101a in the left-right direction as the border. Furthermore, the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame and the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, and the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame and the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame, have different shapes in the front-rear direction. .

Note that the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame, the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame, and the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame are The numbers of one LED 422a, second LED 422b, first LED 423a, second LED 423b and first LED 432a, second LED 432b, first LED 433a, second LED 433b are the same, and the arrangement and system (one point in FIG. Systems connected by chain lines and two-dot chain lines) are arranged symmetrically. Thereby, it is possible to easily create data of an LED lighting pattern for performing a light emission effect.

The door frame top central decorative board 455 has six LEDs 455a mounted on the front side at intervals in the left-right direction, and the LED 455a, the LED 456a of the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the LED 457a of the door frame top right decorative board 457. and an LED driver (not shown) for causing the light to emit light. The six LEDs 455a are divided into three groups of two from the left, as connected by broken lines in FIG. The six LEDs 455a divided into three groups are controlled by nine systems of LED drivers, and each group of LEDs 455a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

The door frame top left decorative board 456 is provided with four LEDs 456a mounted on the front side with openings in the left-right direction. The four LEDs 456a are divided into two sets, two on the left and two on the right, as connected by broken lines in FIG. The four LEDs 456a divided into two groups are controlled in six systems by the LED driver of the door frame top central decorative board 455, and each group of LEDs 456a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

The door frame top right decorative board 457 is equipped with four LEDs 457a mounted on the front side with openings in the left-right direction. The four LEDs 457a are divided into two groups, two on the left and two on the right, as connected by broken lines in FIG. The four LEDs 457a divided into two groups are controlled in six systems by the LED driver of the door frame top central decorative board 455, and each group of LEDs 457a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

According to the door frame 3 of this embodiment, the first LED 422a on the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame, the first LED 423a on the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, the first LED 432a on the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame, The light from the first LED 433a of the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame is transmitted through the light guiding shaft portion 427a of the upper left side light guiding member 427, the light guiding shaft portion 428a of the middle left side light guiding member 428, and the lower left side guiding member. The opening of the left side decoration body 426 of the door frame is formed by the light guide shaft portion 429a of the light member 429, the light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436, and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437. 426a and the opening 435a of the door frame right side decoration 435, and is irradiated outward (forward). As a result, players can see a light-emitting effect that emits bright light in the form of dots on the front of the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435. The light-emitting effect that flashes brightly in spots can make players ``awk''.

In addition, in the door frame 3, the LED 273a of the plate left decorative board 273 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a, the LED 278a of the plate right decorative board 278, the second LED 422b of the upper left side decorative board 422 of the door frame, the lower left side of the door frame Second LED 423b of the decorative board 423, second LED 432b of the upper right side decorative board 432 of the door frame, second LED 433b of the lower decorative board 433 of the right side of the door frame, LED 455a of the top center decorative board 455 of the door frame, top left decorative board of the door frame By making the LED 456a of 456 and the LED 457a of the door frame top right decorative board 457 emit light as appropriate, the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a can be decorated with light, or the light can be produced so that the light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a. can be shown to the player.

In other words, in the door frame 3, a light emitting effect is performed in which spot light is emitted on the front of the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 using the LED system connected by the two-dot chain line in FIG. It is possible to perform a light emitting effect in which the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 emit light in a planar manner (surface light emission) using the LED system connected by the dashed line in FIG. 72. Can be done.

Further, according to the door frame 3, the light from the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a is transferred to the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a. The shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a guide the light to the front end inserted into the opening 426a of the door frame left side decoration 426 and the opening 435a of the door frame right side decoration 435, and from there forward. Therefore, compared to the general surfaces of the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435, the openings 426a and the openings 435a can be spot-emitted with high brightness and brightness. . At this time, since the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435 are arranged outside the door window 101a facing the game area 5a, the opening 426a of the door frame left side decoration 426 Even if the opening 435a of the right side decorative body 435 of the door frame is illuminated as a spot with high brightness, the glare will not make it difficult to see inside the gaming area 5a facing from the door window 101a, and the game can be played through the door window 101a. The game balls B, performance images, decorations, etc. in the area 5a can be visually recognized in good condition.

Further, according to the door frame 3, the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 are made to protrude forward from the door window 101a (gaming area 5a), and emit spot light with high brightness. The opening portion 426a and the opening portion 435a are connected to the front ends of the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 that project forward. Since the light from the spot emission is provided on the vertical line), the light from the spot emission is not irradiated to the rear side (toward the door window 101a side). Therefore, the spot light emitted from the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 is reflected toward the player by the glass plate 162 provided in the door window 101a, and The inside of the gaming area 5a is not difficult to see, and other players can be drawn to the pachinko machine 1 by emitting spot light with high brightness.

Furthermore, according to the door frame 3, parts that emit spot light are provided on the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435, which protrude forward on the outside of the door window 101a in the door frame 3. Therefore, the spot light emitting portion is located at approximately the same position as the vicinity of the outer circumference of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, even if a player is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, the spot light emitting part is located outside of the player, so the player will not block the spot light. As a result, when spot light is emitted from the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435, the high-intensity spot light is visible even to other players who are not seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, it is possible to appeal to other players about the existence of this pachinko machine 1, and it is possible to strongly attract the attention of the players. The pachinko machine 1 can be made highly appealing and can attract players who are playing around the pachinko machine 1 to the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, on both sides of the spot LEDs (first LED 422a, first LED 423a, first LED 432a, first LED 433a) for causing spot light emission on the front surface of the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435, It is desirable that the surface LEDs (second LED 422b, second LED 423b, second LED 432b, second LED 433b) belong to the same system. As a result, both sides of the light guide pins (light guide shaft portion 427a, light guide shaft portion 428a, light guide shaft portion 429a, light guide shaft portion 436a, and light guide shaft portion 437a) that guide the light of the spot LED are sandwiched. Since the LEDs for the two surfaces are illuminated in the same manner, the same amount of light is emitted from both sides of the light guide pin at the same timing, and the LEDs on the left side of the door frame 426 and the right side decoration 435 of the door frame are illuminated with the same amount of light. The shadow of the optical pin can be made even more difficult to see.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 73, the door frame 3 is provided below the contact operation section 302 in the production operation section 301 of the production operation unit 300, and has an annular shape with 31 LEDs 320a mounted on the top surface. A production operation section outer periphery decorative board 320 is provided. This production operation section outer periphery decorative board 320 includes two LED drivers for causing 31 LEDs 320a to emit light. The performance operation section outer peripheral decorative board 320 is divided into two parts: a front decorative board 321 and a rear decorative board 322.

Eighteen LEDs 320a out of 31 LEDs 320a are mounted on the front decoration board 321 of the production operation section outer periphery decoration board 320. Of the 18 LEDs 320a of the front decorative board 321, 6 LEDs 320a are provided at intervals on a circumference close to the inner periphery, and 3 are provided at intervals on a circumference between the inner periphery and the outer periphery. The remaining nine are provided at intervals on the circumference near the outer periphery.

The remaining 13 LEDs 320a are mounted on the rear decoration board 322 of the production operation section outer peripheral decoration board 320. Of the 13 LEDs 320a of the rear decorative board 322, 4 LEDs are provided on the circumference near the inner periphery, and 2 LEDs are provided at intervals near both ends of the arc, and 3 LEDs are provided at intervals between the inner periphery and the outer periphery. They are provided at intervals on the circumference, and the remaining six are provided at intervals of three on the circumference near the outer circumference near both ends of the arc.

The 18 LEDs 320a of the front decorative board 321 are connected by dashed lines in FIG. 73, 6 LEDs on the inner circumference, 3 sets of 2 LEDs each in the circumferential direction, and 3 LEDs on the middle circumference. They are divided into 9 groups in total: 3 groups with 1 piece each, and 3 groups with 3 pieces each in the circumferential direction of the 9 pieces on the outer circumference. In addition, the 18 LEDs 320a of the rear decoration board 322 are connected by dashed lines in FIG. The 3 pieces are divided into 3 groups of 1 piece each, and the 9 pieces on the outer circumference are divided into 2 groups of 3 pieces near each end, for a total of 7 groups. That is, in the production operation section outer peripheral decorative board 320, 31 LEDs 320a are divided into 16 groups. These 16 groups of LEDs 320a are controlled by 48 systems by two LED drivers, and each group of LEDs 320a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

According to this production operation section outer peripheral decorative board 320, by appropriately emitting light from 31 LEDs 320a of 48 systems, a light emission production in which the light rotates in the production operation section 301 or a light emission in which light is concentrated in the center can be produced. It is possible to show the player a performance and a light emission performance in which light spreads outward.

Further, according to the door frame 3, the game area 5a extends vertically along the outside of the door window 101a facing the door window 101a so that the amount of protrusion in the front and back direction is different from each other on the outside of the left and right sides of the door window 101a. A door frame left side decoration body 426 of the door frame left side unit 420 and a door frame right side decoration body 435 of the door frame right side unit 430 are provided, and the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body are provided. 435, a left side upper decorative board 422 on which a plurality of first LEDs 422a and a second LED 422b are mounted, and a lower left side decoration on the door frame on which a plurality of first LEDs 423a and second LEDs 423b are mounted. A board 423, a door frame right side upper decorative board 432 on which a plurality of first LEDs 432a and a second LED 432b are mounted, and a door frame right side lower decorative board 433 on which a plurality of first LEDs 433a and second LEDs 433b are mounted. is provided, and guides the light from the first LED 422a, first LED 423a, first LED 432a, and first LED 433a to the vicinity of the front of the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435 and forwards it. The light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427 to be irradiated, the light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428, the light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429, and the right side upper light guide member. Since the light guide shaft portion 436a of 436 and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the lower right side light guide member 437 are provided, the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame, the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, and the lower decorative board 423 on the right side of the door frame are provided. By causing the second LED 422b, second LED 423b, second LED 432b, and second LED 433b of the upper decorative board 432 and the lower right side decorative board 433 of the door frame to emit light, the left side decorative body 426 of the door frame and the right side decorative body 435 of the door frame are illuminated. Light emitting decoration (surface luminescence) can be performed in a planar manner, and the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame, the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame, and the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame. When the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a are made to emit light, the light irradiated forward is transmitted to the columnar light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, and the light guide shaft. After being guided to the vicinity of the front surfaces of the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 by the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a, the light is emitted forward from their front ends (front end faces), and the door frame Corresponding to the tips of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a in the frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435. It is possible to decorate the area with dots of light (spot light emission).

Therefore, the first LED 422a, the second LED 422b, and the first LED 423a of the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame, the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame, the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame. By appropriately emitting light from the second LED 423b, the first LED 432a and the second LED 432b, and the first LED 433a and the second LED 433b, the door frame left side decorative body provided outside the gaming area 5a (door window 101a) 426 and the whole of the door frame right side decoration body 435 can be decorated with light emitting light in a planar manner, or a part of the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 can be decorated with light emission in dots. Since the entire side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 can be decorated with luminescence in a planar manner, and a part can be decorated with luminescence in a dotted manner, a variety of luminescence effects can be shown to the player. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored, and also to keep the player entertained, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game.

At this time, the system in which the plurality of first LEDs 422a, second LEDs 422b, first LEDs 423a, and second LEDs 423b of the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame and the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame are separated, and the system on the right side of the door frame. The systems in which the plurality of first LEDs 432a, second LEDs 432b, first LEDs 433a, and second LEDs 433b of the upper side decorative board 432 and the lower right side decorative board 433 of the door frame are separated are symmetrical to each other, and each Since the plurality of first LEDs 422a, first LED 423a, first LED 432a, and first LED 433a and the plurality of second LEDs 422b, second LED 423b, second LED 432b, and second LED 433b are in different systems from each other, the left side of the door frame Lighting pattern of the first LED 422a, second LED 422b, first LED 423a, and second LED 423b on the decoration body 426 side and the first LED 432a, second LED 432b, first LED 433a, and second LED 433b on the door frame right side decoration body 435 side When creating the data, for example, the data for the door frame left side decoration 426 side may be used as the data for the door frame right side decoration 435 side, or the data for the door frame left side decoration 426 side and the door frame side may be used. Since it is possible to create data with the same flow as that on the right side decorative body 435 side, the effort required to create lighting pattern data can be reduced (with the same creation time) ) It becomes easier to construct data for more complex lighting patterns, and it is possible to show players a variety of lighting effects using lighting patterns. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can exhibit a sufficient lighting effect on the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 on both the right and left sides of the door frame 101a.

Furthermore, since the two second LEDs 422b, 2nd LED 423b, 2nd LED 432b, and 2nd LED 433b provided with the 1st LED 422a, 1st LED 423a, 1st LED 432a, and 1st LED 433a in between are of the same system. , first LED 422a, first LED 423a, first LED 432a, first LED 433a (light guide shaft 427a, light guide shaft 428a, light guide shaft 429a, light guide shaft 436a, light guide shaft 437a). Since the two second LEDs 422b, 423b, 432b, and 433b provided in the LEDs 422b, 423b, and 433b are always lit at the same time, the light guide shaft 427a, the light guide shaft 428a, the light guide shaft 429a, By irradiating light from both sides of the light guide shaft part 436a and the light guide shaft part 437a, the light guide shaft part 427a and the light guide shaft part 427a and the light guide by the light from the respective second LED 422b, second LED 423b, second LED 432b, and second LED 433b are irradiated with light from both sides of the light guide shaft part 436a and the light guide shaft part 437a. The shadows of the optical axis portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a become thin so as to be canceled out, and are projected onto the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435. The shadows of the light guiding shaft portion 427a, light guiding shaft portion 428a, light guiding shaft portion 429a, light guiding shaft portion 436a, and light guiding shaft portion 437a can be made difficult to see. The right side decorative body 435 can be evenly decorated with light in a planar manner.

In addition, the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435, which are illuminated and decorated in a planar manner by the second LED 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b, are Parts corresponding to the front ends of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a are decorated with dots of light by the first LED 432a and the first LED 433a. This allows players to see a light-emitting effect that has not been seen in previous pachinko machines, such as emitting light in a planar manner and partially emitting dot-like light. It is possible to strongly attract the attention of players through light-emitting effects, etc., and the light-emitting effects that emit sparkling spots in the form of dots, which have not been seen in previous pachinko machines, can make players ``ah-ha''. The pachinko machine 1 can be made highly appealing to players.

Furthermore, the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame and the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame on one side (left side) in the left-right direction, and the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame and the lower right side of the door frame on the other side (right side). Since the decorative substrates 433 are shaped asymmetrically with respect to each other, at first glance, the upper decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame, the lower decorative substrate 423 on the left side of the door frame, the upper decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame, and the right side of the door frame. Since the lower side decorative board 433 can be distinguished, the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame, the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame, and the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame are assembled in the assembly work of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to avoid incorrectly attaching the lower right side decorative board 433, improve assembly workability, and suppress increase in cost.

[3-11. Decorative board identification]
Next, identification of various decorative boards on which LEDs are mounted in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail using the door frame 3 as an example, mainly with reference to FIG. 74 and the like. FIG. 74 is a rear view showing each decorative board provided around the door window of the door frame. Here, the plate left decorative board 273, the plate right decorative board 278, the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame, the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, and the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, which are provided around the door window 101a in the door frame 3, are shown. The upper side decorative board 432, the lower door frame right side decorative board 433, the door frame top central decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457 will be described in detail as examples.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, a white board is used as a decorative board on which LEDs are mounted, and non-white LED drivers, connection connectors, etc. that are attached to the decorative board are attached to the rear side of the board. That's what I do. As a result, the light from the LEDs mounted on the front side of the decorative board is reflected to the front side, making it possible to decorate the front decorations etc. with brighter light. This makes the decorative board less noticeable.

Note that the white decorative board may be coated with a white solder resist (protective material), or the board material itself may be white.

Since the pachinko machine 1 has many decorative boards, different identification parts 7 are provided on the rear surface of each decorative board so that each decorative board can be easily identified (see FIG. 74). ). The identification section 7 includes a character identification section 7a using characters such as kanji, kana, alphabets, symbols, numbers, model numbers, etc., and a color identification section 7b using different colors (indicated by different shades of shading in FIG. 74). It has .

To be more specific, as the character identification part 7a, the plate left decorative board 273 has the characters "lower left", the plate right decorative board 278 has the characters "lower right", and the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 has the characters "upper left". The lower left decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame has the characters "lower left", the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame has the characters "upper right", and the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame has the characters "lower right". The text is "upper middle" on the door frame top center decorative board 455, "top left" on the door frame top left decorative board 456, and "top right" on the door frame top right decorative board 457. , respectively.

Further, the color identification portion 7b is a different color for each decorative board, and is provided over substantially the front surface of the rear surface. In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 74, the color identification part 7b is applied not to the entire rear surface but only partially so as not to interfere with soldering of LEDs etc. mounted on the decorative board. .

The identification portion 7 is applied to the decorative substrate by printing (silk printing), pasting a sticker, applying paint, or the like.

In addition, in the above description, the decorative board provided around the door window 101a in the door frame 3 was explained as an example, but the various decorative boards provided in the handle unit 180, the production operation unit 300, the game board 5, etc. Identification parts 7 such as character identification part 7a and color identification part 7b may also be provided on the decorative board.

Further, in the above embodiment, the identification section 7 includes both the character identification section 7a and the color identification section 7b, but the invention is not limited to this, and only the character identification section 7a may be used. However, only the color identification section 7b may be provided.

According to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, since the identification section 7 (the character identification section 7a and the color identification section 7b) is provided on the decorative board on which the LED is mounted, it is easy to use a decorative board with a similar shape. This makes it possible to prevent the wrong decorative board from being assembled during assembly work, and to improve the workability of assembly.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the identification section 7 is provided on the rear surface of the decorative board, the front side of the decorative board can be made as white as possible, and the LED mounted on the front surface of the decorative board can be By reflecting the light to the front side on the front side of the decorative board, the decorations in front can be decorated with brighter light, and the decorative board can be made less noticeable from the front (from the player's side), improving the appearance. You can make it better.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the color identification part 7b serving as the identification part 7 is applied over almost the entire decorative board, a desired (desired color) can be determined just by looking at a part of the decorative board. ) can recognize whether it is a decorative board or not. Therefore, even if multiple types of decorative boards overlap during assembly, as long as a part of the decorative board is visible, the desired decorative board can be easily found, reducing the time and effort required for assembly. can be simplified.

In addition, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the color identification portion 7b has a different color for each decorative board, when preparing the decorative boards necessary for one pachinko machine 1 during assembly, the same color If there is a decorative board provided with the identification part 7b, it can be easily recognized that the same decorative board is prepared in duplicate. Alternatively, if there are not enough colors in the color identification section 7b of the prepared decorative board, it is possible to easily recognize that there is a decorative board that has not been prepared. Therefore, when preparing the decorative boards necessary for assembling the pachinko machine 1, you can easily recognize whether you have prepared extra decorative boards or not enough decorative boards. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prepare the necessary number of decorative boards, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily set up during assembly. Therefore, the assembly work of the pachinko machine 1 can be performed smoothly, the time required for assembly can be shortened, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the character identification part 7a as the identification part 7 for distinguishing from other boards is provided on the rear surface of the decorative board, the operator can read the characters in the character identification part 7a. By doing so, it is possible to easily know which part the decorative substrate belongs to, and the same effects as described above can be achieved.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1, the front and rear surfaces of each decorative board are white, and the identification part 7 is provided on the rear surface, so that the decoration provided in front of the decorative board has high transparency. Also, the decorative board can be made inconspicuous from the front (player side), and the appearance of the decorative body can be improved, and the light from the LED can be reflected forward by the white front surface of the decorative board. This makes it possible to decorate the decorative body with brighter light, and to entertain the players with the highly effective light-emitting performance, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1, the functional parts such as the LED driver are provided on the rear surface of the decorative board, so that the functional parts are not visible from the front (player side). It is possible to avoid the appearance from becoming unsightly due to visibility, and it is possible to improve the appearance of the decoration (gaming machine). In addition, since the functional parts are hidden from view by providing them on the back of the decorative board, there is no need to color the functional parts white (or yellow) to make them inconspicuous, and the functional parts can be used as they are. Therefore, it is possible to omit the trouble of coloring the functional parts and to suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

[3-12. Effects of door frame]
According to this embodiment, with respect to the plurality of contact detection bodies 393 provided at mutually different positions in the pachinko machine 1, the contact detection body 393 provided at a desired part where it is desired to detect approach or contact of a player By switching by the switching unit 394 so that the contact detection sensor main body 392 is connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392, when a player approaches or contacts the contact detection body 393 at a desired part, the capacitance of the contact detection body 393 changes. Therefore, since the contact detection sensor main body 392 connected to the contact detection body 393 can detect changes in capacitance, it is possible to detect the approach or contact of the player to a desired part. In response to detection by the contact detection sensor main body 392, predetermined control can be executed by control means such as the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control section 1511, and the effect display control section 1512. On the other hand, when the contact detection body 393 of the desired part and the contact detection sensor body 392 are connected by the switching part 394, the contact detection body 393 provided in other parts and the contact detection sensor body 392 are connected. will be disconnected, so even if the capacitance of the contact sensing body 393 provided at the other part changes due to the player approaching or touching the other part, the contact sensing body 393 will be disconnected. Since the connection is disconnected by the switching unit 394, changes in the capacitance of the contact sensing body 393 are not detected, and only the capacitance of the contact sensing body 393 at the desired location is reliably detected. can be used to prevent false positive detections.

In this way, among the plurality of contact detection bodies 393 provided at different positions, the contact detection body 393 connected to the contact detection sensor body 392 is appropriately selected and switched by the switching unit 394. It becomes possible to detect capacitance with one contact detection sensor main body 392 for a plurality of contact detection bodies 393, and the main control board 1310, peripheral control board 1510, peripheral control section 1511, effect display control section 1512, etc. In the control means, the number of channels involved in detecting the approach or contact of a player can be reduced, and the number of channels that can be used for performance can be relatively increased. Therefore, it is possible to control more performance means (for example, movable decorations, light-emitting decorations, performance display devices, etc.) by the control means, and the increase in the number of performance means allows players to enjoy a more diverse range of performances. In addition to making it difficult for the players to get bored, it is possible to fully entertain the players, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, the contact detection bodies 393 are provided at a plurality of parts of the pachinko machine 1 that the player does not want to touch, and the contact detection bodies 393 are set to the desired parts by the switching unit 394 depending on the game state. The contact detection sensor main body 392 is connected to detect the approach or contact of a player to a desired part, and control the main control board 1310, peripheral control board 1510, peripheral control section 1511, effect display control section 1512, etc. Since it is possible to ignore a predetermined caution or alarm by means of this method, it is possible to monitor a wide range of the pachinko machine 1 with one contact detection sensor main body 392, and to relatively reduce the number of channels that can be used for production. The number can be increased, and the same effects as above can be achieved.

Furthermore, since the capacitance of a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 is detected by one contact detection sensor body 392, each contact detection body 393 and the contact detection sensor body 392 are provided separately. Therefore, the sensor body containing electronic components such as sensor ICs and output circuits can be installed in areas that are difficult for players to see, improving the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 and increasing its appeal to players. can be increased.

Furthermore, since the contact detection sensor main body 392 has connection terminals for electrically connecting the plurality of contact detection bodies 393 in advance, the wiring from the contact detection bodies 393 can be connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392. The contact detection sensor main body 392 can detect the capacitance of the contact detection body 393 by simply connecting it to the connection terminal of the pachinko machine 1. An increase in the cost of the machine 1 can be suppressed.

In addition, the contact detection sensor body 392 is provided with a connection terminal in advance, and by simply connecting the wiring from the contact detection body 393 to the connection terminal of the contact detection sensor body 392, the contact detection sensor body 392 and the contact detection body 393 can be connected to each other. This reduces the number of parts compared to the case where a conductive member is brought into contact with the sensor electrode of the contact detection sensor body 392 and connected to the contact detection body 393 via the conductive member. This reduces the cost of the pachinko machine 1, and also eliminates the need to design the layout of the conductive member for connecting to the contact detection body 393, and the contact detection body 393 and the contact detection sensor body. 392 can be arranged more freely, and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-mentioned effects can be easily realized.

Further, a switching unit 394 is provided to switch the contact sensing body 393 connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392, and the switching unit 394 can select the contact sensing body 393 to be detected. When a player participatory performance is executed in which a plurality of distributed contact sensing bodies 393 are touched in a predetermined order, the switching unit 394 switches the contact detection sensor body 392 at the timing when the player touches them in order. By switching the contact detectors 393 connected to the contact detectors 393, it is possible to detect whether or not the player has touched the contact detectors 393 in the correct order. This can be realized by the contact detection sensor main body 392, and it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can further entertain players.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, in the production operation unit 300 of the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3, the player's finger or the like approaches or contacts the button body 351 of the production operation unit 350 that can be pressed by the player. Then, the player comes close to the contact detection body 352 made of a metal plate with the player side covered by the button body 351, and the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 changes. Since the capacitance of this contact detection body 352 is detected by the contact detection sensor body 358, changes in the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 can be detected. It is possible to detect the player's approach or contact with 351 (performance operation unit 350).

In this way, when the approach or contact of the player to the production operation unit 350 is detected using the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, the outside button decoration board 355, the vibration motor 356, the production operation unit elevating and lowering. Since a predetermined effect is output to the player side through the contact detection body 352 and the button body 351 by the effect means such as the mechanism 360, the button interior decorative board 364, and the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380, the player is entertained by the effect. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in playing the game. At this time, when the player approaches or touches the production operation unit 350, a predetermined production is output, so the production operation unit 350 is activated as a non-contact operation unit or It can function as a touch operation section. Since the performance operation unit 350, which functions as a non-contact operation unit and a contact operation unit, can be pressed and operated by the player when it is protruded, the performance operation unit 350 can perform non-contact operation, contact operation, and press operation. Since it is possible to perform a variety of production operations such as operation, it is possible to easily embody a pachinko machine 1 with an appearance that is different from conventional pachinko machines that have operation buttons that can only be pressed, and it is easy to embody a pachinko machine 1 that has an appearance that is different from other pachinko machines. By differentiating the pachinko machine from the other machines, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players.

In addition, a predetermined effect is output to the player according to the detection of the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 by the contact detection sensor body 358, and the capacitance is determined by the contact detection body 352 (button body 351). Since the capacitance varies depending on the distance between the capacitance and the player, it is possible to provide a plurality of capacitance thresholds and output a different effect for each threshold. Therefore, since it is possible to detect the time (distance) from the approach of the player to the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350) to the time of contact in multiple stages, a performance corresponding to each stage can be output. By doing so, it is possible to present a wider variety of performances to the players, making it difficult for the players to get bored and suppressing a drop in interest.

In addition, since the contact detection sensor main body 358 that detects the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 is provided apart from the contact detection body 352, the contact detection sensor body 358 that detects the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 is provided separately from the contact detection body 352. The sensor main body 358 can be provided in a part of the performance operation unit 350 that is difficult for players to see, so that the appearance of the Pachinko machine 1 can be improved and its appeal to players can be increased.

In addition, as mentioned above, the operation unit can perform a variety of performance operations such as non-contact operation, contact operation, and pressing operation, so it is possible to perform player participation type performance that allows the player to perform performance operations. By doing so, it is possible to entertain the players with a variety of performance operations, making it difficult for the players to get bored, and also making it possible for the players to enjoy the player participation type performance, which reduces the player's interest in the game. can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the contact detection body 352 whose capacitance is detected by the contact detection sensor body 358 is made of punched metal made of a metal plate in which a plurality of holes are formed, the plurality of holes prevent the player from touching the button body 351. The capacitance of the contact detection body 352 in the state of approaching or not in contact can be reduced, and the occurrence of false detection by the contact detection sensor body 358 can be avoided. Therefore, by appropriately selecting the number, size, arrangement, etc. of a plurality of holes, it is possible to increase the area of the contact sensing body 352 while suppressing an increase in capacitance. It is possible to widen the range in which the approach or contact of the player to the main body 351 (performance operation unit 350) is detected. As a result, the contact detection body 352 can be enlarged to widen the detection range, so as in the above embodiment, the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350) that can be pressed by the player is enlarged and , when the contact detection body 352 is made to have the same size as the upper surface part 351a of the button body 351, when a player approaches or touches the performance operation unit 350 (button body 351) by executing a player participation type performance. When requested, since the contact detection body 352 covered by the button body 351 is as large as the upper surface 351a of the button body 351, the player's finger or the like approaches or contacts the performance operation unit 350. The movement distance is shortened, the performance operation unit 350 can be operated quickly, it is difficult to miss the operation timing in a player participation type performance, and the player can be reliably participated in the player participation type performance. This performance can entertain the players and prevent them from losing interest.

In addition, since the contact sensing body 352 is made of punching metal, a button as a presentation means provided on the opposite side of the contact sensing body 352 from the player side can be inserted through the plurality of holes formed in the contact sensing body 352. The light emitting effect from the LED 364a of the medium decorative board 364 can be outputted to the player side, and the player can surely enjoy the light emitting effect, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

In addition, since the production operation unit 350 (button body 351) that can be operated by pressing is provided with a contact detection body 352, the contact detection body is made of punched metal, which is a metal plate with a certain degree of strength and rigidity. 352, the production operation unit 350 can be reinforced, and even if the production operation unit 350 (button body 351) is strongly pressed or hit when the player performs a pressing operation, the production operation unit 350 can be reinforced. 350 can be made less likely to be deformed or damaged. Therefore, since the production operation unit 350 can be made difficult to be damaged by the contact detection body 352, the player can press the production operation unit 350 without hesitation, and can operate the production operation unit 350. To make a player participatory performance more enjoyable and to suppress a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, since the contact sensing body 352 is made of punched metal, the thickness of the contact sensing body 352 can be made thinner than when the contact sensing body 352 is made of expanded metal processed from a metal plate of the same thickness. Therefore, it is possible to easily secure a space for providing the contact detection body 352, and it is possible to make it easy to provide the contact detection body 352, and the degree of freedom in design can be increased, making it more appealing to players. The pachinko machine 1 can be designed easily.

In addition, since the contact sensing body 352 is made of punched metal, the plate thickness is constant compared to expanded metal, so the contact sensing body 352 can be easily processed into a desired three-dimensional shape by press working. This allows the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350) to be easily shaped into an optimal shape for detecting the player's approach or contact with the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350), and the above-mentioned effects can be reliably realized.

In addition, in the production operation unit 350, since the player side of the contact detection body 352 is covered with the button body 351, the contact detection body 352 made of punched metal in which a plurality of holes are formed by the button body 351 is It is possible to prevent the player from directly touching the button body 351, and it is possible to avoid causing discomfort due to the player touching the contact detection body 352 in which a plurality of holes are formed. In a player participatory performance using the player as an operation part, the button body 351 can be operated without discomfort, and the performance can be enjoyed and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the player side of the contact sensing body 352 made of punching metal is covered with the button body 351, dirt such as dust and food and drink adheres to the plurality of holes formed in the contact sensing body 352. Therefore, the effort required for cleaning can be reduced, and the burden on the game hall side in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed can be reduced as the pachinko machine 1 is easy to clean.

In addition, the effect means such as the outer button decorative board 355, the vibration motor 356, the effect operation part elevating mechanism 360, the inner button decorative board 364, and the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 are placed on the opposite side of the contact sensing body 352 from the player side. A predetermined performance can be output to the player through the contact detection body 352 and the button body 351, and the contact detection sensor body 358 detects the approach or contact of the player to the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350). Then, a predetermined effect is output through the plurality of holes formed in the contact detection body 352 and the transparent button body 351, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the effect operation unit 350, and the effect can be It is possible to reliably enjoy the performance outputted through (via) the operation unit 350 and to suppress a decrease in interest.

In addition, the effect means such as the outer button decorative board 355, the vibration motor 356, the effect operation part lifting mechanism 360, the inner button decorative board 364, and the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 are placed on the opposite side of the contact detection body 352 from the player side. Since the contact sensing body 352 is provided in such a way that the presentation means is covered by the contact detection body 352, it is possible to compactly organize the contact detection body 352 (the presentation operation section unit 350) and the presentation means, as described above. To provide a pachinko machine 1 with high appeal that can be differentiated from other pachinko machines by making it easy to install a performance operation unit 350 and a performance means etc. in a desired part of the pachinko machine 1, which have the above-mentioned effects. It can be made easier.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the player approaches or contacts the performance operation unit 350 (button body 351) that is provided in the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3 so as to be able to advance and retreat in the vertical direction, the performance is activated. Since the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 of the operation unit 350 changes, the contact detection sensor body 358 detects the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 to prevent the player from approaching the performance operation unit 350. Or contact can be detected. When the contact detection sensor main body 358 detects the approach or contact of the player to the production operation unit 350, the production operation unit 350 protrudes upward due to the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 of the production operation unit elevating mechanism 360. Therefore, if the production operation unit 350 protrudes while the player is not in contact with the production operation unit 350, it will come into contact with (collide with) the player, and the player will be in contact with the production operation unit 350. When the performance operation section unit 350 protrudes, it is possible to present to the player a performance using physical force such as pushing the player. Therefore, it is possible to give a strong impact to players with performances that have not been found in conventional pachinko machines, and it is possible to strongly attract the attention of players to the performance operation unit 350. The protrusion of the performance operation section unit 350 can be reliably noticed.

When projecting the production operation unit 350, if the holding member 385 under the lifting spring of the projecting force adjustment mechanism 380 is moved toward the upper end of the lifting spring 365 (upward), the lifting spring 365 is strongly compressed. When the lifting spring 365 is moved away from the upper end side (downward), the compression of the lifting spring 365 becomes weaker and the urging force can be increased, and the lifting spring 365 is By moving the holding member 385 to an appropriate position, the biasing force of the production operation section unit 350 by the lifting spring 365 can be changed. In this way, since the performance operation unit 350 can be projected with various protruding forces, it is possible to increase the variation of performances based on physical force, making it difficult for players to get bored, and making it possible to control the performance operation. It is possible to enjoy the effect caused by the protrusion of the unit 350, and it is possible to suppress a decline in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, since the protruding force of the production operation unit 350 is changed depending on the gaming state, when the player approaches or contacts the production operation unit 350 with his or her fingers, a strong force is applied to the production operation unit 350. When the 350 comes into contact with the player, a strong impact is given to the player, making him think that something good will happen (for example, the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state in which the player has an advantage). It is possible to increase expectations for the game and suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, since the production operation unit 350 is configured as a press operation unit 303 that can be operated by pressing, when a player participation type production is executed, the player can press the production operation unit 350 to play the game. The player can participate in the participatory performance, and can enjoy pressing operations on the performance operation section unit 350, thereby suppressing loss of interest.

In addition, since the production operation unit 350 can be operated by pressing, it is possible for players who place their hands or fingers on the production operation unit 350 (the top surface of the button body 351) to be able to perform the press operation at any time. When a player participatory performance in which the performance operation unit 350 is pressed is executed, the performance operation unit 350 is made to protrude by the performance operation unit elevating mechanism 360. Even without providing guidance on the start of execution of the performance, it is possible to quickly make the player aware of the start of execution of the performance with player participation, and increase the desire to press the performance operation unit 350 to start the performance with player participation. You can enjoy it even more.

Furthermore, since the production operation unit 350 is made to protrude by the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 in the production operation unit elevating mechanism 360, compared to the case where the production operation unit 350 is made to protrude using a drive motor. Therefore, the performance operation unit 350 can be easily and forcefully protruded, and the above-described effects can be more easily achieved.

Further, by detecting the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 by the contact detection sensor body 358, the approach or contact of the player to the production operation unit 350 is detected. Since the capacitance varies depending on the distance between the production operation unit 350 and the player, it is possible to provide a plurality of capacitance thresholds and cause the production operation unit 350 to protrude with a different ejection force for each threshold. becomes. Therefore, the contact detection sensor main body 358 can detect the time (distance) from the approach of the player's hand or finger to the production operation unit 350 to the time of contact in multiple stages. By making the game stand out with a projecting force, it is possible to present a more diverse range of effects to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored and suppressing a drop in interest.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, by causing the pan unit 200 of the door frame 3 to pop up when a player participation type performance is executed, the player can enter the performance operation unit 350 that is provided so that the player can advance and retreat. When approaches or contacts, the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 provided on the back side of the button body 351 that the player touches in the performance operation section unit 350 changes. On the other hand, since the contact detection sensor main body 358, which is provided apart from the contact detection body 352 in the performance operation unit 350, detects the capacitance of the contact detection body 352, it is possible to detect contact due to the approach or contact of the player. Since it is possible to detect changes in the capacitance of the detection body 352, it is possible to detect the approach or contact of the player with the button body 351 of the production operation unit 350, and the contact detection sensor body 358 is activated by the capacitance. Players can be detected. Then, by detection of the contact detection sensor body 358 or movement (pressure) of the production operation unit 350 by the player, the production operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320, the outer button decoration board 355, the production operation unit lifting mechanism 360, the button inner decoration board A predetermined effect is executed by effect means such as 364, the projection force adjustment mechanism 380, and the effect display device 1600. In other words, when the player advances or retreats the performance operation unit 350 or approaches or contacts the performance operation unit 350, a predetermined performance is executed, so that the player can be entertained by the performance. It is possible to suppress a decline in player's interest in playing games.

At this time, when the player approaches or touches the performance operation section unit 350, the performance is executed, so the performance operation section unit 350 (button body 351) is connected to the performance operation section (non-contact operation section, contact operation section). You can make it work like this. On the other hand, when the player advances or retreats (presses) the performance operation unit 350, the performance is executed, so the performance operation unit 350 can function like a performance operation unit (press operation unit). For this reason, it is possible for the player to perform a variety of performance operations, so by executing a player participation type performance that allows the player to perform performance operations, it is possible to enjoy a variety of performance operations. This makes it possible to make it difficult for the players to get bored, and it is also possible to make the players enjoy the player participation type performance, and it is possible to prevent the players from losing interest in the game.

In addition, the player is detected by the capacitance of a contact detection body 352 provided near the part of the button body 351 of the production operation unit 350 that the player touches (below the upper surface part 351a). Since the capacitance of the contact sensing body 352 differs depending on the distance between the contact sensing body 352 (button body 351) and the player, a plurality of capacitance thresholds for executing a predetermined performance are provided, and each It becomes possible to perform different effects for each threshold value. Therefore, since it is possible to detect the time (distance) from the approach of the player's hand or finger to the production operation unit 350 in multiple stages, the production can be presented according to each stage. Therefore, it is possible to present a wider variety of performances to the players, making it difficult for the players to get bored and suppressing a drop in interest.

Further, since a predetermined performance is executed by the player's detection by the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, the performance operation (non-contact operation, It is possible to give a sense of operation to the touch operation (contact operation), and it is possible to make the performance operation more enjoyable for the player.

Furthermore, it includes a performance operation unit 350 that the player can move forward and backward (press), and a contact detection body 352 and a contact detection sensor body 358 that can detect the approach or contact of the player to the performance operation unit 350. Therefore, in a player participation type performance, the player is required to perform an operation to move the performance operation unit 350 forward or backward (press operation), or an operation to approach or touch the performance operation unit 350 with a finger or the like (non-contact operation, contact operation). ), etc., and the various operations can increase the player's desire to participate in the player participation type production, and make it easier for the player to participate in the player participation type production. Can be done. When a player participates in a player participation type production, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored by performing various operations using the production operation unit 350, the contact detection body 352, and the contact detection sensor body 358. At the same time, it is possible to entertain the player in the participatory performance, and it is possible to suppress a decline in the player's interest.

Further, by locking the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 of the production operation unit 350 to the locking portion 371c of the elevating cam member 371 in the production operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the production operation unit 350 is locked so that it cannot move forward or backward. Therefore, until a performance such as advancing or retracting the performance operation unit 350 is executed, the performance operation unit 350 is prevented from moving forward or backward by the guide pin 354c and the elevating cam member 371. 350 can be prevented from moving or shaking on its own. Therefore, it is possible to avoid making the player feel distrustful or anxious due to the performance operation unit 350 moving or shaking on its own, and making the performance by the performance operation unit 350 more enjoyable. You can make it possible to

Furthermore, in the production operation unit 350, the contact detection sensor main body 358 is provided at a position apart from the contact detection body 352, so that the contact detection sensor that has electronic components such as a sensor IC and an output circuit can be used. The main body 358 can be provided in a part that is difficult for players to see, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

Further, since the contact detection body 352 for detecting capacitance and the contact detection sensor main body 358 having a sensor IC, output circuit, etc. for detecting the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 are separate bodies. Since the shape, material, etc. of the contact detection body 352 can be appropriately selected regardless of the contact detection sensor body 358, the contact detection body 352 can be selected according to the shape, form, specifications, etc. of the button body 351 of the production operation unit 350. The pachinko machine 1 that provides the above-mentioned functions and effects can be reliably realized.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, in the effect operation unit 300 of the door frame 3, the player can attach the button body 351 or the surface member 396 covering the outer button decorative board 355, the inner button decorative board 364, or the decorative body 398. When the user approaches or contacts the button body 351 or the surface member 396 with the button outer decorative substrate 355, the inner button decorative substrate 364, or the decorative body 398, the contact sensing element 352 or the contact sensing element 397 The capacitance of the button changes, and a predetermined effect is executed in which light is irradiated to the player side by the outside button decorative board 355, the inside button decorative board 364, or the decorative body 398 according to the change. The player's attention can be strongly attracted to the outer button decorative board 355, the inner button decorative board 364, or the decorative body 398 by the light irradiated to the button, and the performed performance can entertain the player. At this time, the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 provided between the button body 351 or the surface member 396 and the button outer decoration board 355, the button inner decoration board 364, or the decoration body 398, Since it is formed along the decorative part provided on the surface member 396, it is possible to give the player the illusion that the contact sensing body 352 or the contact sensing body 397 is part of the decorative part, and the game It is possible to make it impossible for the player to recognize that the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 is for detecting a player.

In this way, since the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 is made unrecognizable from the player side, even if the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 is the outside button decorative board 355, the inside button decorative board 364, or the decoration. Even if a part of the body 398 (effect) is blocked, the player will not be concerned about the contact sensing body 352 or the contact sensing body 397, and the outside button decorative board 355, the inside button decorative board 364, or the decorative body 398 will not be bothered by the player. Even if the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 is provided in front of the player, the presence of the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 will not make the player feel uncomfortable. Therefore, the effect of the outside button decorative board 355, the inside button decorative board 364, or the decorative body 398 can be shown to the player in a good condition, and the player can be entertained and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, by detecting the approach or contact of the player's finger or the like to the button body 351 or the surface member 396 by the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397, the button body 351 or the surface member 396 covers the outside of the button. Since the decoration board 355, the button inside decoration board 364, or the decoration body 398 is configured to perform a production in which light is irradiated to the player side, the button body 351 or the surface member 396 is connected to the production operation section 301 (contact operation section). 302), and it is also possible to provide the player with a sense of operation using light. Therefore, for example, when executing a player participation type production, the player's fingers or the like are brought close to or in contact with the button body 351 or the surface member 396, and the contact sensor 352 or the contact sensor 397 approaches or contacts the player's finger or the like with the button body 351 or the surface member 396. By detecting the contact, the outer button decorative board 355, the inner button decorative board 364, or the decoration body 398 executes the effect, allowing the player to participate in the player participation type effect. You can enjoy the kata performance.

Furthermore, since the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 detects the player's approach or contact with the button body 351 or the surface member 396, the button body 351 or the surface member 396 and the player's fingers, etc. Since it is possible to change the effect of the outside button decorative board 355, the inside button decorative board 364, or the decorative body 398 depending on the distance from the outside button decorative board 355, depending on the movement (position) of the player's fingers, etc. It is possible to change the presentation by the decorative board 364 or the decoration body 398 in the button, and it is possible to show a more diverse presentation to the player, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored with the variety of presentation. It is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, changes in the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 are detected, and when the player approaches or touches the button body 351 or the surface member 396, the button body 351 or the surface member 396 and the button Since the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 provided between the outer decoration substrate 355, the button inner decoration substrate 364, or the decoration body 398 changes, the game on the button body 351 or the surface member 396 It is possible to easily detect the approach or contact of a person's finger or the like, and it is possible to reliably realize the pachinko machine 1 that has the above-mentioned effects.

Furthermore, since the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 is configured to detect a change in capacitance, the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 can be made of a conductive member, so that, for example, When the contact detection body 397 is made of a metal vapor deposited film, it can be made transparent by making the vapor deposited film thin, and it can be made to look like a part of decoration by making the vapor deposited film thick and have a metallic luster. Can be done. Alternatively, if the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection body 395 are made of punched metal with a design such as a star shape or a heart shape, the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection body 395 can be made to look like part of the decoration. be able to. For this reason, the contact detection bodies 352, 395, and 397 can be made unrecognizable from the player side, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, in the performance operation unit 300 of the door frame 3, the electrostatic capacitance is increased when the player's finger or the like approaches or contacts the transparent button body 351 covering the upper surface side (front side). As a result of the change, a predetermined effect is produced by the effect presentation means such as the outer button decorative board 355, the vibration motor 356, the effect operation part lifting mechanism 360, the inner button decorative board 364, the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380, and the effect display device 1600. The contact sensing body 395 (including the contact sensing body 352, the left contact sensing body 390L, the right contact sensing body 390R, the contact sensing body 393, the contact sensing body 397, etc.) for displaying the Since the contact sensing body 395 is formed in the outer peripheral shape, the pachinko machine 1 can be decorated with the contact sensing body 395 itself, and the pachinko machine 1 can be provided with a good appearance and high appeal to players. In addition, the surface side of the contact sensing body 395 etc. is covered with a transparent button body 351, and the effect is presented according to the change in the capacitance of the contact sensing body 395 etc. due to the approach of the player's finger etc. to the contact sensing body 395. Since the means presents a predetermined effect via the button body 351 and the contact detection body 395, etc., the predetermined effect is presented in response to the approach or contact of the player's finger or the like to the button body 351. Therefore, the button body 351 can function as the effect operation section 301. Since the contact detection body 395 and the like that can be seen through the button body 351 have a design, the production operation section 301 appears to have a design, which is unlike any previous pachinko machine. Since the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with the operation section 301, it can give a strong impact to players, and the pachinko machine 1 can be highly appealing and can be differentiated from other pachinko machines. Furthermore, as described above, the touch detection body 395 etc. with a design can give a strong impact to the player, so it is possible to strongly arouse interest in the touch detection body 395 etc. (button body 351). It is possible to increase expectations for the operation of the button body 351 (performance operation section 301), and to make the operation of the button body 351 enjoyable when a player participation type performance in which the button body 351 is operated is executed. This makes it possible to suppress a decline in player interest.

In addition, since the contact detection body 395 and the like that detect the approach or contact of the player's fingers, etc. with the button body 351 are formed in an outer peripheral shape with a design, at first glance, depending on the player, some effects may be displayed. It is possible to make it difficult for the user to notice the existence of the performance operation section 301 (button body 351) for presenting the performance by means of means. Therefore, when a player participation type performance in which the performance operation unit 301 is operated is executed, by prompting the player to approach or touch the button body 351, the button body 351 is first activated by the contact detection body 395, etc. It is possible to make the player aware that it is the operation section 301, and it is possible to give a surprise to the player and make the player participation type performance more enjoyable. Alternatively, when a player participatory performance is executed by operating the performance operation section 301, if the player approaches or touches the button body 351 without knowing that it is the performance operation section 301, the contact detection body 395 etc. may become static. Since the capacitance changes and the performance is presented by the performance presentation means, the player can be surprised, and the presented performance can entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, since the effect is presented by the effect presentation means in accordance with the change in capacitance in the contact detection body 395 etc., the player's finger or the like does not touch the button body 351 covering the contact detection body 395 etc. Approach and contact can be easily detected, and the pachinko machine 1 that achieves the above-mentioned effects can be easily implemented. In addition, since the effects are presented in response to changes in the capacitance of the contact sensing body 395, etc., contact occurs when the player's hand or finger approaches the button body 351 that covers the contact sensing body 395, etc. Since it is possible to detect the distance up to It is possible to suppress a decline in interest by making it difficult for the user to get bored with the game.

Furthermore, since the outer periphery of the contact sensing body 395 etc. is formed into a predetermined shape, even if an inorganic material such as punched metal, expanded metal, wire mesh, etc. is used as the conductive contact sensing body 395 etc., It is possible to impart a design to the contact sensing body 395 etc., it is possible to prevent deterioration of the appearance due to the contact sensing body 395 etc., it is also possible to make the contact sensing body 395 etc. stand out, and the above-mentioned effects are achieved. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily realized.

In addition, since the outer circumferential shape of the contact sensing body 395 etc. is formed into a predetermined shape, it is possible to construct something with design properties without forming the contact sensing body 395 etc. into a three-dimensional shape. can. Therefore, the contact sensing body 395 etc. can be made into a planar shape or a simple three-dimensional shape, and the cost for manufacturing the contact sensing body 395 etc. can be reduced.

Furthermore, since the surface side of the contact sensing body 395 etc. is covered with the transparent button body 351, dust, food and drink stains, etc. do not adhere to the contact sensing body 395 etc., and the effort required for cleaning is simplified. It can be made into something. To be more specific, since the contact sensing body 395 is made of a material with irregularities like punched metal, dirt such as dust and food and drinks tends to adhere to the irregularities, and it takes time and effort to clean the dirt. However, since the surface side of the contact sensing body 395 etc. is covered with the button body 351, even if the contact sensing body 395 etc. is made of a material with irregularities such as punched metal, the button body 351 This makes it possible to prevent dirt from adhering to the pachinko machine, and as it is easy to clean, the burden on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed can be reduced.

In addition, since the surface side of the contact sensing body 395 etc. is covered with a transparent button body 351 to prevent the player from touching the contact sensing body 395 etc., the contact sensing body 395 etc. is made of a metal vapor deposited film or the like. If a material that enhances the design, such as foil stamping, is used, it is possible to prevent premature wear due to contact by a player, and it is possible to increase the durability of the contact detection body 395 and the like.

Furthermore, the surface side of the contact sensing body 395 etc. is covered with the transparent button body 351, and as mentioned above, the transparent button body 351 prevents the player from directly touching the contact sensing body 395 etc. Since it is possible to use materials that are unpleasant to the touch or that may cause discomfort to the player as the sensing body 395, it is possible to increase the flexibility of the materials used for the contact sensing body 395, etc., and to meet the needs of the user. The contact sensing body 395 and the like can be formed from a suitable material.

Furthermore, when the capacitance of the contact sensing body 395 etc. is changed by bringing the player's finger or the like close to or touching the button body 351 covering the contact sensing body 395 etc., the button body 351 and the contact sensing body 395 Since a predetermined effect is presented to the player via the button body 351 and the contact detection body 395, etc., it is possible that the player approaches or contacts the button body 351 with a finger or the like due to the effect presented via the button body 351, the contact detection body 395, etc. This allows the player to intuitively recognize the player's actions, and allows the player to enjoy the movements of the fingers and the like.

In addition, the effect is presented to the player via the button body 351, the contact detection body 395, etc., and when the player's finger approaches or touches the button body 351 covering the contact detection body 395, etc. Since the effects presented to the player are executed via the button body 351, the contact sensing body 395, etc., the button body 351 can function like a contact operation section, and the presented effects can improve the operational feel. can be given, and the operation using the button body 351 (player participation type performance) can be enjoyed.

Further, according to the present embodiment, in order to operate the button body 351 of the performance operation unit 350 that can perform multiple operations, the player approaches or contacts the button body 351 with his/her finger or the like, and the contact detection body 352 is activated. When the (contact detection sensor main body 358) detects the entry of a finger or the like into the detection area, the plurality of LEDs 355a of the button outer decorative board 355 and the plurality of LEDs 364a of the button inner decorative board 364 emit light, allowing the game to be activated through the button main body 351. A light-emitting effect in which a player is illuminated with light, an effect in which the vibration motor 356 vibrates the player's fingers, etc. that are in contact with the button body 351 through (via) the button body 351, and a effect that causes the button body 351 to protrude upwards by the effect operation part elevating mechanism 360. As a result, the button body 351 can function as the contact operation section 302, and the player can enjoy it. You can do it. In addition, at this time, effects such as light, vibration, impact, push-up, and wind pressure are given to the player through the button body 351, so that the effects can surprise the player and entertain the player. This can increase the user's desire to operate the button body 351. Then, when the player's finger or the like touches the button body 351 and presses the button body 351 downward by appropriately moving the player's finger or the like, the button body 351 functions as the pressing operation part 303, so that the contact sensing object 352 detects the approach or contact of the player's fingers, etc., and the pressing operation of the button body 351 allows the player to enjoy a variety of performance operations, making it difficult for the player to get bored and keeping the player interested. It is possible to suppress the decrease in .

Further, a detection means for detecting the approach or contact of a player's finger or the like is composed of a contact detection body 352 and a contact detection sensor body 358, and the contact detection body 352 is provided near the back surface of the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351. Therefore, even if the contact detection sensor main body 358 provided with the detection circuit is placed on the flange part 353b of the button sleeve 353 away from the upper surface part 351a of the button main body 351, the contact detection body 352 will cause the button main body 351 to It is possible to detect the approach or contact of the player's fingers or the like with the upper surface portion 351a of the player, and the same effects as described above can be achieved.

Furthermore, since the detection means for detecting the approach or contact of a player's finger or the like is configured by the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, the contact detection sensor main body 358 provided with a detection circuit Since the sensor body 358 can be placed on the flange part 353b of the button sleeve 353, which is remote from the upper surface part 351a (contact detection body 352) of the button body 351, the contact detection sensor body 358 can be placed in an inconspicuous area, and the pachinko machine The appearance of 1 can be improved.

In addition, on the back side (lower side) of the button body 351, there are provided an outer button decorative board 355, an inner button decorative board 364, and a performance operation part lifting/lowering mechanism 360. Effects such as vibration, impact, push-up, and wind pressure can be easily applied, and the same effects as described above can be achieved.

[4. Overall configuration of main body frame]
The overall configuration of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 75 to 81. FIG. 75 is a front view of the main body frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 76 is a rear view of the main body frame of the pachinko machine. FIG. 77 is a perspective view of the body frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 78 is a perspective view of the body frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 79 is a perspective view of the body frame viewed from the back. FIG. 80 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into its main members and seen from the front, and FIG. 81 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into its main members and seen from the back.

The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a where a game is played by hitting a game ball B, and also pays out the game ball B to the player side and stores the game ball B used in the game. This is for discharging or discharging to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (toward the island equipment side of the game hall). As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 is formed into a box shape with an open front, and a game board 5 is removably housed inside from the front. The main body frame 4 is attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall so that it can be opened and closed at the top and bottom of the front end on the left side of the front side, and the door frame 3 can be opened and closed so that the open front side is closed. Mounted as possible.

The main body frame 4 includes a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear part can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and a left side of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. a main body frame upper hinge member 510 attached to the upper end and rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 and to which the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached; Main body frame lower hinge assembly is attached to the lower end of the left side of the base unit 500 when viewed from the front, is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and is rotatably attached to the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3. A solid body 520 is provided.

Further, the main body frame 4 includes a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, and a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the front lower part of the main body frame base unit 500, so that the game area 5a of the game board 5 can be A ball launcher 540 for driving the ball B, an inverted L-shaped payout base unit 550 installed along the upper and left sides of the main body frame base unit 500 in front view, and a payout base unit 550 for shooting the ball B; A payout unit 560 attached to the rear side for dispensing game balls B to the player side, a board unit 620 attached to the lower rear surface of the main frame base unit 500, and a rear side of the main frame base unit 500. A back cover 640 is attached to the main body frame base unit 501 so as to be openable and closable and covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base unit 501, and an outer frame 2, a main body frame 4, and a locking unit 650 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

The main body frame base unit 500 includes a main body frame base 501 formed in the shape of a rectangular frame extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a connection cable guide member that guides a connection cable 503 for connection to the door frame 3 side. 502, and a game board locking member 505 for detachably holding the game board 5.

The dispensing base unit 550 includes a dispensing base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a spherical tank that is attached to the dispensing base 551 and has a box shape extending left and right and is open upward. 552, a tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and extending leftward in the shape of an upwardly opened groove, a first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, and a first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553. A second rail cover 555 is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a distance from the first rail cover 554 to the left in front view, and a second rail cover 555 is attached to the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. It includes a ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end and a ball stopper member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553.

The payout unit 560 includes a ball guiding unit 570 that guides the game balls B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a ball guiding unit 570 that guides the game balls B guided by the ball guiding unit 570 based on instructions from the payout control board 633. A payout device 580 that pays out one by one, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides the game balls B that have passed through the payout device 580 downward, and an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides the game balls B that have passed through the upper full ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side. Alternatively, a lower full bulb path unit 610 that guides the ball to the substrate unit 620 side is provided.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the body frame base 501, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b. 620c, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear side of the speaker unit 620a.

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the main body frame base 501, a plurality of door frame hooks 652 that protrude forward from the unit base 651 and can be engaged with the door frame 3, and a plurality of door frame hooks 652 that protrude rearward from the unit base 651. A transmission cylinder 654 moves the door frame hooks 652 or the outer frame hooks 653 in the vertical direction, and the door frame hooks 652 are attached downward. It includes a lock spring 655 that is biased and urges the outer frame hook 653 upward, and an outer frame unlock lever 656 that moves the outer frame hook 653 downward.

[4-1. Body frame base unit]
The main body frame base unit 500 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 75 to 83 and the like. FIG. 82(a) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the main body frame, and FIG. 82(b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIG. 83 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the main body frame when the door frame is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame. The main body frame base unit 500 has a rear portion inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 from the front, and holds the outer periphery of the game board 5 inserted from the front.

The main body frame base unit 500 includes a main body frame base 501 which is formed in the shape of a rectangular frame extending vertically when viewed from the front, and is attached to the lower left corner of the front surface of the main body frame base 501 to guide a connection cable 503. and a game board locking member 505 that is rotatably attached to the front lower part of the main body frame base 501 around an axis extending back and forth and holds the game board 5 in a removable manner. ing.

The main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a base main body 501a formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a base main body 501a that extends approximately 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly below the upper end of the base main body 501a. A game board insertion slot 501b that penetrates from front to back within a height range of It includes a placing part 501c and a game board regulating part 501d that protrudes upward from the center in the left-right direction of the game board placing part 501c and restricts the movement of the lower end of the game board 5 to the left and right and to the rear.

The main body frame base 501 is recessed rearward at the lower right side of the game board mounting section 501c in front of the base main body 501a when viewed from the front, and includes a firing device mounting section 501e for mounting the ball firing device 540, and a firing device mounting section 501e for mounting the ball firing device 540. A cylinder insertion port 501f that penetrates back and forth on the right side of the portion 501e when viewed from the front and into which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted, and a cylinder insertion port 501f that penetrates back and forth on the lower left side of the game board mounting portion 501c when viewed from the front and connect the board unit. A circular speaker opening 501g that allows the main body frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a to face forward and the main body frame base 501 are recessed rearward below the speaker opening 501g and extend left and right. It includes a cable attachment recess 501h to which the connection cable guide member 502 is attached, and a cable insertion opening 501i penetrating back and forth at the upper right end of the cable attachment recess 501h when viewed from the front.

Furthermore, the main body frame base 501 extends rearward in a plate shape from the right side of the game board insertion slot 501b in the base main body 501a when viewed from the front, and a locking unit 650 is attached to the right side, and a back cover 640 is attached to the rear end. A rear extending portion 501j that is rotatably attached is formed near both upper and lower ends of the left end in front view on the rear surface of the base body 501a, and is used to attach the body frame upper hinge member 510 and the body frame lower hinge assembly 520. An upper hinge attachment portion 501k and a lower hinge attachment portion 501l are provided.

The main body frame base 501 also has a door for detecting opening of the door frame 3 relative to the main body frame 4 at a position below the cylinder insertion opening 501f through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted on the front surface of the base main body 501a. A frame release switch is installed. When the door frame 3 is opened (released) with respect to the main body frame 4, the door frame release switch is released from its pressure and can detect the opening of the door frame 3. A detection signal from the door frame release switch is input to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. Further, the main body frame base 501 has a main body frame release switch for detecting the release of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 on the rear surface of the base main body 501a below the position where the door frame release switch is installed. There is. When the main body frame 4 is opened (released) with respect to the outer frame 2, the main body frame release switch is released from its pressure and can detect the opening of the main body frame 4. A detection signal from the main body frame opening switch is input to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633.

A game board locking member 505 is rotatably attached to the main body frame base 501 at a position below the game board mounting portion 501c on the front surface and to the right of the speaker opening 501g. The game board locking member 505 can restrict the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion port 501b, thereby making it possible to attach and detach the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion port 501b.

The cable attachment recess 501h of the main body frame base 501 extends in the left-right direction from the right end side of the lower hinge attachment portion 501l to a position below the area where the game board locking member 505 is attached to the right side of the speaker opening 501g. . The cable attachment recess 501h is formed in a size that can accommodate the connection cable guide member 502, and the right end side of the connection cable guide member 502 can be attached rotatably around an axis extending vertically.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a flat guide body 502a extending left and right, and protrudes forward on both upper and lower sides of the guide body 502a, and extends to the right from the right end of the guide body 502a. A pair of band-like frame pieces 502b that extend out, a cylindrical mounting shaft 502c that connects the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b, and a cylindrical mounting shaft 502c that passes through the guide body 502a in the front and back at both upper and lower ends, and also extends from the left and right sides. A plurality of through holes 502d are arranged in a row in the direction.

The length of the connection cable guide member 502 in the left-right direction is slightly shorter than the length in the left-right direction of the cable attachment recess 501h of the main body frame base 501, and has a size that can be accommodated in the cable attachment recess 501h. It is formed. The connection cable guide member 502 is attached such that the attachment shaft 502c is rotatable around an axis extending vertically near the right end in the cable attachment recess 501h. Thereby, the connection cable guide member 502 can be rotated (hinged) so that the left end side protrudes forward.

This connection cable guide member 502 is for guiding the connection cable 503. The connection cable 503 consists of a plurality of wiring cords, and one end is connected to the interface board 635 of the board unit 620, and the other end is connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-board of the door frame 3. Connected to relay board 105.

Next, the effects of the connection cable guide member 502 will be explained. As shown in FIG. 83 etc., the connection cable guide member 502 is located at an end (right end) opposite to the side (left side) on which the door frame 3 is hinged and rotatably attached to the main body frame base 501 in the left and right direction. ) is attached rotatably around an axis extending parallel to the hinge axis of the door frame 3.

The connection cable 503 that connects the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 and the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 of the door frame 3 has the side connected to the interface board 635 connected to the connection cable guide member. 502, the guide body 502a is brought into contact with the front surface of the guide body 502a so as to extend from the right side to the left side. It is attached to the guide body 502a by being tightened together with the guide body 502a by the binding band 504 inserted through a set of through holes 502d at the same position.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame 4 is connected to the rear of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 of the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 assembled in the pachinko machine 1 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4. (See FIG. 83(a)). In this state, the connection cable 503 extends leftward from the connection cable guide member 502, is bent back in front of the lower hinge attachment part 501l, passes through the cable holder 103a of the door frame 3, and passes through the door frame relay board cover. 107. The cable holder 103a of the door frame 3 is arranged to the left of the left end of the connection cable guide member 502.

In this state, when the hinge is rotated to open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pulled forward by the side of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3. The connection cable guide member 502 rotates around the mounting shaft 502c at the right end. At this time, in this embodiment, the relationship between the opening angle α of the door frame 3 and the opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 satisfies α/2≧β (preferably α/3≧β). (See FIG. 83(b)).

The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 is 0 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed (the opening angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degrees). The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 increases as the door frame 3 is opened and the opening angle α increases, but when the opening angle α becomes larger than a certain degree (for example, about 90 degrees), the increase stops. It changes as follows. In this embodiment, the maximum angle of the opening angle β is less than 45 degrees.

In this way, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward than the main body frame base 501, so that the connection cable guide member 502 By guiding the connection cable 503, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 from hanging down between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

When closing the open door frame 3, the part of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 moves relatively backward, so the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pushed backward by the connection cable 503. Then, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the attachment shaft 502c so that the left end side moves rearward. At this time, since the connection cable guide member 502 is opened at an opening angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connection cable guide member 502 does not obstruct the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction. Can be closed smoothly. In addition, since the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, when the door frame 3 is closed, the connection cable 503 is not pinched between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502. It is possible to prevent problems from occurring.

In addition, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded back 180 degrees, so that the connection cable 503 is folded back at the folded part. You can develop a habit. As a result, when the 180-degree folded portion of the connection cable 503 changes to open by opening the door frame 3, a force to close the connection cable 503 is applied due to the folding tendency. Therefore, when closing the door frame 3, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction due to its folding tendency, and also to prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction. It can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be smoothly closed.

Furthermore, on the door frame 3 side, the folded connection cable 503 is attached to the cable holder 103a at a position closer to the center axis (axis) of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. Therefore, when closing the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103a connects the tip side of the connection cable guide member 502 to the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103a. It can be drawn toward the central axis (axis) of the door frame lower hinge pin 126.

Further, in this embodiment, the cable holder 103a in the speaker duct 103 The angle between the tangent to the circle passing through the rearward protruding part (pressing part) on the center axis (axis) side of the upper frame hinge pin 122 and the lower door frame hinge pin 126 and the front surface of the main body frame 4 is 45 degrees. It is configured as follows. As a result, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion comes into contact with the connection cable 503, thereby closing the tip side of the connection cable guide member 502 that is open via the connection cable 503. Since the connecting cable guide member 502 can be pressed in the direction, the connecting cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed as the door frame 3 moves in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be reliably closed. Further, since the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens and closes) as the door frame 3 is opened and closed can be set to 45 degrees or less, when the door frame 3 is closed, the connection cable guide member 502 can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and the same effects as described above can be achieved.

[4-2. Body frame upper hinge member]
The main body frame upper hinge member 510 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 80, 81, and the like. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2. The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame is rotatably attached to the door frame.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 includes an upper hinge main body 511 in which the rear part of a horizontally extending flat plate is bent downward into an L-shape, and a cylindrical shape protruding upward from the front end of the upper hinge main body 511. The main body frame upper hinge pin 512 is pivotally supported by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50. The upper hinge main body 511 has a door frame upper hinge hole 511a that penetrates in the vertical direction on the left side of the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 in a horizontally extending portion in front view, and for pivotally supporting the door frame upper hinge assembly 120. We are prepared.

In the main body frame upper hinge member 510, a portion of the upper hinge main body 511 that is bent downward and extends vertically is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is pivotally supported by the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 being inserted into the bearing groove 51c of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 in the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50. The door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge main body 511 from below.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 cooperates with the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 in a hinge-rotatable manner, and also allows the main body frame 4 to be attached to the door frame with respect to the outer frame 2. 3 can be mounted rotatably on a hinge.

[4-3. Body frame lower hinge assembly]
The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 80, 81, and the like. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to the lower hinge attachment portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2. A door frame lower hinge member 125 is rotatably attached.

The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 includes a lower hinge first main body 521, which is a horizontally extending flat plate whose rear part is bent upward into an L-shape, and is arranged above the lower hinge first main body 521. The lower hinge second main body 522 is formed by bending the rear part of a horizontally extending flat plate material upward into an L-shape. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 has a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second body 522 arranged at a distance upwardly from a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge first body 521, and a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge first body 521 that extends horizontally. The vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second body 522 is in contact with the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the first hinge body 521 .

The lower hinge first body 521 is an outer frame lower part that penetrates vertically near the front end of a horizontally extending portion, and into which the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below. It has a hinge hole 521a. The outer frame lower hinge hole 521a is formed coaxially with the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510.

The lower hinge second main body 522 is a lower door frame lower body that penetrates vertically near the front end of a horizontally extending portion and into which the lower door frame hinge pin 126 of the lower door frame hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above. A hinge hole 522a, and a regulating piece 522b extending upward from a position on the left side of the horizontally extending portion behind the door frame lower hinge hole 522a and regulating the rotation range of the door frame 3. , is equipped with. The door frame lower hinge hole 522a is formed coaxially with the door frame upper hinge hole 511a in the upper hinge body 511 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510.

In the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, the vertically extending portions of the lower hinge first body 521 and the lower hinge second body 522 are attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501l on the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. It will be done. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 cooperates with the main body frame upper hinge member 510 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 in a hinge-rotatable manner, and also allows the door frame 3 to be attached to the main body frame 4 in a hinged manner. The hinge can be mounted rotatably.

[4-4. Main body frame reinforcement frame]
The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 80, 81, and the like. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a U-shaped cross-sectional shape in plan view with the right side open, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In this embodiment, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is formed of an extruded metal material.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a portion on the rear side extending rightward from the front end that restricts the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501 from moving forward and up and down. Two left position regulating members 531 are attached vertically apart from each other.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a groove portion 530a on the front side, which is formed in a U-shape with an open right side in plan view, and is open to the right and extends vertically. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the rear left end of the left reinforcing frame 111 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame 3 is inserted into this groove 530a. By inserting the left reinforcing frame 111 into the groove 530a, the gap between the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 and the left reinforcing frame 111 becomes meandering in plan view, and an unauthorized tool can be seen from the left side of the pachinko machine 1. can be prevented from being inserted inside. The body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500, and also strengthens the inside of the body frame 4 from the left side (passed between the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4). This prevents unauthorized tools from being inserted into the game board 5).

[4-5. Ball launcher]
The ball launcher 540 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 84 and the like. FIG. 84(a) is a perspective view of the ball launcher seen from the front in the main body frame, and FIG. 84(b) is a perspective view of the ball launcher seen from the back. The ball launcher 540 is attached to the front lower part of the main body frame base unit 500, and the ball launching device 540 is attached to the front lower part of the main body frame base unit 500, and the game ball B stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 in the door frame 3 is sent to the game board attached to the main body frame 4. This is for driving into the game area 5a of No. 5. The ball firing device 540 can drive the game ball B with a force corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3.

The ball launcher 540 is attached to a flat launcher base 541 that is attached to the launcher attachment portion 501e of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500, and to the rear surface of the right side of the launcher base 541 when viewed from the front, and is rotatable. A firing solenoid 542 consisting of a rotary solenoid whose shaft extends forward through the firing base 541, a ball mallet 543 whose base end is attached to the rotating shaft of the firing solenoid 542, and a ball from near the tip of the ball mallet 543. It is provided with a firing rail 544 attached to the front surface of the firing base 541 so as to extend diagonally upward to the left and on which the game ball B can roll.

The ball launching device 540 is configured such that the game ball B is supplied from the ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the right end of the upper surface of the firing rail 544; When the handle 195 is rotated in this state, the firing solenoid 542 is driven with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle, and the ball B is hit by the ball hitting mallet 543. Then, the game ball B hit by the ball hammer 543 passes through the launch rail 544, is guided by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5, and is driven into the game area 5a.

In addition, if the hit game ball B does not reach the gaming area 5a due to the driving force of the game ball B, etc., the firing rail 544 and the game board 5 (outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002) From there, the ball falls into the foul ball socket 150c of the foul cover unit 150 below, passes through the inside of the foul cover unit 150, and is discharged into the lower tray 202.

[4-6. Payout base unit]
The dispensing base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 85 and the like. FIG. 85(a) is a perspective view of the dispensing base unit of the main body frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 85(b) is a perspective view of the dispensing base unit viewed from the back. The dispensing base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L shape and is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500.

The dispensing base unit 550 includes a dispensing base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The dispensing base 551 includes a top plate portion 551a that has a substantially constant width in the front-rear direction and extends left and right, and a top plate portion 551a that extends downwardly from the left side of the top plate portion 551a when viewed from the front and has a width that is substantially the same as the top plate portion in the front-rear direction. the left side plate part 551b that extends downward from the right side of the top plate part 551a in the front view, the right side plate part 551c having approximately the same width in the front-rear direction as the top plate part 551a, and the rear side of the top plate part 551a. The upper back plate 551d extends downward from the rear side to the same position as the lower edge of the right side plate 551c, and the upper back plate 551d extends to the right with a substantially constant width from a position closer to the front than the rear side of the left side plate 551b to the vicinity of the lower end. The left side of the back plate 551e, the inner side plate 551f extending rearward from the right side of the left side of the back plate 551e to the same position as the rear side of the left side plate 551b, and the front part of the lower side of the left side plate 551b to the right. It includes a bottom plate part 551g extending to approximately the same position as the right side of the back plate left part 551e, and a connecting plate part 551h connecting the right side of the bottom plate part 551g and the lower side of the inner plate part 551f. The dispensing base 551 is formed in an inverted L shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a box shape that is open toward the front and inward of the L shape.

The payout base 551 has a top plate portion 551a that extends left and right with approximately the same length as the horizontal width of the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501, and a left side plate portion 551b that extends above and below the game board insertion port 501b. It extends vertically with approximately the same length as the height of the direction. In the dispensing base 551, the front ends of the top plate part 551a, the left side plate part 551b, and the right side plate part 551c are attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501.

Further, the dispensing base 551 includes a shallow concave portion that is open to the rear and extends vertically by a left side plate portion 551b, a left back plate portion 551e, and an inner side plate portion 551f. Unit 560 is installed. Further, the dispensing base 551 protrudes to the right at the upper part of the right side surface of the inner plate portion 551f when viewed from the front, and has a back cover attachment portion 551i to which the back cover 640 is attached.

The dispensing base unit 550 includes a ball tank 552 that is attached to the top surface of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 and is open upward in a box shape extending from side to side, and a portion of the dispensing base 551 extending from side to side. A tank rail 553 is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 on the upper side and extends leftward in the shape of an upwardly open groove.

Further, the dispensing base unit 550 is attached to a first rail cover 554 attached halfway in the left-right direction at the upper end of the tank rail 553, and to the upper end of the tank rail 553 spaced apart from the first rail cover 554 to the left in a front view. A second rail cover 555 is attached and extends to the left end of the tank rail 553, and a ball rectifying member 556 is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. and a ball stopper member 557 attached to the lower end of the tank rail 553 near the left end in front view.

The ball tank 552 is formed to have a length approximately half the width in the left-right direction of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 in the left-right direction, and a length shorter in the front-rear direction than the depth in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a. It is formed. The ball tank 552 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a at a position closer to the right in the left-right direction. The bottom surface of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side is lower. The left end side of the ball tank 552 communicates with the tank rail 553.

The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 near the rear end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction. The tank rail 553 has a shape in a plan view that is diagonal to the left and rear from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552, and the depth in the front and back direction is approximately one minute from the depth several times the outer diameter of the game ball B. After extending to the same depth, it is formed in a shape that extends straight to the left with a depth in the front-rear direction slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side is lower, and the left end of the bottom surface opens downward with a size slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with the upper end opening of the guide passage 570a in the ball guide unit 570 of the dispensing unit 560.

In addition, the tank rail 553 is arranged such that the upper end of the portion extending straight to the left is steeper with respect to the horizontal than the bottom surface so that the height on the left end side is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. It is slanted at an angle so that the left end side is lower. The tank rail 553 is attached to the top surface of the top plate portion 551a so that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left substantially coincides with the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. Further, a first rail cover 554, a second rail cover 555, a ball rectifying member 556, and a ball stopping member 557 are attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left.

The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are attached to the upper end of a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are designed to prevent the depth of the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the front-rear direction from expanding or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B inside the tank rail 553. It is something.

The ball rectifying member 556 is located between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 553, and has an end on the first rail cover 554 side with respect to an axis extending in the front-rear direction. Rotatably mounted. The ball rectifying member 556 includes a rectifying piece 556a that projects into the tank rail 553 and extends in the left-right direction (see FIG. 91). By using this rectifier piece 556a to slow down the flow of game balls B on the upper stage side, which are distributed in two stages, upper and lower, and rectify the flow so that they flow in one stage on the downstream side, the flow in the tank rail 553 is This prevents balls from clogging even if the height is lower.

The ball stopper member 557 is attached so as to be slidable in the left-right direction near the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 when viewed from the front, and by sliding it to the left closes the opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553. It is possible to prevent the game balls B from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the downstream payout unit side.

Further, the dispensing base unit 550 further includes an external terminal plate 558 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 when viewed from the front on the upper surface of the portion of the dispensing base 551 extending left and right. The external terminal board 558 is for electrical connection between the pachinko machine 1 and the island equipment of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Although not shown, the external terminal board 558 includes a ground connection portion facing the game board insertion slot 501b side of the main body frame base 501. A ground wire extending from the game board 5 side is connected to the ground connection portion.

[4-7. Overall configuration of dispensing unit]
The overall configuration of the dispensing unit 560 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 86, 87, and the like. FIG. 86(a) is a perspective view of the dispensing unit in the main body frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 86(b) is a perspective view of the dispensing unit viewed from the back. FIG. 87(a) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front, and FIG. 87(b) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the back. be. The dispensing unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the dispensing base 551 of the dispensing base unit 550.

The payout unit 560 includes a ball guiding unit 570 that guides the game balls B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a ball guiding unit 570 that is disposed below the ball guiding unit 570 to guide the game balls B guided by the ball guiding unit 570. a payout device 580 that pays out game balls B one by one based on instructions from the payout control board 633, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides game balls B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and an upper full ball path unit. A lower full ball path unit 610 that guides the game balls B passing through 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side is provided.

The ball guiding unit 570 supplies the game balls B aligned in a line by the tank rail 553 to the payout device 580. The payout device 580 has a payout passage 580a through which the game balls B supplied from the ball guiding unit 570 can flow, and a ball extraction passage 580b that branches off from the middle of the payout passage 580a. Based on the instruction from the payout control board 633, the game ball B is released from the payout passage 580a to the upper full ball path unit 600 side, and from the ball removal path 580b where the ball removal lever 593 is operated, the ball B is released from the upper full ball path unit. The game ball B is released to the 600 side.

The upper full ball path unit 600 separates and guides the game balls B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game balls B released from the ball removal passage 580b downward. The lower full ball path unit 610 guides the game balls B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 to the door frame 3 side via the upper full ball path unit 600, and guides the game balls B released from the ball extraction path 580b. This is to guide the game ball B that has been loaded toward the board unit 620 side.

[4-7a. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 570 in the dispensing unit 560 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 86 and 87. The ball guide unit 570 is attached from the rear to the upper rear surface of the left back plate 551e of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, receives the game ball B from the tank rail 553, and guides the game ball B to the payout device 580 side. It is for the purpose of

The ball guiding unit 570 includes a box-shaped guiding unit base 571 that is open to the front and has a meandering guiding passage 570a through which game balls B can flow, and a box-shaped guiding unit base 571 that has a closed front side of the guiding unit base 571. A movable piece member 573 that is movable by the game balls B flowing in the guide passage 570a, and a movable piece member 573 that moves by the game balls B flowing in the guide passage 570a by detecting the movement of the movable piece member 573. (See FIG. 91).

In the ball guiding unit 570, the guiding unit base 571 and the guiding passage front cover 572 have a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. The guide passage 570a opens upward near the left end of the upper surface of the guide unit base 571, extends vertically downward from the upper end to near the center in the height direction of the guide unit base 571, and then bends to the right and guides the guide unit base 571. The guide unit base 571 extends downward in a meandering manner while repeatedly being folded back and forth between the widths in the left and right direction of the unit base 571, and opens downward near the left end of the lower surface of the guide unit base 571.

The guide passage 570a is formed so that the depth in the front and rear right directions and the width in the left and right direction are slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B with respect to the distribution direction in which the game ball B is distributed. It can be guided in a single line.

In the ball guiding unit 570, a movable piece member 573 is attached near the top so that it can move forward and backward into the guiding passage 570a. Specifically, the movable piece member 573 has an upper portion attached rotatably around an axis extending back and forth at a right outer portion of the guide passage 570a in front view, and a portion of the lower end protrudes into the guide passage 570a due to its own weight. It is formed to do so. This movable piece member 573 is in a state in which when the game ball B comes into contact with the part that protrudes into the guide passage 570a, the protruding part is pushed by the game ball B and retreats from the inside of the guide passage 570a, so that it does not protrude. becomes.

The ball cut detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573 when a part of the movable piece member 573 protrudes into the guide passage 570a, and the part of the movable piece member 573 retreats from the inside of the guide passage 570a. When the movable piece member 573 is not protruding, the movable piece member 573 is detected. Therefore, the ball cut detection sensor 574 is in a detection state when the game ball B is present in the guide path 570a, and is in a non-detection state when the game ball B is not present in the guide path 570a.

When the ball guiding unit 570 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the upstream end of the guiding passage 570a communicates with the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guiding passage 570a communicates with the dispensing passage of the dispensing device 580. It communicates with the upstream end of 580a. In the ball guiding unit 570, since the guiding passage 570a for guiding the game ball B extends in a meandering manner, the guiding passage 570a extends longer than the total height of the ball guiding unit 570, and many games can be played in the guiding passage 570a. Ball B can be stored. In addition, the ball guidance unit 570 can detect the presence or absence of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 via the guidance path 570a, since the ball cut detection sensor 574 can detect the presence or absence of the game ball B in the guidance path 570a. can do.

[4-7b. Dispensing device]
The dispensing device 580 in the dispensing unit 560 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 86 to 89 and the like. FIG. 88 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit taken at the center of the dispensing blade in the front-rear direction. FIG. 89(a) is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device taken at the center in the front-rear direction of the dispensing blade when the ball extraction movable piece is in the open state, and FIG. 89(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 89(a). It is. The dispensing device 580 is detachably attached to the lower side of the ball guiding unit 570 on the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the dispensing base 551 of the dispensing base unit 550.

The dispensing device 580 includes a dispensing device main body 581, which has a box-like shape that is open to the rear, and has a dispensing passage 580a through which game balls B can flow, a dispensing passage 580b branching from the middle of the dispensing passage 580a, It includes a flat plate-shaped dispensing device rear cover 582 that closes the dispensing device main body 581 from the rear side, and a shallow box-shaped dispensing device front cover 583 that is attached to the front side of the dispensing device main body 581 and is open to the rear. ing.

The dispensing device 580 also includes a dispensing motor 584 which is attached to the rear surface of the dispensing device main body 581 and whose rotating shaft protrudes between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front lid 583, and an attached spur gear-shaped drive gear 585; a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 586 that meshes with the drive gear 585 and is rotatably attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583; , a second transmission gear 587 in the shape of a spur gear is engaged with the first transmission gear 586 and is rotatably attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583; It has a spur gear-shaped dispensing gear 588a and a plurality of detection pieces 588b extending outward from the dispensing gear 588a, and is rotatably attached between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front lid 583. A dispensing gear member 588, a dispensing blade 589 that rotates integrally with the dispensing gear member 588 between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582, and has a plurality of blade pieces 589a protruding into the dispensing passage 580a; A blade rotation detection sensor 590 is attached to the rear side of the device main body 581 and detects the detection piece 588b of the dispensing gear member 588.

Further, the dispensing device 580 includes a dispensing detection sensor 591 that is attached to a dispensing device main body 581 and a dispensing device rear cover 582 at the downstream end of the dispensing passage 580a and detects game balls B; A movable ball ejecting piece 592 is attached to be able to open and close the ball ejecting passage 580b at a portion where it branches from the dispensing passage 580a by the lid 582, and the ball ejecting movable piece 592 can be held in a position where the ball ejecting passage 580b is closed. It is equipped with a ball extraction lever 593 which is attached to be slidable in the vertical direction by the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear cover 582.

The dispensing device 580 has a rectangular shape extending vertically in plan view. The width of the dispensing device 580 in the left-right direction is larger than the width of the ball guiding unit 570 in the left-right direction as viewed from the front.

As shown in FIG. 88, the dispensing passage 580a of the dispensing device 580 has an upstream end that opens upward at a position to the left of the center in the left-right direction, and a downstream end that opens upward at a position near the right end in the left-right direction when viewed from the rear. It opens downward. The dispensing passage 580a extends diagonally downward by about 1/3 of the total height from above so as to move little by little to the left as it goes downward from the upstream end, and then bends slightly diagonally downward to the right. It is bent at about ⅓ of the left and right width and extends substantially vertically downward toward the center (rotation axis) of the dispensing blade 589. Then, above the center of the payout blade 589, after bending to the right in rear view with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, there is a gap slightly larger than the game ball B between the payout blade 589 and the outer periphery. It extends downward in an arc concentric with the dispensing blade 589 so as to form an arc, and also extends vertically downward to the downstream end at a position to the right of the center of the dispensing blade 589 in rear view.

In the dispensing passage 580a, a dispensing detection sensor 591 is arranged below the dispensing blade 589 and directly above the downstream end.

The ball removal passage 580b extends diagonally downward from the upstream end in the dispensing passage 580a, branches at a part where it bends to the right, and extends perpendicularly to the lower end along the left side in rear view. It opens downward near the left end.

The dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 face each other on the side where the ball extracting movable piece 592 is attached at the part where the dispensing passage 580a and the ball extracting passage 580b diverge, and the outer diameter of the game ball B is The main body side guide wall 581a projects backward and forward from each side so as to form a narrower gap than the main body side guide wall 581a, and is formed to be continuous with the left side wall of the dispensing passage 580a and the ball extraction passage 580b when viewed from the rear. and a rear lid side guide wall 582a. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a branch from the ball extraction passage 580b in the dispensing passage 580a and extend to the right in the rear view at a position about 1/3 of the height from the top. It is formed on the left side. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are curved so as to be depressed diagonally upward to the left when viewed from the rear, and are formed to mainly constitute a side wall of the ball extraction passage 580b. A ball extracting movable piece 592 rotates passing between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

The dispensing motor 584 is attached to the right side of the dispensing device main body 581 in a rear view of a portion where the dispensing passage 580a extends diagonally downward from the upstream end. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the dispensing gear member 588 are arranged in front of the dispensing device main body 581, and the front side is covered by the dispensing device front lid 583. The delivery gear member 588 includes three flat detection pieces 588b that extend outward and are spaced apart at an angle of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction.

The dispensing blade 589 is arranged between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582. The delivery blade 589 includes three blade pieces 589a extending outward in a flat plate shape and spaced apart at an angle of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. The blade piece 589a is arranged so that the space between the wing piece 589a and the side wall of the payout passage is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B at a portion in the payout passage 580a that extends from above toward the rotation axis and then extends to the right in rear view. It protrudes into the dispensing passage 580a. The payout blade 589 is provided with a ball accommodating portion 589b recessed toward the center with an arc having a radius slightly larger than the radius of the game ball B between the three blade pieces 589a. This ball storage portion 589b can accommodate only one game ball B. Thereby, the payout blade 589 can prevent the game ball B in the payout passage 580a from moving downstream from the payout blade 589 by the blade piece 589a, and rotate in the clockwise direction in rear view. As a result, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b can be moved to the downstream side.

The dispensing gear member 588 and the dispensing blade 589 are coaxially attached to the dispensing device rear cover 582 and dispensing device front cover 583 so as to be able to rotate together. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is arranged to the left of the rotation axis of the dispensing gear member 588 when viewed from the rear. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is for detecting the rotation of the dispensing blade 589 by detecting the detection piece 588b of the dispensing gear member 588 that rotates integrally with the dispensing blade 589.

The ball extraction movable piece 592 has an upper end rotatably attached to the upper ends of the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a around an axis extending back and forth. The ball ejecting movable piece 592 is bent in a dogleg shape and is attached so that the recessed side faces into the dispensing passage 580a. The ball extraction movable piece 592 has a depth in the front-rear direction that is smaller than the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It is possible to protrude into the ball removal passage 580b or retreat to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b through the gap between them.

The ball extraction lever 593 is attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction near the upper end of the ball discharging movable piece 592 to the left in rear view. A portion of the ball extraction lever 593 protrudes rearward through the rear lid 582 of the dispensing device, and can be slid by operating the protruding portion. By positioning the ball extraction lever 593 at the lower end, the lower part can come into contact with the ball extraction movable piece 592, and the rotation of the ball extraction movable piece 592 in the clockwise direction in rear view can be restricted. The ball removal passage 580b can be closed by the ball removal movable piece 592. Moreover, by positioning the ball removal lever 593 at the rising end, the ball removal movable piece 592 can be rotated to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b, and the ball removal passage 580b can be opened (see FIG. 89).

When the ball extractor lever 593 is raised to make the ball extractor movable piece 592 rotatable, the game balls B, which were tied together like a string on the upstream side of the ball extractor movable piece 592, are removed from the ball extractor movable piece 592. It will flow down to the ball removal passage 580b side. At this time, since the ball ejecting passage 580b extends in a straight line from the upstream side of the dispensing passage 580a, the game balls B flowing down from the upstream side of the dispensing passage 580a flow straight down to the ball discharging passage 580b side. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball extraction passage 580b communicates with the island equipment side, there is no thing like the payout blade 589 that suppresses the flow of the game balls B, so that the game balls B are closer to the side of the payout passage 580a. It will flow down quickly.

In this way, when the ball extraction movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down inside the ball extraction passage 580b at a high speed, so the ball extraction movable piece 592 protruding into the ball extraction passage 580b The game ball B comes into contact with the lower end side vigorously, but the ball ejecting movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the dispensing device main body 581 and the rear lid side guide wall 582a of the dispensing device rear lid 582. Since the ball extracting movable piece 592 can move outward from the inner surface of the ball extracting passage 580b, the ball extracting movable piece 592 moves to the outside of the ball extracting passage 580b due to the force of contact. It is not pinched between the wall surface of the ejection passage 580b and the game ball B, and strong force can be prevented from being applied to the ball ejecting movable piece 592 by the game ball B, and the ball ejecting movement due to the collision of the game ball B can be prevented. Deterioration in durability and breakage of the piece 592 can be suppressed.

For this reason, since the ball extraction movable piece 592 can be made difficult to damage, more game balls B can be discharged more quickly to the island equipment on the downstream side of the ball extraction passageway 580b, so the pachinko player can It is possible to suppress an increase in time required for replacement and maintenance of the machine 1, and the burden on the game hall side can be reduced.

In addition, when the ball extracting movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball extracting movable piece 592 passes through the ball extracting passage 580b between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, which are narrower than the game ball B. Since the game ball B comes into contact with the ball extraction movable piece 592 protruding into the ball extraction passage 580b, the ball extraction movable piece 592 moves between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a. Even if the game ball B moves to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a together with the ball extraction movable piece 592 when moving outward through the gap, the distance between the game balls B and Only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outward due to the narrow space between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

Since the movement of the game ball B to the outside is prevented between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, the game ball B is separated from the ball extraction movable piece 592, and the subsequent ball Since the movement of the movable ball extracting piece 592 is based on inertia force, strong force does not act on the movable ball extracting piece 592, making it difficult to damage the movable ball extracting piece 592, and also making it possible to prevent the movable ball extracting piece 592 from being damaged. Game balls B do not jump out from between the wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b, and the game balls B can be reliably circulated to the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b.

[4-7c. Upper full bulb path unit]
The upper full bulb path unit 600 in the dispensing unit 560 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 86 and 87. The upper full ball path unit 600 is attached from behind to the lower side of the dispensing device 580 at the lower rear surface of the left back plate 551e of the dispensing base 551 in the dispensing base unit 550. The upper full ball path unit 600 is for guiding the game balls B discharged downward from the payout device 580 to the lower full ball path unit 610. The upper full bulb path unit 600 has a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front.

The upper full bulb path unit 600 includes a box-shaped upper full base 601 that is attached to the dispensing base 551 and has an open rear side, and a box-shaped upper full base 601 that is attached to the rear side of the upper full fill base 601 and has an open front side. , and a dispensing device pressing member 603 that is rotatably attached near the upper end of the upper full tank cover 602 and can press the dispensing device 580 upward. The upper full tank base 601 protrudes to the right from the right side in front view, and includes a back cover attachment portion 601a for attaching a back cover.

Further, the upper full bulb path unit 600 has an upper payout that opens upward near the left end of the upper surface when viewed from the front, and extends downward along the left side from the bottom to a position approximately 2/3 of the total height. It communicates with the ball receiving passage 600a and the upper dispensing ball receiving passage 600a, and extends to the right in front view by about 3/4 of the total width, and extends downward from the bottom to about 1/6 of the total height. An upper ball storage passage 600b, an upper normal dispensing passage 600c extending downward from the left side in front view from the left-right center of the upper sphere storage passage 600b and opening downward on the lower surface; An upper full discharge passage 600d extends downward from the right side in the front view from the left-right center of the ball storage passage 600b and opens downward in the lower surface, and an upper full discharge passage 600d opens upward near the right end in the upper surface in the front view and extends downward substantially vertically. The upper ball removal passage 600e extends downward near the right end of the lower surface and opens downward (see FIG. 91).

On the lower surface of the upper full ball path unit 600, from the left side when viewed from the front, an upper normal delivery passage 600c, an upper full delivery passage 600d, and an upper ball extraction passage 600e are lined up in this order and open downward. When the upper full ball path unit 600 is assembled to the dispensing unit 560, the upstream end of the upper dispensing ball receiving passage 600a opens directly below the downstream end of the dispensing passage 580a in the dispensing device 580, and the upper full ball path unit 600 is assembled into the dispensing unit 560. The upstream end of the passage 600e opens directly below the downstream end of the ball removal passage 580b in the dispensing device 580. As a result, the game balls B discharged (dispensed) from the dispensing passage 580a of the dispensing device 580 pass through the upper dispensing ball receiving passage 600a and the upper sphere storage passage 600b, and then pass through the upper normal dispensing passage 600c or the upper full dispensing passage 600d. is emitted downward from either of the Further, the game balls B discharged downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 are discharged downward through the upper ball extraction passage 600e.

[4-7d. Lower full bulb path unit]
The lower full bulb path unit 610 in the dispensing unit 560 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 86 and 87. The lower full ball path unit 610 is placed on the bottom plate portion 551g of the dispensing base 551 in the dispensing base unit 550, and is attached to the lower part of the upper full ball path unit 600. The lower full ball path unit 610 guides the game balls B released downward from the upper full ball path unit 600 toward the door frame 3 side or toward the board unit 620 side. The lower full bulb path unit 610 extends in the front-rear direction so that its front end is lower, and its rear end extends upward.

The lower full bulb path unit 610 has a lower normal discharge passage 610a, a lower full discharge passage 610b, and a lower bulb removal passage 610c, and has a lower full base that extends in the front-rear direction and is open upward. 611, a lower full tank cover 612 attached to the upper side of the lower full tank base 611, and a lower normal discharge passage 610a and a lower full tank cover 612, which is attached to the front end of the lower full tank base 611 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending back and forth. A dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 that can open and close the downstream end opening of the lower full tank dispensing passage 610b, and a dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 that opens and closes the downstream end openings of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full tank dispensing passage 610b. A closing spring 614 is provided.

In the lower full ball path unit 610, a lower normal discharge passage 610a, a lower full discharge passage 610b, and a lower ball extraction passage 610c are arranged in order from the left in front view on the upper surface of the portion extending upward at the rear end. In this state, each upstream end is open upward. The lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b extend forward in a state in which they are lined up left and right, and open toward the front at the front end of the lower full bulb path unit 610. The lower full tank dispensing passage 610b extends forward in a slightly lower state than the lower normal dispensing passage 610a. The lower bulb removal passage 610c extends forward along the right side surface of the lower full tank discharge passage 610b when viewed from the front, and opens toward the right midway in the front-rear direction.

The dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 is rotatably attached at a position between the front end openings of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full-fill dispensing passage 610b. This dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 is biased clockwise in the front view by a closing spring 614, and in a normal state, the front end opening (downstream end) of each of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full dispensing passage 610b is opening) is closed. The dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 includes an operating protrusion 613a that protrudes forward. The actuating protrusion 613a has a short circular arc shape when viewed from the front, centered on the center of rotation of the dispensing passage opening/closing door 613, and as the front end surface approaches the end side in the counterclockwise direction. It is slanted so that it protrudes forward. The operating protrusion 613a is formed so as to come into contact with the door opening/closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150 on the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4.

When the lower full bulb path unit 610 is assembled to the dispensing unit 560, the lower normal dispensing passage 610a, the lower full bulb dispensing passage 610b, and the lower bulb ejection passage 610c, which open upward at the upper end of the rear part, are connected to the upper full bulb passageway 610, respectively. It is located directly below the downstream ends of the upper normal discharge passage 600c, the upper full discharge passage 600d, and the upper ball extraction passage 600e of the tank ball path unit 600. As a result, the game balls B released downward from the upper normal payout passage 600c flow through the lower normal payout passage 610a, and the game balls B released downward from the upper full payout passage 600d flow through the lower full payout passage 610b. The game ball B released downward from the upper ball ejection passage 600e flows through the lower ball ejection passage 610c.

In addition, when the lower full ball path unit 610 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front ends (downstream ends) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full ball payout passage 610b penetrate the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. It opens immediately after the ball passage 150a and the full ball socket 150b. Further, the downstream end of the lower ball removal passage 610c is open to face the ball removal guide portion 627 of the base unit 620b of the board unit 620, which is open to the left.

In the normal state (the state in which the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4) of the lower full ball path unit 610, the operating protrusion 613a of the dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 comes into contact with the door opening/closing of the foul cover unit 150. By coming into contact with the portion 150f, it rotates counterclockwise in front view against the biasing force of the closing spring 614. As a result, the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b are open, and are in communication with the through ball passage 150a and the full ball socket 150b of the foul cover unit 150. It is in a state.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the operating protrusion 613a of the dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 is separated from the door opening/closing contact part 150f of the foul cover unit 150, so that the dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 is rotated clockwise in front view by the biasing force of the closing spring 614, and the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b are closed. In this state, the game balls B in the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b cannot move forward from their respective front end openings. Thereby, even if the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the game balls B will not spill out from the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b.

[4-7e. Flow of game balls B in the payout unit]
Next, the flow of game balls B in the payout unit 560 will be explained in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 91. FIG. 91 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls in the main body frame. The dispensing unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the dispensing base 551 when assembled to the main body frame 4. In a normal state, the ball ejecting lever 593 of the dispensing device 580 is located at the lower end, and the ball ejecting passage 580b branching from the dispensing passage 580a is closed at the branching portion. Further, in the lower full bulb path unit 610, the payout passage opening/closing door 613 is in an open state.

A ball tank 552 opened upward is filled with a predetermined number of balls from the game hall island equipment in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, based on the detection of ball breakage by the ball breakage detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570. Game balls B are supplied. The game balls B supplied and stored in the ball tank 552 are sent into the payout path 580a of the payout device 580 through the guide path 570a of the ball guide unit 570 in a state where they are aligned in a line by the tank rail 553. When the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the game balls B cannot move (flow down) to the downstream side of the payout blade 589, and a plurality of game balls B remain upstream of the payout blade 589. becomes.

Then, the game ball B in the guide passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 presses the movable piece member 573, and the ball cut detection sensor 574 detects the movable piece member 573. This shows that the game balls B are stored at least in the passage between the movable piece member 573 and the payout blade 589.

In this state, when the dispensing motor 584 rotates the dispensing blade 589 clockwise in the rear view, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b moves clockwise in the rear view, and the dispensing blade in the dispensing passage 580a moves. 589 is released downstream. Then, the game balls B released from the payout blade 589 (ball storage portion 589b) are sent to the upper paid ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball path unit 600 after being detected by the payout detection sensor 591.

In a normal state, the game balls B sent to the upper paid ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball path unit 600 pass through the upper ball storage passage 600b and are placed directly below the upper paid ball receiving passage 600a. It flows down to the upper normal dispensing passage 600c. Then, the game balls B flowing down to the upper normal payout passage 600c pass through the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610, the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3, and then pass through the tray unit 200. The ball is discharged into the upper tray 201 from the upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit base 211 at.

When many game balls B are put out from the payout device 580 and the inside of the upper tray 201 becomes full of game balls B, it becomes impossible to release the game balls B forward from the upper tray ball supply port 211a, so the payout device The game balls B put out from 580 come to stay in the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610, and when the game balls B are paid out further, there is a gap between the lower normal payout passage 610a and the upstream side. It also stays in the upper normal discharge passage 600c of the upper full bulb path unit 600 which is in communication with it. Then, when the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with game balls B, when more game balls B are paid out, the upper ball storage passage 600b communicating with the upper normal payout passage 600c on the upstream side is filled with game balls B. As the game balls B begin to accumulate, the game balls B begin to flow down toward the upper full payout passage 600d adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c.

Then, the game balls B flowing down to the upper full-ball payout passage 600d side pass through the lower full-ball payout passage 610b of the lower full-ball route unit 610, and then pass through the full-ball socket 150b in the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3. can be accepted. Thereafter, the game balls B received in the full ball socket 150b are discharged into the lower tray 202 through the storage passage 150e, the ball discharge port 150d, and the lower tray ball supply port 211c of the tray unit base 211. Thereby, when the upper tray 201 is filled with game balls B and more game balls B are paid out, the game balls B can be automatically paid out to the lower tray 202.

Note that when the lower tray 202 is full of game balls B and it is no longer possible to eject the game balls B forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c, if more game balls B are paid out, the lower tray The game balls B stay and are stored in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 on the upstream side of the ball supply port 211c. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 moves and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154, and the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 are filled with game balls B ( In addition to informing the player that the tank is full (for example, "Please remove the ball!"), the system also controls the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 when the full tank detection sensor 154 is not detecting it. Temporarily stop it until the

When ejecting the game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 from the pachinko machine 1 during maintenance or replacement of the pachinko machine 1, move the ball removal lever 593 of the payout device 580 upward from the lower end position. Slide it to the rising end position. After that, the lower end side of the ball extracting movable piece 592 is pushed by the game ball B and rotates clockwise in rear view, and the ball extracting movable piece 592 moves between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. The ball passes through the gap and is pushed out to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b. As a result, the game ball B can enter the ball removal path 580b branched from the payout path 580a, and the game ball B on the upstream side is discharged downward through the ball removal path 580b.

At this time, at the part of the ball extracting movable piece 592, since the game ball B flowing down contacts the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a more strongly than the ball extracting movable piece 592, the ball extracting movable piece 592 is less likely to be damaged.

The game balls B discharged downward from the ball ejection passage 580b of the payout device 580 pass through the upper ball ejection passage 600e of the upper full ball path unit 600 and the lower ball ejection path 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610. After passing through the downstream end opening of the lower ball ejection passage 610c and ejected to the ball ejection guide part 627 of the board unit 620, it passes through the ejected ball receiving part 628 and the ball ejection port 629 to the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1 (gaming hall is discharged to the island equipment side).

[4-8. Board unit]
The board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 92 to 96 and the like. FIG. 92(a) is a perspective view of the board unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 92(b) is a perspective view of the board unit as seen from the back. FIG. 93 is a perspective view of the board unit viewed from below. FIG. 94 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front, and FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit exploded into its main components and viewed from the back. FIG. 96 is an enlarged side cross-sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. The board unit 620 is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board mounting part 501c, and a main body frame so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear. A base unit 620b attached to the rear side of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b, a dispensing control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a dispensing control unit 620d. An interface unit 620e is attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover the speaker unit 620a from the rear.

The speaker unit 620a includes a speaker cover 621 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board mounting part 501c, and a speaker cover 621 that faces forward near the left end of the rear surface of the speaker cover 621 when viewed from the front. The main body frame speaker 622 is attached to the main body frame speaker 622, and the container-shaped speaker box 623 is attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 and is open to the front. .

The speaker cover 621 extends in the left-right direction, and includes a circular speaker mounting portion 621a formed of a plurality of slits extending vertically and penetrating back and forth near the left end when viewed from the front, and a front surface of the speaker mounting portion 621a. A front space recess 621b is recessed so as to bulge from the rear to the front on the right side when viewed, and a front space recess 621b protrudes downward from the lower surface of the space front recess 621b and extends in the left and right direction diagonally downward and backward. The connecting portion 621c is open.

The main body frame speaker 622 is attached to the speaker attachment portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 from the rear side toward the front. Furthermore, the connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees so that its lower end coincides with the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a of the rear curtain member 43 in the lower outer frame assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. . The main body frame speaker 622 is a cone-shaped speaker that mainly outputs bass sounds.

The speaker box 623 is formed in the shape of a container that is open to the front, and the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 protrudes most rearward, and as it goes to the right in front view, it extends rearward in a step-like manner. It is formed so that the protrusion is small. This makes it possible to secure a sufficient rear space on the right side of the center of the speaker box 623 when viewed from the front, in which the base unit 620b, power supply unit 620c, etc. can be placed. The speaker box 623 is formed to cover (close) the entire rear surface of the speaker cover 621 except for the connecting portion 621c.

The speaker unit 620a forms part of an enclosure 624 that includes a speaker cover 621 and a speaker box 623 to contain the sound output rearward from the main body frame speaker 622. This enclosure 624 has a space front recess 621b formed in the speaker cover 621 to the right of the speaker mounting portion 621a when viewed from the front, and therefore protrudes rearward as the speaker box 623 moves to the right. Even if the space is formed in a step-like manner to reduce the amount, a sufficiently large space is secured to the right of the main body frame speaker 622.

In the speaker unit 620a, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is connected to the connecting cylinder portion 43a with the sealing member 48 sandwiched therebetween, and the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 The space is in communication with the curtain plate interior space 40a of the outer frame 2. Therefore, an enclosure 624 with a wide space can be formed behind the main body frame speaker 622 by the speaker cover 621 , the speaker box 623 , the front curtain member 42 , and the rear curtain member 43 . The sound output to can be output (radiated) forward from the opening 42a of the curtain front member 42.

Specifically, as described above, in the speaker unit 620a, the space behind the main body frame speaker 622 (a part of the enclosure 624) is extended to the right side in front view with a relatively wide depth, and the connecting portion 621c and Since it is communicated with the outer frame lower assembly 40 side via the connecting tube part 43a, the sound output from the main body frame speaker 622 to the rear can be directly connected to the outer frame lower assembly 40 without attenuating the bass range in particular. In addition, the transmitted low frequency range can be resonated and amplified by passing through the two port members 47, and can be radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain front member 42.

At this time, the sound radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain front member 42 is radiated with its phase inverted, so that it is output from the front of the main body frame speaker 622 and is emitted from the dish unit. The sound emitted from the speaker port 211b of the main body frame speaker 622 resonates to be amplified, and even if the diameter of the main body frame speaker 622 is small, it is possible to output a large sound with deep bass.

That is, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, so that the player can hear deep bass sounds. As a result, the sound output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the speaker port 211b of the dish unit 200 and the sound output from the rear surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2. This allows the player to hear a sound with rich bass.

In addition, the speaker unit 620a has a through hole 621d formed in the speaker cover 621, which penetrates in the front-rear direction at a position between the lower part of the speaker mounting portion 621a and the space front recess 621b, and the speaker box 623. A through tube 623a that communicates with the through hole 621d, extends in a cylindrical shape, and penetrates back and forth is formed. When assembled into the speaker unit 620a, the through hole 621d and the through tube 623a communicate with each other and are independent from the enclosure 624. The connection cable 503 is inserted through the through hole 621d and the through tube 623a.

The base unit 620b of the board unit 620 includes a front base 625 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the front base 625. 620c is attached to the rear base 626.

In addition, the base unit 620b is formed by a front base 625 and a rear base 626 in cooperation with each other, and receives the game ball B released from the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610. A ball removal guide part 627 that guides the ball to the right, and a discharged ball receiving part that opens upward in the right side in front view on the downstream side of the ball removal guide part 627 and receives the game balls B discharged downward from the game board 5. 628, and a ball discharge port 629 for discharging the game balls B that have passed through the ball extraction guiding part 627 and the discharged ball receiving part 628 downward.

The upstream end of the ball removal guide section 627 opens toward the left in the upper part of the left side surface when viewed from the front, and the downstream end opens toward the left end side of the discharged ball receiving section 628. When assembled to the main body frame 4, the ball eject guide part 627 faces so that the opening at the upstream end coincides with the downstream end opening of the lower ball ejecting passage 610c of the lower full bulb path unit 610. The game ball B released from the ball removal passage 610c can be received and guided to the ejected ball receiving section 628.

The discharge ball receiving portion 628 is open upward and extends long from side to side. The bottom surface of the ejected ball receiving section 628 has a left end in front view that is continuous with the bottom surface of the ball ejecting guide section 627, and is inclined to become lower toward the right.

The base unit 620b guides the game balls B pulled out from the ball tank 552 and the game balls B discharged from the game board 5 to the right side in front view by the ball extraction guiding section 627 and the discharged ball receiving section 628, and then Since the liquid is discharged downward from the discharge port 629, it is possible to easily secure a large space on the left side of the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. As a result, the space of the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a can be made larger, allowing the player to hear sound with richer bass than in conventional pachinko machines.

The power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 includes a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620b, and a power supply board cover attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover the rear side of the power supply board 630. 631.

The payout control unit 620d includes a box-shaped payout control board box 632 that is removably attached to the rear side of the power board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control board 633 (see FIG. 96). The payout control board 633 controls the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to a press operation of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the tray unit 200 or a payout command from the main control board 1310 of the game board 5, etc. This is to control and pay out a designated number of game balls B to the player (upper tray 201 or lower tray 202). The payout control board box 632 is formed so that traces of opening and closing remain. This makes it possible to detect unauthorized modifications to the payout control board 633, thereby increasing deterrence against fraudulent acts.

The interface unit 620e includes a substrate base 634 attached to the rear side of the speaker box 623 in the speaker unit 620a, an interface substrate 635 attached to the rear surface of the substrate base 634, and a substrate so as to cover the rear side of the interface substrate 635. an interface board cover 636 attached to a board base 634.

The board base 634 is attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 623 at a portion that protrudes most rearward, behind the main body frame speaker 622. The interface board 635 is connected to one end (the main body frame 4 side) of the connection cable 503. The interface board 635 is connected to a power supply board 630, a payout control board 633, a main control board 1310, a peripheral control board 1510, etc., and is also connected to a CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface board cover 636 extends to the right in front view from the board base 634 (interface board 635) so as to cover a part of the payout control unit 620d.

[4-9. Back cover]
The back cover 640 of the main body frame 4 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 75 to 81. The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 that is inserted from the front into the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 and attached. The right side of the back cover 640 when viewed from the front is rotatably attached to the vertically extending rear end of the rear extending portion 501j of the main body frame base 501, and the left side is attached to the dispensing base 551. and the back cover attachment portion 601a of the upper full bulb path unit 600.

The back cover 640 is formed in the shape of a flat plate extending vertically and horizontally, with the right side in front view bent forward, and when assembled on the main body frame 4, the rear surface is aligned with the upper back plate 551d of the dispensing base 551. It is formed so as to be located substantially on the same plane as the rear surface. The back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641 passing through it from front to back and extending vertically. In this embodiment, the back cover 640 is made of transparent synthetic resin, and allows the inside of the main body frame 4 to be visually recognized from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

[4-10. Locking unit]
The locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 97. FIG. 97(a) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 97(b) is a perspective view of the locking unit as seen from the back. The locking unit 650 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 and locks between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3, and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2.

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the right side of the rear extension 501j of the main body frame base 501 and extending vertically, and a plurality of locking units that protrude forward from the unit base 651 and can be locked with the door frame 3. A door frame hook 652, a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 that protrude rearward from the unit base 651 and can be locked with the outer frame 2, and a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 that protrude forward from the lower part of the front end of the unit base 651 and can be attached to the door frame depending on the rotation direction. It is provided with a transmission cylinder 654 that moves the hook 652 or the hook 653 for the outer frame in the vertical direction.

The locking unit 650 also includes a lock spring 655 that urges the door frame hook 652 downward and an outer frame hook 653 upward, and a transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651. It is provided with an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that projects forward from an upper position and moves the outer frame hook 653 downward by sliding downward.

When the locking unit 650 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the plurality (three) door frame hooks 652, transmission cylinder 654, and outer frame unlocking lever 656 are moved forward from the front of the main body frame base 501. It stands out. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion opening 501f of the main body frame base 501, and by closing the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, the front end of the transmission cylinder 654 controls the rotation of the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3. It engages with the transmission member 133 and rotates as the rotation of the key inserted into the keyhole 132 is transmitted.

In the locking unit 650, a plurality (three) of door frame hooks 652 are latched to the hook members 116 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and a plurality (two) of the outside A frame hook 653 is engaged with the upper hook member 24 and lower hook member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 in the outer frame 2 .

When the locking unit 650 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 and a corresponding key is inserted into the keyhole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 and rotated in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, a plurality of The door frame hook 652 moves upward, and the door frame 3 is unlocked from the main body frame 4. On the other hand, when the key is rotated clockwise in front view, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward via the transmission cylinder 654, and the main body frame 4 is unlocked with respect to the outer frame 2. When the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, when the outer frame unlocking lever 656 is slid downward, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward, and the main body frame is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. 4 is unlocked. In this way, the lock between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 can be unlocked.

When locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the tip sides of the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 are sloped so as to be tapered. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed to the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 are attached to the hook member 116 and the upper hook member. 24 and the lower hooking member 25, the locking state is achieved by the biasing force of the locking spring 655.

[4-11. Detailed configuration of the upper part of the main body frame]
Next, the detailed structure of the upper part of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 98 to 105. FIG. 98(a) is a plan view of the main body frame, and FIG. 98(b) is a sectional view taken along the line BB in FIG. 98(a). FIG. 99 is an enlarged view showing the upper part of a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from behind. FIG. 100(a) is a perspective view of the ball tank with tank rails and the like assembled as seen from the front top, and FIG. 100(b) is a perspective view of FIG. 100(a) seen from the front bottom. FIG. 101 is an exploded front perspective view of FIG. 100(a). FIG. 102 is an explanatory diagram showing an area where game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame circulate. FIG. 103 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 104 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls to the detour path in the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 105 is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of the tank rail in a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from behind on the hinge side.

As described above, the main body frame 4 has a rear portion that can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2, and can be attached to and removed from the outer frame 2 by the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520. A frame-shaped body frame base 501 that is rotatably attached and capable of supporting the outer periphery of the game board 5; A dispensing base 551, a ball tank 552 that is attached to the dispensing base 551 and has a box shape (container shape) extending left and right and is open upward; and a ball tank 552 that is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and is open upward. A tank rail 553 extending leftward in a groove shape, a first rail cover 554 attached to a part of the upper end of the tank rail 553, and a tank rail spaced apart from the first rail cover 554 to the left in front view. a second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553; a ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555; a ball stopping member 557 attached to the downstream end of the ball stopper 557; a dispensing device 580 attached to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 behind the dispensing base 551 for dispensing the game ball B to the player; It is equipped with

The spherical tank 552 has a bottom wall 552a, which is formed in a rectangular shape extending in the left-right direction when viewed from above, and which is inclined so that the left side is lower when viewed from the front, and from the front and rear sides of the bottom wall 552a, respectively. It has a front wall 552b and a rear wall 552c extending upward, and a left wall 552d and a right side wall 552e extending upward from both left and right sides of the bottom wall 552a, respectively, and is formed into a container shape with an open upper side. has been done. The ball tank 552 stores game balls B supplied from an island facility such as a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Moreover, the spherical tank 552 has an overflow part 552f cut out from above in the front wall 552b and formed lower than the remaining upper edge of the outer periphery. This overflow part 552f has a length of approximately 3/4 of the length of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction from the end of the left wall 552d to the opposite end (the right wall 552e side) of the front wall 552b. It is formed over a period of time.

When viewed from the front, the right end side (upstream side) of the tank rail 553 communicates with the inside of the spherical tank 552, and the downstream side extends to one side in the left-right direction (left side) so as to move away from the spherical tank 552. . The tank rail 553 has a gutter-shaped main guiding portion 553a that extends from the vicinity of the upstream to the downstream end at the bottom and is formed in a width direction perpendicular to the distribution direction of the game balls B so that only one game ball B can flow therethrough. have. The main guide portion 553a is inclined so that it becomes lower toward the left when viewed from the front. In addition, in plan view, the main guide portion 553a extends from the right end to a position approximately 1/10 of the total length in the left and right direction parallel to the axis extending in the left and right direction from the right end side, and then extends to the left. It is formed in the shape of a crank, extending diagonally from the right end to a position approximately 4/10 of the total length in the left-right direction so as to move backward as the direction advances, and from there extending parallel to the axis extending in the left-right direction to the left end. . In the tank rail 553, in the main guide portion 553a, a portion extending parallel to the axis extending in the left-right direction from the left end to the right extends to the upper end with the same width, and a first rail is attached to the upper end of this portion. The upper side is closed by attaching the cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556. In addition, the tank rail 553 is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows becomes lower toward the downstream end (left end) in the part where the upper side is closed, and at the downstream end, the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows is lowered toward the downstream end (left end). The ball is formed at a height (slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball B) that allows only one ball to flow through the ball.

Further, the tank rail 553 extends from the upstream end above the main guide portion 553a to the part where the upper side is closed, and is arranged so that a plurality of game balls B are lined up in the width direction perpendicular to the distribution direction of the game balls B. It has a bulging part 553b which bulges out wider than the width of the guide part 553a and which becomes narrower in the width direction from the upstream end toward the downstream side so as to match the width of the main guide part 553a. There is. By this bulging portion 553b, the plurality of game balls B, which are spread out in the width direction on the upstream side, can be aligned so that the width in the width direction becomes the width of one game ball B as you go downstream. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed so as to become narrower in the width direction from the upper end toward the lower main guide portion 553a. For this reason, the tank rail 553 can align the plurality of game balls B flowing through the bulging portion 553b in a line in the width direction toward the downstream side and the lower side.

The bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 has a center of curvature located on the inside, and is formed into a three-dimensionally curved shape. The center of the curved curvature of the bulging portion 553b is located above the main guiding portion 553a, so in the tank rail 553, there is a slight curve at the border between the main guiding portion 553a and the bulging portion 553b. Chamfered corners are formed. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed to have a larger curvature on the downstream side than on the upstream side. For this reason, in the game ball B flowing through the three-dimensionally curved bulge 553b, the direction in which the reaction force from the bulge 553b is applied depends on the position of the bulge 553b that comes into contact with it. This results in changes in various directions, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clumping within the bulged portion 553b. To be more specific, when the bulging part 553b is formed in a shape that extends uniformly, a reaction force always acts on the game ball B circulating inside the bulging part 553b from the inner surface of the bulging part 553b in a constant direction. As a result, the reaction force becomes difficult to disperse, and the game balls B inside are always pushed in a certain direction, making it difficult for the game balls B to escape, and ball jamming (ball jamming) is likely to occur. On the other hand, since the bulging part 553b is a three-dimensional curved surface, the direction of the reaction force acting from the inner surface of the bulging part 553b differs depending on the position of the game ball B, so that the inside can be circulated. By dispersing the directions in which the plurality of game balls B are pushed, it is possible to make it easier for the pushed game balls B to escape, and it is possible to make ball jamming (ball jamming) less likely to occur.

Further, the tank rail 553 is made of a transparent material and is configured so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside. As a result, even if balls become jammed (balls jammed) inside the tank rail 553, the state of the game balls B inside the tank rail 553 can be seen from the outside, so the location where the balls are jammed can be quickly identified. can do. Therefore, the ball jam in the tank rail 553 can be quickly cleared, so the interruption of the game due to the occurrence of the ball jam can be shortened as much as possible, and the player's interest in the game due to the interruption of the game can be reduced. The decrease can be suppressed. In addition, since the tank rail 553 is transparent, the rear side (back unit 3000) of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 can be seen from the rear through the tank rail 553. When a malfunction occurs in the movable performance unit, etc., the status of the transmission mechanism such as the drive motor, gear, belt, etc. can be checked while the game board 5 remains attached to the main body frame 4, and the same as above. It is possible to achieve the following effects.

The main body frame 4 is provided on the front side of the spherical tank 552, extends in the front-rear direction, and has the same side (left side in front view) as the downstream side of the tank rail 553 in the left-right direction outside the left side wall 552d of the spherical tank 552. In order to return the game balls B overflowing forward from the ball tank 552 to the ball tank 552, it is inclined so that the rear end side is at the same height as the overflow part 552f and the front end side is higher. The overflow surface portion 501m extends rearward from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 at the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m to above the bulge portion 553b whose upper side is open in the tank rail 553, and the rear end side is low. The part of the game balls B that overflowed from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface 501m is inclined so that the side (left side) that is farther from the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction is lower. A detour passage 552g for guiding.

Further, the main body frame 4 is provided on the side opposite to the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 among both the left and right outer sides of the detour passage 552g, and the space in the left and right direction is wider than the outer diameter of the game ball B, and the bottom surface A discharge part 551j whose height is lower than the upper open part of the tank rail 553, and a discharge part 551j located at a position lower than the overflow surface part 501m on the opposite side of the detour passage 552g with the discharge part 551j in between. It covers an external terminal board 558 having a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring can be connected from the rear, and the upper side of the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a (external terminal board 558), and the upper surface is covered with overflow. The terminal cover 551k extends horizontally at a position higher than the surface portion 501m.

The overflow surface portion 501m is formed on the main body frame base 501. The overflow surface portion 501m is shaped like a flat plate extending rearward from a position 2 to 4 times the outer diameter of the game ball B from the upper side of the rear surface of the base body 501a, which is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. It has extended to The overflow surface portion 501m has a length in the left-right direction that is approximately 1/3 of the length in the left-right direction of the main body frame base 501, and its left end when viewed from the front is from the left end of the main body frame base 501. It is located to the right of 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed so that the height from the front end to the rear end is approximately 1/2 of the outer diameter of the game ball B. A gap approximately twice the outer diameter of the game ball B is formed between the overflow surface portion 501m and the outer frame upper member 30 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. .

The main body frame base 501 is arranged on both left and right sides of the overflow surface section 501m, and has a flat left step section 501n and a right step section 501o that extend substantially horizontally at the same height as the front end of the overflow surface section 501m. The upper ends of the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o are higher than the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o on both sides in the left and right direction, and extend in the front and rear direction like a strip, so that the outer side of the game ball B in the left and right direction is higher than the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o. It has a plurality of ribs 501p arranged in a row at intervals narrower than the diameter. The left step portion 501n is formed so that its length in the left-right direction is shorter than its length in the front-back direction. Further, the left step portion 501n is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so that the right corner of the rear end is slightly lower when viewed from the front. The right step portion 501o is formed to have a longer length in the left-right direction than in the front-back direction. Further, the right step portion 501o is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so that the left corner of the rear end is slightly lower when viewed from the front.

The plurality of ribs 501p of the main body frame base 501 are formed higher than the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 The gap between them is formed at a height that is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B.

When the body frame base 501 is assembled to the body frame 4, when viewed from the front, the right end of the overflow surface portion 501m matches the right end of the overflow portion 552f in the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction, and the overflow surface portion 501m The left end of the right step portion 501o matches the left end of the detour passage 552g in the left-right direction, and the right end of the right step portion 501o matches the right side wall 552e of the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction.

The detour passage 552g is formed integrally with the ball tank 552. In addition, below, the container-shaped area|region surrounded by the bottom wall 552a, the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, the left side wall 552d, and the right side wall 552e is also simply called the spherical tank 552. The detour passage 552g extends leftward from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 in a flat plate shape, and has a passage surface 552h that is inclined so that its front end is at the same height as the overflow part 552f and its rear end is lower. and a weir portion extending upward from the end of the passage surface 552h opposite to the left side wall 552d to the same height as the left side wall 552d. The rear end side of the passage surface 552h of the detour passage 552g extends rearward to the same position as the rear wall 552c of the ball tank 552 on the left end side (weir section 552i side) when viewed from the front; It extends diagonally so as to move forward as it goes towards the right end. Note that the passage surface 552h of the detour passage 552g may be inclined horizontally in the left-right direction.

When the detour passage 552g is assembled to the main body frame 4, the rear end of the detour path 552g is aligned with the front end side of a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends in the left-right direction in a crank shape. It is extending. That is, the rear end of the detour passage 552g extends diagonally with respect to the left-right direction. As a result, the game ball B guided rearward by the detour path 552g changes from the oblique rear end so that its distribution direction becomes perpendicular to the oblique rear end. The diagonally extending rear end of the detour passage 552g extends substantially parallel to the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 (the direction of flow of game balls B within the tank rail 553). Therefore, from the rear end of the detour passage 552g, the game ball B is released in a direction substantially perpendicular to the flow direction (width direction) of the tank rail 553. You can receive the game ball B from. In addition, since the game balls B are supplied from the detour path 552g into the tank rail 553 in a direction substantially perpendicular (perpendicular direction) to the distribution direction of the game balls B, the game balls B from the detour path 552g are fed into the tank rail 553. It is possible to make it difficult for balls to become clogged in the 553.

The detour path 552g extends obliquely to the left and right direction so that the rear end moves backward as it goes downstream of the tank rail 553, so the game ball B moves from the detour path 552g to the tank rail 553 side. When released, the diagonally extending rear end allows the game ball B to be released toward the upstream side where the width of the tank rail 553 is wider than the downstream side where the width of the tank rail 553 is narrower. By discharging to a wide area, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clumps inside the tank rail 553.

Further, the portion where the game ball B is guided by the detour path 552g corresponds to the outside of the rear part of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 and the left side of the rear wall 552c in the front view in the tank rail 553. Game balls B that have passed from inside the ball tank 552 through the lower side of the guide surface 552j of the ball tank 552 (on the ceiling side of the opening 552k) flow into this region. For this reason, in the part of the tank rail 553 that is behind the detour passage 552g, the height of the plurality of game balls B stacked in the vertical direction is the height of the ceiling of the opening 552k (the height of the wall of the tank rail 553). (height) cannot be exceeded. Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the detour passage 552g, it is possible to secure a space (empty) in which the game balls B can be stacked upward, so that the detour passage 552g The game ball B guided rearward can be reliably received at the tank rail 553, and the game ball B will not spill backward from the tank rail 553.

The spherical tank 552 has a flat plate shape extending lower to the right from a position slightly lower than the overflow part 552f on the left side wall 552d on the inside surrounded by the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, and the left side wall 552d. It has a guide surface portion 552j. The guide surface portion 552j extends in the front-rear direction from the front wall 552b to the rear wall 552c. In addition, when viewed from the front, the right end of the guide surface portion 552j extends from the left end of the front wall 552b to a position approximately 1/3 of the total length of the front wall 552b in the left and right direction, and from the left end of the front wall 552b to the left end of the front wall 552b in the left and right direction. After extending diagonally rearward from the front wall 552b to a position approximately 1/2 of the total length in the front-rear direction of the left side wall 552d at about 1/9 of the total length, it extends parallel to the left side wall 552d to the vicinity of the rear wall 552c, From there, it is formed in a shape extending parallel to the rear wall 552c with a constant width in the front-rear direction from the left end of the rear wall 552c to a position about 1/3 of the total length of the rear wall 552c in the left-right direction.

In the spherical tank 552, in a plan view, there is a straight line connecting the right end side of the guide surface portion 552j formed in the above shape, the end of the right end side on the front wall 552b side, and the end on the rear wall 552c side. The region surrounded by has an opening 552k formed to penetrate in the vertical direction. Further, the ball tank 552 has flat flanges extending outward in the left-right direction and in the vertical direction on the same plane as the front wall 552b, respectively, on the front end side of the right side wall 552e and the front end side of the weir part 552i of the detour passage 552g. It has a section 552l. In the ball tank 552, the height of the upper edge of the front wall 552b excluding the overflow part 552f and the upper edge of the two flange parts 552l is the same as that of the upper edge of the left side wall 552d and the rear wall 552c (main body frame base 501). The upper surface of the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o) is formed higher than the upper surface of the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o.

When the ball tank 552 and tank rail 553 are assembled together, the upstream end (right end in front view) of the tank rail 553 is connected to the opening 552k of the ball tank 552. In addition, the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 that extends in the left-right direction in a crank shape and the portion extending straight in the left-right direction on the left side of the tank rail 553 are located rearward (protruding) from the spherical tank 552. )are doing. The rear end side of the left side detour passage 552g of the left side wall 552d of the spherical tank 552 is located at the front end of the obliquely extending portion of the tank rail 553, which extends in the left-right direction in a crank shape.

The ejecting section 551j is formed on the upper surface of the dispensing base 551. When the discharge part 551j is assembled to the main body frame 4, the discharge part 551j is installed in the spherical tank 552 so that it becomes lower in a stepwise manner toward the rear from a height lower than the detour passage 552g to the same height as the bottom wall 552a of the spherical tank 552. It extends rearward from the rear side of the flange portion 552l on the left side in front view to the tank rail 553, and then moves leftward along the tank rail 553 to a position higher than the upper end of the tank rail 553 (the center of the second rail cover 555 in the left-right direction). It extends to a nearby position) and then extends towards the rear.

The external terminal board 558 has a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a attached to the rear surface thereof arranged in the left-right direction. This electric wire connection terminal 558a is a one-touch terminal whose grip part opens by operating a lever and can grip the tip of the electric wire. The external terminal board 558 is disposed in front of a portion of the tank rail 553 whose upper side is closed by the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 when assembled to the main body frame 4. . A terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal board 558 (the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a) is formed on the upper surface of the dispensing base 551. The upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is formed at approximately the same height as the upper end of the flange portion 552l of the ball tank 552.

Next, the effects of the upper part of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be explained. First, the overflow surface portion 501m, the left step portion 501n, the right step portion 501o, and the detour passage 552g are arranged such that the rear end side of the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g are lower, as shown by the white arrows in FIG. The left step portion 501n is inclined so that the right corner of the rear end is lower, and the right step portion 501o is inclined so that the left corner of the rear end is lower. Further, the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 (main guide portion 553a) are each inclined such that the left end side thereof is lower when viewed from the front. Further, the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the right end side in the direction opposite to the bottom wall 552a is lower.

When the amount of game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 increases by being supplied from the island equipment, they first cross the overflow part 552f, which is the lowest in the upper edge of the outer periphery. The game balls B overflowing from the ball tank 552 can be allowed to flow out to the outside (front) of the ball tank 552, and the game balls B overflowing from the ball tank 552 can be released to the overflow surface section 501m, and the game balls B can be caused to flow out from the ball tank 552 to the front overflow surface section 501m. The game balls B can be returned into the ball tank 552 by the slope of the overflow surface portion 501m (see FIG. 103). Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the number of game balls B from increasing further in the ball tank 552, it is possible to suppress the game balls B from strongly pressing against each other (increase in ball pressure) within the ball tank 552. It is possible to prevent clogging (so-called ball jamming) caused by the game balls B interlocking with each other in the ball tank 552.

Moreover, since the detour passage 552g is provided, as shown in FIG. 104, the game balls B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the detour passage 552g. As a result, it is possible to avoid a strong backward pressing force being applied to the game balls B in the ball tank 552 due to the game balls B accumulated on the overflow surface portion 501m, and the game balls B in the ball tank 552 are prevented from clogging. can be prevented. In addition, since the game balls B can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the detour passage 552g, the game balls B overflowing from the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface 501m are prevented from spilling to the outside (rear side) of the main body frame 4. It can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a problem in which the game ball B spilled outside the main body frame 4 is caught between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 and the main body frame 4 cannot be opened or closed.

Furthermore, a part of the game balls B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface 501m can be guided to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 by the detour passage 552g, and along the left side that is away from the ball tank 552. Since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 from a certain position, the flow (pressure) due to the game ball B sent to the tank rail 553 by the detour passage 552g can be directed to the downstream side of the tank rail 553. , it is possible to suppress the game balls B from being strongly pressed against each other in the tank rail 553 and prevent the game balls B from becoming jammed.

In addition, since the height of the remaining upper edge of the outer circumference of the ball tank 552 other than the overflow part 552f is higher than the overflow part 552f, the ball between the ball tank 552 and the detour passage 552g is The upper end edge of the left wall 552d on one side in the left-right direction of the tank 552 is higher than the rear end of the overflow portion 552f, that is, the overflow surface portion 501m. As a result, the game balls B that have overflowed from the ball tank 552 over the overflow part 552f to the overflow surface part 501m and are flowing from the overflow surface part 501m to the detour passage 552g are on the left side of one side of the ball tank 552. By being blocked by the wall 552d, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from returning from the detour path 552g to the ball tank 552 side, and the game ball B on the detour path 552g side presses the game ball B in the ball tank 552 and the ball It is possible to prevent the game balls B from clogging in the tank 552.

Furthermore, as described above, the upper edge of the left side wall 552d between the ball tank 552 and the detour passage 552g is closer to the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m (the passage surface 552h on which the game ball B rolls in the detour passage 552g). Since the ball is also high, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the bypass passage 552g without passing through the overflow surface portion 501m. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from flowing in from the side (ball tank 552) into the detour passage 552g, so that the flow of the game balls B in the detour passage 552g is controlled from the overflow surface portion 501m on the front end side to the rear. The flow can be made in a fixed direction toward the tank rail 553 on the end side, and the pressure of the game ball B guided from the detour passage 552g to the tank rail 553 can be made to be in a fixed direction. Therefore, within the tank rail 553, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from being pressed against each other and jammed together due to the pressure applied to the game balls B being dispersed, and the occurrence of clogging of the game balls B. It can be prevented.

In addition, since the bottom of the tank rail 553 is provided with a main guide part 553a that extends to the downstream end, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 reach the main guide part 553a and are aligned in the left and right direction. Since they are lined up, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be aligned, and the game balls B can be reliably guided to the payout device 580 on the downstream side. In addition, since the tank rail 553 is provided with a wide bulge 553b in which a plurality of game balls B can be lined up in the part where the upper side is open, the game balls released from the rear end of the detour passage 552g The ball B can be reliably received, and the above-mentioned effects can be reliably achieved.

In addition, the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 is made to extend from the upstream end to the part where the upper side is closed, and the width direction becomes narrower from the upstream end toward the downstream side to match the width of the main guide portion 553a. Since the game balls B are changed so as to match, the plurality of game balls B can be aligned in a line in the width direction as they move toward the downstream side within the bulge portion 553b. In addition, since the part of the tank rail 553 whose upper side is closed is formed so that the height of the channel through which the game ball B flows decreases toward the downstream end, the upstream side (ball tank 552 side) By circulating the plurality of game balls B stacked in multiple stages in the height direction downstream through the part of the tank rail 553 whose upper side is closed, the number of stages in the height direction is reduced and the game balls B are stacked in multiple stages in the height direction. can be aligned. Therefore, the tank rail 553 can guide the plurality of game balls B to the downstream side (toward the payout device 580 side) in a state where they are aligned in a line.

Furthermore, since it is provided with the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g, it is possible to store a certain number of game balls B therein, and the tank rail 553 is provided with a bulging portion 553b. Therefore, since the volume inside the tank rail 553 can be increased, more game balls B can be stored together with the ball tank 552.

Further, on the opposite side of the bulb tank 552 with the detour passage 552g and the discharge part 551j in between, there is an external terminal board 558 equipped with a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring is connected, and a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a ( Since the terminal cover 551k covers the upper side of the external terminal board 558), the wire connection terminal 558a and the terminal cover 551k can be placed far away from the ball tank 552 to which the game balls B are supplied from the island equipment. Therefore, even if the game ball B supplied from the island equipment bounces or is supplied with force in the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface 501m, it can be made difficult to reach (contact) the electric wire connection terminal 558a, etc. , problems such as short circuits or electrical wiring coming off due to contact with the game ball B will not occur.

In addition, since the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a are directed rearward and the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is made higher than the overflow surface 501m, the game balls B supplied from the island equipment to the ball tank 552 are transferred to the ball tank 552. Even if the ball B bounces on the overflow surface 501m, it can be made difficult to land on the top surface of the terminal cover 551k, and even if the game ball B rides on the top surface of the terminal cover 551k, it can be made difficult to fall from the rear side. The occurrence of such problems can be easily avoided.

Furthermore, the game ball B returned from the overflow surface section 501m to the guide surface section 552j of the ball tank 552 is sent to the upstream side of the ball tank 552 (to the right in FIG. 103) due to the inclination of the guide surface section 552j. This can prevent the game balls B on the guide surface portion 552j from pressing the game balls B in the ball tank 552 in the downstream direction, thereby preventing the game balls B from clogging in the ball tank 552. This can be prevented.

In addition, the game balls B supplied from the island equipment to the ball tank 552 bounce on the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface section 501m, and ride on the left step section 501n and right step section 501o on both the left and right sides of the overflow surface section 501m. Also, as shown in FIG. 103, the game balls B can be guided to the overflow surface 501m and the detour passage 552g due to their inclinations, and problems can occur due to the game balls B spilling outside the main body frame 4. can be prevented.

In addition, when the game balls B flow from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553 side, since the game balls B pass under the guide surface portion 552j, the game balls stacked on the upper side of the tank rail 553 due to the guide surface portion 552j The amount (height) of B can be regulated so as not to be higher than the lower surface of the guide surface portion 552j. Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 (guide surface portion 552j) in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the detour passage 552g, it is possible to secure a space (empty space) in which the game balls B can be stacked upward. , the game ball B guided by the detour path 552g can be reliably received.

Furthermore, since the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a and the terminal cover 551k are arranged in front of the part of the tank rail 553 where the upper side is closed, even if the game ball B falls backward from the terminal cover 551k, it will not fall. The game ball B is not received by the tank rail 553, and it is possible to prevent the game ball B from affecting the game ball B in the tank rail 553 and causing a problem.

[4-12. Another embodiment of tank rail, etc.]
Next, another embodiment of the tank rail 553 and the like in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 106 to 110 and the like. FIG. 106 is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine equipped with a tank rail and the like according to another embodiment when viewed from the back and showing an enlarged portion of the tank rail. 107(a) is a plan view showing the tank rail etc. of FIG. 106 assembled with the ball tank, (b) is a perspective view of the tank rail etc. of (a) seen from the front, and (c) 2 is a perspective view of the tank rail and the like shown in FIG. 108(a) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail etc. in FIG. 107 as seen from the front, and FIG. 108(b) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail etc. in FIG. 107 as seen from the rear. FIG. 109 is a cross-sectional view of the tank rail, etc. taken along the carker line in FIG. 107(a). FIG. 110 is an explanatory diagram showing, in cross section, the flow of game balls within the tank rail of FIG. 107. In the tank rail 553A of the embodiment different from the above, in addition to the tank rail 553A, a first rail cover 554A, a second rail cover 555A, and a ball rectifying member 556A are provided. The first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 are different, and similar structures will be described with the same reference numerals.

The tank rail 553A of this embodiment rectifies the game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 and delivers them to the ball guiding unit 570 of the payout unit 560. This tank rail 553A extends leftward in the shape of an upwardly open groove. The tank rail 553A includes a first rail cover 554A that closes the upper end side, a second rail cover 555A provided on the left side of the first rail cover 554A when viewed from the front, and a second rail cover 555A provided on the upper side of the second rail cover 555A. The provided ball rectifying member 556A is attached, and a ball stopping member 557 capable of blocking the flow of game balls B is attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553A.

As shown in FIG. 107(a), the tank rail 553A has a meandering portion 553c that meanders in the front-rear direction on the downstream side of the bulging portion 553b. This meandering portion 553c can suppress the circulation speed of the game balls B. The first rail cover 554A is attached to the upstream side (ball tank 552 side) of the meandering portion 553c.

The second rail cover 555A extends in the left-right direction so as to cover the open upper end side of the tank rail 553A from the first rail cover 554A to the downstream end (left end in front view) including the meandering portion 553c. The second rail cover 555A includes a plate-shaped cover portion 555a that closes the upper end of the tank rail 553A, and a pair of protective walls 555b extending upward from both front and rear ends upstream from the center in the left-right direction of the cover portion 555a. It has an opening 555c passing through the cover part 555a between the pair of protection walls 555b. The pair of protection walls 555b are formed in a meandering shape following the meandering portion 553c at a portion of the tank rail 553A where the meandering portion 553c is provided. A rectifying piece 556a of a spherical rectifying member 556A, which will be described later, is inserted into the opening 555c so as to penetrate from above.

The ball rectifying member 556A has an upstream end extending back and forth and is rotatably attached around an axis. The ball rectifying member 556A is provided between the pair of protective walls 555b above the cover portion 555a of the second rail cover 555A, and projects into the tank rail 553A through the opening 555c of the second rail cover 555A. It has a flat rectifying piece 556a. This ball rectifying member 556A contacts the game balls B stacked in multiple stages in the tank rail 553A from above, thereby breaking the stages of the game balls B and making it easier to align them in a line. The game ball B is restrained from moving quickly to the downstream side, thereby preventing ball biting from occurring on the downstream side of the tank rail 553A.

According to the tank rail 553A and the like of this embodiment, in the assembled state, the ball rectifying member 556A is located below the upper end of the protective wall 555b between the pair of protective walls 555b in the second rail cover 555A. ing. As a result, the electric wire (indicated by a broken line in FIG. 106) connected to the electric wire connection terminal 558a of the external terminal board 558 provided on the front upper side of the portion of the tank rail 553A where the ball rectifying member 556A is attached, It is possible to prevent contact with the ball rectifying member 556A from above. By the way, when the electric wire connected to the electric wire connection terminal 558a contacts the ball rectifying member 556A from above, due to the weight of the electric wire, even if the game ball B comes into contact with the rectifying piece 556a of the ball rectifying member 556A, the ball rectifying member 556A There is a possibility that the ball will not be able to rotate upward, and there is a possibility that the ball rectifying member 556A will not be able to sufficiently exert the rectifying effect on the game balls B. In contrast, in the present embodiment, the pair of protection walls 555b of the second rail cover 555A can prevent the electric wire connected to the electric wire connection terminal 558a from coming into contact with the ball rectifying member 556A. When the game ball B comes into contact with the rectifying piece 556a of the rectifying member 556A, the ball rectifying member 556A can rotate upward, fully exhibiting the rectifying action, and preventing the ball from biting inside the tank rail 553A. Occurrence of clogging can be prevented.

Further, since the tank rail 553A is provided with the meandering portion 553c, the circulation speed of the game ball B can be suppressed by the meandering portion 553c. By the way, in the tank rail 553A where the height becomes narrower toward the downstream side, if the upper game ball B among the game balls B stacked in multiple stages moves to the downstream side first, ball biting is likely to occur. . On the other hand, in this embodiment, as described above, since the distribution speed of the game balls B can be suppressed by the meandering portion 553c, it is possible to prevent the upper game balls B from moving to the downstream side first. This can reduce the occurrence of ball biting.

Furthermore, as described above, the protective wall 555b of the second rail cover 555A prevents the electric wires from coming into contact with the ball rectifying member 556A, thereby preventing ball clogging. Placing near a terminal board (for example, external terminal board 558) or control board to which electric wires are connected, or placing a terminal board or control board to which many electric wires are connected near tank rail 553A. This makes it possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 with a high degree of freedom in the arrangement of the tank rail 553A (ball tank 552), terminal board, etc.

[4-13. Another embodiment of board unit]
Next, a board unit 620A of an embodiment (second embodiment) different from the above will be described in detail, mainly with reference to FIGS. 111 to 116 and the like. 111(a) is a front view of the board unit of another embodiment, (b) is a perspective view of the board unit of (a) seen from the front right, and (c) is a front view of the board unit of (a). It is a perspective view seen from the left front. 112(a) is a perspective view of the board unit in FIG. 111(a) seen from the upper right back, and FIG. 112(b) is a perspective view of the board unit shown in FIG. 111(a) seen from the lower right back. FIG. 113 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 111(a) as seen from the front, and FIG. 114 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 111(a) as seen from the rear. 115(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the Keeke line in FIG. 111(a), (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the Cooke line in (a), and (c) is a ) is a sectional view taken along the K-ke line. FIG. 116 is a bottom view showing a portion on the rear side of the door frame in the pachinko machine equipped with the board unit of FIG. 111(a).

The board unit 620A of this embodiment is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500 in place of the above board unit 620. In the substrate unit 620A of this embodiment, the configuration of the base unit 660 is significantly different from the base unit 620b of the substrate unit 620 described above. Here, components similar to those of the substrate unit 620 described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The board unit 620A includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board mounting part 501c, and a main body frame so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear. A base unit 660 attached to the rear side of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 660, a dispensing control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a dispensing control unit 620d. An interface unit 620e is attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover the speaker unit 620a from the rear.

The base unit 660 includes a front base 661 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear surface of the front base 661. An out ball passage 663 is provided between the rear base 662, the front base 661, and the rear base 662, and through which the game balls B ejected downward from the game board 5 circulate, and a game where the out ball passages 663 circulate. an out sensor 664 that detects the balls B one by one; a ball extraction guide section 627 that receives the game balls B released from the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 and guides them to the right in front view; The game ball B guided by the ball removal guide part 627 flows, and the ball removal passage 665 provided behind the out ball passage 663 in the rear base 662 and the rear side of the ball removal passage 665 are closed. a passage wall member 666 attached to the rear base 662 in a similar manner.

The front base 661 is formed in the shape of a box that is open to the front and long in the left and right directions. The rear base 662 has a flat partition wall 662a extending left and right at a substantially constant height in the vertical direction, and an out ball passage 663 and a ball extraction guide part 627 are formed on the front side of the partition wall 662a. In addition, a bulb discharge passage 665 is formed on the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a. The rear base 662 is formed into a box shape that is open rearward from the partition wall 662a.

In the base unit 660, a front base 661, a rear base 662, and a passage wall member 666 are formed of transparent members. Therefore, the ball removal guide portion 627, the out ball passage 663, and the ball removal passage 665 are also formed transparently. Therefore, the insides of the ball removal guiding section 627, the out ball passage 663, and the ball removal discharge passage 665 can be clearly viewed from the upper and lower sides of the base unit 660, making it easier to check for ball clogging, etc. There is.

The out ball passage 663 is formed in the front side of a flat partition wall 662a extending left and right at a substantially constant height in the vertical direction of the rear base 662, and is open at the front. The front end is closed by a front base 661.

The out ball passage 663 includes a ball ejection receiving section 663a that is open upwardly at approximately the center position in the left and right direction of the pachinko machine 1 and extends left and right, and a ball ejection receiving section 663a that receives the game balls B received in the ball ejection receiving section 663a. An out ball rectifying section 663b that rectifies the game balls B in a line while meandering greatly in the left and right direction, a downward guiding section 663c that guides the game balls B rectified in a line downward by the out ball rectifying section 663b, and a lower end of the downward guiding section 663c. It has an out ball discharge port 663d that opens downward and discharges the game ball B downward from the lower surface of the base unit 660. The out ball discharge port 663d of the out ball passage 663 is provided at the rear of the outer frame 2 (see FIG. 116).

The ball discharge receiving part 663a of the out ball passage 663 is formed to have a depth in the front-rear direction of about 2.5 times the outer diameter of the game ball B. The ball discharge receiving part 663a is inclined at a gentle angle so that the right end side is lower.

The out-ball rectifying section 663b is inclined at a gentle angle from a position to the right of the right end of the ball discharge receiving section 663a so that the left end side becomes lower toward the lower side of the ball discharge receiving section 663a. In addition, the depth of the out-ball rectifying section 663b in the front-rear direction becomes narrower as it goes downstream (to the left), and near the downstream end below the ball discharge receiving section 663a, it is slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B. It has depth. In addition, in the part of the out-ball rectifying part 663b that is to the left of the right end of the ball discharge receiving part 663a, the vertical height decreases as it goes downstream (leftward), and near the downstream end, the part of the ball discharge receiving part 663a that is on the left side is The height is slightly larger than the diameter. Thereby, the game balls B can be aligned in a line in the out ball rectifying section 663b.

The lower guide part 663c extends downward from the downstream end of the out-ball rectifying part 663b which is below the ball discharge receiving part 663a, and the front wall is on the same plane as the rear wall (partition wall part) in the middle of the vertical direction. It is bent backwards in a small crank-like curve. As a result, the downstream end (out-ball discharge port 663d) of the lower guide portion 663c is located further back than the front surface of the partition wall portion 662a of the rear base 662. An out sensor 664 is provided upstream of the cranked portion of the downward guide portion 663c. The downward guide portion 663c is curved so that the portion bent in a crank shape does not have a horizontally extending portion. Even if the game ball B comes into contact with the part where the game ball B is located, it will not jump upward toward the out sensor 664 side, and it is possible to prevent one game ball B from being detected twice by the out sensor 664.

The out sensor 664 uses a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch that is highly durable and has a long life because the game ball B frequently passes through.

The ball ejection guiding portion 627 is provided to the left of the ball ejection receiving portion 663a in the out ball passage 663. The ball removal guiding portion 627 has an upstream end opening toward the left at the upper part of the left side surface when viewed from the front, and a downstream side bent rearward and extending to the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a of the rear base 662. , is connected to the upstream end of the bulb removal passage 665 (see FIG. 115(a), etc.).

The bulb discharge passage 665 is formed on the rear side of the partition wall 662a in the rear base 662. The ball discharge passage 665 is formed in the rear base 662 in a state that is open to the rear, and the rear end side is closed by a passage wall member 666. The rear end of the ball discharge passage 665 is located approximately one outer diameter of the game ball B ahead of the rear end of the rear base 662. That is, a gap larger than one game ball B is formed between the ball ejecting passage 665 and the power supply board 630 of the power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the rear base 662.

The upstream end (left end) of this ball ejection passage 665 is connected to the downstream end of the ball ejection guiding part 627, and has the same slope as the ball ejection receiving part 663a of the out ball passage 663, and is lower than the ball ejection receiving part 663a. A horizontal guide portion 665a extending to the right, a vertical guide portion 665b extending vertically downward from the downstream end (right end) of the horizontal guide portion 665a to the lower surface of the rear base 662, and a downstream end (lower end) of the vertical guide portion 665b. ) and a bulb removal outlet 665c that opens downward. The ball discharge port 665c is provided slightly rearward of the out ball discharge port 663d of the out ball passage 663 (see FIG. 116).

Further, the ball discharge passage 665 has a plurality of protrusions 665d that alternately protrude inward at regular intervals in the vertical direction on the left and right inner walls of the vertical guide portion 665b. The ball discharge passage 665 allows the game balls B flowing through the vertical guide portion 665b extending vertically downward to alternately contact the plurality of protrusions 665d, thereby causing the game balls B to flow down in a zigzag pattern. An increase in speed can be suppressed, and the speed of the game ball B discharged downward from the ball ejection outlet 665c can be suppressed.

This ball ejecting passage 665 is a simple L-shaped passage formed by the horizontal guide portion 665a and the vertical guide portion 665b, so when the ball ejecting lever 593 is operated to eject the game ball B from the ball tank 552. , many game balls B can be smoothly guided and ejected.

According to the board unit 620A of this embodiment, the game ball B driven into the game area 5a and ejected from the game board 5 is received by the ball ejection receiving part 663a of the out ball passage 663, and then the out sensor 664 The system detects this and discharges it to the island equipment side of the game hall. On the other hand, in order to eject (take out) the game balls B from inside the ball tank 552, etc., operate the ball removal lever 593 of the payout device 580 and move the game balls B ejected to the ball removal path 580b side to the out ball path 663. The ball is discharged to the island equipment side of the game hall through a ball removal guiding section 627 and a ball removal passage 665, which are separate and independent from the ball removal guide section 627 and ball removal passage 665. As a result, only the game ball B ejected from the game board 5 can be detected by the out sensor 664 provided in the out ball passage 663, so only the game ball B ejected from the game board 5 can be detected accurately. can be counted. Therefore, the number of game balls B (safe balls) counted by the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580 and the number of game balls B (out balls) counted by the out sensor 664 are used to accurately determine the number of game balls B. The pachinko machine 1 can calculate the payout rate (ball payout rate).

The number of game balls B (number of out balls) counted by the out sensor 664 is the number of balls B hit in the game area 5a, the general winning hole 2001, the first starting hole 2002, the gate 2003, the second starting hole 2004, and the big winning hole. The number of game balls B that were received in the winning holes such as the opening 2005, the accessory winning hole 2006, etc. and ejected from the game board 5, and the number of game balls B that were not received in any winning hole after being hit into the gaming area 5a. It is the sum of the number of game balls B received by the out port 1008 and ejected from the game board 5, and is the number of game balls B hit into the game area 5a (number of fired balls). be.

Note that the payout rate (ball rate) changes depending on the gaming status, so the payout rate within a predetermined period (for example, per unit time, per predetermined time, per day, etc.) It is calculated as follows: number ÷ number of out pitches within a predetermined period = payout rate within a predetermined period.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the board unit 620A of the main body frame 4 to which the game board 5 is removably attached is provided with an out ball passage 663 through which the game balls B discharged from the game board 5 circulate, and The game ball B circulating in the passage 663 is detected by the out sensor 664, and since the game ball B ejected from the game board 5 can be detected, an "out ball" on the game board 5 is detected. There is no need to provide an out ball detection unit, and the configuration of the game board 5 can be simplified and costs can be reduced.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, there is a gap larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B between the rear end of the ball ejection passage 665 and the power supply board 630 of the power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the rear base 662. As a result, the out ball passage 663 and the ball ejection passage 665 are moved away from the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, etc., and the out ball passage 663 and the ball ejection passage 665 are connected to A pachinko machine 1 in which the influence of electrical noise caused by static electricity, induced current, etc. generated by the circulation of game balls B on the power supply board 630, payout control board 633, etc. can be reduced, and malfunctions due to the circulation of game balls B are reduced. It can be done.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, since the out sensor 664 detects the game ball B whose distribution speed is suppressed by the out ball rectifier 663b of the out ball passage 663, the game ball B is Since the impact applied to the out sensor 664 can be weakened, it is possible to reduce the possibility of the out sensor 664 being worn out and damaged early.

Furthermore, if the payout rate (ball output rate) per predetermined time calculated from the number of safe balls per predetermined time and the number of out balls per predetermined time is displayed so that it can be visually checked by the player, the game As a player, he wants to pay out many game balls B, so if the displayed payout rate is large, he can immediately recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is likely to pay out many game balls B. This allows the player to easily select the pachinko machine 1 to play. In addition, if the payout rate is displayed so that it can be visually checked by the player, if a fraudulent act that causes a large number of game balls B to be paid out occurs, the displayed payout rate will become larger than normal. The pachinko machine 1 has a high deterrent effect against cheating because other players and the staff of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed can easily notice the cheating, making them hesitate to commit the cheating. It can be done.

Additionally, if the payout rate calculated from the number of safe balls and the number of out balls is displayed in a position that cannot be seen from the player's side, the payout rate calculated from the number of safe balls and the number of out balls may be displayed in a position that cannot be seen by the game hall staff, etc. for the same reason as above. This makes it possible to detect fraudulent activity. In addition, when performing maintenance on the pachinko machine 1, if the displayed payout rate is different from the normal value, it is necessary to Since there is a possibility of a malfunction in the board, connector, wiring cable, various sensors, etc., it is possible to respond to the malfunction at an early stage, and the burden on the game hall side can be reduced.

Furthermore, since an out sensor 664 is provided in the out ball passage 663 through which the game balls B discharged from the game board 5 flow, a configuration for detecting the game balls B discharged to the game board 5 (for example, To reduce the cost of the game board 5 by eliminating the need to provide an out ball detection unit (out ball detection unit), and to secure space on the game board 5 for the configuration for detecting the ejected game ball B. By providing the performance device in the secured space, the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) can further entertain players.

In addition, since the ball ejection passage 665 has a vertical guide portion 665b in which a plurality of protrusions 665d alternately protrude, the game ball B can circulate through the vertical guide portion 665b. Since the speed can be suppressed, damage to the inside of the ball ejection passage 665 due to the impact of the circulating game balls B, and damage to the island equipment side of the game hall that receives the game balls B ejected from the ball ejection passage 665, etc. can be prevented.

In addition, a meandering out ball rectifying section 663b is provided in the out ball passage 663, and a vertical guiding section 665b from which a plurality of protrusions 665d protrude is provided in the ball ejecting passage 665. Since it is possible to suppress the flow speed of the game balls B, it is possible to reduce the electrical noise emitted from the game balls B flowing in the out ball passage 663 and the ball ejection passage 665. It is possible to reduce the influence on the power supply board 630, payout control board 633, etc., and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 with fewer malfunctions due to the distribution of game balls B.

In addition, since the out ball outlet 663d and the ball outlet outlet 665c of the out ball passage 663 and the ball outlet outlet 665 are opened downward, the out ball outlet 663 and the ball outlet outlet 665 are designed to open downward. Since the game balls B are ejected downward from the pachinko machine 665, it becomes difficult for the game balls B to collide with other pachinko machines or walls installed behind the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility, and other pachinko machines Damage to machines, walls, etc. can be avoided. In addition, since the game balls B are discharged downward from the out-ball passage 663 and the ball removal passage 665, the discharged game balls B are less likely to scatter, and from the out-ball passage 663 and the ball extraction passage 665 on the island equipment side. The discharged game balls B can be easily collected.

Furthermore, since the base unit 660 in which the ball ejection passage 665 and the out ball passage 663 are formed is provided below the part of the main body frame 4 where the game board 5 is attached, the game board 5 can be By simply ejecting the game ball B hit into the region 5a downward, it becomes possible to deliver it to the out ball passage 663 of the base unit 660. , it is possible to have a simple (easy) configuration, and the cost of the game board 5 can be reduced.

In addition, since the ball removal outlet 665c of the ball removal passage 665 and the out ball outlet 663d of the out ball passage 663 are provided at the rear of the outer frame 2, the ball removal outlet 665c and the out ball outlet 663d of the out ball outlet passage 663 are provided at the rear of the outer frame 2. Since the ejected game balls B can be prevented from colliding with the outer frame 2, the game balls B flowing vigorously through the ball ejection passage 665 and the out ball passage 663 can be prevented from colliding with the outer frame 2. Damage to the outer frame 2 can be avoided, and a pachinko machine 1 that is not easily damaged can be provided.

In addition, since the ball extraction outlet 665c of the ball extraction passage 665 and the out ball outlet 663d of the out ball passage 663 are provided at the rear of the outer frame 2, the part where the game balls B are collected on the island equipment side ( There is no need to advance the out-receiving part, bucket, etc.) to a position overlapping the outer frame 2, and the effort of installing the Pachinko machine 1 and the effort of moving the Pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

[4-13a. Another embodiment of ball ejection in the substrate unit]
Next, another embodiment of ball ejection in the above board unit 620A will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 117, 118, and the like. FIG. 117 is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which a guide piece is provided at the out ball discharge port of the out ball passage. FIG. 118(a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which the out sensor is detachable, and FIG. 118(b) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the out sensor is removed in FIG. 118(a).

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 117, a guide piece 667 for guiding the game ball B to the rear side is provided at the out ball discharge port 663d at the downstream end of the out ball passage 663 in the base unit 660. To be more specific, in this embodiment, near the downstream end of the out-ball passage 663, there is a merging portion 663e that merges with the ball-extraction discharge passage 665. The merging portion 663e opens downward, and the opening end thereof serves as an out-ball discharge port 663d (ball removal discharge port 665c). The guide piece 667 protrudes rearward for a short distance from the front wall of the out-ball discharge port 663d.

According to the embodiment shown in FIG. 117, the game ball B discharged downward from the out ball discharge port 663d comes into contact with the guide piece 667, so that the discharge direction of the game ball B can be directed diagonally backward and downward. . As a result, when this pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island equipment of a game hall, the parts for collecting game balls B (out receiving part, bucket, etc.), and the game balls B can be reliably collected on the island equipment side.

Further, according to the embodiment shown in FIG. 117, since the direction of ejection of the game ball B can be directed diagonally rearward and downward by the guide piece 667, the out ball discharge port 663d of the out ball passage 663 can be connected to the main body frame 4. Even if it is provided at a position close to directly below the game area 5a of the attached game board 5 (a position close to the front side within the island facility), the game ball B can be reliably received in a bucket or the like within the island facility. Therefore, since it is possible to arrange the out ball passage 663 (out ball outlet 663d) as far forward as possible, it is possible to widen the space behind the out ball passage 663 in the main body frame 4. Therefore, by moving the out ball passage 663 away from the power supply board 630, payout control board 633, etc., electrical noise due to static electricity, induced current, etc. generated when many game balls B flow through the out ball passage 663 can be avoided. The influence on the power supply board 630, payout control board 633, etc. can be reduced, and the pachinko machine 1 can be provided with fewer malfunctions due to the distribution of game balls B.

Next, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 118, an out sensor 664 can be attached to and removed from below at the out ball outlet 663d in the out ball passage 663. In this embodiment, a sensor mounting recess 663f is formed at the downstream end of the downward guide portion 663c in the out bulb passage 663 and is open downward to accommodate the out sensor 664, and an out sensor accommodated in the sensor mounting recess 663f. A sensor cover 668 that restricts downward movement of the sensor 664 is provided.

The sensor mounting recess 663f is formed at the lower end of the downward guide portion 663c connected to the downstream end of the out bulb rectifying portion 663b in the out bulb passage 663 of the base unit 660. Also in this embodiment, the base unit 660 is formed of a transparent member, and the inside of the out-ball passage 663 can be visually recognized from above or below the base unit 660.

The sensor cover 668 includes a main body part 668a that extends longer than the sensor mounting recess 663f and whose proximal end side is rotatably attached to the base unit 660, and a sensor cover 668 for detecting the out sensor 664 housed in the sensor mounting recess 663f in the main body part 668a. A through hole 668b through which the game ball B can pass through at a portion that coincides with the hole, and a locking claw portion 668c that is provided on the side opposite to the base end side of the main body portion 668a and is elastically deformable. have.

The sensor cover 668 is rotatably attached at its proximal end to a portion of the base unit 660 on the outside of the sensor attachment recess 663f opposite to the out-ball rectifying section 663b. The locking claw portion 668c of the sensor cover 668 is locked to a locking portion 663g provided on the outside of the out-ball rectifying portion 663b with respect to the sensor mounting recess 663f in the base unit 660.

The sensor cover 668 is configured such that the locking claw portion 668c moves upward with the out sensor 664 housed in the sensor mounting recess 663f so that the detection hole of the out sensor 664 matches the out ball passage 663. By rotating and closing the locking claw portion 668c to lock the locking portion 663g, the main body portion 668a comes into contact with the lower surface of the out sensor 664, restricts the downward movement of the out sensor 664, and closes the locking claw portion 668c. A sensor 664 can be attached to the base unit 660 (see FIG. 118(a)). In this state, the through hole 668b of the sensor cover 668 is aligned with the detection hole of the out sensor 664, and after the game ball B flowing through the out ball passage 663 is detected by the out sensor 664, the through hole 668b is aligned with the detection hole of the out sensor 664. through which it is discharged downward. The through hole 668b of this sensor cover 668 also serves as an out ball outlet 663d of the out ball passage 663.

When replacing (removing) the out sensor 664, the locking claw portion 668c of the sensor cover 668 is operated to elastically deform the locking claw portion 668c and release the locking from the locking portion 663g. Then, by rotating and opening the sensor cover 668 around the base end side of the main body part 668a so that the locking claw part 668c moves downward, the main body part 668a of the sensor cover 668 is exposed to the bottom surface of the sensor 664. The out sensor 664 can be removed from the sensor mounting recess 663f (see FIG. 118(b)).

As shown in FIG. 118(b), in this embodiment, when the sensor cover 668 is rotated and opened, the lower end of the sensor cover 668 and the upper end of the object that may be touched (for example, the outer frame 2 A certain amount of clearance is created between the upper end surface of the outer frame lower assembly 40, the upper end of the connecting cylinder part 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43, etc.), or the lower end of the main body frame 4. ing. As a result, even if the main body frame 4 is opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 2 while the sensor cover 668 is open, the sensor cover 668 will not come into contact with an object that may come into contact with it, thereby preventing damage to the sensor cover 668. be able to.

According to the embodiment shown in FIG. 118, the out sensor 664 detects all the game balls B hit into the game area 5a of the game board 5, so many game balls B are distributed. However, as mentioned above, by opening the sensor cover 668, the out sensor 664 can be attached and detached from below, making it easy to replace the out sensor 664. can.

Further, according to this embodiment, even if the main body frame 4 is opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 2 while the sensor cover 668 is open, the sensor cover 668 will not come into contact with objects that may be touched, such as the outer frame 2. Therefore, damage to the sensor cover 668 can be prevented. Specifically, the sensor cover 668 supports the out sensor 664 from below, but since many game balls B come into contact with the out sensor 664 from above, many game balls B come in contact with the out sensor 664. There is a risk that the locking claw portion 668c of the sensor cover 668 may come off due to the vibration caused by the sensor cover 668, and the sensor cover 668 may open. If the sensor cover 668 opens during a game and the out sensor 664 falls off, the out sensor 664 will detect the game ball B even though the game ball B has been hit into the gaming area 5a. Therefore, the main control board 1310 etc. will notify the occurrence of an abnormality. In response to this notification of the occurrence of an abnormality, the staff of the game hall or the like will open the main body frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2 in order to confirm the abnormality. Since there is a gap between the sensor cover 668 and the objects that may come into contact with the sensor cover 668, the main body frame 4 can be opened without the sensor cover 668 coming into contact with the objects that may come into contact with the sensor cover 668, and damage to the sensor cover 668 can be prevented.

Furthermore, according to the embodiment shown in FIG. 118, the proximal end side of the sensor cover 668 is rotatably attached to the base unit 660 at an outer portion of the sensor mounting recess 663f opposite to the out bulb rectifying portion 663b. In addition, since the base unit 660 is transparent, by opening the sensor cover 668 and removing the out sensor 664, the inside of the out ball passage 663 can be clearly viewed from below. Therefore, when game balls B are jammed in the out ball passage 663, the inside of the out ball passage 663 can be visually confirmed from the outside, making it possible to identify at a glance the location where the game balls B are jammed. This allows the game ball B to be freed from clogging at an early stage.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper surface of the door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 is formed to be substantially flush with the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30 in the outer frame 2. Therefore, this pachinko machine 1 can be turned upside down to stand upright, and the out sensor 664 can be replaced by opening and closing the sensor cover 668, and the out ball passage 663 can be replaced from the bottom side through the transparent base unit 660. It is possible to easily perform confirmation work inside the bulb removal passage 665, etc.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, even if the out sensor 664 is damaged, the out sensor 664 can be easily replaced, so a game that has been interrupted due to the out sensor 664 being damaged can be restarted quickly. In addition, it is possible to alleviate the frustration of players due to interruptions in play and suppress a decline in interest, and it is also possible to suppress a decline in the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1, thereby reducing the burden on the game hall side. can.

Furthermore, since one end of the sensor cover 668 is rotatably attached to the base unit 660, even if the sensor cover 668 is opened when replacing the out sensor 664, the sensor cover 668 does not come away from the base unit 660. Since the sensor cover 668 is in a suspended state and does not fall off, it is possible to avoid losing the sensor cover 668.

In addition, in the sensor cover 668 that holds the out sensor 664 from below, the outer part of the base unit 660 near the out ball passage 663 through which many game balls B circulate, around the axis in the front and back direction (horizontal direction). Since the distribution of the downward force applied to the sensor cover 668 via the out sensor 664 due to the circulation of game balls B is limited to the side rotatably attached to the base unit 660 (one side It is relatively small on the locking claw 668c side (the other end side) that is locked on the locking portion 663g of the base unit 660. Therefore, even if a downward force is applied to the sensor cover 668 via the out sensor 664 due to many game balls B passing through the out sensor 664, the force is applied to the sensor cover 668 at one end where it is rotatably attached. Since the locking claw portion 668c on the other end side is difficult to release, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the sensor cover 668 opens and the out sensor 664 falls off. .

[4-14. Third embodiment of board unit]
Next, a substrate unit 700 according to a third embodiment, which is different from the above, will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 119 to 128 and the like. FIG. 119(a) is a perspective view of the board unit of the third embodiment in which the power supply unit, payout control unit, and interface unit are omitted, viewed from the front right, and FIG. 119(b) is a perspective view of the board unit of (a) from the front left. FIG. 120(a) is a perspective view of the board unit in FIG. 119 seen from the upper right back, and FIG. 120(b) is a perspective view of the board unit in FIG. 120(a) seen from the lower right back. 121(a) is a plan view of the board unit in FIG. 119, (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the Corco line in (a), and (c) is a sectional view taken along the Sasa line in (a). FIG. 122 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line X--X in FIG. 121(a).

123 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 119 as seen from the front, and FIG. 124 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 119 as seen from the back. 125(a) is a perspective view of the ball path member of the board unit in FIG. 119 seen from the front, and FIG. 125(b) is a perspective view of the ball path member of the board unit of FIG. 119 seen from the back. FIG. 126 is an explanatory diagram showing how to eliminate ball clogging in the board unit of FIG. 119. FIG. 127 is an explanatory diagram showing how to prevent a linear unauthorized tool from entering the board unit of FIG. 119. FIG. 128 is an explanatory diagram showing dust removal in the board unit of FIG. 119.

The board unit 700 of the third embodiment differs from the above-described board unit 620 and board unit 620A only in the configuration of the base unit 710, and the other configurations are the same. Components similar to those of the board unit 620A are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, in FIGS. 119 to 128, illustration of the power supply unit 620c, payout control unit 620d, and interface unit 620e is omitted.

The board unit 700 of this embodiment is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500 in place of the above-described board unit 620 or board unit 620A. The board unit 700 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board mounting part 501c, and a main body frame so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear. A base unit 710 attached to the rear side of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 710, a dispensing control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a dispensing control unit 620d. An interface unit 620e is attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover the speaker unit 620a from the rear.

This board unit 700 is provided with a first ball path 701 through which game balls B released downward from the game board 5 can flow, and is provided behind the first ball path 701 so that the game balls B released downward from the game board 5 can flow. A second ball path 702 through which game balls B can be distributed; a first ball sensor 703 that detects game balls B flowing through the first ball path 701; and a first ball sensor 703 that detects game balls B flowing through the second ball path 702. It is provided with a second ball sensor 704 that detects b, and a ball removal path 705 through which the game ball B released from the lower ball removal path 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 flows. The first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 each have an entrance opening upward, and each of the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 detects the game ball B one by one with the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704. Discharge downward.

In this embodiment, on the game board 5, the game balls B received in the out port 1008, the first sub-out port 2021, and the second sub-out port 2022 circulate through the first ball path 701, and the game balls B received in the game board 5 receive a general prize. The game balls b received in the opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, and the accessory winning opening 2006 are configured to flow through the second ball path 702. In other words, the configuration is such that out balls flow through the first ball path 701 and safe balls flow through the second ball path 702, and the number of all out balls can be counted by the first ball sensor 703. At the same time, the number of all safe balls can be counted by the second ball sensor 704. This prevents fraudulent activities from occurring with respect to winning ports (winning port sensors) such as the general winning port 2001, first starting port 2002, second starting port 2004, big winning port 2005, and accessory winning port 2006 on the game board 5. If this is done, the number of safe balls on the game board 5 side and the number of safe balls counted by the second ball sensor 704 will be different, and it is possible to detect fraudulent activity with respect to the winning opening.

More specifically, the base unit 710 of the board unit 700 includes a front base 711 attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a front base 711 attached to the rear side of the front base 711. A rear base 712 has a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear surface and has a ball extraction passage 705, and a first ball path 701 and a second ball path 702 are provided between the front base 711 and the rear base 712. A ball path member 713 having a front base 711 and a rear base 712 to eliminate ball clogging of game balls B in the first ball path 701 and second ball path 702 and to prevent unauthorized tools from entering. a security cover 714 that can be opened and closed on the rear base 712; a passage wall member 715 that is attached to the rear side of the rear base 712 and closes the rear end side of the ball extraction passage 705; A frame relay board 716 is provided. In the base unit 710, the front base 711, the rear base 712, the ball path member 713, and the passage wall member 715 are formed transparent.

The front base 711 is formed in the shape of a box that is open rearward and upward and long in the left and right directions. The front base 711 accommodates a ball path member 713 therein from the rear. The front base 711 closes off the front end side of the first ball path 701 of the ball path member 713 with a front wall. The front base 711 has a ball socket 711a that is open long in the left-right direction in the upper peripheral wall, and a release port 711b that is opened at a position to the right of the center in the left-right direction of the lower peripheral wall. ing. The front base 711 accommodates the ball path member 713 therein, and the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 of the ball path member 713 face upward from the ball socket 711a. Further, the front base 711 supports the security cover 714 rotatably around an axis extending in the left-right direction on the front end side of the release port 711b.

The rear base 712 is formed in the shape of a box that is open rearward and long in the left and right directions. The rear base 712 closes off the rear end side of the second ball path 702 of the ball path member 713 with a front wall. The rear base 712 has a ball extraction passage 705 that receives the game ball B released from the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610, guides it to the right in front view, and guides it downward to discharge it. have. The ball removal passage 705 is provided in a box-shaped rear base 712, and is entirely open to the rear. The ball removal passage 705 is closed on the rear end side by a passage wall member 715. The part of the rear base 712 located above the speaker box 623 in the ball extraction passage 705 (the part on the left end side in front view) penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the front end side is closed by the front base 711. , the rear side is closed by a passage wall member 715.

In addition, the rear base 712 includes a first discharge guide part 712a that receives the game ball B flowing through the first ball route 701 of the ball route member 713, guides it backward, and then discharges it downward, and a second discharge guide part 712a of the ball route member 713. It has a second discharge guide part 712b that receives the game ball B that has passed through the ball path 702, guides it backward, and then discharges it downward. The inlet sides of the first discharge guide part 712a and the second discharge guide part 712b protrude forward from the front wall of the rear base 712, and the inlet of the first discharge guide part 712a opens toward the front. , the inlet of the second discharge guiding portion 712b opens upward. The outlets of the first discharge guide part 712a and the second discharge guide part 712b are provided at the same position in the front and rear direction. The first discharge guide section 712a and the second discharge guide section 712b are open to the rear at the rear side relative to the front wall, and are closed at the rear end side by the passage wall member 715.

In the rear base 712, the respective exits of the bulb removal passage 705, the first discharge guide part 712a, and the second discharge guide part 712b are located to the left of the release port 711b of the front base 711, and the left They are arranged in order from the top to the right. The outlet of the bulb removal passage 705 has a front end that widens forward greatly and a rear end that widens slightly rearward with respect to the exits of the first discharge guide section 712a and the second discharge guide section 712b (Fig. 120(b) ). That is, the outlet of the bulb removal passage 705 is formed larger (wider) in the front-rear direction than the exits of the first discharge guide section 712a and the second discharge guide section 712b.

The ball path member 713 is inserted into and housed in the box-shaped front base 711 from the rear. The ball path member 713 has a first ball path 701 and a second ball path 702. The ball path member 713 has a left wall portion 713a that extends vertically downward from the upper end at the right end, and an upper left shelf portion 713b that slopes downwardly toward the right from the lower end of the left wall portion 713a. , a stepped wall portion 713c extending vertically downward from the right end of the upper left shelf portion 713b, and an upper right shelf portion 713d that slopes downwardly toward the right from the lower end of the stepped wall portion 713c; A rectifying wall portion 713e extending obliquely to the lower left from the right end of the upper right shelf portion 713d, and a rectifying wall portion 713e that increases in height toward the right from a position spaced to the right with respect to the lower end of the rectifying wall portion 713e. A lower shelf portion 713f extends to the right than the portion 713d, a right wall portion 713g extends vertically upward from the right end of the lower shelf portion 713f to approximately the same height as the upper end of the left wall portion 713a, and An upper wall portion 713h extends leftward from the upper end of the wall portion 713g to the same position as the right end of the upper right shelf portion 713d, and a U-shaped U-shaped portion connected to the left end of the upper wall portion 713h and open upward. It has a groove wall portion 713i. The left end of the groove wall portion 713i is located to the right of the center of the upper right shelf portion 713d in the left-right direction.

The ball path member 713 also extends vertically upward from the lower wall upper part 713j extending leftward from the lower end of the rectifying wall part 713e and from the left end of the lower wall upper part 713j to the lower surface of the upper left shelf part 713b. The protruding inner wall portion 713k, the eaves portion 713l extending downwardly toward the left from the middle of the left side of the inner wall portion 713k, and the eaves portion 713l extending vertically downward from near the left end of the lower shelf portion 713f. It has a hanging wall part 713m extending, and a lower wall lower part 713n extending leftward from the lower end of the hanging wall part 713m in parallel with the upper lower wall part 713j. A portion of the lower wall portion 713n located below between the lower end of the rectifying wall portion 713e and the left end of the lower shelf portion 713f is vertically cut out to a size that allows the game ball B to pass through.

Furthermore, the ball path member 713 extends downward from the lower surface of each of the upper left shelf section 713b, the lower shelf section 713f, and the upper wall section 713h, and includes a plurality of obstructions provided at intervals in the left-right direction. It has a rib 713o. The ball path member 713 also includes a left wall portion 713a, an upper left shelf portion 713b, a stepped wall portion 713c, an upper right shelf portion 713d, a rectifying wall portion 713e, a lower shelf portion 713f, a right wall portion 713g, a groove wall portion 713i, It has a flat partition wall 713p that partitions into front and back a space surrounded by the upper lower wall 713j, the middle wall 713k, the hanging wall 713m, and the lower lower wall 713n.

Moreover, the ball path member 713 has a plurality of notches in the upper left shelf part 713b, the upper right shelf part 713d, and the lower shelf part 713f so as to be recessed from the front end and the rear end of each one toward the partition wall part 713p side. It has a notch 713q. Each notch 713q is provided so that when assembled to the board unit 700, a gap is formed between the front base 711 and the rear base 712, which is smaller in the front and back direction than the radius of the game ball B, Through the gap, dirt, dust, etc. in the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 can be discharged downward.

Further, the ball path member 713 is provided at a portion between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f on the front surface of the partition wall portion 713p, and has a plurality of guide protrusions 713r extending left and right. ing.

Further, the ball path member 713 is surrounded by an upper lower wall 713j, a hanging wall 713m, and a lower lower wall 713n on the front side of the partition wall 713p, and is surrounded by a sensor housing in which the first ball sensor 703 is accommodated. The rear part of the sensor accommodating part in which the second ball sensor 704 is housed is surrounded by the upper lower wall part 713j, the hanging wall part 713m, and the lower part 713n of the lower wall part on the rear side of the front part 713s and the partition wall part 713p. 713t.

The front sensor accommodating part 713s and the rear sensor accommodating part 713t are arranged so that the detection holes of the first spherical sensor 703 and the second spherical sensor 704 are located below the area between the rectifying wall 713e and the lower shelf 713f. In other words, the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 are housed with the detection holes facing to the right. Although not shown, the wiring cables extending from the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 extend from the front 713s of the sensor accommodating part and the rear 713t of the sensor accommodating part to the left of the inner wall part 713k. .

In addition, the ball path member 713 has a first ball guiding portion 713u that is provided at a portion in front of the partition wall portion 713p on the lower surface of the lower wall portion 713n, projects downward, and is open to the rear. have. When the first sphere guide section 713u is assembled to the board unit 700, the right half of the rear end side is closed by the front surface of the rear base 712, and the left half is on the entrance side of the first discharge guide section 712a of the rear base 712. is coming. The first ball guide part 713u guides the game ball B flowing downward from between the rectifying wall part 713e and the lower shelf part 713f to the right and then to the rear in front of the partition wall part 713p. It can be delivered to the first discharge guiding part 712a of the rear base 712.

On the other hand, on the rear side of the partition wall part 713p in the ball path member 713, a part of the lower wall lower part 713n is opened downward (a part of the detection hole of the second ball sensor 704 accommodated in the rear sensor accommodating part 713t). ) An inlet that opens upward of the second discharge guide portion 712b of the rear base 712 is located below. Thereby, behind the partition wall part 713p, the game ball B flowing downward from between the rectifying wall part 713e and the lower shelf part 713f can be delivered to the second discharge guiding part 712b of the rear base 712.

The right end of the upper left shelf portion 713b is located slightly to the right of the left end of the elimination opening 711b in the front base 711. The right end of the upper right shelf portion 713d is located closer to the right than the right end of the elimination opening 711b in the front base 711. The left end of the lower shelf portion 713f is located to the left of the left end of the elimination opening 711b in the front base 711. Therefore, the area directly above the elimination opening 711b of the front base 711 is covered by the rectifying wall portion 713e. The upper left shelf 713b, the upper right shelf 713d, and the lower shelf 713f are linearly inclined. On the other hand, the rectifying wall portion 713e is inclined in a curved shape, and is curved so that the left end side is directed vertically downward. The distance (height) between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f is inclined to become narrower toward the left so that the left end side has a height that allows one game ball B to pass through. . The rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f can rectify the plurality of game balls B in a line and guide them downward.

As described above, the space between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f is formed such that the vertical dimension becomes narrower toward the left (the downstream direction in which the game balls B circulate), so that the game Depending on the flow rate of balls B, etc., there is a possibility that a plurality of game balls B may get caught between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, causing ball clogging (see FIG. 126). Since the rectifying wall portion 713e is located above the clearing port 711b, if ball clogging occurs between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, the security cover 714 is opened and the clearing port 711b is opened. In the open state, a rod-shaped tool is inserted between the rectifying wall part 713e and the lower shelf part 713f from below through the release port 711b and the notch part 713q of the lower shelf part 713f, and the game ball B bitten by the tool is inserted. You can clear the ball jam by poking the ball.

By the way, since the lower shelf part 713f is provided with a cutout part 713q for eliminating ball clogging and allowing dirt and dust to fall downward, it is possible to prevent wire-like illegal tools such as piano wire or catheters from falling. from below through the notch 713q to the upper part of the lower shelf 713f (the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702), and then insert the tip of the unauthorized tool into the ball path member 713 (the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702). There is a risk that a fraudulent act may be carried out against the game board 5 that extends upward from the ball path 702) and is provided above. There is a similar fear that such an unauthorized tool may be inserted not only in the lower shelf part 713f but also in the upper left shelf part 713b and the upper right shelf part 713d where the notch part 713q is provided.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, a plurality of flat inhibition ribs 713o are provided on the lower surfaces of the upper left shelf section 713b, the lower shelf section 713f, and the upper wall section 713h, and are spaced apart in the left-right direction and extend downward. Therefore, even if the tip of the linear unauthorized tool tries to move along the lower surfaces of the upper left shelf section 713b, the lower shelf section 713f, and the upper wall section 713h, it will come into contact with the inhibiting rib 713o and the tip will Movement can be prevented, and further insertion of unauthorized tools can be prevented (see FIG. 127). Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts on the game board 5 through the ball path member 713 (the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702), and the burden is placed on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can reduce the risk of fraud and has a high deterrent effect against fraudulent acts.

Note that in the upper right shelf section 713d and the upper left shelf section 713b on the right side of the middle wall section 713k, their lower and left and right sides are the rectifying wall section 713e and the lower wall where the cutout section 713q is not provided. Since the upper right shelf 713d and the upper left shelf 713b are closed by the upper part 713j and the middle wall part 713k, an unauthorized tool cannot be inserted from below through the notches 713q of the corresponding parts. Fraudulent acts will not occur via the cutout 713q.

As described above, the ball path member 713 has a plurality of notches 713q provided in the upper left shelf 713b, the upper right shelf 713d, and the lower shelf 713f, so that dirt and dust are directed downward through the notches 713q. (See Figure 128). Dust and the like discharged downward through the notch 713q located above the front 713s of the sensor accommodating part and the rear 713t of the sensor accommodating part in the upper left shelf 713b are discharged onto the rectifying wall 713e, the upper lower wall 713j, and the middle part. It is housed in a space surrounded by a wall 713k. This prevents dust and the like from adhering to the first bulb sensor 703 and second bulb sensor 704 housed in the front sensor housing part 713s and the rear sensor housing part 713t.

In addition, a wiring cable is connected to the left end side of the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 housed in the front sensor housing part 713s and the rear sensor housing part 713t. It protrudes to the left from the front sensor accommodating part 713s and the rear sensor accommodating part 713t. That is, the wiring cables and connectors of the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 protrude to the left beyond the inner wall portion 713k. In this middle wall part 713k, since the eaves part 713l extends to the left from the upper part of the front sensor housing part 713s and the rear sensor housing part 713t on the left side surface, it is formed on the upper left shelf part 713b. Dirt and dust that have fallen downward through the notch 713q are guided to the left by the inclination of the eaves section 713l, and are guided to the left by the inclination of the eaves section 713l, causing the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 to protrude to the left beyond the inner wall section 713k. It is possible to prevent the wire from falling onto the wiring cable and the connector, and it is possible to avoid problems caused by dust and the like.

The base unit 710 includes a left wall portion 713a on the front side of the partition wall portion 713p in the ball path member 713, an upper left shelf portion 713b, a stepped wall portion 713c, an upper right shelf portion 713d, a rectifying wall portion 713e, a lower shelf portion 713f, The right wall portion 713g, the groove wall portion 713i, the first ball guide portion 713u, and the first discharge guide portion 712a of the rear base 712 form the first ball path 701, and the partition wall portion 713p of the ball path member 713 forms the first ball path 701. The rear left wall 713a, upper left shelf 713b, step wall 713c, upper right shelf 713d, rectifying wall 713e, lower shelf 713f, right wall 713g, groove wall 713i, and rear base 712 A second ball path 702 is formed by the second discharge guiding portion 712b.

The security cover 714 is formed into a flat plate shape, and is attached near the front end of the release opening 711b of the front base 711 in a state where the front end side is rotatable around an axis in the left and right direction. Moreover, the security cover 714 has an elastic locking portion 714a that is locked to the rear base 712 on the rear end side. As shown in FIG. 122, this security cover 714 closes the release opening 711b when the elastic locking portion 714a is locked to the rear base 712 and is in a horizontal state, and the elastic locking portion 714a is locked. When the release port 711b is released and rotated so that the rear end side is positioned downward and vertical, the release port 711b is opened. That is, the security cover 714 can open and close the release port 711b.

When the security cover 714 is in the closed state, it is possible to close the release port 711b of the front base 711, so that a linear unauthorized tool can enter the ball path member 713 (first ball path 701 and the first ball path 701) from the release port 711b. It is possible to prevent the ball from being inserted into the two-ball path 702). Furthermore, when a ball jam occurs between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f of the ball path member 713, the security cover 714 is opened to open the release port 711b of the front base 711. Therefore, a rod-shaped tool is inserted between the rectifying wall part 713e and the lower shelf part 713f from below through the clearing port 711b and the notch part 713q of the lower shelf part 713f to clear the ball clogging of the game balls B. Can be done. This work to clear the ball jam is carried out with the main body frame 4 opened forward with respect to the outer frame 2.

When the security cover 714 has the opening 711b open (vertically), the lower end (the end on the elastic locking part 714a side) is connected to the object that is likely to come into contact with it (here, behind the curtain plate in the outer frame 2). It is located below the height of the connecting cylinder portion 43a) of the member 43 (the height indicated by the dashed line in FIG. 122). Therefore, in order to eliminate the ball clogging of game balls B in the ball path member 713, after opening the main body frame 4 forward with respect to the outer frame 2, the main body frame 4 is opened with the security cover 714 left open. Even if an attempt is made to close the main body frame 4 against the outer frame 2, the open security cover 714 comes into contact with an object (the connecting cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43), and the main body frame 4 cannot be closed. Thereby, forgetting to close the security cover 714 can be avoided, the security cover 714 can be reliably closed, and the security function of the security cover 714 can be exerted.

In addition, in this embodiment, if the security cover 714 opens for some reason while the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, it is possible to open the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 in the same state. An object that may come into contact with the open security cover 714 comes into contact with the open security cover 714 from the front, but since the front end side of the security cover 714 is rotatably mounted around an axis in the left and right direction, an object that may come into contact with the open security cover 714 comes into contact with the open security cover 714 from the front. Since the security cover 714 rotates in the closing direction when it comes into contact with the security cover 714, the body frame 4 can be opened without the crime prevention cover 714 getting caught on the object that may come into contact with it, and damage to the security cover 714 or the object that may come into contact with it can be avoided. .

In addition, the security cover 714 of the present embodiment rarely gets jammed with the game balls B between the rectifying wall part 713e and the lower shelf part 713f, and is basically left in the closed state, so it cannot be opened. The locking by the elastic locking portion 714a is set to be hard so as to make it difficult.

The passage wall member 715 is attached to the rear side of the rear base 712 and closes the rear end side of the ball extraction passage 705 which is open to the rear. Further, the passage wall member 715 closes a portion of the rear base 712 that is open to the rear on the exit side of the first discharge guide portion 712a and the second discharge guide portion 712b. The game balls B flowing through the second discharge guide section 712b can be discharged downward. Further, the passage wall member 715 holds the frame relay board 716 between the rear base 712 and covers the rear side of the frame relay board 716.

The frame relay board 716 is held between the rear base 712 and the passage wall member 715. The frame relay board 716 is for relaying connections between the handle touch sensor 192, single button operation sensor 194, first ball sensor 703, and second ball sensor 704 of the door frame 3 and the main control board 1310. .

In the base unit 710 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 121(a), from the ball socket 711a of the front base 711, the upper left shelf 713b and part of the upper right shelf 713d of the ball path member 713 are connected. It faces upward and can receive all the game balls B released downward from the game board 5. The game ball b that has fallen onto the upper left shelf 713b or the upper right shelf 713d through the ball socket 711a rolls to the right and flows down from the right end of the upper right shelf 713d onto the lower shelf 713f. Then, the game ball B that has flown down to the lower shelf portion 713f rolls to the left on the lower shelf portion 713f. At this time, if a plurality of game balls B are stacked vertically on the lower shelf portion 713f, they will be broken down by the upper rectifying wall portion 713e so that they are aligned in a line toward the left.

The game ball B that has rolled leftward on the lower shelf section 713f falls downward from the left end of the lower shelf section 713f, and if it is in front of the partition wall section 713p, it falls into the ball B that is accommodated in the front sensor accommodating section 713s. After being detected by the first ball sensor 703 and passing through the first ball guide section 713u, the ball passes through the first discharge guide section 712a of the rear base 712 and is discharged downward. On the other hand, if it is located behind the partition wall 713p, it is detected by the second ball sensor 704 housed in the rear sensor accommodating part 713t, and then discharged downward through the second discharge guiding part 712b of the rear base 712. be done.

In this way, in the base unit 710 of the present embodiment, the game balls B flow through separate paths before and after the partition wall portion 713p of the ball path member 713 and are discharged downward. A first ball path 701 is located in front of the partition wall 713p, and a second ball path 702 is located behind the partition wall 713p. Therefore, the game ball B that has fallen from the game board 5 forward of the partition wall 713p of the ball path member 713 flows through the first ball path 701, is detected by the first ball sensor 703, and is discharged downward. be able to. On the other hand, the game ball B that has fallen from the game board 5 to the rear of the partition wall 713p of the ball path member 713 flows through the second ball path 702, is detected by the second ball sensor 704, and is discharged downward. be able to.

In addition, the base unit 710 transfers the game balls B released from the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 to the ball extraction passage 705 of the rear base 712 in order to extract the game balls B from the ball tank 552, etc. It can be discharged downward through. The game balls B discharged downward from the first discharge guiding part 712a (first ball path 701), second discharge guiding part 712b (second ball path 702), and ball extraction passage 705 of the base unit 710 are The game ball B is delivered to the side collecting part (out receiving part, bucket, etc.).

According to the base unit 710 of the board unit 700 of this embodiment, since the plurality of notches 713q are provided in the upper left shelf section 713b, the upper right shelf section 713d, and the lower shelf section 713f, dirt can be removed through the notches 713q. Since dirt and dust can be dropped and removed from the first ball path 701 and second ball path 702, it is possible to avoid dust and the like from interfering with the circulation of game balls B, and to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging, etc. can be done.

In addition, since the front base 711, the rear base 712, the ball path member 713, and the passage wall member 715 are formed transparently, the door frame 3 can be opened forward with respect to the main body frame 4, and the game board can be opened from the main body frame 4. 5 is removed, it is possible to check from above the base unit 710 (board unit 700) whether or not game balls B are clogged in the ball path member 713 (first ball path 701 and second ball path 702). can be easily confirmed. In the part of the ball path member 713 where the game balls B are aligned in a line by the rectifying wall 713e and the lower shelf 713f, the lower shelf 713f is provided with a notch 713q, so that the rectifying wall 713e and the lower shelf If a ball jam occurs between the part 713f and the outer frame 2, open the body frame 4 forward with respect to the outer frame 2, and open the security cover 714 to insert a rod-shaped tool from below through the clearing port 711b and the notch 713q. It can be inserted between the rectifying wall part 713e and the lower shelf part 713f, and the ball clogging can be cleared using this tool.

Furthermore, a release port 711b that opens downward is provided below the rectifying wall portion 713e in the lower shelf portion 713f, and a crime prevention cover 714 that closes the release port 711b is provided. In addition to being able to clear the ball jam as described above, by keeping the clearing port 711b closed by the security cover 714 under normal conditions, a linear unauthorized tool can be removed from the clearing port 711b through the first ball path 701 or It is possible to prevent the ball from being inserted into the second ball path 702, and it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that has a high deterrent effect against fraudulent acts.

Furthermore, since the security cover 714 that opens and closes the release port 711b is opened and closed by rotating the front end side around the axis in the left and right direction, it is possible to open and close the main body frame 4 in a state where the security cover 714 is forgotten to be closed. If you try to close it against the outer frame 2, the security cover 714 will come into contact with an object that may come into contact with it (the connecting cylinder part 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43), making it impossible to close the main body frame 4. It is possible to make the user aware of the fact that the user has forgotten to close the cover, the security cover 714 can be reliably closed, and the security function of the security cover 714 can be exerted.

Further, on the lower surfaces of the upper left shelf section 713b, the lower shelf section 713f, and the upper wall section 713h, a plurality of flat inhibition ribs 713o that are spaced apart in the left-right direction and extend downward are provided, so that the linear Even if the tip of the unauthorized tool tries to move along the lower surfaces of the upper left shelf section 713b, the lower shelf section 713f, and the upper wall section 713h, it can contact the inhibition rib 713o and prevent the tip from moving; Further insertion of unauthorized tools can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts on the game board 5 through the ball path member 713 (the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702), and the burden is placed on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can reduce the risk of fraud and has a high deterrent effect against fraudulent acts.

In addition, as described above, the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 meander or crank due to the first discharge guiding portion 712a and second discharge guiding portion 712b of the rear base 712 and the ball path member 713. Even if a linear unauthorized tool is inserted from the exit side of the first discharge guide part 712a or the second discharge guide part 712b, the complicated route will prevent the intrusion. This makes it possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game board 5 through the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702.

In addition, since the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 can detect (count) all the game balls B released from the game board 5, the game balls B discharged to the game board 5 can be detected (counted). There is no need to provide a configuration for detecting the out ball B (for example, an out ball detection unit), and the cost for the game board 5 can be reduced. It is possible to secure a space corresponding to the configuration, and by providing a presentation device in the secured space, the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) can further entertain players.

In addition, since out balls flow through the first ball path 701 and safe balls flow through the second ball path 702, the number of safe balls counted on the game board 5 and the safe ball detected by the second ball sensor 704 are By comparing the count number of , it is possible to determine whether or not a fraudulent act is being performed on the game board 5, and it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that has a high deterrent effect against fraudulent acts.

Furthermore, if the payout rate (ball output rate) per predetermined time calculated from the number of safe balls per predetermined time and the number of out balls per predetermined time is displayed so that it can be visually checked by the player, the game Since a player wants to pay out a large number of game balls B, if the displayed payout rate is large, it is difficult to immediately recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is likely to pay out a large number of game balls B. This allows the player to easily select the pachinko machine 1 to play. In addition, if the payout rate is displayed so that it can be visually checked by the player, if a fraudulent act that causes a large number of game balls B to be paid out occurs, the displayed payout rate will become larger than normal. The pachinko machine 1 has a high deterrent effect against cheating because other players and the staff of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed can easily notice the cheating, making them hesitate to commit the cheating. It can be done.

Additionally, if the payout rate calculated from the number of safe balls and the number of out balls is displayed in a position that cannot be seen from the player's side, the payout rate calculated from the number of safe balls and the number of out balls may be displayed in a position that cannot be seen by the game hall staff, etc. for the same reason as above. This makes it possible to detect fraudulent activity. In addition, when performing maintenance on the pachinko machine 1, if the displayed payout rate is different from the normal value, it is necessary to Since there is a possibility of a malfunction in the board, connector, wiring cable, various sensors, etc., it is possible to respond to the malfunction at an early stage, and the burden on the game hall side can be reduced.

In addition, since the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 are separated from the ball removal path 705 for discharging the game balls B in the ball tank 552, the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 702 Game balls B without balls are not counted. Therefore, the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 can accurately count only the game balls B released from the game board 5.

In the above embodiment, an out ball flows through the first ball path 701 and a safe ball flows through the second ball path 702, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first ball path 701 The safe ball may flow through the second ball path 702, and the out ball may flow through the second ball path 702, and the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 may flow through the first ball path 701 and the second ball path, regardless of whether it is a safe ball or an out ball. Any of the ball paths 702 may be used for circulation.

Further, in the above embodiment, the security cover 714 is rotated to open and close the release port 711b, but the invention is not limited to this, and the release port 711b is opened and closed by sliding back and forth or left and right. Good as a thing.

In addition, in the above embodiment, by partitioning with one partition wall part 713p, the game ball B released downward from the game board 5 can be separated into two parts before and after the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702. Although the ball is ejected through one of two ball paths, the present invention is not limited to this. The game balls B passed through and released from the game board 5 may be discharged downward.

[5. Overall configuration of game board]
The overall configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 129 to 137. FIG. 129 is a front view of a game board in which the center accessory and the like are made opaque in a pachinko machine. 130 is a perspective view of the game board in FIG. 129 seen from the front right, FIG. 131 is a perspective view of the game board shown in FIG. 129 seen from the front left, and FIG. 132 is a perspective view of the game board seen from the back. . FIG. 133 is a schematic explanatory diagram of wiring from the function display unit on the main control board. FIG. 134 is a front view of the game board with the center accessory etc. made transparent. FIG. 135 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front, and FIG. 136 is an exploded perspective view of the game board exploded into its main components and viewed from the back. FIG. 137 is a front view of the game board in which the front unit is cut parallel to the surface of the game panel to reveal the inside of the game area where game balls circulate and the obstacle nails.

The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a into which a game ball B is driven when the player operates the handle 195 of the handle unit 180. The gaming area 5a includes a general prize opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, and a gate 2003 that provide a predetermined benefit (for example, payout of a predetermined number of gaming balls B) to the player by accepting or passing the gaming balls B. , a second starting opening 2004, a big winning opening 2005, and a prize winning opening 2006 are provided. In this game board 5, the game ball B is placed in the general prize opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, the accessory winning opening 2006, etc. in the gaming area 5a. This is for playing a game in which the driving operation of the handle 195 and the distribution of the game ball B within the game area 5a are performed so that the game ball B is accepted or passed.

The game board 5 includes a front component 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a generally rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 to define the rear end of the game area 5a. It includes a plate-shaped game panel 1100 and a plurality of magnetic sensors 1050 that detect magnetic fields acting illegally within the game area 5a. A plurality of obstacle nails N (see FIG. 137, etc.) that come into contact with the game ball B are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion of the front surface of the game panel 1100 that is within the game area 5a.

The game board 5 also includes a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and a game board 1200 attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200, which is played by driving a game ball B into the game area 5a. A main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 169, etc.) for controlling the contents is provided.

The game board 5 also includes a function display unit 1400 that displays the game status based on control signals from the main control board 1310 and is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player, and a game panel. A peripheral control unit 1500 placed on the rear side of the game panel 1100, an effect display device 1600 placed at the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a performance display device 1600 placed on the rear side of the game panel 1100. A panel relay board 1710 that relays the connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, a front unit 2000 attached to the front of the gaming panel 1100, and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear of the gaming panel 1100. It also has the following.

A production display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and a peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the production display device 1600. A panel relay board 1710 is attached to the back of the effect display device 1600 on the rear surface of the back unit 3000. The panel relay board 1710 includes the main control board 1310, the general winning opening sensor 3001, the first starting opening sensor 3002, the second starting opening sensor 2401, the gate sensor 2801, the big winning opening sensor 2402, the accessory winning opening sensor 2601, and the V It is for relaying connections with the winning opening sensor 3003, losing opening sensor 3004, starting opening solenoid 2412, attacker solenoid 2414, accessory winning opening solenoid 2612, V distribution solenoid 3007, magnetic sensor 1050, etc.

The table unit 2000 has a plurality of (three in this case) general winning openings 2001 that are always open to accept the game balls B hit in the gaming area 5a, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are the gaming area. A first starting port 2002 that is always open so that game balls B can be received at different positions within the game area 5a, and a gate 2003 that is always open so that game balls B can be received at further different positions within the game area 5a, Game balls B are accepted into the gate 2003, and the second starting port 2004 becomes capable of accepting the gaming balls B according to the normal lottery result drawn by drawing, and the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 is used for gaming. A grand prize opening 2005 that can accept the game ball B according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the ball B, and the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004. A game ball B can be accepted according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B, and the game ball accepted into the game ball B. It is provided with a V winning opening 2007 and a losing opening 2008 in which an opportunity of acceptance is given to B, and a plurality of magnetic sensors 1050 that detect magnetic fields acting illegally within the gaming area 5a.

In addition, the front unit 2000 includes a starting port unit 2100 that is installed directly above the lower end of the gaming area 5a at the center in the left-right direction within the gaming area 5a and has a first starting port 2002, and a front side of the starting port unit 2100. A side unit 2200 that is installed along the inner rail 1002 on the left side as viewed and has three general prize openings 2001, and a side upper left unit that is installed slightly above the left side of the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. 2300 and is provided on the right side in front view of the starting port unit 2100, which is the lower right corner in the gaming area 5a when viewed from the front, and has a second starting port 2004, a big prize opening 2005, and a first sub-out port 2021. It includes a first attacker unit 2400, and a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 provided above the starting port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 and slightly above the approximate center in the front view in the game area 5a. .

In addition, the front unit 2000 includes a second attacker unit 2600 which is provided above the first attacker unit 2400 on the right side of the center accessory 2500 and has an accessory prize opening 2006; A side right middle unit 2700 that is provided above and has one general winning opening 2001 and a second sub-out port 2022, and a gate that is provided above the side right middle unit 2700 and has a gate 2003. A member 2800.

The first attacker unit 2400 includes a second starting hole sensor 2401 that detects the game ball B received in the second starting hole 2004, and a big winning hole sensor 2402 that detects the game ball B accepted in the big winning hole 2005. It is equipped with. The second attacker unit 2600 is equipped with a prize winning hole sensor 2601 that detects the game ball B received in the prize winning hole 2006. The gate member 2800 is provided with a gate sensor 2801 that detects passage of the game ball B through the gate 2003.

The back unit 3000 includes a back box 3010 that is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 and has a box-like shape with an open front and a square opening 3010a on the rear wall; and a locking mechanism (not shown) for removably attaching the effect display device 1600. In addition, the back unit 3000 includes a general winning hole sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning hole 2001 provided in the front unit 2000, and a general winning hole sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the first starting hole 2002. A first starting hole sensor 3002 detects the game ball B distributed to the V winning hole 2007 after being accepted into the accessory winning hole 2006, and a V winning hole sensor 3003 detects the game ball B distributed to the V winning hole 2007 after being accepted into the accessory winning hole 2006. It has a losing hole sensor 3004 that detects the game balls B distributed to the losing hole 2008 (see FIG. 169, etc.).

In addition, the back unit 3000 includes a V winning opening door 3006 that can be moved forward and backward to open and close the V winning opening 2007, and a game ball that is received in the accessory winning opening 2006 by moving the V winning opening door 3006 forward and backward. A V distribution solenoid 3007 that distributes B to either the V winning opening 2007 or the losing opening 2008 is provided.

Furthermore, the back unit 3000 includes a back-front presentation unit 3100 provided near the front end inside the back box 3010, and a back-rear top presentation provided at the upper part of the back box 3010 on the rear side of the back-front presentation unit 3100. unit 3200, and a rear lower production unit 3300 provided at the lower part of the back box 3010 below the rear upper production unit.

[5-1. Front component]
The front component 1000 of the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 138 and 139. FIG. 138(a) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel of the game board seen from the front, and FIG. 138(b) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel seen from the back. FIG. 139(a) is a front view showing an enlarged view of the front component and the upper right corner of the game panel, FIG. 139(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the Sue line in FIG. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the vehicle a) taken apart into its main components and viewed from the front.

The front component 1000 is entirely transparent. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has a substantially circular inner shape that penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the inner circumference of the inner shape defines the outer circumference of the game area 5a. The front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape along the clockwise circumferential direction from a lower end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, passes the upper end of the center in the left-right direction as seen from the front, and extends to the diagonally upper right corner; The inner rail 1002 is arranged inside the front component 1000 along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front to the diagonally upper left side when viewed from the front, and the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 when viewed from the front. An out guide portion 1003 is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and slopes downwardly toward the rear.

The front component 1000 also includes a lower right rail 1004 that is sloped linearly from the right end of the out guide section 1003 in front view to near the right side of the front component 1000 so that the right end side is slightly higher; The right rail 1005 extends from the right end of the front component 1000 along the right side of the front component 1000 to the bottom of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 and has an upper part curved inward to the front component 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail. A stopper part 1006 is connected to the upper end of the outer rail 1001, and the game ball B that has rolled along the outer rail 1001 comes into contact with the stopper part 1006.

The front component 1000 is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the front component 1000 and the outer rail 1001. The backflow prevention member can be rotated only between an open position in which the space between the backflow prevention member and the outer rail 1001 is opened by rotating in the circumferential direction, and is biased by a spring (not shown) to return to the closed position. 1007.

Further, the front component 1000 includes an out port 1008 that penetrates back and forth at the rear end of the out guide portion 1003 at the lower center of the frame in the left and right direction when viewed from the front. The game ball B guided rearward by the out guiding section 1003 passes through the out port 1008 and is discharged to the rear of the front component 1000 (game panel 1100).

In addition, the front component 1000 is located on the outside of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the vicinity of the lower end extending substantially perpendicularly, on the lower side of the out guide portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and on the outside of the right rail 1005. Each portion is provided with a security recess 1009 recessed from the front end to the rear. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security recess 1009 has a rear protrusion 172 that protrudes rearward of the security cover 170 on the door frame 3. It will be inserted. As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is in a complicatedly bent state due to the rear protrusion 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to enter the gaming area 5a from the lower front side of the board 5 through between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 172 and the security recess 1009. , it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the gaming area 5a.

Further, the front component 1000 includes a notch 1010 that is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner when viewed from the front. This notch 1010 coincides with the notch 1122 of the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, it passes through the notch 1010 and the notch 1122, and the lower full ball path unit 610 is opened. The front end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b face forward.

Furthermore, the front component 1000 includes a function display unit attachment part 1011 formed at the upper left corner when viewed from the front, to which the function display unit 1400 is attached, and a certificate stamp pasting part 1012 formed at the lower left corner. There is.

Further, the front component 1000 is formed substantially entirely transparent, so that the game panel 1100 disposed on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front.

Further, as shown in FIG. 139, the front component 1000 is recessed from the front to the rear in a predetermined range along the right rail 1005 from the blocking portion 1006 at the upper right corner in front view, and the specifications of the pachinko machine 1 are displayed. A spec sticker affixing part 1021 to which a spec sticker 1020 is pasted, an insertion pin 1022 that protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the rear of the spec sticker 1021 and is used to position the stopper 1006, and the center of the insertion pin 1022. A separation hole 1023 penetrating from the front to the rear is provided.

The spec sticker attachment part 1021 is formed to have a size that is one size larger than the outer shape of the spec sticker 1020, and is recessed rearward deeper (0.4 mm to 1.0 mm) than the thickness of the spec sticker 1020 (FIG. 139). (see (b)). In this spec sticker pasting section 1021, a horizontally extending portion at the lower end and a straight line portion extending vertically upward from the right end of the portion serve as a contact surface for pasting the spec sticker 1020. It is set.

The insertion pin 1022 extends rearward from the rear surface of the spec sticker attachment part 1021 to the same position as the rear end of the front component 1000. The blocking portion 1006 is positioned by inserting the insertion pin 1022.

The separation hole 1023 penetrates the front component 1000 from the front side to the rear side. The separation hole 1023 is circular and extends back and forth with a constant inner diameter. When this separation hole 1023 is assembled to the game board 5, the front side is closed by the spec sticker 1020 affixed to the spec sticker affixing part 1021, and the rear side is closed by the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. The inside of the separation hole 1023 is a closed space (closed space). As shown in the figure, this separation hole 1023 is provided near the edge of the spec sticker attachment part 1021 (spec sticker 1020).

The separation hole 1023 of this embodiment has an inner diameter within a range of 2 mm to 6 mm. If the separation hole 1023 is smaller than this, the diameter of the separation rod-like member (tool) inserted into the separation hole 1023 will become smaller, which may cause it to bend easily and prevent the spec seal 1020 from being pressed sufficiently. This is because if the separation hole 1023 is larger than this, the spec sticker 1020 may be bent at the separation hole 1023 portion, and the appearance of the spec sticker 1020 may deteriorate.

According to the front component 1000 of this embodiment, if the spec sticker 1020 cannot be correctly pasted on the spec sticker pasting part 1021 during manufacturing of the pachinko machine 1, it can be separated from the rear of the front component 1000. By passing a rod-shaped member through the hole 1023 and pressing the spec seal 1020 from the rear to the front with the tip of the rod, the spec seal 1020 can be removed so that the edge of the spec seal 1020 can be rolled forward. By pulling the spec sticker 1020, the spec sticker 1020 can be easily removed from the spec sticker attachment part 1021, and the spec sticker 1020 can be reapplied.

In addition, with the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 separated, a rod-shaped member is passed through the separation hole 1023 from the rear of the front component 1000, and the spec sticker 1020 is pressed from behind with its tip. Since the spec sticker 1020 can be easily removed from the spec sticker attachment part 1021, the spec sticker 1020 can be easily replaced when changing models.

Furthermore, as described above, when the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 are separated, the spec sticker 1020 can be easily removed from the spec sticker attachment part 1021 using the separation hole 1023, so that the pachinko machine 1 The component parts can be easily separated by material, and the cost of disposing of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

Furthermore, by pasting the spec sticker 1020 on the spec sticker pasting portion 1021, the separation hole 1023 can be hidden from the front, thereby suppressing deterioration in appearance due to the separation hole 1023, and also making it possible for players to see the separation hole 1023. It is possible to make it difficult for the user to notice the existence of the separation hole 1023, and to make it difficult for the user to plan fraudulent acts using the separation hole 1023.

Furthermore, when assembled into the pachinko machine 1, the separation hole 1023 is closed from the rear by the game panel 1100 assembled on the rear side of the front component 1000 to which the spec sticker 1020 is pasted. Since it does not have a hole that passes through to the rear side like a conventional pachinko machine, it is possible to prevent a wire-shaped illegal tool such as a piano wire from being inserted into the game board 5 through the hole. can prevent fraudulent acts from occurring.

In addition, since the separation hole 1023 is closed from the rear by the game panel 1100, even if an unauthorized tool is inserted from the front through the spec seal 1020 and into the separation hole 1023, the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) prevents it from being blocked. Since it is possible to prevent the insertion (intrusion) from the rear as described above, it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game board 5 from the front through the separation hole 1023, thereby preventing fraudulent acts from occurring. To provide a pachinko machine 1 which can prevent fraudulent acts, and can deter people from committing fraudulent acts because a trace is left on the spec seal 1020 when a fraudulent tool penetrates the spec seal 1020, and has a high deterrent effect against fraudulent acts. be able to.

Note that in the above embodiment, the separation hole 1023 is provided in the spec sticker affixing part 1021, but the invention is not limited to this, and the separation hole may be provided in the part where the seal is affixed, such as the certificate stamp affixing part 1012. It may also be provided.

[5-2. Game panel]
The game panel 1100 on the game board 5 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 138 and the like. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front component 1000, and the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are attached thereto. The game panel 1100 includes a flat panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and which is made of transparent synthetic resin, and which holds the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110. The frame-shaped panel holder 1120 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface. On the front surface of the game panel 1100, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement (see FIG. 137, etc.).

The panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin board such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin, or an inorganic board such as glass or metal. The thickness of this panel board 1110 is thinner than that of the panel holder, and is the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can sufficiently hold the obstacle nails N in the front or attach the front unit 2000. It is said that Note that in this embodiment, the panel board 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin board.

The panel board 1110 is at the lowest position within the game area 5a, and a position corresponding to the outlet 1008 of the front component 1000 is recessed upward from the lower end. Furthermore, a plurality of openings 1112 are formed in the panel board 1110, penetrating the front and back, and through which the front unit 2000 is attached.

Although not shown in the drawings, the panel board 1110 has a plurality of positioning holes formed in round holes and short elongated holes passing through the front and back, and the upper and lower edges thereof are spaced apart in the left-right direction. A plurality of engagement step portions formed with a thin plate thickness are provided. The positioning hole is for positioning the panel holder 1120 by inserting a protruding pin (not shown) of the panel holder 1120. The engagement stepped portion is configured to be removably attached to the panel holder 1120 by being engaged with an engagement claw (not shown) or an engagement piece (not shown) of the panel holder 1120. be.

As shown in FIG. 138, the panel board 1110 has a large opening 1112 for attaching the center accessory 2500, which is offset to the upper right from the center when viewed from the front. As a result, the panel board 1110 has a frame shape, and when viewed from the front, the width perpendicular to the distribution direction of the game balls B (the circumferential direction of the frame shape) is such that the left side and bottom side of the center are The width is wide enough to allow the balls B to line up, and the upper side is narrow enough to prevent a plurality of game balls B from being lined up.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 is sized to include the panel board 1110, has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is formed thicker than the panel board 1110 (about 20 mm in this embodiment). The panel holder 1120 is made of transparent synthetic resin (eg, thermoplastic synthetic resin). This panel holder 1120 has a holding step (not shown) that is approximately the same size as the panel board 1110 and recessed from the front side to the rear side, and a holding step that is approximately the same size as the gaming area 5a. It is provided with a through hole 1121 penetrating in the front-rear direction.

Furthermore, the panel holder 1120 includes a notch 1122 that is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner when viewed from the front. This notch 1122 is formed to match the notch 1010 of the front component 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, it penetrates through the notch 1010 and the notch to the lower part. The front end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b of the full bulb path unit 610 face forward.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is formed with an out recess 1123 that extends upward from the lower end to a position corresponding to the out port 1008 and is recessed from the rear surface toward the front. The upper part of the out recess 1123 communicates with the out port 1008.

Although not shown, the panel holder 1120 also includes a plurality of protruding pins that protrude forward from the holding step and are each inserted into a plurality of positioning holes in the panel plate 1110, and a plurality of protruding pins arranged outside the holding step. The panel plate 1110 has three engaging claws that elastically engage with the engaging steps on the upper side and the lower left side of the panel plate 1110, and protrudes upward from the lower outside of the holding step. A pair of engagement pieces that engage with two engagement steps on the lower side, respectively. The panel holder 1120 is assembled by engaging the engagement step on the lower side of the panel plate 1110 with the engagement piece from diagonally above the front, and then moving the upper part of the panel plate 1110 rearward to tilt the upper and lower left sides. The panel board 1110 can be removably attached while being housed in the holding step by elastically engaging the engagement step with the engagement claw. At this time, the protruding pin of the panel holder 1120 is inserted into the positioning hole of the panel plate 1110, and the panel plate 1110 is positioned at a predetermined position with respect to the panel holder 1120.

Since this game panel 1100 is formed transparent together with the front component 1000 attached to the front side, when assembled on the game board 5, it is possible to reduce the visibility of the boundary of the game area 5a, and the player It is possible to give a feeling of openness to the players, and it is possible to make the gaming area 5a appear larger (wider) to the player, although the actual size of the gaming area 5a does not change.

Furthermore, since the game panel 1100 is transparent together with the front component 1000, light from the performance display device 1600, front unit 2000, back unit 3000, etc. is reflected or refracted forward (towards the player). This makes it appear as if it is emitting light, and the overall decorativeness of the game board 5 can be further enhanced.

[5-3. Board holder]
The board holder 1200 in the game board 5 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 135 and 136. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long box with the upper and front sides open, and the bottom surface is inclined toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 cut out from the front end toward the rear at the center of the bottom surface in the left-right direction. This board holder 1200, when assembled to the game board 5, covers the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the back side of the game panel 1100 from below and from the rear side, and also covers the main control unit 1300 on the back side. A main control board box 1320 is attached.

When the board holder 1200 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the ejecting part 1201 is located directly above the ejecting ball receiving part 628 of the base unit 620b of the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. As a result, all of the game balls B discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1008 and the game balls B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can be received, and the bottom The ball can be discharged from the discharge part 1201 formed in the lower part to the discharge ball receiving part 628 or the out-ball passage 663 (see FIG. 115). The game balls B discharged to the out ball path 663 are detected (counted) one by one by an out sensor 664.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
The main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 135 and 136. Main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 169) that controls the game content and payout of game balls B, etc., a setting change board 1311 (see FIG. 133) that can set the gaming performance, A main control board box 1320 that accommodates a main control board 1310 and a setting change board 1311 and is attached to the board holder 1200 is provided.

The main control board box 1320 is composed of a cover body and a base body. The cover body and base body are made of polycarbonate resin and are transparently molded. The main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 can be accommodated in the internal space formed by the cover body and the base body. Since the cover body and the base body are transparently molded from polycarbonate resin, it is possible to check the state of the front and back sides of the main control board 1310 and setting change board 1311 (whether or not any unauthorized modification has been made). or whether a fraudulent IC is mounted) can be confirmed from outside the main control board box 1320. Moreover, the main control board box 1320 is equipped with a plurality of sealing mechanisms corresponding to the cover body and the base body, respectively, and when the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the main control board box 1320 is closed. In order to open the control board box 1320, it is necessary to destroy the sealing mechanism, and traces of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be left behind. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to discover unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, thereby increasing deterrence against unauthorized acts on the main control board 1310.

The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to an interface board 635, a peripheral control board 1510, and a setting change board 1311. In addition, the main control board 1310 includes a function display unit 1400, a general winning opening sensor 3001, a first starting opening sensor 3002, a gate sensor 2801, a second starting opening sensor 2401, a big winning opening sensor 2402, an accessory winning opening sensor 2601, It is connected to the V winning opening sensor 3003, the losing opening sensor 3004, the starting opening solenoid 2412, the attacker solenoid 2414, the accessory winning opening solenoid 2612, the V distribution solenoid 3007, the magnetic sensor 1050, etc.

The setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 includes a setting key switch 1311a that can switch the setting values of the pachinko machine 1 and check the setting values, a setting switch button 1311b that can select and switch the setting values, A setting change permission lamp 1311c indicating a state in which switching of setting values of the pachinko machine 1 is permitted. The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is connected to the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 (inter-board connection). may be electrically connected via). By making this connector connection (inter-board connection), signals from the setting key switch 1311a and signals from the setting switching button 1311b are electrically connected to the main control board 1310. The setting change board 1311 has a vertical distance between its right side and left side that is almost the same as a vertical distance between the right side and left side of the main control board 1310 , and a horizontal distance between the right and left sides of the main control board 1310 . A center line that is shorter than the distance dimension in the direction and that passes through the midpoints of the right and left sides of the main control board 1310 and a center line that passes through the midpoints of the right and left sides of the setting change board 1311. It matches.

The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is arranged along the right side of the setting change board 1311 so that the center of its vertical distance dimension is located on the center line, and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 is arranged along the right side of the setting change board 1311. Along the left side of the control board 1310, the center of the vertical distance is located on the center line. A setting key switch 1311a is arranged below the center line of the setting change board 1311 and has a setting key cylinder in which a setting key is inserted and rotated, and a setting key switch 1311a has a press operation section above the center line of the setting change board 1311. A setting change permission lamp that can emit light in a single color (for example, red) is located on the center line of the setting change board 1311 and is located above and to the left of the setting key switch 1311a (bottom left of the setting switch button 1311b), where the switch button 1311b is arranged. 1311c is arranged. A setting display 1310g consisting of a single 7-segment LED display with a decimal point (so-called dot) is arranged above the center line of the main control board 1310 and near the connector MSCN. A base monitor 1310h consisting of six 7-segment LED displays with decimal points (so-called dots) connected in a row from the center to the right side is arranged further down, and is located near the center of the lower side of the main control board 1310. A RAM clear switch 1310f having a press operation section is disposed at.

In this embodiment, the setting key is at a position where the setting key is ready to be inserted into the insertion port formed in the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a (for example, a position where the longitudinal direction of the rectangular insertion port is along the vertical direction). In this case, the setting key switch 1311a is set to OFF as the initial position. When the setting key cylinder is in the initial position, the setting key can be inserted into the insertion port, and the setting key can be removed from the insertion port. In this embodiment, even if the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 with the setting key inserted into the insertion slot, other The distance dimension in the depth direction of the setting key switch 1311a is adopted so that the members of the pachinko machine (or the members of the island equipment of the game hall) and the setting key do not interfere with each other and are not damaged.

The setting key switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and performing the first ON operation, and this setting key ON signal is set. It is input from the change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Further, by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position and performing a second ON operation, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on to the OK key, and the signal of this OK key ON can be turned on. is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Additionally, the setting key cylinder is moved so that the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON to the original position, which is the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by being rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise and then turned OFF, and the setting key switch 1311a can be returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the enter key was turned ON to the original position. The setting key switch 1311a is turned off by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise so as to return it to its initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a). can be turned off. This OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. In this embodiment, two completely different functions, the setting key ON function and the enter key ON function, can be realized with only the setting key switch 1311a, depending on the direction in which the setting key cylinder is rotated. The operation of turning on the setting key and the operation of turning on the enter key can be performed together using only the setting key switch 1311a.

The front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, the pressing operation part of the setting changeover button 1311b, and the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f are connected through openings formed in the cover body of the corresponding main control board box 1320. Although they are exposed, there are "gaps" formed between the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, the press operation section of the setting changeover button 1311b, and the openings corresponding to the press operation section of the RAM clear switch 1310f. In order to prevent wires from entering and modifying the setting change board 1311 and the main control board 1310, wire intrusion prevention parts are molded on the cover body for each of these openings. . Although the setting display 1310g and the base monitor 1310h are housed in the internal space formed by the cover body and the base body and cannot be touched at all, the cover body is molded transparent as described above. Through the cover body, it is possible to visually confirm the setting value displayed by the setting display 1310g and the number of pitches displayed by the base monitor 1310h.

In order to prevent unauthorized modification, the wiring pattern for transmitting the setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a, the wiring pattern for transmitting the enter key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a, and the wiring pattern for transmitting the setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a, The wiring pattern for transmitting the OFF signal of 1311a and the wiring pattern for transmitting the signal from the setting switch button 1311b should be routed so that they do not come close to each other (separated from each other) on the setting change board 1311. At the same time, the connection to the terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 (terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310) is also formed separately, and the main control board 1310 also connects various signals from the setting key switch 1311a. (In other words, the wiring pattern in which the setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, the wiring pattern in which the enter key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, and the wiring pattern in which the setting key switch 1311a OFF signal is transmitted. The wiring pattern (to which the signal from the setting switch button 1311b is transmitted) and the wiring pattern to which the signal from the setting switch button 1311b is transmitted are formed so that they do not come close to each other (separated from each other), and the RAM clear switch 1310f The wiring patterns through which signals are transmitted are also formed so as not to be close to each other (separated from each other).

The setting key switch 1311a, setting switching button 1311b, and setting display 1310g will be briefly explained. First, a case in which setting values are changed will be briefly explained, and a case in which a confirmation display of the current setting values is displayed will be briefly explained. The setting key is an important key that allows you to check the current setting values in addition to changing the setting values, so only a limited number of people, including the game hall manager, should possess it. Permitted and limited to 2-3 people.

When changing the setting values, when turning on the power to the Pachinko machine 1 or when the power is restored after a power outage (instantaneous power outage), the main body frame should be 4 is released, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. A "predetermined setting value change permission condition" that the setting key switch 1311a is turned on needs to be satisfied. In other words, the person who actually changes the settings should first check that the power is not turned on to the pachinko machine 1 (the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), and then change the settings to the outer frame 2. Open the main body frame 4, then insert the setting key into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, rotate it 60 degrees clockwise, and perform the first ON operation. The setting key of the key switch 1311a is turned on to power on the pachinko machine 1. Note that the above-described "predetermined setting value change permission condition" may further include a condition that the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 131Of is operated and an operation signal is input. That is, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 or when the power is restored after a power outage (instantaneous power outage), the main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2, and the setting key switch 1311a is opened. The setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise, and the first ON operation is performed to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON, and It may be possible to change the setting value when a "predetermined setting value change permission condition" that the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated is satisfied.

A person who changes the settings should first check that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), and then move the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2. Then, insert the setting key into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, rotate the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise, and perform the first ON operation. Turn the key switch 1311a to the setting key ON. Subsequently, the power switch 630a in FIG. 7 is operated to turn on the power to the pachinko machine 1. As a result, a setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a stores the current setting values (setting values 1 to 6 at the time when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned on for the first time) stored in a specific area of its built-in RAM. The set value) is displayed on the setting display 1310g, and the setting change permission lamp 1311c is switched from off to on.

When a person who changes the settings of a setting value presses the press operation part of the setting change button 1311b, a detection signal from the setting change button 1311b of the setting change board 1311 is transmitted from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. is input to. Every time a person who changes the setting value presses the press operation part of the setting change button 1311b, the main control MPU 1310a changes the current setting value based on the detection signal from the setting change button 1311b of the setting change board 1311. The value is increased by 1 from 1, and when it reaches the maximum setting value of 6, it returns to the initial value of 1, the value is increased by 1 again, and the setting value is displayed on the setting display 1310g.

When determining the setting value, the person who changes the setting value should rotate the setting key cylinder 120 degrees counterclockwise (that is, move the setting key switch 1311a to the setting key where the setting key is turned ON). Turn the cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it from its rotational position to its original initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a), and then turn it off. By rotating the setting key switch 1311a by 60 degrees counterclockwise and performing the second ON operation, the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON by the enter key. This enter key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Thereby, the main control MPU 1310a stores the changed and determined setting values in a specific area of the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a.

Note that by rotating the setting key cylinder 120 degrees counterclockwise (that is, moving the setting key switch 1311a from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key is turned on) to the initial position that is the original position (that is, turning the setting key switch 1311a When the switch 1311a is returned to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns OFF, the ON signal of the enter key may be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. In this case, After displaying the set value on the setting display 1310g by pressing the push operation part of the setting switch button 1311b, the set value is determined by simply turning off the setting key switch 1311a, and then the setting key is removed from the setting key cylinder. This improves work efficiency.

The person who changes the setting value should return the setting key switch 1311a from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the enter key was turned ON to the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a was turned OFF). The setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise and turning it OFF. This setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a switches the setting display 1310g from displaying the setting value to not displaying it, and from lighting the setting change permission lamp 1311c to turning it off.

The person who changes the setting value takes out the setting key from the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, closes the main body frame 4 against the outer frame 2, and then changes the setting value. complete.

When displaying the currently set setting values, the outer frame 2 , the main body frame 4 is opened, and the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to turn on the first ON. A "predetermined setting value display permission condition" must be satisfied that the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by being operated. In other words, the person who actually displays the currently set setting values must first confirm that the Pachinko machine 1 is powered on (the state in which the power has been restored after a power outage or instantaneous power outage has occurred), and then , open the main body frame 4 from the outer frame 2, then insert the setting key into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a and rotate it 60 degrees clockwise to open the first By turning on the setting key switch 1311a, the setting key is turned on.

The person who displays the currently set setting values must first check that the Pachinko machine 1 is powered on (the state in which power has been restored after a power outage or instantaneous power outage), and then Then, insert the setting key into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a and turn it 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. As a result, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a stores the current setting values (setting values 1 to 6 at the time when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned on for the first time) stored in a specific area of its built-in RAM. Among them, the set value) is displayed on the setting display 1310g. At this time, the setting change permission lamp 1311c remains turned off, and even if the person performing the confirmation display of the currently set setting value presses the press operation part of the setting change button 1311b, this press operation does not work. Correspondingly, the setting value is not changed at all, nor is the content displayed on the setting display 1310g.

When the person who performs the confirmation display of the currently set setting value completes the confirmation of the currently set setting value, the person who performs the confirmation display of the currently set setting value moves the setting key switch 1311a from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key was turned on to the original position (that is, Turn off the setting key switch 1311a by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return it to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a. This setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.

The main control MPU 1310a switches the setting display 1310g from a state in which setting values are displayed to a state in which they are not displayed.

The person who wishes to check and display the currently set setting values removes the setting key from the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, closes the main body frame 4 against the outer frame 2, and then sets the current setting value. Complete the confirmation display of the set values that have been set.

As mentioned above, the predetermined setting value change permission conditions are as follows: When the power is restored at the time of recovery, the main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2, and the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is moved clockwise. While it is necessary that the setting key is turned ON by turning the setting key by 60 degrees and performing the first ON operation, the predetermined setting value display permission condition is as described above. 1, or after the power is restored after a power outage (momentary power outage), the main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2, and the setting key switch 1311a is set. It is necessary that the setting key is turned ON by inserting the setting key into the insertion port of the key cylinder, rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise, and performing the first ON operation. In this way, the predetermined setting value change permission condition and the predetermined setting value display permission condition are such that the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2, and the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a is There is a common requirement that the setting key is turned on by inserting the setting key into the , turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise, and performing the first ON operation. The difference is that the predetermined setting value change permission condition requires "at the time of power restoration," whereas the predetermined setting value display permission condition requires "after power restoration."

Here, to briefly explain the set value, the "set value" refers to the probability for determining whether it is a jackpot or not, the probability for determining whether it is a small hit or not, as well as the probability from when the probability changes to the normal It is possible to change the probability for determining the lottery when moving to the next time, the allocation rate to the area that is advantageous to the player, etc. The probability (degree of advantage) of being able to increase the number of game balls B that can be played is set in advance. In this embodiment, as setting values, setting value 1, setting value 2, setting value 3, setting value 4, setting value 5, and setting value 6 are prepared in advance, and from setting value 1 to setting value 6. The probability of being advantageous to the player (degree of advantage) is set in advance. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 uses various tables (for example, a jackpot judgment table in which the ratio of the jackpot judgment value indicating that the jackpot has been won, A jackpot symbol determination table that specifies the percentage of the decision value for determination, a small hit determination table that specifies the percentage of the small win decision value that indicates winning the small hit, and a percentage of the decision value for the determination of the small win symbol. It is used to select the small winning symbol determination table that will be used, the normal time transition determination table that defines the percentage of the determination value for transition from probability change to normal time, etc.), and various distribution rates that are associated with set values. Various tables (for example, a distribution table that defines the distribution time, a block that manages the drive of an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, etc.) are selected. In various tables used in various lottery determinations that are associated with set values, various determination values are allocated at predetermined ratios. Note that the various tables used in various lottery decisions are set so that at least some of the values are different from each other, and the various tables used for various allocation rates are set so that at least some of the values are different from each other. In some cases, the values may differ based on the relationship between the table corresponding to the block that manages the drive of one electrical drive source and the table corresponding to the block that manages the drive of the other electrical drive source. Some are set to . In addition, the above-mentioned setting values are six setting values (integers) ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 6, but they may be in a smaller range than this, or they may be in a larger range. It may be something. For example, there may be four setting values (integers) ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 4, or eight setting values (integers) ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 8.

As described above, the setting display 1310g not only displays setting values, but also allows the main control MPU 1310a to check the contents of its own internal RAM when power is restored to determine whether there is an abnormality. If it is determined that there is an abnormality, if the power-off processing on the main control side has not completed normally when the power is turned off, there is an abnormality in the contents stored in the internal RAM (or if the (This is not possible) and displays an error message to that effect. In this embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the alphabet E on the setting display 1310g as an error display.

Next, to briefly explain the base monitor 1310h, the base monitor 1310h collects the game balls B launched into the game area 5a through the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a defined on the game board 5. The number of game balls B played is displayed. Among the game balls B fired into the game area 5a, the game balls B collected by the out port 1008 are detected by the out sensor 664 (see FIG. 169, etc.), and this detection signal is transmitted via the panel relay board 1710. It is input to the main control MPU 1310a.

The main control MPU 1310a counts the number of game balls B collected by the outlet 1008, stores the counting result (total number) in a specific area of its built-in RAM, and displays it on the base monitor 1310h. It has become.

In the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON to the original position, which is the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turn it on again) to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON. The signal of this enter key ON was inputted from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the setting key switch 1311a could be set from the initial position. The setting key switch 1311a' may be configured such that the setting key switch 1311a' can be rotated only within the range up to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder when the key is turned on. In this case, move the setting key switch 1311a' counterclockwise to return it from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). By turning the setting key switch 1311a' by 60 degrees toward the direction and turning it OFF, the setting key switch 1311a' can be turned on as a decision key, and the signal of this decision key ON is transmitted from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. (The configuration of the setting key switch 1311a' may be referred to as "modification example (1) of the enter key").

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON to the original position, which is the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then turn it OFF by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise as shown in the figure below. The signal of this enter key ON was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the setting change board 1311 has a press operation section. A decision key button may also be provided. In this case, the press operation part of the enter key button is exposed through the opening formed in the cover body of the main control board box 1320 corresponding to the enter key button, and the press operation part of the enter key button and the corresponding A wire intrusion prevention part is provided on the cover body for the opening to prevent wires from entering through the "gap" formed in the opening and modifying the setting change board 1311 and the main control board 1310. The structure will be molded. When the press operation portion of the enter key button is pressed, this operation signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the OK key is ON when the press operation section of the OK key button is pressed based on the detection signal from the OK key button. When the press operation is not performed, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON.

Note that the position where the enter key button is placed on the setting change board 1311 may be near the setting key switch 1311a, or may be near the setting switch button 1311b. The cover body of the main control board box 1320 has a sticker printed with the name of each button at the position corresponding to the enter key button and the setting switch button 1311b so that the enter key button and the setting switch button 1311b are not confused. (Instead of this sticker, the name of each button may be molded on the cover body.) In addition, in order to avoid confusion between the enter key button and the setting switch button 1311b, a button with a cover that covers the press operation section of either one of the enter key button and the setting switch button 1311b (for pressing the press operation section) is provided. ), the color of the press operation part may be different, or the external shape or press operation of the enter key button and the setting switch button 1311b may be changed. A switch having a different shape may be used, or a switch of another type that does not have a press operation part may be used as the enter key button. Examples of other types of switches that do not have a press operation part as a decision key button include toggle switches with a lever, slide switches with a slide part, rotary switches with a rotary operation part, rocker switches, touch switches, etc. One example is a switch. In addition, when the setting change board 1311 is provided with an enter key button and a setting switch button 1311b, in order to prevent unauthorized modification, the wiring pattern for the enter key button and the wiring pattern for the setting switch button 1311b should be routed. They are formed so as not to be close to each other (separated from each other) on the setting change board 1311, and the connections to the terminals of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 (terminals of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310) are also spaced apart. In the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern for transmitting the detection signal from the enter key button and the wiring pattern for transmitting the detection signal from the setting switch button 1311b are also routed so that they are not close to each other ( formed at a distance from each other). In addition, when a setting key button is provided on the setting change board 1311, it is possible to rotate the setting key switch 1311a only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on. (The aspect of the enter key button (which may include the aspect of the setting key switch 1311 a') may be referred to as "Modified example (2) of the enter key").

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turn it on again) to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. A detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 that detects whether a finger is touching the ball, and a detection signal from the single button operation sensor 194 that detects whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped according to the player's will. The signals may be branched at the payout control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633, and based on these detection signals, it may be determined whether or not the enter key is turned on. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the enter key is ON when the palm or fingers are touching the handle 195 based on the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192; When it is not touched, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON, and/or when the launching of the game ball B is forcibly stopped based on the detection signal from the single button operation sensor 194, the enter key is not ON. On the other hand, when the launching of the game ball B is not forcibly stopped, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON (aspects of the handle touch sensor (including the aspect of a single button operation sensor) ) may be written as "Modified example (3) of decision key").

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turn it on again) to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the firing control section of the payout control board 633, which will be described later. The firing reference pulses are branched from the firing timing control circuit provided in the firing timing control circuit 633b at the dispensing control board 633, and are inputted to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 633. It may also be determined whether or not it is ON. The firing reference pulse is a reference pulse that allows 100 game balls B to be fired toward the game area 5a per minute, and is generated based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the enter key is ON when the firing reference pulse from the payout control board 633 is input, while determining that the enter key is not ON when the firing reference pulse is not input. (The mode of the firing reference pulse may be described as “determination key modification (4)”).

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turn it on again) to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the motion of the player seated opposite the pachinko machine 1 is detected. If the game board 5 is provided with a distance measurement sensor capable of detecting The signal may be branched at the relay board and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the relay board, and based on this detection signal, it may be determined whether or not the enter key is turned on. The distance sensor detects light emitted by a light emitting part that passes through the transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 and is reflected on the player's arm or hand within a predetermined distance. The reflected light passes through the transparent glass plate 162 again and is received by the light receiving section, thereby making it possible to detect the player's actions. In this case, when the detection signal from the ranging sensor is input via the relay board, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not there is movement based on this detection signal, and when it determines that there is movement, it turns on the enter key. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no operation, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON (the mode of the ranging sensor may be described as "modification of the enter key (5)") .

Further, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and performing the first ON operation. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation. By doing so, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the enter key ON, and this enter key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is set. The setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise so that it returns from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder when the key is turned on to its original initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by being rotated and then turned OFF, and the setting key switch 1311a can also be changed from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the enter key was turned on to the initial position (that is, the setting key). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise so as to return it to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the key switch 1311a OFF. This OFF signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the information conveying the setting key ON, enter key ON, and OFF is sent to the outside as serial information. A serial output circuit capable of serial output may be provided in the setting key switch 1311a. Thereby, security can be improved for the signal from the setting key switch 1311a. The setting key switch 1311a provided with this serial output circuit was provided on the setting change board 1311, but instead, it may be provided on the main control board 1310 or may be provided on the payout control board 633. . When the serial information serially output from this serial output circuit is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a turns the setting key ON, enter key ON, and It is possible to determine which of the OFF signals is being transmitted (an aspect of the setting key switch 1311a having a serial circuit may be referred to as "modified example (6) of the enter key").

Further, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and performing the first ON operation. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation. By doing so, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the enter key ON, and this enter key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is set. The setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise so that it returns from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder when the key is turned on to its original initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by being rotated and then turned OFF, and the setting key switch 1311a can also be changed from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the enter key was turned on to the initial position (that is, the setting key). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise so as to return it to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the key switch 1311a OFF. This OFF signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the information conveying the setting key ON, enter key ON, and OFF is sent to the outside as a pulse signal. A pulse output circuit capable of outputting the pulse may be provided in the setting key switch 1311a. Thereby, security can be improved for signals from the setting key switch 1311a. The setting key switch 1311a provided with this pulse output circuit was provided on the setting change board 1311, but instead of this, it may be provided on the main control board 1310 or may be provided on the payout control board 633. . For example, the pulse width of the pulse signal output from this pulse output circuit is set to 1 ms when the information conveys that the setting key is ON, and the pulse width is set to 3 ms when the information conveys that the enter key is ON. If the information conveys OFF, the pulse width is set to 5 ms. When the pulse signal output from this pulse output circuit is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a turns the setting key ON, enter key ON, and OFF (an aspect of the setting key switch 1311a having a pulse output circuit may be referred to as "modified example (7) of the enter key").

Further, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and performing the first ON operation. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation. By doing so, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the enter key ON, and this enter key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is set. The setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise so that it returns from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder when the key is turned on to its original initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by being rotated and then turned OFF, and the setting key switch 1311a can also be changed from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the enter key was turned on to the initial position (that is, the setting key). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise so as to return it to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the key switch 1311a OFF. This OFF signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the voltage level of the setting key ON signal, the voltage level of the enter key ON signal, and the OFF signal are The voltage level of the signal is set between the boards from the setting change board 1311 to the main control board 1310 using an intermediate potential (for example, a potential from 2V to 3V from zero V to 5V), and at the main control board 1310. By providing a comparator circuit and inputting the comparison result by the comparator circuit to the main control MPU 1310a, the main control MPU 1310a can turn ON/OFF the setting key ON signal, ON/OFF the enter key ON signal, and OFF signal. It is also possible to determine whether it is ON or OFF. Thereby, security can be improved with respect to the signal from the setting key switch 1311a (an embodiment of the setting key switch using an intermediate potential may be referred to as "modified example (8) of the enter key").

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turn it on again) to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the dispensing control board 633 has a press operation section. A decision key button may also be provided. In this case, the press operation part of the enter key button is exposed through the opening formed in the cover body of the payout control board box 632 corresponding to the enter key button, and the press operation part of the enter key button and the corresponding A structure in which a wire intrusion prevention part is molded on the cover body for the opening so that wires etc. cannot enter through the "gap" formed in the opening and modify the dispensing control board 633. Become. When the press operation section of the enter key button is pressed, this operation signal is input from the payout control board 633 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the OK key is ON when the press operation section of the OK key button is pressed based on the detection signal from the OK key button. When the press operation is not performed, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON.

In addition, the position where the decision key button is arranged on the payout control board 633 may be in the vicinity of an error cancellation switch having a press operation section, which will be described later. On the cover body of the payout control board 633, stickers with the names of each button printed are affixed to the positions corresponding to the enter key button and the error release switch, respectively, so that the enter key button and the error release switch are not confused. (Instead of this sticker, the name of each button may be molded on the cover body.) In addition, in order to avoid confusion between the enter key button and the error release switch, a button with a cover that covers the press operation part of either the enter key button or the error release switch (a cover is provided to cover the press operation part of either the enter key button or the error release switch). ), the color of the press operation part may be different, the external shape of the enter key button and the error release switch, or the shape of the press operation part may be adopted. It is also possible to use different types of switches, or to use other types of switches that do not have a press operation part as the enter key button. Examples of other types of switches that do not have a press operation part as a decision key button include toggle switches with a lever, slide switches with a slide part, rotary switches with a rotary operation part, rocker switches, touch switches, etc. One example is a switch. In addition, if the payout control board 633 is provided with a decision key button and an error release switch, in order to prevent unauthorized modification, the payout control board 633 should be routed between the wiring pattern to the decision key button and the wiring pattern to the error release switch. They are formed so as not to approach each other on the control board 633 (separated from each other), and the connections to the terminals of the connector of the dispensing control board 633 (terminals of the connector of the main control board 1310) are also formed separately, Also on the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern for transmitting the detection signal from the enter key button and the wiring pattern for transmitting the detection signal from the error release switch should be routed so that they are not close to each other (separated from each other). ) is formed. In addition, when a determination key button is provided on the payout control board 633, it is possible to rotate the setting key switch 1311a only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on. (The mode of the enter key button (which may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "Modified example (9) of the enter key").

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turn it on again) to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the dispensing control board 633 has a press operation section. The signal from the error release switch is branched at the payout control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633, and based on this signal, it is determined whether or not the enter key is ON. Good too. As mentioned above, the error release switch is used to release the error displayed on the error LED display, and after the power is restored, the system of the pachinko machine 1 has completed startup (when the various control boards are powered on). When the pachinko machine 1 is in a state in which no error has occurred (after completing the interrupt processing), there is no need to operate the push operation section of the error release switch. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the enter key is ON when the press operation part of the error release switch is operated based on the signal from the error release switch, When the press operation portion of the error release switch is not operated, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. As a result, security can be improved depending on whether or not the enter key is turned on (the mode of the error release switch may be referred to as "modified example (10) of the enter key").

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turn it on again) to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the dispensing control board 633 has a press operation section. The payout control MPU of the payout control board 633 monitors the logic of the signal from the error release switch in the port input process of the payout control unit power-on process, which will be described later, and creates a command. The command created in the command transmission process may be transmitted to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 that received this command may determine whether or not the enter key is turned on. As mentioned above, the error release switch is used to release the error displayed on the error LED display, and after the power is restored, the system of the pachinko machine 1 has completed startup (when the various control boards are powered on). When the pachinko machine 1 is in a state in which no error has occurred (after completing the interrupt processing), there is no need to operate the push operation section of the error release switch. Therefore, in the frame command reception process in the main control timer interrupt process to be described later, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the push operation section is being operated based on the signal from the error release switch, and notifies the payout control MPU of that fact. When the command is received, it can be determined that the enter key is ON, but the payout control MPU determines that the press operation part is not operated based on the signal from the error release switch, and receives a command to notify that fact. When this happens, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. As a result, security can be improved with respect to whether or not the enter key is turned on (aspect 2 of the error release switch may be referred to as "modified example (11) of the enter key").

Further, in the embodiment described above, the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is moved from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key is turned on to the initial position that is the original position (that is, the setting key switch Set key to turn 1311a OFF Turn the cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to the cylinder rotation position (rotated position) to turn it OFF, then turn it counterclockwise 60 degrees again) to turn it on (2nd ON operation) By doing so, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on by turning on the enter key, and the signal of this entering key ON is inputted from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, a RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the payout control board 633, and the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is input to the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633, and is branched in the payout control board 633 to be put out. The presence or absence of the enter key ON may be determined based on an operation signal that is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the control board 633, and the main control MPU 1310a is input. As will be described later, the RAM clear switch 1310f is used when the press operation part is operated at the time of power restoration (more precisely, when the power of the Pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f). ), when performing a setting change that allows the setting value to be changed (when the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process described later), the main control MPU 1310a uses a predetermined area of its built-in RAM (RAM Be sure to clear all areas except for specific areas. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on while the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed, the main control MPU 1310a always clears a predetermined area of the internal RAM, so the RAM clear switch 1310f can be used as a decision key, and the main control MPU 1310a turns the decision key ON when the press operation section of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided in the payout control board 633. On the other hand, when the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided in the payout control board 633, it is determined that the enter key is not ON. Can be done. Thereby, security can be improved with respect to whether or not the enter key is turned on.

The press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f provided in the payout control board 633 is exposed through the opening formed in the cover body of the payout control board box 632 corresponding to the RAM clear switch 1310f, and the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is exposed through the opening formed in the cover body of the payout control board box 632 corresponding to the RAM clear switch 1310f. In order to prevent wires from entering through the "gap" formed between the opening and the corresponding opening and modifying the payout control board 633, a wire intrusion prevention section is provided with the cover body for the opening. The structure is molded into

Note that the RAM clear switch 1310f may be disposed on the payout control board 633 near an error release switch having a press operation section, which will be described later. On the cover body of the payout control board 633, there is a sticker with the name of each button printed at the position corresponding to the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch, so that the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch are not confused. (Instead of this sticker, the name of each button may be molded on the cover body.) In addition, in order to avoid confusion between the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch, a button with a cover that covers the press operation part of either the RAM clear switch 1310f or the error release switch (for pressing the press operation part) is provided. ), the color of the press operation part may be different, or the external shape or press operation of the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch may be changed. A switch having a different shape may be used, or another type of switch that does not have a push operation part may be used as the RAM clear switch 131Of. Other types of switches that do not have a push operation part as the RAM clear switch 1310f include, for example, a toggle switch with a lever, a slide switch with a slide part, a rotary switch with a rotary operation part, a rocker switch, a touch switch, etc. Various types of switches can be mentioned. In addition, if the payout control board 633 is provided with a RAM clear switch 1310f and an error release switch, in order to prevent unauthorized modification, the wiring pattern for the RAM clear switch 1310f and the wiring pattern for the error release switch should be routed. are formed so as not to be close to each other (separated from each other) on the payout control board 633, and the connections to the terminals of the connector of the payout control board 633 (terminals of the connector of the main control board 1310) are also formed separately. Also, on the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern for transmitting the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f and the wiring pattern for transmitting the detection signal from the error release switch are also routed so that they are not close to each other ( formed at a distance). In addition, when the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the payout control board 633, the setting key switch 1311a must be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON. (The mode of the RAM clear switch (which may also include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "modified example (12) of the enter key").

Further, in the embodiment described above, the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is moved from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key is turned on to the initial position that is the original position (that is, the setting key switch Set key to turn 1311a OFF Turn the cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to the cylinder rotation position (rotated position) to turn it OFF, then turn it counterclockwise 60 degrees again) to turn it on (2nd ON operation) By doing so, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on by turning on the enter key, and the signal of this entering key ON is inputted from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, a RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the payout control board 633, and the logic of the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is input to the port of the payout control unit power-on processing described later by the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633. A command is created by monitoring during the processing, and the command created in the command transmission process of the processing at power-on of the payout control unit, which will be described later, is sent to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 that receives this command It may also be determined whether or not the enter key is turned on. As will be described later, the RAM clear switch 1310f is used when the press operation part is operated at the time of power restoration (more precisely, when the power of the Pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f). ), when performing a setting change that allows the setting value to be changed (when the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process described later), the main control MPU 1310a uses a predetermined area of its built-in RAM (RAM Be sure to clear all areas except for specific areas. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on while the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed, the main control MPU 1310a always clears a predetermined area of the internal RAM, so the RAM clear switch 1310f can be used as a decision key, and the main control MPU 1310a selects the RAM clear switch 1310f based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided in the payout control board 633 in frame command reception processing in the main control timer interrupt processing described later. When the dispensing control MPU determines that the press operation part of is being operated and receives a command to that effect, it can determine that the enter key is ON. When the dispensing control MPU determines that the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not operated based on the operation signal and receives a command to that effect, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. As a result, security can be improved depending on whether or not the enter key is turned on. ).

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turn it on again) to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON. The signal of this decision key ON was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the full tank detection sensor 154 and the out of bulb detection sensor 574, or the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 is input to the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633, and is branched at the payout control board 633 and sent to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether or not the enter key is ON, or may determine the logic of the detection signals from the full tank detection sensor 154, out of ball detection sensor 574, or delivery detection sensor 591. The payout control MPU of the payout control board 633 monitors and creates a command in the port input process of the payout control unit power-on process described later, and the command created in the command transmission process of the payout control unit power-on process described later. The command may be transmitted to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 that receives this command may determine whether or not the enter key is turned on. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be configured as a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON (the setting key switch 1311a' (The mode (which may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "Modified example (16) of the enter key").

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turn it on again) to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON. The signal of this enter key ON was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the main control MPU 1310a inputs the signal from the main body frame release switch. Based on the detection signal, it can be determined that the enter key is ON when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, while the body frame 4 remains open with respect to the outer frame 2. When this is maintained, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be configured as a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on (when the main body frame is opened). The mode of the switch (which may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "modified example (17) of the enter key"). In this case, the person who changes the setting value needs to close the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 in order to turn on the OK key, and after turning on the OK key, close the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2. It is necessary to open the main body frame 4 again, remove the setting key from the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and close the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 again.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turn it on again) to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON. The signal of this enter key ON was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the main control MPU 1310a inputs the signal from the door frame release switch. Based on the detection signal, it can be determined that the enter key is ON when the door frame 3 is opened relative to the main body frame 4, while the door frame 3 remains closed relative to the main body frame 4. When this is maintained, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be configured as a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on (when the door frame is opened). The mode of the switch (which may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "modified example (17) of the enter key"). In this case, the person who changes the setting value needs to open the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in order to turn on the enter key. It is necessary to close the door frame 3 again, remove the setting key from the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and close the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2.

In the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a provided in the setting change board 1311 is moved from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to the rotation position (rotated position), and then turned OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return to the second ON operation. The enter key can be turned ON, and the signal of this enter key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. 1310 (the configuration of the setting key switch may be referred to as "modified example (18) of enter key").

In the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a provided in the setting change board 1311 is moved from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to the rotation position (rotated position), and then turned OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return to the second ON operation. The enter key can be turned ON, and the signal of this enter key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. 1310, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by rotating the setting key switch 1311a from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key was turned ON to the initial position and then turning it OFF. By inputting the signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the enter key is ON when an OFF signal is input, while determining that the enter key is ON when an OFF signal is input. If it is not present, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be configured as a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on. Aspect 2 (which may include the aspect of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "Modification of enter key (19)").

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON to the original position, which is the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a to ON by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it ON again. The signal of this enter key ON was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the main control board 1310 has a press operation section. A decision key button may also be provided. In this case, the press operation part of the enter key button is exposed through the opening formed in the cover body of the main control board box 1320 corresponding to the enter key button, and the press operation part of the enter key button and the corresponding A structure in which a wire intrusion prevention part is molded on the cover body for the opening to prevent wires from entering through the "gap" formed in the opening and modifying the main control board 1310. Become. When the press operation section of the enter key button is pressed, this operation signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the OK key is ON when the press operation section of the OK key button is pressed based on the detection signal from the OK key button. When the press operation is not performed, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON.

The enter key button may be placed on the main control board 1310 near the RAM clear switch 1310f. The cover body of the main control board box 1320 has a sticker with the name of each button printed at the position corresponding to the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f so that the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f are not confused. (Instead of this sticker, the name of each button may be molded on the cover body.) In addition, in order to avoid confusion between the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f, a button with a cover that covers the press operation section of either the enter key button or the RAM clear switch 1310f (for pressing the press operation section) is provided. ), the color of the press operation part may be different, or the external shape or press operation of the enter key button and RAM clear switch 1310f may be changed. A switch having a different shape may be used, or a switch of another type that does not have a press operation part may be used as the enter key button. Examples of other types of switches that do not have a press operation part as a decision key button include toggle switches with a lever, slide switches with a slide part, rotary switches with a rotary operation part, rocker switches, touch switches, etc. One example is a switch. In addition, when providing an enter key button and a RAM clear switch 1310f on the main control board 1310, in order to prevent unauthorized modification, the wiring pattern for the enter key button and the wiring pattern for the RAM clear switch 1310f should be routed. They are formed on the main control board 1310 so as not to be close to each other (separated from each other). In addition, when a decision key button is provided on the main control board 1310, it is possible to rotate the setting key switch 1311a only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON. (Aspect 2 of the enter key button (which may include the aspect of the setting key switch 1311 a') may be referred to as a "modified example (20) of the enter key").

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turn it on again) to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the main control MPU 1310a is input to the RAM clear switch. It may be determined whether or not the enter key is turned on based on the operation signal from 1310f. As will be described later, the RAM clear switch 1310f is used when the press operation part is operated at the time of power restoration (more precisely, when the power of the Pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f). ), when performing a setting change that allows the setting value to be changed (when the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process described later), the main control MPU 1310a uses a predetermined area of its built-in RAM (RAM Be sure to clear all areas except for specific areas. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on while the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed, the main control MPU 1310a always clears a predetermined area of the internal RAM, so the RAM clear switch 1310f can be used as the enter key, and the main control MPU 1310a determines that the enter key is ON when the press operation section of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f. On the other hand, when the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided in the payout control board 633, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. Thereby, security can be improved with respect to whether or not the enter key is turned on. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be configured as a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on (RAM clear switch Aspect 3 (which may include the aspect of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "Modification of enter key (21)"). Note that the period during which the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed is limited to the time when the power is turned on of the pachinko machine 1, and the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is transmitted to the payout control board 633 as described later. Since it is input to the payout control MPU, if the RAM clear switch 1310f is configured to also function as an error release switch to be described later, an error release switch is not required on the payout control board 633.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turn it on again) to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the signal of the gate 2003 provided on the game board 5 Gate sensor 2801, various sensors for various winning openings (for example, second starting opening sensor 2401, big winning opening sensor 2402, accessory winning opening sensor 2601, general winning opening sensor 3001, first starting opening sensor 3002), main body frame 4 The main control MPU 1310a to which the detection signals from the out sensor 664 are input may determine whether or not the enter key is turned on based on these detection signals. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be configured as a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on (various sensors, etc.). This aspect (which may include the aspect of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "modification example (22) of the enter key"). In this case, the person who changes the setting value must open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and send the game ball B to the gate 2003 or open the various winning slots in order to turn on the enter key. It is necessary to feed the game ball B to the out port 1008 or feed the game ball B to the out port 1008.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then turn it OFF by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise as shown in the figure below. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the main control MPU 1310a controls the stepping motor, DC motor, The operation of the movable body (accessory object) is controlled by controlling the drive of an electrical drive source such as a solenoid, and the operation of the movable object (accessory object) is controlled based on the detection signal from an optical sensor (photo sensor, distance measurement sensor, etc.). When determining the original position, operating position, etc., the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether or not the enter key is turned on based on the detection signal from this optical sensor. In this case, a setting key switch 1311a' may be used (optical function The aspect of the object sensor (which may also include the aspect of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "Modification of enter key (23)"). In this case, the person who changes the setting value must open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 in order to turn on the enter key, so that the optical sensor can detect the original position of the movable object (accessory). It is necessary to move the movable body (accessory object) so that the position and operating position can be detected.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turn it on again) to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, it is possible to detect illegal magnetism in the gaming area 5a. The main control MPU 1310a to which the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input may determine whether or not the enter key is turned on based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be configured as a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on (the magnetic sensor (The mode (which may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "modified example (24) of the enter key"). In this case, the person who changes the setting value needs to move the magnet from the front of the pachinko machine 1 toward the front of the game board 5 in order to turn on the enter key.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON to the original position, which is the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then turn it OFF by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise as shown in the figure below. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, it is possible to shake or hit the pachinko machine 1. By applying vibration to the pachinko machine 1, the course of the game balls B flowing down the game area 5a defined on the game board 5 is changed, and the game balls B are allowed to enter various prize openings and gates provided on the game board 5. When the game board 5 is provided with a vibration sensor that detects a fraudulent act of throwing a ball, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not there is a fraudulent act based on a detection signal from the vibration sensor, and also determines whether or not there is a fraudulent act based on a detection signal from the vibration sensor. It may also be determined whether or not the enter key is turned on. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be configured as a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on (the vibration sensor (The mode (which may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "modified example (25) of the enter key"). In this case, the person who changes the setting value needs to shake or hit the pachinko machine 1 in order to turn on the enter key.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turn it on again) to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the pachinko machine 1 is irradiated with radio waves to control the game. A radio wave sensor is provided on the game board 5 and the payout device 580 to detect fraudulent activities in which the game balls B are fraudulently obtained by causing malfunction of various sensors of the various winning holes provided on the board 5 and various sensors provided on the payout device 580. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a may determine the presence or absence of fraudulent activity based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor, and may also determine whether the enter key is turned on based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be configured as a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on (the radio wave sensor (The mode (which may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "modified example (26) of the enter key"). In this case, the person who changes the setting value needs to irradiate radio waves to the pachinko machine 1 in order to turn on the enter key.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON to the original position, which is the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then turn it OFF by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise as shown in the figure below. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the press operation section 303 of the production operation section unit 350 A detection signal from the pressure detection sensor 373 that detects the pressing operation of the , and a detection signal from the contact detection sensor main body 358 that detects the contact of the touch operation section 302 of the production operation section unit 350 are input to the peripheral control board 1510, The signals may be branched at the peripheral control board 1510 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether or not the enter key is turned on based on these detection signals. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be configured as a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on (the production operation button The aspect of the unit (which may include the aspect of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "modified example (27) of enter key").

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 were housed in the internal space of the main control board box 1320, which is composed of a cover body and a base body, but the setting change board 1311 is separately housed. The main control board box 1320 may be housed in a body setting change board box and placed around or adjacent to the main control board box 1320. The main control board box 1320 has a cover body and a base body which are caulked with a one-way screw or the like at the caulking portion. This caulking part is a sealing mechanism and includes a plurality of them. The main control board box 1320 can be closed by caulking the cover body and the base body using a one-way screw or the like in the caulking part using one sealing mechanism, and then in order to open the main control board box 1320, It is necessary to destroy the sealing mechanism. In other words, the cover body cannot be removed from the base body unless the sealing mechanism is destroyed. The structure of the main control board box 1320 can also be applied to the structure of the setting change board box. In this case, the front face of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the pressing operation part of the enter key button are exposed through openings formed in the cover body of the main control board box 1320 corresponding to each. It is possible to modify the setting change board 1311 by inserting a wire or the like through the "gaps" formed on the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and between the pressing operation part of the enter key button and the corresponding openings. The structure is such that a wire intrusion prevention part is molded into the cover body in order to prevent wire intrusion into the opening. Note that if the structure of the setting change board box is different from the structure of the main control board box 1320 described above and is configured such that the cover body can be opened or closed from the base body, A setting change board cover body opening/closing switch may be provided that can detect opening of the cover body. In this case, the detection signal from the opening/closing switch for the setting change board cover body may be configured to be input directly to the main control board 1310, or may be input (indirectly) to the main control board 1310 via the setting change board 1311. It may be configured so that Based on the detection signal from the opening/closing switch for the setting change board cover body, the case where the cover body is opened from the base body can be included in the predetermined setting value change permission conditions described above (setting change board box (This aspect may be referred to as "determination key modification (28)").

Further, in the embodiment described above, the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 and the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 are configured to be connected, and in order to prevent unauthorized modification, the settings of the setting key switch 1311a are A wiring pattern for transmitting the key ON signal, a wiring pattern for transmitting the enter key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a, a wiring pattern for transmitting the OFF signal for the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting switch button 1311b. The wiring pattern for transmitting the signals from the setting change board 1311 is formed so as not to be close to each other (separated from each other). Connections to the terminals of the connector MSCN of the board 1310 are also formed separately, and in the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern through which various signals from the setting key switch 1311a are transmitted (that is, the setting key ON of the setting key switch 1311a) signal from the setting key switch 1311a, wiring pattern from which the ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, and wiring pattern from which the OFF signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted) and the signal from the setting switch button 1311b. However, the wiring pattern that transmits the setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a and the wiring pattern that transmits the setting key One of the wiring patterns for transmitting the signal of the enter key ON of 1311a is transmitted via the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 and another connector provided on the setting change board 1311 separately. , the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 may be connected to another connector provided on the main control board 1310 separately (inter-board connection), and the other connector provided on this setting change board 1311 and the main control board may be connected. It may be electrically connected to another connector provided in 1310 via a harness (a mode of wiring pattern may be referred to as "determination key modification (29)").

Further, it is also possible to adopt a mode that is appropriately selected and combined from among the above-described modification examples (1) to (29) of the enter key (the selection combination of the modified examples is referred to as "Modification example (30) of the enter key"). ).

In addition, with the above-mentioned setting values, in addition to the probability for determining whether it is a jackpot or not, and the probability for determining whether it is a small hit or not, the setting value is also used for determining the lottery when transitioning from a variable probability time to a normal time. It is possible to change the probability of distribution to areas that are advantageous to the player, etc., which is advantageous to the player (in other words, increasing the number of game balls B that the player can acquire). The probability (degree of advantage) is set in advance. In this embodiment, as setting values, setting value 1, setting value 2, setting value 3, setting value 4, setting value 5, and setting value 6 are prepared in advance, and from setting value 1 to setting value 6. The probability of being advantageous to the player (degree of advantage) was set in advance. By the way, although the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment has a plurality of setting values ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 6, other pachinko machines have a probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player. In some cases, there is a single preset setting value. In other words, the probability of being advantageous to the player (degree of advantage) exists in advance as a plurality of setting values, such as the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, and the game specifications require setting changes, and the probability of being advantageous to the player is There are game specifications in which the probability (advantage degree) has only a single preset value and does not require any setting changes. However, if the design of the hardware configuration of the main control board 1310 is changed in accordance with such game specifications, and the hardware configuration of the setting change board 1311 is changed or not used, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 Since this depends on the game specifications, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 have similar or different hardware configurations depending on the game specifications. Therefore, there is a need for a main control board 1310 and a setting change board 1311 that are not dependent on game specifications, that is, can be used in common without changing the design of the hardware configuration.

For example, in a game specification where there is only a single set value in advance and there is no need to change the settings, the probability that the set value will be advantageous to the player (degree of advantage) is Therefore, it is no longer necessary to use the settings as follows, so it is necessary to change the design of the software by assigning settings 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 as the following contents. Can be done.

For example, after the main control MPU 1310a clears a predetermined area of its own built-in RAM (area excluding a specific area out of all RAM areas), multiple actual machine confirmation operation patterns can be set (after clearing the RAM). This can be used as a setting value (which allows variation in the startup method of the pachinko machine 1). In this case, the setting value 1 is set to "all operations (movable object)" for the operation of the movable object (accessory object) that is the object of control by the main control MPU 1310a, and the lighting of light emitting objects such as lamps and LEDs. Actual machine confirmation operation pattern 1, which specifies "movement of movable objects (objects), lighting of light emitters)," is assigned, and actual machine confirmation operation pattern 2, which specifies "movement of movable objects (accessory objects)," is assigned as setting value 2. Actual machine confirmation operation pattern 3 that specifies "lighting of the light emitter" is assigned as value 3, and setting value 4 is assigned as "detailed operation of the movable object (accessory) (variable movement speed, movement over the entire operating area, etc.)". Actual machine confirmation operation pattern 4 is assigned, which specifies "actions such as interference check with structures and other movable bodies (accessories), operation order with other movable bodies (accessories), etc.", and setting value 5 is " Actual machine confirmation operation pattern 5 is assigned that specifies "lighting of the light emitter in units of one port (lighting of the light emitter in units of predetermined output ports (that is, for each output port) of the main control MPU 1310a)", and the setting value 6 is " Actual machine confirmation operation pattern 6 that specifies "No operation" is assigned (a mode of change setting of the actual machine confirmation operation after RAM clearing may be referred to as "Modification (1) based on common hardware configuration"). The main control MPU 1310a performs the actual machine confirmation operation after clearing the RAM by repeatedly performing main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, to operate the movable body (accessories) and light up the light emitting bodies such as lamps and LEDs. The peripheral control board 1510, which receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a, controls the movable body to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 according to the setting value included in the setting change command (actual machine confirmation operation pattern). (Accessory objects) can be moved and the light emitters can be lit. Depending on the manner of changing and setting the actual machine confirmation operation after clearing the RAM, variations can be provided in the method of starting the pachinko machine 1 after clearing the RAM.

Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value that can set a plurality of times from the end of symbol variation until a demonstration (demonstration performance performed while waiting for a player). In this case, time setting pattern 1 that specifies "10 seconds" as setting value 1 is assigned, time setting pattern 2 that specifies "15 seconds" as setting value 2, and "20 seconds" as setting value 3 is assigned. ” is assigned, time setting pattern 4 is assigned which specifies “25 seconds” as setting value 4, time setting pattern 5 is assigned which specifies “30 seconds” as setting value 5, A time setting pattern 6 that specifies "35 seconds" as a setting value 6 is assigned. )”). Note that the peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a can start the demonstration at a time (time setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. By changing the setting of the time from the end of symbol variation until entering the player waiting state, variations can be given to the time from the end of symbol variation until the demonstration begins.

Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value that can set a plurality of contents of a demonstration (demonstration performance performed while waiting for the player) to be performed after the end of symbol variation. In this case, the demonstration effect setting pattern 1 that specifies "comical effect" as setting value 1 is assigned, and the demonstration effect setting pattern that specifies "comical effect, movement effect of movable objects (actual objects)" as setting value 2. 2 is assigned, and demo production setting pattern 3 is assigned, which specifies "serious production" as setting value 3, and demo production setting pattern specifies "serial production, movement production of movable objects (accessories)" as setting value 4. 4 is assigned, demo production setting pattern 5 is assigned which specifies "historical drama style production" as setting value 5, and demo production setting pattern 5 specifies "historical drama style production, movable objects (actual objects)" as setting value 6. Pattern 6 is assigned (the manner of changing and setting the contents of the demonstration performance may be described as "modification example (3) based on common hardware configuration"). The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a can perform a demonstration with a demonstration effect (demonstration effect setting pattern) according to the setting values included in the setting change command. Depending on the manner in which the content of the demonstration performance is changed and set, variations can be given to the content of the demonstration performance that is performed after the variation of the symbols is completed.

Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value that allows setting a plurality of default volumes adjusted by a volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510. By rotating the volume adjustment switch, the volume can be increased or decreased from the default volume. In this case, volume setting pattern 1 that specifies "volume 1" as setting value 1 is assigned, volume setting pattern 2 that specifies "volume 2" as setting value 2, and "volume 3" as setting value 3 is assigned. Volume setting pattern 3 that specifies "Volume 4" is assigned as the setting value 4, Volume setting pattern 5 that specifies "Volume 5" as the setting value 5 is assigned, Volume setting pattern 6 that specifies "volume 6" as setting value 6 is assigned (a mode of changing the default volume may be described as "modification example (4) based on common hardware configuration"). Note that the volume is set to increase from setting value 1 to setting value 6. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a has a default volume set to a volume (volume setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. In addition, the default volume of "Volume 1" assigned to setting value 1 is moved to the minimum volume end by moving the volume adjustment switch in the direction of decreasing the volume (moved in the opposite direction to increasing the volume). When the volume is adjusted to the minimum level, the volume may be muted, or the volume may be set so that the sound can be recognized when the user stops in front of the pachinko machine. Also, the default volume of "Volume 6" assigned to setting value 6 is moved to the maximum volume end after the volume adjustment switch is moved in the direction of increasing the volume (moved in the opposite direction to decreasing the volume). When the volume is adjusted to the maximum volume, the volume may be set to the maximum volume, or the volume may be set to a predetermined percentage (for example, 85%) of the maximum volume. By changing and setting the default volume, it is possible to vary the default volume that is adjusted by the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510.

Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value that can set a plurality of volumes of error notification sounds in error notifications such as various malfunctions, bumps, and errors. The various error notification sounds cannot be adjusted (that is, they are not dependent on) by operating the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510, and by setting the volume to the maximum, the pachinko machine that emits the error notification sound can be played in a game hall. Although it is easy for staff such as store clerks to notice this, it may be annoying to players who are playing games at other pachinko machines. Therefore, there is a need for a device that can adjust the volume of various error notification sounds. In this case, error notification volume setting pattern 1 that specifies "error notification volume 1" as setting value 1 is assigned, and error notification volume setting pattern 2 that specifies "error notification volume 2" as setting value 2 is assigned. , error notification volume setting pattern 3 that specifies "error notification volume 3" as setting value 3 is assigned, error notification volume setting pattern 4 that specifies "volume 4" as setting value 4, and " Error notification volume setting pattern 5 that specifies "error notification volume 5" is assigned, and error notification volume setting pattern 6 that specifies "error notification volume 6 (maximum volume)" as setting value 6 is assigned (error notification volume (The mode of change setting may be described as "Modification (5) based on common hardware configuration"). The setting value ranges from setting value 1 (the volume that does not mute the sound, but at which you can recognize the error notification sound if you stop in front of the pachinko machine that emits the error notification sound) to setting value 6 (the maximum volume, The volume of the error notification sound is set to increase toward a level at which the error notification sound can be sufficiently recognized even if the player is several meters away from the pachinko machine that emits the error notification sound. The peripheral control board 1510, which receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a, performs control to emit an error notification sound at the volume of the error notification sound (error notification volume setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. By changing and setting the volume of the error notification sound, the volume of the error notification sound in the error notification can be varied.

Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value that can set a plurality of default brightness values for light emitters such as lamps and LEDs. The brightness of the light emitting body controlled by the main control MPU 1310a can be increased or decreased from the default brightness. In this case, default brightness setting pattern 1 that specifies "brightness 1" as setting value 1 is assigned, default brightness setting pattern 2 that specifies "brightness 2" as setting value 2, and " A default brightness setting pattern 3 that specifies "brightness 3" is assigned, a default brightness setting pattern 4 that specifies "brightness 4" as a setting value 4, and a default brightness setting pattern that specifies "brightness 5" as a setting value 5. 5 is assigned, and a default brightness setting pattern 6 that specifies "brightness 6" as the setting value 6 is assigned. be). Note that the main control MPU 1310a adjusts the brightness of the light emitting body by repeatedly performing main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, to change the default brightness, and performs lighting, blinking, gradation points, etc. of the light emitting body. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a is a target to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the default brightness (default brightness setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. By adjusting the brightness of the light emitting body, it is possible to turn on the light emitter, blink it, change the gradation point, etc. Depending on the manner in which the contents of the default brightness are changed and set, variations can be given to the default brightness of a light emitting body such as a lamp or an LED.

Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value that can set a plurality of brightnesses of a light emitting body such as a lamp or an LED in error notifications such as various malfunctions, bumps, and errors. Error notification brightness setting pattern 1 that specifies "error notification brightness 1" as setting value 1 is assigned to the lamp that is the target of control by the main control MPU 1310a, and "error notification brightness 2" is assigned as setting value 2. The specified error notification brightness setting pattern 2 is assigned, the error notification brightness setting pattern 3 is assigned which specifies "error notification brightness 3" as the setting value 3, and the error notification brightness specifies "error notification brightness 4" as the setting value 4. Brightness setting pattern 4 is assigned, error notification brightness setting pattern 5 is assigned, which specifies "error notification brightness 5" as setting value 5, and error notification brightness specifies "error notification brightness 6 (maximum brightness)" as setting value 6. Brightness setting pattern 6 is assigned (a mode of changing the brightness of the light emitting body in error notification may be described as "Modification (7) based on common hardware configuration"). In addition, the lamp's brightness increases from setting value 1 (the brightness of the lamp does not turn off, but the lamp brightness is low and allows you to recognize an error notification if you stop in front of the pachinko machine) to setting value 6 (maximum brightness). The brightness is set to be high. The main control MPU 1310a adjusts the brightness of the light emitter by repeatedly performing the main control side timer interrupt processing described later to change the brightness of the light emitter in error notification, and controls lighting, blinking, gradation points, etc. of the light emitter. conduct. The peripheral control board 1510, which receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a, selects the target to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the error notification brightness (error notification brightness setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. By adjusting the brightness of the light emitting body, the light emitting body can be turned on, blinked, or have different gradation points. Depending on the manner in which the brightness of the light emitting body in error notification is changed, the brightness of the light emitting body, such as a lamp or LED, in error notification can be varied.

In addition, the various setting values assigned to the modifications (1) to (7) based on the common hardware configuration described above are determined when predetermined setting value display permission conditions are met in the setting value confirmation display processing to be described later performed by the main control MPU 1310a. Although it is sometimes displayed on the setting display 1310g, it may be always displayed on the setting display 1310g from when the power is turned on to when the power is turned off to the pachinko machine 1 (the setting value display (This aspect may be referred to as "Modification (8) based on common hardware configuration").

Furthermore, any one of the above-described modifications (1) to (8) based on the common hardware configuration may be selected as appropriate and adopted as the above-described modification of the enter key (30).

In addition, the predetermined setting value change permission conditions mentioned above apply to the outer frame 2 when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 or when the power is restored after a power outage (instantaneous power outage). The main body frame 4 is opened, and the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. This required that the setting key be turned on. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on while pressing the push operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f, the main control MPU 1310a clears a specific area of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power-on process to be described later. Clear the game except for , and then proceed with the game by setting interrupt permission, etc. In addition, when the above-described predetermined setting value change permission condition is met when the power is restored to the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process in the main control side power-on process to be described later, and stores data in the main control built-in RAM. The game progresses by clearing all areas except for a specific area, and then setting interrupt permission. In other words, when powering on the Pachinko machine 1 while pressing the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f, if the predetermined setting value change permission conditions described above are satisfied when the power is restored to the Pachinko machine 1, In either case, the main control MPU 1310a clears all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area in the main control side power-on processing described later, and then proceeds with the game by setting interrupt permission, etc. It happens. Therefore, as the above-mentioned predetermined setting value change permission condition, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 or when the power is restored after a power outage (instantaneous power outage), the outer frame 2 is The main body frame 4 is opened, and the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. In addition to the setting key being turned on by pressing the button, the press operation section of the RAM clear switch 1310f may also be pressed. be).

In addition, the predetermined setting value display permission conditions mentioned above apply to the outer frame 2 when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 or after the power is restored after a power outage (instantaneous power outage). The main body frame 4 is opened, and the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. This required the setting key to be turned on. When this predetermined setting value display permission condition is met, the main control MPU 1310a sets and displays the current setting value in a setting value confirmation display process that is performed as a part of the main control side timer interrupt process to be described later. Display on container 1310g. Further, as described above, the RAM clear switch 1310f requires that the press operation section be pressed when powering on the pachinko machine 1, and the period during which it is pressed is limited. Therefore, as the predetermined setting value display permission conditions mentioned above, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 or when the power is restored after a power outage (instantaneous power outage), the outer frame 2 is The main body frame 4 is opened, and the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. In addition to the setting key being turned ON, the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f does not need to be pressed (when described as "a modification of predetermined setting value display permission conditions") ). In this case, when the predetermined modification of the set value display permission condition is met, the main control MPU 1310a does not perform the set value confirmation display process as part of the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later, and instead In the input process, initial settings and start-up settings for the built-in WDT are performed before the game is started, and after that, interrupt permission settings and the like are performed to proceed with the game. Note that when the predetermined modification of the set value display permission condition is met and the set value confirmation display process is performed, the main control MPU 1310a performs the main control side timer interrupt process because the interrupt permission setting has not yet been performed. The setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is set to the initial state. The setting key switch 1311a is turned ON by being rotated 60 degrees clockwise from the position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns OFF the setting key switch 1311a), and the first ON operation is performed. The setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a is not read and stored in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as input information to be described later. For this reason, the main control MPU 1310a performs a main body frame opening process to detect opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 when a modification of the predetermined setting value display permission condition is satisfied and the setting value confirmation display process is performed. The detection signal from the switch and the setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a are read.

By adopting both the above-mentioned modification of the predetermined setting value change permission condition and the above-mentioned modification of the predetermined setting value display permission condition, it is possible to prevent When the power is restored after a momentary power outage that occurs, the main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2, and the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key is inserted. The press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed on the premise that the setting key is turned ON by rotating the key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise and performing the first ON operation. Sometimes, the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process in the main control side power-on process to be described later to clear all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area, and then performs settings such as enabling interrupts. While the game is in progress, when the press operation section of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed, the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting value confirmation display process in the main control side power-on process to be described later, and then The game progresses by setting interrupt permission. By adopting this aspect, the main control MPU 1310a does not perform the setting value confirmation display process once the game starts to progress. In other words, when the main control MPU 1310a starts playing the game by setting interrupt permission or the like, it never displays the current set value on the setting display 1310g. The main control MPU 1310a collects balls by the out ball passage 663 of the main body frame 4 through the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a sectioned on the game board 5 in the ball counting process of the main control side power-on process to be described later. The number of game balls B collected is counted and outputted to the base monitor 1310h in the port output process of the main control side power-on process, which will be described later. to be displayed. Therefore, the current setting values displayed by the setting display 1310g may be displayed on the base monitor 1310h (this may be described as a "modified example of how to use the base monitor"). . As a result, the main control MPU 1310a uses the base monitor 1310h to display the current setting values set during the period from when the power is restored until the progress of the game is started by performing interrupt permission settings etc. In addition, when the game is started by setting interrupt permission after the power is restored, the number of game balls B collected through the out port 1008 (out ball passage 663 of the main body frame 4) is displayed. Therefore, there is no need to provide the setting display 1310g, which can contribute to cost reduction.

In addition, any one of the above-mentioned modification of the predetermined setting value change permission condition, the above-mentioned modification of the predetermined setting value display permission condition, and the above-mentioned modification of the method of using the base monitor may be applied as appropriate. It may be selected and adopted in the modification (30) of the enter key described above.

In addition, any one of the above-mentioned modification of the predetermined setting value change permission condition, the above-mentioned modification of the predetermined setting value display permission condition, and the above-mentioned modification of the method of using the base monitor may be applied as appropriate. It may be selected and adopted in the above-described modifications (1) to (8) based on the common hardware configuration.

[5-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 on the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 129 and the like. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 outside the gaming area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3 when assembled in the pachinko machine 1. This functional display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display the gaming status (gaming situation), normal lottery results, special lottery results, etc.

Although detailed illustrations are omitted, the function display unit 1400 includes a status indicator consisting of three LEDs that display the gaming status, and two indicators that display the normal lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B into the gate 2003. It is equipped with a normal symbol display made of an LED, and a normal reservation display made of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations related to the acceptance of game balls B to the gate 2003.

Further, the function display unit 1400 includes a first special symbol display device consisting of eight LEDs that displays the first special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2002, and A first special reservation number indicator consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of reservations related to the acceptance of game balls B to the second starting port 2004, and a second special lottery result drawn by the reception of game balls B to the second starting port 2004. A second special symbol indicator consisting of eight LEDs to display, and a second special pending number indicator consisting of two LEDs to display the number of pending game balls B to be accepted into the second starting port 2004. ing.

Furthermore, the function display unit 1400 has a round display consisting of five LEDs that displays the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening/closing pattern of the grand prize opening 2005 when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is a "win" or the like. Equipped with a display.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of reservations, symbols, etc. can be displayed by appropriately turning on, turning off, blinking, etc. the provided LED.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the game board 5 will be explained mainly with reference to FIGS. 132, 136, and the like. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the rear box 3010 of the rear unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 169) that controls the effects presented to the player based on control signals from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board accommodating the peripheral control board 1510. box 1520. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control section 1511 for controlling light emitting effects, sound effects, movable effects, etc., and an effect display control section 1512 for controlling effect images.

The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the effect operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the door frame 3 side, the effect display device 1600, etc. (see FIG. 169).

[5-7. Performance display device]
The effect display device 1600 on the game board 5 will be explained mainly with reference to FIGS. 135 and 136. The effect display device 1600 is arranged at the center of the gaming area 5a when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the gaming panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the back box 3010 at approximately the center. The performance display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the transparent game panel 1100 and the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 when the game board 5 is assembled.

The effect display device 1600 is a 19-inch full-color liquid crystal display device with a white LED as a backlight, and is installed in a vertically long state. The effect display device 1600 is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 and can display predetermined still images and moving images.

The effect display device 1600 includes one left fixing piece 1601 protruding leftward from the left side, and two right fixing pieces 1602 protruding rightward from the right side. This effect display device 1600, with the liquid crystal screen facing forward, attaches the back box to two fixing grooves 3010c opened on the right inner circumferential surface of a frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of the back box 3010, which will be described later. Insert the two right fixing pieces 1602 diagonally from the rear of 3010, move the left fixing piece 1601 side forward, insert the left fixing piece 1601 into the opening of the locking mechanism, and move the locking mechanism upward in rear view. It is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding it.

[5-8. Overall structure of table unit]
The table unit 2000 on the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 140 and 144. FIG. 140(a) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board seen from the front, and FIG. 140(b) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board seen from the back. FIG. 144 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow path of the game ball on the right side of the front unit. FIG. 145 is an explanatory diagram showing enlarged portions of the first attacker unit and second attacker unit in FIG. 144. The table unit 2000 is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front, with its front end protruding forward beyond the front of the game panel 1100, and a portion of its rear end protruding into the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100. There is.

The table unit 2000 has a plurality of (four in this case) general winning holes 2001 which are capable of receiving game balls B hit into the gaming area 5a and which are always open, and a plurality of general winning holes 2001 which are used for games. A first starting port 2002 that is always open to accept game balls B at different positions within the area 5a, and a gate 2003 that is provided at a predetermined position within the game area 5a and detects passage of the game ball B. A second starting port 2004 that can accept the game ball B according to the normal lottery result drawn when the game ball B passes through the gate 2003, and a game to the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. The grand prize opening 2005 is provided in a different position from the grand prize opening 2005, which can accept the game ball B according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the ball B. Accessory prize opening 2006 that allows the acceptance of game balls B according to the first special lottery result or second special lottery result drawn by receiving game balls B into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 and a V prize opening 2007 in which an opportunity to accept the game ball B received in the accessory prize opening 2006 is given.

Of the plurality (four in this case) of general winning holes 2001, three are arranged on the left side with respect to the center in the horizontal direction in the lower part of the gaming area 5a, and the remaining one is arranged in the vertical direction in the right part of the gaming area 5a. It is placed above the center. The first starting port 2002 is arranged directly above the out port 1008 located at the lowermost end at the center in the left-right direction within the gaming area 5a. The gate 2003 is arranged at about 3/4 of the height from the bottom in the vertical direction near the right end in the game area 5a when viewed from the front. The second starting opening 2004 is arranged at a slightly higher height than the general winning opening 2001 at the left end at the lower right corner of the gaming area 5a. The big prize opening 2005 is arranged between the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004. The accessory prize opening 2006 is arranged above the second starting opening 2004 and directly below the general prize opening 2001 on the right side. The V winning opening 2007 is located at the rear of the gaming panel 1100 at a height between the accessory winning opening 2006 and the second starting opening 2004.

The first sub-out port 2021 is located below the second starting port 2004, and the second sub-out port 2022 is located on the right side of the general winning port 2001 on the right side.

The front unit 2000 includes a starting port unit 2100 that is installed directly above the lower end of the gaming area 5a at the center in the left-right direction within the gaming area 5a and has a first starting port 2002, and a starting port unit 2100 on the left side when viewed from the front of the starting port unit 2100. On the other hand, there is a side unit 2200 that is provided along the inner rail 1002 and has three general winning holes 2001, and a side upper left unit 2300 that is provided slightly above the left side of the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. A first opening is provided on the right side of the starting opening unit 2100 in the lower right corner of the gaming area 5a when viewed from the front, and has a second starting opening 2004, a big winning opening 2005, and a first sub-out opening 2021. It includes an attacker unit 2400 and a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 provided above the starting port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 and slightly above the approximate center in the front view in the game area 5a.

In addition, the front unit 2000 includes a second attacker unit 2600 which is provided above the first attacker unit 2400 on the right side of the center accessory 2500 and has an accessory prize opening 2006; A side right middle unit 2700 that is provided above and has one general winning opening 2001 and a second sub-out port 2022, and a gate that is provided above the side right middle unit 2700 and has a gate 2003. A member 2800.

[5-8a. Starting port unit]
Next, the starting port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 140 and the like. The starting port unit 2100 of the table unit 2000 is located in the vicinity of the lower end of the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, directly above the out-port 1008, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The starting port unit 2100 has a first starting port 2002 that is always open upward and has a width that can accept only one game ball B.

By attaching the starting port unit 2100 to the game panel 1100, the first starting port 2002 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 and is opened upward, so that the first starting port 2002 is opened upwardly, and the first starting port 2002 is opened in the left and right direction of the center accessory 2500. Located directly below the center.

The starting port unit 2100, when attached to the game panel 1100, guides the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 to the rear of the game panel 1100, and guides the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 to the rear of the back front presentation unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. It can be delivered to the second discharge passage 3182 of the production unit 3160.

[5-8b. Side unit]
Next, the side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 will be explained mainly with reference to FIG. 140 and the like. The side unit 2200 of the table unit 2000 extends along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the starting port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The side unit 2200 is equipped with three general winning holes 2001 that are open to accept game balls B at all times. The three general winning ports 2001 of the side unit 2200 are arranged in a circular arc shape along the inner rail 1002. The two general winning holes 2001 on the right side are open upward, and the general winning hole 2001 on the left side is open toward the upper left.

When the side unit 2200 is assembled to the game board 5, the three general winning holes 2001 protrude forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. This side unit 2200 guides the game ball B accepted into the general prize opening 2001 to the rear of the game panel 1100, and the first discharge passage 3181 of the back front lower production unit 3160 in the back front production unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. can be delivered to.

[5-8c. Side upper left unit]
Next, the upper left side unit 2300 of the table unit 2000 will be explained with reference mainly to FIG. 140 and the like. The side upper left unit 2300 of the table unit 2000 is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front so as to be in contact with the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the side unit 2200 within the game area 5a. The upper left side unit 2300 has a shelf 2301 that slopes lower to the right.

When the side upper left unit 2300 is assembled to the game board 5, the shelf portion 2301 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. The side upper left unit 2300 can guide the game ball B that has flown down the left side of the center accessory 2500 to the right side below the center accessory 2500 by means of the shelf section 2301.

[5-8d. 1st attacker unit]
Next, the first attacker unit 2400 of the table unit 2000 will be explained mainly with reference to FIGS. 140 to 145 and the like. The first attacker unit 2400 of the table unit 2000 is located to the right of the starting port unit 2100 in the lower right corner in the front view in the game area 5a, and is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100 from the front. . This first attacker unit 2400 includes a gate 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a big winning opening 2005 (see FIG. 144, etc.).

In the first attacker unit 2400, when viewed from the front, the second starting port 2004 is provided at the upper part to the right from the center in the left-right direction, and the big winning port 2005 is located at a position lower than the second starting port 2004 on the left side of the center in the left-right direction. The first sub-out port 2021 is provided below the second starting port 2004 and at a lower position than the big winning port 2005.

In addition, the first attacker unit 2400 includes a second starting port sensor 2401 that detects the game ball B received in the second starting port 2004, and a big winning hole sensor that detects the game ball B accepted in the big winning hole 2005. 2402, and a magnetic sensor 1050 that detects illegal magnetism (see FIG. 169, etc.). Two big winning opening sensors 2402 are provided in parallel.

The first attacker unit 2400 has a second starting port door 2411 that can guide the game ball B to the second starting port 2004, and a normal lottery result drawn by passing the game ball B through the second starting port door 2411 at the gate 2003. A starting port solenoid 2412 that opens and closes according to the start port, a large winning port door 2413 that can open and close the large winning port 2005, and a large winning port door 2413 that accepts the game ball B into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. and an attacker solenoid 2414 that opens and closes according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by.

As shown in FIG. 144, the first attacker unit 2400 includes a first shelf 2421 that extends downwardly to the left from near the upper right corner, and a first shelf 2421 that extends downwardly to the left from the left end of the first shelf 2421 when viewed from the front. It extends shorter than the first shelf part 2421 so as to be lower to the left from a position lower than the left end of the first shelf part 2421, with an interval slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B. The second shelf part 2422 forming the second starting port 2004 between the second shelf part 2422 and the second shelf part 2422 which is lower than the diameter of the game ball B to the left of the left end of the second shelf part 2422 and lower to the left. A third shelf 2423 that extends shorter than the second shelf 2422 is spaced from the left end of the third shelf 2423 to the left by a length of 4 to 6 times the diameter of the game ball B, and the third shelf It has a fourth shelf part 2424 that extends lower to the left from a position lower than the part 2423 and forms a big prize opening 2005 with the third shelf part 2423.

The right end of the first shelf portion 2421 is separated from the right side of the first attacker unit 2400 to the left by a length slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B. The first shelf 2421, the second shelf 2422, and the third shelf 2423 are each inclined at the same angle, and the fourth shelf 2424 is inclined at a steeper angle than the first shelf 2421, etc. ing.

The first attacker unit 2400 also includes a first standing wall 2425 extending vertically downward from the right end of the first shelf 2421 and a lower end of the first standing wall 2425 extending vertically downward from the left end of the first shelf 2421. A second standing wall part 2426 extends to the same height as the first standing wall part 2426, a third standing wall part 2427 extends vertically downward from the right end of the second shelf part 2422 to the same height as the lower end of the first standing wall part 2425, A fourth standing wall section 2428 extends vertically downward from the right end of the section 2423 to the lower side of the first attacker unit 2400, a fifth standing wall section 2429 extends downward from the left end of the third shelf section 2423, and a fourth shelf. It has a sixth standing wall section 2430 extending downward from the right end of the section 2424, and a seventh standing wall section 2431 extending downward from the left end of the fourth shelf section 2424.

The fifth standing wall 2429 extends downward from the left end of the third shelf 2423 to a position lower than the fourth shelf 2424, and then extends slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B so as to be lower to the left. , further extends downward to the lower side of the first attacker unit 2400. Further, the sixth standing wall portion 2430 extends downward from the right end of the fourth shelf portion 2424 to a position lower than the fourth shelf portion 2424, and then extends slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B so as to become lower to the right. It extends further downward to the lower side of the first attacker unit 2400. The interval in the left-right direction between the lower portions of the fifth standing wall part 2429 and the sixth standing wall part 2430 is longer than twice the diameter of the game ball B.

Furthermore, the first attacker unit 2400 has a first horizontal wall part 2432 connecting the lower ends of the first standing wall part 2425, the second standing wall part 2426, and the third standing wall part 2427, and the right side of the first attacking unit 2400. The fourth standing wall section on the left slopes from a position lower than the lower end of the first standing wall section 2425 to the first horizontal wall section 2432 so as to be lower to the left with an interval that allows the game ball B to flow therebetween. 2428, and a second horizontal wall portion 2433 that is inclined so as to become higher toward the middle. The second horizontal wall portion 2433 is formed so that the portion of the first sub-out port 2021 below the second starting port 2004 is the lowest.

Further, the first attacker unit 2400 moves toward the center between the fifth standing wall section 2429 and the sixth standing wall section 2430, respectively, from near the lower part of each of the fifth standing wall section 2429 and the sixth standing wall section 2430 in a direction approaching each other. It has a third horizontal wall portion 2434 that extends to the vicinity, and a partition portion 2435 that connects the opposing ends of the two third horizontal wall portions 2434 and extends upward. There is.

Furthermore, the first attacker unit 2400 extends in a step-like manner so as to be lower to the left along the upper side, and provides an interval between the second shelf section 2422 and the third shelf section 2423 at which the game ball B can flow. It has an upper shelf section 2436 that is provided in an open manner. The right end of the upper shelf section 2436 is located directly above the left end of the first shelf section 2421, and the left end is located slightly to the right of the right end of the fourth shelf section 2424. Further, the upper shelf portion 2436 is inclined so that the vicinity of the right end is lowered to the right.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the first attacker unit 2400 forms a space within the space between the upper shelf section 2436 and the big prize opening 2005 in which the game balls B can flow to the left. A plurality of abutting portions each having a triangular shape in plan view protrude into the space from the front wall and the rear wall so as to alternate in the left-right direction. These plurality of abutting parts allow the game ball B rolling on the big winning opening door 2413 to flow in a large zigzag shape in the front and back direction when the big winning opening 2005 is in a closed state.

This second starting port door 2411 is provided so as to move in the front-rear direction. When the starting port solenoid 2412 is not energized, the second starting port door 2411 moves forward by projecting the plunger of the starting port solenoid 2412 due to the biasing force of the spring, and closes the second starting port 2004. There is. In addition, when the starting port solenoid 2412 is energized, the second starting port door 2411 moves rearward as the plunger of the starting port solenoid 2412 retreats against the urging force of the spring, and the second starting port door 2411 moves rearward. The mouth 2004 is open.

When the starting port solenoid 2412 is not energized, the plunger protrudes forward due to the biasing force of a spring (not shown), and when energized, the plunger retreats.

The big prize opening door 2413 has a flat plate shape long from side to side, and is provided so as to move back and forth. The big winning opening door 2413 can open and close the big winning opening 2005 by moving the plunger of the attacker solenoid 2414 forward and backward. When the attacker solenoid 2414 is not energized, the big prize opening door 2413 moves forward by protruding the plunger of the attacker solenoid 2414 by the biasing force of the spring, thereby closing the big winning opening 2005. In addition, when the attacker solenoid 2414 is energized, the big prize opening door 2413 moves backward by retreating against the biasing force of the spring, and opens the big winning opening 2005. are doing.

When the attacker solenoid 2414 is not energized, the plunger protrudes forward due to the biasing force of a spring (not shown), and when energized, the plunger retreats.

In the first attacker unit 2400, in a normal state, the starting port solenoid 2412 and the attacker solenoid 2414 are each de-energized (OFF). In this normal state, the plunger of the starting port solenoid 2412 projects forward due to the biasing force of a spring (not shown), and the second starting port door 2411 projects forward. In this state, the second starting port door 2411 is located above the second starting port 2004, and the second starting port door 2411 makes it impossible for the second starting port 2004 to receive the game ball B. ing. In other words, the second starting port 2004 is closed by the second starting port door 2411 (see FIGS. 144 and 145).

In addition, in a normal state, the plunger of the attacker solenoid 2414 protrudes forward due to the biasing force of a spring (not shown), and the large prize opening door 2413 protrudes forward. In this state, the grand prize opening door 2413 is located above the grand prize opening 2005, and the game ball B cannot be accepted into the grand prize opening 2005. In other words, the big winning opening 2005 is closed by the big winning opening door 2413 (see FIGS. 144 and 145).

In this normal state, when the game ball B flows down onto the first shelf section 2421, the game ball B rolls to the left due to the inclination of the first shelf section 2421, and the upper surface of the second starting port door 2411 and the After rolling on the second shelf 2422, it is released from the left end of the second shelf 2422 to the left. The game ball B released from the second shelf 2422 to the left falls onto the third shelf 2423 or the big prize opening door 2413 depending on its momentum, and rolls to the left due to their inclination. Note that when the game ball B released from the second shelf 2422 to the left comes into contact with the lower surface of the upper shelf 2436 and rebounds to the right, the gap between the second shelf 2422 and the third shelf 2423 may enter.

At this time, the game balls B rolling on the big winning opening door 2413 that closes the big winning opening 2005 are connected to the plurality of balls provided in the space between the upper shelf part 2436 and the big winning opening 2005. It comes into contact with the contact portion alternately, and rolls to the left while zigzagging in the front-back direction. The game ball B that rolled to the left on the big prize opening door 2413 rolls on the fourth shelf 2424, and then is released from the left end to the outside of the first attacker unit 2400.

In this first attacker unit 2400, when the game ball B flows down to the right of the first shelf section 2421, it passes on the right side of the first standing wall section 2425, falls near the right end of the second horizontal wall section 2433, and falls on the second horizontal wall section 2433. Due to the inclination of the portion 2433, it rolls to the left and enters the first sub-out port 2021. Furthermore, when the game ball B enters the gap between the second shelf section 2422 and the third shelf section 2423, it passes between the third standing wall section 2427 and the fourth standing wall section 2428 and the second horizontal wall section 2433. It falls near the left end, rolls to the right due to the inclination of the second horizontal wall portion 2433, and enters the first sub-out port 2021.

The game ball B that entered the first sub-out port 2021 is delivered to the fifth discharge passage 3185 of the back front lower production unit 3160 in the back front production unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 without being returned to the gaming area 5a, It is discharged from the discharge passage 3185 onto the substrate holder 1200 below. In this first attacker unit 2400, the game balls B that have passed on the right side of the first shelf section 2421 and the game balls B that have passed through the gap between the second shelf section 2422 and the third shelf section 2423 are both It is formed to enter one sub-out port 2021, and substantially two first sub-out ports 2021 are provided.

In this normal state, when the starting port solenoid 2412 is energized (ON) in accordance with the normal lottery result drawn when the game ball B passes through the gate 2003, the plunger resists the biasing force of the spring. It retreats, and the second starting port door 2411 moves rearward. Then, by moving the second starting port door 2411 backward, the upper part of the second starting port 2004 becomes open, and the game ball B can be received into the second starting port 2004. In other words, the second starting port 2004 is in an open state.

When the second starting port 2004 is in the open state, when the game ball B is received into the second starting port 2004, it flows down between the second standing wall portion 2426 and the third standing wall portion 2427 and reaches the second starting port sensor 2401. After being detected, it is released backward from the first attacker unit 2400. The game ball B received by the second starting port 2004 and discharged backward from the first attacker unit 2400 is delivered to the third discharge passage 3183 of the back front lower production unit 3160 in the back front production unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. and is discharged from the third discharge passage 3183 onto the substrate holder 1200 below.

On the other hand, in a normal state, depending on the special lottery result (first special lottery result or second special lottery result) drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, When the attacker solenoid 2414 is energized (ON), the plunger retreats against the biasing force of the spring, and the big prize opening door 2413 moves rearward. By moving the big winning hole door 2413 backward, the big winning hole 2005 becomes open upward, and the game ball B can be received into the big winning hole 2005. In other words, the big prize opening 2005 is in an open state.

When the game ball B is accepted into the big prize hole 2005 when the big prize hole 2005 is in the open state, it passes between the fifth standing wall section 2429 and the sixth standing wall section 2430, and then separates from the fifth standing wall section 2429 and the partition. part 2435 or between the sixth vertical wall part 2430 and the partition part 2435, and is detected by one of the two big prize opening sensors 2402, and then onto the third horizontal wall part 2434. It falls and is ejected backward from the first attacker unit 2400. The game ball B received by the grand prize opening 2005 and released backward from the first attacker unit 2400 is delivered to the fourth discharge passage 3184 of the back front lower production unit 3160 in the back front production unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. , is discharged from the fourth discharge passage 3184 onto the substrate holder 1200 below.

In this way, according to the first attacker unit 2400 of this embodiment, the game ball B received in the big winning hole 2005 is divided into two by the partition part 2435, and each is detected by a different big winning hole sensor 2402. Since the game ball B is released backward after the game is released, it is possible to suppress the game balls B from being stuck between the big prize hole 2005 and the big prize hole sensor 2402, and also to release many game balls B in a short time. Can be accepted.

[5-8e. Center role]
Next, the center accessory 2500 in the front unit 2000 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to FIGS. 140 and 141. FIG. 141(a) is an exploded perspective view of the lower right guide passage in the center accessory, viewed from the front, and FIG. 141(b) is a separation hole in the front member on the front side of the lower right guide passage in the center accessory. FIG. 2 is a side cross-sectional view taken from the right side by cutting left and right at the site. The center accessory 2500 of the table unit 2000 is located above the starting port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, slightly above the center in front view, and is attached to the front of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100. ing. The center accessory 2500 is formed into a transparent frame shape, and allows the performance display device 1600 provided at the rear of the game panel 1100 and various performance units provided in the back unit 3000 to be visually recognized from the front. .

The frame-shaped center accessory 2500 has a part that protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 over the entire circumference, so that the game ball B hit in the game area 5a is placed within the frame. It is made so that it cannot be invaded.

The center accessory 2500 includes a frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501 (also referred to as a center frame) extending in the front-rear direction, and a flat plate-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501 that protrudes from the outer periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and contacts the front surface of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100. It has a flange portion 2502 and a flat support portion 2503 protruding from the inner periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501. The peripheral wall portion 2501 extends rearward to a position where its rear end coincides with the rear surface of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 when assembled to the game board 5. Further, the peripheral wall portion 2501 is formed in a shape along the inner periphery of the opening portion 1112 into which the center accessory 2500 in the panel board 1110 is inserted. This peripheral wall portion 2501 can prevent the game ball B from entering from the outside of the center accessory 2500 into the inside of the frame when assembled on the game board 5.

The thickness of the flange portion 2502 and the support portion 2503 is thinner than the thickness of the panel plate 1110 (1/4 to 1/5 of the thickness of the panel plate 1110). The flange portion 2502 and the support portion 2503 protrude from the peripheral wall portion 2501 at the same position in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the distance from the rear surface of the support section 2503 (flange section 2502) to the rear end of the peripheral wall section 2501 is the same as the thickness of the panel board 1110.

A plurality of support parts 2503 are partially provided on the inner periphery of the peripheral wall part 2501. Further, the support portion 2503 is provided at a portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the flange portion 2502 does not protrude, and reinforces the peripheral wall portion 2501. Further, the end side of the support portion 2503 protruding from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is formed in a shape that follows the front shape of the peripheral wall portion 2501 or is formed in a straight line, so that the support portion 2503 is made inconspicuous. This support portion 2503 has a protruding amount from the peripheral wall portion 2501 within the range of the thickness of the support portion 2503 to the thickness of the panel board 1110 (1 mm to 10 mm), so that the amount of protrusion from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is within the range of the thickness of the support portion 2503 to the thickness of the panel board 1110 (1 mm to 10 mm). I try to make it less noticeable.

Furthermore, the center accessory 2500 includes a transparent plate-shaped closing plate 2505 that closes the rear end of the frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501. This closing plate 2505 prevents the game ball B from passing through the frame of the center accessory 2500 and intruding into the rear (back unit 3000).

The center accessory 2500 has a warp entrance 2511 which is opened on the left side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 in front of the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) so that the game ball B in the game area 5a can enter. Then, the game ball B released from the warp exit 2512 can be released from the warp exit 2512 which is opened in a frame on the rear side of the front side of the game panel 1100 and can release the game ball B that has entered the warp entrance 2511. It includes a stage 2513 that can be released into the game area 5a after being rolled in a direction, and a stage cover 2515 that is provided to cover the upper part of the stage 2513 (see FIG. 138, etc.). The stage cover 2515 is for preventing the game ball B from entering the frame from outside the frame of the center accessory 2500 by bouncing the game ball B that bounced on the stage 2513 toward the stage 2513 side.

The stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 has a curved shape with a concave center side in the left-right direction, and is positioned directly above the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, that is, the center accessory 2500 is placed on the panel board of the game panel 1100. 1110, it is formed in a wavy shape (W-shape) such that the approximately center position in the left and right direction is slightly higher than both left and right sides. This stage 2513 has a portion that is slightly higher than the left and right sides of the center in the left and right direction (center emitting portion 2513a), and a portion that is the lowest on both left and right sides (side emitting portions 2513b). The game ball B can be released into the game area 5a from these parts.

When the center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the raised part (central release part 2513a) at the center in the left and right direction of the stage 2513 is located directly above the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100. ing. As a result, when the game ball B is released from the central release part 2513a at the center of the stage 2513, it is received into the first starting port 2002 with an extremely high probability.

Furthermore, the center accessory 2500 includes a guide passage group 2520, which is provided at the upper right corner and consists of two passages through which the game balls B can circulate. When this center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the right end of the guide passage group 2520 (the upper right corner end of the center accessory 2500) is located at the inner peripheral edge of the game area 5a (the front component 1000). 1006), and is formed so that a game ball B hit to the upper right side of the center accessory 2500 always passes through the guide path group 2520.

The length of the guide passage group 2520 in the vertical direction is approximately 1/7 of the total height of the gaming area 5a. Each of the guide passage groups 2520 is formed in the shape of a groove open to the front, and the game balls B circulating inside can be visually recognized from the front in good condition.

The guide passage group 2520 is provided outside the peripheral wall part 2501 of the center accessory 2500, and includes a first guide passage 2521 that is away from the peripheral wall part 2501 and a first guide passage 2521 that extends along the peripheral wall part 2501 on the right side of the first guide passage 2521. and a second guide passage 2522 extending from the top. The entrance of the first guide passage 2521 and the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 are separated from each other in the left and right directions. Furthermore, the exit of the first guide passage 2521 and the exit of the second guide passage 2522 are adjacent to each other on the left and right, and open diagonally downward and to the right along the arc of the upper part of the right rail 1005.

The guide passage group 2520 is located above the gate 2003 when the center accessory 2500 is assembled to the game board 5. In addition, the right end of the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 is located directly under the lower end of the stopper 1006 of the front component 1000, and most of the game balls B that have come into contact with the stopper 1006 are in the first guide It is formed to enter the passage 2521.

Furthermore, the center accessory 2500 is provided with a lower right guide passage 2530 that protrudes to the right from the lower right corner of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and guides the game ball B from above to the right and then releases it downward. The lower right guide passage 2530 has an entrance opening upward across the front width in the left and right direction, and an exit opening diagonally downward to the left with a width corresponding to one game ball B.

This lower right guide passage 2530 has its right end substantially in contact with the right rail 1005 when assembled on the game board 5, and is located between the first attacker unit 2400 and the second attacker unit 2600. Therefore, the second attacker unit 2600, the middle right side unit 2700, and the gate member 2800 are arranged between the guide passage group 2520 and the lower right guide passage 2530.

To explain the center accessory 2500 in more detail, the center accessory 2500 includes a frame-shaped transparent center base plate 2540 having a peripheral wall portion 2501, a flange portion 2502, a support portion 2503, etc., and a lower right guide passage 2530. A transparent flat plate-shaped front member 2531 is attached to the center base plate 2540 so as to close the front side of the front panel, and a lower right guide passage decoration is attached to the front surface of the front member 2531 and has a predetermined decoration printed on it. A seal 2532 (see FIG. 141).

The center base plate 2540 has a guide passage flange part 2540a that forms part of the flange part 2502 and extends to the right in a flat plate shape at the lower right corner in front view, and a peripheral wall part 2501 that extends along the lower side of the guide passage flange part 2540a. A guide passage wall 2540b extends to the right to be shorter than the guide passage flange part 2540a so that the right end side is lower than the flange part 2502 on the outer peripheral surface of the guide passage wall 2540b, and the right end near the right end of the guide passage flange part 2540a. A flat plate-shaped vertical wall portion 2540c extends vertically along the side and extends forward to the same position as the front surface of the guide passage wall 2540b, and after continuing with the lower end side of the vertical wall portion 2540c and extending diagonally to the lower left. It has a left guide portion 2540d that extends obliquely to the lower right and is bent. A gap through which one game ball B can pass is formed between the guide passage wall 2540b and the standing wall portion 2540c.

The center base plate 2540 guides the game ball B that has flowed down from above onto the guide passage wall 2540b to the right by the guide passage wall 2540b, and then allows it to flow downward from between the guide passage wall 2540b and the standing wall portion 2540c. After that, it can be discharged diagonally to the lower left by the left guiding section 2540d. The center base plate 2540 constitutes most of the lower right guide passage 2530 by the guide passage flange part 2540a, the guide passage wall 2540b, the standing wall part 2540c, and the left guide part 2540d.

The front member 2531 extends in the left-right direction from the same position as the inner peripheral surface of the peripheral wall part 2501 to the same position as the right end side of the guide passage flange part 2540a, and the upper end side is higher than the upper end side of the guide passage flange part 2540a. The lower end side is located below the guide passage wall 2540b.

The front member 2531 includes an attachment recess 2531a that is recessed from the front surface to the rear along the outer circumferential shape, and a separation hole 2531b that penetrates back and forth at a portion of the attachment recess 2531a that coincides with the guide passage wall 2540b when viewed from the front. It has a plurality of attachment bosses 2531c that protrude rearward in a cylindrical shape from the rear surface and are used for attaching to the center base plate 2540.

The pasting recess 2531a is recessed rearward deeper (0.4 mm to 1.0 mm) than the thickness of the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532 (see FIG. 141(b)). In the pasting recess 2531a, the left end side and the upper end near the left end side are set as contact surfaces for pasting the lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532.

The separation hole 2531b is a round hole with a circular inner shape. When this separation hole 2531b is assembled to the center accessory 2500, the front side is closed by the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532 affixed to the attachment recess 2531a, and the front side of the guide passage wall 2540b of the center base plate 2540 is closed. The rear side is closed, and the inside of the separation hole 2531b becomes a closed space.

The separation hole 2531b of this embodiment has an inner diameter within a range of 2 mm to 6 mm. If the separation hole 2531b is smaller than this, the diameter of the separation rod-like member (tool) inserted into the separation hole 2531b will become smaller, making it easier to bend and making it impossible to press the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532 sufficiently. This is because there is a risk that if the separation hole 2531b is larger than this, the portion of the separation hole 2531b in the lower right guide passage decoration seal 2532 will be bent, and the appearance of the lower right guide passage decoration seal 2532 may deteriorate. It's for a reason.

According to the center accessory 2500 of this embodiment, when the lower right guide passage decoration sticker 2532 cannot be correctly pasted to the pasting recess 2531a of the front member 2531 during manufacturing of the pachinko machine 1, the front member 2531 through the separation hole 2531b and press the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532 from the rear to the front with its tip, so that the vicinity of the edge of the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532 can be rolled forward. By pulling the rolled-up portion, the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532 can be easily removed from the attachment recess 2531a, and the lower right guiding passage decorative seal 2532 can be reapplied.

Also, with the front member 2531 and the center base plate 2540 separated, a rod-shaped member is passed through the separation hole 2531b from the rear of the front member 2531, and the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532 is pressed from the rear with the tip of the rod-shaped member. Since the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532 can be easily removed from the attachment recess 2531a, it is possible to easily replace the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532 when changing models.

Furthermore, as described above, when the front member 2531 and the center base plate 2540 are separated, the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532 can be easily removed from the attachment recess 2531a using the separation hole 2531b. The component parts of the machine 1 can be easily separated into materials, and the cost of disposing of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

Furthermore, by pasting the lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532 on the pasting recess 2531a, the separation hole 2531b can be hidden from the front, thereby suppressing deterioration in appearance due to the separation hole 2531b, and also preventing players from seeing the separation hole 2531b. It is possible to make it difficult for the user to notice the existence of the separation hole 2531b, and to make it difficult for the user to plan fraudulent acts using the separation hole 2531b.

In addition, when assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the guide passage wall 2540b of the center base plate 2540 attached to the rear side of the front member 2531 to which the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532 is attached allows separation. The hole 2531b is closed from the rear, and unlike conventional pachinko machines, the hole is not passed through to the rear, so a linear unauthorized tool such as a piano wire can pass through the hole to the game board 5. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being inserted into the inside or a part where the game ball B is distributed, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being carried out.

Furthermore, since the separation hole 2531b is closed from the rear by the guide passage wall 2540b of the center base plate 2540, even if an unauthorized tool is inserted from the front through the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532 and into the separation hole 2531b, Since further insertion (intrusion) to the rear can be prevented by the guide passage wall 2540b, unauthorized tools cannot enter from the front through the separation hole 2531b into the inside of the game board 5 or the area where the game balls B circulate. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being carried out, and since a trace is left on the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532 when an unauthorized tool penetrates the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that has a high deterrent effect against fraudulent acts.

Furthermore, according to the center accessory 2500 of this embodiment, the support portion 2503 protruding inward from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is provided, so that in the area where the support portion 2503 is provided, the peripheral wall portion 2501 is attached to the center accessory. 2500, the inside of the peripheral wall portion 2501 (within the frame of the center accessory 2500) can be made relatively wide, and the effect image of the rear effect display device 1600 can be seen through the frame of the center accessory 2500, Decorations and the like on the back unit 3000 can be made more visible.

Further, since the support portion 2503 protruding inward is provided in a portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the flange portion 2502 is not provided, the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be reinforced. Thereby, even if the game ball B comes into contact with the outside of the portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the support portion 2503 is provided, the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be prevented from being deformed or damaged. Further, since the strength of the center accessory 2500 can be increased by the support portion 2503, the center accessory 2500 can be removed from the injection mold without being deformed.

In addition, since the transparent support portion 2503 is made to protrude briefly from the inner periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and is provided partially around the entire circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501, the support portion 2503 is provided on the rear side. Obstruction of the visibility of the decoration of the unit 3000, the performance image of the performance display device 1600, etc. can be reduced.

Furthermore, by providing the support portion 2503, there is a portion where the flange portion 2502 protruding outward from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is not provided, so that the support portion 2503 of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) In the close portion, the obstacle nail N can be planted at a position as close as possible to the peripheral wall portion 2501. Thereby, it is possible to widen the area of the game using the plurality of obstacle nails N as much as possible within the game area 5a, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that allows the user to enjoy the original game.

Further, the peripheral wall portion 2501 has a shape similar to the inner peripheral shape of the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110, and the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is on the same plane as the rear surface of the panel board 1110, and the support portion 2503 Since the support portion 2503 is provided on substantially the same plane as the front surface of the panel board 1110, the support portion 2503 can be made less noticeable to the player, and the center accessory 2500 appears to be integrated with the panel board 1110. be able to.

Furthermore, since the support portion 2503 is provided on a part of the entire circumference of the center accessory 2500, the area within the frame of the center accessory 2500 is more It can be made wider, and the display screen of the effect display device 1600 provided at the rear can be more easily seen. In other words, if you want to make the non-circulation area (inside the frame) partitioned by the peripheral wall part 2501 (center frame) of the center accessory 2500 look larger, the support part 2503 may be provided on a part of the entire circumference of the peripheral wall part 2501. You can also do it. Alternatively, it is preferable that the support portion 2503 extends by an amount that does not overlap the display screen of the effect display device 1600 provided at the rear when viewed from the front.

In the above embodiment, the front member 2531 is provided with one separation hole 2531b, but the present invention is not limited to this. A plurality of them may be provided.

Alternatively, the separation hole 2531b may be provided in a portion of the center base plate 2540 inside the bent left guide portion 2540d (a portion on the right side when viewed from the front). When the separation hole 2531b is provided in this area, the rear side of the separation hole 2531b is not directly closed by the center base plate 2540, but the guide passage flange portion 2540a and the game panel 1100 are located behind the separation hole 2531b. Therefore, since the hole continuous with the separation hole 2531b does not penetrate to the rear of the game board 5, the same effect as described above can be achieved. In this case, even if an unauthorized tool is inserted from the front through the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532 and into the separation hole 2531b, the left guiding portion 2540d guides the tip of the unauthorized tool toward the game ball inside the lower right guide passage 2530, etc. It is possible to prevent B from entering the area where it is distributed. Furthermore, in this case, since the right side of the left guide portion 2540d is open, by using a linear tool bent in a J shape, the separation hole can be accessed from the rear even when the front member 2531 is assembled. A tool can be inserted into 2531b and the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532 can be removed.

[5-8f. 2nd attacker unit]
Next, the second attacker unit 2600 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to FIGS. 140 to 145 and the like. The second attacker unit 2600 of the table unit 2000 is disposed on the right side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, between the lower right guide passage 2530 and the vertical center of the game area 5a, and It is attached to the front surface of a panel plate 1110 in the panel 1100. The second attacker unit 2600 includes an accessory prize opening 2006 that is openable and closable toward the left.

The second attacker unit 2600 includes a prize winning hole sensor 2601 that detects the game ball B received in the prize winning hole 2006, and a magnetic sensor 1050 that detects illegal magnetism acting near the prize winning hole 2006 (see FIG. 146). In addition, the second attacker unit 2600 includes a prize winning port door 2611 for opening and closing the prize winning port 2006, and a door 2611 for opening and closing the prize winning port 2006 by moving the prize winning port door 2611. A transmission member (not shown) that moves the accessory prize opening door 2611 by transmitting the advance and retreat of the plunger of the prize winning opening solenoid 2612, and the game accepted in the prize winning opening 2006. It has a guide passage 2613 that guides the ball B and releases it rearward.

In the second attacker unit 2600, the accessory prize opening 2006 opens toward the left at a position on the right side from the center in the left-right direction, and the accessory prize opening 2006 is opened to the left from the left side. 2611 is provided.

The accessory prize opening door 2611 has a semicircular lower side that bulges downward, a right side that touches the right end of the lower side and extends straight upward, and a lower side that bulges leftward from the upper end of the right side. It is formed in a so-called feather shape, consisting of an arc-shaped left side that is in contact with the left side of the . The accessory prize opening door 2611 has a cylindrical rotating shaft 2611a that extends in the front-rear direction with the center of the lower side of the semicircular shape as the axis, and a link pin that projects rearward in a cylindrical shape from a position further away from the rotating shaft. (not shown). The accessory prize opening door 2611 is rotatably attached with a rotating shaft at the bottom so that the upper end moves to the left.

Although detailed illustration of the accessory prize opening solenoid 2612 is omitted, the plunger is attached in such a direction that it projects downward. The transmission member (not shown) penetrates the base attached to the tip of the plunger of the accessory prize opening solenoid 2612 in the front-rear direction and extends in the left-right direction, so that the link pin of the accessory prize opening door 2611 can slide. It has a slit into which it is inserted, and is attached so as to be slidable in the vertical direction.

When the second attacker unit 2600 is assembled on the game board 5, the right side is located so as to be in approximate contact with the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000, and the accessory prize opening 2006 and the peripheral wall portion 2500 of the center accessory 2500 A space through which game balls B can flow is formed between the right side and the right side. In addition, when the second attacker unit 2600 is assembled on the game board 5, the rear surface including the rear end of the guide passage 2613 protrudes further rearward than the rear surface of the panel board 1110 in the game panel 1100.

In the second attacker unit 2600, in a normal state, the accessory prize opening solenoid 2612 is in a non-energized (OFF) state, and the plunger projects downward due to its own weight and the weight of the transmission member. In this state, the accessory prize-winning port door 2611 is upright, and the accessory prize-winning port 2006 is closed by the accessory prize-winning port door 2611. That is, in a normal state, the game ball B cannot be accepted into the accessory prize opening 2006.

In this normal state, the game ball B is accepted into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, and the winning result is determined according to the special lottery result (first special lottery result or second special lottery result). When the object prize opening solenoid 2612 is energized (ON), the transmission member moves upward together with the plunger, and the link pin of the accessory prize opening door 2611 inserted into the slit of the transmission member is pulled upward. At the same time, by sliding in the slit, the accessory prize opening door 2611 rotates counterclockwise around the rotation axis 2611a.

As a result, the upper end of the accessory prize opening door 2611 moves to the left, and the accessory prize opening 2006 becomes open to the left, and the right end side of the accessory prize opening door 2611 is tilted lower. The state will be as follows. In other words, the accessory prize opening 2006 is in an open state. In this state, when the game ball B flowing down comes into contact with the accessory prize opening door 2611, it rolls to the right due to its inclination and is accepted into the accessory prize opening 2006. The game ball B received in the accessory winning hole 2006 is detected by the accessory winning hole sensor 2601, and is then guided by the guiding path 2613 and released to the rear. The game ball B released backward from the guide path 2613 is delivered to the distribution path 3158 of the back front right decoration unit 3140 in the back front presentation unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and is sent to either the V winning opening 2007 or the losing opening 2008. After being sorted, the sheets are discharged onto the lower substrate holder 1200 via the back, front and lower presentation unit 3160.

[5-8g. Side right middle unit]
Next, the side right center unit 2700 in the front unit 2000 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to FIGS. 140 and 144. The side middle right unit 2700 of the front unit 2000 is located directly above the second attacker unit 2600 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the front surface of the panel board 1110 in the game panel 1100. This side right middle unit 2700 includes one general winning opening 2001 and a second sub-out opening 2022.

In the side right middle unit 2700, the general winning hole 2001 is always open upward in the left-right direction with the width of one game ball B, and the general winning hole 2001 is adjacent to the right side of the general winning hole 2001, and the left-right direction is the game ball B. A second sub-out port 2022 is always open upward with a width equal to two balls B.

In addition, the side right middle unit 2700 has a first guide path 2701 that guides the game ball B received in the general prize opening 2001 backward, and a second guide path 2701 that guides the game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2022 backward. It has two guiding passages 2702. The first guide passage 2701 is formed in a crank shape, extending rearward from the general winning opening 2001, bent rightward, and further bent rearward. The second guide passage 2702 extends downward from the second sub-out port 2022 than the first guide passage 2701, and then bends rearward. The outlet of the first guide passage 2701 and the outlet of the second guide passage 2702 are vertically aligned.

When this side right middle unit 2700 is assembled to the game board 5, the rear ends of each of the first guide passage 2701 and the second guide passage 2702 protrude rearward from the rear surface of the panel board 1110 in the game panel 1100. There is.

Furthermore, when the side right middle unit 2700 is assembled on the game board 5, its right end is in approximate contact with the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000, and its lower end is in approximate contact with the upper end of the second attacker unit 2600, A space is formed between the left end and the right side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, in which the game ball B can flow. In this side right middle unit 2700, the general winning opening 2001 opens upward at a position slightly to the left of the accessory winning opening 2006, and the second sub-out opening 2022 is between the general winning opening 2001 and the right rail 1005. It is open upward over almost the entire area (see FIG. 144).

The side right middle unit 2700 guides the game ball B received in the general prize opening 2001 to the rear side of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 through the first guidance passage 2701, and then guides the game ball B accepted into the general prize opening 2001 to the rear side of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100. It can be delivered to the first back guide passage 3156 of the back front right decoration unit 3140 in the back front presentation unit 3100 of the unit 3000. The game ball B delivered to the first back guidance path 3156 is detected by the general winning hole sensor 3001 and then discharged onto the lower board holder 1200 through the back front lower presentation unit 3160. In addition, the side right middle unit 2700 guides the game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2022 to the rear side of the panel board 1110 through the second guide passage 2702, and then guides the game ball B received into the second sub-out port 2022 to the back side of the panel board 1110. It can be delivered to the second back guidance passage 3157 of the back front right decoration unit 3140 in the back front presentation unit 3100 of 3000. The game ball B delivered to the second back guiding path 3157 passes through the back front lower presentation unit 3160 and is discharged onto the lower board holder 1200.

[5-8h. Gate components]
Next, the gate member 2800 in the front unit 2000 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to FIGS. 142 and 143. 142(a) is a perspective view of the gate member viewed from the front, (b) is an exploded perspective view of the gate member viewed from the front with the gate member disassembled, and (c) is an exploded perspective view of the gate member viewed from the back with the gate member disassembled. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view. FIG. 143(a) is a front view of the gate member, and FIG. 143(b) is a sectional view taken along the line in FIG. 143(a).

The gate member 2800 of the front unit 2000 is arranged between the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 and the side right middle unit 2700 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the front of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100. It is being The gate member 2800 includes a gate 2003 where a normal lottery result is drawn, which opens and closes a second starting port 2004 when the game ball B passes through the gate, and a gate sensor 2801 that detects when the game ball B passes through the gate 2003. ,have. The gate 2003 is a detection hole for detecting the game ball B in the gate sensor 2801.

The gate member 2800 has a guide piece 2802 that protrudes obliquely toward the lower left from near the right end of the lower surface. The guide piece 2802 is for guiding the game ball B that has passed through the gate 2003 to the lower left. This guide piece 2802 is inclined so that its extension line passes near the left end of the general prize opening 2001 in the side right middle unit 2700 when assembled on the game board 5.

When assembled to the game board 5, the gate member 2800 is located approximately in the center between the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000 and the right side of the peripheral wall 2501 of the center accessory 2500, and the gate member 2800 is located approximately at the center between the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000 and the right side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, and the gate member 2800 is located approximately in the center between the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000 and the right side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500. A gap is formed through which the ball B can flow. This gate member 2800 is located slightly to the left of the first guide passage 2521 in the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500, and to the right of the general prize opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700. positioned.

To further explain the gate member 2800 in detail, the gate member 2800 includes a gate body 2810 that is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) and holds a gate sensor 2801, and a gate body 2810 that is attached to the front surface of the gate body 2810 and has a predetermined shape. It has a gate seal 2811 on which a decoration is printed. Gate body 2810 is formed transparent.

The gate main body 2810 includes a front plate portion 2810a that is long in the shape of a flat plate in the left and right directions, a pasting recess 2810b that is rectangular in a horizontally elongated shape and recessed toward the rear on the front surface of the front plate portion 2810a, and a pasting recess 2810b provided at the upper left corner of the pasting recess 2810b. a separation hole 2810d penetrating the front plate part 2810a back and forth near the right end of the pasting recess 2810b, and a pair of arm parts extending rearward from both left and right ends of the front plate part 2810a. 2810e, and a flat flange portion 2810f extending outward in the left-right direction from the rear ends of the pair of arm portions 2810e and connected to each other at a portion below the front plate portion 2810a.

The surfaces of the pair of arm portions 2810e that face each other are separated from each other by a distance greater than the diameter of the detection hole of the gate sensor 2801. Further, the flange portion 2810f is attached to the panel board 1110 with its rear surface in contact with the front surface of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100.

Further, the gate body 2810 is recessed at a constant height in the vertical direction on the rear surface of the front plate portion 2810a and the opposing surfaces of the pair of arm portions 2810e, and has an accommodation groove 2810g for accommodating the gate sensor 2801. , a rear extending portion 2810h extending rearward from the rear end of the left arm portion 2810e so as to extend the arm portion 2810e and the housing groove 2810g, and a rear extending portion 2810h extending rearward from the rear end of the right arm portion 2810e. A locking portion 2810i is provided, which extends rearward from the housing groove 2810h, has a rear end bent to the left, and locks the gate sensor 2801 housed in the housing groove 2810g.

Further, the gate main body 2810 includes a protrusion 2810j that protrudes into the accommodation groove 2810g at a portion where the front plate portion 2810a and the left arm portion 2810e intersect. The protrusion 2810j is formed in a shape corresponding to the notch 2801a of the gate sensor 2801. Further, the gate main body 2810 includes a guide piece 2802 extending downward from the lower surface of the right arm portion 2810e.

The attachment recess 2810b of the gate body 2810 is recessed rearward deeper (0.4 mm to 1.0 mm) than the thickness of the gate seal 2811 (see FIG. 143(b)). The erroneous pasting prevention portion 2810c is formed into a C-chamfer shape that is larger than the chamfers at the other corners of the pasting recess 2810b. In this gate member 2800, since the gate seal 2811 (applying recess 2810b) has a rectangular shape that is elongated from side to side, it is difficult to determine the vertical direction of the gate seal 2811, and there is a possibility that the gate seal 2811 may be pasted upside down. However, with this erroneous pasting prevention part 2810c, the pasting direction of the gate seal 2811 can be specified, and the gate seal 2811 can be pasted in the normal direction (the direction in which the notch 2811a of the gate seal 2811 matches the wrong pasting prevention part 2810c). can be pasted. Note that when attempting to attach the gate seal 2811 to the attachment recess 2810b upside down, a portion of the gate seal 2811 protrudes from the attachment recess 2810b due to the erroneous attachment prevention section 2810c, and the gate seal 2811 is exposed to the operator. It is possible to make the user aware of incorrect pasting of the sticker 2811.

In this pasting recess 2810b, the left end portion and the diagonal portion of the erroneous pasting prevention portion 2810c are set as abutting surfaces for pasting the gate seal 2811. Thereby, clearance for pasting the gate seal 2811 can be ensured not only in the vertical and horizontal directions but also in the vertical direction of the obliquely extending portion of the erroneous pasting prevention portion 2810c. In other words, the effective clearance directions when pasting the gate seal 2811 are three directions: the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, and the diagonal direction, making it easy to perform the pasting work (see FIG. 183(a)).

The separation hole 2810d is a rectangular square hole extending vertically. When this separation hole 2810d is assembled into the cage member 2800, the front side is closed by the gate seal 2811 affixed to the affixing recess 2810b, and the rear side is closed by the front side of the gate sensor 2801 housed in the housing groove 2810g. The separation hole 2810d is closed, and the inside of the separation hole 2810d becomes a closed space.

The separation hole 2810d of this embodiment has a long side length and a short side length within a range of 2 mm to 6 mm. If the separation hole 2810d is smaller than this, the diameter of the separation rod-shaped member (tool) inserted into the separation hole 2810d will become smaller, making it easier to bend and potentially making it impossible to press the gate seal 2811 sufficiently. This is because if the separation hole 2810d is larger than this, the gate seal 2811 may be bent at the separation hole 2531b portion, and the appearance of the gate seal 2811 may deteriorate.

The inner circumferential surface on the right side of this separation hole 2810d is on the same plane as the bottom surface (the surface facing left) of the accommodation groove 2810g formed in the right arm portion 2810e. Further, the vertical dimension of the locking portion 2810i is formed smaller than the vertical dimension of the separation hole 2810d, and the rear end (claw portion) of the locking portion 2810i is smaller than the horizontal dimension of the separation hole 2810d. protrudes briefly to the left.

This separation hole 2810d has the function of removing the gate seal 2811, which will be described later, and is also used to insert a core for forming the rear end of the under locking part 2810i when injection molding the gate body 2810. The gate body 2810 can also function as an insertion hole, making injection molding of the gate body 2810 easy.

The gate seal 2811 is formed to be slightly longer in the left-right direction with respect to the shape offset inward by a certain distance from the outer shape of the pasting recess 2810b. A C-chamfered notch 2811a is formed in the upper left corner of the gate seal 2811, which corresponds to the erroneous pasting prevention part 2810c, and the proper pasting direction (in this case, up and down direction) with respect to the pasting recess 2810b can be seen. It looks like this. The entire back surface of this gate seal 2811 is a glue surface with adhesive strength.

According to the gate member 2800 of this embodiment, when the gate seal 2811 cannot be correctly pasted to the pasting recess 2810b of the gate body 2810 during manufacture of the pachinko machine 1, the gate body 2810 (front plate portion 2810a) through the separation hole 2810d and press the gate seal 2811 from the rear to the front with the tip of the bar member, so that the vicinity of the edge of the gate seal 2811 can be removed so that it can be rolled forward. The gate seal 2811 can be easily removed from the attachment recess 2810b by the operator pulling the rolled-up portion, and the gate seal 2811 can be reattached.

In addition, with the gate body 2810 and gate sensor 2801 separated, a rod-shaped member is passed through the separation hole 2810d from the rear of the gate body 2810, and the gate seal 2811 is pasted by pressing the gate seal 2811 from the rear with its tip. Since the gate seal 2810 can be easily removed from the recess 2810b, it is possible to easily replace the gate seal 2811 when changing the model.

Furthermore, as described above, when the gate main body 2810 and the gate sensor 2801 are separated, the gate seal 2811 can be easily removed from the attachment recess 2810b using the separation hole 2810d. This makes it easier to sort the pachinko machine 1 by material, and the cost of disposing of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

In addition, since the separation hole 2810d can be hidden from the front by pasting the gate seal 2811 in the pasting recess 2810b, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the appearance caused by the separation hole 2810d, and it is also possible to prevent the separation hole 2810d from becoming visible to the player. It can be made difficult to notice the presence of the separation hole 2810d, and it can be made difficult to plan fraudulent acts using the separation hole 2810d.

Furthermore, when assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the separation hole 2810d is closed from the rear by the front surface of the gate sensor 2801 accommodated in the accommodation groove 2810g of the gate body 2810 to which the gate seal 2811 is attached. Because it does not have a hole that goes all the way to the rear like in conventional pachinko machines, a linear unauthorized tool such as a piano wire can pass through the hole and enter the game board 5 or the detection hole of the gate sensor 2801. It is possible to avoid being inserted into the Internet, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being carried out.

Furthermore, since the separation hole 2810d is closed from the rear by the front surface of the gate sensor 2801, even if an unauthorized tool is inserted from the front through the gate seal 2811 and into the separation hole 2810d, the front surface of the gate sensor 2801 will block the separation hole 2810d. It is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering into the gaming board 5 from the front through the separation hole 2810d or into the detection hole of the gate sensor 2801. In addition to being able to prevent fraudulent acts from being carried out, when a fraudulent tool pierces the gate seal 2811, it leaves a mark on the gate seal 2811, making it possible to discourage fraudulent acts, which has a high deterrent effect against fraudulent acts. A pachinko machine 1 can be provided.

Furthermore, since an erroneous pasting prevention part 2810c is provided in the pasting recess 2810b where the gate seal 2811 is pasted, if you try to paste the gate seal 2811 upside down, the gate sticker 2811 will not be pasted correctly. This makes it possible to make the operator aware of the incorrect pasting of the gate sticker 2811, and also allows the worker to paste the gate sticker 2811 in the correct orientation, making it possible to prevent the gate sticker 2811 from being pasted upside down. It is possible to prevent the product from being shipped with the product attached.

In addition, in the gate body 2810, since the protrusion 2810j is provided in the accommodation groove 2810g, if the gate sensor 2801 is inserted from the rear into the accommodation groove 2810g in a direction in which the protrusion 2810j and the notch 2801a of the gate sensor 2801 do not match, The front surface of the gate sensor 2801 comes into contact with the protrusion 2810j before contacting the rear surface of the front plate section 2810a, making it impossible to engage the locking section 2810i on the rear surface of the gate sensor 2801. In other words, only when the gate sensor 2801 is inserted into the housing groove 2810g in the direction in which the projection 2810j and the notch 2801a of the gate sensor 2801 match, the locking portion 2810i is locked to the rear end of the gate sensor 2801, and the gate Since the sensor 2801 is held, it is possible to avoid assembling the gate sensor 2801 in the wrong direction, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of problems related to the gate sensor 2801.

Furthermore, by housing the gate sensor 2801 from the rear in the housing groove 2810g of the gate body 2810 and locking the locking part 2810i to the gate sensor 2801, the rear of the housing groove 2810g, the locking part 2810i, and the pasting recess 2810b is fixed. The gate sensor 2801 can be positioned by restricting its movement in the vertical direction, horizontal direction, and front-back direction by the side, and the gate sensor 2801 can be positioned easily by assembling the pachinko machine 1 (gate member 2800). Cost can be reduced. At this time, since the separation hole 2810d is located in the front side of the accommodation groove 2810g in the gate body 2810, when the gate sensor 2801 is accommodated in the accommodation groove 2810g, the separation hole 2810d is opened from the rear by the front end of the gate sensor 2801. It will be closed. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the gate sensor 2801 attached to the rear side of the gate body 2810 to which the gate seal 2811 is attached (attached) controls the separation hole 2810d. Since it is closed from the rear and does not have a hole that passes through to the rear like in conventional pachinko machines, a wire-shaped unauthorized tool such as a piano wire could be inserted into the pachinko machine 1 through the hole. It is possible to avoid fraud and prevent fraudulent acts from being carried out.

Furthermore, as described above, by locking the gate sensor 2801 to the locking portion 2810i of the gate body 2810, movement in the front and back direction can be restricted. Even if the gate sensor 2801 is pushed backward by an unauthorized tool, the locking part 2810i can prevent the gate sensor 2801 from moving backward, and the gate sensor 2801 can prevent the separation hole 2810d from closing from the rear. can be maintained to prevent fraudulent activities.

Further, since the locking portion 2810i of the gate body 2810 projects into the front projection range of the separation hole 2810d, the separation hole 2810d also serves as an insertion hole through which a core for forming the locking portion 2810i is inserted. The gate body 2810 can be formed by injection molding.

From the above, the following technical ideas A to C can be understood.

[Technical philosophy A]
In gaming machines,
"A decorative body with a prescribed decoration,
It has a decorated part to which the decorative body is attached from the front, and a separation hole that penetrates the decorated part in the front and back and allows the attached decorative body to be pressed from the rear and separated. a front member that is
a passage member provided on the rear side of the front member so as to close the separation hole of the front member from the rear, and having a passage portion through which game media can flow;
The front member is
an accommodating portion that extends rearward from the rear side of the decorated portion and is recessed from the rear end toward the front, and that the separation hole is located on the front end side, and that can accommodate at least a portion of the passage member from the rear; It is characterized by "further having the following."

Here, the gate seal 2811 is the decoration body, the gate main body 2810 is the front member, the pasting recess 2810b is the decorated part, the gate 2003 (the detection hole of the gate sensor 2801) is the passage part, and the gate sensor 2801 is the passage member. , and the housing groove 2810g correspond to the housing portion.

As a result, in the front member, since the separation hole is located in the front side of the accommodating part, when at least a part of the passage member is accommodated in the accommodating part, the separation hole can be closed from the rear by the front end of the passage member. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that has the same functions and effects as described above.

In addition, since the front member has a storage section, by storing at least a portion of the passage member in the storage section from the rear, the storage section prevents the passage member from moving vertically, horizontally, and forward. It is possible to control the positioning, simplify the assembly of the gaming machine, and reduce the cost of the gaming machine.

[Technical philosophy B]
In gaming machines,
"A decorative body with a prescribed decoration,
It has a decorated part to which the decorative body is attached from the front, and a separation hole that penetrates the decorated part in the front and back and allows the attached decorative body to be pressed from the rear and separated. a front member that is
a passage member provided on the rear side of the front member so as to close the separation hole of the front member from the rear, and having a passage portion through which game media can flow;
The front member is
The device further includes a locking portion that protrudes into the front projection range of the separation hole behind the decorated portion and locks the passage member.

Here, the gate seal 2811 is the decoration body, the gate main body 2810 is the front member, the pasting recess 2810b is the decorated part, the gate 2003 (the detection hole of the gate sensor 2801) is the passage part, and the gate sensor 2801 is the passage member. , and the locking portion 2810i correspond to the locking portion.

As a result, the locking part that locks on the passage member protrudes into the front projection range of the separation hole, so that when the passage member is locked on the locking part, the separation hole is closed from the rear. The passage member is sandwiched between the rear side of the covering decoration part and the locking part, and the separation hole can be closed by the passage member, and the movement of the passage member in the front-rear direction can be restricted.

In addition, as mentioned above, by locking the passage member with the locking part, it is possible to restrict movement in the front and rear directions, so that an unauthorized tool that penetrates the decoration body and the separation hole from the front can move the passage member backward. Even when pressed, the locking part can prevent the passage member from moving backward, and the passage member can maintain the separation hole closed from the rear to prevent fraudulent acts. Can be done.

Furthermore, since the locking part of the front member projects into the front projection range of the separation hole, the separation hole can also be used as an insertion hole through which the core for forming the locking part is inserted. The member can be formed by injection molding.

[Technical philosophy C]
In gaming machines,
"A decorative body with a prescribed decoration,
A decorated part that is recessed rearward than the depth of the decorative body in the front-to-back direction and to which the decorative body is attached from the front; a separation hole that can be separated by pressing from the decorated part; a housing part that extends rearward from the rear side of the decorated part and is recessed from the rear end toward the front, and the separation hole is located on the front end side; a front member having a locking part that protrudes into the front projection range of the separation hole behind the decorated part;
At least a portion of the front member is accommodated in the accommodating portion from the rear so as to close the separation hole from the rear, and is latched to the locking portion to form a passage portion through which game media can flow. and a passage member having a

Here, the gate seal 2811 is the decoration body, the gate main body 2810 is the front member, the pasting recess 2810b is the decorated part, the gate 2003 (the detection hole of the gate sensor 2801) is the passage part, and the gate sensor 2801 is the passage member. , the housing groove 2810g corresponds to a housing portion, and the locking portion 2810i corresponds to a locking portion, respectively.

As a result, a decorative object having a predetermined decoration is attached to the decorated part which is the front surface of the front member provided on the front side of the passage member having the passage part through which the game media flows. Therefore, the appearance of the passage member can be improved by the decoration of the decoration body. In addition, since the decorated part to which the decorative body is attached is recessed rearward relative to the depth of the decorative body in the front-rear direction, when the decorated body is attached to the decorated part, the decorated part of the front member is recessed. Since the surrounding parts protrude further forward than the front of the decorative body, the decorative body can be accentuated by being framed by the forwardly protruding portion of the front member, and the decorative effect of the decoration of the decorative body can be improved. The appearance of the game machine can be improved by making it easier to make use of the functions.

In addition, since the decorated part to which the decoration is attached is recessed backwards, the decoration can be placed in the correct position by using the protruding periphery of the decorated part in the front member as a guide. It is possible to make it easier to attach the decorative body, reduce failures in attaching the decorative body, and suppress an increase in the cost of the gaming machine.

In this gaming machine, the decorated part of the front member is recessed backwards, so when the decorative body is attached to the decorated part, the contact surface between the decorative body and the decorated part is in a recessed position. Therefore, even if an attempt is made to remove the decoration adhered to the part to be decorated, it is difficult to hook the decoration from the front side, and it takes time and effort to remove it. On the other hand, since a separation hole is provided in the part to be decorated, the adhesion to the part to be decorated can be easily released by passing a rod-like member through the separation hole from the rear of the front member and pressing the decoration forward. The decorative body can be easily removed from the decorated part. Therefore, if it is not possible to properly attach the decoration to the decorated part of the front member during manufacturing, a rod-shaped member is passed through the separation hole from the rear of the front member, and its tip presses the decoration from the rear. By doing so, the adhesion to the decorated part can be easily released, so the decorative body can be easily removed from the decorated part, and the decorative body can be reattached. In addition, with the front member and the passage member separated, a rod-shaped member is passed through the separation hole from the rear of the front member, and its tip presses the decoration from the rear, making it easier to attach it to the decorated part. Since the decoration can be released, the decoration can be easily removed from the decorated part, and the work of replacing the decoration when changing models can be facilitated. Furthermore, as mentioned above, when the front member and the passage member are separated, the decoration can be easily removed from the decorated part using the separation hole. This makes it easier to separate the game machines, and reduces the cost of disposing of the game machines.

In addition, since the part to be decorated has a separation hole, it is possible to make the separation hole difficult to see from the front or hide it by attaching the decoration to the part to be decorated, thereby suppressing the deterioration in appearance caused by the separation hole. In addition, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the existence of the separation hole, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to plan fraudulent activities through the separation hole.

Then, by storing at least a portion of the passage member in the housing part of the front member from the rear and locking the locking part to the passage member, the housing part, the locking part, and the rear side of the decorated part are connected. The movement of the passage member in the up-down direction, left-right direction, and front-back direction can be restricted and positioned, and the assembly of the game machine can be facilitated, thereby reducing the cost of the game machine. At this time, since the separation hole is located in the front side of the accommodation part in the front member, when at least a part of the passage member is accommodated in the accommodation part, the separation hole is closed from the rear by the front end of the passage member. It happens. Therefore, when assembled into a game machine, the separation hole is closed from the rear by the passage member assembled to the rear side of the front member to which the decorative body is attached. Since the machine does not have a hole that goes all the way to the back like a machine, it is possible to prevent a wire-shaped illegal tool such as a piano wire from being inserted into the machine through the hole, which could lead to fraudulent acts. This can be prevented.

In addition, since the separation hole is closed from the rear by the passage member, even if an unauthorized tool is inserted into the separation hole from the front through the decoration, the passage member prevents further insertion (intrusion) to the rear. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the passage from the front through the separation hole, preventing unauthorized acts from occurring, and preventing unauthorized tools from touching the decorative body. Since a mark is left on the decoration by piercing, it is possible to deter people from committing fraudulent acts, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine that has a high deterrent effect against fraudulent acts.

In addition, as mentioned above, by locking the passage member with the locking part, it is possible to restrict movement in the front and rear directions, so that an unauthorized tool that penetrates the decoration body and the separation hole from the front can move the passage member backward. Even when pressed, the locking part can prevent the passage member from moving backward, and the passage member can maintain the separation hole closed from the rear to prevent fraudulent acts. Can be done.

In addition, since the locking part of the front member protrudes into the front projection range of the separation hole, the separation hole can also be used as an insertion hole through which the core for forming the locking part is inserted. The member can be formed by injection molding.

[5-8i. Flow of game balls within the gaming area]
Next, the flow of the game ball B within the game area 5a will be explained in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 137, 144, 145, etc. When assembled on the game board 5, the center accessory 2500 is provided approximately at the center of the game area 5a. In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement at the left and right outside parts and the lower part of the center accessory 2500. Further, on the left side of the center accessory 2500 and above the side upper left unit 2300, a windmill W is provided which rotates when the game ball B comes into contact with it.

The plurality of obstacle nails N planted on the left side of the center accessory 2500 mainly cause the game ball B driven into the left side of the center accessory 2500 to enter the part to the right of the center of the windmill W. It is adjusted so that it will enter the part to the left of the center of the windmill W with a lower probability than these. Thereby, by hitting the game ball B so as to flow down the left side of the center accessory 2500, it is possible to enter the warp entrance 2511 of the center accessory 2500 with a certain probability.

The plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 and the gate member 2800 are larger than the game balls B that have passed through the first guide passage 2521 on the right side of the guide passage group 2520. The game balls B that have passed through the second guide passage 2522 on the left side of the guide passage group 2520 are adjusted to pass through the gate 2003 with a higher probability. Further, the plurality of obstacle nails N installed between the guide passage group 2520 and the gate member 2800 are adjusted so that the game balls B mainly flow through the left side of the gate member 2800 rather than the right side. ing.

The plurality of obstacle nails N installed between the gate member 2800 and the side right middle unit 2700 are adjusted so that the game ball B mainly flows on the left side of the side right middle unit 2700.

In the game area 5a, a game ball B is guided by an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 and is driven into the upper part along the periphery of the game area 5a from the left side. When the game ball B is driven so as to flow on the left side of the center accessory 2500 with respect to the inside of the game area 5a, as shown in FIG. N, you are guided to enter either the warp entrance 2511 of the center accessory 2500 or the part to the right of the center of the windmill W, and with a lower probability it will enter the part to the left of the center of the windmill W. be guided to enter.

The game ball B guided to the left side of the center of the windmill W is guided to the right by the shelf 2301 of the upper left side unit 2300 and flows down to the side unit 2200. Then, there is a possibility that it will be accepted into the three general winning holes 2001 provided in the side unit 2200. The game ball B accepted into the general prize opening 2001 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and then delivered to the first discharge passage 3181 of the back front lower production unit 3160 in the back front production unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. Then, it is detected by the general winning hole sensor 3001 and then discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. When the game ball B is detected by the general prize winning hole sensor 3001, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of game balls B is given. The game ball B guided to the left side of the center of the windmill W is almost never received by the first starting port 2002. Then, the game balls B that are not accepted into the general winning hole 2001 are discharged from the out hole 1008 to the outside of the game area 5a.

The game ball B guided to the right side of the center of the windmill W is moved to the center in the left-right direction (first starting port 2002) by a plurality of obstacle nails N arranged diagonally along the lower side of the center accessory 2500. There is a possibility that it will be guided to the side and received into the first starting port 2002. In addition, the game ball B guided to the right side of the center of the windmill W may pass between a plurality of obstructing nails N arranged diagonally and flow down onto the side unit 2200. There is a possibility that it will be accepted into the general winning slot 2001.

The game ball B that has entered (accepted) the warp entrance 2511 of the center accessory 2500 is supplied to the stage 2513 from the warp exit 2512. The game ball B supplied to the stage 2513 rolls on the stage 2513, moves back and forth from side to side, and is released forward from the central portion in the left and right direction. When the game ball B is released into the gaming area 5a from the center release part 2513a at the center of the stage 2513, since the center release part 2513a is located directly above the first starting port 2002, there is a high probability that the first It is accepted into the starting port 2002. When the game ball B is released from the side release parts 2513b on the left and right sides of the central release part 2513a, it is received into the first starting port 2002 with a certain probability.

The game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and then delivered to the second discharge passage 3182 of the back front lower production unit 3160 in the back front production unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. The substrate is detected by the first starting port sensor 3002 and then discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. When the game balls B are detected by the first starting port sensor 3002, a first special lottery result is drawn and benefits such as a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out are provided. Game balls B released from the stage 2513 and not received by the first starting port 2002 are discharged from the out port 1008 to the outside of the gaming area 5a.

In addition, the game ball B that circulated on the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the gaming area 5a can pass through the gate 2003 or be accepted into the second starting opening 2004, the big prize opening 2005, and the accessory winning opening 2006. There is no gender.

In the game board 5 of this embodiment, the probability that the game ball B hit to the right side of the center accessory 2500 will be accepted into the second starting port 2004 is higher than the probability that the game ball B hit to the left side of the center accessory 2500 will be accepted into the second starting port 2004. The probability of being accepted into the first starting port 2002 is set higher. Thereby, when the big prize opening 2005 and the accessory prize opening 2006 are not in an open state, it is possible to prompt the player to drive the game ball B to the left side of the center accessory 2500 ("left-handed hitting").

In the game board 5 of this embodiment, the game ball B is pushed with such strength that the game ball B enters the upper part of the upper side of the peripheral wall part 2501 of the center accessory 2500 that becomes lower toward the right from near the center in the left-right direction. When hit, the game ball B flows through either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 of the guide passage group 2520.

To explain in detail, the game ball B is hit with such force that it contacts the stop portion 1006 that protrudes inward from the outer rail 1001 that forms part of the periphery of the game area 5a (so-called right-handed hitting). ), the game ball B that has come into contact with the stopper 1006 enters the first guide path 2521. The game ball B that has entered the first guide path 2521 is released downward at a position slightly to the right of the gate 2003.

The game ball B discharged downward from the exit of the first guide passage 2521 is moved to the left side of the gate member 2800 and to the gate 2003 by a plurality of obstacle nails N installed between the guide passage group 2520 and the gate member 2800. , the right side of the gate member 2800, and the probability decreases in this order, and flows down toward the side middle unit 2700.

On the other hand, when the game ball B hit into the right side of the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 and flows through the second guide passage 2522, the game ball B hits the left side of the exit of the first guide passage 2521. is emitted downwards. The game ball B released downward from the exit of the second guide passage 2522 is guided so that the probability is approximately the same on the left side of the gate 2003 and the gate member 2800, and the probability is lower on the right side of the gate member 2800. and flows down to the side right middle unit 2700 side.

The game ball B passing through the right side of the gate member 2800 is received into the second sub-out port 2022. The game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2022 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and delivered to the second back guidance passage 3157 of the back front right decoration unit 3140 in the back front presentation unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. After that, it is discharged to the outside of the game area 5a through the back, front, and lower presentation units 3160. Furthermore, the game ball B that has passed through the gate 2003 is detected by the gate sensor 2801 and then released to the side right middle unit 2700 side. Upon detection of the game ball B by the gate sensor 2801, a lottery with a normal lottery result in which the second starting port 2004 opens and closes is performed.

The game ball B passing through the left side of the gate 2003 and the gate member 2800 has a high probability of hitting the side right middle unit 2700 due to the plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the gate member 2800 and the side right middle unit 2700. It flows down the left side, and is sometimes accepted into the general prize opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700, and rarely accepted into the second sub-out opening 2022. The game ball B received in the general prize opening 2001 of the side right center unit 2700 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and then placed in the first back of the back front right decoration unit 3140 in the back front presentation unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. It is delivered to the guide path 3156, detected by the general winning a prize opening sensor 3001, and then discharged onto the board holder 1200 through the back front lower presentation unit 3160. At this time, a privilege is given in which a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out.

The game ball B flowing down the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 is guided by a plurality of obstacle nails N planted on the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 and enters the accessory prize opening 2006 in the second attacker unit 2600. Flowing down to the left.

At this time, if the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 and a "yakuza hit" is drawn as the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result, if the game ball B is received as a "yakuza" prize. Since the opening 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, the game ball B flowing down the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 is accepted into the accessory prize opening 2006 with a high probability.

The game ball B received in the accessory winning hole 2006 is detected by the accessory winning hole sensor 2601, and is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 outside the gaming area 5a, and then placed in front of the back of the back unit 3000. It is delivered to the distribution passage 3158 of the back and front right decoration unit 3140 in the production unit 3100. By detecting the game balls B by the accessory prize opening sensor 2601, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of game balls B is given.

Then, the game balls B delivered to the distribution path 3158 are distributed to either the V winning opening 2007 or the losing opening 2008 by driving the V distribution solenoid 3007. The game balls B distributed to the V winning hole 2007 are detected by the V winning hole sensor 3003 and then discharged onto the board holder 1200. On the other hand, the game ball B distributed to the losing hole 2008 is discharged onto the board holder 1200 after being detected by the losing hole sensor 3004 without being detected by the V winning hole sensor 3003. When the game ball B is received in this V winning hole 2007, a privilege is given in which the big winning hole 2005 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern.

Note that the game ball B that is not accepted by the accessory prize opening 2006 and flows down the left side of the accessory prize opening 2006 enters the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 and exits the lower right guide passage 2530. from there to the first attacker unit 2400 side.

The game ball B released downward (diagonally lower left) from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 flows down onto the first shelf 2421 of the first attacker unit 2400. In addition, since a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted between the lower right guide passage 2530 and the first attacker unit 2400, the game ball B can directly enter the first attacker unit 2400 from the lower right guide passage 2530. It does not flow down to the right side of the first vertical wall portion 2425.

The game ball B that has flown down to the first shelf 2421 of the first attacker unit 2400 rolls to the left due to the inclination, and rolls on the top surface of the second starting port door 2411 and the second shelf 2422. Then, it is released from the left end of the second shelf 2422 to the left. Then, depending on the momentum, the game ball B released from the second shelf 2422 to the left falls onto the third shelf 2423 or the grand prize opening door 2413, and rolls to the left due to the inclination thereof. Then, after rolling from the big prize opening door 2413 to the fourth shelf 2424, it is released from the fourth shelf 2424 to the left outside the first attacker unit 2400.

By the way, depending on the momentum of the game ball B released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500, by contacting a plurality of obstacle nails N, it does not flow down to the first shelf part 2421 and falls to the upper shelf part 2436. It may flow down. Then, the game ball B that has flown down to the upper shelf section 2436 rolls to the left due to the slope, is ejected to the left from the left end of the upper shelf section 2436, and then hits the obstacle nail N planted on the left side. After making contact with it and changing its direction downward, it flows down near the left end of the top surface of the grand prize opening door 2413, and then rolls the grand prize opening door 2413 and the fourth shelf 2424 to the left and exits the first attacker unit 2400. released to. Therefore, even if the game ball B rolls on the upper shelf section 2436, depending on the timing at which the game ball B is released from the upper shelf section 2436 and the timing at which the grand prize opening 2005 becomes open, the opening in the grand prize opening 2005 may change. It may be accepted.

In addition, depending on the momentum of the game ball B released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500, it may rebound to the right due to the obstacle nail N or the right end of the upper shelf 2436, etc. By flowing upward, the first shelf portion 2421 may roll to the right against the inclination thereof, and may be ejected from the right end of the first shelf portion 2421 to the right (downward). The game ball B released to the right from the right end of the first shelf section 2421 passes between the first standing wall section 2425 and the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000, and flows down near the right end of the second horizontal wall section 2433. However, due to the inclination of the second horizontal wall portion 2433, it rolls to the left and is received into the first sub-out port 2021. The game ball B received in the first sub-out port 2021 is delivered to the fifth discharge passage 3185 of the back front lower production unit 3160 in the back front production unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 without being returned to the gaming area 5a, It is discharged from the fifth discharge passage 3185 onto the substrate holder 1200 below.

When the game ball B is released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500, if a "normal win" is drawn as a normal lottery result due to the passage of the game ball B at the gate 2003, the second starting gate Since the door 2411 moves and the second starting port 2004 opens in a predetermined pattern, the game ball B rolling leftward on the first shelf 2421 can be received into the second starting port 2004. There is sex. Then, when the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004, it is detected by the second starting port sensor 2401 and then discharged onto the board holder 1200 outside the gaming area 5a. When the game ball B is detected by the second starting port sensor 2401, a second special lottery result is drawn and a special benefit such as a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out is provided.

In addition, when the game ball B is released from the second shelf 2422 to the left, the game ball B is received by the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, and the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is determined. As a result, when a "jackpot" is drawn, the big winning opening door 2413 moves and the big winning opening 2005 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, so that the game ball B released from the second shelf 2422 to the left , it will be accepted into the grand prize opening 2005 with a high probability. The game ball B received in the big winning hole 2005 is detected by the big winning hole sensor 2402 and then discharged onto the board holder 1200 outside the gaming area 5a. By detecting the game balls B by this big prize opening sensor 2402, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of game balls B is given.

Note that depending on the momentum of the game ball B released leftward from the second shelf 2422, it may come into contact with the level difference on the lower surface of the upper shelf 2436, flowing diagonally downward to the right and collapsing between the second shelf 2422 and the third shelf. The game ball B may enter the gap between the shelf section 2423 and the shelf section 2423. The game ball B that entered the gap between the second shelf section 2422 and the third shelf section 2423 passes between the third standing wall section 2427 and the fourth standing wall section 2428 and reaches near the left end of the second horizontal wall section 2433. It falls, rolls to the right due to the inclination of the second horizontal wall portion 2433, and is received into the first sub-out port 2021.

The game ball B released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 to the first attacker unit 2400 side is not received in any of the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, and the first sub-out opening 2021. If so, it is discharged from the outlet 1008 at the lower end of the game area 5a to the lower part behind the game panel 1100 outside the game area 5a.

For this reason, in order to open and close the big prize opening 2005 and the accessory prize opening 2006, the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 must accept the game ball B, and the "accessory winning" or "winning" It is necessary to have the first special lottery result such as "Jackpot" or the second special lottery result be drawn. While the first starting port 2002 is always open, the second starting port 2004 requires the game ball B to pass through the gate 2003 to draw (draw) a "normal win" as the normal lottery result. Therefore, the chance of receiving the game ball B into the second starting port 2004 is lower than that of the first starting port 2002.

Therefore, under normal conditions, the player should drive the game ball B so that the game ball B flows down the left side of the center accessory 2500 so that the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002. The game ball B can be operated and the movement of the game ball B guided by the plurality of obstacle nails N can be shown to allow the user to enjoy the original game of the pachinko machine 1. This can increase expectations for acceptance.

Then, when the game ball B is accepted into the first starting opening 2002 and a "accessory prize" or "jackpot" is drawn as the first special lottery result, the special prize opening 2005 or the accessory prize opening 2006 opens and closes. In order to do so, the driving operation of the game ball B is changed to "right-handed hitting" so that the game ball B can be accepted into the big prize opening 2005 or the prize winning hole 2006. It is possible to increase expectations for the acceptance of the game ball B by the player.

At this time, a guide passage group 2520 consisting of a first guide passage 2521 and a second guide passage 2522 is provided at the upper right corner of the center accessory 2500, and the guide passage allows for easy passage through the gate 2003. Since the game ball B is easily accepted into the second sub-out port 2022, it is possible to adjust the driving force of the game ball B so that the game ball B flows through a desired guide path, and the game ball B can be easily received by the player. You can enjoy typing operations.

In addition, by performing a "right-handed hit" and passing the game ball B through the gate 2003, there is a possibility that a "normal win" will be drawn in which the second starting port 2004 will be in an open state. Since the game ball B is accepted into the second starting slot 2004 and there is a possibility that a "yakubutsu" or "jackpot" will be drawn, expectations for the game can be increased and a decline in interest can be suppressed. Can be done.

[5-8j. Magnetic sensor]
Next, the plurality of magnetic sensors 1050 on the game board 5 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to FIGS. 146 to 148 and the like. FIG. 146 is a front view of the game board showing the arrangement of magnetic sensors. FIG. 147(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the orientation of a magnetic sensor that can detect lines of magnetic force from a magnet, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the orientation of a magnetic sensor that cannot detect lines of magnetic force from a magnet, and (c) ) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the detection range by the magnetic sensor in a perspective view, (d) is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship between the magnetic sensor and the magnetic body in which lines of magnetic force from the magnet cannot be detected, ( e) is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship between a magnetic sensor and a magnetic body that can detect lines of magnetic force from a magnet. FIG. 148(a) is a perspective view showing the magnetic sensor held by the holding member, FIG. 148(b) is an exploded perspective view showing the holding member and the magnetic sensor separated, and FIG. FIG. 2 is an exploded view showing a holding member in cross section.

A plurality of magnetic sensors 1050 are provided on the game board 5, and are used to detect illegal magnetism (lines of magnetic force) acting within the game area 5a. As shown in FIG. 148(c), the magnetic sensor 1050 includes a sensor body 1051 for detecting magnetism, a sensor board 1052 with a white surface on which the sensor body 1051 is mounted, and the sensor board 1052 and the sensor body 1051. A transparent sensor case 1053 covering the sensor case 1053 is provided. Although not shown, in addition to the sensor body 1051, the sensor board 1052 includes ICs, transistors, resistors, diodes, connectors, and the like.

The magnetic sensor 1050 is rectangular in plan view, and is formed in the shape of a rectangular parallelepiped with a height lower than the length of the short side of the rectangle, and one of the sides in the height direction is chamfered. In this magnetic sensor 1050, an internal sensor main body 1051 and a sensor substrate 1052 can be visually recognized from the outside through a transparent sensor case 1053.

The magnetic sensor 1050 is capable of detecting the passage of lines of magnetic force parallel to the longest long side of the rectangular parallelepiped. Therefore, when the orientation of the magnetic sensor 1050 and the positional relationship with the magnet 1055 are as shown in FIG. can be detected.

On the other hand, when the orientation of the magnetic sensor 1050 and the positional relationship with the magnet 1055 are as shown in FIG. Since the magnet 1055 passes in the perpendicular direction), the magnetism (magnetic field lines) of the magnet 1055 cannot be detected.

For this reason, this magnetic sensor 1050 has a magnetic detection area of the magnet 1055 on one side and the other side in the long side direction centering on the magnetic sensor 1050, as shown by the hatching in FIG. 147(c). Has DA. In other words, the magnetic sensor 1050 has a gourd-shaped detection area DA that is a combination of two spheres.

In the game board 5 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 146, a plurality of magnetic sensors 1050 are provided facing in appropriate directions. Each magnetic sensor 1050 detects an illegal magnetic field acting near the general winning opening 2001, first starting opening 2002, second starting opening 2004, big winning opening 2005, accessory winning opening 2006, and warp entrance 2511 in the gaming area 5a. It is placed so that it can be detected. In other words, the respective magnetic Sensor 1050 is arranged in an appropriate orientation.

In addition, in the game board 5, each magnetic sensor 1050 is connected to a starting port solenoid 2412, an attacker solenoid 2414, a prize winning port solenoid 2612, a V sorting solenoid, a drive motor provided in the back unit 3000, etc. In order not to detect magnetism (magnetic lines of force), each detection area DA is made so as not to be exposed to the solenoid or drive motor.

Next, as shown in FIG. 147(d), when a magnetic body 1056 is placed in parallel with a magnetic sensor 1050 that can detect lines of magnetic force from a magnet 1055, the lines of magnetic force are attracted to the magnetic body 1056, so that The lines of magnetic force passing through the magnetic sensor 1050 may decrease, and the magnetic sensor 1050 may no longer be able to detect the lines of magnetic force (magnetism) from the magnet 1055.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 147(e), when a magnetic body 1057 is placed in series with a magnetic sensor 1050 that can detect magnetic lines of force from a magnet 1055, the lines of magnetic force are attracted by the magnetic body 1057. The number of magnetic field lines passing through sensor 1050 can be increased. Thereby, the magnetism of a distant magnet 1055 or a magnet 1055 with weak magnetic force can be detected.

By the way, in conventional pachinko machines, the magnetic sensor is attached to the game board using screws made of magnetic material, so depending on the positional relationship between the magnetic sensor and the screw, the lines of magnetic force from the magnet may be used to commit fraudulent acts. There was a problem in that the number of lines of magnetic force passing through the magnetic sensor decreased due to being attracted to the screw with high magnetic permeability, making it impossible to detect the approach of the magnet. In contrast, in this embodiment, the magnetic sensor 1050 is attached without using screws.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 148, the magnetic sensor 1050 is attached to the game board 5 via a holding member 1060 made of a non-magnetic material (here, synthetic resin). The holding member 1060 includes an accommodating portion 1061 that can accommodate the magnetic sensor 1050 from one side, and an elastic claw 1062 that is engaged with the magnetic sensor 1050 accommodated in the accommodating portion 1061. Furthermore, the holding member 1060 has a protrusion 1063 that protrudes into the housing portion 1061 from the leg portion of the elastic claw 1062. This holding member 1060 is made of transparent synthetic resin.

In this holding member 1060, when the magnetic sensor 1050 is inserted into the housing part 1061 from the outside, the elastic claws 1062 are elastically deformed in the direction away from the housing part 1061, and when the magnetic sensor 1050 is housed in the housing part 1061, the elastic claws 1062 returns and is locked to the magnetic sensor 1050. At this time, the protrusion 1063 provided on the leg of the elastic claw 1062 is in contact with the magnetic sensor 1050, and the magnetic sensor 1050 is pressed against the inner surface of the housing portion 1061 on the opposite side of the elastic claw 1062. There is.

By locking the elastic claws 1062, it is possible to prevent the magnetic sensor 1050 from moving in the direction of coming out of the housing portion 1061, and it is possible to prevent the magnetic sensor 1050 from falling off. Further, since the magnetic sensor 1050 is pressed into the housing part 1061 by the contact of the protrusion 1063, it is possible to prevent the magnetic sensor 1050 from shaking within the housing part 1061.

In this way, since the holding member 1060 is made of a non-magnetic material, it is possible to prevent the holding member 1060 from attracting lines of magnetic force from the magnet when the magnet is brought close to the gaming area 5a, and the magnetic sensor 1050 can be prevented from decreasing. Therefore, the magnetism acting on the gaming area 5a can be easily detected, and fraudulent activities using magnets can be detected at an early stage, and fraudulent activities can be carried out by notifying the detection of suspicious magnetism by the magnetic sensor 1050. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that has a high deterrent effect against fraudulent acts.

In addition, since the holding member 1060 made of a non-magnetic material can avoid attracting magnetic lines of force from the magnet and prevent a decrease in the number of lines of magnetic force passing through the magnetic sensor 1050, the number of magnetic lines of force passing through the magnetic sensor 1050 can be prevented from decreasing. The sensor 1050 makes it possible to effectively detect the magnetism acting on the gaming area 5a, and the number of magnetic sensors 1050 can be reduced compared to the past, making it possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1. .

Furthermore, by elastically deforming the elastic claws 1062 of the holding member 1060, the magnetic sensor 1050 can be easily attached to and removed from the holding member 1060. The magnetic sensor 1050 can be attached using the elastic claws 1062 without using screws, and the effort required to assemble the pachinko machine 1 can be made easier, thereby reducing the increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1. It can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the magnetic sensor 1050 is urged (pressed) toward the housing portion 1061 by the protrusion 1063 of the holding member 1060, fine vibrations of the magnetic sensor 1050 due to the urging by the protrusion 1063 can be suppressed. It is possible to reduce disconnection of the connector connected to the magnetic sensor 1050 or occurrence of poor contact due to the vibration, and the magnetic sensor 1050 can be operated reliably.

Furthermore, since the magnetic sensor 1050 is held by the holding member 1060 made of a non-magnetic material and installed on the game board 5, the portion of the holding member 1060 that is attached to the game board 5 is located at a position away from the magnetic sensor 1050. Alternatively, it can be provided at a position outside the magnetic detection area DA in the gaming area 5a. Thereby, the influence of magnetic materials such as screws for attaching the holding member 1060 to the game board 5 can be reduced as much as possible, so that the magnetic sensor 1050 can reliably detect the magnetism acting on the game area 5a. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that has a high deterrent effect against fraudulent acts using magnets.

In addition, since the magnetic sensor 1050 is visibly held by a transparent holding member 1060 and the sensor case 1053 of the magnetic sensor 1050 is transparent, the sensor body is mounted on the sensor board 1052 through the transparent sensor case 1053. 1051 can be shown to the player. At this time, since the surface of the sensor substrate 1052 on which the sensor body 1051 is mounted is white, the sensor body 1051 having a different color (for example, black) can stand out. Therefore, it is possible to make the player strongly aware that the magnetic sensor 1050 is not a dummy but a real one, and by making the magnetic sensor 1050 visible, it is possible to make the player aware of the fact that the magnetic sensor 1050 is not a dummy and to be able to make the player aware that the magnetic sensor 1050 is not a dummy. It is possible to make people hesitate to carry out such acts, and it is also possible to increase deterrence against fraudulent acts, and it is possible to reduce the burden on the gaming hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Furthermore, in the magnetic sensor 1050, since the surface of the sensor board 1052 on which the sensor body 1051 is mounted is white, the sensor board 1052 can be made less noticeable, and the sensor board 1052 can be used as a decorative board on which an LED is mounted. It can be misunderstood. Therefore, even if the sensor board 1052 of the magnetic sensor 1050 is visible, it will not bother a normal player, and it is possible to avoid the appearance of the gaming area 5a from becoming unsightly.

Furthermore, since the sensor body 1051 of the magnetic sensor 1050 can be seen from the outside, it is possible to check from the outside whether or not the sensor body 1051 is damaged, thereby making maintenance of the pachinko machine 1 easier. This makes it possible to reduce the burden on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

[5-9. Overall configuration of back unit]
The overall configuration of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 149 and the like. FIG. 149(a) is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board seen from the front, and FIG. 149(b) is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board seen from the back. The back unit 3000 of the game board 5 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100, and the effect display device 1600 and the drive board unit 1700 are attached to the rear side.

The back unit 3000 includes a back box 3010 that is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 and has a box-like shape with an open front and a square opening 3010a on the rear wall; and a locking mechanism (not shown) for removably attaching the effect display device 1600.

In addition, the back unit 3000 includes a back-front effect unit 3100 provided near the front end of the back box 3010, and a back-rear upper effect provided at the upper part of the back box 3010 on the rear side of the back-front effect unit 3100. unit 3200, and a rear lower production unit 3300 provided at the lower part of the back box 3010 below the rear upper production unit.

The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-like shape with an open front and a square opening 3010a penetrating through the rear wall, and a flat frame-shaped frame projecting rearward at a distance from the periphery of the opening 3010a. A liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, two fixing grooves 3010c that are recessed from the inside of the frame toward the right on the right side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b and into which the right fixing piece 1602 of the production display device 1600 is inserted, and the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b. A notch 3010d is provided near the center of the left side in the vertical direction from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 to which a locking mechanism is attached.

The opening 3010a of the back box 3010 is formed to have approximately the same size as the display screen of the effect display device 1600. Further, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in a size that allows the effect display device 1600 to be fitted into the frame. In the back box 3010, a locking mechanism is attached to the left side of the notch 3010d on the rear surface in a vertically slidable manner.

Further, the back box 3010 includes a flat plate-shaped fixing piece portion 3010e extending outward from the front end. This fixed piece portion 3010e is attached to the game panel 1100 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the game panel 1100. The back box 3010 has bosses, mounting holes, etc. formed at appropriate positions for mounting the back and front presentation unit 3100 and the like.

In addition, the back unit 3000 includes a general winning hole sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning hole 2001 provided in the front unit 2000, and a general winning hole sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the first starting hole 2002. A first starting hole sensor 3002 detects the game ball B distributed to the V winning hole 2007 after being accepted into the accessory winning hole 2006, and a V winning hole sensor 3003 detects the game ball B distributed to the V winning hole 2007 after being accepted into the accessory winning hole 2006. It has a losing hole sensor 3004 that detects the game balls B distributed to the losing hole 2008 (see FIG. 169, etc.).

Furthermore, the back unit 3000 includes a V winning opening door 3006 that can be moved back and forth to open and close the V winning opening 2007, and a game ball that has been accepted into the accessory winning opening 2006 by moving the V winning opening door 3006 back and forth. A V distribution solenoid 3007 that distributes B to either the V winning opening 2007 or the losing opening 2008 is provided. These general winning opening sensor 3001, first starting opening sensor 3002, V winning opening sensor 3003, losing opening sensor 3004, V winning opening door 3006, and V distribution solenoid 3007 are provided in the back and front production unit 3100. .

[5-9a. Back-front production unit]
Next, the back and front presentation unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to FIGS. 150 to 160. FIG. 150 is a front view of the back and front presentation unit in the back unit. FIG. 151(a) is a perspective view of the back-front presentation unit in the back unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 151(b) is a perspective view of the back-front presentation unit in the back unit viewed from the back. FIG. 152(a) is a sectional view of the back-front presentation unit cut near the center in the vertical direction and viewed from above, FIG. 152(b) is an enlarged sectional view of the left part in FIG. 152(a), and FIG. 152(c) is It is an enlarged sectional view of the right part in (a). FIG. 153 is an exploded perspective view of the back front left decoration unit of the back front presentation unit, viewed from the front together with the light guide plate. Figure 154 shows the back front left decorative unit disassembled and only the back front left first decorative body, back front left second decorative body, back front left third decorative body, and back front left decorative body base seen from behind. It is an exploded perspective view. FIG. 155(a) is a front view of the first back left decorative body shown in a transparent state, (b) is a front view of the back front left second decorative body shown in a transparent state, and (c) is a front view of the back front left second decorative body shown in a transparent state. It is a front view of the back front left third decorative body shown in a transparent state, and (c) is a front view of the back front left decorative body base shown in a transparent state.

FIG. 156(a) is an explanatory view showing from the front the relationship between the light guide plate in the back front presentation unit and the decoration board for making the light guide plate and the back front left decoration unit emit light decoration, and FIG. It is an explanatory view showing from the front the relationship between the light guide plate and the decoration board for making the decoration body of the back front lower presentation unit light-emitting decoration. FIG. 157 is a front view showing a state in which the back front left decoration unit is decorated with light. FIG. 158(a) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the first pattern of the light guide plate is emitted, and FIG. 158(b) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the second pattern of the light guide plate is emitted. FIG. 159 is an explanatory diagram showing the light emitting configuration of the second pattern of the light guide plate. FIG. 160 is a front view of the back-front presentation unit showing the second pattern of the light guide plate in a state where it is emitted.

The back and front presentation unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 is attached to the front end inside the back box 3010. The back and front presentation unit 3100 includes a transparent flat light guide plate 3110 provided at the center when viewed from the front, a back and front left decoration unit 3120 provided at the left end of the light guide plate 3110, and a right end of the light guide plate 3110. The lower ends of the back front right decoration unit 3140 provided on the side, the back front left decoration unit 3120 and the back front right decoration unit 3140 provided at the lower end side of the light guide plate 3110 are connected to each other. It includes a back front lower production unit 3160 and an upper connection base 3190 connecting the upper ends of the back front left decoration unit 3120 and the back front right decoration unit 3140, respectively.

The back front right decoration unit 3140 has a general winning hole sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning hole 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700, and a general winning hole sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the accessory winning hole 2006 of the second attacker unit 2600. The V winning hole sensor 3003 detects the game ball B that was later distributed to the V winning hole 2007, and the game ball B that was accepted into the role prize winning hole 2006 of the second attacker unit 2600 and then distributed to the losing hole 2008. A loss sensor 3004 is provided. In addition, the back front right decoration unit 3140 is a V winning opening door for sorting the game balls B received in the accessory winning opening 2006 of the second attacker unit 2600 to either the V winning opening 2007 or the losing opening 2008. 3006, and a V distribution solenoid 3007 for advancing and retracting (opening and closing) the V winning opening door 3006.

The back and front lower production unit 3160 includes a general winning hole sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning hole 2001 of the side unit 2200, and a general winning hole sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100. A first starting port sensor 3002 that detects.

[5-9a-1. Light guide plate]
The light guide plate 3110 in the back-front production unit 3100 has a first pattern 3111 (see FIG. 158(a)) that is displayed by emitting light by reflecting only the light from the left and right sides forward, and a light guide plate 3110 that displays only light from a specific area below. A second picture 3112 (see FIG. 158(b)) is displayed by emitting light by reflecting the light forward. In other words, the light guide plate 3110 includes a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3128g of a back front left decorative board 3128 in a back front left decoration unit 3120 to be described later, a back front right first decorative board 3148 in a back front right decoration unit 3140, a back front right When the second decorative substrate 3149 and the plurality of light guide plate LEDs of the back front right light guide plate decorative substrate 3150 are made to emit light, the first pattern 3111 can be displayed by emitting light. Moreover, when the plurality of LEDs 3176 of the light guide plate lower left decorative board 3174 and the light guide plate lower right decorative board 3175 of the back front lower production unit 3160 are made to emit light, the second pattern 3112 can be displayed by emitting light.

As shown in the figure, the first pattern 3111 of the light guide plate 3110 is composed of a pattern in which the letter "A" is stylized in the center, and a pattern that looks like spreading "wings" on both the left and right sides of the pattern. . As shown in the figure, this first pattern 3111 is configured such that the light and shade of the light emitting display and the degree of illumination differ depending on the part of the pattern, thereby enhancing the design and decorativeness of the pattern. To be more specific, in FIG. 158(a), the first pattern 3111 is composed of a plurality of points that emit light in the same color as the light from the LED, where the shaded area is the darkest, and where the shaded area is the lightest. The area is made up of a plurality of points that emit light by splitting the cocktail light from the LED, and the other shading areas are made up of a plurality of lines that emit light in the same color as the light from the LED.

Here, cocktail light is light of a color that includes two or more of the three primary colors of light. For example, when a cocktail of yellow light, which is a mixture of red and green light, is irradiated to a spectroscopic light emitting section, the yellow light component is split into red light and green light, and the red and green light components are split into red and green light. A green-looking part will appear. Alternatively, when white light is irradiated as a cocktail light to the spectroscopic light emitting part, the white light component is split into red light, green light, and blue light, and the parts of the part that look red, green, or blue. , light of an appropriate mixture of these colors will appear, producing sparkling rainbow-colored light. Note that when this spectroscopic light emitting section is irradiated with light of only one color of the three primary colors of light, the light does not have a component to be spectrally divided, so it will emit light of that color. For this reason, the spectroscopic light emitting section can emit light in a single color or in multiple colors, depending on the color of the light emitted, making it possible to create a more diverse range of light effects. can.

The LEDs (light guide plate LED 3128g, etc.) for displaying the first pattern 3111 are the back front left decorative board 3128 of the back front left decorative unit 3120 and the back front right first decorative board 3148 of the back front right decorative unit 3140. , the back front right second decorative board 3149, and the back front right light guide plate decorative board 3150.

The second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 is composed of a plurality of lines 3113 (straight lines) extending radially upward, centering on a plurality of parts spaced apart in the left-right direction near the lower end. Each line 3113 of the second pattern 3112 is composed of a plurality of points that emit light in the same color as the light from the LEDs 3176 of the lower left decorative board 3174 and the lower right decorative board 3175 of the light guide plate, which will be described later. The plurality of lines 3113 constituting the second pattern 3112 are formed so as to reflect only the light from the corresponding LED 3176 forward, and are formed so that each line can independently emit light. ing.

The second pattern 3112 has a plurality of lines 3113, which are five line groups 3114 from the left: a first line group 3114a, a second line group 3114b, a third line group 3114c, a fourth line group 3114d, and a fifth line group 3114e. It is divided into Each line group 3114 is composed of five lines 3113, from the left: a first line 3113a, a second line 3113b, a third line 3113c, a fourth line 3113d, and a fifth line 3113e. The five lines 3113 of the first line 3113a to the fifth line 3113e in one line group 3114 have their respective lower ends arranged at the same position, and extend radially upward from the lower end position.

This light-emitting display of the second pattern 3112 allows the player to see a light-emitting effect similar to a searchlight from below on a concert stage, making the inside of the gaming area 5a look dazzling, and providing the player with enjoyment. This makes it possible to suppress a decline in interest in games.

The LED 3176 for displaying the second pattern 3112 by emitting light is mounted on the light guide plate lower left decorative board 3174 and the light guide plate lower right decorative board 3175 of the back front lower production unit 3160 in the back front production unit 3100.

[5-9a-2. Back front left decorative unit]
The back front left decoration unit 3120 in the back front presentation unit 3100 forms a predetermined logo in line with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (gaming board 5), and is a vertically long back front left logo consisting of a plurality of alphabetic character strings. A decorative part 3121, a back front upper left logo decoration part 3122 which is provided above the back front left logo decoration part 3121 and has a stylized letter "A", and a back front left logo decoration part 3122 which is provided to the left of the back front left logo decoration part 3121. It has a back front left sub-decoration part 3123.

The back front left decorative unit 3120 includes a transparent back front left first decorative body 3124 which has a vertically elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and a transparent back front left decorative body 3124 provided behind the back front left first decorative body 3124. A second decorative body 3125, a transparent back front left third decorative body 3126 provided behind the back front left second decorative body 3125, and a transparent back front left third decorative body 3126 provided behind the back front left second decorative body 3125. The back front left decorative body base 3127 is provided.

In addition, the back front left decoration unit 3120 is used to decorate the first pattern 3111 of the light guide plate 3110, the back front left logo decoration part 3121, the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122, and the back front left sub decoration part 3123 with light emission. A front left decorative board 3128, a back front upper left decorative board 3129 for luminescent decoration of the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122, and a back front left decoration board 3129 for luminescent decoration of the back front left logo decoration part 3121 and the back front left sub decoration part 3123. A front lower left decorative board 3130 is provided.

Furthermore, the back front left decorative unit 3120 includes a back front left reflector 3131 provided on the right side of the back front left decorative board 3128 and a back front left upper reflector 3132 provided below the back front left upper decorative board 3129. , and a back front lower left reflector 3133 provided above the back front lower left decorative board 3130.

Further, the back front left decoration unit 3120 includes a left diffusion lens 3134 provided between the back front left third decoration body 3126 and the back front left decoration body base 3127.

The back front left first decorative body 3124 is connected to the back front left decorative body base so as to sandwich the left end of the back front left second decorative body 3125, the back front left third decorative body 3126, the left diffusion lens 3134, and the light guide plate 3110. It is attached to the front of the 3127. The back front left first decorative body 3124 is formed into a transparent flat plate and a vertically elongated rectangle. The back front left first decorative body 3124 has a partition decorative part 3124a extending from side to side and penetrating from front to back at a portion approximately 3/4 of the height from the bottom.

Further, the back front left first decorative body 3124 has a plurality of penetrating decorative parts 3124b penetrating back and forth. The plurality of penetrating decorative portions 3124b are provided near the upper end, near the lower end, and near the upper right end of the partitioning decorative portion 3124a. The penetrating decorative portion 3124b is formed into a rhombus shape in which the four sides of a square are replaced with arcs that bulge inward.

In addition, the back front left first decorative body 3124 includes a first front left logo decoration part 3124c that is provided below the partition decoration part 3124a on the front side and constitutes a part of the back front left logo decoration part 3121; It has a relief-shaped first back left logo decoration part 3124d provided in a portion corresponding to the first front left logo decoration part 3124c on the rear surface. The right side of the back front left first decorative body 3124 is formed in a shape that follows the character strings of the logos of the first front left logo decoration part 3124c and the first back left logo decoration part 3124d.

In addition, the back front left first decorative body 3124 is provided in a relief shape above the partition decorative part 3124a on the back surface, and the first upper left logo decoration part 3124e that constitutes a part of the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122. and a plurality of first left sub-decoration parts 3124f that are provided in a relief shape on the left side of the first back-left logo decoration part 3124d on the back surface and constitute a part of the back-front left sub-decoration part 3123; have. The first upper left logo decoration part 3124e constitutes the outermost part of the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122. The first left sub-decoration part 3124f is formed into a cloisonné pattern in which circles of the same size are stacked quarter by quarter and one circle is extracted, and a diamond pattern in which the outer circle of the cloisonné pattern is removed. They are arranged in rows one above the other.

Although the back front left first decorative body 3124 is shown as opaque in FIGS. 153 and 154, it is actually transparent, so it is provided from the front to the rear as shown in FIG. 155(a). The first back left logo decoration part 3124d, the first upper left logo decoration part 3124e, and the first left sub decoration part 3124f can be visually recognized.

The back front left first decorative body 3124 is located in front of the back front left second decorative body 3125 when assembled to the back front left decorative unit 3120, and is arranged so that the right side is located at the rear with respect to the left side. (See Figure 152). In addition, in the assembled state, the back front left first decorative body 3124 is located so that its left side is in contact with the right side of the board holding part 3125b of the back front left second decorative body 3125, and the back A first lower LED 3128a and a first upper LED 3128b of the front left decorative board 3128 are located. In addition, in the assembled state of the back front left first decorative body 3124, the first LED of the back front left upper decorative board 3129 is located above the upper surface, and the first LED of the back front lower left decorative board 3130 is located below the lower surface. One LED 3130a is located.

When the first lower LED 3128a of the back front left decorative board 3128 and the first LED 3130a of the back front lower left decorative board 3130 emit light, the back front left first decorative body 3124 is attached to the board holding portion of the back front left second decorative body 3125. 3125b, the first front left logo decoration part 3124c and the first back left logo decoration part 3124d and the first left sub-decoration part 3124f provide light-emitting decoration. At this time, the inner surface of the partition decorative portion 3124a and the inner surface of the penetrating decorative portion 3124b provided near the lower end are also decorated with light.

In addition, in the partition decorative part 3124a, when the light incident inside from the first lower LED 3128a of the back front left decorative board 3128 or the first LED 3130a of the back front lower left decorative board 3130 reaches the lower inner circumferential surface, A part of the light that reaches the inner circumferential surface is reflected to the lower inner side of the partition decorative part 3124a, and the rest is emitted from the inner circumferential surface to the inside of the hole of the partition decorative part 3124a. When the light emitted inside the partition decorative part 3124a reaches the inner peripheral surface on the opposite side, a part of the light is reflected inside the partition decorative part 3124a, and the rest is transmitted from the inner peripheral surface to the partition decorative part 3124a. The light will be incident on the inner side above the . In this way, the light from the first lower LED 3128a of the back front left decorative board 3128 and the first LED 3130a of the back front left lower decorative board 3130 is greatly attenuated by passing through the partition decorative part 3124a. The first upper left logo decoration part 3124e above the partition decoration part 3124a is almost illuminated (light-emitting decoration) by the light from the first lower LED 3128a of the left decoration board 3128 and the first LED 3130a of the back front lower left decoration board 3130. Instead, only the first front left logo decoration part 3124c, the first back left logo decoration part 3124d, and the first left sub decoration part 3124f can be displayed with bright light.

In addition, when the first upper LED 3128b of the back front left decorative board 3128 and the first LED of the back front left upper decorative board 3129 emit light, the back front left first decorative body 3124 changes to the back front left second decorative body 3125. The first upper left logo decoration part 3124e emits light and is decorated by light that enters the interior from a portion above the partition decoration part 3124a on the left side surface via the holding part 3125b or light that enters the interior from the top surface. At this time, the inner surface of the partition decoration part 3124a and the penetrating decoration part provided above the partition decoration part 3124a are also decorated with light.

In addition, in the partition decorative part 3124a, when the light incident inside from the first upper LED 3128b of the back front left decorative board 3128 or the first LED of the back front left upper decorative board 3129 reaches the inner peripheral surface on the upper side, A part of the light that reaches the peripheral surface is reflected toward the upper inner side of the partition decorative part 3124a, and the rest is emitted from the inner peripheral surface to the inside of the hole of the partition decoration part 3124a. When the light emitted inside the partition decorative part 3124a reaches the inner peripheral surface on the opposite side, a part of the light is reflected inside the partition decorative part 3124a, and the rest is transmitted from the inner peripheral surface to the partition decorative part 3124a. It will be incident on the inner side below. In this way, the light from the first upper LED 3128b of the back front left decorative board 3128 and the first LED of the back front left upper decorative board 3129 is greatly attenuated by passing through the partition decorative part 3124a. The light from the first upper LED 3128b of the left decorative board 3128 and the first LED of the back front upper left decorative board 3129 illuminates the first front left logo decoration part 3124c and the first back left logo decoration part 3124d below the partition decoration part 3124a. The first left sub-decoration part 3124f is hardly displayed with light emission (light-emission decoration), and only the first upper left logo decoration part 3124e and the upper penetrating decoration part 3124b can be brightly displayed with light emission.

In this way, the back front left first decorative body 3124 is configured such that the upper side and the lower side can be decorated with light (light emitting display) independently, with the dividing decorative part 3124a as a boundary.

The back front left second decorative body 3125 is entirely transparent, and includes a flat plate-shaped decorative plate portion 3125a parallel to the back front left first decorative body 3124 and the periphery of the decorative plate portion 3125a except for the right side ( The substrate holding portions 3125b are provided on the left side, the upper side, and the lower side. The board holding part 3125b extends outward from the decorative plate part 3125a, projects forward, and is recessed forward from the rear side. The board holding part 3125b cooperates with the board holding part 3127b of the back front left decorative body base 3127 to sandwich and hold the back front left decorative board 3128, the back front upper left decorative board 3129, and the back front lower left decorative board 3130. It is for the purpose of In the back front left second decorative body 3125, the front surface of the board holding portion 3125b is parallel to the front surface of the game panel 1100, whereas the decorative plate portion 3125a is inclined so that the right side side is located further back than the left side side. ing.

In addition, the back front left second decorative body 3125 has a partition decorative part 3125c extending from side to side and penetrating back and forth at a portion of the decorative plate part 3125a at about 3/4 of the height from the bottom. There is. This partition decoration part 3125c is the same size and is formed at the same height as the partition decoration part 3124a of the back front left first decoration body 3124.

In addition, the back front left second decorative body 3125 is a relief-shaped second back left logo decoration part that is provided below the partition decorative part 3125c on the rear surface and constitutes a part of the back front left logo decoration part 3121. 3125d. The right side of the second back left decorative body 3125 is formed in a shape that follows the character string of the logo of the second back left logo decoration part 3125d.

Further, the back front left second decorative body 3125 is provided in a relief shape above the partition decorative part 3125c on the back surface, and is a second upper left logo decoration part 3125e that constitutes a part of the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122. and a plurality of second left sub-decoration parts 3125f that are provided in relief on the back side to the left of the second back-left logo decoration part 3125d and constitute a part of the back-front left sub-decoration part 3123; have. The second upper left logo decoration part 3125e is formed to be one size smaller than the first upper left logo decoration part 3124e of the back front left first decoration body 3124. The second left sub-decoration part 3125f is provided at a position corresponding to the first left sub-decoration part 3124f, and is formed in a similar shape that is slightly smaller.

Although the back front left second decorative body 3125 is shown as opaque in FIGS. 153 and 154, it is actually transparent, so it is provided from the front to the rear as shown in FIG. 155(b). The second back left logo decoration part 3125d, the second upper left logo decoration part 3125e, and the second left sub decoration part 3125f can be visually recognized.

When the back front left second decorative body 3125 is assembled to the back front left decorative unit 3120, as shown in FIG. 152 etc., the back front left first decorative body 3124 is located in front of the decorative plate portion 3125a. At the same time, a third decorative body 3126 on the back and front left side is located at the rear. In addition, in the assembled state, the back front left second decorative body 3125 has the front end side of the back front left decorative board 3128 and the back front left reflector 3131, and the back front upper left decorative board 3129 in the board holding part 3125b recessed forward. The front end side of the back front upper left reflector 3132, the front end side of the back front lower left decorative board 3130, and the front end side of the back front lower left reflector 3133 are inserted, respectively. The second lower LED 3128c and the second upper LED 3128d of the back front left decorative board 3128 are on the left side of the left side of the decorative plate part 3125a, the second LED of the back front upper left decorative board 3129 is on the upper side of the upper surface, and the second LED of the back front left decorative board 3129 is on the lower side of the back front The second LEDs 3130b of the lower left decorative board 3130 are located respectively.

When the second lower LED 3128c of the back front left decorative board 3128 and the second LED 3130b of the back front lower left decorative board 3130 emit light, the back front left second decorative body 3125 emits light from the dividing decorative part 3125c on the left side of the decorative plate part 3125a. The second back left logo decoration part 3125d and the second left sub-decoration part 3125f emits light and are decorated by the light that enters the inside from the lower part of the decorative plate part 3125a or the light that enters the inside from the lower surface of the decorative plate part 3125a. At this time, the inner surface of the partition decorative portion 3125c is also decorated with light emission.

In addition, in the partition decorative part 3125c, when the light incident inside from the second lower LED 3128c of the back front left decorative board 3128 or the second LED 3130b of the back front lower left decorative board 3130 reaches the lower inner peripheral surface, A part of the light that has reached the inner circumferential surface is reflected to the lower inner side of the partition decorative part 3125c, and the rest is emitted from the inner circumferential surface to the inside of the hole of the partition decorative part 3125c. When the light emitted inside the partition decorative part 3125c reaches the inner peripheral surface on the opposite side, a part of the light is reflected to the inside of the partition decorative part 3125c, and the rest is transmitted from the inner peripheral surface to the partition decorative part 3125c. The light will be incident on the inner side above the . In this way, the light from the second lower LED 3128c of the back front left decorative board 3128 and the second LED 3130b of the back front left lower decorative board 3130 is greatly attenuated by passing through the partition decorative part 3125c. The second upper left logo decoration part 3125e above the partition decoration part 3125c is almost illuminated (light-emitting decoration) by the light from the second lower LED 3128c of the left decoration board 3128 and the second LED 3130b of the back front lower left decoration board 3130. Instead, only the second back left logo decorative part 3125d and the second left sub-decorative part 3125f can be displayed with bright light.

In addition, when the second upper LED 3128d of the back front left decorative board 3128 and the second LED of the back front left upper decorative board 3129 emit light, the back front left second decorative body 3125 becomes a partition decorative part on the left side of the decorative plate part 3125a. The second upper left logo decoration part 3125e emits light and is decorated by light that enters inside from a portion above 3125c and light that enters inside from the upper surface of the decoration plate part 3125a. At this time, the inner surface of the partition decorative portion 3125c is also decorated with light.

In addition, in the partition decorative portion 3125c, when the light incident inside from the second upper LED 3128d of the back front left decorative board 3128 or the second LED of the back front left upper decorative board 3129 reaches the upper inner circumferential surface, A part of the light that reaches the circumferential surface is reflected toward the upper inner side of the partition decorative part 3125c, and the rest is emitted from the inner circumferential surface to the inside of the hole of the partition decorative part 3125c. When the light emitted inside the partition decorative part 3125c reaches the inner peripheral surface on the opposite side, a part of the light is reflected to the inside of the partition decorative part 3125c, and the rest is transmitted from the inner peripheral surface to the partition decorative part 3125c. It will be incident on the inner side below. In this way, the light from the second upper LED 3128d of the back front left decorative board 3128 and the second LED of the back front left upper decorative board 3129 is greatly attenuated by passing through the partition decorative part 3125c. The light from the second upper LED 3128d of the left decorative board 3128 and the second LED of the back front upper left decorative board 3129 illuminates most of the second back left logo decorative part 3125d and second left sub-decorative part 3125f below the partition decorative part 3125c. There is no light-emitting display (light-emitting decoration), and only the second upper left logo decoration portion 3125e can be displayed brightly.

In this way, the back front left second decorative body 3125 is configured such that the upper side and the lower side can be independently decorated with light (light emitting display) with the dividing decorative part 3125c as a boundary.

The back front left third decorative body 3126 is entirely transparent, and has a flat plate-like decorative plate portion parallel to the decorative plate portions 3125a of the back front left first decorative body 3124 and the back front left second decorative body 3125. 3126a, and a flange portion 3126b extending rearward from the periphery (left side, upper side, lower side) of the decorative plate portion 3126a excluding the right side. In the back front left third decorative body 3126, the rear surface of the flange portion 3126b is parallel to the front surface of the game panel 1100, while the decorative plate portion 3126a is inclined so that the right side is located further back than the left side. There is.

In addition, the back front left third decorative body 3126 has a partition decorative part 3126c extending from side to side and penetrating back and forth at a portion of the decorative plate part 3126a at about 3/4 of the height from the bottom. There is. This partition decoration part 3126c is the same size and is formed at the same height as the partition decoration part 3124a of the back front left first decoration body 3124.

Further, the back front left third decorative body 3126 is a relief-shaped third back left logo decoration part that is provided below the partition decorative part 3126c on the rear surface and constitutes a part of the back front left logo decoration part 3121. 3126d. The right side of the back front left third decoration body 3126 is formed in a shape that follows the character string of the logo of the third back left logo decoration part 3126d.

Further, the back front left third decorative body 3126 is provided in a relief shape above the partition decorative part 3126c on the back surface, and is a third upper left logo decoration part 3126e that constitutes a part of the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122. and a plurality of third left sub-decoration parts 3126f that are provided in a relief shape on the left side of the third back-left logo decoration part 3126d on the back surface and constitute a part of the back-front left sub-decoration part 3123; have. The third upper left logo decoration part 3126e is formed to be one size smaller than the second upper left logo decoration part 3125e of the second back front left decoration body 3125. The third left sub-decoration part 3126f is provided at a position corresponding to the first left sub-decoration part 3124f, and has the same size between the first left sub-decoration part 3124f and the second left sub-decoration part 3125f. It is formed into a shape.

Although the back front left third decorative body 3126 is shown as opaque in FIGS. 153 and 154, it is actually transparent, so it is provided from the front to the rear as shown in FIG. 155(c). The third back left logo decoration part 3126d, the third upper left logo decoration part 3126e, and the third left sub decoration part 3126f can be visually recognized.

When the back front left third decorative body 3126 is assembled to the back front left decorative unit 3120, as shown in FIG. The decorative plate portion 3125a of the second decorative body 3125 is located, and the light guide plate 3110 and the left diffusion lens 3134 are located at the rear. In addition, in the assembled state of the back front left third decorative body 3126, the third lower LED 3128e and the third upper LED 3128f of the back front left decorative board 3128 are on the left side of the left surface of the decorative plate portion 3126a, and the third lower LED 3128e and third upper LED 3128f are on the left side of the left side of the back front left decorative board 3126a, and The third LED 3130c of the front upper left decorative board 3129 and the back front lower left decorative board 3130 are located below the lower surface of the front upper left decorative board 3129, respectively.

When the third lower LED 3128e of the back front left decorative board 3128 and the third LED 3130c of the back front lower left decorative board 3130 emit light, the back front left third decorative body 3126 emits light from the dividing decorative part 3126c on the left side of the decorative plate part 3126a. The third back left logo decoration part 3126d and the third left sub-decoration part 3126f emits light and are decorated by the light that enters the inside from the lower part of the decorative plate part 3126a or the light that enters the inside from the lower surface of the decorative plate part 3126a. At this time, the inner surface of the partition decorative portion 3126c is also decorated with light emission.

In addition, in the partition decorative part 3126c, when the light incident inside from the third lower LED 3128e of the back front left decorative board 3128 or the third LED 3130c of the back front lower left decorative board 3130 reaches the lower inner peripheral surface, A part of the light that has reached the inner circumferential surface is reflected to the lower inner side of the partition decorative part 3126c, and the rest is emitted from the inner circumferential surface to the inside of the hole of the partition decorative part 3126c. When the light emitted inside the partition decorative part 3126c reaches the inner peripheral surface on the opposite side, a part of the light is reflected to the inside of the partition decorative part 3126c, and the rest is transmitted from the inner peripheral surface to the partition decorative part 3126c. The light will be incident on the inner side above the . In this way, the light from the third lower LED 3128e of the back front left decorative board 3128 and the third LED 3130c of the back front left lower decorative board 3130 is greatly attenuated by passing through the partition decorative part 3126c. The third upper left logo decoration part 3126e above the partition decoration part 3126c is almost illuminated (light-emitting decoration) by the light from the third lower LED 3128e of the left decorative board 3128 and the third LED 3130c of the back front lower left decorative board 3130. Instead, only the third back left logo decorative part 3126d and the third left sub-decorative part 3126f can be displayed with bright light.

In addition, when the third upper LED 3128f of the back front left decorative board 3128 and the third LED of the back front left upper decorative board 3129 emit light, the back front left third decorative body 3126 becomes a partition decorative part on the left side of the decorative plate part 3126a. The third upper left logo decoration part 3126e emits light and is decorated by light that enters the interior from a portion above 3126c and light that enters the interior from the upper surface of the decoration plate part 3126a. At this time, the inner surface of the partition decorative portion 3126c is also decorated with light.

In addition, in the partition decorative portion 3126c, when the light incident inside from the third upper LED 3128f of the back front left decorative board 3128 or the third LED of the back front left upper decorative board 3129 reaches the upper inner circumferential surface, A part of the light that has reached the circumferential surface is reflected to the upper inner side of the partition decorative part 3126c, and the rest is emitted from the inner circumferential surface to the inside of the hole of the partition decorative part 3126c. When the light emitted inside the partition decorative part 3126c reaches the inner peripheral surface on the opposite side, a part of the light is reflected to the inside of the partition decorative part 3126c, and the rest is transmitted from the inner peripheral surface to the partition decorative part 3126c. It will be incident on the inner side below. In this way, the light from the third upper LED 3128f of the back front left decorative board 3128 and the third LED of the back front left upper decorative board 3129 is greatly attenuated by passing through the partition decorative part 3126c. The light from the third upper LED 3128f of the left decorative board 3128 and the third LED of the back front upper left decorative board 3129 illuminates most of the third back left logo decorative part 3126d and third left sub-decorative part 3126f below the partition decorative part 3126c. There is no light-emitting display (light-emitting decoration), and only the third upper left logo decoration portion 3126e can be displayed brightly.

In this way, the back front left third decorative body 3126 is configured such that the upper side and the lower side can be decorated with light (light emitting display) independently, with the dividing decorative part 3126c as a boundary.

The back front left decorative body base 3127 is entirely transparent, and includes a flat decorative plate portion 3127a and a substrate provided around the decorative plate portion 3127a except for the right side (left side, upper side, and lower side). It has a holding part 3127b. The decorative plate portion 3127a is parallel to the front surface of the game panel 1100.

The board holding part 3127b extends further outward than the decorative plate part 3127a, has a rear surface located at the rear, and is recessed from the front side to the rear. The board holding part 3127b cooperates with the board holding part 3125b of the second back front left decorative body 3125 to sandwich the back front left decorative board 3128, the back front upper left decorative board 3129, and the back front lower left decorative board 3130. It is for holding. Moreover, the left end of the upper connection base 3190 is attached to the upper part of the board holding part 3127b, and the left end of the upper end of the unit base 3178 in the back front lower production unit 3160 is attached to the lower part.

In addition, the back front left decoration base 3127 extends across the entire width at a constant vertical height near the center of the rear surface of the decorative plate portion 3127a in the vertical direction, and is provided with an interval in the vertical direction. Three back front left band decoration parts 3127c, and a base left upper logo decoration part 3127d which is provided in a relief shape near the upper part of the rear surface of the decorative plate part 3127a and constitutes a part of the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122. ,have. The upper left logo decoration part 3127d of the base is formed to be one size smaller than the third upper left logo decoration part 3126e of the back front left third decoration body 3126.

Although the back front left decoration base 3127 is shown as opaque in FIGS. 153 and 154, it is actually transparent, so as shown in FIG. 155(d), the back side provided from the front to the back The front left band decoration part 3127c and the upper left base logo decoration part 3127d can be visually recognized.

When the back front left decoration base 3127 is assembled to the back front left decoration unit 3120, the light guide plate 3110 and the left diffusion lens 3134 are located in front of the decoration plate portion 3127a, as shown in FIG. 152 and the like. In addition, in the assembled state, the back front left decorative body base 3127 has a board holder 3127b recessed rearward, a back front left decorative board 3128, a back front left reflector 3131 on the rear end side, and a back front left upper left decorative board 3129. The rear end side of the back front upper left reflector 3132, the rear end side of the back front lower left decorative board 3130, and the rear end side of the back front lower left reflector 3133 are inserted, respectively. The lower base LED 3128h and the upper base LED 3128i of the back front left decorative board 3128 are located on the left side of the left surface of the decorative plate portion 3127a, respectively.

The back front left decorative body base 3127 can decorate the back front left band decoration part 3127c of the decorative plate part 3127a by emitting light when the base lower LED 3128h of the back front left decorative board 3128 is made to emit light. The three back front left band decoration parts 3127c can each be decorated with light emission independently. Furthermore, when the LED 3128i on the base of the back front left decorative board 3128 is made to emit light, the back front left decoration base 3127 can decorate the upper left logo decoration part 3127d of the base.

The back front left decorative board 3128 has a vertically long flat plate shape, and its plate surface is oriented in the left-right direction. The back front left decorative board 3128 includes the back front left first decorative body 3124, the decorative plate portion 3125a of the back front left second decorative body 3125, the decorative plate portion 3126a of the back front left third decorative body 3126, and the back front left decoration. It is arranged to the left of the decorative plate portion 3127a of the body base 3127. The back front left decorative board 3128 is held between the board holding part 3125b of the back front left second decorative body 3125 and the board holding part 3127b of the back front left decorative body base 3127 together with the back front left reflector 3131. ing.

The back front left decorative board 3128 is located to the left of the back front left first decorative body 3124 and includes a plurality of first lower LEDs 3128a provided below the partition decorative part 3124a, and a back front left first decorative body. A plurality of first upper LEDs 3128b are located to the left of 3124 and are provided above the partition decoration part 3124a, and a partition decoration is located to the left of the decoration plate part 3125a of the second decoration body 3125 on the front left of the back side. A plurality of second lower LEDs 3128c are provided below the section 3125c, and a plurality of second lower LEDs 3128c are located to the left of the decorative plate section 3125a of the second back and front left decorative body 3125, and are provided above the partition decorative section 3125c. A plurality of second upper LEDs 3128d, a plurality of third lower LEDs 3128e located to the left of the decorative plate portion 3126a of the front left third decorative body 3126 and provided below the partition decorative portion 3126c; A plurality of third upper LEDs 3128f are provided to the left of the decorative plate portion 3126a of the left third decorative body 3126 and provided above the partition decorative portion 3126c.

In addition, the back front left decorative board 3128 includes a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3128g located to the left of the left diffuser lens 3134 (light guide plate 3110), and the back front left decorative plate portion 3127a of the back front left decorative body base 3127. Three base lower LEDs 3128h located to the left of the left band decoration part 3127c and a plurality of bases located to the left of the base left upper logo decoration part 3127d in the decoration plate part 3127a of the back front left decoration base 3127. It is equipped with an upper LED 3128i.

When the plurality of first lower LEDs 3128a of the back front left decorative board 3128 are made to emit light, the first front left logo decoration part 3124c, the first back left logo decoration part 3124d, etc. of the back front left first decoration body 3124 are illuminated with light. Can be done. When the plurality of first upper LEDs 3128b of the back front left decorative board 3128 are made to emit light, the first upper left logo decoration portion 3124e of the back front left first decorative body 3124, etc. can be decorated with light emission. When the plurality of second lower LEDs 3128c of the back front left decorative board 3128 are made to emit light, the second back left logo decoration portion 3125d of the back front left second decorative body 3125 and the like can be decorated with light. When the plurality of second upper LEDs 3128d of the back front left decorative board 3128 are made to emit light, the second upper left logo decoration portion 3125e of the back front left second decorative body 3125 can be decorated with light emission.

Moreover, when the plurality of lower third LEDs 3128e of the back front left decorative board 3128 are made to emit light, the third back left logo decoration portion 3126d of the back front left third decorative body 3126 can be decorated with light emission. When the plurality of third upper LEDs 3128f of the back front left decorative board 3128 are made to emit light, the third upper left logo decoration portion 3126e of the back front left third decorative body 3126 can be decorated with light emission.

When the plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3128g of the back front left decorative board 3128 are made to emit light, the first pattern 3111 of the light guide plate 3110 can be displayed by emitting light through the left diffusion lens 3134. When a plurality (three) of the lower base LEDs 3128h of the back front left decorative board 3128 are made to emit light, the back front left band decorative portion 3127c of the back front left decorative body base 3127 can be decorated with light emission. When the plurality of LEDs 3128i on the base of the back front left decorative board 3128 are made to emit light, the base upper left logo decoration portion 3127d of the back front left decorative body base 3127 can be decorated with light emission.

The first lower LED 3128a, the first upper LED 3128b, the second lower LED 3128c, the second upper LED 3128d, the third lower LED 3128e, the third upper LED 3128f, the light guide plate LED 3128g, and the lower base mounted on the right side of the back front left decorative board 3128. The LED 3128h and the LED 3128i on the base are full color LEDs.

Further, the back front left decorative board 3128 has a surface coated with a white solder resist (protective material). This white solder resist makes it possible to make the back front left decorative board 3128 difficult to see, as well as to reflect the light from the mounted LEDs. The decorative portion 3121, the back front upper left logo decorative portion 3122, the back front left sub-decorative portion 3123, etc. can be decorated with brighter light. In addition, the back front left decorative board 3128 has electronic components such as LEDs mounted thereon, and characters and symbols to avoid confusion with other decorative boards, using ink of a color with high brightness or saturation (for example, yellow). It is applied by screen printing. This makes the characters and symbols less noticeable. Further, although not shown in the drawings, the back front left decorative board 3128 is equipped with a connector, a resistor, an LED driver, etc. in addition to the LED.

The back front upper left decorative board 3129 has a horizontally long flat plate shape, and its plate surface is oriented in the vertical direction. The back front left upper decorative board 3129 includes the back front left first decorative body 3124, the decorative plate portion 3125a of the back front left second decorative body 3125, the decorative plate portion 3126a of the back front left third decorative body 3126, and the back front left decoration. It is arranged above the decorative plate part 3127a of the body base 3127. The back front upper left decorative board 3129 is held between the board holding part 3125b of the back front left second decorative body 3125 and the board holding part 3127b of the back front left decorative body base 3127 together with the back front left upper reflector 3132. ing.

Although not shown, the back front upper left decorative board 3129 includes a plurality of first LEDs provided above the back front left first decorative body 3124 and a decorative plate portion 3125a of the back front left second decorative body 3125. It includes a plurality of second LEDs provided above, and a plurality of third LEDs provided above the decorative plate portion 3126a of the back front left third decorative body 3126.

When the plurality of first LEDs of the back front upper left decorative board 3129 are made to emit light, the first upper left logo decoration portion 3124e of the back front left first decorative body 3124 can be decorated with light emission. When the plurality of second LEDs of the back front upper left decorative board 3129 are made to emit light, the second upper left logo decoration part 3125e of the back front left second decorative body 3125 and the like can be decorated with light. When the plurality of third LEDs of the back front upper left decorative board 3129 are made to emit light, the third upper left logo decoration portion 3126e of the back front left third decorative body 3126 can be decorated with light emission.

The plurality of first LEDs, second LEDs, and third LEDs mounted on the lower surface of the back front upper left decorative board 3129 are full-color LEDs.

Further, the back front upper left decorative board 3129 has a surface coated with a white solder resist (protective material). With this white solder resist, it is possible to make the back front upper left decorative board 3129 difficult to see, and also to reflect the light from the mounted LED, making the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122 brighter and more luminous. can be done. In addition, the back front upper left decorative board 3129 has electronic components such as LEDs mounted thereon, and characters and symbols to avoid confusion with other decorative boards. It is applied by screen printing. This makes the characters and symbols less noticeable. Further, although not shown in the drawings, in addition to LEDs, connectors, resistors, LED drivers, and the like are mounted on the back front upper left decorative board 3129.

The back front lower left decorative board 3130 has a horizontally long flat plate shape, and its plate surface is oriented in the vertical direction. The back front lower left decorative board 3130 includes the back front left first decorative body 3124, the decorative plate portion 3125a of the back front left second decorative body 3125, the decorative plate portion 3126a of the back front left third decorative body 3126, and the back front left decoration. It is arranged below the decorative plate part 3127a of the body base 3127. The back front lower left decorative board 3130 is sandwiched together with the back front lower left reflector 3133 between the board holding part 3125b of the back front left second decorative body 3125 and the board holding part 3127b of the back front left decorative body base 3127. ing.

The back front lower left decorative board 3130 is provided below the plurality of first LEDs 3130a provided below the back front left first decorative body 3124 and the decorative plate portion 3125a of the back front left second decorative body 3125. It includes a plurality of second LEDs 3130b and a plurality of third LEDs 3130c provided below the decorative plate portion 3126a of the back front left third decorative body 3126.

When the plurality of first LEDs 3130a of the back front lower left decorative board 3130 are made to emit light, the first front left logo decoration part 3124c, the first back left logo decoration part 3124d, etc. of the back front left first decoration body 3124 can be decorated with light. can. When the plurality of second LEDs 3130b of the back front lower left decorative board 3130 are made to emit light, the second back left logo decoration portion 3125d of the back front left second decorative body 3125 and the like can be decorated with light. When the plurality of third LEDs 3130c of the back front lower left decorative board 3130 are made to emit light, the third back left logo decoration portion 3126d of the back front left third decorative body 3126 and the like can be decorated with light.

The plurality of first LEDs 3130a, second LEDs 3130b, and third LEDs 3130c mounted on the lower surface of the back front lower left decorative board 3130 are full-color LEDs.

Further, the back front lower left decorative board 3130 has a surface coated with a white solder resist (protective material). With this white solder resist, it is possible to make the back front lower left decorative board 3130 difficult to see, and also to reflect the light from the mounted LED, making the back front left logo decoration part 3121 brighter and more luminous. can be done. In addition, the back front lower left decorative board 3130 has electronic components such as LEDs mounted thereon, and characters and symbols to avoid confusion with other decorative boards. It is applied by screen printing. This makes the characters and symbols less noticeable. Further, although not shown, in addition to LEDs, connectors, resistors, LED drivers, and the like are mounted on the back front lower left decorative board 3130.

The left diffusion lens 3134 is disposed between the light guide plate 3110 and the back front left decorative board 3128 (back front left reflector 3131), and is located between the back front left third decorative body 3126 and the back front left decorative body base 3127. is sandwiched between. The left diffusion lens 3134 diffuses the light from the plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3128g of the back front left decorative board 3128 and illuminates the left side surface of the light guide plate 3110.

As shown in FIG. 157, the back front left decoration unit 3120 includes the first front left logo decoration part 3124c and the first back left logo decoration part 3124d of the back front left first decoration body 3124, and the back front left second decoration body 3125. The second back left logo decoration part 3125d of the back left logo decoration part 3125d and the third back left logo decoration part 3126d of the back front left third decoration body 3126 form one back front left logo decoration part 3121 by overlapping front and back. These first front left logo decoration part 3124c, first back left logo decoration part 3124d, second back left logo decoration part 3125d, and third back left logo decoration part 3126d have different positions in the front and back direction, so the game As the position of the user's eyes moves, the degree of overlapping changes, making it possible to make a predetermined logo consisting of a plurality of alphabets appear three-dimensional.

In addition, the back front left decorative unit 3120 includes a first lower LED 3128a, a second lower LED 3128c, and a third lower LED 3128e of the back front left decorative board 3128, and a first LED 3130a, a second LED 3130b, and a third LED of the back front left lower decorative board 3130. By appropriately emitting light from the LED 3130c, the first front left logo decoration part 3124c, the first back left logo decoration part 3124d, the second back left logo decoration part 3125d, and the third back left logo decoration part 3126d are independently activated. The back front left logo decoration portion 3121 can be decorated with light emission in a variety of light emission modes.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 157, the back front left decoration unit 3120 includes a first upper left logo decoration part 3124e of the back front left first decoration body 3124 and a second upper left logo decoration part 3125e of the back front left second decoration body 3125. , the third upper left logo decoration part 3126e of the back front left third decoration body 3126, and the base left upper logo decoration part 3127d of the back front left decoration body base 3127 overlap in the front and back to form one back front upper left logo decoration part 3122. are doing. The positions of the first upper left logo decoration part 3124e, the second upper left logo decoration part 3125e, the third upper left logo decoration part 3126e, and the base upper left logo decoration part 3127d are different in the front and back direction, so that the position of the player's eyes is different. As they move, the degree to which they overlap changes, making the logo with a stylized letter "A" appear three-dimensional.

In addition, the back front left decoration unit 3120 includes a first upper left logo decoration part 3124e, a second upper left logo decoration part 3125e, a third upper left logo decoration part 3126e, a base upper left logo decoration part 3127d, which are located at approximately the same position when viewed from the front. Even with a logo like this, by sequentially decorating the back front left first decorative body 3124, the back front left second decorative body 3125, the back front left third decorative body 3126, and the back front left decorative body base 3127, the game can be played. It is possible to show a pseudo animation with movement to the player, and it is possible to strongly appeal to the player. This animation-like light-emitting effect is achieved by sequentially decorating the first front left logo decoration part 3124c, the first back left logo decoration part 3124d, the second back left logo decoration part 3125d, and the third back left logo decoration part 3126d. However, similar effects can be achieved.

In addition, the back front left decorative unit 3120 includes a first upper LED 3128b, a second upper LED 3128d, a third upper LED 3128f, a base upper LED 3128i, and a first LED, a second LED of the back front left upper decorative board 3129, By causing the LED and the third LED to emit light as appropriate, the first upper left logo decoration part 3124e, the second upper left logo decoration part 3125e, the third upper left logo decoration part 3126e, and the base upper left logo decoration part 3127d each independently emit light. The back front upper left logo decoration portion 3122 can be decorated with light in a variety of light emission modes.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 157, the back front left decoration unit 3120 includes a first left sub decoration part 3124f of the back front left first decoration body 3124 and a second left sub decoration part 3125f of the back front left second decoration body 3125. , the third left sub-decoration part 3126f of the third back-front left decoration body 3126 are overlapped one after another to form one back-front left sub-decoration part 3123. These first left sub-decoration part 3124f, second left sub-decoration part 3125f, and third left sub-decoration part 3126f are located at different positions in the front-rear direction, so when the player's eye position moves, the extent to which they overlap will change. changes, and the back front left sub-decoration part 3123 can be made to look three-dimensional.

In addition, the back front left decorative unit 3120 includes a first lower LED 3128a, a second lower LED 3128c, and a third lower LED 3128e of the back front left decorative board 3128, and a first LED 3130a, a second LED 3130b, and a third LED of the back front left lower decorative board 3130. By appropriately emitting light from the LED 3130c, the first left sub-decoration part 3124f, the second left sub-decoration part 3125f, and the third left sub-decoration part 3126f can be decorated with light emission independently. The portion 3123 can be decorated with light emission in various light emission modes.

Further, the back front left decoration unit 3120 includes a partition decoration part 3124a of the back front left first decoration body 3124, a partition decoration part 3125c of the back front left second decoration body 3125, and a partition decoration part of the back front left third decoration body 3126. 3126c, the lower side (back front left logo decoration part 3121, back front left sub-decoration part 3123) and the upper side (back side The light-emitting decoration of the front upper left logo decoration part 3122) can be clearly separated, and the decorative effects of the light-emitting decoration of the back front left logo decoration part 3121 and the back front left sub-decoration part 3123 and the light-emitting decoration of the back front left upper logo decoration part 3122 can be clearly separated. can be further increased. At this time, the partition decoration part 3124a, the partition decoration part 3125c, and the partition decoration part 3126c are also decorated with light, so that the appearance of the partition decoration part 3124a, the partition decoration part 3125c, and the partition decoration part 3126c can be improved, and they also emit light. You can enjoy decoration.

In addition, when the back front left decorative unit 3120 lights up the first lower LED 3128a of the back front left decorative board 3128 and the first LED 3130a of the back front left lower decorative board 3130, the back front left first decorative body 3124 is decorated with a partition. The penetrating decorative portion 3124b below the portion 3124a can be decorated with light. In addition, when the first upper LED 3128b of the back front left decorative board 3128 and the first LED of the back front left upper decorative board 3129 are made to emit light, the penetrating decoration above the partition decorative part 3124a of the back front left first decorative body 3124 is illuminated. The portion 3124b can be decorated with light emission. The appearance can also be improved by the light-emitting decoration of these penetrating decorative portions 3124b.

In addition, the back front left decorative unit 3120 allows the back front right first decorative board 3148 and the back front right second decorative board in the back front right decorative unit 3140 to emit light from the light guide plate LED 3128g of the back front left decorative board 3128. 3149 and the light guide plate LED of the back front right light guide plate decorative substrate 3150, the first pattern 3111 of the light guide plate 3110 can be displayed by emitting light.

As described above, according to the back front left decoration unit 3120, transparent three-dimensional decorations such as the back front left logo decoration part 3121, the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122, and the back front left sub decoration part 3123, Therefore, it is possible to improve the appearance of the gaming area 5a, and to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players.

In addition, the back front left logo decoration part 3121, the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122, and the back front left sub-decoration part 3123 can be decorated with various light emitting modes, so players will not get bored with the various light emitting effects. This makes it possible to suppress a decline in player interest.

In the above description, the partition decoration parts 3124a, partition decoration parts 3125c, and partition decoration parts 3126c that cut off light from the LED are shown as penetrating in the front and back, but the present invention is not limited to this. , protrusions may also be used. Further, a protrusion that is inserted into the penetrating decorative part 3124b of the first back left decorative body 3124 is provided on the second back front left decorative body 3125, so that the first back front left decorative body 3124 can be positioned by inserting the protrusion. It's okay. In other words, the penetrating decorative portion 3124b may be used as a positioning hole.

[5-9a-3. Back front right decorative unit]
The back front right decoration unit 3140 in the back front presentation unit 3100 forms a predetermined logo in line with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (gaming board 5), and is a vertically long back front right logo consisting of a plurality of alphabetic character strings. A decorative part 3141, a back front right upper right logo decoration part 3142 (see FIG. 151(b)), which is provided above the back front right logo decoration part 3141 and has a stylized letter "A", and a back front right logo decoration part 3142. It has a back front right sub-decoration part (not shown) provided near the decoration part 3141.

The back front right decorative unit 3140 includes a transparent back front right first decorative body 3144 which has a vertically long shape when viewed from the front, and a transparent back front right second decorative body provided behind the back front right first decorative body 3144. A decorative body 3145, a transparent back front right third decorative body 3146 provided behind the back front right second decorative body 3145, and a transparent back provided behind the back front right third decorative body 3146. A front right decorative body base 3147 (see FIG. 152).

The right end of the upper connection base 3190 is attached to the upper part of the back front right decorative body base 3147, and the right end of the upper end of the unit base 3178 in the back front lower production unit 3160 is attached to the lower part. In addition, the back front right decoration base 3147 has three back front right band decorations that extend across the entire width at a constant height vertically near the center in the vertical direction, and are provided at intervals vertically. 3147a (see FIG. 151(b)).

In addition, the back front right decoration unit 3140 is used to decorate the first pattern 3111 of the light guide plate 3110, the back front right logo decoration part 3141, the back front right upper right logo decoration part 3142, and the back front right sub decoration part to emit light. The first right decorative board 3148, the second back right decorative board 3149, the back front right light guide plate decorative board 3150 for decorating the first pattern 3111 of the light guide plate 3110 with light, and the back front upper right logo decoration part 3142. It includes a back front upper right decorative board 3151 for luminescent decoration and a back front lower right decorative board 3152 for luminescent decoration of the back front right logo decoration part 3141 (see FIG. 156).

In addition, the back front right decorative unit 3140 includes an upper right diffusion lens 3153 provided between the light guide plate 3110 and the back front right first decorative board 3148, and a space between the light guide plate 3110 and the back front right second decorative board 3149. and a lower right diffusing lens 3155 provided between the light guide plate 3110 and the back front right light guide plate decorative substrate 3150 (see FIG. 156). . The upper right diffuser lens 3153, the middle right diffuser lens 3154, and the lower right diffuser lens 3155 are provided between the back front right third decorative body 3146 and the back front right decorative body base 3147.

Furthermore, the back front right decoration unit 3140 receives the game ball B that has been accepted into the general prize opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700 and is guided backward by the first guide path 2701, and guides it downward. 3156, and a second back guidance passage 3157 that receives the game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2022 of the side right middle unit 2700 and guided backward by the second guidance passage and guides it downward. . In the first back guidance passage 3156, one general winning a prize opening sensor 3001 is provided. The game balls B guided to the first back guidance passage 3156 and the second back guidance passage 3157 are discharged to the lower board holder 1200 via the back front lower presentation unit 3160.

In addition, in the back front right decoration unit 3140, the game ball B received in the accessory prize opening 2006 of the second attacker unit 2600 and guided backward by the guidance passage 2613 circulates, and the V prize opening 2007 and the losing mouth 2008 are distributed. A sorting passage provided, and a V prize opening door 3006 that distributes the game ball B that advances and retreats into the sorting passage and is accepted into the accessory prize opening 2006 to either the V winning opening 2007 or the losing opening 2008; A V distribution solenoid 3007 that advances and retreats the V winning opening door 3006, a V winning opening sensor 3003 that detects the gaming balls B distributed to the V winning opening 2007, and a losing opening sensor 3003 that detects the gaming balls B distributed to the losing opening 2008. A mouth sensor 3004 is provided. The game ball B detected by the V winning opening sensor 3003 and the losing opening sensor 3004 is discharged to the lower board holder 1200 via the back front lower production unit 3160.

The configurations of the back front right logo decoration part 3141, the back front upper right logo decoration part 3142, the back front right sub-decoration part, etc. in the back front right decoration unit 3140 are the same as those of the back front left decoration unit 3120, and detailed explanations are as follows. Omitted.

In addition, the back front right first decorative body 3144, the back front right second decorative body 3145, and the back front right third decorative body 3146 of the back front right decoration unit 3140 include a back front right logo decoration part 3141 and a back front right upper right decoration part 3141. Between the logo decoration part 3142, there is a partition decoration part 3144a extending left and right and penetrating back and forth. This partition decoration part 3144a allows the back front right logo decoration part 3141 and the back front upper right logo decoration part 3142 to be decorated with light emission independently.

Furthermore, the back front right first decorative body 3144 has a plurality of penetrating decorative parts 3144b penetrating back and forth. These plural penetrating decorative parts 3144b can have the same effect as the penetrating decorative part 3124b of the back front left first decorative body 3124.

In this way, according to the back front right decoration unit 3140, like the back front left decoration unit 3120, the back front right logo decoration part 3141, the back front upper right logo decoration part 3142, the back front right sub decoration part, etc. The transparent three-dimensional decoration makes it possible to improve the appearance of the inside of the game area 5a, and it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players.

In addition, since the back front right logo decoration part 3141, the back front upper right logo decoration part 3142, and the back front right sub-decoration part can be decorated with various light emitting modes, it is difficult for players to get bored with the various light emitting effects. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decline in player's interest.

In addition, in the back front right logo decoration part 3141 and the back front right upper right logo decoration part 3142, which are located at approximately the same position when viewed from the front, the back front right first decoration 3144, the back front right second decoration 3145, the back front right By sequentially embellishing the three decorative bodies 3146 and the back and front right decorative body base 3147, a simulated animation with movement can be shown to the player, and it is possible to strongly appeal to the player.

[5-9a-4. Back front lower production unit]
The back front lower display unit 3160 of the back front display unit 3100 has a disc-shaped back front lower middle decoration body 3161 with the letters "SPIN" written on the upper part of the center in the left and right direction, and a back front lower middle decoration body 3161. It includes a back front lower rotation drive motor (not shown) that rotates around an axis in the front and rear direction, and a back front lower elevation drive motor 3162 that raises and lowers the back front lower middle decorative body 3161. The back front lower middle decorative body 3161 has translucency.

In addition, the back front lower direction unit 3160 is provided on the left side of the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 and has a disc-shaped back front lower left inner decorative body 3163 of the same size and a back front lower left inner decorative body 3163. A disc-shaped back front lower left outer decoration 3164 of the same size provided on the left side and a disc-shaped back front lower right inner decoration of the same size provided on the right side of the back front lower middle decoration 3161. body 3165, and a disc-shaped back front lower right outer decoration body 3166 of the same size and provided on the right side of the back front lower right inner decoration body 3165. The back front lower left inner decoration body 3163, the back front lower left outer decoration body 3164, the back front lower right inner decoration body 3165, and the back front lower right outer decoration body 3166 have translucency.

Further, the back front lower production unit 3160 is provided on the left side of the back front lower left outer decoration body 3164, and includes a back front lower logo decoration body 3167 on which the letters "Queen" are printed. The back front lower logo decoration body 3167 has translucency.

Furthermore, the back front lower direction unit 3160 includes a back front lower middle decorative board 3168 for luminescent decoration of the back front lower middle decorative body 3161, and a back front lower left inner decorative body 3163 for luminescent decoration of the back front lower left inner decorative body 3163. An inner decoration board 3169, a back front lower left outer decoration board 3170 for luminescent decoration of the back front lower left outer decoration body 3164, and a back front lower right inner decoration for luminescent decoration of the back front lower right inner decoration body 3165. A substrate 3171, a back front lower right outer decorative board 3172 for luminescent decoration of the back front lower right outer decorative body 3166, and a back front lower logo decorative board 3173 for luminescent decoration of the back front lower logo decorative body 3167; (See FIG. 156(b)).

These back front lower middle decorative board 3168, back front lower left inner decorative board 3169, back front lower left outer decorative board 3170, back front lower right inner decorative board 3171, back front lower right outer decorative board 3172, back front lower logo decoration The board 3173 includes a back front lower middle decorative body 3161, a back front lower left inner decorative body 3163, a back front lower left outer decorative body 3164, a back front lower right inner decorative body 3165, a back front lower right outer decorative body 3166, a back front It is provided at the rear of the lower logo decoration body 3167.

In addition, back front lower middle decorative board 3168, back front lower left inner decorative board 3169, back front lower left outer decorative board 3170, back front lower right inner decorative board 3171, back front lower right outer decorative board 3172, back front lower logo The decorative board 3173 has a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on its front surface, and its surface is coated with a white solder resist (protective material). This white solder resist can reflect light from the LED or from the front, and the decorations provided in front of each can be decorated with bright light.

In addition, back front lower middle decorative board 3168, back front lower left inner decorative board 3169, back front lower left outer decorative board 3170, back front lower right inner decorative board 3171, back front lower right outer decorative board 3172, back front lower logo On the decorative board 3173, characters and symbols are screen-printed using ink of a color with high brightness and saturation (for example, yellow) to avoid confusion with electronic components such as LEDs to be mounted and other decorative boards. It is carried out by Thereby, the characters and symbols can be made less noticeable through the decoration provided in the front, and the decorative effect of the decoration can be reliably exerted.

Note that the plurality of LEDs mounted on the back front lower middle decorative board 3168 are top view type LEDs. On the other hand, it is mounted on the back front lower left inner decorative board 3169, the back front lower left outer decorative board 3170, the back front lower right inner decorative board 3171, the back front lower right outer decorative board 3172, and the back front lower logo decorative board 3173. The plurality of LEDs are side view type LEDs.

Furthermore, in these decorative boards, components that do not emit light other than LEDs (e.g., connectors, resistors, LED drivers, etc.) are provided on the rear surface (back surface), and care has been taken so that they do not interfere with the light-emitting decoration. There is.

Back front lower middle decoration 3161, back front lower left inner decoration 3163, back front lower left outer decoration 3164, back front lower right inner decoration 3165, back front lower right outer decoration 3166, back front lower logo decoration 3167 is located above the lower end of the light guide plate 3110 from the upper end, as shown in FIG. As a result, the lower end of the light guide plate 3110 is not visible from the player side (front). In addition, the back front lower middle decoration body 3161, the back front lower left inner decoration body 3163, the back front lower left outer decoration body 3164, the back front lower right inner decoration body 3165, and the back front lower right outer decoration body 3166 are arranged at the upper ends of each As shown in FIG. 160, it is located below the lower end of the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110, and is spaced on the left and right at intervals corresponding to each line group 3114 that constitutes the second pattern 3112. placed in the direction.

To be more specific, the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 is placed in the third line group 3114c, the back front lower left inner decorative body 3163 is placed in the second line group 3114b, and the back front lower left outer decorative body 3164 is placed in the first line group 3114a. The back front lower right inner decorative body 3165 is provided to correspond to the fourth line group 3114d, and the back front lower right outer decorative body 3166 is provided to correspond to the fifth line group 3114e. Therefore, the back front lower middle decoration body 3161, the back front lower left inner decoration body 3163, the back front lower left outer decoration body 3164, the back front lower right inner decoration body 3165, the back front lower right outer decoration body 3166 emit light (the upper end When the line 3113 of the second pattern 3112 is made to emit light (only or the entire part), the line 3113 of the second pattern 3112 appears as if it were a back front lower middle decorative body 3161, a back front lower left inner decorative body 3163, a back front lower left outer decorative body 3164, The light from the back front lower right inner decorative body 3165 and the back front lower right outer decorative body 3166 can give the player the illusion of a luminescent display, allowing the player to enjoy a luminous effect that has not been seen in previous pachinko machines. can be shown to others.

In addition, the back front lower direction unit 3160 includes a back front lower middle decorative board 3168, a back front lower left inner decorative board 3169, a back front lower left outer decorative board 3170, a back front lower right inner decorative board 3171, a back front lower right outer A lower left decorative board 3174 and a lower light guide plate are provided at the rear of the decorative board 3172 and the lower front and back logo decorative board 3173, and are used to display the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 by emitting light (light emitting decoration). A right decorative board 3175 is provided (see FIG. 156(a)).

The light guide plate lower left decorative board 3174 and the light guide plate lower right decorative board 3175 each have five LED groups 3177 each consisting of five LEDs 3176. The five LEDs 3176 included in each LED group 3177 are arranged in the following order from the right: first LED 3176a, second LED 3176b, third LED 3176c, fourth LED 3176d, and fifth LED 3176e. Each LED group 3177 corresponds to each line group 3114 in the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110, and from the left, the first LED group 3177a, the second LED group 3177b, the third LED group 3177c, and the fourth The LED group 3177d and the fifth LED group 3177e are arranged in this order.

LEDs 3176 of a first LED group 3177a and a second LED group 3177b are mounted on the lower left decorative board 3174 of the light guide plate. LEDs 3176 of a third LED group 3177c, a fourth LED group 3177d, and a fifth LED group 3177e are mounted on the light guide plate lower right decorative board 3175.

The plurality of LEDs 3176 mounted on the light guide plate lower left decorative board 3174 and the light guide plate lower right decorative board 3175 are side view type full color LEDs. The surfaces of the light guide plate lower left decorative board 3174 and the light guide plate lower right decorative board 3175 are coated with white solder resist (protective material). The lower right decorative board 3175 of the light guide plate is made less noticeable. In addition, the lower left decorative board 3174 of the light guide plate and the lower right decorative board 3175 of the light guide plate have letters and symbols on the brightness and chroma to avoid confusion with other decorative boards and electronic components such as the LED 3176 to be mounted. It is applied by screen printing using highly colored (eg yellow) ink. Thereby, the characters and symbols can be made less noticeable through the decoration provided in the front, and the decorative effect of the decoration can be reliably exerted.

When the first LED 3176a in each LED group 3177 of the light guide plate lower left decorative board 3174 and the light guide plate lower right decorative board 3175 emits light, the first line 3113a of the corresponding line group 3114 in the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 can be displayed as a light-emitting display (light-emitting decoration). Moreover, when the second LED 3176b is made to emit light, the second line 3113b in the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 can be displayed as a light-emitting display (light-emitting decoration). Moreover, when the third LED 3176c is made to emit light, the third line 3113c in the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 can be displayed as a light-emitting display (light-emitting decoration). Furthermore, when the fourth LED 3176d emits light, the fourth line 3113d in the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 can be displayed as a light-emitting display (light-emitting decoration). Moreover, when the fifth LED 3176e is made to emit light, the fifth line 3113e in the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 can be displayed as a light-emitting display (light-emitting decoration).

As a result, each of the plurality of lines 3113 making up the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 can be independently displayed with light emission (light emission decoration), and a variety of light emission effects can be shown to the player. At the same time, it is possible to make it difficult for players to get bored, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, the back front lower direction unit 3160 includes a back front lower middle decorative body 3161, a back front lower left inner decorative body 3163, a back front lower left outer decorative body 3164, a back front lower right inner decorative body 3165, a back front lower right outer decorative body Decorative body 3166, back front lower logo decorative body 3167, back front lower middle decorative board 3168, back front lower left inner decorative board 3169, back front lower left outer decorative board 3170, back front lower right inner decorative board 3171, back front lower It supports the right outer decorative board 3172, the lower front and back logo decorative board 3173, the lower left decorative board 3174 of the light guide plate, the lower right decorative board 3175 of the light guide plate, etc., and is provided with a flat unit base 3178 that is long from side to side. . The lower ends of the back front left decoration unit 3120 and the back front right decoration unit 3140 are attached near both left and right ends of the upper end of the unit base 3178.

In addition, the back and front lower production unit 3160 has a first discharge passage 3181 that receives the game balls B received in the three general prize openings 2001 of the side unit 2200 and discharges them to the lower board holder 1200, and a starting opening unit 2100. A second discharge passage 3182 receives the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 and discharges it to the lower board holder 1200, and receives the game ball B received in the second starting port 2004 of the first attacker unit 2400. and a fourth discharge passage 3184 that receives the game ball B received in the big prize opening 2005 of the first attacker unit 2400 and discharges it to the substrate holder 1200 below. , a fifth discharge passage 3185 that receives the game ball B received in the first sub-out port 2021 of the first attacker unit 2400 and discharges it to the substrate holder 1200 below.

The first discharge passage 3181 is provided with three delivery ports to correspond to the three general winning ports 2001 of the side unit 2200, and three general winning port sensors 3001 are provided to correspond to each delivery port. It is being Further, the second discharge passage 3182 is provided with a first starting port sensor 3002.

This back front lower production unit 3160 includes a back front lower middle decoration body 3161, a back front lower left inner decoration body 3163, a back front lower left outer decoration body 3164, a back front lower right inner decoration body 3165, and a back front lower right outer decoration body. The body 3166 and the lower front and back logo decoration body 3167 can decorate the lower part of the game area 5a, making it look good, and by decorating them with light, it is possible to entertain the players with a light-emitting effect. can. In addition, the back front lower and middle decoration body 3161 can be rotated by the back front lower rotation drive motor and can be raised and lowered by the back front lowering and lowering drive motor 3162, so that the player can be entertained by the movable effect. .

In addition, the back front lower direction unit 3160 can display the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 by emitting light by the plurality of LEDs 3176 of the light guide plate lower left decorative board 3174 and the light guide plate lower right decorative board 3175. The player can enjoy the light emitting effect by 3112.

[5-9b. Back and top production unit]
Next, the back rear upper effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 will be explained with reference mainly to FIGS. 129, 149, and the like. The back rear upper production unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear upper part of the back front production unit 3100 in the back box 3010. The back rear upper production unit 3200 includes a back rear upper movable decorative body 3210 that can be rotated around an axis extending left and right and can be raised and lowered, and a back front left decorative body of the back front left decorative unit 3120. A rear left side decorative body 3220 having three back left band decorative parts 3221 extending in the front and back direction so as to continue with the three back front left band decorative parts 3127c on the base 3127, and a back front left side decorative body 3220, The back right side has three back right band decorative parts 3231 extending in the front-rear direction so as to continue with the three back front right band decorative parts 3147a on the back front right decorative body base 3147 of the decoration unit 3140. A side decoration body 3230 (see FIG. 131).

The rear upper movable decorative body 3210 is provided on the rear upper first decorative part 3211 (see FIG. 129 etc.) in which five 7-segment display parts are arranged side by side, and on the back side of the rear upper first decorative part 3211. and a rear upper second decorative portion 3212 (see FIG. 162) in which predetermined characters (in this case, "JACKPOT") are arranged in a row.

In the rear upper first decorative part 3211 of the rear upper movable decorative body 3210, each segment in the five 7-segment display parts can emit light independently, and a variety of characters, numbers, etc. can be displayed by combining each segment. Images, etc. can be displayed. As a result, the expectation level of whether or not the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 will be a "jackpot" can be determined. can be displayed. Further, in the back upper second decorative portion 3212, each character can independently emit light.

In a normal state, the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 is in a raised position with the rear upper first decorative part 3211 facing forward. This rear upper movable decorative body 3210 is configured to be used in accordance with the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, or Depending on the acceptance (distribution) of game balls B into the prize opening 2007, the second decorative part 3212 on the back is turned forward by rotating 180 degrees around the axis extending left and right, or it is lowered from the raised position. position (see FIGS. 161 and 162).

According to this rear upper movable decorative body 3210, by rotating or moving up and down, it is possible to suggest to the player that a chance has arrived, thereby entertaining the player and suppressing a drop in interest. be able to.

The three back left band decorative parts 3221 of the back left side decorative body 3220 are the same as the three back front left band decorative parts 3127c extending left and right on the back front left decorative body base 3127 of the back front left decorative unit 3120. They are provided so as to extend rearward from the right end of each. The back left band decoration parts 3221 are each capable of emitting light independently, and are also capable of emitting light so that light flows in the front-rear direction.

The three back right band decorative parts 3231 of the back right side decorative body 3230 are the same as the three back front right band decorative parts 3147a extending left and right on the back front right decorative body base 3147 of the back front right decorative unit 3140. They are provided so as to extend rearward from the right end of each. The back right band decorative portions 3231 are each capable of emitting light independently, and are also capable of emitting light so that light flows in the front-rear direction.

[5-9c. Back and rear production unit]
Next, the back rear lower production unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 will be explained with reference mainly to 135 and the like. The back rear lower production unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is attached below the back rear upper production unit 3200 at the rear lower part of the back front production unit 3100 in the back box 3010.

The rear rear lower direction unit 3300 has a rear rear left movable decorative body 3301 and a rear side whose proximal ends adjacent to each other on the left and right are respectively supported rotatably around an axis in the front and back direction and are also supported so as to be movable up and down. It has a rear right movable decorative body 3302. The back left movable decorative body 3301 and the back rear right movable decorative body 3302 are formed to rotate in mutually opposite directions as the base end side moves up and down.

In the normal state, the back left movable decorative body 3301 and the back rear right movable decorative body 3302 rotate in a direction in which their respective tips are separated from each other, and are hidden behind the back and front presentation unit 3100. It is in a retracted position where it cannot be seen from the user's side (see FIG. 129, etc.).

The rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear rear right movable decorative body 3302 are used to display the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game balls B into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. In response to this, the respective distal ends rotate upward with the base end side as the center and rise, so that the right side of the back left movable decorative body 3301 and the left side of the back rear right movable decorative body 3302 touch each other. The state is in close contact with each other. As a result, the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear right movable decorative body 3302 are integrated to form one large decorative body, and are in an appearance position that can be seen from the front (see FIG. 163). ).

As a result, a large decorative body with a pattern of the letter "A" appears in the center using the back left movable decorative body 3301 and the back rear right movable decorative body 3302, which can surprise the player and improve the game. It is possible to suppress a decline in interest by making people think that something good will happen to them. The back left movable decoration body 3301 and the back rear right movable decoration body 3302 are provided with a decorative board on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, and the appearance is improved by emitting light and decoration with the plurality of LEDs. At the same time, it is possible to attract the interest of the players.

As shown in FIG. 167, the rear rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear rear right movable decorative body 3302 are located so as to overlap behind the first pattern 3111 of the light guide plate 3110 in the appearance position. As a result, a large decorative body made up of the back left movable decorative body 3301 and the back rear right movable decorative body 3302 can be illuminated with light by the first pattern 3111, so that the back left movable decorative body 3301 and the back right movable decoration The three-dimensional decoration by the body 3302 and the two-dimensional luminous display by the first pattern 3111 allow the player to see a deep decoration, giving a strong impact to the player and increasing the player's interest. It is possible to strongly attract players, and it is possible to suppress a decline in players' interest in playing games.

[5-10. Performance on game board]
Next, the main effects on the game board 5 will be explained in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 161 to 168 and the like. FIG. 161 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the rear upper first decoration part of the rear upper movable decorative body in the rear upper production unit of the rear unit is moved to a lowered position with the rear upper first decorative part facing forward. . FIG. 162 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the rear upper movable decorative body in the rear upper production unit of the rear unit is moved to the lowered position and the rear upper second decoration section is directed forward. . FIG. 163 is a front view of the game board showing the back left movable decorative body and the back rear right movable decorative body in the back rear lower presentation unit of the back unit moved to the appearance position. FIG. 164 is a front view of the game board showing the back front lower middle decoration body of the back front lower presentation unit of the back front presentation unit of the back unit in a raised state.

FIG. 165 shows the back front left logo decoration part, the back front upper left logo decoration part, the back front left sub decoration part, and the back front left band decoration part of the back front left decoration unit 3120 in the back front presentation unit of the back unit with luminescent decoration. FIG. FIG. 166 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the first picture of the light guide plate in the back and front presentation unit of the back unit is decorated with light. In Fig. 167, the first pattern of the light guide plate in the back front presentation unit of the back unit is decorated with light emission, and the back rear left movable decoration body and the back rear right movable decoration body in the back rear lower production unit are moved to the appearance position. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state. FIG. 168 is a front view of the game board in which the second picture of the light guide plate in the back and front effect unit of the back unit is decorated with light.

The game board 5 of this embodiment includes a front component 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a, a game panel 1100 that defines the rear end side of the game area 5a, a starting port unit 2100, a side unit 2200, and a side Since the upper left unit 2300, the first attacker unit 2400, the center accessory 2500, the second attacker unit 2600, the side middle right unit 2700, and the gate member 2800 are formed substantially entirely transparent, in a normal state, , as shown in FIG. 134, through them, the back front left decoration unit 3120, the back front right decoration unit 3140, and the back front lower presentation unit of the back front presentation unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 arranged behind the game panel 1100. 3160 back front lower middle decorative body 3161, back front lower left inner decorative body 3163, back front lower left outer decorative body 3164, back front lower right inner decorative body 3165, back front lower right outer decorative body 3166, back front lower logo The decorative body 3167, the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear upper production unit 3200, the rear rear left side decorative body 3220, the rear rear right side decorative body 3230, etc. can be clearly seen, and the center accessory The effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 can be clearly viewed through the frame 2500.

More specifically, the back front left first decoration body 3124 of the back front left decoration unit 3120 is located near the left side of the center accessory 2500, and about half of it is located within the frame of the center accessory 2500. . Further, the back front right first decoration body 3144 of the back front right decoration unit 3140 is located near the right side of the center accessory 2500, and a part thereof is located within the frame of the center accessory 2500. The back front lower production unit 3160 extends left and right at the lower part of the game area 5a, and can be visually recognized through the transparent game panel 1100 and the center accessory 2500, and a part of it can be clearly seen through the frame of the center accessory 2500. can be visually recognized.

Further, the back front lower middle decoration body 3161 of the back front lower production unit 3160 is located above the first starting port 2002 and behind the stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500. The back front lower left inner decorative body 3163 and the back front lower left outer decorative body 3164 are located above the general prize opening 2001 of the side unit 2200 and near the lower side of the center accessory 2500. The back front lower right inner decorative body 3165 and the back front lower right outer decorative body 3166 are located above the big prize opening 2005 of the first attacker unit 2400 and near the lower side of the center accessory 2500. The upper part of the back front lower middle decoration body 3161, the back front lower left inner decoration body 3163, the back front lower left outer decoration body 3164, the back front lower right inner decoration body 3165, and the back front lower right outer decoration body 3166 is the center accessory. It is located within the 2500 range. The back front lower logo decoration body 3167 is located outside the center accessory 2500 and at the lower left corner of the game area 5a.

In addition, since the back rear upper movable decoration body 3210 of the back rear upper production unit 3200 is located in the raised position, it extends left and right at the upper part of the game area 5a, and the upper part on the left side of the center in the left and right direction is transparent. It can be visually recognized through the game panel 1100 and the center accessory 2500, and a portion can be clearly seen through the frame of the center accessory 2500. The rear upper movable decorative body 3210 has a rear upper first decorative part 3211 having a plurality of seven segment parts facing forward.

The back rear left movable decoration body 3301 and the back rear right movable decoration body 3302 of the back rear lower production unit 3300 are in the retracted position behind the back front lower production unit 3160, and are visible from the front (player side). It has become impossible.

The game board 5 performs the back front performance of the back unit 3000 according to the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result that are drawn when the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. The unit 3100, the upper rear effect unit 3200, the lower rear rear effect unit 3300, etc. perform predetermined movable effects and light emission effects.

Specifically, as a movable effect using the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear rear upper rendering unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. 161, it has five 7-segment parts. The rear upper movable decorative body 3210 is moved from the raised position to the lowered position while the rear upper first decorative part 3211 remains facing forward. As a result, most of the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 is located within the frame of the center accessory 2500, so that the rear upper first decorative part 3211 can be visually recognized in good condition. At this time, by variably displaying the five 7-segment parts of the upper rear first decorative part 3211, it is possible to strongly attract the player's attention, and the five 7-segment parts can display desired numbers and patterns. Depending on whether it is displayed or not, it can make the player nervous and nervous.

Further, as an effect using the rear upper movable decorative body 3210, for example, as described above, after moving the rear upper first decorative part 3211 to the lowered position while facing forward, Then, it is rotated 180 degrees around an axis in the left-right direction, and the second decorative part 3212 on the back side having a plurality of character strings is directed forward. As a result, since the letters "JACKPOT" face forward, the player can be made aware that it is a "jackpot", and the player can expect an advantageous gaming state ("jackpot" gaming state). It is possible to increase the feeling and suppress the decline in interest.

Furthermore, as an effect using the rear upper movable decorative body 3210, for example, when rotating around an axis in the left and right direction, the intermediate part between the rear upper first decorative part 3211 and the rear upper second decorative part 3212 can be It is also possible to repeat normal rotation and reverse rotation at the portion, and either the back upper first decorative portion 3211 or the back upper second decorative portion 3212 may be stopped from rotating forward. As a result, depending on whether or not the "JACKPOT" of the second decorative part 3212 on the back side faces forward, it is possible to make the player nervous or nervous, thereby increasing the player's sense of expectation and suppressing a decline in interest. can be done.

In addition, as an effect using the back upper movable decorative body 3210, for example, while it is in the raised position, it is rotated 180 degrees around the axis in the left and right direction to direct the second rear upper decorative part 3212 forward. You can do it like this.

Furthermore, as an effect using the rear rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear rear right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear rear lower rendering unit 3300, for example, as shown in FIG. From the retracted position, the proximal ends of each are rotated in opposite directions around an axis that extends back and forth and raised so that their tips rise and touch each other. Move to the appearance position where it touched. As a result, the back left movable decorative body 3301 and the back rear right movable decorative body 3302 form one large decorative body with a stylized letter "A" in the gaming area 5a in front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600. Since it appears in the center of the screen, it can greatly surprise the players, attract their attention, and make them think that something good will happen to them. It is possible to increase expectations for the game and suppress a decline in interest.

Furthermore, as a production using the back front lower middle decoration body 3161 in the back front lower production unit 3160 of the back front production unit 3100, for example, as shown in FIG. Rotate it. As a result, the back, front, and lower middle decorations 3161 rotate at the lower center of the gaming area 5a, making the player think that something good is going to happen, and creating a sense of anticipation for the game. can be made to increase. In addition, since the back front lower middle decoration body 3161 is provided at the rear of the stage 2513 directly above the first starting port 2002, the back front lower middle decoration body 3161 rotates or moves up and down, so that the game The player can be encouraged to drive the game ball B aiming at the first starting opening 2002, and can enjoy the driving operation of the game ball B that is inherent to the pachinko machine 1.

Further, as a presentation using the back front left decoration unit 3120 of the back front presentation unit 3100, for example, as shown in FIG. 3130, the back front left logo decoration part 3121, the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122, the back front left sub decoration part 3123, the back front left band decoration part 3127c, etc. are made to emit light. You can create decorative lighting effects. For example, in the back front left logo decoration part 3121, the first front left logo decoration part 3124c, the first back left logo decoration part 3124d, the second back left logo decoration part 3125d, and the third back left logo decoration part 3126d are sequentially By making the light-emitting decoration, it is possible to create a light-emitting effect like a neon sign that flows back and forth, and it is possible to entertain the players.

Although not shown, the back front right decoration unit 3140 can also perform the same light emitting effect as the back front left decoration unit 3120, and can entertain the player.

Furthermore, as an effect using the light guide plate 3110 of the back front effect unit 3100, for example, as shown in FIG. The back front right first decorative board 3148, the back front right second decorative board 3149, and the plurality of light guide plate LEDs of the back front right light guide plate decorative board 3150 in the front right decoration unit 3140 are made to emit light, and the first picture is displayed. 3111 is displayed as a light-emitting display (light-emitting decoration). As a result, a large first pattern 3111 with a stylized letter "A" is displayed in front of the display screen of the performance display device 1600 in the center of the gaming area 5a, so that the player can be surprised. It is possible to prevent the player from losing interest by making him think that something good is going to happen to him.

Furthermore, as an effect using the light guide plate 3110, for example, as shown in FIG. The decorative object 3302 is moved from the retreat position to the appearance position. As a result, the first picture 3111 and the large decorative body made up of the back left movable decorative body 3301 and the back rear right movable decorative body 3302 overlap in the front and back, giving a strong impact to the player. It is possible to entertain the player, and also to make the player think that an advantageous gaming state (for example, a "jackpot" game) in which the player has an advantage will occur, It can increase expectations for.

Furthermore, as an effect using the light guide plate 3110, for example, as shown in FIG. Then, the second picture 3112 is displayed as a light-emitting display (light-emitting decoration). As a result, the back front lower middle decoration body 3161, the back front lower left inner decoration body 3163, the back front lower left outer decoration body 3164, the back front lower right inner decoration body 3165, the back front lower right outer decoration body in the back front lower production unit 3160. Since a plurality of lines 3113 extending upward from the upper parts of the five decorations 3166 are displayed with light, a light-emission effect similar to a searchlight from below on a concert stage is displayed to the player. The inside of the gaming area 5a can be displayed brilliantly to entertain the players.

Further, as an effect using the light guide plate 3110, for example, as shown in FIG. The upper ends or the entirety of the lower left inner decoration body 3163, the back front lower left outer decoration body 3164, the back front lower right inner decoration body 3165, and the back front lower right outer decoration body 3166 may be decorated with light. Alternatively, the decorative body located below the line group 3114 displayed by emitting light in the second picture 3112 may be decorated by emitting light. As a result, the lines 3113 constituting the second pattern 3112 are arranged such that the back front lower middle decorative body 3161, the back front lower left inner decorative body 3163, the back front lower left outer decorative body 3164, the back front lower right inner decorative body 3165 , back front lower right outer decoration 3166, and the like can give the player the illusion that a light emitting display is being displayed, and it is possible to entertain the player by showing an unprecedented light emitting effect. can.

Furthermore, although not shown, the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 may be displayed by emitting light, and the rear upper movable decoration body 3210 may be moved to the lowered position. This allows the player to see a light emitting effect as if the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 is illuminated from below by a searchlight, making the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 look gorgeous and entertaining. can.

In addition, in the game board 5 of this embodiment, the above-mentioned light emitting effects and movable effects can be combined as appropriate, and they can also be combined with the effect image (display effect) displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 1600. be able to. As a result, by appropriately combining light emitting effects, display effects, etc., it is possible to present a variety of patterns of effects to the players, making it difficult for the players to get bored, and also making it possible to attract players with various effects. It is possible to keep the player entertained and to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

[6. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be explained with reference to FIG. 169 and the like. FIG. 169 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of a pachinko machine. The main control structure of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4, as shown in the figure. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls gaming operations (game progress). The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 that controls various effects during the game based on commands from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control unit 1511 that controls various effects during the game based on commands from the main control board 1310, and displays effect images on the effect display device 1600 based on commands from the peripheral control unit 1511. and an effect display control section 1512 that controls. The payout control board 633 includes a payout control section 633a that controls the payout of the game balls B, etc., and a launch control section 633b that controls the launch of the game balls B by rotating the handle 195.

[6-1. Main control board]
Although detailed illustrations are omitted, the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game is a main control board that is a microprocessor that includes a built-in ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, and RAM that temporarily stores data. MPU1310a, a main control I/O port as an input/output device (I/O device), a main control input circuit into which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and a main control solenoid drive for driving various solenoids. The circuit, a RAM clear switch for completely erasing the information stored in the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a, a setting display 1310g for displaying setting values and errors, and a section on the game board 5. It is equipped with a base monitor 1310h for displaying the number of game balls B collected through the outlet 1008 provided in the game area 5a. In addition to its built-in ROM and RAM, the main control MPU 1310a also includes a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

The main control MPU 1310a includes its built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM"), its built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in ROM"), etc. It also has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "WDT with built-in main control") that monitors its operation (system) and functions to prevent fraud.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1310a has a built-in nonvolatile RAM. This nonvolatile RAM stores in advance a unique ID code that is given a unique code (a code that exists only once in the world) for identifying an individual by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a. This ID code once assigned is stored in a non-volatile RAM and cannot be rewritten even using an external device. The main control MPU 1310a can retrieve and refer to the ID code from the nonvolatile RAM.

The main control MPU 1310a also has a built-in circuit that is forcibly reset by hardware when affected by electrical noise (hereinafter referred to as a "built-in reset circuit"). The built-in reset circuit monitors the contents of a predetermined register of the main control MPU 1310a, and when the register changes to an incoherent content, it forcibly resets the main control MPU 1310a as being affected by electrical noise. This is a reset circuit. The forced reset by such a built-in reset circuit cannot be controlled and invalidated by a user program. Therefore, when the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the main control MPU 1310a is reset without executing the main control side power-off process described later, and again executes the main control side power-on process described later. I will do it. In this case, since the main control side power-off processing is not executed, a checksum (sum value) error in the main control built-in RAM will always occur as described later, so the contents of the main control built-in RAM will be completely erased ( clear). Note that even if the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the built-in reset circuit of the main control MPU 1310a will not output a reset signal to the payout control board 633, so the main control board 1310 (main control Only the MPU 1310a) will be restarted, and the payout control board 633 will remain activated.

The main control MPU 1310a also operates a hardware random number circuit (hereinafter referred to as a "main control built-in hardware It has a built-in random number circuit. This hard random number circuit with built-in main control generates random numbers within a predetermined numerical range (in this embodiment, a numerical range from 0 as the minimum value to 65535 as the maximum value is preset), and The circuit is configured such that a predetermined value is not fixed (that is, the initial value is not fixed) and a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hardware random number circuit first uses a clock signal (main Based on a clock signal output from a crystal oscillator (not shown) provided separately from the control MPU 1310a, other values within a predetermined numerical value range are extracted one after another without duplication at high speed, and the values within the predetermined numerical value range are extracted. After extracting all the values, extract one value within the predetermined numerical range again, and quickly extract the other values within the predetermined numerical range based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. Extract values one after another without duplication. The main control built-in hardware random number circuit repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a uses the value extracted by the main control built-in hardware random number circuit at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hardware random number circuit as a jackpot determination random number. It is designed to be set as .

The main control input circuit is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information in which detection signals from various sensors are input to its various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset (not shown) is input. In other words, the main control input circuit outputs various signals based on the information from its various output terminals because the information based on the detection signals from the various sensors input to its various input terminals is not reset by the main control system reset. It is configured as a circuit that is

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 includes a first starting port sensor 3002 that detects the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002, and a second starting port sensor 3002 that detects the game ball B received in the second starting port 2004. mouth sensor 2401, general winning hole sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B accepted into the general winning hole 2001, gate sensor 2801 that detects the game ball B that has passed through the gate 2003, game ball B accepted into the big winning hole 2005 Big winning hole sensor 2402 that detects the winning hole sensor 2402, Accessory winning hole sensor 2601 that detects the game ball B accepted in the winning hole 2006, V winning hole sensor 3003 that detects the game ball B accepted in the V winning hole 2007. , a loss hole sensor 3004 that detects the game ball B accepted into the loss hole 2008, an out sensor 664 that detects the game ball B ejected from the game board 5, and a magnetic sensor 1050 that detects illegal magnetism in the game area 5a. , a vibration sensor that detects vibrations acting on the game board 5, and the like are inputted to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

Further, respective detection signals from the setting key switch 1311a and the setting switching button 1311b provided on the setting change board 1311 are inputted to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

In addition, the detection signal from the door frame release switch and the detection signal from the main body frame release switch are transmitted via the payout control board 633 (that is, via the payout control input circuit and the payout control output circuit, which will be described later). When the signals are input to the main control board 1310 without any intervention, they are input to the input terminals of predetermined input ports of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

Note that the respective detection signals from the out sensor 664, the first starting port sensor 3002, and the second starting port sensor 2401 are directly input to the main control board 1310 without going through another board, and are input to the main control board 1310 directly. The signal is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via an input circuit. On the other hand, each of the signals from the general winning opening sensor 3001, gate sensor 2801, big winning opening sensor 2402, accessory winning opening sensor 2601, V winning opening sensor 3003, losing opening sensor 3004, magnetic sensor 1050, and vibration sensor The detection signal is input to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board 1710, that is, indirectly, and is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a control signal from the output terminal of its predetermined output port to the main control solenoid drive circuit, thereby causing the main control solenoid drive circuit to activate the starting port solenoid 2412 and the attacker solenoid 2414. , the respective drive signals to the prize winning opening solenoid 2612 and the V distribution solenoid 3007 are output via the panel relay board 1710, that is, indirectly, and from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the function display unit. 1400 status display, normal symbol display, normal reservation display, first special symbol display, first special reservation number display, second special symbol display, second special reservation number display, round display, Each drive signal is output directly to the other board without going through another board. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal to the setting change permission lamp 1311c of the setting change board 1311 by outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of its predetermined output port based on these detection signals.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a outputs various information regarding the game (gaming information) to the payout control board 633 by outputting various information regarding the game (gaming information) from the output terminal of its predetermined output port. By outputting a signal (power outage clear signal) from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, a signal (power outage clear signal) can be output to the power outage monitoring circuit, and the game ball B can be output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting a firing permission signal that conveys that the firing of the game ball B is permitted, a firing permission signal that conveys that the firing of the game ball B is permitted is outputted to the payout control board 633. The logic of the launch permission signal that conveys permission for launch is set to launch permission logic when the launch is permitted, and launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) which is the inverse of the launch permission logic when the launch is not permitted. is set to Note that the logic of the firing permission signal is that, as an initial value (default), the firing permission signal setting process in the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is started after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 (after the power is restored). Up to this point, the device is constructed of hardware including a main control output circuit with a reset function so as to be set to firing stop logic (launch non-permission logic) which is an inversion of the firing permission logic.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first starting opening sensor 3002, the second starting opening sensor 2401, the gate sensor 2801, the big winning opening sensor 2402, the accessory winning opening sensor 2601, the V winning opening sensor 3003, the losing opening sensor 3004, A non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used for the out sensor 664, whereas a contact type ON/OFF operation type mechanical switch is used for the general winning opening sensor 3001. This is because the game ball B frequently enters or passes through the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, and the gate 2003, so the first starting port sensor 3002, the second starting port sensor 2401, and the gate sensor Detection of game ball B by 2801 also occurs frequently. For this reason, proximity switches with high durability and long life are used for the first starting port sensor 3002, the second starting port sensor 2401, and the gate sensor 2801.

In addition, when an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous for the player (such as a "jackpot" game) occurs, the big winning hole 2005 is opened and the game ball B enters the ball frequently, so the game ball is detected by the big winning hole sensor 2402. Detection of B also occurs frequently. For this reason, a proximity switch with high durability and a long life is used for the big prize opening sensor 2402 as well. In addition, since a large amount of the game balls B fired into the game area 5a are collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a that is sectioned on the game board 5, the out sensor 664 frequently detects the game balls B. occurs in For this reason, a proximity switch with high durability and long life is used also for the out sensor 664. On the other hand, in the general winning hole 2001 where the game ball B does not enter frequently, the detection by the general winning hole sensor 3001 does not occur frequently. For this reason, the general winning a prize opening sensor 3001 uses a mechanical switch whose life is shorter than that of a proximity switch. Incidentally, regardless of whether the game ball B enters the general winning hole 2001 frequently or not, a proximity switch that is highly durable and has a long life may be used.

The main control MPU 1310a also transmits various information related to games (gaming information) and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 633, and receives various commands related to the status of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633. or Furthermore, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to control of game performance and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I/O port. Note that, although the detailed explanation will be given later, when the main control MPU 1310a receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633, it formats these various commands and sends them to the peripheral control unit 1511.

The main control board 1310 is supplied with various voltages from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620, although detailed explanation will be given later. The power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as a "capacitor") that serves as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. ). This capacitor allows the main control MPU 1310a to store various information in the RAM during power-off processing even when the power is turned off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on. This RAM clear switch operation signal (detection signal) is also output to the payout control board 633.

Further, the main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors drops in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 630, and when these voltages become lower than the power failure warning voltage, outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning. This power outage warning signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a via the main control I/O port, and is also output to the payout control board 633 and the like.

[6-2. Payout control board]
The payout control board 633 that controls the payout of the game balls B includes a payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout, a firing solenoid 542 that performs firing control, and a ball feeding solenoid 145 that performs ball feeding control. A control unit 633b, an error LED display that displays the status of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch that has a push operation unit that releases the error displayed on the error LED display, and a ball A ball extraction switch for discharging the game balls B in the tank 552, the tank rail 553, the ball guiding unit 570, and the dispensing device 580 to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (upper tray 201) and starting the ball extraction operation. , is equipped with.

[6-2a. Payout control section]
The payout control unit 633a that performs various controls regarding payouts on the payout control board 633 is a microcomputer that includes a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, etc., although detailed illustration is omitted. A payout control MPU as a processor, a payout control I/O port as an I/O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether the payout control MPU is operating normally, and a payout control MPU as a processor. It includes a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the device 580, and a payout control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are input. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the payout control MPU also has built-in functions to prevent fraud.

The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a receives various information related to games (gaming information) and various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 in a serial manner via the payout control I/O port. In addition to inputting the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch from the dispensing control I/O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the out of ball detection sensor 574, and the dispensing control I/O port are input. Detection signals from a detection sensor 591 and a blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input.

Detection signals from the ball cut detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570, the payout detection sensor 591 and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 of the payout device 580 are input to the payout control input circuit, and the payout control is performed via the payout control I/O port. Input to MPU.

Further, detection signals from the door frame release switch that detects the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame release switch that detects the release of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are input to the dispensing control input circuit, It is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I/O port.

Further, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the foul cover unit 150, a detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 of the dispensing device 580, a detection signal from the dispensing detection sensor 591 of the dispensing device 580, a power outage of the main control board 1310, A power failure notice signal from the monitoring circuit and an error release signal from the error release switch are input to a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU via the payout control input circuit.

The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 to the payout motor 584 via the payout control I/O, and outputs a signal for displaying the status of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED display. , sends commands to the main control board 1310 via the payout control I/O port in a serial manner to output commands to the error LED display or to indicate the status of the pachinko machine 1 via the payout control I/O port. Or, the number of game balls B actually put out is outputted to the external terminal board 558 via the payout control I/O port. This external terminal board 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the games of the players by keeping track of the number of game balls B put out by the pachinko machine 1, game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like.

The error LED indicator (not shown) is a segment indicator, and displays the status of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, figures, etc. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is reported that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it is reported that there is a "connection abnormality" (specifically, the connection between the main control board 1310 and When the number "1" is displayed, it will notify you that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is out). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, it is notified that there is no game ball B in the payout device 580), and when the number "2" is displayed, it is notified that the game is "playing for balls" (specifically, Based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, it notifies that the game ball B is caught between the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the payout blade 589, making it difficult for the payout blade 589 to rotate; When the number "3" is displayed, it is notified that there is a "counting switch error" (specifically, that a malfunction has occurred in the payout detection sensor 591 based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591). , when the number "5" is displayed, it will notify you that there is a "retry error" (specifically, the number of retries of the payout operation has reached the preset upper limit), and when the number "6" is displayed. When it is displayed, it indicates that the tank is "full" (specifically, that the tank is full with game balls B stored in the foul cover unit 150 based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154). When the number "7" is displayed, it notifies that "CR is not connected" (the electrical connection is disconnected at any point from the payout control board 633 to the CR unit), When the number "9" is displayed, it is notified that the ball is "in stock" (specifically, the number of game balls B that have not yet been paid out has reached a predetermined number). .

A ball lending request signal for the game ball B from the ball lending button 224 and a prepaid card return request signal from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit serially transmits a signal specifying the number of game balls B to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633, and this signal is received by the payout control I/O port and sent to the payout control MPU. is input. The CR unit also updates the remaining balance of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of game balls B lent out, and outputs a display signal of the remaining balance to the ball lending operation unit 220, and this signal The information is input and displayed on the ball rental display section 226 of the operation unit 220.

[6-2b. Launch control section]
The firing control unit 633b performs firing control using the firing solenoid 542 and ball feeding control using the ball feeding solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the launch control unit 633b includes a launch control input circuit into which detection signals from various detection switches related to launch are input, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular intervals, and a circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular intervals. a firing timing control circuit that outputs a firing reference pulse for launching the game ball B toward the gaming area 5a based on the firing timing control circuit; a firing solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 based on the firing reference pulse; The ball feeding solenoid drive circuit outputs a drive signal to the ball feeding solenoid 145 based on the reference pulse. The firing timing control circuit generates a firing reference pulse based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit so that 100 game balls B are launched per minute toward the gaming area 5a, and outputs it to the firing solenoid drive circuit. , generates a ball feeding reference pulse which is the firing reference pulse multiplied by a predetermined number and outputs it to the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit.

Regarding the handle unit 180, a handle touch sensor 192 detects whether the palm or fingers are touching the handle 195, and detects whether or not the launching of the game ball B is forcibly stopped according to the player's will. The detection signal from the single button operation sensor 194 is input to the firing control input circuit and then to the firing timing control circuit. Further, when the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal board are electrically connected, the signal is input as a CR connection signal to the firing control input circuit, and then to the firing timing control circuit. A firing permission signal from the main control board 1310 that conveys permission to fire the game ball B is input to the firing control input circuit and then to the firing timing control circuit. A signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189 that electrically adjusts the intensity with which the game ball B is launched toward the game area 5a according to the rotational position of the handle 195 is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

The firing timing control circuit connects the CR unit to the CR unit connection terminal board based on the CR connection signal when firing condition 1 is established that the palm or fingers are touching the handle 195 based on the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192. If the firing condition 2 that the game ball B is electrically connected is satisfied, and the firing condition 3 that the game ball B is allowed to fire based on the firing permission signal from the main control board 1310 is not satisfied, the game ball B For example, the firing solenoid drive circuit does not output a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 and the game ball B cannot be fired.

This firing solenoid drive circuit generates a driving current to launch the game ball B toward the gaming area 5a with a launch intensity commensurate with the rotational position of the handle 195, based on a signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189. In response to the input, the signal is output to the firing solenoid 542. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 145 when the ball feeding reference pulse is input, thereby controlling the game balls stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200. One ball B is received into the ball feeding unit 140, and when the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the output of the constant current is stopped, and the received game ball B is transferred to the ball launching device 540 side. send. In this way, the drive current output from the launch solenoid drive circuit to the launch solenoid 542 is variably controlled, whereas the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 145 is constant. controlled.

In this embodiment, the firing control board 633 is provided with a firing control unit 633b that performs firing control using the firing solenoid 542 and ball feeding control using the ball feeding solenoid 145. may be configured. In this case, the firing permission signal from the main control board 1310 may be configured to be input directly to the power supply board 630, may be input to the power supply board 630 via the payout control board 633, or may be input to the power supply board 630 via the payout control board 633. The signal may be input to the power supply board 630 via a relay board that is not connected to the power supply board 630.

[6-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 169, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control section 1511 that performs production control based on commands from the main control board 1310, and a production display device 1600 based on control data from this peripheral control section 1511. and an effect display control section 1512 that performs drawing control.

[6-3a. Peripheral control section]
The peripheral control unit 1511 that performs performance control on the peripheral control board 1510 includes a CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, sound source, SATA controller, various I/O interfaces, etc. on one semiconductor chip, although detailed illustration is omitted. An integrated peripheral control IC, a peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and commands, a sound source IC that performs high-quality performances, and sound information such as music, voices, and sound effects that are referenced by this sound source IC. It is equipped with a stored sound ROM.

The peripheral control IC has multiple parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc. integrated on one semiconductor chip, and when it receives various commands from the main control board 1310, it controls the peripherals based on these various commands. The CPU of the control IC sends game board side light emission data to the lamp drive board serial I/O for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to the color LEDs etc. provided on each decorative board of the game board 5. Game board side drive data for transmitting from the port to each decorative board of the game board 5 and for outputting drive signals to the drive motors that operate various presentation units provided on the game board 5 is sent to the game board decoration drive board. Drive signals are sent from the serial I/O port to the drive motor or drive solenoid of the game board 5, or to the vibration motor 356 provided in the door frame 3, the operation button elevation drive motor 367, the ejection force adjustment drive motor 381, etc. It consists of door-side drive data for outputting the door-side drive data, and door-side light emission data for outputting the lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting signal to the color LEDs etc. provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3. The door side driving light emission data to be displayed is sent from the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive board to the door frame 3 side, and the control data (display command) indicating the screen to be displayed on the effect display device 1600 is sent to the serial I/O port for the display control unit. In addition to sending data from the I/O port to the performance display control section 1512, it also outputs a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM to the sound source IC.

Detection signals from the contact detection sensor main body 358, press detection sensor 373, elevation detection sensor 374, and protrusion force detection sensor 375 of the performance operation unit 300 provided in the door frame 3 are input to the peripheral control IC.

Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC receives a signal (operation signal) from the production display control unit 1512 that indicates that the production display control unit 1512 is operating normally, and based on this operation signal, the production display control unit The operation of 1512 is monitored.

The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on control data (sound commands) from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, and outputs sound information from the top center speaker, top side speaker, etc. installed in the door frame 3, main body frame 4, etc. Control is performed so that sounds such as music and sound effects matching various performances are played from the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4. Note that the volume can be adjusted by rotating a volume adjustment switch that protrudes rearward from the peripheral control board box in which the peripheral control board 1510 is housed. In this embodiment, an acoustic signal as sound information (for example, a 2ch stereo signal, a 4ch stereo signal, By sending a 2.1ch surround signal, a 4.1ch surround signal, etc.), it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (acoustic production) than before.

Note that the peripheral control unit 1511 includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown) in addition to a built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built into the CPU of the peripheral control IC. The built-in WDT and external WDT are used together to diagnose whether or not the own system is out of control.

The display commands output from the CPU of this peripheral control IC to the effect display control section 1512 are executed by a serial input/output port, and in this embodiment, the bit rate (size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 Bits per second (hereinafter referred to as "bps") is set. On the other hand, initial data, door frame side lighting and blinking commands, game board side lighting and blinking commands, movable body drive commands, etc. output from the CPU of the peripheral control IC to the game board 5 side are multiple serial input/outputs different from display commands. The bit rate is set to 250 kbps in this embodiment.

[6-3b. Performance display control section]
The effect display control unit 1512 controls the drawing of the effect display device 1600. Although detailed illustrations are omitted, the effect display control unit 1512 includes a display control MPU as a microprocessor, a display control ROM that stores various processing programs, various commands, and various data, and a VDP that controls the display of the effect display device 1600. (abbreviation for Video Display Processor), an image ROM that stores various data of the screen displayed on the effect display device 1600, and an image RAM to which the various data stored in this image ROM is transferred and copied. We are prepared.

This display control MPU has a built-in parallel I/O port, serial I/O port, etc., and controls the VDP based on control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to draw the effect display device 1600. is under control. Note that, if the display control MPU is operating normally, it outputs an operation signal to the peripheral control unit 1511 to notify that fact. Further, the display control MPU receives an execution signal from the VDP, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

In addition to various programs for generating screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, the display control ROM stores schedule data corresponding to control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511, and the control data (display commands). A plurality of corresponding non-resident area transfer schedule data etc. are stored. The schedule data is configured by chronologically arranging screen data that defines the configuration of the screen, and defines the order of the screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by chronologically arranging non-resident area transfer data that defines the order in which various data stored in the image ROM are transferred to the non-resident area of the image RAM. In this non-resident area transfer data, the order in which various data are transferred from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM is defined in advance for the screen data to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 as the schedule data progresses.

The display control MPU extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP, and then extracts the screen data following the first screen data. It is extracted from the display control ROM and output to the VDP. In this way, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged chronologically in the schedule data from the display control ROM one by one starting from the first screen data and outputs the extracted screen data to the VDP.

When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data, generates drawing data to be displayed on the effect display device 1600, and generates drawing data to be displayed on the effect display device 1600. The generated drawing data is output to the effect display device 1600. Further, when the effect display device 1600 does not accept screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an execution signal to the display control MPU to inform the effect. Note that the VDP uses a line buffer method. This "line buffer method" means that one line's worth of drawing data for drawing in the horizontal direction of the effect display device 1600 is held in a line buffer, and the one line's worth of drawing data held in this line buffer is transferred to the effect display device 1600. This is a method to output to.

The image ROM stores an extremely large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. When the capacity of the image ROM increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the effect display device 1600 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored, which affects the speed of drawing on the effect display device 1600. Therefore, in this embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM, which has a fast access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from this image RAM. Note that the sprite data is base data that is data before the sprite is developed into a bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

Here, a "sprite" will be explained. A "sprite" is an image displayed as a unit on the effect display device 1600. For example, when displaying various people (characters) on the effect display device 1600, data for drawing each person is called a "sprite." As a result, when displaying a plurality of people on the effect display device 1600, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to people, houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can also be a single sprite. These sprites are drawn on the effect display device 1600 after setting the positions where they are arranged on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites overlap each other (hereinafter referred to as "sprite overlapping order").

Note that the sprite is constructed by pasting together a plurality of rectangular areas each having 64 pixels in the vertical and horizontal directions. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "sprite character." Small sprites can be expressed using one sprite character, while relatively large sprites such as people can be expressed using a total of 6 sprite characters arranged, for example, 2 horizontally x 3 vertically. can be expressed. In the case of a larger sprite such as a background, it can be expressed using a larger number of sprite characters. In this way, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

The effect display device 1600 sequentially performs main scanning to set the display state of each pixel in one direction along the pixels from left to right when viewed from the front, and repeats main scanning in a direction intersecting that one direction. It is driven by the sub-scanning to be performed. When the effect display device 1600 receives one line of drawing data output from the effect display control unit 1512, the effect display device 1600 sequentially draws one line from the left to the right when viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600 as a main scan. output to each pixel. When the output for one line is completed, the effect display device 1600 shifts to the line immediately below as a sub-scan, and similarly, when the drawing data for the next line is input, the drawing data for the next line is As main scanning, each of the pixels for one line is outputted sequentially from left to right when viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600.

[7. Game content]
The content of the game played by the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 137, 144, 145, and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, game balls B are stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 by the player rotating the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 arranged at the front lower right corner of the door frame 3. is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 on the game board 5, and the game with the game ball B is started. The game ball B hit into the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the driving strength. The driving strength of the game ball B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 195, and the more clockwise the handle 195 is rotated, the stronger the ball can be hit. B, that is, game balls B can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

In addition, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted at appropriate positions in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the game panel 1100, and when the game ball B comes into contact with the obstacle nails N, the game ball The downward speed of the ball B is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball B so that the movement can be enjoyed. Moreover, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail N, a windmill W that rotates when the game ball B comes into contact with it is provided above the side upper left unit 2300 and to the left of the center accessory 2500.

When the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500 in front view, it comes into contact with a plurality of obstacle nails N. It flows down the area to the left of the center accessory 2500. When the game ball B flowing down the left side area of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp entrance 2511 opened in the peripheral wall 2501 of the center accessory 2500, it is supplied to the stage 2513 from the warp exit 2512.

The game ball B supplied to the stage 2513 rolls on the stage 2513, moves back and forth from side to side, and is released forward from the central portion in the left and right direction. When the game ball B is released into the gaming area 5a from the center release part 2513a at the center of the stage 2513, since the center release part 2513a is located directly above the first starting port 2002, there is a high probability that the first It is accepted into the starting port 2002. When game balls B are accepted into the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. At the same time, in the main control board 1310, advantageous gaming states advantageous to the player (for example, "big hit", "medium hit", "small win", "accessory win", "probability change (probability change) win"), A special lottery result (first special lottery result) that generates a "time reduction (time saving) win" is held.

The game ball B released from the stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a may be received by the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100.

By the way, if the game ball B that has flown down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2511, it will be moved toward the center in the left-right direction by the shelf 2301 of the upper left side unit 2300 and the obstacle nail N, and will be moved to the center side in the left-right direction. There is a possibility that it will be accepted into the general prize opening 2001 or the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100, etc. Then, when the game balls B are received in the general winning hole 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. be done.

On the other hand, when the game ball B hit into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest part of the peripheral wall part 2501 of the center accessory 2500, the guide of the center accessory 2500 A plurality of obstacle nails are emitted above the gate 2003 through either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 of the passage group 2520 and are planted between the guide passage group 2520 and the gate 2003. After coming into contact with N, there is a certain probability that the object passes through the gate 2003.

The guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 includes a first guide passage 2521 whose entrance opens near the blocking portion 1006, and an entrance which opens at a distance to the left from the entrance of the first guide passage 2521. A second guide passage 2522 is provided. As a result, when the game ball B is hit with such force that it contacts the stopper 1006 (so-called right-hand hit), it enters the first guide path 2521 and hits the ball B with such force that it does not hit the stopper 1006 (right-hand hit). If the game ball B is hit with a force that is somewhat weaker than the ball B, it will enter the second guide path 2522 with a high probability. That is, the game ball B hit into the upper right side of the center accessory 2500 flows through either the first guide path 2521 or the second guide path 2522 depending on the driving strength.

In this embodiment, the game ball B is configured to pass through the gate 2003 with a higher probability when flowing through the second guide path 2522 than through the first guide path 2521. Furthermore, the configuration is such that when flowing through the second guide path 2522 rather than through the first guide path 2521, the flow passes through the gate 2003 and the left side of the gate 2003 with a higher probability.

When the game ball B passes through this gate 2003 and is detected by the gate sensor 2801, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310, and if the normal lottery result is "normal win", the first attacker unit 2400 The second starting port 2004, which has been closed, remains open for a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball B can be received into the second starting port 2004.

In this embodiment, in the normal lottery performed when the game ball B passes through the gate 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the normal lottery until the normal lottery result is indicated (for example, 0. 01 to 60 seconds, also called normal fluctuation time). This suggestion of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second starting port 2004 becomes open after the normal fluctuation time has elapsed.

Note that if game ball B passes through gate 2003 after passing gate 2003 and before the normal lottery result is suggested, the normal lottery result cannot be suggested, so the normal lottery result cannot be started. The start of suggesting the result is suspended until the suggestion of the previous normal lottery result is finished. Further, the number of normal lottery results that can be held is set at the upper limit of four, and even if game balls B pass through the gate 2003, they are discarded without being held. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the gaming hall side due to the accumulation of reservations.

The game ball B passing through the gate 2003 and the left side of the gate 2003 has a high probability of passing the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 due to the plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the gate 2003 and the side right middle unit 2700. It flows down and is sometimes accepted into the general prize opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700, or rarely accepted into the second sub-out opening 2022. When the game balls B are accepted into the general winning hole 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700, a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out similarly to the general winning hole 2001 of the side unit 2200. On the other hand, when the game ball B is received in the second sub-out port 2022, there is no opportunity for it to be received in the accessory winning port 2006, the second starting port 2004, or the big winning port 2005, and it is ejected to the outside of the gaming area 5a.

In addition, the game ball B passing through the right side of the gate 2003 is received by the second sub-out port 2022 of the side right middle unit 2700, and is received by the general winning port 2001, the accessory winning port 2006, and the second starting port of the side right middle unit 2700. 2004 or the big prize opening 2005, and is discharged outside the gaming area 5a.

In this way, when the game ball B is received at the second sub-out port 2022 on the downstream side of the guide passage group 2520, the game ball B is ejected outside the gaming area 5a. It is possible to encourage a driving operation in which the game ball B cannot be received by the opening 2022. In this embodiment, in the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500, the second guide passage 2522 has a lower acceptance probability of the game ball B at the second sub-out port 2022 than the first guide passage 2521. , the driving operation of the game ball B aiming at the second guide path 2522 can be encouraged. In other words, rather than "right-handed hitting" in which the game ball B contacts the stop portion 1006, it is possible to encourage a driving operation that requires delicate adjustment of the rotating operation of the handle 182, and the driving operation of the game ball B can be promoted. It is possible to enjoy the original game of the pachinko machine 1, which is mainly based on.

The game ball B passing on the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 is guided by a plurality of obstacle nails N planted on the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 and enters the accessory prize opening 2006 in the second attacker unit 2600. After passing to the left, it is released to the first attacker unit 2400 side via the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500.

At this time, if the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 and a "yakuza hit" is drawn as the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result, if the game ball B is received as a "yakuza" prize. Since the opening 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, the game ball B flowing down the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 is accepted into the accessory prize opening 2006 with a high probability. When the game ball B is accepted into the game ball B when the game ball B is in the open state, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 release a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13 balls) from the payout device 580. ) game balls B are put out onto the upper tray 201.

The game ball B received by the prize winning hole 2006 and detected by the prize winning hole sensor 2601 flows through the distribution passage 3158, and is transferred to the V winning hole 2007 or the losing hole 2008 by the V winning hole door 3006 which advances and retreats back and forth. It can be divided into either. When the game balls B are distributed to the V winning hole 2007, the big winning hole 2005 opens and closes in a predetermined opening and closing pattern as an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player. On the other hand, when the game balls B are distributed to the losing slot 2008, no advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player occurs.

The game ball B released to the first attacker unit 2400 side through the left side of the accessory prize opening 2006 passes through the first shelf section 2421, the second starting opening door 2411, and the second shelf section 2422, with the upper part to the left. After rolling, it is released to the left, and further rolled to the left on the third shelf 2423, the big prize door 2413, and the fourth shelf 2424, and is released into the gaming area 5a. .

Then, when the game ball B is rolling on the second starting port door 2411, the normal lottery result drawn by passing the game ball B at the gate 2003 is a "normal win", and the second starting port door 2411 When the game ball B is retreating, the game ball B is received into the second starting port 2004. When game balls B are received into the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, 4) of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. At the same time, in the main control board 1310, advantageous gaming states advantageous to the player (for example, "big hit", "medium hit", "small win", "accessory win", "probability change (probability change) win"), A special lottery result (first special lottery result) that generates a "time reduction (time saving) win" is held.

In addition, when the game ball B is rolling on the big prize opening door 2413, the special lottery result (first special If the lottery result and the second special lottery result) are special lottery results that generate an advantageous gaming state (e.g., "jackpot"), after the special variable time has elapsed, the big prize opening 2005 opens and closes the game ball B in a predetermined opening/closing pattern. The state is now ready for acceptance. When the game ball B is received in the big prize hole 2005 while the big prize hole 2005 is in an open state, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 send a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13 balls) from the payout device 580. game balls B are paid out onto the upper tray 201. Therefore, by allowing the grand prize opening 2005 to accept the gaming balls B when the grand prize opening 2005 is enabled to accept the gaming balls B, it is possible to pay out many gaming balls B and entertain the players. can.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when a game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, the main control board 1310 displays an advantageous gaming state (for example, "jackpot") that is advantageous to the player. A special lottery result will be drawn that will generate a "medium win," "small win," "yakuza win," "probability fluctuation (probability change) win," and "time reduction (time saving) win." The special lottery result will be shown to the player over a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as special variable time). The special lottery results that will be drawn upon acceptance include "Loss", "Small hit", "2R jackpot", "5R jackpot", "15R jackpot", "Probability change (probability change) win", "Time saving (time saving)". There are "shortened) hits", "probable variable time saving wins", "probable variable time saving wins", "second jackpot", etc.

If the special lottery result is a "winning prize", the prize winning hole 2006 is kept open to accept the game ball B for a predetermined short period of time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). The opening/closing pattern of closing after the opening is repeated multiple times (for example, twice). On the other hand, if the special lottery result is a "jackpot", after the grand prize opening 2005 becomes open to accept the game ball B, a predetermined period of time (for example, about 30 seconds) has elapsed, or the grand prize opening 2005 is opened. Acceptance of a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B. An opening/closing pattern that brings the game balls B into a closed state where they cannot be accepted when any of the following conditions is satisfied (one opening/closing pattern is referred to as one round) is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, a ``2R jackpot'' is repeated for 2 rounds, a ``5R jackpot'' is repeated for 5 rounds, and a ``15R jackpot'' is repeated for 15 rounds to generate an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player.

In addition, in "Jackpot", after the end of the jackpot game, the probability that a special lottery result such as "Jackpot" will be drawn will be changed ("probable winning"), and the display time of the effect image that suggests the special lottery result will be changed. There is a ``win'' (``time saving hit'').

When the special lottery result (for example, the second special lottery result) is a "second jackpot", after the big prize opening 2005 can accept the game ball B in a predetermined pattern, ST (special time) is set as an advantageous gaming state. ) occurs. This ST is to maintain a state of reliable variation or time saving for a predetermined specific number of variations.

In this embodiment, the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 receive game balls B from the start of the special lottery until the special lottery result is suggested. Once the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started, so the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started until the suggestion of the previously drawn special lottery result is completed. It will be put on hold. The maximum number of reserved special lottery results to be held is 4 for each of the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, and for more than 4, Even if game balls B were accepted in 2004, they were discarded without holding the special lottery results. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the gaming hall side due to the accumulation of reservations.

This special lottery result is suggested by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600. The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest special lottery results. The special lottery result is suggested by the function display unit 1400 by flashing a plurality of LEDs by repeatedly turning them on and off for a predetermined period of time, and then indicating the special lottery result by the combination of the lit LEDs.

On the other hand, the effect display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, and suggests the special lottery result as a effect image. The performance image that suggests the special lottery result on the performance display device 1600 is created by displaying three symbol rows consisting of a plurality of symbols side by side in the left and right direction, and by varying each symbol row. are sequentially stopped and displayed, and each of the three pattern rows are stopped and displayed so that the symbols of the three pattern rows that are stopped and displayed are in a combination that corresponds to the special lottery result. If the special lottery result is other than "lose", after the three symbol rows are stopped and each symbol is stopped and displayed, a confirmed image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the lottery is completed. An advantageous gaming state (for example, a "small win" game, a "big win" game, etc.) occurs depending on the special lottery result.

It should be noted that the time for suggesting the special lottery result on the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (variable time)) and the time for suggesting the special lottery result on the performance display device 1600 (the pattern row changes and the final image is changed) (time until display) is different, and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

Furthermore, in addition to displaying a performance image for suggesting a special lottery result by the performance display device 1600, the peripheral control board 1510 also performs a performance operation on the performance operation unit 300 in the door frame 3 according to the special lottery result drawn. It is possible to perform a player participation type effect in which the player operates the touch operation section 302 and the press operation section 303 of the section 301. In the player participation type performance, the push operation section 303 can be raised by the operation button lift drive motor 367 to make it stand out, and the player participation type performance can be enjoyed by operating the performance operation section 301.

In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, each decorative board provided on the door frame 3, each decorative board provided on the game board 5, the effect display device 1600, the back front effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, the back It is possible to perform light emitting effects, display effects, etc. by appropriately using the upper rear effect unit 3200, the lower rear effect unit 3300, etc., and it is possible to entertain players with various effects, and to It is possible to suppress a decline in interest in the game.

Furthermore, the peripheral control board 1510 allows the player to perform the correct operation when the player makes a mistake or does not perform the operation that should be performed in a player participation type performance in which the touch operation section 302 or the press operation section 303 is operated. The player will be notified accordingly.

[8. Second embodiment of game board]
Next, the game board 5A of the second embodiment in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 170 to 172 and the like. FIG. 170(a) is a front view showing an enlarged part of the game board of the first embodiment, and FIG. 170(b) is an enlarged front view of a part of the game board of the second embodiment at the same part as in FIG. 170(a). FIG. FIG. 171(a) is an enlarged front view of a part of the game board of the second embodiment, and FIG. 171(b) is a state in which the back-front left decoration unit of the back-front presentation unit in FIG. 171(a) is decorated with light emission. FIG. FIG. 172 is an explanatory diagram showing the panel board of the game panel in FIG. 171(a) in a state where it is decorated with light.

The game board 5A of the second embodiment is the game board 5 of the first embodiment except that the front component 1000A and the panel board 1110A of the game panel 1100 are made of a translucent milky white synthetic resin. It has the same configuration as , and a detailed explanation of the parts having the same configuration will be omitted.

In the game board 5 of the first embodiment, the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110 and panel holder 1120) are made of transparent synthetic resin, so as shown in FIG. 170(a), , the front component 1000 and the back unit 3000 provided behind the game panel 1100 can be visually recognized from the front (player side).

On the other hand, in the game board 5A of this embodiment, the front component 1000A and the panel board 1110A are made of milky white synthetic resin, so as shown in FIG. The parts of the back unit 3000 etc. provided at the rear of the game panel 1100, except for the inside of the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110A, cannot be seen from the front (player side).

The front component 1000A and the panel plate 1110A are made of a translucent milky white opaque synthetic resin. The panel board 1110A may be formed by cutting a milky-white synthetic resin plate, or may be formed by injection molding using a milky-white synthetic resin.

Since the game board 5A of this embodiment has a milky white panel board 1110A etc. of the game panel 1100, a part of the back unit 3000 provided at the rear through the panel board 1110A etc. (in front view, from the opening 1112) It is also possible to make the outside parts of the body invisible. This panel board 1110A etc. has a translucent property, so when the decoration body etc. provided at the rear is decorated with light, the light from the rear decoration body passes through the panel plate 1110A, and the decoration body is illuminated. The light-emitting decoration can be visually recognized by the player.

To be more specific, as shown in FIG. 171(a), in the back front left decoration unit 3120 of the back front presentation unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 provided behind the panel board 1110A, etc., in front view, the panel board 1110A etc. The back front upper left logo decoration part 3122, the back front left sub-decoration part 3123, etc. located outside the opening 1112 are not visible from the front. When the back front left logo decoration part 3121, the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122, the back front left sub-decoration part 3123, etc. are decorated with light, they have translucency as shown in FIG. 171(b). Light passes through the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122 and the back front left sub decoration part 3123 provided at the rear through the panel board 1110A, and the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122 and the back front left sub decoration are illuminated. The portion 3123 and the like become visible.

Since this panel board 1110A etc. is milky white, the luminous color of the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122 and the back front left sub decoration part 3123 etc. that are luminescently decorated can be transmitted in their original color, and the color can be changed. It is possible to show players a rich light-emitting effect.

Note that it is desirable that the opaque material having light transmission properties in the panel board 1110A has a light transmittance of 2% to 80% and a haze value of 80% to 100%. This is because if the transmittance is lower than this, it will be difficult to provide luminous decoration with sufficient brightness, and if the transmittance is higher than this, it will be difficult to obtain an opaque material. In addition, if the haze value is lower than this, the shape and decoration of the members provided at the rear will be easier to recognize, and there is a risk that the effect of concealment will not be sufficiently obtained.

In addition, the panel board 1110A etc. is milky white (Munsell value (10YR 9.2/0.5)), but "white Munsell value (N 9.5)", "white Munsell value (2.5Y 9.2)" /0.5)", "Ubana color Munsell value (10Y 9/1)", "Ecru color Munsell value (10YR 9/1)", "Lead white Munsell value (N 9)", "Oyster white Munsell value (5GY 8.5/0.3)", "Grey-white Munsell value (10YR 9/0.5)", "Indigo white Munsell value (9.7BG 8.2/1.3)", "Secret color Munsell Value (2B 8.5/2)", "Ivory Munsell Value (2.5Y 8.5/1.5)", "Cream Yellow Munsell Value (5Y 8.5/3.5)", "Cherry Blossom Munsell Value It is also possible to use a white color such as "value (10RP 9/2.5)".

By the way, since the panel board 1110A and the like are translucent and milky white, if a colored decoration such as black, red, or blue is provided behind the panel board 1110A, the decoration will emit light. Even if it is not decorated, depending on the color of the decoration, it may be visible through the panel board 1110A. Since the decoration can be seen through the panel board 1110A, the player becomes aware of the existence of the decoration behind the panel board 1110A, and the impact (surprise) given to the player when the decoration is decorated with light is reduced. There is a possibility that the performance decreases and it becomes impossible to obtain the desired performance effect.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the back front left upper logo decoration part 3122 of the back front left decoration unit 3120 provided at the rear of the panel board 1110A, the back front left sub-decoration part 3123, etc. The first left decorative body 3124, the second front left decorative body 3125, the third front left decorative body 3126, and the front left decorative body base 3127 are made of colorless and transparent members, so that they are transparent. The back front upper left logo decoration part 3122, the back front left sub-decoration part 3123, etc. cannot be seen through the milky white panel board 1110A. Therefore, when the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122, the back front left sub-decoration part 3123, etc. are not decorated with light, they are not visible to the player, making it difficult for the player to notice their existence. . When the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122, the back front left sub-decoration part 3123, etc. are decorated with light, they become visible through the translucent milky white panel board 1110A, which surprises the player. This makes it possible to enjoy the light-emitting effect, and since the light of the light-emitting decoration can be seen through the panel board 1110A, the inside of the game area 5a can be made to look bright and beautiful, and it is possible to strongly attract the attention of the players. .

In addition, the game board 5A of this embodiment is provided with a panel decoration board 1130 on the outside of the translucent milky white panel board 1110A, on which a plurality of LEDs 1130a are mounted to irradiate light onto the outer peripheral surface of the panel board 1110A. It is being The plurality of LEDs 1130a are full color LEDs. When the plurality of LEDs 1130a of the panel decoration board 1130 are made to emit light, the panel board 1110A can be decorated with light emission, as shown by hatching in FIG. 172. As a result, the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110A) through which the game balls B circulate in front becomes self-illuminating, so the inside of the game area 5a can be brightened, and the game balls B circulate within the game area 5a. The game ball B can be made more visible, and the appearance within the game area 5a can be improved, which can strongly attract the attention of the players.

In addition, since the game panel 1100 emits light, the game balls B circulating in the game area 5a can be seen in silhouette, making it easier to visually recognize the game balls B, and making subtle adjustments to the firing intensity. It can be made easier. Furthermore, by providing the panel decorative board 1130 on both the left and right sides of the panel board 1110A, it is possible to intuitively understand when giving advice to players about "hitting with the right" or "hitting with the left." become. In detail, depending on the game situation, the LED 1130a of either the left or right panel decoration board 1130 is made to emit light, and the left or right part of the panel board 1110A is decorated with light, thereby providing information to the player. It is possible to intuitively understand that the advice is to "hit left-handed" or "hit right-handed," and it allows players to enjoy the operation of hitting game ball B. Players can be entertained by a new sensation of light-emitting effects.

To be more specific, in conventional pachinko machines, the game board uses opaque plywood as a game panel, and by pasting a decorative film with a predetermined pattern printed on the front of the plywood, the inside of the game area can be covered. I try to decorate it. However, when plywood is used for the game panel, the decorative film decoration does not make it stand out from other game machines, making it difficult to increase its appeal to players. On the other hand, when the panel board 1110 through which the game balls B circulate in the front is made transparent like the game board 5 of the first embodiment, the decoration of the back unit 3000 provided at the rear and the effect image of the effect display device 1600 On the other hand, the game balls B circulating in front of the transparent panel board 1110 appear to be floating in the air, and some players may There is a possibility that it will be difficult to understand the movement of B.

On the other hand, in the game board 5A of the present embodiment, the light-transmitting panel board 1110A can be decorated with light by the plurality of LEDs 1130a of the panel decoration board 1130, so the color of the light emitted by the LEDs 1130a, the light emission pattern, etc. By appropriately combining these, the decoration of the panel board 1110A can be varied in a variety of ways, allowing players to see the self-luminous game board 5A that has not been seen in previous pachinko machines, and also attracting players' attention. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract players and has high appeal to players. Furthermore, since the panel board 1110A is illuminated by the plurality of LEDs 1130a of the panel decorative board 1130, the game balls B flowing in front of the panel board 1110A can be easily seen, and the player can enjoy the movement of the game balls B. This can prevent a decline in interest.

According to the game board 5A of this embodiment, in addition to the above-mentioned effects, the panel board 1110A etc. are made of milky white synthetic resin, and it is sufficient to use resin of a lower grade than transparent resin. Compared to the case where resin is used, the cost of the panel board 1110A can be reduced.

In the above embodiment, the panel decorative substrate 1130 is provided outside the outer periphery of the panel board 1110A, but the present invention is not limited to this. You can also do it. Thereby, the same effects as described above can be achieved. Moreover, compared to the case where the panel board is transparent, the point-like light from the LED 1130a etc. provided at the rear can be diffused by the milky white panel board 1110A having optical properties. The game board 5A can be decorated with soft luminescence, suppress glare, and be easy on the eyes.

Further, in the game board 5A of this embodiment, although not shown, a decorative film (also referred to as a cell) with a predetermined pattern may be attached to the front surface of the panel board 1110A. As a result, wear of the panel board 1110A due to the circulation of game balls B can be suppressed, and the appearance of the game area 5a is suppressed from deteriorating when the rear decorative body is not decorated with light emitting light due to the pattern of the cells. can be improved. In addition, the light from the LED provided at the rear of the panel board 1110A allows the cell pattern to be illuminated together with the panel board 1110A, making the decoration of the panel board 1110A look more beautiful.

In addition, when cells are provided on the front side of the panel board 1110A as described above, by making the pattern applied to the cells an outline, the light emitting decoration by the LEDs provided at the rear of the panel board 1110A ( It is possible to make the illuminations clearer and to further enhance the decorative effect of the luminescent decorations.

Furthermore, cells may be provided on the rear surface of the panel board 1110A. As a result, the shadow of the cell (or the pattern applied to the cell) will be reflected on the panel board 1110A due to the light from the LED etc. provided behind the panel board 1110A (cell), so the light emitted from the LED This allows the decoration of the panel board 1110A to be changed, thereby making it possible to entertain the players and suppress a drop in interest. The shadows reflected on this panel board 1110A may be, for example, characters such as "Right-handed", "Left-handed", "Chance", etc., to entertain the players by suggesting changes in the game situation. Can be done.

Further, in the above embodiment, a decorative body (back front left decorative unit 3120) whose position is fixed is provided at the rear of the milky white panel board 1110A, but the present invention is not limited to this. A movable decorative body may be provided behind the panel plate 1110A, which is movable between a retracted position behind the panel plate 1110A and an appearance position inside the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110A when viewed from the front.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the entire panel board 1110A, etc., including the inside, is milky white; however, the present invention is not limited to this. may be milky white. Specifically, for example, a panel board formed by two-color molding of a transparent resin and a milky white resin, a panel board made by laminating a transparent resin board and a milky white resin board, and at least one side of a transparent resin board. Examples include panel boards with a milky white film (cell) pasted on them, panel boards with a stiffening process applied to the back of a transparent resin board using ultraviolet curing ink, and panel boards with sandblasting applied to the back of a transparent resin board. It will be done.

Further, in the above embodiment, the panel board 1110A and the like are shown as milky white, but the panel board is not limited to this, and may be of an appropriate color such as red, blue, yellow, etc. good.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the front component 1000A is shown as having a translucent milky white color, but the front component is not limited to this. It may be used as the component 1000, or it may be a front component with a color different from that of the panel board 1110A.

[9. Third embodiment of game board]
Next, the game board 5B of the third embodiment in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to FIG. 173. FIG. 173 is an exploded perspective view of the panel board and cells of the game board of the third embodiment as seen from the front. The game board 5B of the third embodiment has the same configuration as the game board 5 of the first embodiment except for the configuration in which a cell 1140 is provided at the rear of the panel board 1110, and the same configuration parts will be described in detail. is omitted.

In the game board 5B of the second embodiment, a film-like cell 1140 with a predetermined pattern is removably provided on the back side of the panel board 1110 of the transparent game panel 1100 in the game panel 1100. . The cell 1140 is a synthetic resin film with a thickness of 0.2 mm to 0.4 mm, and a predetermined pattern is printed on it. The materials of the cell 1140 include "polyethylene terephthalate resin," "polycarbonate resin," "ABS resin," "AES resin," "PMMA (polymethyl methacrylate) resin," "polypropylene resin," and "polyethylene resin." , "polystyrene resin," "impact-resistant polystyrene resin," "polyvinyl chloride," and the like.

This cell 1140 is formed in a size that covers only a portion (here, the portion from the left side to the bottom of the center accessory 2500) of the entire surface of the panel board 1110. Although not shown, the cell 1140 is attached to the rear surface of the panel board 1110 using screws with a predetermined amount of wobble. As a result, compared to the case where the cells 1140 are attached to the entire surface of the panel board 1110, the labor required for attaching the cells 1140 can be made easier, and the amount of cells 1140 used can be reduced. An increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

In addition, since the cells 1140 are provided in a part of the panel board 1110, the number of cells 1140 that can be removed from the resin sheet can be increased compared to conventional cells that are pasted on the panel board, and the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

In addition, since the cell 1140 is attached to the panel board 1110 with some wobbling, even if the cell 1140 expands or contracts due to changes in temperature, humidity, etc., the difference in expansion and contraction with the panel board 1110 can be absorbed by the wobbling. can. As a result, even if the cells 1140 shrink relative to the panel board 1110, the cells 1140 can be prevented from being wrinkled or cracked, and the decorative effect of the pattern of the cells 1140 can be maintained. .

Furthermore, since the cell 1140 is attached to the panel board 1110 with screws, the cell 1140 can be easily attached and detached from the panel board 1110. Therefore, by replacing the cell 1140 with a different pattern cell, it is possible to change the specs of the pachinko machine 1 or change the model. Changes, design changes, etc. can be easily accommodated, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.In addition, by replacing the cell 1140 with a pattern cell 1140 that has a higher decorative effect, the game can be improved. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players.

In addition, since the cell 1140 is provided on the back side of the transparent panel board 1110, the distance from the player to the cell 1140 is longer than when the cell 1140 is provided in the front of the panel board 1110. It is possible to reduce the feeling of pressure on the person.

In addition, it is desirable that the cell 1140 has translucency, and the pattern of the cell 1140 can be decorated with light emitting light from the LED provided at the rear of the panel board 1110 (cell 1140). Not only can the appearance of the area 5a be improved, but also the light-emitting decoration of the cells 1140 can strongly attract players' attention, and the appeal of the pachinko machine 1 can be increased.

In the above embodiment, the cell 1140 is attached to the panel plate 1110 using screws, but the invention is not limited to this. For example, the cell 1140 can be attached to the panel plate 1110 and the panel holder 1120. It may be installed by sandwiching it in between.

Further, in the above embodiment, the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110 in which the center accessory 2500 is provided is provided at a position that is offset toward the upper right direction (eccentrically toward the upper right) with respect to the panel board 1110. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be biased upward (eccentrically upward) or horizontally (eccentrically horizontally). The same effect as described above can be obtained by providing the cell 1140 at the rear of the area where the opening 1112 becomes wider due to its deviation (eccentricity).

Further, the opening 1112 in which the center accessory 2500 is provided may be offset with respect to the center or outer edge of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110), or may be offset with respect to the center or outer edge of the game area 5a. good. Therefore, for example, if the centers of the panel board 1110 and the gaming area 5a do not match each other, even if the center of the opening 1112 that is offset with respect to the center of the panel board 1110 matches the center of the gaming area 5a. Alternatively, the center of the opening 1112, which is offset with respect to the center of the gaming area 5a, may coincide with the center of the panel board 1110.

[10. Another embodiment of function display unit]
Next, another embodiment of the function display unit 1400 provided in the game board 5 and the like will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 174 to 179 and the like. FIG. 174(a) is a front view of the function display unit of the second embodiment, FIG. 174(b) is a sectional view taken along the Soso line in FIG. (d) is a perspective view of the function display unit of (a) seen from behind. FIG. 175 is an exploded perspective view of the function display unit of FIG. 174 as seen from the front, and FIG. 176 is an exploded perspective view of the function display unit of FIG. 174 as seen from the rear. FIG. 177 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the relationship between the function display unit of FIG. 174 and the player. FIG. 178 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the relationship between the function display unit and the player according to the third embodiment. FIG. 179 is a sectional view of the function display unit of the fourth embodiment.

Similar to the function display unit 1400 of the first embodiment described above, the function display unit 1400A of the second embodiment displays a variable display by blinking a plurality of LEDs 1401 based on a control signal from the main control board 1310. Later, by lighting or extinguishing each light in a predetermined combination, you can check the gaming status (game situation), normal lottery results, special lottery results (first special lottery result, second special lottery result), and regular lottery results. It displays the number of pending results, the number of pending special lottery results, the number of rounds in the event of a "jackpot", etc.

To be more specific, in the game board 5 etc. of the first embodiment, for example, when a game ball B is accepted into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, the main control board 1310 displays a special lottery result as an internal process. will be selected by lottery. Then, the main control board 1310 transmits a control signal for displaying the special lottery result to the function display unit 1400, and displays the special lottery result using the corresponding LED 1401 in the function display unit 1400. That's what I do.

Further, the control signal of the special lottery result drawn on the main control board 1310 is also transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral control board 1510 displays a predetermined effect image on the effect display device 1600 as a performance suggesting the special lottery result. Is displayed. Since the effect images displayed on the effect display device 1600 are focused on entertaining the players, the special lottery results drawn on the main control board 1310 can be roughly recognized, but the details are difficult to understand. It has become. On the other hand, the function display unit 1400 accurately displays the special lottery results, but because the display is performed by emitting light from a plurality of small LEDs 1401, it is difficult to understand the displayed contents at a quick glance. It has become difficult.

Therefore, by photographing the function display unit 1400 with a digital camera, a camera attached to a mobile phone, etc., the light emitting state of the LED in the function display unit 1400 is analyzed, and the content displayed on the function display unit 1400 is analyzed. It is possible to try to find out as soon as possible.

However, if the special lottery result displayed on the function display unit 1400 is a "lose", if the special lottery result displayed on the function display unit 1400 is a "lose", an effect display will be displayed. Even if the device 1600 displays an effect image to suggest the result of the special lottery, knowing the result makes it difficult to enjoy the effect using the effect image and makes the user want the effect image to end quickly. , some players may feel irritated and lose interest in the game.

On the other hand, in the function display unit 1400A of the second embodiment, although the player's eyes can clearly see the light emitting conditions of the plurality of LEDs 1401, when photographing with a digital camera or the like, the light emitting conditions of the plurality of LEDs 1401 are This makes it unclear, making it difficult to discern what is being displayed.

Specifically, the function display unit 1400A includes a function display board 1402 on which a plurality of LEDs 1401 are mounted on the front surface, and a function display board 1402 provided on the front side of the function display board 1402 to independently transmit light from the LEDs 1401 forward. A rear reflector 1403 that allows the light from the LED 1401 that is provided on the front side of the transparent sheet 1404 and that has passed through the rear reflector 1403 to be and a reflector front 1405 for emitting radiation in different directions.

As shown in FIG. 175, the function display board 1402 has a plurality of LEDs 1401 mounted at random. A plurality of through holes 1403a are provided in the rear reflector 1403 so as to correspond to each LED 1401 of the function display board 1402. The plurality of through holes 1403a are provided perpendicularly to the front surface of the function display board 1402 (see FIG. 174(b), etc.).

The front reflector 1405 has a plurality of display holes 1405a that correspond to the through holes 1403a of the rear reflector 1403 and penetrate in the front-rear direction. The plurality of display holes 1405a are located just in front of the through-holes 1403a of the rear reflector 1403 to which the rear end side corresponds, and the front end side thereof is located from the front vertical line of the function display board 1402 passing through the center of the rear end side. They are located far apart. In other words, the axial directions of the plurality of display holes 1405a are directed in different directions with respect to the vertical line on the front surface of the function display board 1402.

Further, the front reflector 1405 has a distinguishing recess 1405b that is recessed from the front to the rear so as to connect the plurality of display holes 1405a. The plurality of display holes 1405a are divided into two display holes 1405a (LED 1401) related to the first special lottery result and a display hole 1405a (LED 1401) related to the second special lottery result by the differentiation recess 1405b.

As shown in FIG. 177, the plurality of display holes 1405a in the front reflector 1405 are equipped with LEDs 1401 when viewed from a player seated at a distance of 50 cm to 70 cm from the function display unit 1400A at the front of the pachinko machine 1. Light is directed in three directions: one that can be seen only with the left eye, one that can only be seen with the right eye, and one that can be seen with both the left and right eyes. That is, the plurality of display holes 1405a are divided into three types: one for the left eye, one for the right eye, and one for both eyes.

According to the function display unit 1400A of this embodiment, the player can see the light from all the LEDs 1401 by looking with both eyes, so when displaying special lottery results, etc., the light emission status of the plurality of LEDs 1401 can be clearly seen. It can be visually recognized, and the same functions as the function display unit 1400 of the first embodiment can be exhibited without inferiority.

Further, according to the function display unit 1400A of the present embodiment, when a digital camera or the like is used to take a picture, since the digital camera or the like is monocular, the picture is taken for either the left eye or both eyes, or the right eye or both eyes. Therefore, it is difficult to photograph the light emitting conditions (light emitting states) of all the LEDs 1401. In other words, when photographing with a digital camera or the like, the light emission status of the plurality of LEDs 1401 can be made unclear, making it difficult to distinguish the display contents on the function display unit 1400A. Therefore, based on the photographed photo, the display content on the function display unit 1400A becomes clear, and the special lottery result is a "lose", a simple "jackpot", a "probable win", a "time-saving win", By knowing the "second jackpot (ST hit)", etc., you will no longer be able to enjoy the performance that suggests the special lottery result, or you will not be able to enjoy the advantageous gaming state that is occurring (for example, the "jackpot" game). This makes it possible to prevent the players from losing interest in the game by keeping them entertained.

Furthermore, according to the function display unit 1400A of this embodiment, the orientation of the display hole 1405a in the front reflector 1405 is different, and the display content is adjusted according to the position of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. Since the function display unit 1400A is made to be clearly visible, the display contents of the function display unit 1400A can be viewed unclearly from behind the seated player. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for other players to understand the gaming situation, so it is possible to reduce the possibility of other players looking into the game, and to play without worrying about other players. can be entertained.

In addition, as mentioned above, since the display contents are made to be clearly visible according to the position of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, functions using a digital camera, etc., can be performed from a position behind the player. It is possible to make it more difficult to photograph the display content on the display unit 1400A, and the above-mentioned effects can be reliably achieved.

Furthermore, in the function display unit 1400A, the display hole 1405a in the front reflector 1405 is oriented in different directions not only in the left and right directions but also in the up and down direction, so that the eyes of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 are The display contents are made to look good when viewed from a height. As a result, when attempting to take a picture with a digital camera or the like, it is necessary to match the height direction as well, making it more difficult to take a picture of the display contents on the function display unit 1400A.

In addition, since the display holes 1405a of the front reflector 1405 are oriented differently for the left eye, right eye, etc., it is possible to suppress the distance between the plurality of LEDs 1401 on the function display board 1402 from increasing in the left and right direction. The width of the display unit 1400A in the left-right direction can be reduced.

Note that in the above embodiment, the plurality of display holes 1405a in the front reflector 1405 are oriented in different directions for the left eye, right eye, etc., but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, a function display unit 1400B having a configuration as shown in FIG. 178 may be used.

The function display unit 1400B includes a function display board 1411 on which a plurality of left LEDs 1411a and a plurality of right LEDs 1411b are mounted at a predetermined distance in the left-right direction (distance between the left and right pupils of the player); A rear reflector 1412 is provided on the front side of the substrate 1411 and transmits the light from the left LED 1411a and the right LED 1411b forward independently, and a light transmitting element is provided on the front side of the rear reflector 1412. It includes a sheet 1413 and a reflector front 1414 that is provided on the front side of the light-transmitting sheet 1413 and radiates the light from the left LED 1411a and right LED 1411b transmitted through the reflector rear 1412 forward.

The left LED 1411a and the right LED 1411b of the function display board 1411 are separated from each other by 40 mm to 80 mm in the left-right direction. A plurality of through holes 1412a are provided in the rear reflector 1412 so as to correspond to the left LED 1411a and the right LED 1411b of the function display board 1411. The plurality of through holes 1412a are provided perpendicularly to the front surface of the function display board 1411. A plurality of display holes 1414a are provided in the front reflector 1414 so as to correspond to the plurality of through holes 1412a in the rear reflector 1412. The plurality of display holes 1414a are provided perpendicularly to the front surface of the functional display substrate 1411.

This function display unit 1400B is configured so that, when viewed from a player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, the light from the left LED 1411a can be seen only by the left eye, and the light from the right LED 1411b can be seen only by the right eye. ing. Therefore, when the player looks with both eyes, the light from both the left LED 1411a and the right LED 1411b can be seen, so that the same function as the function display unit 1400 of the first embodiment can be achieved without any inferiority.

Further, according to the function display unit 1400B, since the left LED 1411a and the right LED 1411b are separated from each other in the left and right direction, a monocular digital camera or the like cannot photograph only one of them. It is possible to achieve the same effects as the function display unit 1400A.

Further, according to the function display unit 1400B, since the plurality of display holes 1414a in the front reflector 1414 are oriented in a direction perpendicular to the front surface of the function display board 1411, it is difficult to see from a position other than the front of the function display unit 1400B. Since the displayed content cannot be clearly seen, it may be difficult to photograph the displayed content using a digital camera or the like.

Furthermore, according to the function display unit 1400B, the plurality of display holes 1414a in the front reflector 1414 are oriented in a direction perpendicular to the front surface of the function display board 1411, and all face the same direction, so that the front reflector 1414 can be easily viewed. This allows the pachinko machine 1 to be molded in a manner that reduces the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

Note that in the above embodiments, the function display unit 1400A and the function display unit 1400B have configurations that are difficult to photograph with a monocular digital camera, but the present invention is not limited to this, and function display units with a configuration as shown in FIG. It may also be a unit 1400C.

The function display unit 1400C emits invisible light (infrared rays, ultraviolet rays, etc.) that can be photographed with a digital camera or the like, thereby making it difficult to distinguish the displayed contents. Specifically, a function display board 1421 with a plurality of LEDs 1421a mounted on the front surface, a reflector rear 1422 provided on the front side of the function display board 1421, and a flat plate-shaped reflector rear 1422 provided on the front side of the reflector rear 1422. It includes a light guide plate 1423, an auxiliary substrate 1424 on which an invisible light LED 1424a that irradiates invisible light to the side surface of the light guide plate 1423 is mounted, and a reflector front 1425 provided on the front side of the light guide plate 1423.

The rear reflector 1422 has a plurality of through holes 1422a corresponding to the plurality of LEDs 1421a of the function display board 1421, respectively. When the light guide plate 1423 receives light from the invisible light LED 1424a of the auxiliary substrate 1424 from the side, at least a portion of the display hole 1425a in the front reflector 1425 emits light.

The invisible light LED 1424a of the auxiliary board 1424 emits either infrared rays or ultraviolet rays as invisible light. The invisible light LED 1424a emits light when the plurality of LEDs 1421a are displaying special lottery results, etc., and causes the light guide plate 1423 to emit invisible light. The front reflector 1425 has a plurality of display holes 1425a corresponding to the through holes 1422a of the rear reflector 1422. The plurality of through holes 1422a on the rear reflector 1422 and the plurality of display holes 1425a on the front reflector 1425 are provided perpendicularly to the front surface of the functional display board 1421.

According to this function display unit 1400C, even if the light guide plate 1423 emits invisible light by the invisible light LED 1424a, the player cannot see the invisible light, so the LED 1421a provided at the rear through the light guide plate 1423 light can be seen and the displayed content can be viewed in good condition.

On the other hand, if this function display unit 1400C is photographed with a digital camera or the like, if it is capable of photographing invisible light, all the display holes 1425a will appear to be emitting light due to the light guide plate emitting light with invisible light. , the displayed content can be made unclear, and the same effects as above can be achieved.

In addition, although the above-mentioned embodiment shows the one equipped with the reflector rear 1403 (reflector rear 1412) and the light-transmitting sheet 1404 (light-transmitting sheet 1413), the present invention is not limited to this, and the function display substrate 1402 (function display board 1402) A configuration may be adopted in which the front reflector 1405 (front reflector 1414) is provided directly on the front surface of the display substrate 1411).

In addition, as a configuration that makes it difficult for a digital camera etc. to photograph the display contents on the function display unit, for example, LEDs may be distributed and displayed over a wider range than the photographing range of the digital camera etc. It may appear that the LED is off, but when photographed with a digital camera, the LED may be displayed by blinking at a speed that makes it appear as if the light is off, or the LED that has nothing to do with the display may be turned off for the player. You can use multiple dummy LEDs that look like they are on or off when photographed with a digital camera, or you can display them by placing a high-intensity LED near the function display unit. When photographing with a digital camera or the like, halation may be caused so that the display contents are not photographed.

[11. Second embodiment of magnetic sensor installation]
Next, a second embodiment of the attachment of the magnetic sensor 1050, which is different from the above game board 5 etc., will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 180. FIG. 180(a) is a cross-sectional view showing the second embodiment of mounting the magnetic sensor, FIG. 180(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the mounting of the magnetic sensor in FIG. 180(a) in a perspective view, and FIG. FIG. 12(d) is an exploded perspective view showing the attachment of the magnetic sensor shown in FIG.

The second embodiment of the attachment of the magnetic sensor 1050 is a holding member 1071 that is attached to a predetermined position of the game board 5 and has a pair of locking portions 1071a formed of a penetrating hole, and the holding member 1071 is locked. The holding container 1072 has an elastic claw 1072a that is engaged with the portion 1071a and houses the magnetic sensor 1050. The holding member 1071 is made of synthetic resin. The holding container 1072 is made of transparent synthetic resin, and allows the magnetic sensor 1050 to be visually recognized from the outside. Furthermore, the holding member 1071 and the holding container 1072 are made of a non-magnetic material.

Further, the holding container 1072 has a hole on the surface opposite to the elastic claw 1072a. An electric wire from the magnetic sensor 1050 housed in the holding container 1072 can be drawn out through the hole in the holding container 1072.

According to the holding member 1071 and the holding container 1072, since the holding member 1071 and the holding container 1072 are made of non-magnetic material, when the magnet is brought close to the gaming area 5a, the holding member 1071 and the like pull the lines of magnetic force from the magnet. It is possible to avoid the magnetic field lines from coming close together, and it is possible to prevent the lines of magnetic force passing through the magnetic sensor 1050 from decreasing. Therefore, the magnetism acting on the gaming area 5a can be easily detected, and fraudulent activities using magnets can be detected at an early stage, and fraudulent activities can be carried out by notifying the detection of suspicious magnetism by the magnetic sensor 1050. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that has a high deterrent effect against fraudulent acts.

In addition, by elastically deforming the elastic claws 1072a of the holding container 1072, the magnetic sensor 1050 can be easily attached to and removed from the holding member 1071. The magnetic sensor 1050 can be attached using the elastic claws 1072a of the holding container 1072 without using metal screws, and the effort required to assemble the pachinko machine 1 can be made easier. The increase in costs can be suppressed.

Furthermore, the magnetic sensor 1050 is attached by providing a locking portion 1071a penetrating through the holding member 1071 and locking the elastic claw 1072a of the holding container 1072 to the locking portion 1071a. The structure of the attached holding member 1071 can be simplified, and the cost of the holding member 1071 can be reduced.

Furthermore, since the elastic claws 1072a of the holding container 1072 are to be locked to the locking portions 1071a of the holding member 1071, as shown in FIG. 1071a, and by locking the elastic claw 1072a to any locking portion 1071a, the position at which the magnetic sensor 1050 is attached can be arbitrarily set. Alternatively, another locking portion 1071a may be provided on the holding member 1071 at a position different from the locking portion 1071a to which the elastic claw 1072a is locked. This makes it possible to change the position of the magnetic sensor 1050 or add more magnetic sensors 1050 without having to replace the holding member 1071 with a new one. The versatility of the member 1071 can be increased.

Further, since the magnetic sensor 1050 is housed in the holding container 1072 and is locked to the locking portion 1071a of the holding member 1071 by the elastic claw 1072a, the mounting structure of the magnetic sensor 1050 can be easily standardized. , the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

Furthermore, the holding member 1071 is provided with a plurality of locking portions 1071a in advance, and by locking the elastic claws 1072a of the holding container 1072 containing the magnetic sensor 1050 to the locking portions 1071a at appropriate positions, the magnetic sensor 1050 can be placed in any position and its position can be easily changed. Therefore, since the position of the magnetic sensor 1050 can be easily changed or expanded, a pachinko machine 1 is provided that can easily accommodate design changes and model changes while suppressing an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1. be able to.

Further, a biasing portion such as a protrusion may be provided inside the holding container 1072 to press the magnetic sensor 1050 housed therein. As a result, it is possible to suppress fine vibrations of the magnetic sensor 1050, so it is possible to reduce the possibility that the connector connected to the magnetic sensor 1050 will come off or cause a poor contact due to the vibration, and the magnetic Sensor 1050 can be operated reliably.

In the above embodiment, a penetrating hole is shown as the locking portion 1071a of the holding member 1071, but the hole is not limited to this, and any shape that allows the elastic claw 1072a to lock may be used. , slit, etc.

Further, in the embodiment described above, the holding container 1072 is shown to house the magnetic sensor 1050 vertically, but the holding container 1072 is not limited to this, and may be a holding container that houses the magnetic sensor 1050 horizontally.

Further, in the above embodiment, the magnetic sensor 1050 is housed in the holding container 1072 having the elastic claws 1072a and attached to the holding member 1071, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sensor case of the magnetic sensor 1050 is not limited thereto. 1053 may be formed with an elastic claw so as to be engaged with the engagement portion 1071a of the holding member 1071.

Moreover, although the above description has been made regarding the attachment of the magnetic sensor 1050, this attachment structure may also be used to attach a vibration sensor. Specifically, the vibration sensor may be attached by housing the vibration sensor in a holding container having elastic claws and locking the elastic claws to the locking portions of the holding member. Although the vibration sensor is not affected by surrounding magnetic materials, using a mounting structure similar to this magnetic sensor 1050 is effective in changing or moving the mounting location and reducing costs related to mounting.

[12. Another embodiment regarding attachment of decorations such as stickers]
Next, another embodiment regarding attachment of a decoration such as a seal, which is different from the above embodiment, will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 181 to 184 and the like. In this chapter, we will refer to a member that has a predetermined decoration as a decoration, a member that has a decoration attached to one side as a first member, and a member that has a decoration attached to the other side of the first member. The second member will be referred to as the second member. In addition, the decoration body, the first member, and the second member may be lined up one after the other, may be lined up one above the other, or may be lined up left and right.

FIG. 181(a) is an explanatory view showing in cross section an example in which the separation hole of the first member for removing the decoration is also used as a positioning hole for the second member, and FIG. It is an explanatory view showing in cross section an example in which a closed space is formed by the second member behind the separation hole of the first member, and (c) is a state in which a decorative body with a different thickness is attached in (b). FIG. 3(d) is an explanatory diagram showing a cross section of an example in which the separation hole of the first member for removing the decoration is also used as the attachment hole of the decoration. FIG. 182(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the decorative body attached to the first member from the front, FIG. 182(b) is a sectional view of FIG. 182(c), and FIG. 182(c) is a decorative body different from that in FIG. It is an explanatory view showing the first member attached with the first member from the front.

FIG. 183(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the horizontally long rectangular decorative body and the first member, FIG. 183(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the circular decorative body and the first member, and (c ) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the symmetrically provided decorative body and the first member, and (d) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the symmetrically provided decorative body and the first member with a shape different from that in (c). It is a diagram. FIG. 184(a) is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the decorative body and the movable first member from the front, FIG. 184(b) is a sectional view taken along the tartar line in FIG. 184(a), and FIG. 184(c) is a (a) and (c) are explanatory diagrams showing the positional relationship between the decorative body and the first member, and (d) is a front view showing the relationship between the decorative body in a different form from that in (a) and the movable first member. (e) is a sectional view taken along the Chi-Chi line in (d).

First, the embodiment shown in FIG. 181(a) includes a decorative body 1801 made of a sheet-like sticker on which predetermined decorations, characters, etc. are printed, and a first member 1821 to which the decorative body 1801 is pasted on one side. , and a second member 1841 attached to the other side of the first member 1821.

The first member 1821 has a flat plate portion 1821a, a mounting recess 1821b that is recessed from one side of the flat plate portion 1821a and to which the decoration 1801 is attached, and a side opposite to the mounting recess 1821b of the flat plate portion 1821a. A boss portion 1821c protrudes from the other surface, a separation hole 1821d passes through the boss portion 1821c and the flat plate portion 1821a, and a separation hole 1821d protrudes from the other surface of the flat plate portion 1821a to the same position as the tip of the boss portion 1821c. The rib 1821e is provided. The attachment recess 1821b is recessed deeper than the thickness of the decorative body 1801.

The second member 1841 includes a base portion 1841a on which the boss portion 1821c and the tips of the ribs 1821e of the first member 1821 are in contact, and a base portion 1841a that protrudes from one surface of the base portion 1841a to separate the first member 1821. A positioning protrusion 1841b inserted into the hole 1821d. By inserting the positioning protrusion 1841b of the second member 1841 into the separation hole 1821d of the first member 1821, the first member 1821 and the second member 1841 are positioned with respect to each other.

When assembled, the separation hole 1821d of the first member 1821 is closed on one side by the decorative body 1801 affixed to the mounting recess 1821b, and on the other side by the positioning protrusion 1841b of the second member 1841. The interior is a closed space. The separation hole 1821d is provided at a position close to the edge of the mounting recess 1821b that is hidden by the decorative body 1801. This separation hole 1821d also serves as a positioning hole for positioning the first member 1821 to the second member 1841.

According to the configuration of this embodiment, when the decoration body 1801 cannot be correctly pasted to the mounting recess 1821b of the first member 1821 during manufacturing of the pachinko machine 1, from the other side of the first member 1821. By passing a rod-shaped member through the separation hole 1821d and pressing the decorative body 1801 from the other side to one side with the tip thereof, it is possible to remove the decorative body 1801 so that the vicinity of the edge can be rolled up to one side, and the rolled-up The decoration 1801 can be easily removed from the mounting recess 1821b by pulling the portion, and the decoration 1801 can be reattached.

In addition, with the first member 1821 and the second member 1841 separated, a rod-shaped member is passed from the other side of the first member 1821 through the separation hole 1821d, and the decoration body 1801 is pressed from the other side with its tip. Since the decorative body 1801 can be easily removed from the mounting recess 1821b, the task of replacing the decorative body 1801 when changing models can be facilitated.

Furthermore, as described above, when the first member 1821 and the second member 1841 are separated, the decoration body 1801 can be easily removed from the mounting recess 1821b using the separation hole 1821d. The component parts can be easily separated into materials, and the cost of disposing of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

In addition, since the separation hole 1821d can be hidden from one side by pasting the decorative body 1801 in the mounting recess 1821b, it is possible to suppress deterioration in appearance due to the separation hole 1821d, and also to prevent players from seeing the separation hole 1821d. It is possible to make it difficult for the user to notice the existence of the separation hole 1821d, and to make it difficult for the user to plan fraudulent acts using the separation hole 1821d.

In addition, when assembled into the pachinko machine 1, the separation hole 1821d is fixed by the positioning protrusion 1841b of the second member 1841 inserted into the separation hole 1821d of the first member 1821 to which the decoration 1801 is attached. It is closed from the other side, and unlike conventional pachinko machines, it does not have a hole that goes all the way through. It is possible to avoid inserting a fraudulent tool into the game board 5, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed.

Furthermore, since the separation hole 1821d is closed from the other side by the positioning protrusion 1841b of the second member 1841, even if an unauthorized tool is inserted into the separation hole 1821d through the decorative body 1801 from one side, the second Since the positioning protrusion 1841b of the member 1841 can prevent further insertion (intrusion) into the other side, unauthorized tools are prevented from entering the game board 5 from one side through the separation hole 1821d. This makes it possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being carried out, as well as leaving traces on the decorative body 1801 when the fraudulent tool pierces the decorative body 1801, making it possible to deter people from committing fraudulent acts. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that has a high deterrent force against.

In this embodiment, for example, the first member 1821 is connected to the front component 1000 or the front unit 2000 (starting port unit 2100, side unit 2200, side upper left unit 2300, first attacker unit 2400, center accessory 2500, second The second member 1841 may be used as the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110, panel holder 1120).

Examples of the decorative body 1801 include a PET seal, a flex metal seal (trade name), a metallic seal (trade name), a potting seal, and an aluminum seal.

Next, the embodiment shown in FIG. 181(b) includes a decorative body 1801 made of a sheet-like sticker on which predetermined decorations, characters, etc. are printed, and a first member 1822 to which the decorative body 1801 is attached on one side. and a second member 1842 attached to the other side of the first member 1822. The second member 1842 is attached to the first member 1822 by a structure not shown.

The first member 1822 includes a flat plate portion 1822a having a flat plate shape, a mounting recess 1822b that is recessed from one side of the flat plate portion 1822a and to which the decorative body 1801 is attached, and a portion that penetrates the flat plate portion 1822a at the portion of the mounting recess 1822b. The flat plate portion 1822a includes a separation hole 1822c and a plurality of ribs 1822d protruding from the other surface of the flat plate portion 1822a. The attachment recess 1821b is recessed deeper than the thickness of the decorative body 1801. Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, at least some of the ribs 1822d among the plurality of ribs 1822d are provided so as to surround the separation hole 1822c.

When the separation hole 1822c of the first member 1822 is assembled, one side is closed by the decorative body 1801 affixed to the mounting recess 1822b, and the other side is closed by the plurality of ribs 1822d and one side of the second member 1842. It opens into a closed space surrounded by a wall, making the entire space a closed space. The separation hole 1822c is provided at a position close to the edge of the mounting recess 1822b that is hidden by the decorative body 1801.

According to the configuration of this embodiment, when the decoration body 1801 cannot be correctly pasted to the mounting recess 1822b of the first member 1822 during manufacturing of the pachinko machine 1, from the other side of the first member 1822. By passing a rod-shaped member through the separation hole 1822c and pressing the decorative body 1801 from the other side to one side with the tip thereof, it is possible to remove the decorative body 1801 so that the vicinity of the edge can be rolled up to one side, and the rolled-up The decoration 1801 can be easily removed from the mounting recess 1822b by the operator pulling the portion, and the decoration 1801 can be reattached.

In addition, with the first member 1822 and the second member 1842 separated, a rod-shaped member is passed through the separation hole 1822c from the other side of the first member 1822, and the decorative body 1801 is pressed from the other side with the tip of the rod-shaped member. Since the decorative body 1801 can be easily removed from the mounting recess 1822b, the task of replacing the decorative body 1801 when changing models can be facilitated.

Furthermore, as described above, when the first member 1822 and the second member 1842 are separated, the decoration body 1801 can be easily removed from the mounting recess 1822b using the separation hole 1822c. The component parts can be easily separated into materials, and the cost of disposing of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

In addition, since the separation hole 1822c can be hidden from one side by pasting the decorative body 1801 in the mounting recess 1822b, it is possible to suppress deterioration in appearance due to the separation hole 1822c, and also to prevent players from seeing the separation hole 1822c. It is possible to make it difficult for the user to notice the existence of the separation hole 1822c, and to make it difficult for the user to plan fraudulent acts using the separation hole 1822c.

In addition, when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the separation hole 1822c is closed from the other side by the second member 1842 attached to the other side of the first member 1822 to which the decoration 1801 is attached. In addition, unlike conventional pachinko machines, a hole that passes through the entire area is not penetrated, so a linear unauthorized tool such as a piano wire can be inserted into the game board 5 through the hole from the other side than the second member 1842. It is possible to prevent the device from being inserted into the computer, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being carried out.

Furthermore, since the second member 1842 closes the separation hole 1822c from the other side, even if an unauthorized tool is inserted into the separation hole 1822c from one side through the decorative body 1801, the second member 1842 closes the separation hole 1822c. Since it is possible to prevent the insertion (intrusion) of the unauthorized tool into the other side, it is possible to prevent the unauthorized tool from entering into the game board 5 from one side through the separation hole 1822c, thereby preventing fraudulent acts from occurring. To provide a pachinko machine 1 that is capable of preventing fraud, as well as leaving traces on the decorative body 1801 when a fraudulent tool pierces through the decorative body 1801, making it possible to deter people from committing fraudulent acts. can do.

In this embodiment, for example, the first member 1822 is connected to the front component 1000, the front unit 2000 (starting port unit 2100, side unit 2200, side upper left unit 2300, first attacker unit 2400, center accessory 2500, The second member 1842 may be used as the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110, panel holder 1120).

Examples of the decorative body 1801 include a PET seal, a flex metal seal (trade name), a metallic seal (trade name), a potting seal, and an aluminum seal.

Next, the embodiment shown in FIG. 181(c) includes a decorative body 1802 made of a seal with a predetermined decoration and a certain thickness (for example, 0.4 mm to 5 mm), and a decorative body 1802 on one side. It includes a first member 1822 that is pasted, and a second member 1842 that is attached to the other side of the first member 1822. The second member 1842 is attached to the first member 1822 by a structure not shown.

The first member 1822 includes a flat plate portion 1822a having a flat plate shape, a mounting recess 1822b that is recessed from one side of the flat plate portion 1822a and to which the decorative body 1802 is attached, and a portion that penetrates the flat plate portion 1822a at the portion of the mounting recess 1822b. The flat plate portion 1822a includes a separation hole 1822c and a plurality of ribs 1822d protruding from the other surface of the flat plate portion 1822a. The attachment recess 1821b is recessed to be shallower than the thickness of the decorative body 1802. Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, at least some of the ribs 1822d among the plurality of ribs 1822d are provided so as to surround the separation hole 1822c.

When the separation hole 1822c of the first member 1822 is assembled, one side is closed by the decorative body 1802 affixed to the mounting recess 1822b, and the other side is closed by the plurality of ribs 1822d and one side of the second member 1842. It opens into a closed space surrounded by a wall, making the entire space a closed space. The separation hole 1822c is provided at a position close to the edge of the mounting recess 1822b that is hidden by the decorative body 1802.

According to the configuration of this embodiment, when the decoration body 1802 cannot be correctly pasted to the mounting recess 1822b of the first member 1822 during manufacturing of the pachinko machine 1, from the other side of the first member 1822. By passing a rod-shaped member through the separation hole 1822c and pressing the decorative body 1802 from the other side to one side with the tip thereof, it is possible to remove the decorative body 1802 so that the vicinity of the edge can be rolled up to one side, and the rolled-up The decoration 1802 can be easily removed from the mounting recess 1822b by the operator pulling the portion, and the decoration 1802 can be reattached.

In addition, with the first member 1822 and the second member 1842 separated, a rod-shaped member is passed through the separation hole 1822c from the other side of the first member 1822, and the decorative body 1802 is pressed from the other side with its tip. Since the decorative body 1802 can be easily removed from the mounting recess 1822b, the task of replacing the decorative body 1802 when changing models can be facilitated.

Furthermore, as described above, when the first member 1822 and the second member 1842 are separated, the decorative body 1802 can be easily removed from the mounting recess 1822b using the separation hole 1822c. The component parts can be easily separated into materials, and the cost of disposing of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

In addition, since the separation hole 1822c can be hidden from one side by pasting the decorative body 1802 in the mounting recess 1822b, it is possible to suppress deterioration of the appearance due to the separation hole 1822c, and also to prevent players from seeing the separation hole 1822c. It is possible to make it difficult for the user to notice the existence of the separation hole 1822c, and to make it difficult for the user to plan fraudulent acts using the separation hole 1822c.

In addition, when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the separation hole 1822c is closed from the other side by the second member 1842 attached to the other side of the first member 1822 to which the decoration 1802 is attached. In addition, unlike conventional pachinko machines, a hole that passes through the entire area is not penetrated, so a linear unauthorized tool such as a piano wire can be inserted into the game board 5 through the hole from the other side than the second member 1842. It is possible to prevent the device from being inserted into the computer, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being carried out.

Furthermore, since the second member 1842 closes the separation hole 1822c from the other side, even if an unauthorized tool is inserted through the decoration body 1802 from one side and into the separation hole 1822c, the second member 1842 closes the separation hole 1822c. Since it is possible to prevent the insertion (intrusion) of the unauthorized tool into the other side, it is possible to prevent the unauthorized tool from entering into the game board 5 from one side through the separation hole 1822c, thereby preventing fraudulent acts from occurring. To provide a pachinko machine 1 that can prevent fraud, and also deter people from committing fraudulent acts because traces are left on the decorative body 1802 when a fraudulent tool penetrates the decorative body 1802. can do.

In this embodiment, for example, the first member 1822 is connected to the front component 1000, the front unit 2000 (starting port unit 2100, side unit 2200, side upper left unit 2300, first attacker unit 2400, center accessory 2500, The second member 1842 may be used as the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110, panel holder 1120). Alternatively, the first member 1822 may be used as a decoration holding member, and the second member 1842 may be used as a base member, a decorative substrate, or the like.

Examples of the decorative body 1802 include a PET seal, a flex metal seal (trade name), a metallic seal (trade name), a potting seal, and an aluminum seal. Examples of the decorative body 1802 include those formed by injection molding, vacuum molding, pressure molding, high frequency molding, and the like.

Next, the embodiment shown in FIG. 181(d) includes a thick (for example, 2 mm to 20 mm) and rigid decorative body 1803 with a predetermined decoration, and a first member 1822 to which the decorative body 1803 is attached on one side. and a second member 1842 attached to the other side of the first member 1822.

The decorative body 1803 has a mounting dowel 1803a projecting to the other side. The decorative body 1803 can be attached to the first member 1822 by press-fitting this attachment dowel 1803a into a separation hole 1822c of the first member 1822, which will be described later.

The first member 1822 includes a flat plate portion 1822a having a flat plate shape, a mounting recess 1822b that is recessed from one side of the flat plate portion 1822a and to which the decorative body 1803 comes into contact, and a mounting dowel that penetrates the flat plate portion 1822a at the portion of the mounting recess 1822b. It includes a separation hole 1822c into which the portion 1803a is press-fitted, and a plurality of ribs 1822d protruding from the other surface of the flat plate portion 1822a. The attachment recess 1821b is recessed to be shallower than the thickness of the decorative body 1803. Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, at least some of the ribs 1822d among the plurality of ribs 1822d are provided so as to surround the separation hole 1822c.

When the separation hole 1822c of the first member 1822 is assembled, one side is closed by a mounting dowel 1803a protruding from the decoration body 1803, and the other side is closed by a plurality of ribs 1822d and one side surface of the second member 1842. It opens into a space that is enclosed and enclosed, making the entire area a closed space. The separation hole 1822c is provided at a position close to the edge of the mounting recess 1822b that is hidden by the decorative body 1803.

According to the configuration of this embodiment, when the decoration body 1803 cannot be correctly attached to the attachment recess 1822b of the first member 1822 during manufacturing of the pachinko machine 1, it can be separated from the other side of the first member 1822. By passing a rod-like member through the hole 1822c and pressing the mounting dowel 1803a of the decorative body 1803 from the other side to one side with the tip thereof, the other surface of the decorative body 1803 is separated from the surface of the mounting recess 1822b, and the decorative body 1803 is removed. can be easily removed from the first member 1822, and the decorative body 1803 can be reattached.

In addition, with the first member 1822 and the second member 1842 separated, a rod-shaped member is passed through the separation hole 1822c from the other side of the first member 1822, and its tip presses the mounting dowel 1803a of the decorative body 1803 from the other side. By doing so, the decorative body 1803 can be easily removed from the first member 1822, so that the work of replacing the decorative body 1803 when changing the model can be facilitated.

Furthermore, as described above, when the first member 1822 and the second member 1842 are separated, the decoration body 1803 can be easily removed from the first member 1822 using the separation hole 1822c. The component parts can be easily separated by material, and the cost of disposing of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

Furthermore, by press-fitting the mounting dowel 1803a into the separation hole 1822c and attaching the decorative body 1803 to the first member 1822, the separation hole 1822c can be hidden from one side, thereby suppressing deterioration in appearance due to the separation hole 1822c. In addition, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the existence of the separation hole 1822c, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to plan fraudulent activities using the separation hole 1822c.

In addition, when assembled into the pachinko machine 1, the second member 1842 attached to the other side of the first member 1822 closes the separation hole 1822c from the other side, and unlike the conventional pachinko machine, Since the hole that passes through the whole part is not penetrated, it is possible to avoid inserting a wire-shaped unauthorized tool such as a piano wire into the game board 5 through the hole from the other side than the second member 1842. can prevent fraudulent acts from occurring.

Furthermore, since the mounting dowel 1803a is press-fitted into the separation hole 1822c from one side and the decorative body 1803 has rigidity, an attempt is made to insert an unauthorized tool from one side through the decorative body 1803 into the separation hole 1822c. However, the rigidity of the decorative body 1803 and the attachment dowel 1803a can prevent penetration. Even if the decorative body 1803 is penetrated from one side and inserted into the separation hole 1822c, the second member 1842 can prevent further insertion (intrusion) into the other side. It is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering into the game board 5 from one side through which the unauthorized tools are inserted, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being carried out. Since traces are left behind, it is possible to deter people from committing fraudulent acts, and it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that has a high deterrent effect against fraudulent acts.

In this embodiment, for example, the first member 1822 is connected to the front component 1000, the front unit 2000 (starting port unit 2100, side unit 2200, side upper left unit 2300, first attacker unit 2400, center accessory 2500, The second member 1842 may be used as the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110, panel holder 1120). Alternatively, the first member 1822 may be used as a decoration holding member, and the second member 1842 may be used as a base member, a decorative substrate, or the like.

Further, as the decorative body 1803, a relief-shaped decoration can be given and formed by injection molding. Further, the mounting dowel 1803a of the decorative body 1803 may be integrally molded with the decorative body 1803, may be insert molded, or may be assembled separately. good.

Next, the embodiment shown in FIGS. 182(a) and 182(b) includes a decorative body 1804 made of a sheet-like sticker on which predetermined decorations, characters, etc. are printed, and a decorative body 1804 pasted on one side. A first member 1823. Note that the configuration on the other side of the first member 1823 (including the second member) may have any of the configurations described above.

The decorative body 1804 is a sticker having a predetermined pattern, characters, etc. printed on its surface, and has translucency. This decorative body 1804 has a substantially square outer shape, and chamfered portions 1804a of a predetermined radius are provided at three corners. Since the overall shape of this decorative body 1804 is difficult to identify, the orientation can be determined by making the shape of one corner different from the shape of the remaining corners. . Note that although the chamfered portion 1804a is shown here as having a rounded chamfer, it may also be a rounded chamfer.

In addition, the decorative body 1804 has a glue surface 1804b (shaded area in FIG. 182(a)) provided on the back side with a substantially constant width (width within the range of 3 mm to 6 mm) along the outer periphery. have. The width of the glue surface 1804b is set to an appropriate width depending on the size of the decorative body 1804. Limiting the glue surface 1804b to only the outer periphery in this way is often used especially for transparent stickers (decoration body 1804) when it is desired to show the illumination or design surface such as LEDs at the rear.

The first member 1823 has a flat plate portion 1823a and a size that is one size larger than the decorative body 1804 and deeper than the thickness of the decorative body 1804 (0.4 mm to 1.0 mm) from one side of the flat plate portion 1823a. ) It has a mounting recess 1823b which is recessed and to which the decorative body 1804 is attached, and a separation hole 1823c which penetrates the flat plate part 1823a at the location of the mounting recess 1823b. This first member 1823 is formed transparent.

The separation hole 1823c is provided close to the corner of the mounting recess 1823b at a position where the adhesive surface 1804b does not cover when the decorative body 1804 is attached (a position inside the adhesive surface 1804b). This prevents the attachment strength of the decorative body 1804 from decreasing due to the adhesive surface 1804b covering the separation hole 1823c.

This separation hole 1823c is a round hole. The separation hole 1823c of this embodiment has an inner diameter within a range of 2 mm to 6 mm. If the separation hole 1823c is smaller than this, the diameter of the separation rod-like member (tool) inserted into the separation hole 1823c will become smaller, which may cause it to bend easily and make it impossible to press the decorative body 1804 sufficiently. This is because if the separation hole 1823c is larger than this, there is a possibility that the decorative body 1804 will be bent at the separation hole 1823c, and the appearance of the decorative body 1804 will be poor.

Furthermore, the first member 1823 is provided with chamfered portions 1823d that are formed at three corners of the mounting recessed portion 1823b and have a larger (radius) than the chamfered portion 1804a of the decorative body 1804. The remaining corner is used as an erroneous pasting prevention section 1823e. As a result, the mounting recess 1823b has a shape similar to that of the decorative body 1804. The two edges of the mounting recess 1823b that constitute the corners where the chamfered portion 1823d is not provided are set as abutting surfaces that serve as a reference for pasting the decorative body 1804. As a result, at least two clearance directions for pasting the decorative body 1804 are ensured, making the pasting work easier.

Further, the first member 1823 is provided with an identification portion 1823f in the attachment recess 1823b to indicate the portion of the contact surface. The identification portion 1823f is recessed relative to the surface of the mounting recess 1823b. By looking at this identification part 1823f, the operator can immediately recognize the position of the abutment surface for pasting the decorative body 1804, and can prevent mistakes in the position of the abutment surface, and can also improve the pasting work. It is designed to be easy to implement.

Note that in the first member 1823, it is desirable that the distance from the outer periphery of the flat plate portion 1823a to the outer periphery of the mounting recess 1823b be 0.5 mm or more. This is because if the distance is smaller than this, when the game ball B collides with another member, the portion outside the mounting recess 1823b will easily break.

When attaching the decorative body 1804 to the mounting recess 1823b, first place the corner of the decorative body 1804 where the chamfered portion 1804a is not provided on the abutting surface of the mounting recess 1823b (incorrectly pasted) indicated by the identification portion 1823f. The adhesive surface 1804b is gradually brought into contact with the surface of the mounting recess 1823b from that region and pasted. Note that when trying to bring the corner of the decorative body 1804 where the chamfered part 1804a is provided into contact with the abutment surface (erroneous pasting prevention part 1823e), the shape of the wrong pasting prevention part 1823e will be different from the chamfered part 1804a. Since the numbers are different, it is possible to make the user realize that the decoration 1804 is attached in the wrong direction, and the decoration 1804 can be attached in the correct orientation.

According to the configuration of this embodiment, by passing a rod-like member through the separation hole 1823c from the other side of the first member 1823 and pressing the decorative body 1804 from the other side to one side with its tip, the end edge of the decorative body 1804 is The decorative body 1804 can be removed by being rolled up to one side, and the worker can easily remove the decorative body 1804 from the mounting recess 1823b (first member 1823) by pulling the rolled up part. It is possible to achieve the same effects as the configuration.

In addition, since the separation hole 1823c of the first member 1823 is provided in a position where it does not cover the adhesive surface 1804b when the decorative body 1804 is pasted on the mounting recess 1823b, the adhesive surface 1804b covers the separation hole 1823c. Decrease in the adhesion strength of the body 1804 can be avoided, and the decorative body 1804 can be made difficult to come off.

Furthermore, since the attachment recess 1823b of the first member 1823 to which the decoration 1804 is pasted is provided with an erroneous pasting prevention part 1823e, if the decoration 1804 is attached in a direction different from the normal orientation, the decoration 1804 will be damaged. The difference between the shape of the chamfered portion 1804a and the shape of the erroneous pasting prevention portion 1823e makes it possible to notice the wrong orientation of the decorative body 1804, and to avoid pasting the decorative body 1804 on the first member 1823 in the correct orientation. At the same time, it is possible to prevent the decorative body 1804 from being shipped in a state where it is attached in the wrong direction.

Furthermore, since the identification portion 1823f indicating the contact surface is provided in the mounting recess 1823b of the first member 1823, it is possible for the operator to immediately recognize the position of the contact surface, which serves as a reference for pasting the decorative body 1804. This makes it possible to prevent mistakes in the position of the abutment surface, and also makes it easy to perform the pasting work.

In this embodiment, for example, the first member 1823 is connected to the front component 1000, the front unit 2000 (starting port unit 2100, side unit 2200, side upper left unit 2300, first attacker unit 2400, center accessory 2500, (second attacker unit 2600, right middle side unit 2700, gate member 2800, etc.), or it may be a member (decoration holding member) provided on the front unit 2000 or the back unit 3000.

Examples of the decorative body 1804 include a PET seal, a flex metal seal (trade name), a metallic seal (trade name), a potting seal, and an aluminum seal.

Next, the embodiment of FIG. 182(c) differs from the embodiment of FIGS. 182(a) and (b) in that the adhesive surface 1804b of the decorative body 1804 is added to a portion along the outer periphery and also to one diagonal line. It is designed so that it is also provided in the area of . The other configurations are the same as those in the embodiment shown in FIGS. 182(a) and 182(b), and description thereof will be omitted.

According to this embodiment, in addition to producing the same effects as those described above, since the glue surface 1804b is also provided diagonally on the back surface of the decorative body 1804, the adhesion strength is increased and the decorative body 1804 is more difficult to come off. In addition, even if the decoration body 1804 shrinks at a rate different from that of the first member 1823 due to changes in the environment such as temperature and humidity, the central part is stuck by the adhesive surface 1804b on the diagonal line. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decorative body 1804 from swelling or waving, and it is possible to prevent the decorative body 1804 from becoming unsightly.

Furthermore, since the glue surface 1804b is provided diagonally, the number of glue surfaces can be reduced compared to the case where the glue surface is provided on the entire surface of the decoration body 1804, and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced. can. Further, since the adhesion strength of the decorative body 1804 is lower than that in the case where the adhesive surface is provided on the entire surface, the work of removing the decorative body 1804 using the separation hole 1823c can be made easier.

Next, the embodiment shown in FIG. 183(a) includes a horizontally rectangular decorative body 1805 (shaded part) made of a sheet-like sticker on which predetermined decorations, characters, etc. are printed, and a decorative body 1805 on one side. A first member 1824 to which 1805 is attached. Note that the configuration on the other side of the first member 1824 (including the second member) may have any of the configurations described above. Further, in this embodiment, description of the identification portion indicating the separation hole and the contact surface in the first member 1824 is omitted.

The decorative body 1805 is a sticker on which a predetermined pattern, characters, etc. are printed. This decorative body 1805 has a horizontally elongated rectangular outer shape, and is provided with a C-chamfered chamfered portion 1805a that is diagonally cut out at one corner (lower left corner in the figure). Since this decorative body 1805 has a shape that makes it difficult to specify the vertical direction, the direction can be determined by making the shape of one corner different from the shape of the remaining corners. The adhesive surface of the decorative body 1805 may be provided with a constant width along the outer periphery, as in FIG. 182(a), or may be provided over the entire surface.

The first member 1824 has a flat plate portion 1824a and a size that is one size larger than the decorative body 1805 and deeper than the thickness of the decorative body 1805 (0.4 mm to 1.0 mm) from one side of the flat plate portion 1824a. ) It has a mounting recess 1824b which is recessed and to which the decorative body 1805 is attached.

Further, the first member 1824 has a C-chamfered erroneous pasting prevention portion 1824c that protrudes into the mounting recess 1824b at one corner (lower left corner in the figure) of the mounting recess 1824b. As a result, the mounting recess 1824b has a shape similar to that of the decorative body 1805. In this first member 1824, the diagonally extending end portion of the erroneous pasting prevention portion 1824c and the short side portion connected to the erroneous pasting prevention portion 1824c are the standards for pasting the decoration 1805. It is set on the contact surface. As a result, three clearance directions for pasting the decorative body 1805 are secured: the short side direction of the mounting recess 1824b, the long side direction, and the perpendicular direction to the oblique side of the erroneous pasting prevention part 1824c. This makes it easy to perform pasting work.

Note that in the first member 1824, it is desirable that the distance from the outer periphery of the flat plate portion 1824a to the mounting recess 1824b be 1 mm or more. This is because if the distance is smaller than this, when the game ball B collides with another member, the portion outside the mounting recess 1824b will easily break.

When attaching the decoration 1805 to the mounting recess 1824b, first attach the oblique side of the chamfer 1805a of the decoration 1805 and the short side connected to the chamfer 1805a to the contact surface (or The oblique side of the adhesion prevention part 1824c and the short side part connected to the erroneous adhesion prevention part 1824c), and from that part, gradually bring the adhesive surface on the back side into contact with the surface of the mounting recess 1824b, and paste it. wear.

Note that if you try to bring the corner of the decorative body 1805 where the chamfered part 1805a is not provided into contact with the abutment surface (erroneous pasting prevention part 1824c), the shape of the wrong pasting prevention part 1824c will be different from the chamfered part 1805a. Since the numbers are different, it is possible to make the user realize that the decoration 1805 is attached in the wrong direction, and the decoration 1805 can be attached in the correct orientation. Furthermore, if the decoration 1805 is attached to the mounting recess 1824b in the wrong direction, the right-angled corner of the decoration 1805 will protrude from the attachment recess 1824b at the erroneous attachment prevention part 1824c, making it difficult for the operator to It is possible to make the user aware of erroneous pasting of the decorative body 1805.

According to this embodiment, since the attachment recess 1824b of the first member 1824 to which the decoration 1805 is pasted is provided with the erroneous pasting prevention part 1824c, if the decoration 1805 is pasted in a direction different from the normal one, Then, since the shape of the corner of the decorative body 1805 where the chamfered portion 1805a is not provided is different from the shape of the erroneous pasting prevention portion 1824c, it is possible to notice the wrong orientation of the decorative body 1805, and the decorative body 1805 can be attached to the first member 1824 in the correct orientation, and it is possible to prevent the decoration 1805 from being shipped in a state where it is attached in the wrong orientation.

In this embodiment, for example, the first member 1824 is connected to the front component 1000, the front unit 2000 (starting port unit 2100, side unit 2200, side upper left unit 2300, first attacker unit 2400, center accessory 2500, (second attacker unit 2600, right middle side unit 2700, gate member 2800, etc.), or it may be a member (decoration holding member) provided on the front unit 2000 or the back unit 3000.

Examples of the decorative body 1805 include a PET seal, a flex metal seal (trade name), a metallic seal (trade name), a potting seal, and an aluminum seal.

Next, the embodiment shown in FIG. 183(b) includes a circular decorative body 1806 (shaded portion) that is a sheet-like sticker on which predetermined decorations, characters, etc. are printed, and a decorative body 1806 on one side. a first member 1825 to which is pasted. Note that the configuration on the other side of the first member 1825 (including the second member) may have any of the configurations described above. Further, in this embodiment, description of the identification portion indicating the separation hole and the contact surface in the first member 1825 is omitted.

The decorative body 1806 is a sticker on which a predetermined pattern, characters, etc. are printed. This decorative body 1806 has a circular outer shape, and is provided with a notch 1806a cut out in an arc shape from the outside (from the bottom in the figure). Since the decorative body 1806 has a shape that makes it difficult to specify its orientation, a notch 1806a is provided so that its orientation can be determined. The adhesive surface of the decorative body 1806 may be provided with a constant width along the outer periphery, as in FIG. 182(a), or may be provided over the entire surface.

The first member 1825 has a flat plate portion 1825a and a size that is one size larger than the decorative body 1806 from one side of the flat plate portion 1825a, and is deeper than the thickness of the decorative body 1806 (0.4 mm to 1.0 mm). ) A recessed mounting recess 1825b to which the decorative body 1806 is attached.

The first member 1825 also has an erroneous pasting prevention part 1825c that protrudes in an arc shape with a radius that matches the notch 1806a of the decorative body 1806 at the periphery of the mounting recess 1825b (the lower end of the periphery in the figure). are doing. As a result, the mounting recess 1825b has a shape similar to that of the decorative body 1806. In this first member 1825, the arcuate edge of the erroneous pasting prevention portion 1825c is set as a contact surface that serves as a reference for pasting the decorative body 1806. As a result, the clearance direction for pasting the decorative body 1806 is at least two directions: a direction along the arc of the wrong pasting prevention part 1825c, and a direction away from the wrong pasting prevention part 1825c (vertical direction in the figure). This makes it easy to perform pasting work.

Note that in the first member 1825, it is desirable that the distance from the outer periphery of the flat plate portion 1825a to the mounting recess 1825b be 1 mm or more. This is because if the distance is smaller than this, when the game ball B collides with another member, the portion outside the mounting recess 1825b will easily break.

When attaching the decorative body 1806 to the mounting recess 1825b, first, the notch 1806a of the decorative body 1806 is brought into contact with the abutting surface (erroneous pasting prevention part 1825c) of the mounting recess 1825b, and the adhesive surface on the back side is removed from the said part. Gradually bring it into contact with the surface of the mounting recess 1825b and attach it.

Note that when the decorative body 1806 is pasted against the circumferential surface of the mounting recess 1825b other than the contact surface (erroneous pasting prevention portion 1825c), the decorative body 1806 protrudes from the attachment recess 1825b at the portion of the wrong pasting prevention portion 1825c. This allows the operator to notice that the decoration 1806 has been erroneously pasted.

According to this embodiment, since the attachment recess 1825b of the first member 1825 to which the decoration 1806 is pasted is provided with the erroneous pasting prevention part 1825c, if the decoration 1806 is pasted in a direction different from the normal one, Then, the decorative body 1806 protrudes from the erroneous pasting prevention portion 1825c, making it possible to notice the wrong orientation of the decorative body 1806, and allowing the decorative body 1806 to be pasted on the first member 1825 in the correct orientation. At the same time, it is possible to prevent the decorative body 1806 from being shipped in a state where it is attached in the wrong direction.

In this embodiment, for example, the first member 1825 is connected to the front component 1000, the front unit 2000 (starting port unit 2100, side unit 2200, side upper left unit 2300, first attacker unit 2400, center accessory 2500, (second attacker unit 2600, right middle side unit 2700, gate member 2800, etc.), or it may be a member (decoration holding member) provided on the front unit 2000 or the back unit 3000.

Examples of the decorative body 1806 include a PET seal, a flex metal seal (trade name), a metallic seal (trade name), a potting seal, and an aluminum seal.

Next, in the embodiment shown in FIGS. 183(c) and (d), a pair of decorative bodies 1807L (left side) and right decorative body (right side) are arranged symmetrically and are made of sheet-like stickers on which predetermined decorations, characters, etc. are printed. 1807R (shaded portion), and a pair of first member left 1826L and first member right 1826R, to which a left decoration 1807L and a right decoration 1807R are attached. Note that the configuration of the other side of the left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R (including the second member) may have any of the configurations described above. Further, in this embodiment, descriptions of identification portions indicating the separation holes and abutment surfaces in the left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R are omitted.

The left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R are stickers on which predetermined patterns, characters, etc. are printed. The left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R are bilaterally symmetrical to each other. The left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R have end sides that are close to each other extending vertically in a straight line, and the upper and lower ends of the end sides are formed by arc-shaped end sides that bulge away from each other. It is formed into an approximately semicircular shape that is vertically long and connected to each other.

The left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R in FIG. 183(c) have different radii of the R chamfers provided at both ends in the longitudinal direction, that is, at the upper and lower ends of the semicircles. On the other hand, the left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R in FIG. 183(d) have a semicircular upper end (one longitudinal end) with an R chamfer, and a lower end (other longitudinal end) with a straight chamfer. Notched. Both the left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R have shapes that make it difficult to identify whether they are for left or right use if the top and bottom are reversed. I am making it possible to identify it.

The adhesive surfaces of the left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R may be provided with a constant width along the outer periphery, as in FIG. 182(a), or may be provided over the entire surface.

The first member left 1826L and the first member right 1826R are formed symmetrically to each other. The first member left 1826L and the first member right 1826R have a flat plate portion 1826a, a left decorative body 1807L and a right decorative body 1807R, which are one size larger than the decorative body 1806 from one side of the flat plate portion 1826a. It has a mounting recess 1826b that is recessed deeper (0.4 mm to 1.0 mm) than the thickness of the left decoration 1807L and a right decoration 1807R, and an erroneous pasting prevention part 1826c at the lower end of the installation recess 1826b. are doing.

The erroneous pasting prevention portions 1826c of the first member left 1826L and first member right 1826R in FIG. It is set in. On the other hand, the erroneous pasting prevention portions 1826c of the first member left 1826L and first member right 1826R in FIG. 183(d) are provided in the shape of horizontally extending linear notches. In both the mounting recesses 1826b of the first member left 1826L and the first member right 1826R, the edge of the erroneous pasting prevention part 1826c is set as the abutting surface that becomes the reference for pasting the decoration left 1807L and the right decoration 1807R. has been done.

As a result, in the embodiment of FIG. 183(c), the clearance direction for pasting the left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R is an arcuate direction in which the erroneous pasting prevention part 1826c rolls on the arc, and At least two directions are ensured: a direction away from the prevention portion 1826c (up and down direction in the figure). On the other hand, in the embodiment of FIG. 183(d), the clearance direction for pasting the left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R is a direction along the straight line of the erroneous pasting prevention part 1826c (in the left-right direction in the figure); At least two directions are ensured: a direction away from the erroneous pasting prevention part 1826c (up and down direction in the figure). In this way, in any of the embodiments, at least two clearance directions are ensured, making it easy to perform the pasting work.

Note that in the first member left 1826L and the first member right 1826R, it is desirable that the distance from the outer periphery of the flat plate portion 1826a to the mounting recess 1826b be 1 mm or more. This is because if the distance is smaller than this, when the game ball B collides with another member, the portion outside the mounting recess 1826b will easily break.

When attaching the left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R to the corresponding mounting recesses 1826b of the left first member 1826L and the right first member 1826R, the left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R are attached in the longitudinal direction. Of both ends, the one with the larger radius of the R chamfer or the one with the linear notch faces downward, and comes into contact with the abutment surface of the corresponding mounting recess 1826b (the edge of the erroneous pasting prevention part 1826c). Then, gradually bring the adhesive surface on the back side into contact with the surface of the mounting recess 1826b from that part and paste it.

In addition, if you try to paste the decoration body left 1807L and the decoration body right 1807R upside down and then left and right upside down, the shape of the lower end will be 1826c), the shapes of the left decoration 1807L and the right decoration 1807R can be made aware that they are pasted in the wrong direction. It can be attached.

According to this embodiment, since the erroneous pasting prevention portions 1826c are provided in the mounting recesses 1826b of the first member left 1826L and the first member right 1826R to which the left decoration 1807L and the right decoration 1807R are pasted, If you try to paste the left decoration 1807L and the right decoration 1807R in a direction different from the normal one, the shapes of the longitudinal ends of the left decoration 1807L and the right decoration 1807R and the shape of the erroneous pasting prevention part 1826c. By having different orientations, it is possible to notice the wrong orientation of the left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R. In addition, it is possible to prevent the left decoration 1807L and the right decoration 1807R from being shipped in a state where they are pasted in the wrong direction.

In this embodiment, for example, the first member left 1826L and the first member right 1826R may be members (decoration holding members) provided on the front unit 2000 or the back unit 3000.

Further, examples of the left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R include a PET seal, a flex metal seal (trade name), a metallic seal (trade name), a potting seal, an aluminum seal, and the like.

Next, the embodiment shown in FIGS. 184(a) to 184(c) includes a decorative body 1808 consisting of a sheet-like sticker on which a predetermined pattern, characters, etc. are printed, and a decorative body 1808 pasted on one side. A movable first member 1827. Note that the configuration on the other side of the first member 1827 (including the second member) may have any of the configurations described above. Further, in this embodiment, description of the identification portion indicating the contact surface of the first member 1827 is omitted.

The decorative body 1808 is a sticker on which a predetermined pattern, characters, etc. are printed. The decorative body 1808 has a horizontally elongated rectangular outer shape, and the upper two corners are rounded and the lower two corners are rounded. The orientation of the decorative body 1808 can be determined by the difference in the chamfered shapes on the upper side and the lower side. The adhesive surface of the decorative body 1808 may be provided with a constant width along the outer periphery, as in FIG. 182(a), or may be provided over the entire surface.

The first member 1827 includes a horizontally long rectangular flat plate portion 1827a, and a size that is one size larger than the decorative body 1808 from one side of the flat plate portion 1827a, and a depth (0.0 mm) that is deeper than the thickness of the decorative body 1808. A mounting recess 1827b that is recessed (4 mm to 1.0 mm) to which the decorative body 1808 is pasted, a separation hole 1827c that penetrates the flat plate part 1827a at the mounting recess 1827b, and two lower corners of the mounting recess 1827b. and an erroneous pasting prevention section 1827d provided in the section.

Further, the first member 1827 has a pair of shaft portions 1827e that protrude in a cylindrical shape in the left-right direction from near the lower ends of both left and right sides of the flat plate portion 1827a, respectively. The shaft portion 1827e is located on the other side of the surface of the mounting recess 1827b, as shown in FIG. 184(b). In the first member 1827, a pair of shaft portions 1827e are rotatably supported by a member (not shown). In other words, the first member 1827 is rotatable and movable around the axes of the pair of shaft portions 1827e. The shaft portion 1827e of the first member 1827 may be integrally molded with the flat plate portion 1827a, etc., may be insert molded, or may be assembled separately. good.

The separation hole 1827c is a round hole, and is provided near the upper corner of the mounting recess 1827b. Since the two separation holes 1827c are provided at positions far from the axis of the shaft portion 1827e, the weight of the portions of the first member 1827 far from the axis of the shaft portion 1827e can be reduced. The rotational moment that acts when rotating (rotating) the first member 1827 can be reduced, the load applied to the rotational drive of the first member 1827 can be reduced, and the first member 1827 can be moved easily. can. In addition, since the two separation holes 1827c are provided near the left and right corners of the upper side, the force applied to the left and right shaft portions 1827e can be made equal, and the first member 1827 is balanced. This can reduce uneven wear and the like.

The separation hole 1827c of this embodiment has an inner diameter within a range of 2 mm to 6 mm. If the separation hole 1827c is smaller than this, the diameter of the separation rod-like member (tool) inserted into the separation hole 1827c will become smaller, which may cause it to bend easily and make it impossible to press the decorative body 1808 sufficiently. This is because if the separation hole 1827c is larger than this, the decoration 1808 may be bent at the separation hole 1827c, and the appearance of the decoration 1808 may deteriorate.

The erroneous pasting prevention part 1827d has a shape corresponding to the C chamfer of the lower corner of the decorative body 1808 and protrudes into the mounting recess 1827b. In this embodiment, the oblique end of the erroneous pasting prevention part 1827d and the lower end of the attachment recess 1827b are set as the abutment surface that serves as a reference for pasting the decoration 1808.

Since the erroneous pasting prevention part 1827d protrudes into the mounting recess 1827b, the weight of the first member 1827 increases. Therefore, the influence of the rotational moment increased by the erroneous pasting prevention part 1827d can be reduced as much as possible, and an increase in the load applied to the rotational drive of the first member 1827 can be suppressed. In addition, since the erroneous pasting prevention parts 1827d are provided at the lower two corners of the mounting recess 1827b, the first member 1827 can be balanced, and uneven wear of the shaft part 1827e can be reduced. In addition, the first member 1827 can be rotated (rotated) in a stable state.

Note that in the first member 1827, it is desirable that the distance from the outer periphery of the flat plate portion 1827a to the mounting recess 1827b be 1 mm or more. This is because if the distance is smaller than this, when the game ball B collides with another member, the portion outside the mounting recess 1827b will easily break.

When attaching the decorative body 1808 to the mounting recess 1827b of the first member 1827, first, the C-chamfered corner of the decorative body 1808 is brought into contact with the abutting surface (erroneous pasting prevention part 1827d) of the mounting recess 1827b. Then, the adhesive surface is gradually brought into contact with the surface of the mounting recess 1827b from that part, and the adhesive is pasted. Note that if you try to paste the decoration 1808 upside down, the orientation of the decoration 1808 will be different because the shape of the incorrect pasting prevention part 1827d is different from the shape of the rounded chamfer at the corner of the decoration 1808. It is possible to make the user realize that he/she has made a mistake, and to attach the decorative body 1808 in the correct orientation. Furthermore, if the decoration 1808 is attached to the mounting recess 1827b in the wrong direction, the corner of the decoration 1808 will protrude from the attachment recess 1827b at the erroneous attachment prevention part 1827d, making it difficult for the operator to attach the decoration. 1808 can be pasted incorrectly.

Furthermore, the first member 1827 has a separation groove 1827f that is recessed in a portion near the edge of the mounting recess 1827b and extends in the left-right direction (see FIG. 184(b)). When the decoration 1808 is attached to the attachment recess 1827b, the separation groove 1827f is straddled by the decoration 1808, forming a space between the separation groove 1827f and the decoration 1808. This separation groove 1827f causes a part of the decoration 1808 to sink into the separation groove 1827f when the part of the separation groove 1827f in the decoration 1808 is pressed from the outside while the decoration 1808 is attached to the mounting recess 1827b. At the same time, the edge side of the decorative body 1808 is raised from the mounting recess 1827b, and by pulling the raised portion, the decorative body 1808 can be removed from the mounting recess 1827b.

According to the configuration of this embodiment, by passing a rod-like member through the separation hole 1827c from the other side of the first member 1827 and pressing the decorative body 1808 from the other side to one side with its tip, the end edge of the decorative body 1808 is The decorative body 1808 can be removed by being rolled up to one side, and the worker can easily remove the decorative body 1808 from the mounting recess 1827b (first member 1827) by pulling the rolled up part. It is possible to achieve the same effects as the configuration.

In addition, since the attachment recess 1827b of the first member 1827 to which the decoration 1808 is pasted is provided with an erroneous pasting prevention portion 1827d, if the decoration 1808 is attached in a different orientation than the normal one, the decoration 1808 The difference in the shape of the corner and the shape of the erroneous pasting prevention part 1827d makes it possible to notice the wrong orientation of the decorative body 1808, and to make the decorative body 1808 stick to the first member 1827 in the correct orientation. In addition, it is possible to prevent the decorative body 1808 from being shipped in a state where it is attached in the wrong direction.

Furthermore, since the separation hole 1827c is provided at a position far from the axis of rotation, and the erroneous pasting prevention part 1827d is provided at a position close to the axis of rotation, it acts when the first member 1827 is rotated. Since the rotational moment can be reduced, the load applied to the rotational drive of the first member 1827 can be reduced, and the first member 1827 can be easily moved (rotated).

In addition, since two separation holes 1827c and two erroneous pasting prevention parts 1827d are provided in the first member 1827, it is possible to balance the forces acting on the left and right shaft parts 1827e. Uneven wear and the like can be reduced, and the first member 1827 can be rotated (rotated) in a stable state.

In addition, in this embodiment, for example, the first member 1827 may be used as a door member of a variable winning opening such as a big winning opening or an accessory winning opening, or may be provided in the front unit 2000 or the back unit 3000. It may also be a movable member for performance.

Examples of the decorative body 1808 include a PET seal, a flex metal seal (trade name), a metallic seal (trade name), a potting seal, and an aluminum seal.

By the way, when the first member 1827 is used as a door member for opening and closing the grand prize opening 2005, the accessory prize opening 2006, etc., since the game ball B comes into contact with the decorative body 1808, the decorative body 1808 and the second It is desirable to have the following relationship with one member 1827.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 184(c), the distance from the front surface of the flat plate portion 1827a of the first member 1827 to the front surface of the decorative body 1808 is d, and the distance from the upper edge of the mounting recess 1827b of the first member 1827 is If the distance to the upper edge of the decorative body 1808 is c, and the radius of the game ball B is r, then the distance d is within the range [0<d<r], and the distance It is desirable that c be within the range of [0≦c<(2rd^2-d^2)^0.5]. Note that the formula is shown in the above key parentheses.

As a result, it is possible to avoid the game ball B coming into contact with the upper end side of the decoration body 1808, so it is possible to prevent the decoration body 1808 from coming off due to the contact of the game ball B, and to suppress the occurrence of malfunctions. can be done.

Note that the distance d is preferably within the range of 0.1 mm to 1 mm. This is because if the distance d is smaller than this, depending on the tolerance of the decorative body 1808, the decorative body 1808 may protrude further forward than the flat plate portion 1827a, and the game ball B may come into contact with the upper end side. This is because if it is larger than this, the decorative body 1808 is likely to be cast a shadow by the upper edge of the mounting recess 1827b, and the decorative effect of the decorative body 1808 may be reduced.

Further, the contact surface of the mounting recess 1827b may be set on the upper edge. As a result, the upper edge of the decorative body 1808 comes into contact with the upper edge of the mounting recess 1827b, so the game ball B does not come into contact with the upper edge of the decorative body 1808, and the same It can produce effects.

Next, the embodiment shown in FIGS. 184(d) and (e) includes a decorative body 1809 consisting of a sheet-like sticker on which a predetermined pattern, characters, etc. are printed, and a decorative body 1809 pasted on one side. A movable first member 1828 is provided. Note that the configuration on the other side of the first member 1828 (including the second member) may have any of the configurations described above. Further, in this embodiment, description of the identification portion indicating the contact surface of the first member 1828 is omitted.

The decorative body 1809 is a sticker on which a predetermined pattern, characters, etc. are printed. This decorative body 1809 has a horizontally elongated rectangular outer shape, has two upper corners that are rounded, and two lower corners that are provided with rectangular notches 1809a. . This cutout portion 1809a is formed in a shape corresponding to an erroneous pasting prevention portion 1828d of the first member 1828, which will be described later. The difference in shape between the upper and lower corners allows the direction of the decorative body 1809 to be identified. The adhesive surface of the decorative body 1809 may be provided with a constant width along the outer periphery, as in FIG. 182(a), or may be provided over the entire surface.

The first member 1828 includes a horizontally long rectangular flat plate portion 1828a, and a size that is one size larger than the decorative body 1809 from one side of the flat plate portion 1828a, and a depth (0.0 mm) that is deeper than the thickness of the decorative body 1809. A mounting recess 1828b that is recessed (4 mm to 1.0 mm) to which the decoration 1809 is pasted, a separation hole 1828c that penetrates the flat plate part 1828a at the mounting recess 1828b, and two lower corners of the mounting recess 1828b. and an erroneous pasting prevention section 1828d provided in the section.

The first member 1828 also includes a semi-cylindrical shaft support portion 1828e that bulges to one side with the axis in the left and right direction at the lower left and right corners of the flat plate portion 1827a, and a shaft support portion It includes a shaft hole 1828f provided on each end surface on the outer side in the left and right direction of the shaft 1828e, and a columnar shaft portion 1828g inserted into the shaft hole 1828f. In the first member 1828, a pair of shaft portions 1828g are rotatably supported by a member (not shown). That is, the first member 1828 is movable and rotatable around the axes of the pair of shaft portions 1828g. The shaft portion 1828g of the first member 1828 may be inserted during molding of the flat plate portion 1827a or the like, or may be assembled separately.

The shaft support portion 1828e is provided up to the mounting recess 1828b, and a portion of the shaft support portion 1828e constitutes an erroneous pasting prevention portion 1828d. The shaft support portion 1828e (erroneous pasting prevention portion 1828d) forms the lower left and right corners of the mounting recess 1828b into a square cutout shape.

The separation hole 1828c is a round hole and is provided near the upper corner of the mounting recess 1828b. Since the two separation holes 1828c are provided at positions far from the axis of the shaft portion 1828g, the weight of the portions of the first member 1828 far from the axis of the shaft portion 1828g can be reduced. The rotational moment that acts when rotating (rotating) the first member 1828 can be reduced, the load applied to the rotational drive of the first member 1828 can be reduced, and the first member 1828 can be moved easily. can. In addition, since the two separation holes 1828c are provided near the left and right corners of the upper side, the force applied to the left and right shaft portions 1828g can be made equal, and the first member 1828 is balanced. This can reduce uneven wear and the like.

The separation hole 1828c of this embodiment has an inner diameter within a range of 2 mm to 6 mm. If the separation hole 1828c is smaller than this, the diameter of the separation rod-shaped member (tool) inserted into the separation hole 1828c will become smaller, which may cause it to bend easily and make it impossible to press the decorative body 1809 sufficiently. This is because if the separation hole 1828c is larger than this, the decorative body 1809 may be bent at the separation hole 1828c, and the appearance of the decorative body 1809 may deteriorate.

The incorrect pasting prevention part 1828d has a rectangular shape that projects from the lower corner of the mounting recess 1828b by the shaft support part 1828e, and has a shape corresponding to the cutout part 1809a of the lower corner of the decorative body 1809. It has become. In this embodiment, the upper edge of the erroneous pasting prevention portion 1828d is set as the abutment surface that serves as a reference for pasting the decoration 1809.

Since the erroneous pasting prevention part 1828d protrudes into the mounting recess 1828b, the weight of the first member 1828 increases. Therefore, the influence of the rotational moment increased by the erroneous pasting prevention part 1828d can be reduced as much as possible, and an increase in the load applied to the rotational drive of the first member 1828 can be suppressed. Furthermore, since the erroneous pasting prevention portions 1828d are provided at the lower two corners of the mounting recess 1828b, the balance of the first member 1828 can be maintained and uneven wear of the shaft portion 1828g can be reduced. In addition, the first member 1828 can be rotated (rotated) in a stable state.

Note that in the first member 1828, it is desirable that the distance from the outer periphery of the flat plate portion 1828a to the mounting recess 1828b be 1 mm or more. This is because if the distance is smaller than this, when the game ball B collides with another member, the portion outside the mounting recess 1828b will easily break.

When attaching the decorative body 1809 to the mounting recess 1828b of the first member 1828, first, the notch 1809a of the decorative body 1809 is brought into contact with the abutment surface (erroneous pasting prevention part 1828d) of the mounting recess 1828b, and the part concerned is Then, gradually bring the adhesive side into contact with the surface of the mounting recess 1828b and paste. Note that if you try to paste the decoration 1809 upside down, the orientation of the decoration 1809 will be different because the shape of the incorrect pasting prevention part 1828d is different from the shape of the rounded chamfer at the corner of the decoration 1809. It is possible to make the user realize that he/she has made a mistake, and to attach the decoration 1809 in the correct orientation. Furthermore, if the decoration 1809 is attached to the mounting recess 1828b in the wrong direction, the corner of the decoration 1809 will protrude from the attachment recess 1828b at the incorrect attachment prevention part 1828d, making it difficult for the operator to attach the decoration to the mounting recess 1828b. 1809 can be pasted incorrectly.

According to the configuration of this embodiment, by passing a rod-like member through the separation hole 1828c from the other side of the first member 1828 and pressing the decorative body 1809 from the other side to one side with its tip, the end edge of the decorative body 1809 is The decorative body 1809 can be removed by being rolled up to one side, and the worker can easily remove the decorative body 1809 from the mounting recess 1828b (first member 1828) by pulling the rolled up part. It is possible to achieve the same effects as the configuration.

In addition, since the attachment recess 1828b of the first member 1828 to which the decorative body 1809 is pasted is provided with an erroneous pasting prevention portion 1828d, if the decorative body 1809 is attached in a direction different from the normal orientation, the decorative body 1809 Since the shape of the corner of and the shape of the erroneous pasting prevention part 1828d are different, it is possible to make the user aware of the wrong orientation of the decorative body 1809, and to make the decorative body 1809 adhere to the first member 1828 in the correct orientation. In addition, it is possible to prevent the decorative body 1809 from being shipped in a state where it is attached in the wrong direction.

Furthermore, since the separation hole 1828c is provided at a position far from the axis of rotation, and the erroneous pasting prevention part 1828d is provided at a position close to the axis of rotation, it acts when the first member 1828 is rotated. Since the rotational moment can be reduced, the load applied to the rotational drive of the first member 1828 can be reduced, and the first member 1828 can be easily moved (rotated).

In addition, since two separation holes 1828c and two erroneous pasting prevention parts 1828d are provided in the first member 1828, it is possible to balance the forces acting on the left and right shaft parts 1828g, and Uneven wear and the like can be reduced, and the first member 1828 can be rotated (rotated) in a stable state.

In addition, in this embodiment, for example, the first member 1828 may be used as a door member of a variable winning opening such as a big winning opening or an accessory winning opening, or may be provided in the front unit 2000 or the back unit 3000. It may also be a movable member for performance.

Examples of the decorative body 1809 include a PET seal, a flex metal seal (trade name), a metallic seal (trade name), a potting seal, and an aluminum seal.

[13. Relationship between the present invention and the embodiments]
The first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 of the substrate unit 700 in this embodiment are the discharge path of the present invention, and the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 in this embodiment are the discharge path of the present invention. The first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 in this embodiment are the detection sensors of the invention, and the base unit 710 (front base 711, rear base 712, ball path member 713) in this embodiment is the passage member of the invention. , respectively.

The notch 713q of the ball path member 713 directly above the release port 711b of the front base 711 in this embodiment is connected to the tool insertion port of the present invention, and the upper left shelf 713b and the upper right shelf of the ball path member 713 in this embodiment 713d and the lower shelf portion 713f are the shelf portion of the present invention, the plurality of inhibiting ribs 713o of the ball path member 713 in this embodiment are the security ribs of the present invention, and the plurality of notches of the ball path member 713 in this embodiment Reference numeral 713q corresponds to the garbage dropping port of the present invention, and security cover 714 in this embodiment corresponds to the lid member of the present invention.

[14. Characteristic effects of this embodiment]
According to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the game board 5 If the game ball B released from the slot is jammed, open the security cover 714 that closes the release port 711b of the front base 711, and use a flathead screwdriver to open the security cover 714 that closes the release port 711b of the plurality of notches 713q. By inserting a rod-shaped tool such as this and poking the jammed game ball B, the game ball B can be broken and the jam can be easily cleared. Thereafter, by closing the release port 711b with the security cover 714, a linear unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is not inserted into the first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702 from the release port 711b and the notch 713q. This can be prevented by the security cover 714. If an unauthorized tool is inserted into the first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702 from the notch 713q or the exit of the first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702, the tip of the tool is inserted into the first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702. And in order to extend the second ball path 702 from the entrance (ball socket 711a of the front base 711) to the game board 5, the tip of the unauthorized tool is brought into contact with the inner surface of the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702. Even if you try to move the unauthorized tool, if it comes into contact with any of the plurality of inhibiting ribs 713o extending downward from the ceiling of the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702, the movement of the unauthorized tool will be obstructed by the inhibiting rib 713o. can do. In this way, the security cover 714 and the plurality of inhibiting ribs 713o can prevent fraudulent acts on the game board 5 via the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702, and have a high deterrent effect against fraudulent acts. A pachinko machine 1 can be provided.

In addition, since the base unit 710 is formed transparently, when the game balls B become clogged in the first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702, the location where the balls are clogged can be easily seen from the outside. can be easily recognized, and the troubleshooting work can be facilitated, thereby reducing the maintenance burden on the game hall side.

In addition, in the base unit 710, since the discharge passage for discharging the game balls B is constituted by an independent first ball route 701 and a second ball route 702, a large number of game balls B are discharged from the game board 5 in a short time. When the game ball B is released, it is possible to distribute and discharge the game balls B to each of the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702, so that many of the game balls B can be distributed to one first ball path 701 or second ball path 702. It is possible to reduce the concentration of the game balls B, and it is possible to avoid the tendency for ball jams to occur due to the concentration of the game balls B. B can be quickly discharged to the island equipment side of the game hall (out receiving section, bucket, etc.).

In addition, since the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 can detect the game ball B flowing through the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702, the first ball path 701 and the second ball path Since the number of game balls B discharged from the path 702 can be counted, by comparing the number of game balls B discharged from the upstream game board 5, the number of game balls B ejected from the game board 5, the first ball path 701, and the first ball path 702 can be counted. It is possible to determine whether or not there is a fraudulent act on the two-ball path 702, and it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that has a high deterrent effect against fraudulent acts.

In addition, since the discharge path is constituted by the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 which are independent in the front and back direction, the game ball B (safe By releasing the game ball B (out ball) that was not accepted into the winning hole to different positions in the front and back directions, the game ball B that was accepted into the winning hole and the game ball B (out ball) that was not accepted into the winning hole are released. The game balls B that have not been accepted can be discharged through the first ball path 701 and second ball path 702 which are different from each other. Since the game board is equipped with a first ball sensor 703 and a second ball sensor 704 that can detect each game ball B flowing through the first ball path 701 and second ball path 702, the game board 5, the number of game balls B (safe balls) accepted into the winning hole and the number of game balls B (out balls) not accepted into the winning hole can be counted, so the game board By comparing the number of game balls B (safe balls) counted in step 5, it is possible to determine whether or not there is any fraudulent activity with respect to the prize opening of the game board 5, and it is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that has a high deterrent effect against fraudulent acts.

Furthermore, the number of game balls B released from the game board 5 can be counted by the first ball sensor 703 and second ball sensor 704 provided in the base unit 710 (ball path member 713). There is no need to provide a sensor, an electronic circuit, etc. for counting the number of game balls B released (discharged) to the outside on the board 5, and the cost of the game board 5 can be reduced.

In addition, since the security cover 714 that opens and closes the release port 711b is attached to the front base 711 so that the security cover 714 can rotate with a hinge, even if the security cover 714 opens the release port 711b, the security cover 714 can be opened by the hinge shaft of the hinge rotation. It is now attached to the front base 711. Therefore, in order to eliminate the clogging of game balls B in the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702, even if the security cover 714 is opened, the security cover 714 remains attached to the front base 711. This makes it difficult for the security cover 714 to be lost.

Further, the security cover 714 is provided on the lower surface of the base unit 710, and the security cover 714 is attached to the front base 711 so as to be hinge-rotatable. Since it is provided so as to extend to the right (horizontal direction), when clearing the clogging of the game balls B in the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702, the outer frame attached to the island equipment of the game hall is used. 2, the main body frame 4 is opened forward, the security cover 714 is opened, and a predetermined tool is inserted into the clearing port 711b to clear the ball jam. After that, after closing the security cover 714, the body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2. At this time, if the security cover 714 is open, the tip of the security cover 714 may be attached to the outer frame 2 (there is a risk of contact). Since the main body frame 4 cannot be closed due to contact with an object), the user can be made aware of forgetting to close the security cover 714, and the security cover 714 can be closed to reliably close the release port 711b. Furthermore, even if the security cover 714 is opened for some reason when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the security cover 714 will come into contact with the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 4 is opened. As a result, the security cover 714 rotates in the closing direction, so the main body frame 4 does not become stuck, allowing the main body frame 4 to be opened well, and preventing damage to the security cover 714 and the like. It can be prevented.

Furthermore, since a plurality of notches 713q are provided in the ball path member 713 forming the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702, dirt and debris that have entered the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 are prevented. , the dust attached to the game ball B can be discharged down the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 through the notch 713q, and the dust in the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 By reducing this, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of clogging of the game balls B due to dust, and it is possible to reduce the maintenance burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

In addition, since a part of the plurality of notches 713q is also used as a tool insertion port for inserting a tool to clear ball jams, there is no need to separately provide a tool insertion port, and the configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is improved. can be made simple, an increase in cost can be suppressed, and the same effects as described above can be achieved.

In addition, in the base unit 710, since the dust that has fallen through the notch 713q is prevented from touching the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704, the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 may be damaged by the adhesion of dust. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of a malfunction in the sensor 704, and it is possible to reliably detect the game balls B flowing through the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first member (playing area 5a, lower right guide passage 2530, gate 2003, etc.) forming the passage portion (game area 5a, lower right guide passage 2530, gate 2003, etc.) through which the game balls B circulate on the game board 5 Front component 1000, front member 2531, gate main body 2810, first member 1821, first member 1822, etc.) and second member (gaming panel 1100, center base plate 2540, gate sensor 2801, second member 1841, second 1842, etc.) of the first member (the front surface of the front component 1000, the flat plate portion 1821a, the flat plate portion 1822a, the front surface of the front member 2531, the front plate portion 2810a, etc.) 1021, pasting recess 2531a, pasting recess 2810b, mounting recess 1821b, mounting recess 1822b, etc.) are decorated with predetermined decorations (spec seal 1020, lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532, gate seal 2811, Since the decorative bodies 1801, 1802, 1803, etc.) are attached, the appearance of the first member can be improved by the decoration of the decorative bodies. In addition, since the adhesive part to which the decoration is attached is recessed from one side of the flat plate part, when the decoration is attached to the adhesive part, the adhesive part on the flat plate part of the first member Since the surrounding area surrounds the decorative body, the decorative body can be highlighted by being bordered by the area, and the decorative effect of the decorative body can be easily exhibited, making it possible to improve the pachinko machine. The appearance of 1 can be improved.

In addition, the adhesion parts (spec sticker pasting part 1021, The attachment recess 2531a, the attachment recess 2810b, the attachment recess 1821b, the attachment recess 1822b, etc.) are attached to the flat plate part (the front surface of the front component 1000, the flat plate part 1821a, the flat plate part 1822a, the front surface of the front member 2531, the front plate part 2810a, etc.) Since it is recessed from the bottom, the decorative body can be attached in the correct position by using the border between the flat plate part and the adhesive part as a guide, making it easier to attach the decorative body. It is possible to reduce the number of failures and suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

In this pachinko machine 1, the flat plate portion (the front surface of the front component 1000, the flat plate portion 1821a, Decorate the recessed adhesive parts (spec sticker pasting part 1021, pasting recess 2531a, pasting recess 2810b, mounting recess 1821b, mounting recess 1822b, etc.) from the flat plate part 1822a, the front surface of the front member 2531, the front plate part 2810a, etc. Since the parts (spec seal 1020, lower right guide passage decoration seal 2532, gate seal 2811, decoration 1801, decoration 1802, decoration 1803, etc.) are attached, remove the decoration from one side. Therefore, even if an attempt is made to insert a tool such as a flathead screwdriver between the decorative body and the bonding portion, the insertion of the tool will be blocked by the recessed peripheral wall of the bonding portion. In contrast, the separation holes (separation hole 1023, separation hole 1821d, separation hole 1822c, separation hole 2531b, separation hole 2810d, etc.) of the first member are provided in a portion where one side is closed by the decorative body. Therefore, a separation hole is provided in the bonding part where the decorative body is bonded. Therefore, by inserting a rod-shaped member into the separation hole from the other side and pressing the decorative body to one side, the bonding can be completed. The decorative body can be easily released from the attached part, and the decorative body can be easily removed from the recessed attached part. Therefore, when manufacturing the pachinko machine 1, if it is not possible to properly attach the flat plate part of the first member, a rod-shaped member is passed through the separation hole from the other side of the first member, and the decoration is attached using the tip of the rod-shaped member. By pressing from the other side, the attachment to the flat plate part can be easily released, so the decorative body can be easily removed from the flat plate part of the first member, and the decorative body can be reattached. . In addition, with the first member and the second member separated, a rod-shaped member is passed through the separation hole from the other side of the first member, and by pressing the decorative body from the other side with the tip of the rod-shaped member, the flat plate of the first member can be removed. Since the adhesion to the flat plate part can be easily released, the decorative body can be easily removed from the flat plate part, and the work of replacing the decorative body when changing the model can be facilitated. Furthermore, as described above, when the first member and the second member are separated, the decoration can be easily removed from the flat plate part using the separation hole. It is possible to make it easier to separate the materials, and the cost of disposing of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

Further, the flat plate portions (the front surface of the front component 1000, the flat plate portion 1821a, the flat plate portion 1822a, Since separation holes (separation holes 1023, separation holes 1821d, separation holes 1822c, separation holes 2531b, separation holes 2810d, etc.) are provided on the front surface of the front member 2531, front plate portion 2810a, etc., decorations can be placed on the flat plate portion. By adhering (spec seal 1020, lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532, gate seal 2811, decorative body 1801, decorative body 1802, decorative body 1803, etc.), the separation hole can be made difficult to see or hidden from one side. This makes it possible to suppress deterioration in appearance due to the separation hole, and to make it difficult for players to notice the existence of the separation hole, making it difficult for players to plan fraudulent activities through the separation hole. .

When assembled into the pachinko machine 1, the first members (front component 1000, first component, From the other side of the flat plate portion (the front surface of the front component 1000, the flat plate portion 1821a, the flat plate portion 1822a, etc.) of the first member 1821, the first member 1822, etc.), the separation hole (separation hole 1023, separation hole 1821d, separation hole 1822c) , etc.) by extending the extending portions (insertion pin 1022, boss portion 1821c, rib 1822d, etc.) to the second member (gaming panel 1100, second member 1841, second member 1842, etc.). , the second member is attached to the other side of the first member, and a closed space is formed in which the other side of the separation hole is cut off from the outside by the extending portion and the one side surface of the second member. It is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from being inserted into the separation hole from the outside of the extension part or the other side of the second member, and the hole is not passed through to the opposite side as in conventional pachinko machines. First, it is possible to prevent a linear illegal tool such as a piano wire from being inserted into the Pachinko machine 1 through the hole, and it is possible to prevent illegal acts from being performed.

Furthermore, since the second members (game panel 1100, second member 1841, second member 1842, etc.) make the other side of the separation holes (separation hole 1023, separation hole 1821d, separation hole 1822c, etc.) a closed space, , even if the unauthorized tool was inserted into the separation hole from one side through the decoration (spec seal 1020, decoration 1801, decoration 1802, decoration 1803, etc.), the tip of the unauthorized tool was blocked from the outside. It will be inserted into the closed space, and the extension parts (insertion pin 1022, boss part 1821c, rib 1822d, etc.) of the first member (front component member 1000, first member 1821, first member 1822, etc.) and the Since the two members can block insertion (intrusion) into the passage section (gaming area 5a, etc.) side and into the pachinko machine 1, unauthorized tools can be prevented from entering the pachinko machine 1 from one side through the separation hole. Intrusion can be prevented, and unauthorized acts can be prevented from being carried out through the separation holes and passages, and traces will be left on the decoration when the unauthorized tool penetrates the decoration, making it possible to prevent unauthorized acts. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can deter players from playing the game and has a high deterrent effect against fraudulent acts.

Furthermore, by inserting the positioning protrusion 1841b of the second member 1841 into the separation hole 1821d from the other side of the first member 1821, the first member 1821 and the second member 1841 can be positioned relative to each other. This effort can be simplified, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed. Furthermore, when the first member 1821 and the second member 1841 are positioned relative to each other by inserting the positioning protrusion 1841b into the separation hole 1821d, the other side of the separation hole 1821d can be closed by the positioning protrusion 1841b. 1821d itself can be made into the above-mentioned closed space, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that has the same effects as described above.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a passage member (such as the gaming area 5a, the lower right guide passage 2530, the detection hole of the gate sensor 2801, etc.) having a passage part through which the game balls B circulate ( The front members (front component 1000, front member 2531 of center accessory 2500, gate body 2810 of gate member 2800, etc.) provided on the front side of the game panel 1100, center base plate 2540, gate sensor 2801, etc.) Decorative bodies (spec sticker 1020, lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532, gate seal) are decorated with predetermined decorations on the front decorated parts (spec sticker pasting part 1021, pasting recess 2531a, pasting recess 2810b, etc.) 2811, etc.), the appearance of the passage member can be improved by the decoration of the decorative body. In addition, since the decorated part to which the decorative body is attached is recessed rearward relative to the depth of the decorative body in the front-rear direction, when the decorated body is attached to the decorated part, the decorated part of the front member is recessed. Since the surrounding parts protrude further forward than the front of the decorative body, the decorative body can be accentuated by being framed by the forwardly protruding portion of the front member, and the decorative effect of the decoration of the decorative body can be improved. The appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved by making it easier to perform the functions.

In addition, the parts to be decorated (the spec seal pasting part 1021, the pasting recess 2531a, the pasting recess 2810b, etc.) to which the decorations (the spec sticker 1020, the lower right guide passage decoration sticker 2532, the gate seal 2811, etc.) are attached are rearward. Because it is recessed, the decoration can be placed around the protruding portion of the front member (front component 1000, front member 2531 of the center accessory 2500, gate body 2810 of the gate member 2800, etc.) as a guide. By adhering, it is possible to make it easier to attach the decoration to the correct position, to reduce failures in attachment of the decoration, and to suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

In this pachinko machine 1, the parts to be decorated (the spec sticker pasting part 1021, the pasting recess 2531a, the pasting recess 2810b, etc.) are recessed rearward, so that when the decorative body (spec seal 1020, lower right guide passage decoration seal 2532, gate seal 2811, etc.) is attached to the decorated part, the decorative body and the cover are recessed. Since the contact surface with the decorative part is at a recessed position, even if an attempt is made to remove the decorative body adhered to the decorated part, it is difficult to hook the decorative body from the front side, and it takes time and effort to remove it. On the other hand, since separation holes (separation hole 1023, separation hole 2531b, separation hole 2810d, etc.) are provided in the part to be decorated, a rod-shaped member can be passed through the separation hole from the rear of the front member and the decoration body can be pressed forward. By doing so, the adhesion to the decorated part can be easily released, and the decorative body can be easily removed from the decorated part. Therefore, if it is not possible to properly attach the decoration to the decorated part of the front member during manufacturing, a rod-shaped member is passed through the separation hole from the rear of the front member, and its tip presses the decoration from the rear. By doing so, the adhesion to the decorated part can be easily released, so the decorative body can be easily removed from the decorated part, and the decorative body can be reattached.

In addition, the front members (the front component 1000, the front member 2531 of the center accessory 2500, the gate body 2810 of the gate member 2800, etc.) and the passage members (the game panel 1100, the center base plate 2540, the gate sensor 2801, etc.) In the separated state, pass the rod-like member from the rear of the front member through the separation holes (separation hole 1023, separation hole 2531b, separation hole 2810d, etc.), and use the tip of the rod-like member to attach the decoration (spec seal 1020, lower right guide passage decoration seal 2532). , gate seal 2811, etc.) from the rear, it is possible to easily release the adhesion from the part to be decorated (spec sticker pasting part 1021, pasting recess 2531a, pasting recess 2810b, etc.). The decoration can be easily removed from the decoration part, and the work of replacing the decoration when changing models can be facilitated. Furthermore, as described above, when the front member and the passage member are separated, the decoration body can be easily removed from the decorated part using the separation hole. This makes it easier to separate each pachinko machine 1, and the cost of disposing of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

In addition, since separation holes (separation hole 1023, separation hole 2531b, separation hole 2810d, etc.) are provided in the decorated part (spec sticker pasting part 1021, pasting recess 2531a, pasting recess 2810b, etc.), the decorated part By attaching decorations (spec seal 1020, lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532, gate seal 2811, etc.), the separation hole can be made difficult to see from the front or hidden, thereby suppressing deterioration in appearance due to the separation hole. At the same time, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the existence of the separation hole, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to plan fraudulent activities through the separation hole.

When assembled into the pachinko machine 1, the front member (front component 1000, center role A separation hole (separation hole 1023, separation hole 2531b, separation hole 2810d, etc.) are closed from the rear, and unlike conventional pachinko machines, there are no holes that pass through to the rear, so the piano wire can be inserted through the holes. It is possible to avoid inserting such a linear illegal tool into the pachinko machine 1, and it is possible to prevent illegal acts from being performed.

In addition, since the separation holes (separation hole 1023, separation hole 2531b, separation hole 2810d, etc.) are closed from the rear by passage members (game panel 1100, center base plate 2540, gate sensor 2801, etc.), unauthorized tools Even if it is inserted into the separation hole from the front through the decorative body (spec seal 1020, lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532, gate seal 2811, etc.), the passage member prevents further insertion (intrusion) to the rear. This prevents unauthorized tools from entering from the front through the separation hole into the passage section (game area 5a, lower right guide passage 2530, detection hole (gate 2003) of gate sensor 2801, etc.). In addition to being able to prevent fraudulent acts from being carried out, it also leaves traces on the decorative body when the fraudulent tool pierces the decorative body, making it possible to deter people from committing fraudulent acts and preventing fraudulent acts. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that has a high deterrent force against.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the back and front presentation unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 on the game board 5 is equipped with an LED 3176 for displaying the light guide plate 3110 and the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 by emitting light. In front of the light guide plate lower left decorative board 3174 and light guide plate lower right decorative board 3175, there are a back front lower middle decorative board 3168, a back front lower left inner decorative board 3169, and a back front lower left outer decorative board in the back front lower direction unit 3160. Decorative board 3170, back front lower right inner decorative board 3171, back front lower right outer decorative board 3161, back front lower middle decorative body 3161 that can be decorated with light emitting light using LEDs that emit light forward that are mounted on the back front lower right outer decorative board 3172, etc. A left inner decorative body 3163, a back front lower left outer decorative body 3164, a back front lower right inner decorative body 3165, a back front lower right outer decorative body 3166, etc. are provided, and behind the back front lower middle decorative body 3161, etc. By providing the LED 3176 (light guide plate lower left decorative board 3174 and light guide plate lower right decorative board 3175), the LED 3176 can be made invisible (hidden) from the player by the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 etc. However, the presence of the LED 3176, that is, the light guide plate 3110, can be made difficult to notice. In this state, the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 is displayed with light emission by the LED 3176, and the back front lower middle decoration body 3161 etc. is decorated with light emission by the light emission of the LED mounted on the back front lower middle decoration board 3168 etc. Then, the light from the LED 3176 is the light reflected forward by the light guide plate 3110, whereas the light from the LEDs on the back front lower middle decorative board 3168 etc. is the light irradiated directly forward. The back front lower middle decorative body 3161 etc. which are decorated with luminescence can be made to shine brighter than the second picture 3112 of the light guide plate 3110, and the player's attention is strongly attracted to the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 etc. can be done. Since the second picture 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 that is displayed as a light-emitting device extends upward from a predetermined position (a position slightly above) close to the back front lower middle decoration body 3161 etc. that is decorated with light-emitting light, This can strongly mislead the player into thinking that the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 is displayed as a light source using the light from the back, front, lower and middle decorations 3161 etc. that are decorated with light. A light emitting effect using a light guide plate 3110, which has never been seen in a pachinko machine up to now, can be shown to the player, and it is possible to entertain the player and prevent the player from losing interest.

In addition, since the light guide plate lower left decorative board 3174, the light guide plate lower right decorative board 3175, the back front lower middle decorative body 3161, etc. are provided in front of the light guide plate 3110, the light guide plate lower left decorative board 3174 and the light guide plate The light from the LED mounted on the lower right decorative board 3175 illuminates the light guide plate 3110, and the transparent light guide plate 3110 can be prevented from being seen by the player. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can fully exhibit the performance effect of the light emitting display such as 3112, and can reliably achieve the above-mentioned effects.

In addition, since a light-transmitting back front lower middle decorative body 3161 and the like are provided in front of the light guide plate lower left decorative board 3174 and the light guide plate lower right decorative board 3175, the light guide plate lower left decorative board 3174 and the light guide plate When the LED mounted on the lower right decorative board 3175 is made to emit light, the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 etc. can be decorated with light emitting light, so in addition to the effect of the light emitting display of the second pattern 3112 etc. of the light guide plate 3110. , back, front, lower and middle decorations 3161, etc. can also be shown to the player, and the variety of effects can make it difficult for the player to get bored and prevent the player from losing interest.

Furthermore, when the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 is displayed by emitting light and the LEDs mounted on the lower left decorative board 3174 and the lower right decorative board 3175 of the light guide plate are made to emit light, as described above, the lower left of the light guide plate is displayed. The LEDs mounted on the decorative board 3174 and the light guide plate lower right decorative board 3175 cause the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 etc. to shine brightly, attracting the player's attention. At the same time, the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 extending upward from a predetermined position above the back front lower middle decoration 3161 attracts the player's attention to the back front lower middle decoration. 3161 etc., the light can be directed upward through the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 to where the second pattern 3112 extends. Therefore, a part of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, a rear upper movable decorative body 3210 that moves up and down in the upper rear effect unit 3200, etc. are provided at the upper end of the second pattern 3112 extending. , depending on whether or not further effects (effect images, movable effects, etc.) are performed at the end of the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110, the player can be excited and excited. This can prevent a decline in interest.

In addition, the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 is composed of a plurality of line groups 3114 including a set of five lines 3113 extending upward from a predetermined position, and each line 3113 independently emits light. In addition, since LEDs 3176 (first LED 3176a to fifth LED 3176e) are provided to correspond to each line 3113, the first LED 3176a to fifth LED 3176e of the LED group 3177 are made to emit light in order. The displayed line 3113 changes to create a pseudo-animation. Since the back front lower middle decoration body 3161 is provided at a lower position close to the lower end position (predetermined position) of the plurality of lines 3113, the back side where the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 is decorated with luminescence. Since the light from the front and lower middle decorations 3161 etc. can be used as a light source to make it appear as if it is moving, it can give a strong impact to the players and make them think that something good is going to happen. Therefore, it is possible to increase expectations for the game and suppress a decline in interest.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the lottery result of the special lottery (special lottery result) is drawn when the starting condition is satisfied by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. Then, in the function display unit 1400A and the function display unit 1400B, after the special symbol is variably displayed by lighting and blinking the plurality of LEDs 1401 of the function display board 1402 and the left LED 1411a and right LED 1411b of the function display board 1411, A special symbol indicating a special lottery result is displayed by a combination of turning on and off the plurality of LEDs 1401, the left LED 1411a, and the right LED 1411b. At this time, the light from the plurality of LEDs 1401, the left LED 1411a, and the right LED 1411b is partially emitted forward by the plurality of display holes 1405a in the front reflector 1405 and the plurality of display holes 1414a in the front reflector 1414, respectively. is emitted only to one eye of the player, and at least a portion of the remaining part is emitted only to the other eye of the player, so that the player can see it with both eyes at the same time. As a result, it is possible to see the light from all the LEDs 1401, the left LED 1411a, and the right LED 1411b, so it is possible to visually check whether the multiple LEDs 1401, the left LED 1411a, and the right LED 1411b are turned on or off, etc. The special design by the LED 1401, the left LED 1411a, and the right LED 1411b can be clearly seen, and the display function by the plurality of LEDs 1401, the left LED 1411a, and the right LED 1411b can be exhibited without inferiority.

Then, when the plurality of LEDs 1401, the left LED 1411a, and the right LED 1411b (function display unit 1400A and function display unit 1400B) are photographed using a digital camera or a mobile phone camera, as described above, when viewed with both eyes of the player, all Since the light from the LED 1401, the left LED 1411a, and the right LED 1411b is made visible, a monocular camera can only take a picture of one of the eyes, and the light emitting status of all the LEDs 1401, left LED 1411a, and right LED 1411b can be seen. This can make it difficult to photograph accurately. Therefore, the light emitting conditions of the plurality of LEDs 1401, the left LED 1411a, and the right LED 1411b cannot be accurately captured, so special symbols that generate advantageous gaming conditions (for example, "jackpot" games) that are advantageous to the player are not displayed. It is possible to make it impossible to easily determine whether or not there is a special lottery, and to suppress a decrease in interest by keeping the performance suggesting the lottery result of the special lottery enjoyable until the end.

Further, in the function display unit 1400A, a part of the plurality of display holes 1405a in the front reflector 1405 is tilted in the front-rear direction toward the position of one eye of the player, and the remaining part is tilted toward the position of one eye of the player. One is inclined in the front-rear direction and the other is oriented straight in the front-rear direction. As a result, in addition to the same effects as described above, due to the inclination of the display hole 1405a, the light from all the LEDs 1401 can be seen in good condition from players other than those seated in the front of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for other players to understand the gaming situation, and it is possible to reduce the possibility of other players looking into the game. You can enjoy playing games without worrying.

In addition, in the function display unit 1400B, a plurality of left LEDs 1411a and a plurality of right LEDs 1411b mounted on the function display board 1411 are separated by a predetermined distance (40 mm to 80 mm) in the left-right direction, and Since the front reflector 1414 is provided with a plurality of display holes 1414a, the same effect as described above can be achieved.In addition, since each display hole 1414a is oriented straight in the front-rear direction, a plurality of display holes 1414a can be provided. The hole 1414a can be easily removed when molded, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

Furthermore, in the function display unit 1400C, the light from the plurality of LEDs 1421a mounted on the function display board 1421 can be seen from the player side through the transparent light guide plate 1423, so that the special symbols by the plurality of LEDs 1421a can be played in good condition. can be shown to others. At this time, when invisible light is irradiated from the invisible light LED 1424a to the side surface of the light guide plate 1423, the invisible light incident from the side surface is emitted from the light guide plate 1423 toward the player in front. Since the emitted invisible light cannot be seen by the player, the special symbols formed by the plurality of LEDs 1421a can be clearly seen through the light guide plate 1423, and the display function by the plurality of LEDs 1421a can be equally demonstrated. If you take a picture from the front with a digital camera or the like while the invisible light LED 1424a is emitting light, depending on the model of the digital camera, invisible light emitted forward from the light guide plate 1423 will be captured. By shining brightly in the photograph, the light from the plurality of LEDs 1421a provided at the rear becomes difficult to photograph, making it difficult to distinguish the light emission status of the plurality of LEDs 1421a, and ensuring the pachinko machine 1 that achieves the above-mentioned effects. It can be realized.

Further, in the function display unit 1400 or the like, the main control board 1310 may cause a plurality of LEDs to blink at a speed that allows the player to recognize that the special symbol is lit. As a result, even if the multiple LEDs of the function display unit 1400 are blinked at a predetermined speed by the main control board 1310, they appear to be lit from the player's perspective, so the special symbols can be clearly displayed using the multiple LEDs. The display function of the plurality of LEDs can be fully demonstrated. If you take a picture of the LED that is blinking at a predetermined speed by the main control board 1310 with a digital camera, depending on the shutter speed, the LED may appear to be off even though it is on, so the same situation ( Even if you take a picture of multiple LEDs that are visible in the photo (status), the LEDs may appear lit or off depending on the timing of the shutter release, making it difficult to discern the light emission status of the multiple LEDs. , it is possible to reliably realize the pachinko machine 1 that exhibits the above-mentioned functions and effects. It should be noted that the predetermined speed at which the LEDs are blinked by the main control board 1310 is preferably within the range of 30Hz to 100Hz; if the blinking speed is slower than this, the LEDs will no longer appear to be lit and the special symbol will change. This is because the light appears to be blinking, as if the light is on, and if the blinking speed is faster than this, the light will appear lit when the photo is taken.

Furthermore, a high-brightness LED that can emit light of higher brightness forward than the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 and the like may be provided close to the function display unit 1400 and the like. As a result, when a high-brightness LED installed close to the function display unit 1400 etc. is emitted, the high-brightness light from the LED makes the user feel dazzling, but the dynamic range allows the player (human) to feel the brightness. Since the area is wide, the light from the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 etc. can be seen even though it is dazzling, so the special symbol displayed on the function display unit 1400 etc. can be recognized. The display function can be fully demonstrated. If you take a picture of the function display unit 1400 etc. with a digital camera while the high-brightness LED is emitting light, the light from the high-brightness LED will cause halation because the dynamic range of the brightness of a digital camera is narrower than that of a human. occurs, and the area around the LED is blown out, making it possible to make part of the function display unit 1400 etc. invisible. Therefore, it is possible to make the light emission status of the plurality of LEDs in the function display unit 1400 etc. unclear, and it is possible to realize the pachinko machine 1 that has the same effects as described above.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the game board 5A, a plurality of decorations (back front left first decoration 3124, back The respective decorative parts (back front left logo decoration part 3121, back front left upper logo decoration part 3122, and back front left decoration part 3125) (front left second decoration part 3125, back front left third decoration part 3126, and back front left decoration base 3127) In a normal state where the left sub-decoration part 3123) is not decorated with light emitting means (LEDs mounted on the back front left decorative board 3128, etc.), it is provided in front of the back front left decoration unit 3120. The translucent, opaque, white panel board 1110A makes the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122 of the back front left decoration unit 3120 invisible and difficult to recognize, making it difficult for players to recognize the back front upper left corner. The presence of the logo decoration part 3122 and the like can be made difficult to notice, and the panel board 1110A of the game panel 1100 can be made to look brighter due to the white color, making the pachinko machine 1 stand out.

Then, as the game progresses, the plurality of LEDs of the back front left decoration unit 3120 appropriately illuminate the back front upper left logo decoration portion 3122, etc., and the back front left upper left logo decoration portion 3122 etc. that have been decorated with light emitting light emit light. will be irradiated forward through the translucent panel board 1110A, and the light-emitting decorations such as the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122 will be reflected on the white panel board 1110A. The light-emitting decorations such as the front upper left logo decoration part 3122 can be shown to the player, and the players can enjoy the light-emitting decorations such as the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest. Furthermore, by decorating the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122 etc. of the back front left decoration unit 3120 with light emitting decoration, it is possible to make the player aware of the existence of the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122 etc. which could not have been foreseen. As a result, the player can be greatly surprised and the player can be strongly made to think that a chance has arrived, and the player can be shown a light-emitting display with a high production effect, which can entertain the player. It is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, since the color of the opaque panel board 1110A having light-transmitting properties is white, a plurality of decorative bodies (back front left first decorative body 3124, back front left decorative body 3124, back front left decorative body 3124, back front left decorative body 3120, The respective decorative parts (first front left logo decoration part 3124c, first back left logo decoration part 3124d, first back left logo decoration part 3124c) One upper left logo decoration part 3124e, first left sub decoration part 3124f, second back left logo decoration part 3125d, second upper left logo decoration part 3125e, second left sub decoration part 3125f, third back left logo decoration part 3126d, The luminescent colors decorated in the three upper left logo decoration parts 3126e, the third left sub decoration part 3126f, and the base left upper logo decoration part 3127d can be shown to the player as they are through the panel board 1110A. In addition, it is possible to show the player a light-emitting effect using various colors, and it is also possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the various light-emitting effects, thereby suppressing a decrease in the player's interest.

In addition, decorative parts having mutually related shapes ("first front left logo decoration part 3124c, first back left logo decoration part 3124d, second back left logo decoration part 3125d, third back left logo decoration part 3126d", "first front left logo decoration part 3124c", "first back left logo decoration part 3124d", 1 upper left logo decoration part 3124e, 2nd upper left logo decoration part 3125e, 3rd upper left logo decoration part 3126e, base upper left logo decoration part 3127d, 1st left sub-decoration part 3124f, 2nd left sub-decoration part 3125f, 3rd A plurality of decorative bodies (back front left first decorative body 3124, back front left second decorative body 3125, back front left third decorative body 3126, and back front left decorative body The bases 3127) are overlapped in the front and back direction, and each decorative part is decorated with light emitting light independently using the light emitting means (LEDs of the back front left decorative board 3128, the back front upper left decorative board 3129, and the back front lower left decorative board 3130). Since the position of each decorative part in the front and back direction is different, if each decorative part is decorated with light, it is possible to show the player a light-emitting effect with a sense of depth. It is possible to suppress a decline in interest by entertaining people.

Further, decorations related to each other are provided on each of the plurality of decorative bodies (first back left decorative body 3124, second front left decorative body 3125, third front left decorative body 3126, and front left decorative body base 3127). section ("first front left logo decoration section 3124c, first back left logo decoration section 3124d, second back left logo decoration section 3125d, third back left logo decoration section 3126d", "first upper left logo decoration section 3124e, 2 upper left logo decoration part 3125e, 3rd upper left logo decoration part 3126e, base upper left logo decoration part 3127d, 1st left sub decoration part 3124f, 2nd left sub decoration part 3125f, 3rd left sub decoration part 3126f). Therefore, the decorative parts can be illuminated in an appropriate order using the light-emitting means (LEDs of the back front left decorative board 3128, the back front upper left decorative board 3129, and the back front lower left decorative board 3130), allowing for dynamic light emission. It is possible to show the effects to the players, to strongly attract the interest of the players, and to make the players think that something good is going to happen, increasing their expectations for the game. It is possible to suppress a decline in interest by increasing the level of interest.

Further, a plurality of decorative bodies (front front left first decorative body 3124, second front left decorative body 3125, third front left decorative body 3126, and front left decorative body base 3127) are provided respectively. Decorative parts ("first front left logo decoration part 3124c, first back left logo decoration part 3124d, second back left logo decoration part 3125d, third back left logo decoration part 3126d", "first upper left logo decoration part 3124e, 2nd upper left logo decoration part 3125e, 3rd upper left logo decoration part 3126e, base upper left logo decoration part 3127d, 1st left sub decoration part 3124f, 2nd left sub decoration part 3125f, 3rd left sub decoration part 3126f) , each can be decorated with light emission independently by means of light emitting means (LEDs of the back front left decorative board 3128, the back front upper left decorative board 3129, and the back front lower left decorative board 3130). By appropriately combining the decorative parts, it is possible to present a variety of light emitting effects to the players, making it difficult for the players to get bored and suppressing a drop in interest. In addition, since each decorative part can be decorated with light emission independently, the player can create an advantageous gaming state (for example, a "jackpot" gaming state) by combining the decorative parts that are decorated with light as the game progresses. ) can be made to suggest to the player the degree of expectation that this will occur.

In addition, each decorative body of the back front left decorative unit 3120 (back front left first decorative body 3124, back front left second decorative body 3125, back front left third decorative body 3126, and back front left decorative body base 3127) , a light-shielding part (partition decorative part 3124a, Since the dividing decorative part 3125c and the dividing decorative part 3126c) are provided, the light for making one decorative part emit light is blocked by the light shielding part from being irradiated to the other decorative part, and the other decorative part emits light. Decoration can be prevented, and only one (desired) decoration part can be decorated with light. Therefore, since a plurality of decorative parts provided on one decoration body can be decorated with light emission independently, a variety of light-emitting effects can be created by making the appropriate decorative parts light-emitting decoration according to the progress of the game. can be shown to the players, making it difficult for the players to get bored and suppressing a drop in interest.

In addition, each decorative body of the back front left decorative unit 3120 (back front left first decorative body 3124, back front left second decorative body 3125, back front left third decorative body 3126, and back front left decorative body base 3127) , a plurality of decorative parts (back front left logo decoration part 3121, back front upper left logo decoration part 3122, and back front left sub decoration part 3123) are provided at different positions, and a light shielding part (dividing decorative part 3124a) is provided between them. , the dividing decorative part 3125c, and the dividing decorative part 3126c) are provided so that each can be decorated with light emission independently, so that the progress of the game can be improved by making each decorative part of the decorative body decorated in a completely different manner. It is possible to show the players different types of light-emitting decorations depending on the game, and it is possible to strongly attract the players' interest, and it is also possible to entertain the players with the light-emitting effects, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game. can be done.

Furthermore, each decorative body of the back front left decorative unit 3120 (back front left first decorative body 3124, back front left second decorative body 3125, back front left third decorative body 3126, and back front left decorative body base 3127) , a hole-shaped light-shielding part (dividing decorative part 3124a, dividing decorative part 3125c) is provided between the plurality of decorative parts (back front left logo decorative part 3121, back front upper left logo decorative part 3122, and back front left sub-decorative part 3123). , a dividing decorative part 3126c) is provided, so the light for making one decorative part luminescent decoration will be emitted from a part of the light shielding part to the outside. can be done. Therefore, by forming the light-shielding part in a predetermined shape, the light-emitting decoration of the light-shielding part can be shown to the player in addition to the light-emitting decoration of the decorative part, and a more diverse light-emitting effect can be performed.

In addition, since the back front left first decorative body 3124 of the back front left decorative unit 3120 has a penetrating decorative part 3124b that penetrates back and forth in a predetermined shape, the decorative part When the (first front left logo decoration part 3124c, first back left logo decoration part 3124d, first upper left logo decoration part 3124e, first left sub decoration part 3124f) is decorated with light, the surrounding surface of the penetrating decoration part 3124b will emit light. Therefore, in addition to the light-emitting decoration of the decoration part, the light-emitting decoration of the penetrating decoration part 3124b can also be shown to the player, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the game board 5B, due to changes in the environment such as temperature and humidity, the cell 1140 provided at the rear of the transparent panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 may be damaged by the panel board 1110. Since the cell 1140 is provided in a state where it can expand and contract with respect to the panel board 1110, the cell 1140 can freely expand and contract, even if the environment such as temperature and humidity changes. No wrinkles or cracks occur in the cells 1140, and the decorative effect of the cells 1140 can be maintained. At this time, the cell 1140 is provided behind a part of the panel board 1110 in the opposite direction to the predetermined direction where the opening 1112 to which the center accessory 2500 is attached is biased, that is, behind a wide part of the panel board 1110. Therefore, the pattern of the cell 1140 that can be seen through the transparent panel board 1110 can be easily seen by the player, and the decorative effect of the cell 1140 can be fully exhibited. The appearance of the game area 5a can be improved by the patterns, and it is possible to entertain the players and suppress a decrease in interest.

In addition, the cells 1140 are provided in the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 in an expandable state, and are not pasted on the game panel (panel board) as in the past, so the effort for decorating the transparent panel board 1110 is simplified. Therefore, an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed. Specifically, in the panel board 1110 to be cut, the cells 1140 can be provided after the cutting process, so that the cells 1140 are not damaged during the cutting process of the panel board 1110. Further, the cut surface is not roughened due to the difference in materials between the panel board 1110 and the cell 1140, and a finishing step after cutting can be omitted. On the other hand, in a game panel (panel board) formed by cutting or injection molding to have an opening, the cells 1140 are not pasted, so the effort required for pasting can be eliminated. Therefore, the cell 1140 can be provided behind the transparent panel board 1110 more easily than in the conventional technology, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the cells 1140 are provided behind a part of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100, the amount of cells 1140 used is reduced compared to the case where the cells 1140 are provided on the entire surface of the panel board 1110. can be reduced, and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

In addition, since the cells 1140 are removable from the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100, by attaching or replacing the cells 1140 with different designs to the panel board 1110, you can ) It is possible to easily respond to changes in specifications and models, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

In addition, since the cell 1140 can be decorated with light by emitting light from various LEDs provided in the back and front presentation unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, the pattern of the cell 1140 that can be seen through the panel board 1110 of the transparent game panel 1100 will emit light. By being decorated, the appearance of the inside of the gaming area 5a can be improved, and the player's attention can be strongly attracted to the inside of the gaming area 5a, and the inside of the gaming area 5a can be brightened. The game balls B circulating within the area 5a can be easily seen.

Furthermore, the cells 1140 provided at the rear of the transparent panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 can be decorated with light by various LEDs provided in the back and front presentation unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. The light-emitting decoration can illuminate the game ball B circulating in the game area 5a from behind to make it look like a silhouette, and by making the game ball B easier to see, it is possible to enjoy the movement of the game ball B and add entertainment. The impact force of the game ball B can be finely adjusted in order to suppress the drop and to make it easier to see the game ball B circulating in the game area 5a by showing it in silhouette. It can be made easier, and the original game of the pachinko machine 1 in which the driving operation of the game ball B is devised can be enjoyed.

Furthermore, since the cell 1140 is provided behind a part of the transparent panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100, when the player looks inside the game area 5a, it becomes easier to focus on the picture in the cell 1140. Therefore, just by looking at the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110), the focus will naturally be on the game balls B circulating within the gaming area 5a, and the gaming balls B circulating within the gaming area 5a will be visually recognized. It is possible to make the movement of the game ball B more enjoyable and to suppress a decrease in interest.

In addition, since a cell 1140 with a predetermined pattern is provided at the rear of a part of the transparent panel board 1110, the back-front effect of the back unit 3000 provided at the rear is changed depending on the pattern of the cell 1140. Decorative bodies and the like of the unit 3100 can be hidden from the player side. Therefore, when the decoration provided behind the cell 1140 is not decorated with light, the pattern of the cell 1140 can prevent the player from noticing the existence of the decoration. Then, when the decoration is decorated with light as the game progresses, the cell 1140 is decorated with light from the decoration, so the presence of the decoration that could not have been predicted by the player. This makes it possible to make the player aware of this, greatly surprising the player, making the player feel strongly that an opportunity has arrived, and making it possible to show the player a light-emitting production with a higher production effect. It is possible to entertain the players and suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, as described above, since the back left movable decorative body 3301 of the back rear lower production unit 3300 as a movable decorative body provided at the rear can be hidden from the player's view by the cell 1140, As the game progresses, the back left movable decorative body 3301 is moved from a state where it is invisible due to the cell 1140 to a state where it is visible through the opening 1112 penetrating the front and back of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100. As a result, a movable effect in which the back left movable decorative body 3301 appears according to the progress of the game can be shown. Therefore, the appearance of the back left movable decorative body 3301 etc. can indicate to the player that a chance has arrived, so that an advantageous gaming state in which the player has an advantage over the player (for example, It is possible to make the player feel strongly that a "big hit" game state will occur, and it is possible to increase expectations for the game and suppress a drop in interest.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the game board 5A, the panel board 1110A of the game panel 1100 in which the game area 5a through which the game balls B circulate is provided in front is made of an opaque milky white color having translucency. Therefore, the inside of the game area 5a can be made to appear brighter, and the game balls B circulating inside the game area 5a can be easily seen, and the LEDs and effect display device 1600 etc. provided in the pachinko machine 1 can be When the game panel 1100 is irradiated with light, light from lighting in the game hall where this pachinko machine 1 is installed, light from other game machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, etc. By diffusing in the panel board 1110A of the game panel 1100, the panel board 1110A can be made to appear dimly bright and self-luminous. Furthermore, when the plurality of LEDs 1130a of the panel decorative board 1130 that can irradiate light onto the peripheral surface of the panel board 1110A are emitted, the light is diffused by the opaque, milky-white panel board 1110A that has translucency. Therefore, the panel board 1110A of the game panel 1100 can be decorated with soft, soft light emitting light like a fluorescent lamp for indirect lighting, making it possible to brighten the inside of the game area 5a and reducing the glare caused by the LEDs 1130a. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is easy on the eyes of players. Therefore, compared to conventional pachinko machines that use plywood or transparent plates as the game panel (panel board), this machine has a game area 5a that emits light like a fluorescent light, which has never been seen before. Since the pachinko machine 1 can be shown to the player, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the gaming panel 1100 (gaming area 5a), and the player can feel that something good is going to happen, so that the player can enjoy the game. To increase the sense of anticipation, and to make the game balls B circulating in the game area 5a look like silhouettes due to the light from the rear panel board 1110A, thereby making the game balls B easy to visually recognize. This makes it possible to enjoy the movement of the game ball B and suppress a decline in interest.

Furthermore, if a decorative sheet (decorative film) (not shown) is provided on the front surface of the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100, the milky white panel plate 1110A can improve the coloring of the pattern applied to the decorative film. The appearance of the inside of the game area 5a can be improved by decoration of the patterns, and the patterns of the decorative film can be illuminated and decorated through the panel board 1110A of the game panel 1100 by emitting light from the LEDs 1130a of the panel decoration board 1130. Therefore, the appearance of the gaming area 5a can be further improved, and a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players can be provided.

In addition, when a decorative film is provided on the front surface of the panel board 1110A of the game panel 1100, the area decorated with light emitted by the LEDs 1130a etc. tends to become unclear due to the opaque panel board 1110A having translucency. This can be achieved by devising the pattern (or by devising the placement of the LED 1130a, etc.) so that the area where the luminescent decoration becomes unclear is hidden by a part of the decorative film pattern. The decoration can be clearly seen and the decorative effect can be further enhanced.

Furthermore, when pasting a decorative film on the front surface of the panel board 1110A of the game panel 1100, by using a material with excellent wear resistance as the decorative film, the decorative film can prevent the distribution of game balls B from occurring on the panel board. 1110A can be protected. Thereby, it is not necessary to use a material with high wear resistance as the material for the panel board 1110A, and a low-grade, inexpensive material can be used, and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

Furthermore, when a decorative film is provided on the rear surface of the panel board 1110A of the game panel 1100, the shadow of the design of the decorative film is reflected on the panel board 1110A due to the light irradiated from the rear of the decorative film to the front. The pattern can be shown to the player, and the player can see a light-emitting effect in which the pattern, characters, etc. of the minor injury film are projected onto the panel board 1110A from behind, so that when the effect is executed, the player can see the light emitting effect. This can make the player think that something good is going to happen, and can heighten expectations for the game and suppress a decline in interest. Alternatively, as the light-emitting effect, a decorative film may be used to project a pattern, text, etc. that encourages "hitting right", operation of the effect operation section 301, etc. from the rear onto the panel board 1110A of the game panel 1100, so that the game ball B It is possible to enjoy the typing operation of , the operation of the performance operation section 301 in the player participation type performance, etc., and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, when a decorative film is provided on both the front and rear surfaces of the panel board 1110A of the game panel 1100, when light is irradiated onto the side surface of the panel board 1110A using the LED 1130a of the panel decoration board 1130, the panel When the board 1110A emits light, the decorative film on the front side is decorated with light, allowing the player to enjoy the pattern on the decorative film on the front side. On the other hand, when light is irradiated from the back to the front of the game panel 1100 using an LED or the like, the shadow of the pattern on the decorative film on the rear side is reflected on the panel board 1110A, and the shadow overlaps with the pattern on the decorative film on the front side. The pattern of the decorative film on the side will appear to change. As a result, a variety of light emitting effects can be shown to the players, making it difficult for the players to get bored and suppressing a drop in interest.

Furthermore, the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122 of the back front left decoration unit 3120 and the back front upper right logo decoration part 3142 of the back front right decoration unit 3140 are provided at the rear of the translucent opaque milky white panel board 1110A. When the light is decorated with light as the game progresses, the light passes through the panel board 1110A of the game panel 1100 to some extent forward (to the player's side). It can be partially decorated with light in the same manner as the decoration part 3122 and the back front upper right logo decoration part 3142, and the existence of the back front left upper logo decoration part 3122 and the back front upper right logo decoration part 3142 provided at the rear can be made visible. It is possible to make the player aware of this. Therefore, by being able to see the light-emitting decorations of the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122 and the back front upper right logo decoration part 3142 through the panel board 1110A of the game panel 1100, we believe that something good will happen to the players. This can increase expectations for the game and prevent a decline in interest.

In addition, since the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122 and the back front upper right logo decoration part 3142 provided at the rear of the panel board 1110A of the game panel 1100 are formed of a colorless and transparent material, the panel board 1110A has a milky white color. Since it is white in color, the color of the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122 and the back front upper right logo decoration part 3142 can be assimilated with the color of the panel board 1110A and cannot be seen from the front. The presence of the upper left logo decoration part 3122 and the back front upper right logo decoration part 3142 can be prevented from being noticed. Then, when the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122 and the back front upper right logo decoration part 3142 are decorated with light, the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122 and the back front right upper logo decoration part 3142 are decorated with light through the panel board 1110A as described above. can be seen, so by noticing the existence of the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122 and the back front upper right logo decoration part 3142, which could not have been predicted, the player can be greatly surprised, and the player can feel that an opportunity has arrived. It is possible to make the player think strongly, and also to show the player a light emission performance with a higher performance effect, to entertain the player and to suppress a decrease in interest.

In addition, the back left movable decorative body 3301 and the back rear right movable decorative body 3302 of the back rear lower production unit 3300 are located behind the opaque and milky white panel board 1110A in the normal state, making them invisible from the front. As the game progresses, the panel board 1110A moves to the rear part of the opening 1112, and becomes visible through the opening 1112, so that the player can see the back left side of the panel board 1110A. A movable effect in which the movable decorative body 3301 and the rear right movable decorative body 3302 appear can be shown. Therefore, the appearance of the back left movable decorative body 3301 and the back back right movable decorative body 3302 can suggest to the player that a chance has arrived, which gives the player an advantage over the player. It is possible to make the player feel strongly that an advantageous gaming state (for example, a "jackpot" gaming state) will occur, and it is possible to increase expectations for the game and suppress a decline in interest.

Furthermore, by enabling the back left movable decorative body 3301 and the back rear right movable decorative body 3302 to be decorated with light, when the back rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the back rear right movable decorative body 3302 are in an invisible state, the back By lighting and blinking the luminous decorations of the rear left movable decoration body 3301 and the back rear right movable decoration body 3302 (or the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122 and the back front upper right logo decoration part 3142), a panel with translucency is created. Through the plate 1110A, the player can be made aware of the existence of the rear rear left movable decoration 3301 and the rear rear right movable decoration 3302, and the rear rear left movable decoration 3301 and the rear rear right movable decoration 3302 can be visually recognized. The player can be made nervous and excited depending on whether or not the back left movable decorative body 3301 and the back back right movable decorative body 3302 appear or not, and the player is further entertained. It is possible to perform movable performances that are possible.

In addition, since the panel board 1110A of the game panel 1100 in which the game area 5a is provided in the front is made transparent and opaque, when the player looks inside the game area 5a, the front side of the panel board 1110A is transparent. Since it becomes easier to focus, just by looking at the panel board 1110A, the game ball B flowing within the game area 5a will naturally come into focus. At this time, as described above, the panel board 1110A becomes self-illuminating due to light from the outside or the light from the emitting LED 1130a, etc., so that the panel board 1110A becomes self-lit. Since the game ball B that is present can be made to look like a silhouette by the light from the rear panel board 1110A, the game ball B that is circulating within the game area 5a can be easily recognized, and the movement of the game ball B can be easily recognized. To provide a pachinko machine 1 which can suppress a decline in interest by making players enjoy the game, and which can make it easy to make subtle adjustments to the driving force of a game ball B, and which improves the driving operation of a game ball B. You can enjoy playing games on the main unit.

Furthermore, since the panel board 1110A of the game panel 1100 is made of a translucent, opaque, milky white material (synthetic resin), lower grade synthetic resin is used compared to a case where the panel board is transparent. Therefore, the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

Furthermore, since the panel board 1110A is made of an opaque milky white color with translucency, the color of the decoration provided on the pachinko machine 1 is made relatively conspicuous, and the decorative effect of the decoration is strongly exhibited. It is possible to provide a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract the attention of players, and also to improve the LED 1130a of the panel decoration board 1130 and the decorations provided at the rear of the game panel 1100. When the body or the like is decorated with light emission, the light emission color can be transmitted forward as it is, and the player can enjoy a colorful light emission performance.

In addition, since the panel board 1110A is translucent, opaque, and milky white, the decorations provided at the rear of the game panel 1100 (for example, the back front left decoration unit 3120) etc. can be viewed from the front (player side). It can be made invisible. When the decorative body provided at the rear of the game panel 1100 is decorated with light, the light from the decorative body is transmitted forward through the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110A) having translucency. It is possible to partially decorate with light emission, and also to make the player aware of the existence of the decoration provided at the rear. Furthermore, when the decoration provided at the rear of the game panel 1100 is moved to a position behind the opening 1112 penetrating the panel board 1110A, the decoration becomes visible from the front through the opening 1112. This allows the player to see a movable effect in which decorations hide and appear. In this way, a variety of light emitting effects and movable effects can be presented to the players, making it difficult for the players to get bored and suppressing a drop in interest.

Furthermore, the translucent, opaque, milky-white panel board 1110A can diffuse the light from the LEDs 1130a, etc. of the panel decoration board 1130, so that the game panel 1100 can be decorated with light and soft light with a fluffy feel. This makes it possible to brighten the inside of the game area 5a with a feeling similar to indirect lighting, and also to suppress the glare caused by the LED 1130a, thereby providing a pachinko machine 1 that is easy on the eyes of players.

In addition, since the panel board 1110A of the game panel 1100 can be decorated with light by the LEDs 1130a of the panel decoration board 1130, for example, the LEDs 1130a can be provided on the left and right sides of the panel board 1110A, and each can be made to emit light independently. When the right side of the game area 5a is illuminated according to the game situation (progress), the right side of the game area 5a becomes brighter through the panel board 1110A. It is possible to prompt the player to hit the game ball B toward the right side of the game area 5a ("hit to the right"). On the other hand, when the left side is illuminated, the left side of the gaming area 5a becomes brighter through the panel board 1110A, so that the player's attention can be directed to the left side of the gaming area 5a. It is possible to prompt the player to hit the game ball B (“hit left”). In this way, by emitting light from the LEDs 1130a at appropriate positions, it is possible to intuitively understand that the light-emitting decoration of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110A) advises "hitting left-handed" or "hitting right-handed." This allows the player to enjoy the driving operation of the game ball B, and also allows the player to enjoy the new sense of light-emitting performance not found in the conventional pachinko machine 1.

In addition, the game panel 1100 is configured by a plate-shaped panel board 1110A (panel board 1110) and a panel holder 1120 that holds the outer periphery of the panel board 1110A in a frame shape that is thicker than the panel board 1110A. Therefore, if the thickness of the panel holder 1120 is the same as the thickness of the game panel of a conventional pachinko machine, the thickness of the panel board 1110A (panel board 1110) where the game area 5a is provided in the front will be made thicker than that of the conventional game panel. Since the amount of material used for the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110, panel board 1110A) is reduced, the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

Moreover, since the game panel 1100 is composed of the panel board 1110 or the panel board 1110A and the panel holder 1120, the panel board 1110A and the panel holder 1120 can be attached and detached, and the panel holder 1120 can be used as a common general-purpose component. becomes. As a result, the cost of the panel holder 1120 can be reduced by mass-producing the panel holder 1120, and by manufacturing the panel plate 1110 or panel plate 1110A compatible with each model, it is possible to make new or etc. costs can be reduced.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, by locking the elastic claw 1062 to the magnetic sensor 1050 while the magnetic sensor 1050 is accommodated in the accommodating portion 1061 having the elastic claw 1062 of the holding member 1060, The magnetic sensor 1050 can be provided on the game board 5 via the holding member 1060. Furthermore, when the magnetic sensor 1050 is housed in a holding container 1072 having an elastic claw 1072a, by locking the elastic claw 1072a to the locking portion 1071a of the holding member 1071, A magnetic sensor 1050 can be provided on the game board 5. At this time, since the holding member 1060, the holding member 1071, and the holding container 1072 are made of non-magnetic materials, when the magnet 1055 is brought close to the gaming area 5a, the holding member 1060 and the like attract lines of magnetic force from the magnet 1055. It is possible to avoid the magnetic sensor 1050 from being put away, and it is possible to prevent the number of lines of magnetic force passing through the magnetic sensor 1050 from decreasing. Therefore, it is possible to easily detect the magnetism acting on the gaming area 5a, and fraud using the magnet 1055 can be detected at an early stage. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can deter illegal acts and has a high deterrent effect against fraudulent acts.

Furthermore, as described above, the holding member 1060, the holding member 1071, and the holding container 1072 made of non-magnetic material avoid attracting the magnetic lines of force from the magnet 1055, thereby preventing the decrease in the lines of magnetic force passing through the magnetic sensor 1050. Therefore, it is possible to effectively detect the magnetism acting on the gaming area 5a with a smaller number of magnetic sensors 1050 than in a conventional pachinko machine, and the number of magnetic sensors 1050 can be reduced compared to the conventional pachinko machine. An increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

Furthermore, by elastically deforming the elastic claws 1062 of the accommodating portion 1061 and the elastic claws 1072a of the holding container 1072, the magnetic sensor 1050 can be easily attached to and detached from the locking portions 1071a of the holding member 1060 and the holding member 1071. Therefore, unlike conventional pachinko machines, the magnetic sensor 1050 can be attached using the elastic claws 1062 and 1072a without using metal screws made of magnetic material, and it is easy to assemble the pachinko machine 1. This effort can be simplified, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

Furthermore, the holding member 1071 is provided with a plurality of locking portions 1071a in advance, and by locking the elastic claws 1072a of the holding container 1072 containing the magnetic sensor 1050 to the locking portions 1071a at appropriate positions, the magnetic sensor 1050 can be placed in any position and its position can be easily changed. Therefore, since the position of the magnetic sensor 1050 can be easily changed or expanded, a pachinko machine 1 is provided that can easily accommodate design changes and model changes while suppressing an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1. be able to.

Further, since the magnetic sensor 1050 is urged into the housing part 1061 by the protrusion 1063 on the holding member 1060, it is possible to suppress fine vibrations of the magnetic sensor 1050 due to the urging by the protrusion 1063. This can reduce disconnection of the connector connected to the magnetic sensor 1050 or occurrence of poor contact, and the magnetic sensor 1050 can be operated reliably.

Furthermore, since the magnetic sensor 1050 is held visibly by the holding member 1060, the holding member 1071, and the holding container 1072, and the sensor case 1053 of the magnetic sensor 1050 is transparent, the sensor substrate 1052 is attached to the sensor board 1052 through the transparent sensor case 1053. The mounted sensor body 1051 can be shown to the player. At this time, since the surface of the sensor substrate 1052 on which the sensor body 1051 is mounted is white, the sensor body 1051 having a different color (for example, black) can stand out. Therefore, it is possible to make the player strongly aware that the magnetic sensor 1050 is not a dummy but a real one, and by making the magnetic sensor 1050 visible, it is possible to make the player aware of the fact that the magnetic sensor 1050 is not a dummy. It is possible to deter people from committing acts, and it is also possible to increase deterrence against fraudulent acts, and it is possible to reduce the burden on the gaming hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, even if the sensor main body 1051 is visible through the transparent sensor case 1053, an ordinary player does not pay much attention to the presence of the magnetic sensor 1050, so it does not bother him. On the other hand, since a person who intends to commit a fraudulent act gazes at the inside of the gaming area 5a, the contrast between the white sensor board 1052 and the black sensor main body 1051 makes the magnetic sensor 1050 easy to see. I can see it. Therefore, by noticing the presence of the magnetic sensor 1050, it is possible to deter players from committing fraudulent acts using magnets, and it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 with a high deterrent effect.

Furthermore, in the magnetic sensor 1050, since the surface of the sensor board 1052 on which the sensor body 1051 is mounted is white, the sensor board 1052 can be made less noticeable, and the sensor board 1052 can be used as a decorative board on which an LED is mounted. It can be misunderstood. Therefore, even if the sensor board 1052 of the magnetic sensor 1050 is visible, it will not bother a normal player, and it is possible to avoid deteriorating the appearance of the gaming area 5a.

Furthermore, since the sensor body 1051 of the magnetic sensor 1050 can be seen from the outside, it is possible to check from the outside whether or not the sensor body 1051 is damaged, thereby making maintenance of the pachinko machine 1 easier. This makes it possible to reduce the burden on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

In addition, since the magnetic sensor 1050 is provided on the game board 5 via the holding member 1060 made of a non-magnetic material, the holding member 1071, the holding container 1072, etc., the holding member 1060 and the holding member 1071 are attached to the game board 5. When attaching using a magnetic material such as a screw, the portion of the holding member 1060 or the holding member 1071 to be attached to the game board 5 may be placed at a position away from the magnetic sensor 1050 or in the gaming area 5a. It becomes possible to provide it at a position outside the magnetic detection range. As a result, the influence of magnetic materials such as screws can be reduced as much as possible, so that the magnetic sensor 1050 can reliably detect the magnetism acting on the gaming area 5a, and prevent fraudulent activities using the magnet 1055. A pachinko machine 1 with high deterrence can be provided.

Furthermore, the characteristic effects of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be explained. Here, the decoration body 1804, the decoration body 1805, the decoration body 1806, the decoration body 1807L, the decoration body 1807R, the decoration body 1808, the decoration body 1809, and the gate seal 2811 in this embodiment are used as the decoration body, and the glue surface 1804b in this embodiment is The first member 1823, first member 1824, first member 1825, first member left 1826L, first member right 1826R, first member 1827, first member 1828, and gate main body 2810 in this embodiment are on the glue surface. In the pedestal member, the flat plate part 1823a, flat plate part 1824a, flat plate part 1825a, flat plate part 1826a, flat plate part 1827a, flat plate part 1828a, and front plate part 2810a in this embodiment correspond to the flat plate part, respectively. Further, the mounting recess 1823b, the mounting recess 1824b, the mounting recess 1825b, the mounting recess 1826b, the mounting recess 1827b, the attachment recess 1828b, and the pasting recess 2810b in this embodiment are the mounting recess, and the separation hole 1823c, the separation hole 1827c in this embodiment, The separation hole 1828c and the separation hole 2810d are the separation holes, and the erroneous pasting prevention part 1823e, the erroneous pasting prevention part 1824c, the erroneous pasting prevention part 1825c, the erroneous pasting prevention part 1826c, the erroneous pasting prevention part 1827d, and the erroneous pasting prevention part in this embodiment. The erroneous pasting prevention section 1828d and the erroneous pasting prevention section 2810c respectively correspond to the erroneous pasting prevention section. Further, in this embodiment, the contact surface of the first member 1823, the contact surface of the first member 1824, the contact surface of the first member 1825, the contact surface of the left decoration 1807L and the right decoration 1807R, and the contact surface of the first member 1827. , the abutment surface of the first member 1828, and the abutment surface of the gate main body 2810 correspond to the positioning section. From here to paragraph [1910], the decorative body is the decorative body 1804, the pedestal member is the first member 1823, the flat plate part is the flat plate part 1823a, the mounting recess is the mounting recess 1823b, the separation hole is the separation hole 1823c, and the incorrect pasting is prevented. They will be described as representative parts, such as the erroneous pasting prevention part 1823e and the positioning part as the contact surface of the first member 1823 (erroneous pasting prevention part 1823e), and other configurations (members) corresponding to the present invention will be described. Since the same functions and effects are obtained, the explanation thereof will be omitted here.

According to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, a part of the peripheral wall of the mounting recess 1823b to which the decoration 1804 is pasted is used as the abutment surface (erroneous pasting prevention part 1823e) of the first member 1823. Therefore, when attaching the decorative body 1804 to the mounting recess 1823b of the flat plate portion 1823a of the first member 1823, the two adjacent sides of the decorative body 1804 are attached to the first member 1823 on the peripheral wall of the mounting recess 1823b. The decorative body 1804 can be positioned with respect to the first member 1823 by contacting and aligning the position with the area defined as the surface (erroneous pasting prevention part 1823e), and the positioning work of the decorative body 1804 is completed. This makes it possible to easily attach the decorative body 1804 to the correct position. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the decorative body 1804 is pasted in a tilted or misaligned state with respect to the first member 1823 due to the abutment surface (erroneous pasting prevention portion 1823e) of the first member 1823. Also, since it is possible to prevent the first member 1823 from becoming unsightly, the decorative effect of the decoration body 1804 can be reliably exhibited, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved to prevent players from losing interest. It can be suppressed.

In addition, since the decoration 1804 can be accurately pasted at the correct position by the abutment surface (misapplication prevention part 1823e) of the first member 1823, the decoration 1804 can be easily pasted at the correct position, and the decoration It is possible to reduce failures in attaching the body 1804 and suppress an increase in the cost of the Pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, since the decorative body 1804 has an asymmetrical shape, it is difficult to mistake the orientation of the decorative body 1804, and the decorative body 1804 can be attached to the flat plate portion 1823a of the first member 1823 in the correct direction. The decorative effect of 1804 can be reliably exhibited.

In addition, since the erroneous pasting prevention part 1823e protruding from the peripheral wall of the mounting recess 1823b in the first member 1823 is provided, if the decoration 1804 is pasted in an incorrect direction, the decoration will be damaged at the part of the erroneous pasting prevention part 1823e. Since the body 1804 is rolled up, it is possible to recognize that the decorative body 1804 has been pasted in the wrong direction, and the decorative body 1804 can be pasted in the correct direction to ensure the decorative effect of the decorative body 1804. can be demonstrated.

In addition, since a separation hole 1823c passing through the flat plate portion 1823a is provided in the mounting recess 1823b to which the decorative body 1804 of the first member 1823 is attached, a rod-shaped member is inserted into the separation hole 1823c from the back side of the first member 1823. When the back side of the decorative body 1804 is pressed with the tip, a part of the decorative body 1804 is lifted up from the flat plate portion 1823a of the first member 1823 to the front side against the adhesive force of the glue surface 1804b, and the decorative body 1804 is By pulling this part, it can be removed from the flat plate part 1823a, and the decorative body 1804 can be easily peeled off.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the decorative body 1804 having a predetermined decoration is pasted on the mounting recess 1823b of the flat plate portion 1823a of the first member 1823, the decorative body 1804 has a predetermined decoration. The appearance of the first member 1823 can be improved, and the decoration body 1804 can be supported by the first member 1823. Furthermore, since the attachment recess 1823b to which the decoration 1804 is attached is recessed from the surface of the flat plate part 1823a, when the decoration 1804 is attached to the attachment recess 1823b, the attachment recess in the flat plate part 1823a of the first member 1823 Since the surrounding area of 1823b surrounds the decorative body 1804, the decorative body 1804 can be highlighted by being bordered by the area, and the decorative effect of the decoration of the decorative body 1804 can be easily exhibited. Thus, the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

In addition, the glue surface 1804b of the decorative body 1804 attached to the mounting recess 1823b of the flat plate portion 1823a consists of a band frame-shaped portion on the periphery of the decorative body 1804 and a band-shaped portion diagonally crossing the band frame-shaped portion. Since it is provided only in a specific area and not on the entire back surface, the adhesion strength is weaker than in the past. Therefore, when a rod-shaped member is inserted into the separation hole 1823c from the back side of the first member 1823 and the tip of the rod-shaped member is pressed against the back surface of the decorative body 1804, even a relatively weak force can resist the adhesive force of the adhesive surface 1804b and the first member The decorative body 1804 can be removed from the flat plate portion 1823a of the decorative body 1823, and even if the decorative body 1804 itself is weak, it can be removed without tearing the decorative body 1804 in the middle, which improves the workability of removing the decorative body 1804. can be improved.

Also, from the above, if the decorative body 1804 cannot be correctly attached to the flat plate part 1823a of the first member 1823 during manufacturing of the pachinko machine 1, it can be separated from the back side of the first member 1823. By passing a rod-shaped member through the hole 1823c and pressing the decoration 1804 from the back side with the tip thereof, the decoration 1804 can be easily removed from the flat plate portion 1823a, so that the decoration 1804 can be easily reattached. . In addition, when the first member 1823 is removed from the pachinko machine 1, a rod-like member is passed through the separation hole 1823c from the back side of the first member 1823, and the decoration body 1804 is pressed from the back side with the tip of the rod-like member. Since the decorative body 1804 can be easily removed from the flat plate portion 1823a, it is possible to easily replace the decorative body 1804 when changing the model. Furthermore, as described above, since the decoration body 1804 can be easily removed from the flat plate part 1823a using the separation hole 1823c, it is easy to separate the components of the pachinko machine 1 by material. Therefore, the cost of disposing of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

Furthermore, since the separation hole 1823c of the first member 1823 is provided at a position that does not contact the glue surface 1804b of the decorative body 1804, the entire surface of the glue surface 1804b can be attached to the flat plate portion 1823a of the first member 1823. Therefore, by providing the adhesive surface 1804b only on a part (specific part) of the decorative body 1804, the attachment strength will be lower than in the past, but since the entire adhesive surface 1804b is attached to the flat plate part 1823a, It is possible to avoid unnecessarily lowering the adhesion strength due to the separation holes 1823c on the glue surface 1804b, and the adhesion strength of the decorative body 1804 can be maintained sufficiently and adhered to the flat plate part 1823a in good condition. Can be attached.

In addition, since the glue surface 1804b of the decorative body 1804 is provided on the band frame-shaped portion on the periphery and the band-shaped portion diagonally across (the diagonal portion), the decorative body Since the peripheral edge of the decorative body 1804 can be attached to the flat plate portion 1823a, the peripheral edge of the decorative body 1804 can be prevented from rising from the flat plate portion 1823a, and the decorative body 1804 can be made difficult to peel off from the peripheral edge. In addition, since the part near the center of the decorative body 1804 can be pasted to the flat plate part 1823a by the band-shaped part diagonally crossing the adhesive surface 1804b, the first member Even if the shrinkage difference between the decorative body 1823 and the decorative body 1804 becomes large, swelling and wrinkles of the decorative body 1804 can be reduced, and deterioration of the appearance of the decorative body 1804 can be prevented. Therefore, the decorative effect of the decorative body 1804 can be reliably exhibited, and the larger decorative body 1804 can be attached to the flat plate part 1823a in good condition, which can strongly attract the attention of the players. A highly appealing pachinko machine 1 can be provided.

Furthermore, since the adhesive surface 1804b is provided on the periphery of the decorative body 1804, the decorative body 1804 and the first member 1823 are made to have translucency, and the adhesive surface 1804b is provided on the back side of the first member 1823 toward the decorative body 1804 side. When a light source such as an LED that emits light is provided, the frame-shaped glue surface 1804b is located at a location where it does not obstruct the light from the light source, and the light is diffused and attenuated by the glue surface 1804b, thereby enhancing decoration. Since it is possible to reduce deterioration in the appearance of the luminescent decoration of the body 1804, the decorative body 1804 can be decorated with luminescent light in a good condition, and the light source can be seen in a good condition through the decorative body 1804 and the first member 1823. Thus, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 with high production effects and display effects.

Furthermore, since the separation hole 1823c is provided in the mounting recess 1823b of the flat plate portion 1823a of the first member 1823, the separation hole 1823c can be made difficult to see or hidden from the front side by pasting the decoration 1804 on the mounting recess 1823b. This makes it possible to suppress deterioration in appearance due to the separation hole 1823c, and to make it difficult for players to notice the existence of the separation hole 1823c, making it difficult for players to plan fraudulent acts using the separation hole 1823c. be able to.

Furthermore, since the separation hole 1823c is provided in a portion close to the periphery of the decorative body 1804, a rod-shaped member is inserted into the separation hole 1823c from the back side of the first member 1823 to press the back surface of the decorative body 1804. Then, since the part of the decorative body 1804 that is pressed by the rod-shaped member is close to the periphery of the decorative body 1804, the edge side tends to float away from the part that the rod-shaped member is in contact with, and the attached decorative body 1804 can be more easily removed.

Furthermore, since the separation hole 1823c is provided in a portion close to the periphery of the decorative body 1804, when the decorative body 1804 is pressed from the back side of the first member 1823 with a rod-like member through the separation hole 1823c, the decorative body 1804 is pressed as described above. In addition, since the edge side of the decorative body 1804 from the portion in contact with the rod-like member will be lifted from the flat plate portion 1823a, by grasping and pulling the raised portion of the decorative body 1804, the decorative body 1804 can be lifted from the flat plate portion 1823a. It can be easily removed by rolling it up.

In addition, since the separation hole 1823c is set to a size that allows a circle with a diameter of 2 mm to 6 mm to come into contact with it, in addition to the same effect as described above, an upper limit on the size of the separation hole 1823c is set. Therefore, the existence of the separation hole 1823c can prevent the size of the adhesive surface of the decoration body 1804 from becoming smaller than necessary, and the desired adhesion strength to the flat plate part 1823a can be maintained.

Furthermore, as described above, since the mounting recess 1823b to which the decorative body 1804 is pasted is recessed from the flat plate portion 1823a, the decorative body 1804 is pasted using the border between the flat plate portion 1823a and the mounting recess 1823b as a guide. By attaching the decorative body 1804 to the correct position, it is possible to make it easier to paste the decorative body 1804 in the correct position, to reduce failures in pasting the decorative body 1804, and to suppress an increase in the cost of the Pachinko machine 1.

In addition, since the decorative body 1804 is attached to the mounting recess 1823b recessed from the flat plate part, in order to remove the decorative body 1804 from the front side, it is possible to insert a flathead screwdriver between the decorative body 1804 and the bottom of the mounting recess 1823b. Even if an attempt is made to insert a tool, the peripheral wall of the recessed mounting recess 1823b will prevent the tool from being inserted. Since the separation hole 1823c is provided in the mounting recess 1823b to which the decorative body 1804 is attached, as described above, the rod-shaped member is inserted into the separation hole 1823c from the back side to attach the decorative body 1804. By pressing toward the front side, the decorative body 1804 can be easily removed from the recessed mounting recess 1823b, and the same effect as described above can be achieved.

Furthermore, in conventional technology (pachinko machines), the hole for peeling off the seal penetrates to the rear of the pachinko machine (gaming board), so a linear tool such as a piano wire cannot be passed through the hole. This makes it possible for the game ball B to reach the path, signal line, etc., and there is a problem in that fraudulent acts are more likely to occur. Therefore, it is desirable to provide a second member (see second member 1841, second member 1842, etc. in FIG. 181) capable of closing the separation hole 1823c on the back side of the first member 1823. As a result, when assembled into the pachinko machine 1, the second member closes the back side of the separation hole 1823c from the outside, so that the hole that passes through to the opposite side of the game board as in a conventional pachinko machine is Since the hole is not penetrated through the hole, it is possible to avoid inserting a wire-shaped illegal tool such as a piano wire into the game board 5 through the hole, and it is possible to prevent illegal acts from being performed.

Furthermore, when a second member (see second member 1841, second member 1842, etc. in FIG. 181) for closing the separation hole 1823c is provided on the back side of the first member 1823 as described above, an unauthorized tool can be inserted from the front side. Even if it is inserted into the separation hole 1823c through the decorative body 1804, the tip of the unauthorized tool will come into contact with the second member, thereby blocking the insertion (intrusion) of the second member to the outside (inside the game board 5). Therefore, it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game board 5 from the front side through the separation hole 1823c, thereby preventing unauthorized acts from being carried out, and preventing unauthorized tools from entering the decoration body 1804. By penetrating the decoration body 1804, a trace is left, which can deter people from committing fraudulent acts, and it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that has a high deterrent effect against fraudulent acts.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements can be made without departing from the gist of the present invention, as shown below. and design changes are possible.

In other words, in the above embodiment, the gaming machine is applied to the pachinko machine 1 or the slot machine, but the invention is not limited to this, and the game machine may be a pachislot machine or a game that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. The present invention may also be applied to other machines, and even in this case, the same effects as described above can be achieved. Furthermore, it can be applied to so-called enclosed game machines in which the player does not touch the game balls B, and to game machines called managed game machines.

In the above embodiment, separation holes (separation hole 1023, separation hole 1822c, separation hole 2531b, separation hole 2810d, separation hole 1823c, separation hole 1827c, separation hole 1828c, etc. ) is shown in the form of a penetrating hole, but it is not limited to this, and may be in the form of a slit or notch.

1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Main frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 700 Board unit 701 First ball path (discharge path, discharge path)
702 Second bulb path (discharge passage, discharge route)
703 First ball sensor (detection sensor)
704 Second ball sensor (detection sensor)
710 Base unit (passage member)
711 Front base (passage member)
711a Ball socket 711b Elimination port (tool insertion port)
712 Rear base (passage member)
712a First discharge guide part 712b Second discharge guide part 713 Ball path member (passage member)
713a Left wall section 713b Upper left shelf section (shelf section)
713c Step wall part 713d Upper right shelf part (shelf part)
713e Rectification wall part 713f Lower shelf part (shelf part)
713g Right wall portion 713h Upper wall portion 713i Groove wall portion 713j Upper lower wall portion 713k Middle wall portion 713l Eave portion 713m Hanging wall portion 713n Lower wall portion 713o Inhibition rib (security rib)
713p Partition wall part 713q Notch part (garbage drop port, tool insertion port)
713r Guide protrusion 713s Front of sensor accommodating part 713t Rear of sensor accommodating part 713u First ball guiding part 714 Security cover (lid member)
714a Elastic locking part

Claims (1)

In a game machine equipped with a game board having a downstream area formed in the front surface through which game balls can flow down,
a front arrangement body provided on the front side of the game board;
a sealing body that can be attached to the front arrangement body ,
The front arrangement body is
a flat plate portion to which the seal body is attached to the surface side;
a through hole formed to penetrate from the front side to the back side of the flat plate part;
a standing wall portion protruding to the rear of the flat plate portion;
When the front arrangement body is provided on the game board, the opening portion of the through hole on the surface side of the flat plate portion is closed by the sealing body adhered to the flat plate portion, and the opening portion of the through hole on the surface side of the flat plate portion is closed. A predetermined space is formed by the standing wall on the back side of the flat plate part , and even if a foreign object is inserted into the predetermined space from the through hole, the standing wall forming the predetermined space will prevent the foreign object from entering the through hole. It is said that it is difficult for the inserted foreign object to enter the downstream area ,
Furthermore, the gaming machine has a specific member that is separate from the front-disposed body,
The specific member is located at the rear of the flat plate portion so as to overlap with the opening portion of the through hole on the back side of the flat plate portion,
Furthermore, the predetermined space formed in the front arrangement body is provided outside the downstream area of the game board,
Furthermore, a step portion larger than the thickness of the seal body is formed on the outside of the flat plate portion to which the seal body is attached.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images